0% found this document useful (0 votes)

417 views918 pages

XG-X Series: Communications Control Manual

Uploaded by

Jesus R. Bernal Salazar

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

417 views918 pages

XG-X Series: Communications Control Manual

Uploaded by

Jesus R. Bernal Salazar

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 918

17173US

Customizable Vision System

XG-X Series

Communications
Control Manual
Read this manual before use.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Introduction

Introduction

The XG-X Series uses a 2-way approach (either on the controller or on a PC) to build inspection
programs. The controller can be used to carry out adjustments in the field, add vision units and perform
product changeovers. A PC can be used to establish inspection methods and build new programs with
original operation menus and other essential GUI elements. The available PC programs are the XG-X
VisionEditor development environment and the XG-X VisionTerminal log data collection program.

Notations used in this manual

Symbols
The following warning symbols are used to ensure safety and to prevent human injury and/or damage to
property when using the system.

DANGER Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
CAUTION injury.

Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as
NOTICE property damage.

Important Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.

Point Indicates additional information on proper operation.

Reference Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

Trademarks
• Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• "SD Memory Card" is a registered trademark of the SD Association.
• EtherCAT® is a patented technology licensed from Beckhoff Automation GmbH of Germany and is a
registered trademark.
• Beckhoff®, TwinCAT® are registered trademarks of and licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH.
• Other company names and product names noted in this document are registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective companies. The ™ mark and ® mark have been omitted in this manual.

2 XG-X Comm-US
Introduction

This manual and related manuals

This manual explains setting procedures, related information, and various data lists used for
communication controls of the XG-X Series (hereinafter, "the controller"). Read this manual thoroughly in
order to understand how the controller works and to maximize the performance of the controller.
Always keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Please ensure that the manual is passed to the end user of the software.
Initial installation

XG-X Series System Connection/Preparation for Initial Installation/Information of Product Specifications

Camera External XG-X Series

device Setup Manual
Controller

Inspection program development/Support functions for Inspection program development

Inspection program development

Program development and XG-X VisionEditor

controller setting using
XG-X VisionEditor.
Reference Manual

XG-X VisionEditor Controller

Program development and XG-X Series

controller setting using the
User's Manual
built-in GUI interface on the
controller.

Controller

Creating GUI/Various tools and simulation

Support tool for operation

Operation methods of XG-X VisionEditor

tools by XG-X VisionEditor
Reference Manual

XG-X VisionEditor Controller

Operation methods of XG-X Series

tools by functions built
into the controller
User's Manual

Controller
Communication control/external monitoring

Communication and control with external equipment XG-X Series

External terminals
PLC-Link Communications
CC-Link
EtherNet/IPTM Control Manual (this manual)
External
PROFINET device XG-X ActiveX Control
ActiveX EtherCAT
control Controller FTP Reference Manual
No protocol communication

Remote monitoring and data/image collection.

XG-X VisionTerminal
User's Manual

XG-X VisionTerminal Controller

17173US XG-X Comm-US 3

Safety information for XG-X Series

Safety Precautions

• Do not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body.
• This product is not intended for use as explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in
a hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
DANGER • Do not use this product in an application that may cause death, serious injury or serious
property damage due to a failure with this product should occur, such as nuclear power
plants, on aircraft, trains, ships, or vehicles, used within medical equipment, playground
equipment, roller coasters and other rides, etc.

• If the product is used in a manner not specified by this manual, the protection provided by
the product may be impaired.
• You must perform a sufficient risk assessment and confirm that risks have been reduced
WARNING for the machine where this product is to be installed prior to installing this product.
Provide appropriate protective failsafe measures on the machine independent from this
product to ensure this machine operates safely in case a failure with this product should
occur.

You must verify that this product is operating correctly in terms of functionality and
CAUTION performance before the start and the operation of this product.

• If the system is operated beyond its published specifications or if the system is modified,
its functions and performance cannot be guaranteed.
• When this product is used in combination with other instruments, functions and
NOTICE performance may be degraded, depending on the operating conditions and surrounding
environment.
• Do not subject the controller or connected devices to a sudden change in temperature.
There is the risk of condensation occurring.

General cautions for the controller

• Do not use with any power voltage other than 24 VDC. Doing so may cause fire, electric
WARNING shock, or product malfunction.
• Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Doing so may cause fire or electric shock.

Operating environment and conditions

To use the system properly and safely, avoid installing this unit in the following locations.
Doing so may cause fire, electric shock, or product malfunction.
• Locations that contain moisture or dust, or that are poorly ventilated.
• Locations where the system is exposed to direct sunlight or temperature increases.
CAUTION
• Locations where there are flammable or corrosive gases.
• Locations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact.
• Locations where water, oil or chemicals may splash onto the unit.
• Locations where static electricity is present or electric discharge may occur.

• Keep this unit and cables away from high-tension cables and power lines. Otherwise, noise
may cause malfunction or accidents.
• Bundle cables with the camera cable protector (OP-88208) or protective material like spiral
NOTICE tubing. Direct bundling will concentrate the cable load on the bindings, which can result in
cable damage or a short circuit.
• The controller and optional devices are precision components. To maintain performance,
do not subject them to vibration or shock.

4 XG-X Comm-US
Safety information for XG-X Series

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the unit in an abnormal
condition may cause fire, electric shock, or product malfunction. Contact your local Keyence
office for repair.
CAUTION
• If water or debris enters the system
• If the system is dropped or the case is damaged
• If smoke or a burning smell emits from the controller

Usage

• Before making any connections/disconnections, be sure to turn off the power of this unit
and connected devices. Failure to do so may result in a malfunction of the controller and
connected devices.
• Do not turn the power off while you are programming. Otherwise, all or part of the program
NOTICE settings may be lost.
• Do not block the ventilation holes. Otherwise, the inside temperature may rise and a
malfunction may occur.
• Do not allow an excessive amount of sunlight or bright indoor light to enter the camera for
a long period of time. Doing so may cause damage to the CCD inside the camera.

Maintenance

• Do not clean with benzene, thinner, or alcohol. Doing so may cause discoloration or
deformation of the unit.
NOTICE • If the unit has any dirt on it, wipe it off with a cloth moistened with a mild detergent, then
wipe with a dry cloth.

XG-X Comm-US 5
Safety information for XG-X Series

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

CE and UKCA Markings

Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the
applicable EU Directive(s) and UK regulations, based on the following specifications.
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the Member States of European Union and in
the United Kingdom.

EMC Directive (CE) and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations (UKCA)

• Applicable standard (BS)EN61326-1, Class A
• This product is intended to be used in an industrial environment.
• Use cables shorter than or equal to 30 m to connect this product and its external devices.
• Be sure to connect the ground terminal to a grounding.
• When connecting a CC-Link unit CA-NCL20E, attach a ferrite core (OP-84364, optional) within 300 mm
on the CA-NCL20E side of the CC-Link dedicated cable.
• When connecting the LJ-V input unit CA-E100LJ/E110LJ/E200LJ, for the head cables, wind the
following ferrite core (furnished accessory of CA-E100LJ/E110LJ/E200LJ) with them to within 200 mm
of the controller’s head connector.
Model: ZCAT2035-0930A-BK (manufactured by TDK Corporation)
Remarks: These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product
incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive and Electromagnetic
Compatibility Regulations. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance
on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations.

FCC Regulations
This product complies with the following regulations specified by the FCC.
• Applicable regulation FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
• This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
• FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

KC mark (Republic of Korea)

사 용 자 안 내 문
이 기기는 업무용 환경에서 사용할 목적으로 적합성평가를 받은 기기로서
가정용 환경에서 사용하 는 경우 전파간섭의 우려가 있습니다.

6 XG-X Comm-US
Software License Agreement

Software License Agreement

NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“THIS AGREEMENT”)
CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE XG-X VisionEditor (“THIS SOFTWARE”), YOU
ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU
DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE.
1. Definitions
1.1 “Use” or “using” refers to the accessing, installing, downloading, copying, operating and or
otherwise benefiting from the utilization of this Software.
1.2 “This Software” denotes the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.
1.3 “User” or “User’s” infers the company or persons who have had the license to use this Software
granted to them by KEYENCE.
2. Grant of License.
2.1 Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE
grants the non-exclusive and non-transferable license to install and use this Software on a single
computer.
2.2 The granting of the license permits the single reproduction of this Software for the User’s backing up
or archiving purposes only.
3. Restrictions.
3.1. This Software may not be modified by the User in any form except from the installation of updates or
new functions provided by KEYENCE.
3.2. The reverse engineering, decompiling or disassembling of this Software by any persons are not
permitted.
3.3. Derivative works based on this Software may not be created.
3.4. Without the prior permission of KEYENCE, the User may not resell, transfer, redistribute, license, rent
or lease this Software to any third party.
4. Intellectual Property Rights.
Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all rights, titles and interests in this Software, along
with all associated copyrights, trademarks, and other intellectual property rights therein.
5. Disclaimer.
This Software is licensed to the User “AS IS” and without any warranty of any kind. In no event does
KEYENCE or its suppliers accept or assume any liability for any damages, claims, costs or profit loss as
a result of using this Software.
6. Support.
KEYENCE provides technical support with regard to questions that the User has related to this Software
based on this Agreement. However, this is not a guarantee that the User will achieve his goal through
KEYENCE’s technical support.
7. Termination.
7.1 Under this Agreement, the User’s license will automatically terminate if this Software and any
associated copies of this Software are destroyed or voluntarily returned to KEYENCE.
7.2 Under this Agreement, the User’s license will terminate immediately and automatically without any
notice from KEYENCE if there is any failure to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Promptly upon termination, the using of this Software shall cease, and all copies (full or
partial) of this Software should be destroyed or returned to KEYENCE.
7.3 Compensation will be sought by KEYENCE should any violation or breach of any term of this
Agreement result in any incurred costs or lost profit to KEYENCE.
8. Disagreement with This Agreement.
If you are unable to agree to all the terms and conditions of this Agreement, please contact KEYENCE
within 1 month of purchase. The purchase price that was already paid may be refunded when this
Software is returned unused along with the invoice issued by KEYENCE.
9. Governing Law.
9.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of Japan
without regards to the principles of conflicts of law.
9.2 If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, the rest of this Agreement will remain
intact, valid and enforceable according to its terms and conditions.

XG-X Comm-US 7
Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Introduction ........................................................2 Controlling the System via External Terminals

Notations used in this manual .......................2 (Command Control) ................................ 1-25
This manual and related manuals .................3 Typical Command Processing Flow to
Safety information for XG-X Series .....................4 Execute a Custom Instruction via
Safety Precautions ........................................4 the External Terminals. ...................... 1-25
Precautions on Regulations and Changing the Settings of System Variables
Standards ................................................6 Required for Command Control ......... 1-27
Software License Agreement .............................7 Outputting the Measurement Data via
Table of Contents ...............................................8 External Terminals (Result Output) ......... 1-28
Changing the Settings of System Variables
Required for Data Output .................. 1-28
Chapter 1 Operation
Specifying the Data that You Want to Output
Overview of System Control/Data Output ....... 1-2 and the Output Method ...................... 1-30
System Control/Data Output .......................... 1-2 Timing Chart ................................................. 1-31
Control Methods/Protocols available with 1. Operations at Startup .......................... 1-31
this System .......................................... 1-3 2. Typical Operations for External Trigger
Setting the System Control/Data Output ........ 1-4 Input ................................................... 1-33
Selecting an Interface ............................... 1-4 3. Typical Operations of the Data Output
Changing the Protocol and Communication Terminals ........................................... 1-60
Mode Settings ...................................... 1-4 4. Typical Operations of the Major Control
Changing the Data Output Settings of Input/Output Terminals ...................... 1-63
the Controller ....................................... 1-5 5. Typical Operations when a Command is
Executed via the External Terminals .. 1-68
Control/Data Output via External Terminals ... 1-6
Troubleshooting ........................................... 1-69
Overview of Control/Data Output via
Common operational errors that may
External Terminals .................................... 1-6
occur .................................................. 1-69
Operation Flow .......................................... 1-7
Error Messages ....................................... 1-70
Preparing parallel port connections .............. 1-8
Checking the terminal assignment of Control/Data Output via PLC-Link ................. 1-71
the controller ........................................ 1-8 Overview of Control/Data Output via
Connecting ............................................. 1-12 PLC-Link .................................................. 1-71
Verifying the Connection Status using Operation Flow ........................................ 1-72
the I/O Diagnostic .............................. 1-15 Preparing PLC-Link connection ................... 1-73
Changing the Parallel Port Input/Output Via RS-232C interface ............................. 1-73
settings ................................................... 1-17 Via Ethernet interface .............................. 1-75
Displaying the setting screen of Connecting to the PLC-Link/setting
the parallel port .................................. 1-17 the link unit .............................................. 1-76
Parallel port setting items which can be set 1. Wiring overview ................................... 1-76
in this system ..................................... 1-18 2. Wiring for the PLC-Link and setting
Controlling the System via External Terminals the link unit (RS-232C) ....................... 1-76
(Direct Control) ....................................... 1-20 3. Wiring for the PLC-Link and setting
System Variables Used for Direct the link unit (Ethernet) ........................ 1-80
Control ............................................... 1-20 Changing PLC link connection settings ....... 1-82
Changing the Settings of System Variables Displaying PLC link setting screen ......... 1-82
Required for Direct Control ................ 1-23 PLC-Link setting details .......................... 1-83

8 XG-X Comm-US
Table of Contents

Outputting Measurement Data via PLC-Link CC-Link Settings ................................... 1-121

(Data Output) .......................................... 1-87 Outputting Measurement Data via CC-Link
Data Output Flow .................................... 1-87 (Data Output) ........................................ 1-127
Changing the Data Output Unit Data Output Flow .................................. 1-127
Settings .............................................. 1-89 I/O Control via CC-Link .............................. 1-129
Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using I/O Control Operation (Example of Connection
Polling Method (Command Control) ....... 1-90 to PLC CC-Link Unit) ........................ 1-129
Control Using Command No. Address Controlling the System via CC-Link
(By Command No.) ............................ 1-91 (Command Control) .............................. 1-130
Control Using Execute Flags Address Command Processing Flow with CC-Link
(By Execute Flags) ............................ 1-93 (Example of Connection to PLC CC-Link
Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using Unit) ................................................. 1-130
a PLC Terminal (Command Control) ....... 1-95 Changing the Value of a Variable via CC-Link
Control Using Command No. Address (Variable Synchronization) .................... 1-132
(By Command No.) ............................ 1-96 Variable Synchronization Flow with CC-Link
Control Using Execute Flags Address (Example of Connection to PLC CC-Link
(By Execute Flags) ............................ 1-98 Unit) ................................................. 1-132
Typical PLC-Link Setting Procedure .......... 1-100 Typical CC-Link Setting Procedure ............ 1-134
Connecting to the PLC Connecting to the PLC .......................... 1-134
(For the RS-232C interface) ............. 1-100 Outputting Measured/Judgment
Connecting to the PLC Values .............................................. 1-137
(For the Ethernet interface) .............. 1-102 Controlling the Controller ...................... 1-140
Outputting Measured/Judgment Checking the CC-Link Communication Status
Values .............................................. 1-104 (CC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics) .......... 1-143
Controlling the Controller ...................... 1-107 Troubleshooting ......................................... 1-145
Checking the PLC-Link Communication Status If operation is not correct ...................... 1-145
(PLC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics) ......... 1-109 Error Messages ..................................... 1-146
Troubleshooting ......................................... 1-111
Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP ............ 1-148
If operation is not correct ...................... 1-111
Overview of Control/Data Output via
Error Messages ..................................... 1-112
EtherNet/IP ............................................ 1-148
Control/Data Output via CC-Link ................. 1-113 Operation Flow ...................................... 1-149
Overview of the Control/Data Output via Preparing EtherNet/IP connection ............. 1-150
CC-Link ................................................. 1-113 Model compliant with EtherNet/IP
Operation Flow ...................................... 1-114 connection ....................................... 1-150
Preparing the CC-Link connection ............ 1-115 Preparing the EtherNet/IP Connection
Installing the CC-Link Unit .................... 1-115 (When Using the CA-NEP20E) .............. 1-151
CA-NCL20E CC-Link Unit Installing the EtherNet/IP Unit ............... 1-151
Specifications .................................. 1-115 CA-NEP20E EtherNet/IP Unit
Connecting to the CC-Link Network ..... 1-116 Specifications .................................. 1-151
CC-Link Device Specifications and Connecting to an EtherNet/IP
Reserved Address of the Controller ..... 1-117 Network ............................................ 1-152
CC-Link Word Device Specifications .... 1-117 EtherNet/IP communication specifications 1-153
CC-Link Bit Device Specifications ........ 1-118 Standard specifications ........................ 1-153
Changing the CC-Link Settings ................. 1-120 Assignment status of cyclic communication
Displaying CC-Link setting screen ....... 1-120 data .................................................. 1-154

XG-X Comm-US 9
Table of Contents

Changing EtherNet/IP settings .................. 1-158 Controlling the image capture with EtherNet/IP
Displaying EtherNet/IP setting screen .. 1-158 message communication ................. 1-205
EtherNet/IP Settings .............................. 1-160 Sending commands with EtherNet/IP message
Outputting measurement data via EtherNet/IP communication ................................ 1-206
(Data Output) ........................................ 1-166 Retrieving the measurement data with
Data Output Flow .................................. 1-166 the EtherNet/IP message communication
I/O Control via EtherNet/IP ......................... 1-168 (data retrieval) .................................. 1-207
I/O Control Operation (Example of Connection Changing %InDataFieldbus[] value with
to PLC EtherNet/IP Unit) .................. 1-168 EtherNet/IP message communication
Controlling the System via EtherNet/IP (%InDataFieldbus[] rewrite) ............. 1-208
(Command Control) .............................. 1-169
Control/Data Output via PROFINET ............. 1-210
Command Processing Flow with EtherNet/IP
Overview of Control/Data Output Using
(Example of Connection to PLC EtherNet/IP
PROFINET ............................................. 1-210
Unit) ................................................. 1-169
Operation Flow ...................................... 1-211
Changing the Value of a Variable via EtherNet/IP
Preparation for the PROFINET
(Variable Synchronization) .................... 1-171
Connection ............................................ 1-212
Variable Synchronization Flow with EtherNet/IP
PROFINET Connection Supporting
(Example of Connection to PLC EtherNet/IP
Models ............................................. 1-212
Unit) ................................................. 1-171
Preparing the PROFINET Connection
Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure ...... 1-173
(When Using the CA-NPN20E) ............. 1-213
Connecting to the PLC .......................... 1-173
Installing the PROFINET Unit ................ 1-213
Outputting Measured/Judgment
CA-NPN20E PROFINET Unit
Values .............................................. 1-175
Specifications .................................. 1-213
Controlling the Controller ...................... 1-178
Connecting to an PROFINET Network .. 1-214
Connecting with the Keyence KV
PROFINET Communication Specifications of
Series ............................................... 1-180
the Controller ......................................... 1-215
Connecting with the ControlLogix PLC
Basic Specifications .............................. 1-215
from Rockwell Automation, Inc. ....... 1-182
Changing the PROFINET Settings ............. 1-220
Connecting with the SLC5/05 PLC
Opening the PROFINET Setting
from Rockwell Automation, Inc. ....... 1-186
Screen .............................................. 1-220
Checking the EtherNet/IP Communication Status
PROFINET Setting Items Which can be Set
(EtherNet/IP Monitor & Diagnostics) ..... 1-189
with the System ................................ 1-222
Troubleshooting ......................................... 1-191
Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication
If operation is not correct ...................... 1-191
to Output Measurement Data
Error Messages ..................................... 1-192
(Data Output) ........................................ 1-227
Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP
Data Output Flow .................................. 1-227
message communication ...................... 1-193
Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication
Object configuration ............................. 1-193
for I/O Control ........................................ 1-229
ClassID: 4 (04Hex) Assembly Object .. 1-194
Conceptual Diagram of I/O Control
ClassID: 104 (68Hex) Vision System
(Example Connection with the PROFINET
Object .............................................. 1-198
Unit of a PLC) ................................... 1-229
Controlling the system with EtherNet/IP
Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication
message communication ................ 1-204
to Control the Controller
Resetting the controller with EtherNet/IP
(Command Control) .............................. 1-230
message communication ................ 1-205

10 XG-X Comm-US
Table of Contents

Command Processing Flow Using PROFINET Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication
(Example Connection with the PROFINET for I/O Control ........................................ 1-271
Unit of a PLC) .................................. 1-230 Conceptual Diagram of I/O Control
Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication (Example Connection with the EtherCAT
to Change Variable Value Unit of a PLC) ................................... 1-271
(Variable Synchronization) .................... 1-232 Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication
Variable Synchronization Flow Using to Control the Controller
PROFINET (Example Connection with (Command Control) .............................. 1-272
the PROFINET Unit of a PLC) .......... 1-232 Command Processing Flow Using EtherCAT
Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure ....... 1-234 (Example Connection with the EtherCAT
Connecting to the CPU ......................... 1-234 Unit of a PLC) ................................... 1-272
Outputting Measured/Judgment Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication
Values .............................................. 1-237 to Change Variable Value
Controlling the Controller ...................... 1-241 (Variable Synchronization) .................... 1-274
Connecting with the Siemens SIMATIC Variable Synchronization Flow Using EtherCAT
S7-300 Series .................................. 1-244 (Example Connection with the EtherCAT
Checking the PROFINET Communication Status Unit of a PLC) ................................... 1-274
(PROFINET Monitor & Diagnostics) ...... 1-248 Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure ......... 1-276
Troubleshooting ......................................... 1-250 Connecting to the CPU ......................... 1-276
Problems and Countermeasures .......... 1-250 Outputting Measured/Judgment
Error Messages ..................................... 1-251 Values .............................................. 1-278
Controlling the Controller ...................... 1-279
Control/Data Output via EtherCAT .............. 1-252
Using Mailbox Communication ............. 1-282
Overview of Control/Data Output Using
Accessing the Byte Data Area through
EtherCAT ............................................... 1-252
Mailbox Communication .................. 1-283
Operation Flow ...................................... 1-253
Checking the EtherCAT Communication Status
Preparing the EtherCAT connection .......... 1-254
(EtherCAT Monitor & Diagnostics) ........ 1-285
Installing the EtherCAT Unit .................. 1-254
Troubleshooting ......................................... 1-287
CA-NEC20E EtherCAT Unit
Problems and Countermeasures .......... 1-287
Specifications .................................. 1-254
Error Messages ..................................... 1-288
Connecting to an EtherCAT Network .... 1-255
EtherCAT Connection Supporting Control/Data Output via No protocol
Models ............................................. 1-255 communication ......................................... 1-289
EtherCAT communication specifications of Overview of Control/Data Output via
the controller ......................................... 1-256 No protocol communication .................. 1-289
Standard specifications ........................ 1-256 No protocol communication via RS-232C .. 1-290
Process Data Object Map .................... 1-257 Getting Started ...................................... 1-290
Changing the EtherCAT Settings ............... 1-262 Changing the settings ........................... 1-291
Opening the EtherCAT Setting Screen . 1-262 An example of communicating with
EtherCAT Setting Items Which can be Set the controller using terminal software
with the System ................................ 1-264 and no protocol mode ..................... 1-293
Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication Verifying the Status of RS-232C
to Output Measurement Data Communication ................................ 1-294
(Data Output) ........................................ 1-269 No protocol communication via Ethernet ... 1-295
Data Output Flow .................................. 1-269 Getting Started ...................................... 1-295
Changing the settings ........................... 1-295

XG-X Comm-US 11
Table of Contents

One-to-one connection with a PC ......... 1-298 OCR/OCR2/2D code reader/1D code reader
One-to-n connection with a PC ............. 1-300 related command (CA/CD/CW/CR/
Checking the Ethernet Communication Status AT) ..................................................... 2-34
(Ethernet (TCP/IP) Monitor) .............. 1-301 Data I/O (MW/MS/MR/IW/IS/IR/WP/RP/
Outputting result data via no protocol WO) .................................................... 2-39
communication ..................................... 1-302 PLC Communication (PLC Link, CC-Link,
Detailed Setting of Non-protocol EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT)-
Communication ..................................... 1-303 specific Data I/O (MWX/MSX/MRX/IWX/
Processing the trigger command response ISX/IRX) .............................................. 2-44
in CV compatible mode ................... 1-303 Display (VW/VR/GW/GR/UW/UR/FW/FR/WI/RI/
Specifying a desired data delimiter of ZM/SC/FT/PMW/PMR/PRW/PRR) ....... 2-49
the custom command ...................... 1-305 Dialog (DC/DO/DR/BU) ........................... 2-59
Troubleshooting ......................................... 1-306 Utility (TC/TS/HE/HR/HC/HS/LE/LQ/BC/
Error Messages ..................................... 1-306 PV) ..................................................... 2-62
Account (PS/WH/UC/UA/UD) .................. 2-67
FTP client/server function ............................ 1-308
Date/Time (TW/TR/TM/TZW/TZR) ............ 2-71
Using the FTP Client/Server functions ....... 1-308
File (PC/PM/PD/OW/OR/OPW/OPR/STW/
Outputting Archived Data with the FTP Client
STR) ................................................... 2-75
Function ................................................ 1-309
Flowchart Display Control (FV/FI) ........... 2-84
Changing the FTP Settings on the
Line Scan Camera/LJ-X/LJ-V series Head
Controller ......................................... 1-309
(CL/CZW/CZR) ................................... 2-85
Changing the Archive Function Settings on
Recipe Function (RPW/RPT/RPR/RPC/RPM/
the Controller ................................... 1-311
RPD/RPN) .......................................... 2-87
Using Controller as FTP Server
Robot Vision (ACE/ACC/ACR/ACS/CSR/
(FTP server function) ............................. 1-313
CPW) .................................................. 2-90
Troubleshooting ......................................... 1-314
VisionDatabase (DDF/DSW/DSR) ........... 2-92
Error Messages ..................................... 1-314
Measurement Correction (MCC/MCW/
MCR) .................................................. 2-94
Chapter 2 Commands Others (CC/KY/VI/EC/UQ/ICU/ECU/ICV/ECV/
XTC/XCE/BPL/BPW/BTE/BTC/BTR) ... 2-96
Control via commands ..................................... 2-2
Character Code Table for OCR/OCR2
Overview of Control via Commands .............. 2-2
Unit ................................................... 2-110
Command Type ........................................ 2-2
ASCII code table (hexadecimal/decimal
Notes on command input/output .............. 2-3
notation) ........................................... 2-111
Standard instruction ....................................... 2-9
Custom instruction ..................................... 2-112
Command List (Available Operation vs.
Overview of Custom Instruction ............ 2-112
Situation) .............................................. 2-9
Defining a custom instruction ............... 2-112
Trigger (T1 to T4/TA) ............................... 2-15
Input Format and Control Method of the
I/O Control (TE/TQ/LK/OE) ...................... 2-16
Execution Content ............................ 2-114
Mode Control (R0/S0/RM) ....................... 2-19
List of Custom Instructions ......................... 2-116
Program Control (PW/PR) ....................... 2-20
System control (RS/RB/SS/BS/NW/NR/
NU/CE/RE/WG/RR/RU/TG/SD/SR/SI/
SE/PN/ASI) ......................................... 2-21
Unit Test (UT/UE) .................................... 2-33

12 XG-X Comm-US
Table of Contents

Multi-Profile Defect Unit .......................... 3-94

Chapter 3 Appendix
Intensity Unit ........................................... 3-98
List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Color Unit ................................................ 3-99
Codes ............................................................ 3-2
Color Grouping Unit .............................. 3-102
Overview of the Setting Parameters/Result Data/ OCR Unit ............................................... 3-105
Error Codes List ........................................ 3-2 OCR2 Unit ............................................. 3-124
Using the List of Setting Parameters/ 2D code reader Unit ............................. 3-146
Result Data .......................................... 3-3 1D Code Reader Unit ............................ 3-157
List of setting parameters .............................. 3-5 Height Extraction/Height Binarization ... 3-162
Image setting ............................................ 3-7 Height Measurement Unit ..................... 3-166
Color Extraction ........................................ 3-8 Zero Plane Specification ....................... 3-169
Color Extraction Settings (Image Operation Profile Measurement Unit ...................... 3-173
Unit/PlugIn Unit: Source Image 1) ....... 3-9 Continuous Profile Measurement Unit ... 3-187
Color Extraction Settings (Image Operation 3D Geometry Unit ................................. 3-203
Unit/PlugIn Unit: Source Image 2) ..... 3-10 3D Comparison Unit .............................. 3-209
Color Extraction Settings (MultiSpectrum 3D blob Unit .......................................... 3-211
Mode) ................................................ 3-11 Branch Unit ........................................... 3-236
Color Extraction Settings (MultiSpectrum Join Unit ................................................ 3-236
Mode: Image Operation Unit/PlugIn Unit: Loop Unit ............................................... 3-236
Source Image 1) ................................ 3-13 Loop End Unit ....................................... 3-236
Color Extraction Settings (MultiSpectrum Break Unit ............................................. 3-236
Mode: Image Operation Unit/PlugIn Unit: Start Unit ............................................... 3-236
Source Image 2) ................................ 3-15 End Unit ................................................ 3-237
Inspection region .................................... 3-17 Calculation Unit ..................................... 3-237
Inspection Region (for Multi-Profile Defect/ Group Judgment Unit (Start) ................. 3-237
Contour Region Generator) ............... 3-21 Group Judgment Unit (End) .................. 3-237
Pattern region ......................................... 3-22 Image Operation Unit ............................ 3-238
Image Enhancement Filter ...................... 3-25 Image Conversion Setting (Image Operation
Image Enhancement Filter Settings (Image Unit: Source Image 1) ...................... 3-240
Operation Unit: Source Image) .......... 3-34 Image Conversion Setting (Image Operation
Capture Unit ............................................ 3-42 Unit: Source Image 2) ...................... 3-244
Area Unit ................................................. 3-60 Robot Coordinate Conversion Unit ....... 3-248
Pattern Search Unit ................................. 3-61 Robot Coordinate Operation Unit ......... 3-253
ShapeTrax3A Unit ................................... 3-63 Position Adjustment Unit ....................... 3-254
PatternTrax Unit ...................................... 3-70 C PlugIn Unit ......................................... 3-255
Edge Position Unit .................................. 3-73 Calibration Unit ..................................... 3-256
Edge Width Unit ...................................... 3-74 Contour Region Generator Unit ............ 3-259
Edge Pitch Unit ....................................... 3-75 Defect Extraction Operation Unit .......... 3-260
Edge Angle Unit ...................................... 3-76 Image Stitching Unit .............................. 3-261
Edge Pairs Unit ....................................... 3-77 Pause Unit ............................................. 3-262
Defect Unit .............................................. 3-79 Timer Start Unit ..................................... 3-263
Blob Unit ................................................. 3-81 Timer End Unit ...................................... 3-263
Grayscale Blob Unit ................................ 3-83 Terminal I/O Delay Unit ......................... 3-264
Profile Position Unit ................................. 3-87 Variable Delay Unit ............................... 3-265
Profile Width Unit .................................... 3-89 User Menu Unit ..................................... 3-266
Profile Defect Unit ................................... 3-91 On-screen Graphics Unit ...................... 3-266
XG-X Comm-US 13
Table of Contents

Parallel Terminal Output Unit ................ 3-273 Group Judgment Unit (End) .................. 3-431
Data Output Unit ................................... 3-273 Image Operation Unit ............................ 3-431
Image Output Unit ................................ 3-275 C PlugIn Unit ......................................... 3-431
Command Execution Unit ..................... 3-277 Calibration Unit ..................................... 3-431
List of result data ....................................... 3-278 Contour Region Generator Unit ............ 3-432
Common to All Units: ............................ 3-278 Defect Extraction Operation Unit .......... 3-436
Inspection region .................................. 3-280 Image Stitching Unit .............................. 3-436
Capture Unit .......................................... 3-291 Robot Coordinate Conversion Unit ....... 3-438
Area Unit ............................................... 3-293 Robot Coordinate Operation Unit ......... 3-440
Pattern Search Unit ............................... 3-293 Position Adjustment Unit ....................... 3-441
ShapeTrax3A Unit ................................. 3-294 Pause Unit ............................................. 3-441
PatternTrax Unit .................................... 3-295 Timer Start Unit ..................................... 3-441
Edge Position Unit ................................ 3-296 Timer End Unit ...................................... 3-441
Edge Width Unit .................................... 3-297 Terminal I/O Delay Unit ......................... 3-441
Edge Pitch Unit ..................................... 3-298 Variable Delay Unit ............................... 3-441
Edge Angle Unit .................................... 3-300 User Menu Unit ..................................... 3-442
Edge Pairs Unit ..................................... 3-302 On-screen Graphics Unit ...................... 3-442
Defect Unit ............................................ 3-304 Parallel Terminal Output Unit ................ 3-442
Blob Unit ............................................... 3-310 Data Output Unit ................................... 3-442
Grayscale Blob Unit .............................. 3-321 Image Output Unit ................................. 3-442
Profile Position Unit ............................... 3-330 Command Execution Unit ..................... 3-442
Profile Width Unit .................................. 3-334 Error Code .................................................. 3-443
Profile Defect Unit ................................. 3-338 Unit Error Codes (UEIDs) ...................... 3-443
Multi-Profile Defect Unit ........................ 3-343 Calculation Error Codes (ERRCs) ......... 3-444
Intensity Unit ......................................... 3-353
List of System Variables ............................... 3-448
Color Unit .............................................. 3-354
Overview of System Variables ................... 3-448
Color Grouping Unit .............................. 3-358
Measurement-Related System Variables ... 3-449
OCR Unit ............................................... 3-359
Terminal Control-Related System
OCR2 Unit ............................................. 3-362
Variables ............................................... 3-455
2D code reader Unit ............................. 3-365
System Variables for Device Status
1D Code Reader Unit ........................... 3-378
Confirmation .......................................... 3-459
Height Measurement Unit ..................... 3-383
Display-Related System Variables ............. 3-462
Profile Measurement Unit ...................... 3-386
System Image Variable .............................. 3-463
Continuous Profile Measurement Unit .. 3-389
ASCII code table (hexadecimal/decimal
3D Geometry Unit ................................. 3-410
notation) ................................................ 3-464
3D Comparison Unit ............................. 3-416
3D blob Unit .......................................... 3-417
Index ............................................................... I-1
Branch Unit ........................................... 3-430
Join Unit ................................................ 3-430
Loop Function Unit ................................ 3-430
Loop End Unit ....................................... 3-430
Break Unit ............................................. 3-430
Start Unit ............................................... 3-430
End Unit ................................................ 3-430
Calculation Unit ..................................... 3-431
Group Judgment Unit (Start) ................ 3-431
14 XG-X Comm-US
Chapter
1

No protocol communication

FTP Client/Server Function

1-2 XG-X Comm-US

System Control/Data Output

Overview of System Control/Data Output

• The response time for commands and their
Control Methods/Protocols Point
resulting output will depend on the settings and
available with this System processing load on the controller, with the
exception of direct control through the external
The XG-X Series supports the following methods for control terminals. If this variation in response time is
and data output. problematic, use direct control through the
• External terminals (terminal block and parallel I/O) external terminals.
• To use an interface other than USB interface,
(Page 1-6)
the settings for that interface need to be
• PLC Link (RS-232C or Ethernet) (Page 1-71) changed. For more details on configuring each
• CC-Link (Page 1-113) of these interfaces, refer to the individual
• EtherNet/IP (Page 1-148) interfaces in this chapter and "Controller System
• PROFINET (Page 1-210) Settings" in the XG-X VisionEditor Reference
Manual.
• EtherCAT (Page 1-252)
• The USB interface is used exclusively to
• Standard instruction (Page 2-9)
communicate with the KEYENCE PC application
• Custom instruction (Page 2-112) softwares and does not require any interface
• No protocol communication (RS-232C (Page 1-290) or settings.
Ethernet (Page 1-295)) • The USB interface does not support connecting
• USB interface of multiple KEYENCE PC application softwares
at the same time to a single controller.
• SD card output
• To use the CC-Link, it is necessary to connect
Archive output, result output (data and image) and
the CC-Link unit CA-NCL20E (optional) to the
target classification output can be transferred from the controller.
flowchart or the Image Viewer on the controller to the SD • To use EtherCAT, it is necessary to connect an
Card 1 or SD Card 2 in the controller. EtherCAT unit CA-NEC20E (optional) to the
• USB HDD output controller.
• EtherNet/IP and PROFINET can be used with
Archive output, result output (data and image) and
the Ethernet port of the XG-X or by connecting
target classification output can be transferred from the the EtherNet/IP unit CA-NEP20E or the
flowchart or the Image Viewer on the controller to the PROFINET unit CA-NPN20E (both of which are
USB HDD connected to the controller. optional).
• PC program output • No protocol communication is not able to handle
Archive output and result output (data and image) can binary data such as images and program files for
system control and data output.
be output from the controller to the XG-X VisionTerminal
or ActiveX control. Reference • For more details on no protocol communication,
• FTP client and server functions archive output, result refer to the XG-X Series User's Manual,
output (data and image) and target classification output "Standard Instruction" (Page 2-9) and "Custom
Instruction" (Page 2-112) in this manual.
can be output from the controller to the FTP server. In
• For more details on SD card output, refer to
addition, by directly accessing the controller's SD card "Data Output Unit," "Image Output Unit," and
from an external FTP client, you can send/receive/delete "Archives" in the XG-X VisionEditor Reference
files and create/delete folders. Manual.
• VisionDataStorage output • For more details on PC program output, refer to
Results data, image data, archive data, and image and the XG-X VisionTerminal User's Manual, the
ActiveX Control User's Manual, and "Data Output
results data of target classification can be output to a
Unit," "Image Output Unit," and "Archives" in the
VisionDataStorage (sold separately) connected to the XG-X VisionEditor Reference Manual. To use
controller with a dedicated VisionDataStorage USB ActiveX control, you need to download the
cable (OP-88263) or an Ethernet cable. software (free of charge). Ask your nearest sales
representative for more details.
• For more details on the basic specifications of
protocols and connection and wiring to the
controller, refer to the XG-X Series User's Manual.

XG-X Comm-US 1-3

Setting the System Control/Data Output

This section shows the typical flow for setting the system
control and data output. For more details on the Changing the Protocol and
description and setting procedures of each protocol, refer Communication Mode Settings
to the sections describing the individual protocol.
In the offline [System Configuration] menu, change the
settings according to the protocol and communication
Selecting an Interface mode to be used. To use a custom instruction (Page 2-
112), you need to also define the custom instruction in the
Select a protocol and communication mode. [Custom Functionality] menu.
• To use the XG-X VisionEditor to change the
Point
control and output settings, ensure that the XG-
Typical selection examples X VisionEditor System settings are the same as
the settings of the actual controller to be used.
To perform trigger inputs or total status outputs at high • If the system settings between the XG-X
speed VisionEditor and the actual controller are
different, the uploaded program may not
• Terminal Block Interface
operate properly.
• Parallel I/O Interface

To easily achieve command control and data output

Changing the Input/Output settings
with a PLC
• PLC link (RS-232C or Ethernet) communication mode Ethernet interface
• CC-Link Interface (CC-Link unit CA-NCL20E (optional) Set the basic parameters such as the controller's IP
required) address and port numbers to be used.
• EtherNet/IP Interface
• PROFINET Interface PLC Link communication mode (Page 1-71)
• EtherCAT Interface (EtherCAT Interface (EtherCAT unit Set the communication parameters, PLC model, and DM
CA-NEC20E (optional)) required) (data memory) address to use the PLC Link.

• PLC Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET and

Point CC-Link interface (Page 1-113)
EtherCAT cannot be used simultaneously.
• EtherNet/IP and PROFINET can be used with Set the communication parameters to use the CC-Link and
the Ethernet port of the XG-X or by connecting assign system variables.
the EtherNet/IP unit CA-NEP20E or the
PROFINET unit CA-NPN20E (both of which are EtherNet/IP interface (Page 1-148)
optional). Set the communication parameters to use the EtherNet/IP
and assign system variables related to the terminal control
Communicate with a PC
for bit address, processing priority, etc.
• Using the XG-X VisionTerminal or ActiveX control:
Ethernet, USB (XG-X VisionTerminal only) PROFINET interface (Page 1-210)
• Using no protocol communication: RS-232C, Ethernet Set the communication parameters to use PROFINET and
• Using FTP output: Ethernet assign system variables related to the terminal control for
bit address, processing priority, etc.

EtherCAT interface (Page 1-252)

Set the communication parameters to use EtherCAT and
assign system variables such as those related to the
terminal control for bit addresses.

RS-232C interface
Set the communication parameters to use RS-232C.

1-4 XG-X Comm-US

Setting the System Control/Data Output

Overview of System Control/Data Output

Terminal block interface, parallel I/O interface (Page 1-6)
Assign system variables to terminals and set the output
Changing the Data Output
time and other items. Settings of the Controller
Reference The USB interface is used exclusively for
To output data, change the settings of the parallel terminal
communication with the KEYENCE PC application
output unit, data output unit, or image output unit to be
software and does not require any interface
settings on the XG-X VisionEditor. used.
For more details, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.
The settings of the parallel terminal output unit and
Point
Setting a Custom Instruction data output unit may not change if the system
settings have not been set properly.
In the [Custom Instruction Settings] menu, set a custom
instruction by combining standard instructions. See
"Custom instruction" (Page 2-112) for more details.
To use the PLC Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
Point
PROFINET, EtherCAT, terminal block interface, or
parallel I/O interface for the command control, you
need to define the command(s) to be used as a
custom instruction in advance.

XG-X Comm-US 1-5

Control/Data Output Overview of Control/Data
via External Terminals Output via External Terminals
The XG-X Series controller has the following external
terminals:
• Parallel I/O interface (40 pins): Use a specialized
parallel connection cable (3 m) OP-51657 (Page 1-8).
• Terminal block interface (OUT: 9 pins/IN: 8 pins):
Overview of System Control/
Detachable terminal block included with the controller
Data Output (Page 1-10).

q Control/Data Output via

Functions available with the external terminals
External Terminals
In addition to supplying the 24 VDC power to the controller,
the external terminals offer the following control input/
Control/Data Output via output, command control, and data output functions when
PLC-Link the system variables that are related to parallel output
control are assigned to relevant terminals.
• Control: Controls trigger and other image capture
Control/Data Output via
operations, or operates and resets the controller.
CC-Link • Status: Outputs the status of the controller, such as
"error" or "busy".
Control/Data Output via • Data input/output: Outputs the total status data or the
data of parallel terminal output units, or inputs the
EtherNet/IP terminal input for terminal I/O delay units.
• Command: Executes custom instructions (Page 2-112).
Control/Data Output via Using the external terminals requires some
Point
PROFINET settings such as the assignment of system
variables in the controller system settings. The
description in this manual assumes the default
Control/Data Output via assignment in the controller system settings unless
otherwise specified.
EtherCAT
Reference • For more details on the pin assignments of the
controller and default assigned state of the
Control/Data Output via system variables, refer to "Checking the terminal
assignment of the controller" (Page 1-8).
No protocol communication
• For more details on the system variables, refer to
"List of System Variables" (Page 3-448).
FTP Client/Server Function • For the timing chart for control operations, refer
to "Timing Chart" (Page 1-31).
• For more details on the circuit diagram and
wiring of the controller, refer to the XG-X Series
User's Manual.

1-6 XG-X Comm-US

Overview of Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Operation Flow

Checking specifications/Wiring (Page 1-8)

• Check the terminals used for data output/control.
• Set the terminal assignment with the XG-X VisionEditor
or the controller.
• Verify electric connections utilizing the I/O monitor &
Diagnostics.

Data output (Page 1-28)
• Set the items that you want to output from the parallel
terminal output unit.
• Set the output device terminal with "Output
Assignments" (Page 1-18).
• Data is output from the parallel terminal output unit.
• To read the output data, synchronize the timing with the
leading edge of the %Sto output.

Command control (Page 1-25)
• Custom commands that are setup in advance can be
executed.
• When %CmdReady is ON, a command can be
executed.
• Turn ON the bits corresponding to the command code
and the command parameter, and execute the
command by turning the %CmdStrobe input ON.
• Check the command result with %Ack (normal
execution) and %Nack (abnormal execution).

XG-X Comm-US 1-7

Preparing parallel port connections

Checking the terminal assignment of the controller

Parallel I/O Interface

Reference Use the dedicated parallel connection cable (3 m)

OP-51657 (sold separately) to connect devices to
(1) (21)
the connector.

(20) (40)

Pin layout: The cable color when the OP-51657 (option) is used.

No. Terminal Terminal explanation Signal Assigned default state*1 Circuit Cable
name direction *2 diagram color
Assigned Variable function Bit N.O/
variable N.C (Page 1-12)
1 COMIN2 Connector input common - - - - - - Brown
2 IN0 General purpose input 0 Inputs %CmdParam Custom instruction 0 - B Red
3 IN1 General purpose input 1 Inputs %CmdParam parameter input 1 - B Orange
4 IN2 General purpose input 2 Inputs %CmdParam 2 - B Yellow
5 IN3 General purpose input 3 Inputs %CmdParam 3 - B Green
6 IN4 General purpose input 4 Inputs %CmdParam 4 - B Blue
7 IN5 General purpose input 5 Inputs %CmdParam 5 - B Purple
8 IN6 General purpose input 6 Inputs %CmdParam 6 - B Gray
9 IN7 General purpose input 7 Inputs %CmdParam 7 - B White
10 IN8 General purpose input 8 Inputs %CmdCode 0 - B Black
11 IN9 General purpose input 9 Inputs %CmdCode Custom instruction 1 - B Brown
12 IN10 General purpose input 10 Inputs %CmdCode No. input 2 - B Red
13 IN11 General purpose input 11 Inputs %CmdCode 3 - B Orange
14 IN12 General purpose input 12 Inputs %CmdStrobe Custom instruction 0 - B Yellow
execution input (terminal)
15 IN13 General purpose input 13 Inputs %Reset Reset input 0 - B Green
16 IN14 General purpose input 14 Inputs %Pst Output data input switch 0 - B Blue
17 COMOUT2 Connector output common - - - - - - Purple
18 OUT0 General purpose output 0 Output %Ack Command success 0 N.O. C Gray
confirmation output
19 OUT1 General purpose output 1 Output %Nack Command failure 0 N.O. C White
confirmation output
20 OUT2 General purpose output 2 Output %Busy Busy output 0 N.O. C Black
21 OUT3 General purpose output 3 Output %CmdReady Permission output for 0 N.O. C Brown
command input
22 OUT4 General purpose output 4 Output %Trg1Ready Permission output for 0 N.O. C Red
trigger 1 input
23 OUT5 General purpose output 5 Output %Trg2Ready Permission output for 0 N.O. C Orange
trigger 2 input

1-8 XG-X Comm-US

Preparing parallel port connections

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

No. Terminal Terminal explanation Signal Assigned default state*1 Circuit Cable
name direction Assigned Variable function*2 Bit N.O/ diagram color
variable N.C (Page 1-12)
24 OUT6 General purpose output 6 Output %OutDataA 0 N.O. C Yellow
25 OUT7 General purpose output 7 Output %OutDataA 1 N.O. C Green
26 OUT8 General purpose output 8 Output %OutDataA 2 N.O. C Blue
27 OUT9 General purpose output 9 Output %OutDataA 3 N.O. C Purple
28 OUT10 General purpose output 10 Output %OutDataA 4 N.O. C Gray
29 OUT11 General purpose output 11 Output %OutDataA 5 N.O. C White
30 OUT12 General purpose output 12 Output %OutDataA 6 N.O. C Black
31 OUT13 General purpose output 13 Output %OutDataA Data output of system 7 N.O. C Brown
32 OUT14 General purpose output 14 Output %OutDataA variable %OutDataA 8 N.O. C Red
33 OUT15 General purpose output 15 Output %OutDataA 9 N.O. C Orange
34 OUT16 General purpose output 16 Output %OutDataA 10 N.O. C Yellow
35 OUT17 General purpose output 17 Output %OutDataA 11 N.O. C Green
36 OUT18 General purpose output 18 Output %OutDataA 12 N.O. C Blue
37 OUT19 General purpose output 19 Output %OutDataA 13 N.O. C Purple
38 OUT20 General purpose output 20 Output %OutDataA 14 N.O. C Gray
39 OUT21 General purpose output 21 Output %OutDataA 15 N.O. C White
40 COMOUT2 Connector output common - - - - - Black
*1 The default assigned state refers to the default system variables assigned to each pin in the System Configuration menu. These
assignments may vary if the System settings have been changed.
*2 Refer to "List of System Variables" (Page 3-448) for more details on the functions of individual variables.

• COMOUT2 for Pin 17 and Pin 40 are common.

Point
• Power source 0 V, COMIN1, COMIN2, COMOUT1, COMOUT2 and COMOUT_F are all isolated.
• COMIN2 is a common terminal exclusively for input pins 2 to 16 on the parallel I/O connector.
• COMOUT2 is a common terminal exclusively for output pins 18 to 39 on the parallel I/O connector.

XG-X Comm-US 1-9

Preparing parallel port connections

Terminal block interface (OUT)

Terminal block OUT connector specifications for the Suitable wiring
system are as follows. AWG 16 - 28
Tightening above the specified torque may cause
Point Terminal block screw torque
damage to the terminal block
0.25 Nm or less

STO (1)
OR

ERR

RUN
COM
OUT
FLS1

FLS2

NC
COM
F
(9)

Pin layout

No. Terminal Terminal explanation Signal Assigned default state*1 Circuit

name direction Assigned Variable function *2
Bit N.O/ diagram
variable N.C (Page 1-12)
1 OUT22 (STO) General purpose output 22 Output %Sto Strobe output for reading 0 N.O. C
parallel terminal output unit
data (Data Ready)
2 OUT23 (OR) General purpose output 23 Output %JAHold Total Status Output (OR) 0 N.O. C
3 F_OUT2 (ERR) High-speed general Output %Error0 Error 0 output 0 N.O. C
purpose output 2
4 F_OUT3 High-speed general Output %Run Online/Offline Mode output 0 N.O. C
(RUN) purpose output 3
5 COMOUT1 Common for terminal block - - - - - -
(COMOUT) outputs
6 F_OUT0 High-speed general Output %Flash1 Strobe light output 1 0 N.O. C
(FLS1) purpose output 0
7 F_OUT1 High-speed general Output %Flash2 Strobe light output 2 0 N.O. C
(FLS2) purpose output 1
8 N.C - - - - - - -
9 COMOUT_F Common for high-speed - - - - - -
(COMF) general purpose outputs

*1 The default assigned state refers to the default system variables assigned to each pin in the System Configuration menu. These
assignments may vary if the System settings have been changed.
*2 Refer to "List of System Variables" (Page 3-448) for more details on the functions of individual variables.

• Power source 0 V, COMIN1, COMIN2, COMOUT1, COMOUT2 and COMOUT_F are all isolated.
Point
• COMOUT1 is the common terminal for output exclusive for OUT connectors 1 and 2.
• COMOUT_F is the common terminal for output exclusive for OUT connectors 3, 4, 6 and 7.

( ) indicates labels printed on terminal blocks at time of shipment

1-10 XG-X Comm-US

Preparing parallel port connections

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Terminal block interface (IN)
Terminal block IN connector specifications for the system Suitable wiring
are as follows. AWG 16 - 28
Tightening above the specified torque may cause
Point Terminal block screw torque
damage to the terminal block
0.25 Nm or less

COM
IN1 (1)
PLC

TRG1

TRG2

TEST

EXT
(6)

Pin layout

No. Terminal Terminal explanation Signal Assigned default state*1 Circuit

name direction Assigned Variable function*2 Bit N.O/ diagram
variable N.C (Page 1-12)
1 COMIN1 Common for terminal - - - - - -
(COMIN1) block inputs
2 IN15 (PLC) General purpose input 15 Inputs %Plc Custom instruction execution 0 - B
input (PLC Link)
3 F_IN0 (TRG1) High-speed general Inputs %Trg1 Trigger 1 input 0 - A
purpose input 0
4 F_IN1 (TRG2) High-speed general Inputs %Trg2 Trigger 2 input 0 - A
purpose input 1
5 F_IN2 (TEST) High-speed general Inputs %Test Trial run input (Disable 0 - A
purpose input 2 Outputs)
6 F_IN3 (EXT) High-speed general Inputs %Ext Disable trigger input 0 - A
purpose input 3

• Power source 0 V, COMIN1, COMIN2, COMOUT1, COMOUT2 and COMOUT_F are all isolated.
Point
• COMIN1 is the common terminal for input exclusive for IN connectors 2 to 6.

( ) indicates labels printed on terminal blocks at time of shipment

XG-X Comm-US 1-11

Preparing parallel port connections

Connecting

Input circuit diagram Example of connections

Circuit A (For F_IN0 - 3 only, EV) When connecting an NPN PLC output to the system input

7.5kΩ OUT IN
IN

910Ω

COMIN*
COM(-) COMIN*

PLC (NPN output) Input circuit on controller

• Max. applied voltage: 26.4 V

• ON voltage: 19 V or greater
• ON current: 2.2 mA or greater When connecting a PNP PLC output to the system input
• OFF voltage: 5 V or less
• OFF current: 1 mA or less IN

Circuit B (other inputs)

COM(+)
COMIN*
15kΩ
IN
Input circuit on controller

2.7kΩ OUT

COMIN*
PLC (PNP output)

• Max. applied voltage: 26.4 V

• ON voltage: 19 V or greater
• ON current: 1.2 mA or greater
• OFF voltage: 3 V or less
• OFF current: 0.3 mA or less

* The common that is connected differs according to the IN terminals. The common terminal for IN connectors 2 - 6 is
Point
COMIN1, and the common terminal for parallel I/O connectors 2 - 16 is COMIN2.

1-12 XG-X Comm-US

Preparing parallel port connections

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Output circuit diagram
Circuit C (common for all output terminals) • Max. applied voltage: 30 V
• Max. sink current: 50 mA
Poly Switch • Leakage current: 0.1 mA or less
OUT • Residual voltage:
1.4 V or less (50 mA)
1.0 V or less (20 mA)
COMOUT*

Point Since this system utilizes a photo MOSFET in the output elements, any one of the NPN inputs, or PNP inputs is connectable.

Connection example: when connecting this system’s outputs via a positive common

Point If the input device is compatible with the NPN open collector outputs, then refer to this connection example.

When connecting the output from the controller to a PLC with a positive common
IN

Poly Switch

OUT

COMOUT*

COM(+)

PLC input circuit positive common Output circuit on controller

When connecting the output from the controller to a relay

Poly Switch
Load
OUT

COMOUT*

Relay Output circuit on controller

* The common that is connected differs according to the OUT terminals. The common terminal for OUT connectors 1 - 2 is
Point
COMOUT1, and the common terminal for OUT connectors 3 - 4/6 - 7 is COMOUT_F, and the common terminal for parallel
I/O connectors 18 - 39 is COMOUT2.

XG-X Comm-US 1-13

Preparing parallel port connections

Connection example: when connecting this system’s outputs via a negative common

Point If the input device is compatible with the PNP open collector outputs, then refer to this connection example.

When connecting the output from the controller to a PLC with a negative common
IN

Poly Switch

OUT

COMOUT*

COM(-)

PLC input circuit negative common Output circuit on controller

When connecting the output from the controller to a relay

Poly Switch
Load
OUT

COMOUT*

Relay Output circuit on controller

1-14 XG-X Comm-US

Preparing parallel port connections

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

3 Input a trigger signal from the PLC to the controller
Verifying the Connection Status and check that the [F_IN0 (%Trg1:0)] check box is
using the I/O Diagnostic selected. If the signal is correctly input from the
PLC to the controller, the check box will be
selected.
Checking the Input Signal
If the signal input time is short, the screen
Point
Input a trigger signal from the PLC or synchronization refresh rate cannot keep up and the check box
sensor into the controller and check that the trigger is may not be selected even if the signal was
correctly input. correctly input. Input the signal for a
sufficiently long amount of time.
You can check whether the trigger signal is correctly input
into the controller by using the I/O monitor that is in the
[Utilities] menu.

1 Select [Utilities] on the top part of the Setup mode

screen.

2 Select [I/O Monitor & Diagnostics].

XG-X Comm-US 1-15

Preparing parallel port connections

Checking the Output Signal

3 For [Manual Control], select [ON].
If you select the check box for a terminal in this state,
Check whether a signal is output correctly from the that terminal will turn on.
controller to the PLC.
On the I/O monitor, forcibly output a signal output by the
controller and check that you can check that signal on the
PLC.

If you selected [Utilities] - [I/O Monitor &

Point
Diagnostics] from the Function menu in Run mode,
you cannot forcibly output a signal. To perform
forcible output, switch to Setup mode.

1 Select [Utilities] on the top part of the Setup mode

screen.

4 Tick the check box for a wired terminal, and check

that you can check on the PLC.

2 Select [I/O Monitor & Diagnostics].

1-16 XG-X Comm-US

Changing the Parallel Port Input/Output settings

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

1 Select/While in the [Program Setting] tab and, in the
Displaying the setting screen of [Various Settings] group on the ribbon, select [System
the parallel port Settings].

2 In the left pane of the [System Settings] menu,

Changing settings with XG-X VisionEditor select [Communications & I/O] - [Terminal Block &
Parallel Port] - [Inputs] or [Outputs] or [Timing].
On the [Inputs], [Outputs] and [Timing] menus in XG-X
A menu to select items and data from for the item type
VisionEditor system settings, various settings for data
selected appears.
input/output with the parallel port can be changed.

[Inputs] menu 3 Change the settings as required.

See "Parallel port setting items which can be set in this
system" (Page 1-18) for more details on each setting.

4 Click [OK].
To apply the change to the controller, you need to
Point
upload the system settings file (env.dat) to the
controller and then restart the controller.

[Outputs] menu

[Timing] menu

XG-X Comm-US 1-17

Changing the Parallel Port Input/Output settings

Changing settings with the controller Parallel port setting items which
On the [Terminal Block & Parallel Port] menu in the Global can be set in this system
Settings, various settings for data input/output with the
parallel port can be changed.
Input Assignments
Review/edit input terminal assignments.

Reference • For more details on system variables that can be

assigned, refer to "List of System Variables"
(Page 3-448).
• Multiple assignment of the same bit on the same
system variable redundantly to input terminals
on the parallel port, RY addresses using CC-
Link, Ethernet/IP, PROFINET and EtherCAT
output data bit areas is not allowed.
• The filter length is the shortest input time that the
terminal is recognized as OFF→ON, ON→OFF.
Keyence recommends that you normally use the
default value.
1 On the [Global] menu at the top of the screen, select
If you changed the input assignments, you need to
[Communications & I/O] - [Terminal Block & Parallel Point
restart the controller to apply the changes
Port]. (recommended but not necessary).
The [Terminal Block & Parallel Port] menu appears.

2 On the [Terminal Block & Parallel Port] menu, select Output Assignments
[Input Assignments] or [Output Assignments].
Review/edit output terminal assignments.
A menu to select items and data from for the item type
selected appears. Reference • You can change the Flash output settings on the
capture unit's [External Flash Settings] screen.
• For more details on system variables that can be
3 Change the settings as required.
assigned, refer to "List of System Variables"
See "Parallel port setting items which can be set in this (Page 3-448).
system" (Page 1-18) for more details on each setting. • Multiple assignment of the same bit on the same
system variable redundantly to input terminals

4 To finish setting, click [OK].

on the parallel port, RY addresses using CC-
Link, Ethernet/IP, PROFINET and EtherCAT
Point If you changed the input and output assignments, output data bit areas is not allowed.
you need to restart the controller to apply the • For each output terminal, you can switch
changes (recommended but not necessary). between N.O. (Normal Open) and N.C. (Normal
Close).

If you changed the output assignments, you need

Point
to restart the controller to apply the changes
(recommended but not necessary).

1-18 XG-X Comm-US

Changing the Parallel Port Input/Output settings

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Output Type Output Type(%JAHold)
With the exception of %JAHold, you can select the signal Select the method used to control the operation of
output type. %JAHold output.
• Sync with STO (default): Turn the output on and off for • Latching: Latch the output of a NG result for the next
parallel terminal output units in synchronization with the inspection and beyond. (To unlatch, either reset the
%Sto state. controller, change the program, or turn the outputs off.)
• One shot: Turn the output on for the time specified in • Sync with STO (default): Turn the output on and off for
[One shot time (ms)] and turn off immediately after. parallel terminal output units in synchronization with the
Specify %JAHold behavior in Output
%Sto state.
Point • One shot: Turn the output on for the time specified in
Type(%JAHold).
[One shot time (ms)] and turn off immediately after.
• Even if you select [Sync with STO output], %Sto
Point
Status change time (ms) will not be output unless at least one parallel
terminal output unit is executed in the flowchart.
Set the length of time from when the output data is ready to
• A parallel terminal output unit must be executed
the leading edge of %Sto within the range 1 to 999 (ms). to synchronize the output of %JAHold with
(Default: 5 ms) %Sto. In this case, the terminal output unit does
not have to be set with output data if there is no
other data to output to the parallel port.
On time (ms)
Set the time from the leading edge of %Sto to the trailing One shot time (ms)
edge of %Sto within the range 1 to 999 (ms).
(Default: 10 ms) Set the %JAHold one shot time to a value between 1 and
9999 (ms) (default setting: 500 ms). This is enabled only if
Reference • This setting is used in common with the output
Output Type(%JAHold) is set to [One shot].
on time for %Ack and %Nack.
• Only when [Handshake: ON] is selected, 0 ms
can be set. When 0 ms is set, the timeout
function of handshaking is cancelled. The
duration of %Ack and %Nack is changed
simultaneously when the cycle time is reached.

Cycle time (ms)

Set the time between two consecutive leading edges of
%Sto within the range 2 to 1000 (ms). (Default: 15 ms)

Reference When the duration is set to 0 ms, set it from 1 to 1000

ms Cycle time should be greater than or equal to
Status change time + On time.

Handshake
Select [OFF] (default) or [ON] to perform handshaking for
parallel terminal input and output.

One shot time (ms)

With the exception of %JAHold, set the signal one shot time
to a value between 1 and 9999 (ms) (default setting: 500
ms). This is enabled only if Output Type is set to [One shot].

XG-X Comm-US 1-19

Controlling the System via External Terminals (Direct Control)

Controlling the System via External Terminals

(Direct Control)

You can control the system directly by assigning system

variables to the external I/O terminals. This section System Variables Used for Direct
describes the system variables used for each operation. Control
Assignment of the same bit on the same system
Point
variable to multiple input terminals, RY addresses
using CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET and To provide trigger input/strobe light output
EtherCAT output data bit area is not allowed.
%Trg1 to 4 (Trigger 1 to 4 input)
Reference • For information on all system variables, including
Used to input a leading edge synchronized trigger signal
the system variables related to parallel output
control, refer to "List of System Variables" (Page to a capture unit.
3-448).
• For timing charts related to the direct control, %Trg1 to 4Ready (Permission for trigger 1 to 4 input)
refer to "4. Typical Operations of the Major This output turns on when each trigger input can be
Control Input/Output Terminals" (Page 1-63) and accepted. When this output is off, the corresponding
"2. Typical Operations for External Trigger Input"
trigger input is ignored.
(Page 1-33).

%Flash1 to 4 (Strobe light 1 to 4 output)

These are strobe light outputs to be used by assigning
them individually to one of cameras 1 to 4. The on-delay
and duration can be specified for individual flashes in
[External Flash Settings] of the capture unit.

Point The system variables %Trg1 to 4 can only be

assigned to F_IN0 to 3 respectively. Additionally,
%Flash1 to 4 can only be assigned to F_OUT0 to 3
respectively.

1-20 XG-X Comm-US

Controlling the System via External Terminals (Direct Control)

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

To output the judgment results from units To input numerical data directly to the controller

These data outputs are available in run mode only. %InDataAsyncA to H

Point
Data is not output in other modes. (Terminal data input asynchronous with flowchart)

%JAHold (Total status result output (Latching/Sync The system variables %InDataAsyncA to H allow the user
to change data via the terminals and are used to input data
with STO/One shot selectable))
in real time (level input).
Used to output the OR of the results of the tolerance
judgment for the units specified in the [Total Status Output] • The variables %InDataAsyncA to H reflect
Point
terminal inputs within 1 ms. To input a value
menu.
using several bits, consider the variations in the
• The behavior when the result is NG can be selected reflection timing among the bits.
from latched, synchronized with STO, or one shot. See • To change the values of %InDataAsyncA to H
"Changing the Settings of System Variables Required for during flowchart processing, control the reading
Direct Control" (Page 1-23) for more details. timing by using a terminal I/O delay unit to stop
• When latching is selected, the latched state is canceled the flowchart until the change is complete.

when the controller is reset, program No. is changed,

output is disabled with the OE command, operation mode
is changed between run and setup, or %Test is input.
To control the system

%Ext (Disable trigger reception)

%OutDataA to H (Terminal data output (Synchronized
While this input is on, all image capture operations (level
with STO/One shot selectable))
input).
Used to output the result data specified in the Parallel
Terminal Output unit in synchronization with STO or by One Reference The capture units for which [Trigger Wait] is
shot. For Sync with STO, up to eight separate time delayed disabled also stop.

outputs are possible for each unit with the setting of the
%Test (Test input)
parallel terminal output unit.
While this input is on, data output from all ports as well as
%Sto (Strobe output for reading parallel terminal output the %JAHold and %Sto outputs are forced to stop and the
output buffer is cleared (level input).
unit data)
• The terminal outputs are immediately reset to their
Used to read the data output of %OutDataA to H which
normal state and the other data outputs will stop after
stores data of parallel terminal output units, based on
the data output for the current unit is complete.
leading edge synchronization.
• Although outputs are enabled again when this input is
%Pst (Terminal output data switch input) turned off, the canceled data is not output.
Used to give an order to change data when handshake
%Reset (Reset input)
output is used (leading/trailing edge synchronization).
Used to reset the controller (leading edge
%OutDataAsyncA to H (Terminal data output synchronization).
asynchronous with STO) Reference For more details on the control-related operations,
Used as the destination of data writing by the WP refer to "4. Typical Operations of the Major Control
Input/Output Terminals" (Page 1-63).
command to output data in real time.
%Error0/1Clear (Error 0/1 clear input)
Used to clear the state of error 0 or 1 (leading edge
synchronization).

XG-X Comm-US 1-21

Controlling the System via External Terminals (Direct Control)

%Cam1 to 4Status (Camera 1 to 4 image capture buffer

To check the controller status
status)
%Error0/1 (Error 0/1 output) Outputs the image capture buffer status of each camera.
This output turns on when an error occurred due to the • Bit 0: Presence of image capture buffer image (0: No
cause assigned to %Error0 or %Error1. The error handling image/1: With image Image present)
setting can be changed in [Error handling] of the XG-X • Bit 1: Image Capture buffer full (0: Not full/1: Full)
VisionEditor system settings.
%Cam1 to 4Num (Number of images used for camera 1
%Error0/1 Code (Error cause 0/1 output) to 4 image capture buffers)
Used to output the error code of the error assigned to Outputs the number of images stored in the image capture
%Error0 or %Error1 (whichever occurred last). buffer of each camera.

%Run (Operation mode output) %Trg1 to 4CurrentUnit (Capture flow status of triggers 1
Used to output the current operation mode of the controller to 4)
(0: Setup mode, 1: Run mode). Indicates the capture unit number that the capture
conditions are applied to when triggers 1 to 4 are input.
%UnitEditStatus (Edit unit menu activation status)
This output turns on when the controller is in Setup mode, %VdbImg0 to 7Status(Status of VisionDatabase image
in Edit Flowchart in Run mode status, or Edit Unit in Run output conditions 0 to 7)
mode status (after the top menu). Used to output the status of VisionDatabase image output
conditions 0 to 7.
%WaitReady (Waiting state output)
This output turns on when a timing unit (except for a timer %OutputVdbImgBusy
setup unit) is waiting for a synchronization event in the This output turns on during VisionDatabase image output.
flowchart.

%Busy (Busy output)

To control the system with custom instructions
This output turns on when the process set in Busy Signal
Settings is being executed. The busy condition setting can Refer to "Controlling the System via External Terminals
be changed in [System Settings] - [Communications & I/O] (Command Control)" (Page 1-25) for more details.
- [Busy Signal] on the XG-X VisionEditor.

%Hist0 to 31Status (Status of image archive conditions

0 to 31)
Used to output the status of the image archive conditions 0
to 31.
• Bit 0: Archive operation (0: Paused, 1: Active)
• Bit 1: Remaining archived output data (0: No, 1: Yes)
• Bit 2: Hold status (0: No, 1: Yes)

%Cam1 to 4Ready (Status of camera 1 to 4)

These outputs turn on when the corresponding camera is
ready for image capture.

1-22 XG-X Comm-US

Controlling the System via External Terminals (Direct Control)

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

4 Select [Communications & I/O] - [Terminal Block &
Changing the Settings of System Parallel Port] - [Outputs].
Variables Required for Direct Control The [Communications & I/O - Terminal Block & Parallel
Port - Output Assignments] menu appears.
1 Select [System Settings] from the [Various Settings]
menu on the [Program Setting] tab.
The [System Settings] menu appears.

2 In the left pane of the [System Settings] menu,

select [Communications & I/O] - [Terminal Block &
Parallel Port] - [Inputs].
The [Communications & I/O - Terminal Block & Parallel
Port - Input Assignments] menu appears.

5 Specify necessary system variables and bits as the

output variables assigned to F_OUT0 to 3 and
OUT0 to 23.
%Flash1 to 4 can only be assigned to F_OUT0
Point
to 3 respectively.

Reference • Since major system variables have already

been assigned by default, it is possible to
change them if necessary. Refer to
"Checking the terminal assignment of the
3 Specify necessary system variables and bits as the controller" (Page 1-8) for more details on the
default assigned state.
input variables assigned to F_IN0 to 3 and IN0 to 15.
• Selecting and right clicking system
• Assignment of the same bit on the same variables of the same type and selecting
Point
system variable redundantly to multiple [Consecutive bit assignment] will assign
input terminals, RY addresses using CC- bits consecutively in ascending order from
Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET and EtherCAT the top of the selected variables.
output data bit area is not allowed.
• %Trg1 to 4 can only be assigned to F_IN0
to 3 respectively.
6 Select [Communications & I/O] - [Terminal Block &
Parallel Port] - [Timing].
Reference • Since major system variables have already The [Communications & I/O - Terminal Block & Parallel
been assigned by default, it is possible to Port - Timing Settings] menu appears.
change them if necessary. Refer to
"Checking the terminal assignment of the
controller" (Page 1-8) for more details on the
default assigned state.
• Selecting and right clicking system
variables of the same type and selecting
[Consecutive bit assignment] will assign
bits consecutively in ascending order from
the top of the selected variables.

XG-X Comm-US 1-23

Controlling the System via External Terminals (Direct Control)

7 Set the terminal output. Handshaking

Select [OFF] (default) or [ON] to perform handshaking
Output Type
• Synchronize with STO output (default): Turn the
for parallel terminal input and output.
output on and off for parallel terminal output units in One shot time (ms)
synchronization with the %Sto state.
Set the one shot time within the range 1 to 9999 (ms)
• One shot: Turn the output on for the time specified in
(Default: 500 ms). This is only valid if the [Output Type]
[One shot time (ms)] and turn off immediately after.
is set to [One shot].
Reference If Output Type is set to [One shot], you cannot
select [Synchronize with STO output] for
Output Type(%JAHold). 8 Change the output type for %JAHold as required.

A: Status change duration Output Type(%JAHold)

Set the length of time from when the data is ready for Select the method used to control the behavior of
output to the leading edge of %Sto within the range 1 %JAHold.
to 999 (ms). (Default: 5 ms) • Latching: Latch the output of an NG result for the
next inspection and beyond. (To unlatch, either reset
B: Output signal ON duration
the controller, change the program, or turn the
Set the time from the leading edge of %Sto to the
outputs off.)
trailing edge of %Sto within the range 1 to 999 (ms).
• Synchronize with STO output (default): Turn the
(Default: 10 ms)
output on and off for parallel terminal output units in
Reference • This setting is used in common with the synchronization with the %Sto state.
output on time for %Ack and %Nack. • One shot: Turn the output on for the time specified
• Only when [Handshake: ON] is selected, 0
in [One shot time (ms)] and turn off immediately
ms can be set. When 0 ms is set, the
timeout function of handshaking is
after.
cancelled. The duration of %Ack and • Even if you select [Synchronize with STO
Point
%Nack is changed simultaneously when output], %Sto will not be output unless at
the cycle time is reached. See "Terminal least one parallel terminal output unit is
data output timing (Handshake: ON)" (Page executed in the flowchart.
1-61) for more details. • A parallel terminal output unit must be
executed to synchronize the output of
C: Cycle time
%JAHold with %Sto. In this case, the
Set the time between two consecutive leading edges
terminal output unit does not have to be set
of %Sto within the range 2 to 1000 (ms). (Default: 15 with output data if there is no other data to
ms) output to the parallel port.

Reference When the duration is set to 0 ms, set it from 1 One shot time
to 1000 ms. Set the one shot time within the range 1 to 9999 (ms).
• The time to be set should be A + B ≤ C (Default: 500 ms) This is only valid if the [Output
Point
(excluding the duration of 0 ms). Type(%JAHold)] is set to [One shot].
• If the cycle time is longer than the actual
execution cycle of a parallel terminal 9 Click [OK].
output unit, the result output falls behind in
processing, resulting in an output buffer To apply the change to the controller, you need to
Point
overflow or skipped output. For more upload the global settings file to the controller and
details, refer to "Parallel Terminal Output then restart the controller.
Unit" in the XG-X VisionEditor Reference
Manual.
• The output of %Sto requires the execution
of at least one parallel terminal output unit
during measurement. %Sto is not output for
a measurement generation where no
parallel terminal output unit was executed
due to conditional branch or unit execution
availability.

1-24 XG-X Comm-US

Controlling the System via External Terminals (Command Control)

Controlling the System via External Terminals

(Command Control)

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

The system can be controlled with commands by using predefined custom instructions (Page 2-112).

• To use commands to control the system via the external terminals, it is necessary to define the command beforehand as
Point
a custom instruction. For details on setting custom instructions, refer to "Custom instruction" (Page 2-112). For
commands which can be used via the external terminals, refer to "Command List (Available Operation vs. Situation)"
(Page 2-9).
• Assignment of the same bit on the same system variable redundantly to multiple input terminals, RY addresses using
CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET and EtherCAT output data bit area is not allowed.

Reference For timing charts related to command control, refer to "5. Typical Operations when a Command is Executed via the External
Terminals" (Page 1-68).

Typical Command Processing Flow to Execute a Custom Instruction via

the External Terminals.

Controller PLC

Input the command No. and command parameters of a

desired custom instruction to %CmdCode and
%CmdParam respectively.
Command execution
request
When the %CmdStrobe terminal is short-circuited, the
Turn on the terminal assigned to %CmdStrobe on the
controller reads the command and parameters from
controller for longer than 1 ms.
%CmdCode and %CmdParam respectively.

The command execution starts.

Command execution
When the command execution starts, %CmdReady is status output The terminal assigned to %CmdReady of the controller
turned off (Command execution). turns off.

Command execution
When the command execution is completed, %Ack turns on completion notice Confirm the execution result by checking either of the
when the result was a success and %Nack turns on when terminals assigned to %Ack or %Nack with only the
the result was a failure (Command processing completed). output time on as specified in the global setting.
Command acceptable
notice The terminal assigned to %CmdReady on the controller
When the command processing is completed, turns on.
%CmdReady turns on.

*1 The behavior of %Busy varies depending on the busy condition in the controller global settings.

Also see the timing chart on the next page.

XG-X Comm-US 1-25

Controlling the System via External Terminals (Command Control)

Basic flow (an example of real-time command execution)

%CmdCode(0-3) Command
command type

%CmdParam(0-7) Parameter
command parameter
a
%CmdStrobe D A

b
%Ack (execution successful) B

b
%Nack (execution failed) B c

d
%CmdReady
C C

e (Always ON)
%Trg*Ready

A: 1 msec or more B: Same as the STO output time. C: Within 1 msec D: 500 µsec or more

(1) A command input is confirmed at the leading edge of %CmdStrobe.

(2) The result of the command execution (success or failure) can be checked by either %Ack or %Nack being turned on for
STO output ON time.
(3) %CmdReady turns on when %Ack or %Nack turns off.
(4) %CmdStrobe is ignored if it is input while %CmdReady is turned off. In this case, neither an %Ack nor %Nack response
is given for %CmdStrobe.
(5) If a command is not based on real-time execution, %Trg*Ready turns off during execution of the command.

For more details about commands compatible with real-time execution, see "Command List (Available Operation vs.
Situation)" (Page 2-9).

1-26 XG-X Comm-US

Controlling the System via External Terminals (Command Control)

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

4 Select [Communications & I/O] - [Terminal Block &
Changing the Settings of System Parallel Port] - [Outputs].
Variables Required for Command The [Communications & I/O - Terminal Block & Parallel
Control Port - Output Assignments] menu appears.

1 Select [System Settings] from the [Various Settings]

menu on the [Program Setting] tab.
The [System Settings] menu appears.

2 In the left pane of the [System Settings] menu,

select [Communications & I/O] - [Terminal Block &
Parallel Port] - [Inputs].
The [Communications & I/O - Terminal Block & Parallel
Port - Input Assignments] menu appears.

5 Specify the following system variables and bits as

the output variables assigned to F_OUT0 to 3 and
OUT0 to 23.
• %CmdReady: Permission for command input via
external terminals
• %Ack: Confirmation of normal completion of the
command received via external terminals
• %Nack: Confirmation of abnormal completion of the
command received via external terminals

Reference • Major system variables have already been

3 Specify the following system variables and bits as assigned by default. Refer to "Checking the
input variables assigned to F_IN0 to 3 and IN0 to 15. terminal assignment of the controller" (Page 1-8)
• %CmdCode: System variable for the custom for more details on the default assigned state.
instruction number • Selecting and right clicking system variables
of the same type and selecting [Consecutive
• %CmdParam: System variable for command
bit assignment] will assign bits consecutively
parameters (This variable is input to the custom in ascending order from the top of the selected
instruction argument *01.) variables.
• %CmdStrobe: Instruction confirmation input • This is designed under the presumption that
(leading edge synchronization) %CmdReady, %Ack, and %Nack will be used
for command control on the terminal. Although
Reference • Since major system variables have already these can also be assigned to CC-Link,
been assigned by default, it is possible to
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, and the
change them if necessary. Refer to "Checking
the terminal assignment of the controller" like, they use signals that are especially for
(Page 1-8) for more details on the default command control. For more details, see the
assigned state. description for each communication mode.
• Selecting and right clicking system variables
of the same type and selecting [Consecutive
bit assignment] will assign bits consecutively
6 Click [OK].
in ascending order from the top of the To apply the change to the controller, you need to
selected variables. Point
upload the global settings file to the controller and
• This is designed under the presumption that
%CmdCode, %CmdParam, and %CmdStrobe then restart the controller.
will be used for command control on the
terminal. Although these can also be assigned Reference If the bits assigned to %CmdParam are insufficient in
to CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, the default setting, increase the terminals assigned to
and the like, they use signals that are %CmdParam to increase the number of bits or use
especially for command control. For more %CmdParamOffset to input a command parameter of
details, see the description for each a large value by adding offset.
communication mode.

XG-X Comm-US 1-27

Outputting the Measurement Data via External Terminals (Result Output)

Outputting the Measurement Data via External Terminals

(Result Output)

You can output the data from parallel terminal output units 4 Select [Communications & I/O] - [Terminal Block &
through the external terminals. Parallel Port] - [Timing].
The [Communications & I/O - Terminal Block & Parallel
Point The measurement data output is available only
Port - Timing Settings] menu appears.
when the controller is in run mode. The outputs
including %Sto are disabled in the other modes.

Reference For timing charts related to the result output, refer

to "3. Typical Operations of the Data Output
Terminals" (Page 1-60).

Changing the Settings of System

Variables Required for Data Output

1 Select [System Settings] from the [Various Settings]

menu on the [Program Setting] tab.
The [System Settings] menu appears. 5 Set the terminal output.

Output Type
2 Select [Communications & I/O] - [Terminal Block & • Synchronize with STO output (default): Turn the
Parallel Port] - [Outputs]. output on and off for parallel terminal output units in
The [Communications & I/O - Terminal Block & Parallel synchronization with the %Sto state.
• One shot: Turn the output on for the time specified in
Port - Output Assignments] menu appears.
[One shot time (ms)] and turn off immediately after.

Reference If Output Type is set to [One shot], you cannot

select [Synchronize with STO output] for
Output Type(%JAHold).

A: Status change duration

Set the length of time from when the data is ready for
output to the leading edge of %Sto within the range 1
to 999 (ms). (Default: 5 ms)

B: Output signal ON duration

Set the time from the leading edge of %Sto to the
trailing edge of %Sto within the range 1 to 999 (ms).
(Default: 10 ms)
3 Specify the system variables %OutDataA to H for Reference • This setting is used in common with the
terminal data output synchronized with STO, output on time for %Ack and %Nack.
relevant bits (0 to 31), and the N.O./N.C. settings as • Only when [Handshake: ON] is selected, 0
ms can be set. When 0 ms is set, the
the output variables assigned to F_OUT0 to 3 and
timeout function of handshaking is
OUT0 to 23.
cancelled. The duration of %Ack and
Reference • By default, OUT0 to OUT15 have already %Nack is changed simultaneously when
been assigned bits 0 to 15 of %OutDataA. the cycle time is reached. See "Terminal
• Selecting and right clicking system data output timing (Handshake: ON)" (Page
variables of the same type and selecting 1-61) for more details.
[Consecutive bit assignment] will assign
C: Cycle time
bits consecutively in ascending order from
Set the time between two consecutive leading edges of
the top of the selected variables.
%Sto within the range 2 to 1000 (ms). (Default: 15 ms)

Reference When the duration is set to 0 ms, set it from 1

to 1000 ms.

1-28 XG-X Comm-US

Outputting the Measurement Data via External Terminals (Result Output)

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

• The time to be set should be A + B ≤ C
7 Click [OK].
Point
(excluding the duration of 0 ms).
To apply the change to the controller, you need to
• If the cycle time is longer than the actual Point
upload the global settings file to the controller and
execution cycle of a parallel terminal output
then restart the controller.
unit, the result output falls behind in
processing, resulting in an output buffer
overflow or skipped output. For more details,
refer to "Parallel Terminal Output Unit" in the
XG-X VisionEditor Reference Manual.
• The output of %Sto requires the execution
of at least one parallel terminal output unit
during measurement. %Sto is not output for
a measurement generation where no
parallel terminal output unit was executed
due to conditional branch or unit execution
availability.

Handshaking
Select [OFF] (default) or [ON] to perform handshaking
for parallel terminal input and output.

One shot time (ms)

Set the one shot time within the range 1 to 9999 (ms)
(Default: 500 ms). This is only valid if the [Output Type]
is set to [One shot].

6 Change the output type for %JAHold as required.

Output Type(%JAHold)
Select the method used to control the behavior of
%JAHold.
• Latching: Latch the output of an NG result for the
next inspection and beyond. (To unlatch, either reset
the controller, change the program, or turn the
outputs off.)
• Synchronize with STO output (default): Turn the
output on and off for parallel terminal output units in
synchronization with the %Sto state.
• One shot: Turn the output on for the time specified
in [One shot time (ms)] and turn off immediately
after.
• Even if you select [Synchronize with STO
Point
output], %Sto will not be output unless at
least one parallel terminal output unit is
executed in the flowchart.
• A parallel terminal output unit must be
executed to synchronize the output of
%JAHold with %Sto. In this case, the
terminal output unit does not have to be set
with output data if there is no other data to
output to the parallel port.

One shot time

Set the one shot time within the range 1 to 9999 (ms).
(Default: 500 ms) This is only valid if the [Output
Type(%JAHold)] is set to [One shot].

XG-X Comm-US 1-29

Outputting the Measurement Data via External Terminals (Result Output)

5 At [Full output buffer], select which should take

Specifying the Data that You Want priority when the output buffer becomes full: Image
to Output and the Output Method processing (flowchart transition) or data output.
• Skip output item: Give priority to image processing
Specify the combination of output variables already and skip the current data output.
assigned to the terminal block and the data that you want to • Wait for free space (Default): Give priority to data
output as well as the output method on the parallel terminal output.
output unit.
Reference • When the output buffer becomes full,
Reference Refer to "Parallel Terminal Output Unit" in the XG-X resume image processing after the data
VisionEditor Reference Manual. output is complete. You can check for the
skipping of data output by checking if [Data
Transferred] of the result data remains 0
1 In Flowchart View, double-click the parallel terminal after the output unit execution.
output unit to change its settings. • Alternatively, you can increase the output
The properties menu of the parallel terminal output unit buffer capacity at [Output buffer capacity
is displayed. setting] to increase the program memory
assigned to the output buffer. See the XG-X
VisionEditor Reference Manual for more
2 Click the [Output Settings] tab.
details.
• If there is free space in the output buffer, the
3 To use time-delayed separated outputs, specify the behavior is the same as [Skip output item]
data output count (1 to 8) in the [No. Items] field even when [Wait for free space] is selected.
(Default: 1).
6 If the unit does not execute, select whether to skip
4 Specify the result data or the variable, value, and the result data in [Skip unexecuted items].
bits (0 to 31) you want to output for the output If you change [OFF] (default setting) to [ON], if there
variable set in [Data Settings]. are units that did not execute due to a branch in the
flow or the like or there are units set to [Never Execute]
Point If you want to output with a time delay, specify
the number of times that you want to output and data for the nth argument is set to the result of a
data in the output variables. non-executed unit or only a blank field, data output for
the nth argument is skipped.

7 Click [OK].
If there is any other parallel terminal output unit in the
flowchart, repeat the steps from step 1 for each unit.

1-30 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

1. Operations at Startup

Typical operations at startup

ON Power on
Power
supply A B
OFF

%Busy*1
a
%Run E C

%Hist0Status[0] 0 ms or
more

%CmdReady D F
b
c
%Trg1Ready*2

%Cam1Ready

%Flash1

%Trg2Ready d

%Cam2Ready

%Flash2

%Ack

%Nack

%OutDataA

%OutDataAsyncA

%Error0

%Sto

%JAHold

%WaitReady

A: 20 sec. or more B: 1 sec. or more C: 5 ms or more D: 50 ms or more

E: 21 sec. or more F: 0.5 ms or more

(1) If [Startup Mode] is set to [Run Mode], the %Run terminal turns ON after startup. If [Startup Mode] is set to [Setup Mode],
the terminal stays OFF.
(2) Command inputs will be accepted when %CmdReady turns on and off once after startup and then turns on again.
(3) When the first capture unit is executed, %Trg1Ready turns on. After %Trg1Ready turns on, the input of %Trg1 is
accepted.
(4) This terminal remains off unless %Trg2 has been enabled in the settings. When %Trg2 has been enabled, this terminal
turns on in the same way as %Trg1Ready.
*1 The example above shows a waveform when the default busy condition setting is used.
*2 The example above shows a waveform when the capture unit for which the %Trg1 external trigger was set is positioned immediately
below the start unit.

XG-X Comm-US 1-31

Timing Chart

Normally open (N.O.)/normally closed (N.C.) reflection timing

ON Power on

Power supply

OFF

A
Open a b
N.O
All output terminals
(except for %Flash)
N.C
Close

B
Open a b
N.O
%Flash*
N.C
Close

A: 6 sec. or more B: 5 sec. or more

(1) The system enters normally open state immediately after startup, regardless of the settings.
(2) The normally closed settings are reflected after a certain period of time.

Typical operation of signals during exposure

%Trg1

a a
%Cam1ExpBusy

b b
%Trg1Ready

%Trg2

c c
%Cam2ExpBusy

d d
%Trg2Ready

e f g
%CamExpBusy

(1) %Cam1ExpBusy turns on during exposure.

(2) %Trg1Ready turns on after image transfer of Camera 1.
(3) %Cam2ExpBusy turns on during exposure.
(4) %Trg2Ready turns on after image transfer of Camera 2.
(5) %CamExpBusy turns on for either one of the cameras (Camera 1 in this case) during exposure.
(6) %CamExpBusy turns on for either one of the cameras (Camera 2 in this case) during exposure.
(7) %CamExpBusy turns on for either one of the cameras (Camera 1 and then Camera 2 in this case) during exposure.

When using an XT camera, the timing of each output corresponding to trigger input is different. For details, refer to
Reference "Typical operations when an XT camera is used" (Page 1-47).

1-32 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

2. Typical Operations for External Trigger Input
Using the image capture buffer
When the image capture buffer setting is ON, trigger inputs (image capture actions) are allowed asynchronously with the
measurement flow. This allows the next trigger input to be accepted as soon as the %Trg1(-4)Ready terminal turns on even
if the current image processing is not complete, so that the waiting time for capturing target images can be minimized.

Reference If there are multiple capture units in the flow, pre-capture can be immediately performed by using the capture setting
parameters for a capture unit that has been determined to be executed next (supported in Ver.1.2.0000 or later).

Image capture with the line scan camera or LJ-X/LJ-V series head
• Selecting [Fixed] capture: The concept for the time chart is the same as the area camera. The capture for the number of
lines set from the trigger input is the image capture.
• Selecting [Continuous] capture: Refer to "Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Continuous] is set,
and [Total Number of Lines] and [End capture by EXT signal] are disabled)" (Page 1-45), "Typical operations when the
LJ-X/LJ-V Series sensor head is used (When [Continuous] is set, and [Total Number of Lines] is disabled)" (Page 1-49).

Image capture with an XT camera

• When a program that uses an XT camera meets certain conditions, the next trigger input can be accepted when the
image capturing of the XT camera finishes (leading trigger function).
• For details on the leading trigger function, refer to "Typical operations when an XT camera is used" (Page 1-47).

Measurement using the image capture buffer (When the image capture buffer is reserved
for one fixed image and the image processing time is shorter than the image capture/
transmission time)
1st trigger 2nd trigger 3rd trigger

%Trg1 a

%Trg1Ready

1st image capture/ 2nd image capture/ 3rd image capture/

transmission transmission transmission
1st image processing 2nd image processing 3rd image processing

Measurement time

(1) Since %Trg1Ready is turned on, the next trigger input is accepted.

Measurement using the image capture buffer (When the image capture buffer is reserved
for one fixed image and the image processing time is longer than the image capture/
transmission time)
1st trigger 2nd trigger 3rd trigger

%Trg1

%Trg1Ready

Waiting time for processing Waiting time for processing

image of 2nd trigger image of 3rd trigger

1st image capture/ 2nd image capture/ 3rd image capture/

transmission transmission transmission
1st image processing 2nd image processing 3rd image processing

Measurement time

* When the next trigger is input during image processing, the measurement time shown on the screen also includes the
waiting time for completion of image processing.

XG-X Comm-US 1-33

A: Minimum trigger input time 1ms or more

B: FLASH duration Depends on the setting.
C: Response delay for %Trg1Ready leading edge Between 0 ms and 5 ms
(Value of a capture unit with one camera. The delay time varies depending on the flowchart
settings.)
D: Response delay for %Trg1Ready trailing edge 1ms or less
E: Image capture/transmission time (Depends on camera settings of the capture unit)

(1) When the process moves to a capture unit for the first time after the controller is turned on, the image capture buffer
operation starts. %Trg1Ready turns on and the unit starts waiting for a trigger input.
(2) The input of %Trg1 is accepted while the %Trg1Ready output is on. When a trigger is input, an image is captured and
transmitted by camera 1. %Trg1Ready turns off during this time.
(3) The trigger input turns on FLASH for the specified duration (can be changed with setting). See "Image capture and
FLASH output timing for the trigger operation" (Page 1-55) for more details.
(4) If there is space in the image capture buffer after image capture and transmission is complete, %Trg1Ready turns on to
accept the next trigger input even when the flowchart is in the course of image processing.

*1 The assignment of the trigger terminals and FLASH terminals can be changed. The above example shows the setting which assigns
%Flash1 to camera 1.

1-36 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Typical operations with a single trigger (when the image capture buffer is reserved for two
fixed images and two capture units are used)

1st measurement 2nd measurement

Flowchart Start Capture Image processing Capture Image processing End Start Capture Image processing Capture Image processing End
unit unit A unit A unit B unit B unit unit unit A unit A unit B unit B unit

Camera 1 Capture on A Capture on B Capture on A Capture on B Capture on A Capture on B

b c b c b
%Trg1

%Trg1Ready

(1) The above diagram assumes that capture unit B is to be executed next after completion of capture by capture unit A.
In this case, camera 1 performs pre-capture by using the capture setting parameters for capture unit B while image
processing unit A is being executed.
The pre-captured image is stored in the image capture buffer and is used later when the process reaches capture unit
B.
(2) If the image capture buffer becomes full with pre-captured images, the pre-capturing function is temporarily disabled
until a space becomes available in the buffer.
The %Trg1Ready is OFF during this period.
(3) When pre-captured images are used by a capture unit and a space becomes available in the image capture buffer, the
pre-capturing function is enabled and the %Trg1Ready turns ON.

Reference • If the flow includes branches or repetitions, a time delay may occur in determination of the capture unit that is to be
executed next, and this may make it impossible to perform pre-capture even when a space has become available in the
buffer.
• The operations represented by this timing chart are supported by the controller of Ver. 1.2.0000 or later.

XG-X Comm-US 1-37

Timing Chart

Typical operations with individual triggers (When the image capture buffer is reserved for
one fixed image, both trigger 1 and trigger 2 are used, and one condition is set to complete
the capture unit)

Flowchart (A) Start Unit Capture Unit Unit A Unit B End unit Start Unit

ON 햲 햴

%Trg1 A
OFF

%Flash1 B
*1
햳 햵

%Trg1Ready C D C

햲
%Trg2

%Flash2 B
*1
햳 햶 햷

%Trg2Ready C D E C

%Busy
(Trigger acceptance being disabled)

A: Minimum trigger input time 1ms or more

B: FLASH duration Depends on the setting.
C: Response delay for %Trg1Ready leading edge Between 0 ms and 5 ms
(Value of a capture unit with one camera. The delay time varies depending on the flowchart settings.)
D: Response delay for %Trg1Ready trailing edge 1ms or less
E: Image capture/transmission time (Depends on camera settings of the capture unit)

(1) Although %Trg1 and %Trg2 can be input in any order, the same trigger cannot be input consecutively. To input the same
trigger consecutively, the image capture buffer must be reserved for two or more images.
(2) The input of %Trg1 is accepted while %Trg1Ready is on. The input of %Trg2 is accepted while %Trg2Ready is on.
(3) When the cameras assigned to the triggers finish all image capture operations, the capture unit is complete and the
subsequent units are executed.
(4) When the image capture buffer is reserved for only one image, %Trg1Ready for camera 1, which completed image
capture and transmission earlier, does not turn on until the buffer regains some space when camera 2 completes image
capture and transmission to satisfy the conditions for the completion of the capture unit.
(5) When the cameras assigned to the triggers finish all image capture operations and satisfy the capture unit completion
conditions, the capture unit is complete and the subsequent units are executed.
(6) If there is space in the image capture buffer after the image has been captured and transmitted, %Trg2Ready for
camera 2 (which completed image capture and transmission) turns on to allow reception of the next trigger input even
when the flowchart is in the middle of image processing.

*1 The assignment of the trigger terminals and FLASH terminals can be changed. The above example shows the setting which assigns
%Flash1 to camera 1 and %Flash to camera 2.

1-38 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Typical operations with individual triggers (When the image capture buffer is reserved for
two fixed images, both trigger 1 and trigger 2 are used, and several conditions (of the
same priority) are set to complete the capture unit)

If you configured the following settings on the capture unit

Trigger Camera 1: Trigger 1
Camera 2: Trigger 2
Capture priority Camera 1: Condition 0
Camera 2: Condition 1

1st measurement 2nd measurement 3rd measurement

Flowchart Capture Unit Capture Unit Capture Unit
Start Unit A Unit B End Start Unit A Unit B End Start Unit A Unit C End
Unit (RSLT.STAT = 0) (Branch) (Camera 1) unit Unit (RSLT.STAT = 0) (Branch) (Camera 1) unit Unit (RSLT.STAT = 1) (Branch) (Camera 2) unit
c d f
1st image capture/ 2nd image capture/ 3rd image capture/ 4th image capture/
Camera 1 transmission transmission transmission transmission

1st image capture/ 2nd image capture/

Camera 2 transmission transmission

b b b

%Trg1

a e

%Trg1Ready

b b

%Trg2

%Trg2Ready

(1) When the process moves to a capture unit for the first time after the controller is turned on, the image capture buffer
operation starts. %Trg1Ready and %Trg2Ready turn on and the unit starts waiting for trigger inputs.
(2) %Trg1 and %Trg2 can be input in any order. Images can consecutively be captured asynchronously with the flowchart
operation until the buffer becomes full.
(3) When conditions to complete the capture unit have the same priority, the images in the image capture buffer are
referenced from the oldest unused one and priority is given to whichever condition is satisfied first. In this example, the
first image captured with camera 1 is used to complete the capture unit in the first measurement, then the next unit is
executed. If the camera to be used varies in every measurement like this example, you can position a branch unit under
the capture unit in the flowchart to evaluate RSLT.STAT (Status value) of the capture unit, so that only the measurement
units which use the camera included in the completion condition are executed.
(4) In the second measurement, the capture unit references the image capture buffer. As in the case of (3), priority is given
to whichever condition is satisfied first, the second image of camera 1 is used to complete the capture unit, and then the
next unit is executed.
(5) When the image capture buffer for camera 1 becomes full, %Trg1Ready turns off until the buffer is referenced by a
capture unit. If [Overwriting] is selected for the image capture buffer operation, the trigger input continues because the
oldest image is overwritten.
(6) In the third measurement, the capture unit references the image capture buffer. As in the case of (3), priority is given to
whichever condition is satisfied first, the first image of camera 2 is used to complete the capture unit, and then the next
unit is executed.

XG-X Comm-US 1-39

Timing Chart

Typical operations with individual triggers (both trigger 1 and trigger 2) when trigger delay is set

Flowchart (A) Start Unit Capture Unit Unit A Unit B End unit

ON a
%Trg1 A
OFF
Image sensor shutter B
b
of camera 1

Image sensor shutter B

b
of camera 2
C
c
%Flash1*1
C
c
%Flash2*1
d E d
%Trg1Ready D D

%Trg2 A

Image sensor shutter B

b
of camera 3

Image sensor shutter B b

of camera 4
C
c
%Flash3*1

C
c
%Flash4*1
e f
E F D
%Trg2Ready
%Busy
(Trigger acceptance
being disabled)

A: Minimum trigger input time 1ms or more

B: Trigger delay time (0 to 999.999 ms)
C: FLASH duration Depends on the setting.
D: Response delay for %Trg1Ready leading edge Between 0 ms and 5 ms
(Value of a capture unit with one camera. The delay time varies depending
on the flowchart settings.)
D: Response delay for %Trg1Ready trailing edge 1ms or less
F: Time between the start of image capture by camera 3 or 4 (whichever is earlier) and the completion of transmission
by camera 3 or 4 (whichever is later, depends on camera settings of the capture unit)

(1) Although %Trg1 and %Trg2 can be input in any order, the same trigger cannot be input consecutively. To input the same
trigger consecutively, the image capture buffer must be reserved for two or more images.
(2) When a trigger is input, the camera assigned to the trigger starts image capture after the trigger delay time set to each
camera in the capture unit.
(3) The FLASH output (%Flash1 to %Flash4) is linked to the image capture timing of the camera to which the trigger delay
was applied, and will turn on according to the settings of the capture unit. (The above example shows the case where
the on-delay for the FLASH output is a positive value.)
(4) When the image capture buffer is reserved for only one image, %Trg1Ready for cameras 1 and 2 (which completed
image capture and transmission earlier) will not turn on until the buffer regains some space when cameras 3 and 4
complete image capture and transmission, and satisfy the conditions to complete the capture unit.
(5) When the cameras assigned to the triggers finish all image capture operations and satisfy the capture unit completion
conditions, the capture unit is complete and the subsequent units are executed.
(6) If there is space in the image capture buffer after the image has been captured and transmitted, %Trg2Ready for
cameras 3 and 4, which completed image capture and transmission, turn on to allow reception of the next trigger input
even when the flowchart is in the middle of image processing.
*1 The assignment of the cameras and FLASH terminals can be changed. The above example shows the setting which assigns %Flash1
to camera 1, %Flash2 to camera 2, %Flash3 to camera 3, and %Flash4 to camera 4.

1-40 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Typical operations using the HDR processing in the image capture unit

Capture Unit
Unit A Unit B
Image capture (1st) Image capture (2nd) Image capture (3rd)
d

%Trg1
A a C C C
Image sensor
shutter
B b B B
%FLASH1
c

%Trg1Ready
A: Trigger delay time
B: FLASH on-delay
C: Processing time (changes depending on the image size)

(1) Trigger delay applies to the first captured image only.

(2) The FLASH on-delay applies to all captured images.
(3) When the HDR image capture is valid, the background image capture is OFF. The timing when %Trg1Ready is ON
(image capture ready) is the point reaching the next image capture unit.
(4) The number of images in the image capture unit for HDR image depends on the HDR settings.

XG-X Comm-US 1-41

Timing Chart

Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Fixed Length] is set and [End
capture by EXT signal] is disabled)

Capture unit settings

Number of Lines 10
Line Scan Interval Specify Encoder
1 pulse/line
Sampling mode x1
End capture by EXT signal Disabled

%Trg1

b
%Ext

Encoder (A phase)

A A

%FLASH1 B B
a
%Trg1Ready C C

Image capture Image1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Image2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

*The numbers indicate
the encoder coordinates.
A: Dependent on %Trg1 input timing and encoder input timing
B: FLASH duration Depends on the settings
C: %Trg1Ready fall response delay 1 ms or lower

(1) Capture starts with trigger input to %Trg1 and %Trg1Ready is always off during capture.
(2) %Ext input is ignored.

1-42 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Fixed Length] is set and [End
capture by EXT signal] is enabled)

Capture unit settings

Number of Lines 10
Line Scan Interval Specify Encoder
1 pulse/line
Sampling mode x1
End capture by EXT signal Enabled

%Trg1

b
%Ext E

Encoder (A phase)

A A

%FLASH1 B B
a
%Trg1Ready C C D

Image capture Image1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Image2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

*The numbers indicate
the encoder coordinates. Copies final scan line

A: Dependent on %Trg1 input timing and encoder input timing

B: FLASH duration Depends on the settings
C: %Trg1Ready fall response delay 1 ms or lower
D: %Trg1Ready rise response delay 1 ms or lower
E: %Ext rise response delay 1 ms or lower
(1) Capture starts with trigger input to %Trg1 and %Trg1Ready is always off during capture.
(2) Capture finishes with %Ext input and the final scan line is copied to the remaining lines.

XG-X Comm-US 1-43

Timing Chart

Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Fixed Length] is set and [Allow
Trigger Input During Line Capture] is enabled)

Capture unit settings

Number of Lines 10
[Allow Trigger Input During Line Capture] Enabled
Line Scan Interval Specify Encoder
1 pulse/line
Sampling mode x1

a a b
%Trg1

Encoder (A phase)

A A A

%FLASH1 B B
a a
%Trg1Ready C C C

Image capture Image1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Image2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

*The numbers indicate
the encoder coordinates.
Image3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A: Dependent on %Trg1 input timing and encoder input timing

B: FLASH duration Depends on the settings
C: %Trg1Ready fall response delay 1 ms or lower

(1) Capture starts with trigger input to %Trg1 and %Trg1Ready is off during one line capture.
(2) You can start capture of the next image by inputting a trigger to %Trg1 during capture.

1-44 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Continuous] is set, and [Total
Number of Lines] and [End capture by EXT signal] are disabled)

Capture unit settings

Number of Lines 10*
Overlapping Lines Two lines*
Total Number of Lines Disabled
Line Scan Interval Specify Encoder
1 pulse/line
Sampling mode x1
End capture by EXT signal Disabled
* For the purposes of this description, the number of lines is 10 and number of overlap lines is two. If you specify the
number of overlap lines, the minimum number of lines that you can actually set is 128 and the minimum number of
overlap lines is 64.

%Trg1

b
%Ext D E

c
%Reset

Encoder (A phase)

%FLASH1 B B
a
%Trg1Ready C

Image capture Image1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

*The numbers indicate
the encoder coordinates.
Image2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Erase 17 18 19 20 21

A: Dependent on %Trg1 input timing and encoder input timing

B: FLASH duration Depends on the settings
C: %Trg1Ready fall response delay 1 ms or lower
D: %Ext rise response delay 1 ms or lower
E: %Ext fall response delay 1 ms or lower

(1) Capture starts with trigger input to %Trg1 and %Trg1Ready is always off during capture.
(2) Image capture is paused with %Ext input.
(3) Continuous capture stops with %Reset input and data that was in the middle of being captured is deleted by reset
processing.

Reference • If [External Trigger] is set to [Reset Pulse Count and Trigger], the encoder count and coordinates are reset when an
external trigger is input.
• The behavior for %Ext input when [End capture by EXT signal] is enabled is the same as Fixed Length.
For more details, see the timing chart below.
"Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Fixed Length] is set and [End capture by EXT signal] is
enabled)" (Page 1-43)

XG-X Comm-US 1-45

Timing Chart

Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Continuous] is set, and [Total
Number of Lines] is enabled)

Capture unit settings

Number of Lines 10*
Overlapping Lines Two lines*
Total Number of Lines Enabled, 23 lines*
Line Scan Interval Specify Encoder
1 pulse/line
Sampling mode x1
* For the purposes of this description, the number of lines is 10, the number of overlap lines is two, and the number of total
lines is 23. If you specify the number of overlap lines, the minimum number of lines that you can set when the total
number of lines is enabled is 128, the minimum number of overlap lines is 64, and the minimum total number of lines is
128.

%Trg1

Encoder (A phase)

%FLASH1 B
a
%Trg1Ready C

Image capture Image1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

*The numbers indicate
the encoder coordinates.
Image2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
b

Image3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Copies final scan line

Total Number of Lines 23 lines

A: Dependent on %Trg1 input timing and encoder input timing

B: FLASH duration Depends on the settings
C: %Trg1Ready fall response delay 1 ms or lower

(1) Capture starts with trigger input to %Trg1 and %Trg1Ready is always off during line capture.
(2) Capture finishes if the number of capture lines reaches the total number of lines and the final scan line is copied to the
remaining lines.

Reference • If [External Trigger] is set to [Reset Pulse Count and Trigger], the encoder count and coordinates are reset when an
external trigger is input.
• The behavior for %Ext input is the same as Fixed Length.
For more details, see the timing chart below.
"Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Fixed Length] is set and [End capture by EXT signal] is
disabled)" (Page 1-42)
"Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Fixed Length] is set and [End capture by EXT signal] is
enabled)" (Page 1-43)

1-46 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Typical operations when an XR camera is used

Capture unit End Start

Unit A Unit B
Image Image Image Image processing Controller Unit Unit
capture (1st) capture (2nd) capture (nth) in the camera processing

%Trg1

A
%Trg1Ready

%Busy
B
%Cam1ExpBusy

A : Trigger delay time Depends on the settings

B : 0ms or more

Reference • The number of captures depends on the 3D measurement settings.

• The processing time after capturing each image depends on the image size and the 3D measurement settings.
• The above figure shows operations when the image capture buffer is on.

Typical operations when an XT camera is used

Capture unit
Image Image Image End Start
capture (1st) capture (2nd) capture (nth) Controller Unit A Unit B Unit
Unit
Image processing in the camera processing

%Trg
A

%Cam1ExpBusy
B

%Trg1Ready

%Busy

A : Trigger delay time + capture preparation time (10 ms or less)

B : 0ms or more

Reference • The number of captures depends on the image capturing parameter settings.
• The processing time of the image within the camera depends on the image size and the image capturing parameter
settings.
• The above figure shows operations when the leading trigger function is enabled.
When the program meets all the conditions shown below and provided the image capturing within the XT camera is
finished, this device can accept the next trigger without waiting for the image processing within the camera to finish
(leading trigger function).
- The image capture buffer is on.
- There is only one image capture unit in the inspection flowchart.
- Only one XT camera responds to the same trigger. (Or, when there are two XT cameras, they each respond to a
separate trigger.)
- The height is being captured and two or more light emissions (T + B, L + R, or T + B + L + R) are selected with the
projector selection.

XG-X Comm-US 1-47

Timing Chart

Typical operations when the LJ-X/LJ-V series head is used (When [Fixed Length] is set)
Capture unit settings
Number of Lines 10
Line Scan Interval Specify Encoder
1 pulse/line
Sampling mode x1

%Trg1

b
%Ext D

Encoder (A phase)

A A
a
%Trg1Ready B B C

Image capture Image1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Image2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

*The numbers indicate
the encoder coordinates. Copies final scan line

A: Dependent on %Trg1 input timing and encoder input timing

B: %Trg1Ready fall response delay 1 ms or lower
C: %Trg1Ready rise response delay 1 ms or lower
D: %Ext rise response delay 1 ms or lower

(1) Capture starts with trigger input to %Trg1 and %Trg1Ready is always off during capture.
(2) Capture finishes with %Ext input and the final scan line is copied to the remaining lines.

1-48 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Typical operations when the LJ-X/LJ-V Series sensor head is used (When [Continuous] is
set, and [Total Number of Lines] is disabled)

Capture unit settings

Number of Lines 10*
Overlapping Lines Two lines*
Total Number of Lines Disabled
Line Scan Interval Specify Encoder
1 pulse/line
Sampling mode x1
* For the purposes of this description, the number of lines is 10 and number of overlap lines is two. If you specify the
number of overlap lines, the minimum number of lines that you can actually set is 128 and the minimum number of
overlap lines is 64.

%Trg1

b
%Reset

Encoder (A phase)

A
a
%Trg1Ready B

Image capture Image1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

*The numbers indicate
the encoder coordinates.
Image2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Erase 17 18 19 20 21 22

A: Dependent on %Trg1 input timing and encoder input timing

B: %Trg1Ready fall response delay 1 ms or lower

(1) Capture starts with trigger input to %Trg1 and %Trg1Ready is always off during capture.
(2) Continuous capture stops with %Reset input and data that was in the middle of being captured is deleted by reset
processing.

XG-X Comm-US 1-49

Timing Chart

Typical operations when the LJ-X/LJ-V series head is used (When [Continuous] is set, and
[Total Number of Lines] is enabled)

Capture unit settings

%Trg1

Encoder (A phase)

A
a
%Trg1Ready B

Image capture Image1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

*The numbers indicate
the encoder coordinates.
Image2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
b

Image3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Copies final scan line

Total Number of Lines 23 lines

A: Dependent on %Trg1 input timing and encoder input timing

B: %Trg1Ready fall response delay 1 ms or lower

(1) Capture starts with trigger input to %Trg1 and %Trg1Ready is always off during capture.
(2) Capture finishes if the number of capture lines reaches the total number of lines and the final scan line is copied to the
remaining lines.

1-50 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Representative Operation when LumiTrax Mode is Used in the Capture Unit

Capture unit End Start

Unit A Unit B … Unit Unit
Image capture (1st) Image capture (2nd) … Image capture (nth) LumiTrax processing

%Trg1

A
Emission of light

Image sensor shutter B B B

C
%Trg1Ready

%BUSY

%Cam1ExpBusy

A: Trigger delay set time

CA-H048CX/H048MX/HX048C/HX048M Trigger delay set time + 90 μs (Normally open (N.O.)) or 230 μs (Normally closed (N.C.))
(when the shutter time is 1/10000 or more)
Trigger delay set time + 60 μs (Normally open (N.O.)) or 200 μs (Normally closed (N.C.))
(when the shutter time is below 1/10000)
CA-H200CX/H200MX/HX200C/HX200M Trigger delay set time + 60 μs (Normally open (N.O.)) or 200 μs (Normally closed (N.C.))
CA-H500CX/H500MX/HX500C/HX500M Trigger delay set time + 60 μs (Normally open (N.O.)) or 200 μs (Normally closed (N.C.))
CA-HF6400C/HF6400M/HF2100C/HF2100M Trigger delay set time + 60 μs (Normally open (N.O.)) or 200 μs (Normally closed (N.C.))
B: Time from start of light emitting to start of image capturing
When using the CA-DRW*X 60 μs (internal fixed value)
When using the CA-DRM*X 220 to 240 μs (internal fixed value)
When using the CA-DQP*X 100 μs (internal fixed value)
When using the CA-DQW40X 100 μs (internal fixed value)
C: Shutter interval
CA-H048CX/H048MX/HX048C/HX048M (512×480) Color camera: 1700μs, Monochrome camera1660μs, or exposure time + 260 μs, whichever is longer
CA-H048CX/H048MX/HX048C/HX048M (640×480) Color camera: 1920μs, Monochrome camera1880μs, or exposure time + 260 μs, whichever is longer
CA-H048CX/H048MX/HX048C/HX048M (784×596) Color camera: 2605μs, Monochrome camera2560μs, or exposure time + 260 μs, whichever is longer
CA-H200CX/H200MX (1600×1200) Color camera: 4150μs, Monochrome camera4130μs, or exposure time + 300 μs, whichever is longer
CA-H500CX/H500MX (1600×1200) Color camera: 4150μs, Monochrome camera4130μs, or exposure time + 300 μs, whichever is longer
CA-HX200C/HX200M (1600×1200) Color camera: 3500μs, Monochrome camera3490μs, or exposure time + 260 μs, whichever is longer
CA-HX500C/HX500M (1600×1200) Color camera: 3500μs, Monochrome camera3490μs, or exposure time + 260 μs, whichever is longer
CA-H500CX/H500MX (2432×2040) Color camera: 6930μs, Monochrome camera6905μs, or exposure time + 300 μs, whichever is longer
CA-HX500C/HX500M (2432×2040) Color camera: 5895μs, Monochrome camera5880μs, or exposure time + 260 μs, whichever is longer
CA-HF6400C/HF6400M/HF2100C/HF2100M Exposure time + transmission time* + 2 ms of software processing or more
(depends on the program and the controller status)
*: Transmission time (ms)
Channels Used
Camera Pixel count
1 2 4
CA-HF6400C 5104 × 4092 83.3 39.2 28.9
CA-HF6400M 5104 × 4092 83.2 39.2 28.9
CA-HF2100C 5104 × 4092 83.2 39.4 20.2
CA-HF2100M 5104 × 4092 83.2 39.3 20.2
CA-HF2100C 2432 × 2050 23.6 10.8 -
CA-HF2100M 2432 × 2050 23.5 10.8 -

Reference • The number of capture depends on the LumiTrax setting.

• The light emitting time is the sum of the shutter speed and B (time from start of light emitting to start of image capturing).
• The LumiTrax processing time after each capturing depends on the image size, camera type (color/monochrome), and
LumiTrax setting.
• The figure above shows the operation wherein the Image Capture Buffer is on.

XG-X Comm-US 1-51

Timing Chart

Representative Operation when MultiSpectrum Mode is Used in the Capture Unit

Capture unit End Start

Unit A Unit B … Unit Unit
Image capture (1st) Image capture (2nd) … Image capture (nth) MultiSpectrum

%Trg1

A
Emission of
light
Image sensor
shutter B B B

C
%Trg1Ready

%BUSY

%Cam1ExpBusy

A: Trigger delay set time

CA-H048MX/HX048M Trigger delay set time + 70 μs (when the shutter time is 1/10000 or more)
Trigger delay set time + 40 μs (when the shutter time is below 1/10000)
CA-H200MX/H500MX Trigger delay set time + 40 μs
CA-HX200M/HX500M Trigger delay set time + 40 μs

B: FLASH ON-Delay 220 to 240 μs (internal fixed value)

C: Shutter interval (the greater of the time values in (1) or (2) below)
1) CA-H048MX/HX048M (512×480) 1660μs
CA-H048MX/HX048M (640×480) 1880μs
CA-H048MX/HX048M (784×596) 2560μs
CA-H200MX (1600×1200) 4130μs
CA-HX200M (1600×1200) 3490μs
CA-H500MX (1600×1200) 4130μs
CA-H500MX (2432×2040) 6905μs
CA-HX500M (1600×1200) 3490μs
CA-HX500M (2432×2040) 5880μs
2) CA-H048MX Exposure time +260 μs
CA-H200MX/H500MX Exposure time +300 μs
CA-HX048M/HX200M/HX500M Exposure time +260 μs

Reference • The number of capture depends on the MultiSpectrum mode setting.

• The light emitting time is the sum of the shutter speed and B (time from start of light emitting to start of image capturing).
• The length of time for MultiSpectrum processing after each capture depends on the image size and MultiSpectrum mode
setting.
• The figure above shows the operation wherein the Image Capture Buffer is on.

1-52 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Typical operations when 3D Capture mode is used in the capture unit

Capture unit
Image Unit A Unit B ... End Unit Start Unit
Image Image ... Image
capturing in the Controller processing
capture (1st) capture (2nd) capture (nth) camera

%Trg1

A
%Trg1Ready

%Busy
B
%Cam1ExpBusy

A : Trigger delay time Depends on the setting.

B : 0 ms or more

Reference • The number of captures depends on the 3D capture settings.

• The processing time after capturing each image depends on the image size and the 3D capture settings.
• The figure above shows the operation wherein the Image Capture Buffer is on.

XG-X Comm-US 1-53

Timing Chart

Typical operations when Outline Capture mode is used in the capture unit

Capture unit
Unit A Unit B ... End Unit Start Unit
Image capture (1st) Image capture (2nd) ... Image capture (nth) Profile image
capture processing

%Trg1

A
Emission of
light
Image sensor
shutter B B B

C
%Trg1Ready

%BUSY

%Cam1ExpBusy

A: Trigger delay set time

CA-H048CX/H048MX Trigger delay set time + 70 μs (when the shutter time is 1/10000 or more)
Trigger delay set time + 40 μs (when the shutter time is below 1/10000)
CA-H200CX/H200MX/H500CX/H500MX Trigger delay set time + 40 μs

B: FLASH ON-Delay
CA-DQP*X ：100μs (internal fixed value)

C: Shutter intervals (the longer time from the values in (1) or (2) below)
1) CA-H048CX/H048MX（512×480） Color camera: 1700 μs, Monochrome camera: 1660 μs
CA-H048CX/H048MX（640×480） Color camera: 1920 μs, Monochrome camera: 1880 μs
CA-H048CX/H048MX（784×596） Color camera: 2605 μs, Monochrome camera: 2560 μs
CA-H200CX/H200MX（1600×1200） Color camera: 4150 μs, Monochrome camera: 4130 μs
CA-H500CX/H500MX（1600×1200） Color camera: 4150 μs, Monochrome camera: 4130 μs
CA-H500CX/H500MX（2432×2040） Color camera: 6930 μs, Monochrome camera: 6905 μs
2) CA-H048CX/H048MX Exposure time +260μs
CA-H200CX/H200MX/H500CX/H500MX Exposure time +300μs

Reference • The number of captures depends on the outline capture settings.

• The outline image capture processing time after capturing each image depends on the image size, the camera type
(color/monochrome), and the outline capture settings.
• The figure above shows the operation wherein the Image Capture Buffer is on.

1-54 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Image capture and FLASH output timing for the trigger operation

Point • If external flash (%Flash 1 - 4) is assigned to the illumination expansion unit (CA-DC40E/50E/60E; sold separately), start
and finish for (B) is accelerated only by the length of (A) at maximum. Moreover, the lighting control response for
LIGHTOFF on the CA-DC40E/50E/60E is within 1 ms.
• If one trigger is selected for multiple cameras with different trigger delay settings, FLASH is outputted multiple times
when the cameras capture images, therefore the second and later outputs may overlap with the preceding output. If a
startup signal is required for each image capture, such as when using a strobe light device, adjust the FLASH duration
so that the outputs do not overlap.
• If you use an external light and an illumination expansion unit at the same time, assign the External Flash to the external
light and Emission Timing to the illumination expansion unit.
• The timing in which light is actually emitted corresponding to the timing in which the controller’s FLASH output rises
differs according to factors such as the response time of the light used.

When FLASH on-delay is a positive value

ON
%Trg1
OFF B
A
Image sensor shutter a D
C c
%Flash1 b

A: CA-035C/035M, CA-HS035C/HS035M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
XG-035C/035M, XG-S035C/S035M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H035C/H035M, XG-H035C/H035M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-200C/200M, CA-HS200C/HS200M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
XG-200C/200M, XG-S200C/S200M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 50 µs)
CA-H200C/H200M, XG-H200C/H200M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H500C/H500M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
XG-H500C/H500M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 20 µs)
XG-HL02M/HL04M/HL08M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H2100C/H2100M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H048CX/H048MX, CA-HX048C/HX048M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H200CX/H200MX, CA-HX200C/HX200M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H500CX/H500MX, CA-HX500C/HX500M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-HL02MX/04MX/08MX : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 10 µs)
CA-HF2100C/HF2100M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-HF6400C/HF6400M : 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
When trigger delay is set: (All models) Trigger delay set time + 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
B: Shutter time
C: FLASH on-delay (0 to 50000 µs) ±10 µs
D: FLASH duration (0 to 999.9 ms)

(1) After receiving the %Trg1 input, the controller gives an order for a camera to operate the Image sensor shutter.
(2) The FLASH on-delay is the time to start the FLASH output based on ordering timing of the Image sensor shutter operation.
(3) The FLASH duration is the length of time the FLASH output is turned on.

XG-X Comm-US 1-55

Timing Chart

When FLASH on-delay is a negative value

ON
%Trg1
B
OFF
C b
Image sensor shutter
D
a
%Flash1 A

A: 60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (±10 µs) *1

When trigger delay is set: (All models) Trigger delay set time +60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed) (Response fluctuation: -10 to +5 µs)
B: Shutter time
C: CA-035C/035M, CA-HS035C/HS035M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
XG-035C/035M, XG-S035C/S035M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H035C/H035M, XG-H035C/H035M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-200C/200M, CA-HS200C/HS200M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
XG-200C/200M, XG-S200C/S200M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 50 µs)
CA-H200C/H200M, XG-H200C/H200M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H500C/H500M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
XG-H500C/H500M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 20 µs)
XG-HL02M/HL04M/HL08M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H2100C/H2100M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H048CX/H048MX, CA-HX048C/HX048M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H200CX/H200MX, CA-HX200C/HX200M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-H500CX/H500MX, CA-HX500C/HX500M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-HL02MX/04MX/08MX : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 10 µs)
CA-HF2100C/CA-HF2100M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
CA-HF6400C/CA-HF6400M : Absolute value of FLASH on-delay (-50000 to 0 µs) (Response delay: 0 to 5 µs)
D: FLASH duration (0 to 999.9 ms)

(1) When FLASH on-delay is negative, the %Flash1 output turns on first after the %Trg1 input is received.
(2) After a delay for the absolute value of %Flash1 on-delay, the controller gives an order for a camera to operate the Image
sensor shutter.

*1 When one FLASH terminal is assigned to %Trg1

1-56 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

When several FLASH terminals are assigned
It is also possible to assign several FLASH terminals to a single camera. The timing chart in this instance is shown below.

Setting example
• %Trg1 is assigned to camera 1.
• %Flash1 on-delay: -200 μs
• %Flash2 on-delay: -100 μs
• %Flash3 on-delay: 150 μs
• %Flash4 on-delay: 250 μs
ON
60 µs (Normally open) or 200 µs (Normally closed)
%Trg1
OFF
FLASH1 duration

a
%Flash1 200 µs
FLASH2 duration

b
%Flash2 100 µs
Shutter time

Image sensor c
shutter of
camera 1
150 µs FLASH3 duration

d
%Flash3
250 µs FLASH4 duration

e
%Flash4

(1) After the %Trg1 input is received, the %Flash1 output turns on because its on-delay is a negative value with the largest
absolute value.
(2) The %Flash2 output turns on.
(3) After a delay for the absolute values of the on-delays of %Flash1 and %Flash2, the controller gives an order for camera
1 to operate the Image sensor shutter.
(4) The %Flash3 on-delay is the time to start the %Flash3 output based on ordering timing of the Image sensor shutter
operation.
(5) The %Flash4 on-delay is the time to start the %Flash4 output based on ordering timing of the Image sensor shutter
operation.

XG-X Comm-US 1-57

Timing Chart

Reference: Current image display through continuous updating

When [Multi-Image] is set as the screen update mode for a capture unit, images are captured continuously with the
assigned camera. When the image capture buffer setting is OFF, images are captured continuously only when the capture
unit is waiting for a trigger. When the image capture buffer setting is ON, images are captured continuously when image
capture is enabled and there is available space in the image capture buffer.
When a trigger is input, the next image captured will become the current image, instead of the image captured at the
trigger input.

Capture Capture Capture

Image A Image B Image C

Trigger input

When several triggers are set in continuous update mode, the image captured next to a trigger input will to be the current
image for the trigger. When the image capture buffer setting is OFF, the camera activated with a trigger input stops image
capturing until the process moves to the next unit.

For example, when the image capture buffer setting is OFF and triggers are assigned as follows, the current images will
change from camera images 1B, 2E, 3D, to 4D.

Trigger 1 Camera 1 Trigger 3 Camera 3

Trigger 2 Camera 2 Camera 4

Start Unit Capture Unit Unit A

Capture Capture
Camera 1
Camera image 1A Camera image 1B

Capture Capture Capture Capture Capture

Camera 2
Camera image 2A Camera image 2B Camera image 2C Camera image 2D Camera image 2E

Capture Capture Capture Capture

Camera 3
Camera image 3A Camera image 3B Camera image 3C Camera image 3D

Capture Capture Capture Capture

Camera 4
Camera image 4A Camera image 4B Camera image 4C Camera image 4D

Trigger 1 input Trigger 3 input Trigger 2 input

1-58 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Reference: Relationship among the %Busy terminal, trigger, and capture unit

When the busy condition is [Trigger acceptance being disabled]

When the busy condition is set while trigger acceptance is disabled, %Busy turns on when any of %Trg1Ready to
%Trg4Ready is turned off.

%Trg1Ready

%Trg2Ready

%Busy

When the busy condition is [Image being processed]

When the busy condition is set while an image is being processed, %Busy turns on when a unit other than the start unit and
capture unit is executed.

End Start Capture End Start Capture End

Flowchart Unit A Unit B
unit Unit Unit
Unit A Unit B
unit Unit Unit
Unit A Unit B
unit

%Busy

XG-X Comm-US 1-59

Timing Chart

3. Typical Operations of the Data Output Terminals

Terminal data output timing (Handshake: OFF)

Reference This example shows an instance where the output count is set to three for a parallel terminal output unit.

Parallel Terminal Output Unit

햳 1st data 2nd data 3rd data

%OutDataA

햵 Flowchart execution result when the parallel terminal output unit is executed.
%JAHold

D 햲 A B햴

%Sto

A: Status change time (1 to 999 ms) B: Output on time (1 to 999 ms) C: Cycle time (2 to 1000 ms)
D: Output start delay (0 ms or more)

(1) Time A to C can be changed with settings. For more details, refer to "Controller System Settings" in the XG-X VisionEditor
Reference Manual.
(2) The measurement result data is output to %OutDataA. The data is output sequentially every time %OutDataA is
switched on and off.
(3) When handshake is OFF, the data is switched automatically for each preset time. The %Sto output turns on every time
the data is switched, and turns off after the output time passes.
(4) The %JAHold operation is enabled only when the Output Type(%JAHold) setting is [Sync with STO] and the parallel
terminal output unit is executed.

The %Sto output turns on when time A (Status change time) passes after the parallel terminal output unit finishes output of
the first data. The %Sto output turns off after time B ms (Output time) passes.

1-60 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Terminal data output timing (Handshake: ON)

Reference This example shows an instance where the output count is set to three for a parallel terminal output unit.

Parallel Terminal Output Unit

C
햲
1st data 2nd data 3rd data
%OutDataA
햶 햹

Flowchart execution result when the parallel terminal output unit is executed.
%JAHold

G A A B A B

햳 햵 햷 햸
%Sto D

햴 E
%Pst F

A: Status change time (1 to 999 ms) B: Output on time (1 to 999 ms) C: Cycle time (2 to 1000 ms)
D: Response time for %Pst OFF (0.5 ms or less) E: Minimum input time for %Pst (1.0 ms or more)
F: Response time for %Pst ON (0.5ms or less) G: Output start delay (0 ms or more)

(1) The output data is sent to %OutDataA. The data is output sequentially every time %OutDataA is switched on and off.
(2) The %Sto output turns on when time A ms (Status change time) passes after the parallel terminal outputs the first data.
To read each output, synchronize the timing with the leading edge of %Sto.
(3) When handshake is ON, the data is switched at the trailing edge of %Pst input.
(4) When the on state of %Sto is confirmed and the %Pst input is turned from on to off, the %Sto output turns off.
(5) When the %Pst input is turned from off to on, the data is switched.
(6) The %Sto output turns on when time A ms (Status change time) passes after the data is switched. Repeating steps 4 to
6 switches the output data sequentially. After all of the data from the parallel terminal has been outputted, repeating
these steps no longer switches the data or turns the %Sto on and off.
(7) If the %Pst input does not turn from on to off after the %Sto output is turned on, the %Sto output automatically turns off
after time B ms (Output on time) passes.
(8) If the %Pst input does not turn from off to on after the %Sto output turns off, %OutDataA automatically switches after
output for C ms (Cycle time). In other words, if there is no handshake operation by %Pst input, [Handshake: ON] acts in
the same as [Handshake: OFF].
(9) The %JAHold operation is enabled only when the Output Type(%JAHold) setting is [Sync with STO] and the parallel
terminal output unit is executed.

Reference When the Handshake is set to [ON] and the On Time (ms) is set to [0] in the Terminal Block & Parallel Port menu (Page 1-23)
of the system settings, the timeout function is disabled and the data can be changed at the desired timing.

When the timeout function is disabled, the output after the first %Sto leading edge stops if the handshake control of the
Point
%Pst input is not available. The output data of the parallel terminal output unit during stop is stored in the buffer memory.
When the buffer memory is full, new output data cannot be stored in the buffer. In this case, the parallel terminal output unit
which is set to 'output priority' must wait for free space in the buffer with the handshake control. Therefore, the flow
processing itself stops.

XG-X Comm-US 1-61

Timing Chart

Typical operations when the output cycle is longer than the execution cycle of an output
unit
When the output cycle is longer than the execution cycle of an output unit (parallel terminal output unit, image output unit,
and data output unit), the unit execution time may become longer because the system will wait for free space in the output
buffer to output result data, or the data output process itself may be skipped.
The output cycle may be longer than the execution cycle of an output unit in the following cases:
• When the execution time of the flowchart is short and trigger inputs are issued continuously
• When many output units are positioned consecutively
• When an output unit is executed repeatedly

When the output process is prioritized ([Wait for free space] was selected)

햲 햴
Flowchart n-2nd n-1st nth
operation output unit output unit output unit

Output device *1 n-2nd data output n-1st data output nth data output

햵
Output buffer overflow 햳

(1) When the output cycle is longer than the output unit execution cycle, the output data is stored in the output buffer in the
controller before being output.
(2) When the system attempts to store data of the nth data output to the output buffer but there is no available space, the
output buffer overflows.
(3) When the output buffer overflows, the process halts at the output unit until space becomes available in the output buffer.
(4) In the diagram above, space becomes available in the output buffer after the n-1st data output finishes, and then the nth
data output starts.

In the instance that the output cycle continues to be longer than the output unit execution cycle in this way, the output unit
execution time increases.
To prevent this, set the output unit execution cycle longer than the output cycle.

When the image processing is prioritized ([Skip output item] was selected)

햳
Flowchart n-2nd n-1st nth n+1st
operation output unit output unit output unit output unit

Output device *1 n-2nd data output n-1st data output n+1st data output

Output buffer overflow 햲

(1) If the output buffer for each output device becomes full, the output data is thinned out.
In the above example, when the system attempts to output the result for the nth trigger, the data is skipped because the
output buffer is full.
(2) If there is free space in the output buffer when the n+1th output unit is executed, the n+1th data output is performed.

*1 The output device refers to the terminal, SD1, SD2, RS-232C, Ethernet, PLC link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, PC
program, FTP, VisionDataStorage (USB) or USB HDD, and each device has a separate output buffer.

1-62 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

4. Typical Operations of the Major Control Input/Output Terminals

%Reset terminal operation (in trigger waiting state)

%Reset

B
%Trg1Ready

B 햲
%Busy
(Trigger acceptance being disabled)

A: Minimum input time for %Reset (1 ms or more)

B: Response delay for %Trg1Ready (1 ms or less)

%Reset terminal operation (during flowchart execution)

%Reset

Flowchart Unit A Unit B Unit C

Reset operation

%Trg1Ready 햴

C C

C: Response delay for %Trg1Ready (1 ms or less)

(1) The completion of the RESET operation is confirmed by monitoring of the trailing edge of %Busy.
(2) When the %Reset input turns on during flowchart execution, the RESET operation is immediately applied to the current
unit if it is a calculation, timing, or capture unit in a waiting state. If the current unit is not one of these, the RESET
operation is applied after execution of the unit is complete.
(3) During the RESET operation, the %Trg1Ready terminal is forcibly turned off once and turned back on after the reset
operation is complete. The RESET operation also cancels the input waiting state of any of %Trg2 to 4 and resets it to the
state before the trigger input.

XG-X Comm-US 1-63

Timing Chart

%Reset terminal operation (during data output)

%Reset

Reset operation

%OutDataA C

%Sto 햲 햲

%OutDataAsyncA C

햳
Output device *1 n-2nd data output n-1st data output nth data output

(cancelled)

C: 0 ms or more (Delay time depends on the flowchart settings.)

(1) If %Reset is input before data output, no data is output.

(2) When % Reset is input, data output is canceled after the current unit is finished outputting data, and no more data will
be output until the RESET operation is complete. In the above example, the n-1st data output is performed, however, all
of the nth and subsequent data outputs are canceled. As for the output of archived data, the reset is executed after
completing transmission of all archived data for the measurement cycle currently being output and then interrupting the
output of the remaining data.

*1 The output device refers to the SD1, SD2, RS-232C, Ethernet, PLC link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, PC program, FTP,
VisionDataStorage (USB) or USB HDD.

1-64 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

%Test terminal operation
The input from the %Test terminal can be used to stop the output operation of each output unit.

a
%Test A e
B
a
%OutDataA

a
%Sto

a d
%OutDataAsyncA B B

Output device*
Data output b c

A: Minimum input time for %Test (1 ms or more) B: Response delay for %Test (0.5 ms or less)

(1) When the %Test input turns on, output terminals are turned off.
(2) As for output to RS-232C, Ethernet, PLC, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, SD card, PC program, FTP,
VisionDataStorage (USB) or USB HDD, even when the %Test terminal turns on during the data output of a unit, that data
output does not stop.
(3) If the %Test terminal is on when the system attempts to start data output from an output unit to RS-232C, Ethernet, PLC,
CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, SD card, PC program, FTP, VisionDataStorage (USB) or USB HDD, the data
output is not performed.
(4) When the %Test input turns off, %OutDataAsyncA returns to the state before %Test was input.
(5) The data output which was interrupted by the %Test terminal is not resumed even when the terminal turns off.
* Output devices are SD1 and SD2, RS-232C, Ethernet, PLC link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, PC
programs, FTP, VisionDataStorage (USB) and USB HDDs.
When CC-Link, PROFINET, EtherCAT, and EtherNet/IP are used, the state during the time of %Test input is held (update
stopped).

Point When the %Test turns on data archiving is also stopped, however, the output of the remaining archived data continues.

XG-X Comm-US 1-65

Timing Chart

%Ext terminal operation

%Ext A
햲 햳

%Trg1Ready B B

A: Minimum input time for %Ext (1 ms or more) B: Response delay for %Trg1Ready (0.5 ms or less)

(1) When the %Ext input turns on, %Trg1Ready turns off. When this occurs, new image capture operations stop for all cameras and
trigger inputs are not accepted (all of the terminals, RS-232C, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, PLC link, Ethernet, and
internal triggers).
(2) When the %Ext input turns off, the %Trg1Ready output returns to a state based on the current camera condition.

Reference • If the %Ext input turns ON during image capture, image capture is continued in the area camera (including when HDR is
enabled and LumiTrax/MultiSpectrum mode is used) and the 3D camera until capture of all necessary images is
completed.
• For more details about operations when %Ext input turns ON during image capture with a linescan camera and LJ-X/LJ-V
Series sensor head, see the timing chart below.
"Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Fixed Length] is set and [End capture by EXT signal] is
disabled)" (Page 1-42)
"Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Fixed Length] is set and [End capture by EXT signal] is
enabled)" (Page 1-43)
"Typical operations when a linescan camera is used (When [Continuous] is set, and [Total Number of Lines] and [End
capture by EXT signal] are disabled)" (Page 1-45)
"Typical operations when the LJ-X/LJ-V series head is used (When [Fixed Length] is set)" (Page 1-48)
• If you are using the unit for LJ-X/LJ-V input (CA-E100LJ/E110LJ/E200LJ), you can stop laser emissions by opening the
circuit between the REMOTE terminal and the RMT COM terminal. This behavior is equivalent to the %Ext terminal.

• Trigger inputs can be disabled by the %Ext input when the controller is in run mode or setup mode.
Point
• When the %Ext input is on, trigger inputs are disabled and no more new images are captured. If, however, unused
images remain in the image capture buffer, the capture unit continues operation. Consequently, the processing of the
flowchart itself may not stop immediately after %Ext is turned on.

1-66 XG-X Comm-US

Timing Chart

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

%JAHold terminal operation

When the output type is [Latching]

n-1st flowchart execution nth flowchart execution n+1st flowchart execution n+2nd flowchart execution n+3rd flowchart execution
Execution result: NG Execution result: OK Execution result: OK Execution result: OK Execution result: OK
햲 햳
B
%JAHold

%Test A

A: Minimum input time for %Test (1 ms or more) B: Response delay for %JAHold (0.5 ms or less)

(1) When the result of the n-1st flowchart execution is NG, %JAHold turns on when the flowchart ends.
(2) When the result of the preceding flowchart is NG, %JAHold remains on regardless of the results of the subsequent
flowcharts.
(3) When %Test input is turned from off to on, %JAHold turns off, and this state is updated when the next flowchart ends.
%JAHold also turns off when the controller is reset, the program is changed, the operation mode is switched between
run and setup mode, the output is disabled with the OE command, or the output is disabled in the flow editor or unit
properties menu.

When the output type is [Sync with STO]

Refer to "Terminal data output timing (Handshake: OFF)" (Page 1-60) and "Terminal data output timing (Handshake: ON)"
(Page 1-61).

When the output type is [One shot]

%Test B

A: One shot time (1 to 9999 ms)

B: Minimum input time for %Test (1 ms or more)
C: Response delay for %JAHold (0.5 ms or less)

(1) When the result of flowchart execution is NG, %JAHold turns on when the flowchart ends.
(2) The NG state is held for the specified one shot time, and then the NG state is canceled.
(3) When %Test input is turned from off to on, %JAHold turns off, and this state is updated when the next flowchart ends.
%JAHold also turns off when the controller is reset, the program is changed, the operation mode is switched between
run and setup mode, the output is disabled with the OE command, or the output is disabled in the flow editor or unit
properties menu.

Point For one shot, %Sto is not output.

XG-X Comm-US 1-67

Timing Chart

5. Typical Operations when a Command is Executed via the External

Terminals

Basic flow of command execution

• While a command which affects the measurement processing time is being executed, %Trg1 to 4Ready may turn off.
Point
• For more details on the commands available via external terminal communication, refer to "Command List (Available
Operation vs. Situation)" (Page 2-9).

Custom instruction No.

%CmdCode

Command parameter
%CmdParam
햲

%CmdStrobe A B

C 햳
%Busy C
(Command being executed *1)
햴
%Ack D

햴
%Nack D 햵

햶
%CmdReady C C

A: Input setup time for %CmdStrobe (0.5 ms or more) B: Minimum input time for %CmdStrobe (1 ms or more)
C: Response delay for %CmdReady (0.5 ms or less) D: External terminal output on time (depends on the global settings)

(1) A command input is confirmed at the leading edge of %CmdStrobe.

(2) %Busy turns on to indicate that a command is being executed.
(3) The result of the command execution (success or failure) can be checked by either %Ack (success) or %Nack (failure)
being turned on for the duration of the external terminal output on time.
(4) %CmdReady turns on when %Ack or %Nack turns off.
(5) %CmdStrobe is ignored if it is input while %CmdReady is turned off. In this case, neither %Ack nor %Nack response is
given for %CmdStrobe.

*1 The waveform of %Busy varies depending on the busy condition in the global settings. The diagram above shows a waveform when
only [Executing a command] is selected for the busy condition. Note that as the default settings also include other conditions, the
behavior such as the above does not occur. Furthermore, [Executing a command] only refers to commands from the terminal block. In
other words, this condition cannot be used to check the commands executed via other methods (PLC link, etc.).

1-68 XG-X Comm-US

Troubleshooting

Control/Data Output via External Terminals

Common operational errors that may occur

When the trigger is input for inspection at The I/O Monitor & diagnostic function
constant intervals, and after a certain monitors ON/OFF of the %Sto, but the
period of time, the triggers are not actual operation is not displayed in real
accepted. time.
The data from the external terminal cannot be output in The I/O diagnostic may not follow fast changes of the
time and an overflow from the output buffer of the parallel terminal status due to restricted display update speed. To
terminal output unit may have occurred. check changes at a high speed, use the Trace Log Viewer.
This occurs when the priority of the parallel terminal output See the XG-X VisionEditor Reference Manual for more
unit is set to [Wait for free space] and the cycle time is details on the Trace Log Viewer.
longer than the execution cycle of the parallel terminal
output unit. Set "Cycle time (ms)" (Page 1-19) to be shorter
than the execution cycle of the parallel terminal output unit. The controller is switched to run mode, but
%Trg*Ready is not output.

The %JAHold is to be read using the %Sto There is a possibility that the flow is in waiting status at a
non-image capture unit.
strobe signal, but the %Sto is not
Check the waiting status of the timing unit including the
outputting. wait terminal I/O unit, using %WaitReady.
The output of %Sto requires the execution of at least one
parallel terminal output unit during measurement.
Even if [Sync with STO output] is selected, %Sto will not be
output unless at least one parallel terminal output unit is
executed in the flowchart.
Even if Output Type(%JAHold) is set to [One shot], %Sto is
not output.

Need to confirm if the wiring of an external

device is correct.
The I/O Monitor & Diagnostic tool (Page 1-15) allows for
the checking of the status of incoming and outgoing
signals via the inputs and outputs of the terminal block and
parallel port.
This is very useful for verifying the connection status of
external equipment wired to the terminals on the controller.
However, if the system variables %Flash1 to %Flash4 are
assigned to F_OUT terminal outputs, these terminals
cannot be monitored through the I/O diagnostic function.

XG-X Comm-US 1-69

Troubleshooting

Error Messages

Errors Messages not Assigned to System Variables %Error0 or %Error1

These errors by default are not assigned to %Error0 or %Error1 but can be assigned through the XG-X Vision Editor software.

Error Message Cause Corrective Action Error

1-70 XG-X Comm-US

Control/Data Output Overview of Control/
via PLC-Link Data Output via PLC-Link

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

PLC-Link is an intelligent dedicated link between the
controller and the PLC that allows direct input/output
access to data memories in a PLC (programmable logic
controller) via the RS-232C or Ethernet interface.
The controller can execute commands in addition to the
Overview of System Control/
data output of measurement results. Command execution
Data Output can be configured to use polling or the system's PLC
terminal control input.
Control/Data Output via Point
• PLC-Link cannot be used on the RS-232C and
Ethernet interfaces simultaneously.
External Terminals • The RS-232C interface cannot be used in
general no protocol mode when it is used for
PLC link.
q Control/Data Output via
• The PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET,
PLC-Link and EtherCAT cannot be used at the same time
(PLC-Link cannot be used when CC-Link,
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET or EtherCAT is enabled).
Control/Data Output via • If the mode is changed to Setup mode during
PLC-Link communication, data output stops and
CC-Link commands other than some that can be
executed in Setup mode are disabled. For more
Control/Data Output via details, see "Chapter2 Commands" (Page2-1).
• Other than the Ethernet port on some models,
EtherNet/IP target PLCs are only compatible with
connections via the link unit. For details about
PLCs that can be used in combination with
Control/Data Output via controllers, see "Via Ethernet interface" (Page 1-
75).
PROFINET
Using the PLC-Link enables the following operations.
Control/Data Output via
Controlling the system via PLC-Link
EtherCAT You can control the system by specifying a desired
command in the DM (data memory) of a PLC. There are
Control/Data Output via two types of control methods: Polling (Page 1-90) and PLC
terminal (Page 1-95).
No protocol communication
Outputting data via PLC-Link
FTP Client/Server Function You can output measurement data in the controller directly
to the DM (data memory) of a PLC (Page 1-87).

Reference DM (data memory) is referred to as data register

(D) for the Mitsubishi Electric PLC, as data memory
(D) for the Omron PLC, and as data register (M) for
the YASKAWA Electric PLC.

When you upload the system settings modified for

Point
[PLC-Link] communication mode and then restart
the controller to start operation, initialization is
repeated until a connection to the PLC is
established. If there is no response from the
connected PLC, the "PLC communication has
failed" warning is displayed every time initialization
is performed (Default setting). If the warning
continues to appear, check to see if the PLC is
connected correctly.

XG-X Comm-US 1-71

Overview of Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

Operation Flow

Set connection settings of the PLC-Link

RS-232C interface
• Connect to the controller according to the PLC in use (Page 1-73).
• Make changes to the appropriate settings to connect the
controller to the PLC-Link device (Page 1-82).
Main settings: Communication speed, stop bit, flow control,
command execution method, command specification method,
and various addresses (data output device address)
Ethernet interface
• Use the LAN cable for connection. (When the controller is
directly connected to the PLC, use a crossover cable)
• Make changes to the appropriate settings to connect the
controller to the PLC-Link device (Page 1-82)
Main settings: IP addresses of the controller and PLC-Link
device, port number, command execution method, command
specification method and various addresses (data output
device address)


Establishing the PLC link
• When the "Initializing PLC-Link" in the lower right of the screen
goes off in a few seconds at the restart, the link communication
is established.
• If the PLC-Link communication is not established, "PLC
communication has failed" is displayed.


Executing necessary processing
Data output (Page 1-87)
• The data from the data output unit is written on the Data
Memory Address.
• After the writing is complete, 1 is written to the Result Memory
Address.
Command control (Page 1-90, 1-95)
• The custom commands (Page 2-112) set in advance can be
executed.
• Two methods are available for control of the command; By
Command No. and By Execute Flags.
• Available execution methods of the commands are polling
method and PLC terminal.

1-72 XG-X Comm-US

Preparing PLC-Link connection

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

The following PLCs are compatible with the PLC-Link connection.

• Except for certain models only connections via a link unit are supported.
Point
• The range of data memories differ depending on the system. For more details, refer to the manual for each PLC.

Via RS-232C interface

Keyence Corporation
Series name PLC Controller Link unit PLC operation mode PLC type
KV KV-700 KV-L20 KV BUILDER mode KV-L20 Series
KV-1000 KV-L20R KV STUDIO mode KV-L20 Series
KV-3000, KV-5000, KV-5500 KV-L20V, KV-L21V KV STUDIO mode KV-L20 Series
KV-7300, KV-7500, KV-8000 KV-XL202, KV-L20V, KV-L21V KV STUDIO mode KV-L20 Series
KV Nano KV-N10L, KV-NC10L, KV-NC20L KV STUDIO mode KV-L20 Series

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Series name PLC Controller Link unit PLC operation mode PLC type
MELSEC-AnS A1S, A1SH, A1SJ, A1SJH1, A2S, A1SJ71 (U) C24-R2, Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
A2SH, A171S, A171SH A1SJ71 (U) C24-PRF
A1CPUC24-R2 Calculator link port Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
A2US, A2USH A1SJ71 (U) C24-R2, Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
A1SJ71 (U) C24-PRF
MELSEC-A0J2 A0J2, A0J2H A0J2-C214-S1 Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
MELSEC-AnN A1N, A2N, A3N AJ71C24, AJ71C24-S3, Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
AJ71C24-S6, AJ71C24-S8,
AJ71UC24
MELSEC-AnA A2A, A3A AJ71C24-S6, AJ71C24-S8, Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
AJ71UC24
MELSEC-AnU A2U, A3U, A4U AJ71C24-S6, AJ71C24-S8, Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
AJ71UC24
MELSEC-QnA Q2A, Q2A-S1, Q3A, Q4A AJ71QC24 (N), AJ71QC24 (N) R2, Exclusive protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L Series
AJ71QC24 (N) R4
Q2AS, Q2AS-S1, Q2ASH, A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-R2 Exclusive protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L Series
Q2ASH-S1
MELSEC-Q Q00CPU, Q01CPU QJ71C24, QJ71C24 (N)-R2 MC protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L Series
Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q02UCPU, QJ71C24, QJ71C24 (N)-R2 MC protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L Series
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU,
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU, Q06HCPU,
Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q02UCPU,
Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU,
Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU,
Q26UDVCPU
Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, A1SJ71 (U) C24-R2, Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
Q06HCPU-A A1SJ71 (U) C24-PRF
MELSEC-L L02CPU, L26CPU-BT LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2 MC protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L Series
MELSEC iQ-R R04CPU RJ71C24 MC protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L Series
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U, FX5UC None * MC protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L Series
MELSEC-FX FX1S FX1N-232-BD, FX2NC-232ADP Exclusive protocol MELSEC FX Series
communication
FX3G FX3G-232-BD, FX3U-232ADP Exclusive protocol MELSEC FX Series
communication
FX3U, FX3UC FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-232ADP Exclusive protocol MELSEC FX Series
communication
* Connections via a link unit are not supported.

XG-X Comm-US 1-73

Preparing PLC-Link connection

Omron Corporation

Series name PLC Controller Link unit PLC operation mode PLC type
SYSMAC SPM1 SRM1-C01, SRM1-C02 CPM1-C1F01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
SYSMAC CPM1 CPM1, CPM1A CPM1-C1F01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
SYSMAC CPM1A
SYSMAC CPM2A CPM2A-30CD, CPM2A-40CD, CPM2A-60CD CPM1-C1F01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
SYSMAC CPM2C CPM2C-10CD, CPM2C-20CD CPM1-C1F01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
CPM2C-C1F01
SYSMAC CQM1H CQM1H-CPU11*, CQM1H-CPU21*, CPM1-C1F01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
CQM1H-CPU51/61 CQM1H-SCB41
SYSMAC C C120, C120F C120-LK201-V1 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C200H C200H-LK201 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C200HS-CPU01, C200HS-CPU03, C200H-LK201 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C200HS-CPU21/23, C200HS-CPU31/33
C500, C500F, C1000H, C1000HF, C2000, C2000H C120-LK201-V1, Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C500-LK201-V1,
C500-LK203
SYSMAC α C200HE-CPU11, C200HE-CPU32, C200HE-CPU42 C200H-LK201 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C200HG-CPU33, C200HG-CPU43, C200H-LK201 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C200HG-CPU53, C200HG-CPU63
C200HX-CPU34, C200HX-CPU44, C200HX-CPU54, C200H-LK201 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C200HX-CPU64, C200HX-CPU65-Z, C200HX-CPU85-Z
SYSMAC CJ CJ1M-CPU11-ETN, CJ1M-CPU12, CJ1M-CPU12-ETN, CJ1W-SCU21 (-V1), Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1
CJ1M-CPU13, CJ1M-CPU13-ETN, CJ1M-CPU22, CJ1W-SCU22, Series
CJ1M-CPU23, CJ1G-CPU44ACJ1G-CPU45, CJ1W-SCU41
CJ1G-CPU42H, CJ1G-CPU43H, CJ1G-CPU44H,
CJ1G-CPU45H, CJ1H-CPU64H-R, CJ1H-CPU65H,
CJ1H-CPU65H-R, CJ1H-CPU66H, CJ1H-CPU66H-R,
CJ1H-CPU67H, CJ1H-CPU67H-R, CJ2M-CPU11,
CJ2M-CPU12, CJ2M-CPU13, CJ2M-CPU14,
CJ2M-CPU15, CJ2M-CPU31, CJ2M-CPU32,
CJ2M-CPU33, CJ2M-CPU34, CJ2M-CPU35,
CJ2H-CPU64-EIP, CJ2H-CPU65-EIP, CJ2H-CPU66-EIP,
CJ2H-CPU67-EIP, CJ2H-CPU68-EIP
SYSMAC CP1 CP1H-Y20DT-D, CP1H-XA40D-, CP1H-X40D-, CP1W-CIF01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1
CP1L-M60D-, CP1L-M40D-, CP1L-M30D-, Series
CP1L-L20D-, CP1L-L14D-, CP1E-NA20D-,
CP1E-N60D-, CP1E-N40D-, CP1E-N30D-
SYSMAC CS1 CS1G-CPU42 (H), CS1G-CPU43 (H), CS1G-CPU44 (H), CS1W-SCU21 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1
CS1G-CPU45 (H), CS1H-CPU63 (H), CS1H-CPU64 (H), Series
CS1H-CPU65 (H), CS1H-CPU66 (H), CS1H-CPU67 (H)
* The CQM1H-SCB41 link unit cannot be used.

YASKAWA Electric Corporation

Series name PLC Controller Link unit PLC operation mode PLC type
MP2000 MP2200, MP2300, 217IF-01, 218IF-01 MEMOBUS YASKAWA MP Series
MP2310, MP2300S 218IF-02
MP900 MP920*, MP930* 217IF** MEMOBUS YASKAWA MP Series
* Also compatible with the built-in RS-232C interface on the system.
** Cannot be connected to MP930.

For modules that do not support automatic reception or connect via a link unit, you need to describe the MSG-RCV
NOTICE
processing in the ladder.

1-74 XG-X Comm-US

Preparing PLC-Link connection

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

Via Ethernet interface

Keyence Corporation

Series name PLC Controller Link unit PLC type

KV KV-700, KV-1000 KV-LE20, KV-LE20A KV Series
KV-3000, KV-5000*, KV-5500* KV-LE20V, KV-LE21V, KV Series
KV-EP21V**
KV-7300, KV-7500*, KV-8000* KV-XLE02, KV-LE20V, KV Series
KV-LE21V, KV-EP21V
KV Nano KV-NC1EP KV Series
* Also compatible with connection to the built-in Ethernet interface on the system.
** Only CPU version 2 or later can be used in the case of KV-3000, KV-5000 and KV-5500.

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Series name PLC Controller Link unit PLC type

MELSEC-Q Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDECPU*, Q04UDEHCPU*, QJ71E71, MELSEC Q/L Series
Q06UDEHCPU*, Q10UDEHCPU*, Q13UDEHCPU*, Q20UDEHCPU*, Q26UDEHCPU*, QJ71E71-100
Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q03UDVCPU*, Q04UDVCPU*, Q06UDVCPU*,
Q13UDVCPU*, Q26UDVCPU*
MELSEC-L L02CPU*, L26CPU-BT* OFF** MELSEC Q/L Series
MELSEC iQ-R R04CPU*, R04ENCPU* RJ71EN71 MELSEC Q/L Series
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U*/FX5UC* OFF** MELSEC Q/L Series
* Also compatible with connection to the built-in Ethernet interface on the system.
** Connections via a link unit are not supported.

Omron Corporation

Series name PLC Controller Link unit PLC type

SYSMAC CJ CJ1M-CPU11-ETN*, CJ1M-CPU12, CJ1M-CPU12-ETN*, CJ1M-CPU13, CJ1M-CPU13-ETN*, CJ1W-ETN11, SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1
CJ1M-CPU22, CJ1M-CPU23, CJ1G-CPU44, CJ1G-CPU45, CJ1G-CPU42H, CJ1G-CPU43H, CJ1W-ETN21 Series
CJ1G-CPU44H, CJ1G-CPU45H, CJ1H-CPU64H-R, CJ1H-CPU65H, CJ1H-CPU65H-R,
CJ1H-CPU66H, CJ1H-CPU66H-R, CJ1H-CPU67H, CJ1H-CPU67H-R, CJ2M-CPU11,
CJ2M-CPU12, CJ2M-CPU13, CJ2M-CPU14, CJ2M-CPU15, CJ2M-CPU31*, CJ2M-CPU32*,
CJ2M-CPU33*, CJ2M-CPU34*, CJ2M-CPU35*, CJ2H-CPU64-EIP*, CJ2H-CPU65-EIP*,
CJ2H-CPU66-EIP*, CJ2H-CPU67-EIP*, CJ2H-CPU68-EIP*
SYSMAC CP1 CP1H-Y20DT-D, CP1H-XA40D-, CP1H-X40D- CP1W-CIF41, SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1
CJ1W-ETN21** Series
CP1L-M60D-, CP1L-M40D-, CP1L-M30D-, CP1L-L20D-, CP1L-L14D-, CP1W-CIF41 SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1
CP1E-NA20D-, CP1E-N60D-, CP1E-N40D-, CP1E-N30D- Series
SYSMAC CS1 CS1G-CPU42 (H), CS1G-CPU43 (H), CS1G-CPU44 (H), CS1G-CPU45 (H), CS1H-CPU63 (H), CS1H- CS1W-ETN11, SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1
CPU64 (H), CS1H-CPU65 (H), CS1H-CPU66 (H), CS1H-CPU67 (H) CS1W-ETN21 Series
* Also compatible with connection to the built-in Ethernet interface on the system.
** CJ unit adapter CP1W-EXT01 is required.

YASKAWA Electric Corporation

Series name PLC Controller Link unit PLC type

MP2000 MP2200, MP2300, MP2310*, MP2300S*, MP2400* 218IF-01, 218IF-02 YASKAWA MP Series
* Also compatible with connection to the built-in Ethernet interface on the system.

For modules that do not support automatic reception or connect via a link unit, you need to describe the MSG-RCV
NOTICE processing in the ladder.

XG-X Comm-US 1-75

Connecting to the PLC-Link/setting the link unit

1. Wiring overview
The PLC is wired to the controller in the following way.

PLC Controller

PLC
RS-232C
or
Link unit Ethernet
Terminal block
I/O unit
(PLC)

• When the controller is not receiving commands from the PLC or when it is polling, the PLC does not need to be
Reference
connected to the terminal block (PLC).
• Since the controller complies with the modem definition, when connecting the controller to a device that complies with
the terminal definition via RS-232C, connect the SD signal of the controller to the SD signal of the device and the RD
signal of the controller to the RD signal of the device.

2. Wiring for the PLC-Link and setting the link unit (RS-232C)

When connecting to a Keyence KV Series (other than the KV-XL202)

• Use OP-26486 (D-sub 9-pin female connector) and OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable).
• Set the link unit operation mode to [KV-Builder mode] (for the KV-700) or [KV-STUDIO mode] (for the KV-Nano, KV-1000/
3000/5000/5500/7300/7500/8000).
XG-X Series PC/KV-L20 Series
(RJ-11 modular jack) (9-pin)

5.RD 3.SD
3.SD 2.RD
1.CS 4.ER
6.RS 6.DR
7.RS
2.NC 8.CS
4.SG 5.SG
1.CD
9.RI

When connecting to a Keyence KV-XL202 Series PLC

• Process the KV-side connector of the OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable) into loose wires, and then wire it directly to the
terminal block of the KV as shown in the following figure.
• Set the link unit operation mode to [KV-STUDIO mode].

XG-X Series KV-XL202

(RJ-11 modular jack) (7-pin terminal block)

5.RD 1.SD
3.SD 2.RD
1.CS 5.ER
6.RS 6.DR
3.RS
4.CS
4.SG 7.SG

1-76 XG-X Comm-US

Connecting to the PLC-Link/setting the link unit

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

When connecting to an Omron SYSMAC PLC

When connecting to a SYSMAC C, adapt the wiring described here to the pins on the actual connectors used for the
Reference
connection.

• Use OP-84384 (D-sub 9-pin male connector) and OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable) for the SYSMAC (9-pin).
• Set the link unit operation mode to "upper link (SYSWAY)".
• Set the 1:1 or 1:N process to "1:N process".
• Set the unit number to "No. 0".
• Set the CS control to "None".
• When enabling settings using CX-Programmer 6.0 or later, make sure to set the [Optional settings on/off] item to [On].
When set to "Off", changes to other settings will not be enabled.

For 9-pin For 25-pin

XG-X Series SYSMAC XG-X Series SYSMAC
(RJ-11 modular jack) (9-pin) (RJ-11 modular jack) (25-pin)

5.RD 2.SD 5.RD 2.SD

3.SD 3.RD 3.SD 3.RD
1.CS 4.RS 1.CS 4.RS
6.RS 5.CS 6.RS 5.CS
8.ER
7.DR
4.SG 9.SG 4.SG 7.SG
6.+5V

• If OP-26486 and OP-26487 are used as is to connect to a SYSMAC (9-pin), it may cause damage to the controller and
Point
the connected device. Do not use this connector.
• The controller's signal GND is isolated from the power GND.

XG-X Comm-US 1-77

Connecting to the PLC-Link/setting the link unit

When connecting to a MELSEC AnN, Q/L/iQ-R/iQ-F Series PLC

• Use OP-86930 (D-sub 9-pin male connector)* and OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable).
• Set the operation mode for the communication port on the PLC side to [MC protocol format 5] (for Q, L, iQ-R and iQ-F
Series) or [Exclusive protocol format 1] (for A Series).
• Set the checksum setting to [On].
* For the MELSEC iQ-F Series, use OP-26486 (D-sub 9-pin female connector).

• When connected to the A Series, "RS-232C CD terminal unchecked" must be defined in the ladder. Refer to the manual
Reference
for the Mitsubishi Electric computing link unit for more details.
• For Q Series and iQ-R Series, set [Authorize writing during RUN] to [Authorize].
• To use the Q Series link unit QJ71C24 (N) -R2 with a setting of "Baud rate 115200 bit/s, data length 8 bits, stop bit 1,
even parity", the switch setting in the PC parameters will be "0BEE (hexadecimal)".

XG-X Series MELSEC AnN,

(RJ-11 modular jack) Q/L/iQ-R/iQ-F series
(9-pin)
5.RD 3.SD
3.SD 2.RD
1.CS 4.ER
6.RS 6.DR
7.RS
2.NC 8.CS
4.SG 5.SG
1.CD

Point The controller's signal GND is isolated from the power GND.

When connecting to a MELSEC PLC of the FX Series (excluding the FX5 Series)
• Use OP-26486 (D-sub 9-pin female connector) and OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable).
• Assignment of the communication channels starts from the "communication function expansion board" and the
"communication special adapter" which are closer to the CPU.
• Set the link unit operation mode to [Exclusive Protocol Communication]. Set the checksum setting to [On].
• Set the H/W type to [Normal/RS-232C], the transmission control procedure to [Type 1 (without CR, CF)], the station
number to [00H].
XG-X Series MELSEC FX series
(RJ-11 modular jack) (9-pin)

5.RD 3.SD
3.SD 2.RD
1.CS 4.ER
6.RS 6.DR
7.RS
2.NC 8.CS
4.SG 5.SG
1.CD
9.RI

Point The controller's signal GND is isolated from the power GND.

Reference For connection to a MELSEC FX5 Series PLC, see "When connecting to a MELSEC AnN, Q/L/iQ-R/iQ-F Series PLC".

1-78 XG-X Comm-US

Connecting to the PLC-Link/setting the link unit

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

When connecting to a YASKAWA MP Series PLC
• Work on OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable) and connect it to the commercially available D-sub 9 pin male connector as
shown in the figure below.
• Set the communication protocol to "MEMOBUS".
• Set Master/Slave to "Slave".
• Set the transmission mode to "RTU".
• Set the device address to "1".
• Describe the MSG-RCV processing in the ladder. (Set the automatic reception to "Specified" for a module that allows
automatic reception.) Refer to the manual for the YASKAWA Electric communication unit for more details.
XG-X Series MP Series
(RJ-11 modular jack) (9-pin)

5.RD 2.SD
3.SD 3.RD
1.CS 4.RS
6.RS 5.CS
4.SG 7.SG
6.SR
9.TR
1.FG

• If OP-26486 and OP-26487 are connected as they are, it may result in damage to the controller and the connected
Point
device. Do not use this connector.
• The controller's signal GND is isolated from the power GND.

XG-X Comm-US 1-79

Connecting to the PLC-Link/setting the link unit

3. Wiring for the PLC-Link and setting When connecting to a Mitsubishi MELSEC link unit
the link unit (Ethernet) Q/L Series
• Make sure that the specified IP address is unique and Change settings using the network parameters in GX
different from the IP addresses for other devices. Developer or GX Works 2.
• When directly connecting, leave the subnet mask settings • MELSECNET/Ethernet
in their default settings. For other connections, match - Network type: Select [Ethernet].
them and configure them to the network configuration, - Mode: Select [Online].
however the connected equipment all need to be set to • Operation settings
identical settings. - Communication data code setting: Select [Binary
• Port number [9010] in the communication port setting is code communication].
reserved for the controller and cannot be used. - Initial timing setting: Select [Always OPEN].
• Use a category 5e or greater shielded twisted pair (STP) - IP address setting: Set the IP address which is
cable for connection. specified for the PLC-Link settings on the controller.
- Send frame setting: Select [Ethernet (V2.0)].
- Authorize writing during RUN: Select [Authorize].
When connecting to a Keyence KV Series PLC
Use KV BUILDER or KV STUDIO for setting. iQ-R Series
• IP address: Set the IP address which is specified for the Change settings using the unit parameters in GX Works 3.
PLC-Link settings on the controller. Add [UDP Connection Device] from the unit list displayed
• Port number (VT): Set the port number which is by selecting [Basic Settings] > [Remote Device
specified for the PLC-Link settings on the controller. Connection Configuration Settings] > [Advance][Basic
Settings] to the Ethernet configuration, and then configure
When connecting to an Omron SYSMAC PLC the settings as shown below.
• Telecommunication Method: Select [Fixed Buffer (With
Change the settings using CX-Programmer. Before starting
Protocol)] or [Random Access Buffer].
this setting, complete NODE No. for the PLC-Link settings
• Sequencer (Port Number) or Sensor/Device (Port
on the controller. (Normally specify "1" for the number.)
Number): Set both of these to the PLC's port number
• IP address: Set the IP address which is specified for the
(setting ranges: 1025 to 4999 and 5010 to 65534
PLC-Link settings on the controller.
(excluding 9010)).
• FINS UDP port: Select [User-defined], and set the
• Sensor/Device (IP Address): Set this to the IP address
specified port number which is specified for the PLC-
of the controller.
Link settings on the controller.
• Living Confirmation: Select [Without Living
• IP address table: Set the IP address and node address
Confirmation].
specified in the [Ethernet] screen of the global settings
• Authorize writing during RUN: Select [Authorize].
on the controller. The node address is normally [1].
• IP router table: Set this item only when using a router. In
router address, set the IP address for the router. In IP
address, set the IP address specified in the [Ethernet]
screen of the global settings on the controller.
Specify a NODE No. for the link unit which is different
Reference
from the NODE No. for the PLC-Link setting on the
controller.

1-80 XG-X Comm-US

Connecting to the PLC-Link/setting the link unit

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

iQ-R/iQ-F Series
Connecting to a Mitsubishi MELSEC PLC with
built-in Ethernet port Change settings using the unit parameters in GX Works 3.
• Own node settings
• The built-in Ethernet port does not support Auto - IP address: Set the IP address which is specified for
Point
open UDP port (port number default: 5000) like the PLC-Link settings on the controller.
the QJ71E71-100. Specify the communications
- Communication data code setting: Select [Binary].
port on the controller to a value from 1025 to
4999, or 5010 to 65535 (excluding 9010).
- Authorize writing during RUN: Select (SLMP) ] for
• Do not set more than one controller to the same batch authorization (for iQ-R only).
port number. When connecting multiple • Remote Device Connection Configuration Settings:
controllers via a hub, set each controller with a Select [Basic Settings] > [Remote Device Connection
different communication port number, and set Configuration Settings] > [Advance] to display the unit
multiple local port numbers that correspond to
list, add [SLMP Connection Device] from the unit list to
them.
the Ethernet configuration, and then configure the
Q/L Series settings as shown below.
Change settings using the PC parameters in GX Developer - Protocol: Select [UDP].
or GX Works 2. - Sequencer (Port Number): Set to the PLC's port
• Built-In Ethernet Port Settings number (setting ranges: 1025 to 4999 and 5010 to
- IP address: Set the IP address which is specified for 65534 (excluding 9010)).
the PLC-Link settings on the controller. - Sensor/Device (IP Address): Set this to the IP
- Communication data code setting: Select [Binary address of the controller.
codecommunication].
- Authorize writing during RUN: Check [Authorize]. When connecting to a YASKAWA MP Series PLC
• Open Settings
Use MPE720 for setting.
Add these settings.
• Communication protocol: Select [Extended
- Protocol: Select [UDP].
MEMOBUS].
- Open method: Select [MCprotocol].
• Master/Slave: Select [Slave].
- Local node port number: Specify a hexadecimal
• Code: Select [BIN].
value within the range 0401 to 1387, and 1392 to
• Connection type: Select [UDP].
FFFE. Numbers from 1388 to 1391 and 2332 (5000 to
• IP address: Set the IP address which is specified for the
5009 and 9010 in decimal) are reserved. Specify the
PLC-Link settings on the controller.
[Port] setting in the controller with the decimal notation
• Port number: Set the port number which is specified for
of the hexadecimal value specified here. (Example, if
the PLC-Link settings on the controller.
the local node port number is 1387, specify 4999 in
• Describe the MSG-RCV processing in the ladder. (Set
the controller).
the automatic reception to "Specified" for a module that
allows automatic reception.)
Refer to the manual for the YASKAWA Electric communication
unit for more details.

XG-X Comm-US 1-81

Changing PLC link connection settings

Displaying PLC link setting screen Changing settings with the controller
The settings for the PLC-Link module can be changed in
the [PLC-link] menu of the global settings.
Changing settings with XG-X VisionEditor
The settings for the PLC-Link module can be changed in the
[PLC-link] menu of the XG-X VisionEditor system settings.

• If any settings other than the [Decimal Point]

Point
setting are changed, the controller must be
restarted for changes to take effect.
• After making changes to [Mode] and then
1 Select [System Settings] from the [Various Settings] restarting, the controller will repeat the
menu on the [Program Setting] tab. connection process until a connection to the
PLC-Link is established. If there is no response
The [System Settings] menu appears.
from the connected PLC, the confirmation screen
"PLC communication has failed" is displayed
2 In the left pane of the [System Settings] menu, repeatedly.
select [Communications & I/O] - [PLC-Link].
The [PLC-Link] menu appears. 1 On the [Global] menu at the top of the screen,
select [Communications & I/O] - [PLC-Link].
3 Change the settings as required. The [PLC-Link] menu appears.
See "PLC-Link setting details" (Page 1-83) for more
details on each setting. 2 Select [PLC-link (RS-232C)] or [PLC-link (Ethernet)]
in [Mode].
4 Click [OK].

Point
To apply the change to the controller, you need to 3 Select the Series name to be connected in [PLC Type].
upload the system settings file to the controller and The settings for the selected PLC type appear.
then restart the controller.

4 Change the settings as required.

See "PLC-Link setting details" (Page 1-83) for more
details on each setting.

5 Click [OK].

1-82 XG-X Comm-US

Changing PLC link connection settings

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

PLC-Link setting details PLC-Link (RS-232C)
Change the RS-232C communication settings when [PLC-
Point The data memory ranges that the controller can Link (RS-232C)] is selected for [Mode].
actually write to the PLC with the data memory
specifications of the setting items are as follows. Communication speed
• KV-L20 series: 0 to 65535 (When PLC is KV
Select 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or
Nano, the range is 0 to 32767.)
• MELSEC AnN series: 0 to 8191 230400 (bps) for the baud rate.
• MELSEC Q/L/iQ-R/iQ-F series: 0 to 32767 • If [SYSMAC C series] is selected in [PLC Type],
Point
• MELSEC FX series: 0000 to 7999 only "19200" or "9600" can be selected.
• SYSMAC C series: 0 to 9999 • If [MELSEC FX series] is selected in [PLC Type],
• SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1 series: 0 to 32767 only "38400", "19200" or "9600" can be selected.
• YASKAWA MP series: 0 to 4095 • [230400] can be selected only when the [KV-
If data located outside the specified portion in the L20 series], [MELSEC Q/L series], or [SYSMAC
data memory is written, an error message informing CJ/CS1/CP1 series] is selected for the [PLC
you of communication disconnection appears. As type].
the portion of the data memory actually available
differs depending on individual PLC specifications Stop Bit
and settings even in the same series, the maximum
Select [1] (default) or [2] for the stop bit.
use of the portion may not be ensured.
If you selected [KV-L20 Series] in [PLC Type], the
Point
stop bit is fixed to [1].
Mode
Parity Bit
Select the method for communicating with the PLC. Select [None], [Odd], or [Even] (default) for the parity bit.
• Disable: Disable the PLC-Link.
If you selected [KV-L20 Series] in [PLC Type], the
• PLC-Link (RS-232C): Enable the PLC-Link with the PLC Point
parity bit is fixed to [Even].
connected to the RS-232C link unit.
• PLC-Link (Ethernet): Enable the PLC-Link with the PLC Flow Control
connected to the Ethernet unit. The flow control is fixed to either [None] (default) or [CTS/
When the PLC-Link is enabled, other inputs/ RTS] with [PLC Type] and cannot be changed.
Point
outputs may be restricted. See the table below for
• If [KV-L20 Series], [SYSMAC C Series],
details. Point
[SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1 Series], or [YASKAWA
MP series] is selected for the [PLC type], the
CC-Link/
flow control is fixed to [None].
EtherNet/IP/
Ethernet RS-232C • If you selected [MELSEC AnN Series], [MELSEC
PROFINET/
Q/L Series] or [MELSEC FX Series] in [PLC
EtherCAT
Type], the flow control is fixed to [CTS/RTS].
PLC-Link
Available Not available Not available
(RS-232C)
PLC-Link
Available Available Not available
(Ethernet)

Reference USB, external terminals, and FTP are always

available.

PLC type
Select the model of the device to connect to.
The settings for the selected PLC type appear.
When you change the PLC type, all PLC-Link
Point
settings are initialized.

XG-X Comm-US 1-83

Changing PLC link connection settings

PLC-Link (Ethernet) Common settings for the PLC-Link

Change the Ethernet communication settings when [PLC- PLC link settings regardless of communication type.
Link (Ethernet)] is selected for [Mode].
Command Execute Event
IP address Specify the method used to execute commands issued
Enter the IP address for the unit that the controller is over the PLC-Link.
communicating with (default: 192.168.0.20). • Terminal (default): Execute commands on the leading
The IP address must be different from the
edge of the terminal assigned as the PLC terminal.
Point
controller's IP address. • Polling: Execute commands when the value in a data
memory designated as the control address changes
Port from 0 to 1.
Enter the port number of the port to use for PLC-Link (default:
• Only custom instructions (Page 2-116) can be
Point
8502 for the KV Series, 5000 for the MELSEC Q/L Series, 9600 executed using the PLC-Link.
for the SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1 Series, and 1024 for the • Depending on the communication quality,
YASKAWA MP Series). polling may result in slower command execution
when compared to using terminal.
• Changing the [PLC Type] returns the value to
Point
the default setting. Command Selection
• Port number [9010] is reserved for the controller
and cannot be used.
Select the method used to specify commands issued over
the PLC-Link.
Resend time • By Command No. (default): Commands are specified
Enter the retry interval (ms) for use if a communication by using the custom command number in the data
error occurs (default: 10000 ms). memory designated as the [Command No. Address].
• By Execute Flags: Commands are specified by using
NODE No. 1's in data memory words that correspond to the custom
Enter the node number used to identify the controller. Make command to be executed. This data memory begins at
sure that the node number is different from that of other the [Execute Flags Address].
devices on the same network (default: 001).

Reference This option is enabled only when [SYSMAC CJ/

CS1/CP1 Series] is specified in [PLC Type].

1-84 XG-X Comm-US

Changing PLC link connection settings

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

Specifying commands (By Command No.) Common settings for commands

Command No. Address Command Parameter Address

Specify the address (default: 00200) of the data memory Specify the starting address (default: 01000) of the data
used for custom command numbers. memory used for command parameters (*01 to *16).
• The specification uses 1 word addresses. • This uses 2 words of addresses for each parameter from
• The command is executed by entering the custom the data address (max 32 words for 16 parameters).
command number (0 to 127). • Enter values for the parameters defined in commands
and specify the command parameters for execution.
Command Execute Address
Reference For commands that use text string parameters, the
Specify the address (default: 00300) of the data memory parser will read 2 words per character (1 byte) from
word used for executing commands that are entered by the designated parameter data address (terminate
their command number. This address is used to verify strings with "0" or "NULL").
command results (0: Success, Error Code: Fail), and for
executing commands using the polling method (1: execute). Command Result Address
The specification uses 1 word addresses. Specify the starting address (default: 02000) of the data
memory used for storing data from commands that return
results.
Specifying commands (By Execute Flags) • The specification uses 2 words per data item (or 2 words
per character (1 byte) if the command returns text strings).
Execute Flags Address • The actual range of data memory used to receive command
Specify the starting address (default: 00100) of the data results depends on how the command is defined.
memory used for specifying commands individually.
• The number of data memory addresses is specified in
the [Number of Commands] field (1 word per command,
max 128 words).
• In addition to specifying individual commands to
execute and verifying command results, this address
that is also used to execute commands by polling.
• Custom commands are always specified from a
Point
0-based address. Non 0-based addresses
cannot be used.
• If a "1" is entered in two or more data memory
words at the same time, only the command from
the lower address number will be executed.

Number of Commands
Specify the number of data memory words (commands) used
when executing commands by flags. (0 to 128, default: 128)

Reference Response time for executing commands using the

polling method can be improved by specifying the
smallest number required.

XG-X Comm-US 1-85

Changing PLC link connection settings

Specifying result data output Decimal Point

Data Memory Address Choose the method for handling numbers from output
units, parameters used with MW/MR/MS/MWX/MRX/MXS
Specify the starting address (default: 00700) of the data
commands, and for command data and results.
memory used for storing data from data output units.
• Fixed-point (default): Process the number by
• This uses 2 words per data item (or 2 words per character
multiplying it by 1000 and storing it as 32 bits of signed
(1 byte) if the command returns text strings).
integer data in the data memory (address m: lower 16
• The range of data memories required for storing data
bits, address m+1: upper 16 bits).
depends on the settings in the [Advance] tab of the data
Select [Parameters] to specify the [Decimal Precision]
output unit.
(1/10, 1/100, 1/1000, or 1/10000; set to 1/1000 by
Result Memory Address (bit) default).
Specify the address (default: 00800) of the data memory Depending on the [Decimal Precision] setting:
Point
used for confirming the data has been output. 1/10, 1/100, 1/1000, or 1/10000, the measurement
• The specification uses 1 word addresses. result is multiplied by 10, 100, 1000, or 10000
(respectively) and is used as 32 bits of signed
• A "1" will be written if the result output for one data
integer data.
output unit completes normally.
• Floating-point: Processes the number as single-precision
• The location in the data memory where the result output
floating point data (32 bits) in the data memory.
completion status is written depends on the settings in
the [Advance] tab of the data output unit.

Skip Output Result Memory Address

When this option is checked as enabled, writing to the Result
Memory Address is not performed. (Default: Disabled)
When this setting is enabled, the communication
Point
time for writing the result memory completion
signal can be reduced. However, the output
completion timing at the controller cannot be
detected from the PLC. Therefore, the setting must
be performed so that the output completion timing
is determined from the output of the result data set
on the output unit.

Revert to initial values

Returns all settings of [PLC-Link] to their initial values.

1-86 XG-X Comm-US

Outputting Measurement Data via PLC-Link (Data Output)

Outputting Measurement Data via PLC-Link

(Data Output)

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

The PLC-Link can be used to output data from data output units.

• The PLC-Link cannot be used while the CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT is enabled.
Point
• When you upload the system settings modified for PLC-Link and then restart the controller to start operation, initialization
is repeated until a connection to the PLC is established. If there is no response from the connected PLC, the "PLC
communication has failed" warning is displayed every time initialization is performed (Default setting). If the warning
continues to appear, check to see the PLC is connected correctly.

Data Output Flow

The controller outputs data via the PLC-Link in the following manner.

Reference • The data output via the PLC-Link is performed only when the controller is in run mode. Data cannot be output in setup
mode.
• Images and other binary data cannot be output with the PLC-Link.
• No data is output unless all data output units in the flowchart have been executed. In this case, nothing is written to the
Result Memory Address.

Controller PLC

Data Output Unit

Data confirmation*1
Confirm the value in the Result Memory
Reset the value in the Result Memory Address to 0.
Address is 0.*1

Data output
Write data to the Data Memory Address. Data is written to the Data Memory Address.

When the data writing is completed, write 1 to Output completion notice Check the completion of data writing by confirming
the data memory at the Result Memory Address. that the value in the Result Memory Address
changed to 1, and then reference the data.

Go to the next flowchart

*1 The above procedure is the flow when handshake is set to [ON] in the [Protocol Details] tab of the data output unit.
When handshake is set to [OFF], the data in the Result Memory Address is not checked. Consequently, output data is written to the
Data Memory Address as soon as writing is available, regardless of the status of the Result Memory Address. When "Skip Output Result
Memory Address" (Page 1-86) is enabled in the system settings, the output completion notice data is not written to the Result Memory
Address from the controller.

XG-X Comm-US 1-87

Outputting Measurement Data via PLC-Link (Data Output)

Timing Chart (Measurement Data Output Flow)

When handshake is set to [ON]

(1) (4) (6)

Data Memory Address A B

(2) (5)
1

Result Memory Address

0
(3)

(1) If the Result Memory Address is 0, the measurement data (A) is written to the Data Memory Address.
(2) After the measurement data is written, 1 is written to the Result Memory Address.
(3) After the PLC reads the measurement data, the Result Memory Address is changed (from 1) to 0.
(4) Upon the completion of the changing of the Result Memory Address to 0, the next measurement data (B) is written to
the Data Memory Address.
(5) In the same manner as step (2), after the measurement data is written, 1 is written to the Result Memory Address.
(6) After the PLC reads the measurement data, the subsequent measurement data is not written to the Data Memory
Address and is instead stored in the output buffer until the Result Memory Address is changed (from 1) to 0.

When handshake is set to [OFF]

(1) (4) (6)

Data Memory Address A B C

(2) (5)
1
Result Memory Address
0
(3)

(1) The measurement data (A) is written to the Data Memory Address.
(2) After the measurement data is written, 1 is written to the Result Memory Address.
(3) After the PLC reads the measurement data, the Result Memory Address is changed (from 1) to 0.
(4) This enables the writing of the next measurement data (B), and it is written to the Data Memory Address.
(5) In the same manner as step (2), after the measurement data is written, 1 is written to the Result Memory Address.
(6) After the PLC reads the measurement data, as soon as the subsequent measurement data (C) can be written, it is
written to the Data Memory Address even if the Result Memory Address has not been changed (from 1) to 0. Also, the 1
in the Result Memory Address is overwritten.

1-88 XG-X Comm-US

Outputting Measurement Data via PLC-Link (Data Output)

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

Result Memory Address Offset
Changing the Data Output Unit Specify the offset value of the address to output the
Settings output completion data from the [Result Memory
Address] set in the [PLC-Link] menu in the System
Change the settings of the data output unit to output Settings. The address to which the output completion
measurement data via the PLC-Link. data is output is displayed in the [Absolute Address]
field.
1 In Flowchart View, double-click the data output unit
If this address is the same as the output
Point
to change its settings. address of the other data output unit, the data
The properties menu of the data output unit is will be overwritten.
displayed.
Handshake
Select whether to output result data after the output
2 Click the [Output settings] tab. completion data is confirmed.
• ON: Output result data after 0 is written in the Result
3 Select data to output via the PLC-Link. Memory Address.
All of the output data and output order via the PLC- • OFF: Output result data without waiting for 0 to be
Link is specified in the [Output settings] tab of the data written in the Result Memory Address.
output unit.
• In the PLC-Link, all items are handled in units of 32 5 Click [OK].
bits (2 words) regardless of the data type. All data
The change will not take effect until you upload the
with decimal points is written according to the Point
program file to the controller.
settings of [Decimal Point] (Page 1-86).
• Every time a data output unit is executed, the
measurement results specified in the output data
setting are written to the Data Memory Address.
• After the data writing is complete, 1 is written to the
Result Memory Address.

4 On the [Protocol Details] tab of the data output

unit, specify the detailed settings for data output
via the PLC-link.

Output Address Offset

Specify the offset value of the address to output the
result data from the [Data Memory Address] set in the
[Global PLC-Link] menu in the System Settings. The
address to which the result data is output is displayed
in the [Absolute Address] field.
If this address is the same as the output
Point
address of the other data output unit, the data
will be overwritten.

XG-X Comm-US 1-89

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using Polling Method (Command Control)

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using Polling

Method (Command Control)
Set the controller to perform constant monitoring (polling)
Command control via PLC-Link
on the change in bits in the Command Execute Address to
execute a specified custom command. To perform command control via the PLC-Link, commands
can be specified in two ways:
• The PLC-Link cannot be used while the CC-Link,
Point
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT is enabled.
By Command No. (Page 1-91)
• When the polling method is selected, the overall
response of the PLC-Link, including for only Use the Command No. Address and Command Execute
data output, may deteriorate when compared to Address. Specify a desired command by writing its
being controlled by the PLC terminal. command number in the Command No. Address.
• When you upload the system settings modified for
PLC Link and then restart the controller to start By Execute Flags (Page 1-93)
operation, initialization is repeated until a
Use the Execute Flags Address. Specify a desired
connection to the PLC is established. If there is no
response from the connected PLC, the "PLC command by writing 1 in the Execute Flags Address
communication has failed" warning is displayed corresponding to the command number.
every time initialization is performed (Default
setting). If the warning continues to appear, check Differences between the command specification methods
to see the PLC is connected correctly. The table below shows the addresses used for control
Refer to "List of Custom Instructions" (Page 2-116) through each command specification method.
Reference
for more details on the custom commands.
Command Parameter Command Command Completion
specification specification execution data output confirmation
By Command Command Command
Command No. Execute Execute
No. Address Command Address Command Address
Parameter Result
By Execute Address Execute Address Execute
Execute Flags Flags Flags
Flags Address Address Address

1-90 XG-X Comm-US

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using Polling Method (Command Control)

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

Control Using Command No. Address (By Command No.)
Send a command to the controller by inputting the appropriate command number in the Command No. Address. When the
polling method is used, the controller detects the change in bits in the Command Execute Address and executes the
corresponding command.

Command processing flow using the polling method and By Command No.
A command is executed between the controller and the PLC in the following manner.

Controller PLC

Write the command No. and parameters of a

desired command to the Command No. Address
and Command Parameter Address, respectively.
Command execution
The controller detects the value in the Command
request reception
Execute Address changed to 1. The controller To execute the command, write 1 to the Command
then reads the commands and parameters from Execute Address.
the Command No. Address and Command
Parameter Address, respectively.

The command execution starts.

When the command execution is completed, Response data output

The response data is written to the Command
the response data is written to the Command
Result Address.
Result Address.

When the command execution is completed, the Command execution Check completion of the command execution by
command execution result (0: Success, completion notice confirming that the value in the Command
<Error code>: Failure) is written to the Command Execute Address changed to a value other than 1.
Execute Address. Reference the response data and command
execution result.

Reset the value in the Command Execute

Address to 0.

Reference Refer to "When an error occurs on command acceptance" (Page 2-6) for more details on error codes.

XG-X Comm-US 1-91

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using Polling Method (Command Control)

Timing Chart (Command processing flow using the polling method and By command number)

햲
Command No. Address
햳
Command Parameter Address

1 햴 햶
Command Execute Address
0
햵
Command execution Command execution

Command Result Address 햷

(1) Write a desired custom command number in the command number address.
(2) If a command parameter is required, write the command parameter in the command parameter address.
(3) Change the Command Execute Address (from 0) to 1 at a desired timing to execute the command.
(4) Command is executed.
(5) When the command execution is normally ended, 0 is written in the Command Execute Address. (If the command
cannot be executed and an abnormal end occurs, the error code is written.)
(6) If a response data is available, the Command Result Address is read synchronously with (5).

1-92 XG-X Comm-US

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using Polling Method (Command Control)

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

Control Using Execute Flags Address (By Execute Flags)
Control the system by entering "1" in the data memory that corresponds to a desired custom instruction. This data memory
begins at the [Execute Flags Address]. When the polling method is used, the controller detects the change in any bits in
the Execute Flags Addresses and executes the corresponding command.

Command processing flow using the polling method and By Execute Flags
A command is executed between the controller and the PLC in the following manner.

Controller PLC

Write appropriate command parameters to the

Command Parameter Address.
Command execution
The controller recognizes the command by request reception
checking the Execute Flags Address containing 1 To execute a command, write 1 in the Execute
and reads the command parameters from the Flags Address corresponding to its Command No.
Command Parameter Address.

The command execution starts.

When the command execution is completed, the Response data output The response data is written to the Command
response data is written to the Command Result
Result Address.
Address.

When the command execution is completed, the Command execution Check completion of the command execution by
command execution result (0: Success, completion notice confirming that the value in the Execute Flags
<Error code>: Failure) is written to the Execute Address changed to a value other than 1.
Flags Address. Reference the response data and command
execution result.

Reset the value in the Execute Flags Address to 0.

Reference Refer to "When an error occurs on command acceptance" (Page 2-6) for more details on error codes.

XG-X Comm-US 1-93

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using Polling Method (Command Control)

Timing Chart (Command processing flow using the polling method and By Execute Flags)

햲
Command Parameter Address

1 햳 햵
Execute Flags Address
0
햴
Command execution Command execution

Command Result Address 햶

(1) If a command parameter is required for the desired command to be executed, write the command parameter in the
command parameter address.
(2) Change the Execute Flags Address (from 0) to 1 corresponding to the desired custom command to be executed.
(3) Command is executed.
(4) When the command execution is normally ended, 0 is written in the Execute Flags Address in (2). (If the command
cannot be executed and an abnormal end occurs, the error code is written.)
(5) If a response data is available, the Command Result Address is read synchronously with (4).

1-94 XG-X Comm-US

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using a PLC Terminal (Command Control)

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using a PLC

Terminal (Command Control)

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

Custom instructions are executed when the input terminal
Command control via PLC-Link
assigned with %Plc is directly turned on or off.
• %Plc needs to be assigned to one of the terminals via To perform command control via the PLC-Link, commands
the controller global setting “Input Assignments” screen. can be specified in two ways:
See "1. Wiring overview" (Page 1-76) for more details.
• The wiring needs to be connected to the terminal to which By Command No. (Page 1-96)
%Plc has been assigned. See "1. Wiring overview" (Page Use the Command No. Address and Command Execute
1-76) for more details on the controller and PLC wiring. Address. Specify a desired command by writing its
command number in the Command No. Address.
• The PLC-Link cannot be used while the CC-Link,
Point
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT is enabled.
By Execute Flags (Page 1-98)
• When you upload the system settings modified
for PLC-Link and then restart the controller to Use the Execute Flags Address. Specify a desired
start operation, initialization is repeated until a command by writing 1 in the Execute Flags Address
connection to the PLC is established. If there is corresponding to the command number.
no response from the connected PLC, the "PLC
communication has failed" warning is displayed Differences between the command specification methods
every time initialization is performed (Default
The table below shows the addresses used for control
setting). If the warning continues to appear,
through each command specification method.
check to see if the PLC is connected correctly.
Command Parameter Command Command Completion
Reference Refer to "Control via commands" (Page 2-2) for
specification specification execution data output confirmation
more details on the custom commands.
By Command Command
Command No. Execute
No. Address Command Command Address
PLC
Parameter Result
terminal
By Execute Address Address Execute
Execute Flags Flags
Flags Address Address

XG-X Comm-US 1-95

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using a PLC Terminal (Command Control)

Control Using Command No. Address (By Command No.)

Control the system by inputting the command number of a desired custom command in the Command No. Address.

Command processing flow using the PLC terminal and By Command No.
A command is executed between the controller and the PLC in the following manner.

Controller PLC

Write the command No. and parameters of a

desired command to the Command No. Address
and Command Parameter Address, respectively.
Command execution
When the %Plc terminal is energized, the request
controller reads commands and parameters from Turn on the terminal assigned to %Plc of the
the Command No. Address and Command controller.
Parameter Address, respectively.

The command execution starts.

Command execution
When the command execution has started, status output A value 1 is written to the Command Execute
a value 1 is written to the Command Execute
Address.
Address (Command being executed).*1

When the command execution is completed, Response data output The response data is written to the Command
the response data is written to the Command Result Address.
Result Address.

Command execution Check completion of the command execution by

When the command execution is completed, the
completion notice confirming that the value in the Command
command execution result (0: Success,
Execute Address changed to a value other than 1.
<Error code>: Failure) is written to the Command
Reference the response data and command
Execute Address.
execution result.

Reset the value in the Command Execute

Address to 0.

*1 In some cases where the command could not be executed, an error code may be written to the Command Execute Address instead of "1".

Reference Refer to "When an error occurs on command acceptance" (Page 2-6) for more details on error codes.

1-96 XG-X Comm-US

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using a PLC Terminal (Command Control)

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

Timing Chart

Command No. Address

Command Parameter Address

0.5 ms or more
%Plc terminal 1 ms or more

Command Execute Address

Command Result Address

* The values of the Command No. Address or command parameters must be kept on until the Command Execute Address is changed to 0.

(1) Write a desired custom command number in the command number address.
(2) If a command parameter is required, write the command parameter in the command parameter address.
(3) Energize (turn ON) the %Plc terminal at the desired timing to execute the command.
(4) When the command execution is started, 1 is written in the Command Execute Address.
(5) When the command execution is normally ended, 0 is written in the Command Execute Address. (If the command
cannot be executed and an error occurs, the error code is written to the Command Execute Address.)
(6) If a response data is available, the Command Result Address is read synchronously with (5).

XG-X Comm-US 1-97

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using a PLC Terminal (Command Control)

Control Using Execute Flags Address (By Execute Flags)

Control the system by entering "1" in the data memory that corresponds to a desired custom instruction. This data memory
begins at the [Execute Flags Address].

Command processing flow using the PLC terminal and By Execute Flags
A command is executed between the controller and the PLC in the following manner.

Reference When command execution is attempted while two or more Execute Flags Addresses store 1, only one command, that with
the smallest command number, will be executed.

Controller PLC

Write 1 in the Execute Flags Address

corresponding to the command No. of a
command and write the command parameters in
the Command Parameter Address.
When the %Plc terminal is energized, the Command execution
controller reads a command from the Execute request
Turn on the terminal assigned to %Plc of the
Flags Address containing 1 and reads command
controller.
parameters from the Command Parameter
Address.

The command execution starts.

When the command execution is completed, the Response data output The response data is written to the Command
response data is written to the Command Result
Result Address.
Address.

When the command execution is completed, the Command execution Check completion of the command execution by
command execution result (0: Success, <Error completion notice confirming that the value in the Execute Flags
code>: Failure) is written to the Execute Flags Address changed to a value other than 1.
Address. Reference the response data and command
execution result.

Reset the value in the Execute Flags Address to

Reference Refer to "When an error occurs on command acceptance" (Page 2-6) for more details on error codes.

1-98 XG-X Comm-US

Controlling the System via PLC-Link Using a PLC Terminal (Command Control)

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

Timing Chart

Execute Flags Address

Command Parameter Address

0.5 ms or more
%Plc terminal 1 ms or more

Command Result Address

* The values of the command parameters must be kept on until the Execute Flags Address is changed to 0.

(1) Change the Execute Flags Address from 0 to 1 corresponding to the desired custom command to be executed.
(2) If a command parameter is required, write the command parameter in the command parameter address.
(3) Energize (turn ON) the %Plc terminal at the desired timing to execute the command.
(4) When the command execution is normally ended, 0 is written in the Execute Flags Address. (If the command cannot be
executed and an error occurs and the error code is written.)
(5) If response data is available, the command data output address is read synchronously with (4).

XG-X Comm-US 1-99

Typical PLC-Link Setting Procedure

This section explains the operation example to connect the The following setting values are used in this example
XG-X Series to the Keyence KV Series, output measured/ (Change them according to the device to be connected.).
judgment values and control the controller with the PW
[Communications & I/O - PLC-Link Settings]
command using PLC-link.
• Mode: PLC-Link (RS-232C)
• PLC Type: KV-L20 Series
• Command Execute Event: Polling
Connecting to the PLC
• Command Selection: By Command No.
(For the RS-232C interface) • Command No. Address: 00200
• Command Execute Address: 00300
If the settings pertaining to the KV series PLC link
Point • Command Parameter Address: 01000
are not completed, first set the KV series side
• Command Data Address: 02000
settings (Page 1-101).
• Data Memory Address: 00700
• Result Memory Address(bit): 00800
1. Checking the system settings of the XG-X • Decimal Point: Fixed-point (Decimal Precision:
1/1000)
Series
[PLC-Link (RS-232C)]

1 Start the XG-X VisionEditor and select the program

• Baud rate: 115200
• Stop Bit: 1
setting of the workspace which is the target of setting.
• Parity Bit: Even
• Flow Control: None
2 On the XG-X VisionEditor [Program Setting] tab,
• Data Length: 8 bit (Fixed)
select [System Settings] from the [Various
Settings] menu.
5 Select [OK].
The changes are saved.
3 In the [System Settings] screen, select
[Communications & I/O] - [PLC-Link].
6 Upload the system settings to the controller and
then restart the controller.
4 Change the PLC-Link settings.

1-100 XG-X Comm-US

Typical PLC-Link Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

2. Changing the KV series settings
5 Select [Convert] - [Auto-assign relay/DM] in the
Unit Editor, and assign the devices.

1 Start up the KV STUDIO with the computer and PLC

6 Save the changes, then close the Unit Editor.
connected, select [New project] from the [File] menu.

7 Select [Transfer to PLC] from the KV STUDIO

2 After entering the [Project name], select [PLC model],
[Monitor/Simulator] menu, and forward the setting
then click [OK].
details to the KV series.

8 Restart both the XG-X series and the KV series.

The [Confirm unit setting information] screen is

displayed.

If [Initializing PLC-Link] disappears after being

3 Click [Read unit setting].
momentarily displayed at the bottom right of the screen,
then the link establishment is successful.

When [PLC-Link communication has failed.] is displayed.

The establishment of the link has failed. Confirm the XG-X
series and KV series settings.

4 Select inside the workspace the link unit which is to

be connected to the XG-X series via RS-232C, and
after starting up the [Unit Editor], change the
[Operation mode] for [Port 1] in the [Setup unit(2)] tab
to [KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO mode].

XG-X Comm-US 1-101

Typical PLC-Link Setting Procedure

5 In the [System Settings] screen, select

Connecting to the PLC [Communications & I/O] - [PLC-Link].
(For the Ethernet interface)
6 Change the PLC-Link settings.
If the settings pertaining to the KV series PLC links
Point
are not completed, first set the KV series side
settings (Page 1-101).

1. Checking the system settings of the XG-X

Series

1 Start the XG-X VisionEditor and select the program

setting of the workspace which is the target of
setting. The following setting values are used in this example
(Change them according to the device to be connected).

2 On the XG-X VisionEditor [Program Setting] tab, [Communications & I/O - PLC-Link Settings]
select [System Settings] from the [Various • Mode: PLC-Link (Ethernet)
Settings] menu. • PLC Type: KV Series
• Command Execute Event: Polling
3 In the [System Settings] screen, select • Command Selection: By Command No.
[Communications & I/O] - [Ethernet (TCP/IP)]. • Command No. Address: 00200
• Command Execute Address: 00300
4 Change the Ethernet settings. • Command Parameter Address: 01000
• Command Data Address: 02000
• Data Memory Address: 00700
• Result Memory Address(bit): 00800
• Decimal Point: Fixed-point (Decimal Precision:
1/1000)

[PLC-Link (Ethernet)]
• IP address: 192.168.0.20
• Port: 8502
• Resend time[ms]: 10000

The following setting values are used in this example Reference Since the communications destination will be the KV
series, enter the KV series IP address and port which
(Change them according to the device to be
are to be connected to in the [PLC-Link (Ethernet)]
connected.). field.
• IP address: 192.168.0.10
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
7 Select [OK].
• Default gateway: 0.0.0.0
The changes are saved.

8 Upload the system settings to the controller and

then restart the controller.

1-102 XG-X Comm-US

Typical PLC-Link Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

2. Changing the KV series settings
4 Select inside the workspace the link unit which is
to be connected to the XG-X series via Ethernet,
and after starting up the [Unit Editor], set the KV
1 Start up the KV STUDIO with the computer and PLC series IP address and port number in the [Setup
connected, select [New project] from the [File] menu. unit(2)] tab.
• IP address: 192.168.0.20 (enter the [IP address]
2 After entering the [Project name], select the [PLC which was set via step 6 of "1. Checking the system
model], then click [OK]. settings of the XG-X Series" (Page 1-102))
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Port number (VT): 8502

Reference When connecting multiple devices whose IP addresses

are different, there is not a problem even if the port
numbers are identical.

The [Confirm unit setting information] screen is displayed.

3 Click [Read unit setting].

5 Select [Convert] - [Auto-assign relay/DM] in the

Unit Editor, and assign the devices.

6 Save the changes, then close the Unit Editor.

7 Select [Transfer to PLC] from the KV STUDIO

[Monitor/Simulator] menu, and forward the setting
details to the KV series.

XG-X Comm-US 1-103

Typical PLC-Link Setting Procedure

8 Restart both the XG-X series and the KV series.

Outputting Measured/Judgment
Values

1. Setting the output data (Data output unit)

To output various kinds of measured/
judgment values, use the "Data output
unit." This section describes how to
assign the measured/judgment values
of the following units to a data output
unit as data to be output.
If [Initializing PLC-Link] disappears after being
• Total status judgment of the
momentarily displayed at the bottom right of the screen,
flowchart (%JgAll)
then the link establishment is successful.
• U0002: Pattern search (Position X)
When [PLC-Link communication has failed.] is displayed. • U0002: Pattern search (Position XY)
• U0004: Area (Area)
The establishment of the link has failed. Confirm the XG-X
• U0005: OCR (Line 1 result string)
series and KV series settings.
• Variable #a
• Variable #b
• U0002: Pattern search (Unit judgment value)
• U0004: Area (Unit judgment value)
• Processing time (%PrcTime)
• Processing start date (%PrcDay)

1 Add a "Data output unit" at the end of the flowchart.

The setting screen of the added "data output unit" is
displayed.

2 Select [PLC-Link] for [Output Method] on the

[Output Settings] tab.

3 From the parts list, drag and drop measured/

judgment values you want to output to assign them
into the [Item] column.

Other than dragging and dropping from the parts list,

you can enter values directly.

1-104 XG-X Comm-US

Typical PLC-Link Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

4 Check the DM address used for the output.
2. Checking output forms and output flows
• When you assign data in the [Item] column, the
output destination DM address is automatically
to the DM
displayed in the [DM Address] column.
• The DM address start position will be the place 1 Check the DM and word counts which are going to
which is specified via the [Data Memory Address] in be used in the result outputs.
[Communications & I/O - PLC-Link Settings] of the See the [Data Memory Address] and the [Result
XG-X VisionEditor [System Settings] screen (In the Memory Address] of the [Communications & I/O -
above example, it is DM700 ). PLC-Link Settings] in the XG-X VisionEditor [System
Settings] screen.
• Data Memory Address: Specify the first data
memory address of the addresses which are going
to store the result data from the Data output unit. The
addresses which are to be used are 2 words per 1
data item (for characters, 2 words per 1 character).
The DM700 is first in the example on the left, and 1
result data is stored in 2 word increments.
• Result Memory Address: specifies the data memory
which writes the [1] that denotes the output
completion of the result data.
The address which is used is 1 word.

2 Checking storage examples to the result data DM.

The Data output unit in the flow is set to output the
result data as per the following.

• Total status (OK=0 / NG=1)

• U0002: Pattern search position X (284.868)
• U0002: Pattern search position XY (X=284.868 /
Y=196.223)
• U0004: Area (17839)
• U0005: OCR 1st row character string. (KEYENCE)
• Variable #a (95)
• Variable #b (348.267)
• U0002: Pattern search unit judgment value (OK=0 /
NG=1)
• U0004: Area unit judgment value (OK=0 / NG=1)
• Processing time (67.477ms)
• Processing start date (%PrcDay) (24)

XG-X Comm-US 1-105

Typical PLC-Link Setting Procedure

For the PLC data is stored as per the following Typical data output flow (Handshake: ON)
This is an example of the screen when the KV STUDIO
[Registration monitor] functions are used for checking. Controller PLC

The result memory address

value is returned to 1 0

The inspection flowchart is Use a trigger signal or other

processed method to start processing
the inspection flowchart

[Data output unit]

Check that the Result Memory
Address value has become 0*

[Data output unit]

Write data to the Data Memory
Address

[Data output unit] Check that a 1 has been

After data writing has finished, written to the Result Memory
write a 1 to the Result Memory Address, and read the Data
Address Data Memory Memory Address Data

* If the Result Memory Address value is left as a 1, the data is

• Judgment values are stored by using two words to
stored in the output buffer, but it is not written to the output
show 0 (OK) or 1 (NG). address. The data which is stored in the buffer is written the
• Decimal type data is multiplied by 1000 and stored next time the Result Memory Address becomes 0.
by using two words: 284.868 to 284868 If the inspection flowchart keeps on being executed with the
• When XY data is output, the data is stored in the Result Memory Address left as a 1, the output buffer will
overflow, so be aware that trigger inputting will no longer be
order of X and Y by using two words for each.
usable.
• Integer type data is stored directly by using two
words. Typical data output flow (Handshake: OFF)
• Character data is stored as ASCII code by using two
words for each character (Only in the case of OCR2 Controller PLC
unit Trimmed String is one byte used for one
The inspection flowchart is Use a trigger signal or other
character so that two words are used to store a unit processed method to start processing
the inspection flowchart
of four characters.).
[Data output unit]
• When data is output as "string", the number of DM Write the data into Data
used varies depending on the specified number of Memory Address

characters. This example outputs the "number of [Data output unit] Check that 1 has been written
characters on the first line" of the OCR unit and the After data writing has finished, to the Result Memory Address,
write 1 to the Result Memory and read the Data Memory
string is seven characters of "KEYENCE". However, Address data memory Address data
since [L1: Number of Characters] for [Block Setup] is
The Result Memory Address
set to 10, the range of 20 words (10 characters) from value is returned from 1 to 0
DM710 to DM729 are used. Changing the number of
characters setting affects all the subsequent DM
settings. It is recommended to set an item which may
be changed at the end of the Data output unit.
• Variables are multiplied by 1000 and stored by using
two words: 95 to 95000, 348.267 to 348267
• Judgment values are stored by using two words to
show 0 (OK) or 1 (NG).
• For system variables, integer type data is stored as
is while decimal type data is multiplied by 1000.
They are stored by using 2 words.
• Result Memory Address (1 when data output is
completed)

1-106 XG-X Comm-US

Typical PLC-Link Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

Controlling the Controller 2. Example of command execution
procedure: Switch program No. (PW)
The following is a typical example of the command
1. Checking the system settings of the XG-X
execution procedure. This example uses the PW command
Series (Change Program) which uses a command parameter.

1 Start the XG-X VisionEditor and select the program 1 In the [System Settings] screen of the XG-X
setting of the workspace which is the target of VisionEditor, select [Custom Instruction] and check
setting. the command details.

2 On the XG-X VisionEditor [Program Setting] tab,

select [System Settings] from the [Various
Settings] menu.

3 In the [System Settings] screen, select

[Communications & I/O] - [PLC-Link].

4 Check the various setting items required for

controlling the controller.
• With the default setting assignments, there are the PW
commands, [PW, 1, *01] which switches to an SD1 setting
number and the [PW, 2, *01] which switches to an SD2
setting number.
• Here the procedures for executing the [PW, 1, *01] that
switches to an SD1 setting number are explained.
• The command No. is [2], and, since [*01] is written in
the Commands and Parameters column, we know that
a command parameter is used.
Specify the program setting number that is to be
switched to for [*01] (this time it is switched to program
Command Execute Event and Command Selection
setting number 11).
Here the procedures for when the command execute
event: Polling, and the command selection: By command
no. were selected are explained. 2 Enter the command No. to the data memory which
corresponds to the PLC's Command No. Address and enter
The data memory which is to be used the program setting No. to switch to in the data memory
The data memory address which is to be used can be that corresponds to the Command Parameter Address.
optionally changed. Be careful here so that the Here enter the [2] which is the PW command number into
specified address does not conflict with the data DM200, and here enter the switching destination program
memory which is being used by the PLC’s other setting number [11] into DM1000.
programs. The addresses which are to be used, are a command no.
• Command No. Address address that is 1 word, and a command parameter address
• Command Execute Address that is 2 words.
• Command Parameter Address
• Command Data Address
3 Write a 1 to the data memory (here DM300) which
corresponds to the PLC command number execute
5 Select [OK]. address.
The changes are saved. The address used is 1 word.
The PW command (program setting number switching) will be
6 Upload the system settings to the controller and executed.
then restart the controller.
XG-X Comm-US 1-107
Typical PLC-Link Setting Procedure

4 Check the change in the value in the data memory

(here DM300) which corresponds to the PLC
command number execute address.
• Command instruction success: the XG-X series
writes [0].
• Command instruction failure: the XG-X series writes
[Error code].

Typical command processing flow

Controller PLC

Set a desired custom instruction

No. in Command No. Address,
and the command parameter(s)
in Command Parameter
Address(es)

Write a 1 in the command

number execute address at
The command execution starts the timing for the command to
be executed

· After the command execution · Command execution completion

is complete, write the command is confirmed when it is seen that
execution result (0: Succeeded, a value other than 1 is written in
<Error code>: Failed) in the Command Execute Address.
Command Execute Address The result of the command
· When the command requires execution is seen from the
response data, write the written value
response data in Command · When there is response data,
Data Address it refers to the Command Data
Address Data

The command execute address

value is returned to 0

1-108 XG-X Comm-US

Checking the PLC-Link Communication Status (PLC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics)

Checking the PLC-Link Communication Status

(PLC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics)

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

You can check the system's PLC-Link I/O signal communication • Command Execute Event: Displays the command
status with this function. This function is convenient because it execution method (not to be changed) by the
allows you to check communications content when connected controller selected in the system settings when the
to an external device in situations such as when the appropriate PLC-Link is used.
data cannot be communicated between connected devices. • %Plc: It is displayed when the Command Execute
The monitor cannot be used when [Enable/
Event is "Terminal": It indicates the number of times
Point
Disable] for PLC-Link is [Disable] or when PLC- when %Plc is ON (not to be changed).
Link is not connected. First establish a PLC-Link • Command Selection: Displays the Command
connection before using the monitor. Execute Event (not to be changed) selected in the
system settings.
1 From the [Utilities] menu at the top of the screen, • Command Execute Address: Displays the
select [PLC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics]. command No. input control address (not to be
The [PLC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics] screen is changed) selected in the system settings.
displayed. • Command Result Address: Displays the command
data output address (not to be changed) selected in
the system settings.
• Display Number: The display number for desired
data to be monitored can be set.
• Manual Control: ON/OFF can be selected only in
setup mode. When it is ON, the address value can
be forcibly changed.
• Using the down arrow at the upper right corner of the
screen, you can select the value to monitor from
Hexadecimal, Decimal (unsigned), or Decimal (signed).

Command Input screen

Example when "PW,1,*1" is set to custom command No. 2

2 Select the item you wish to check.

Select the command data (output from the system/
input to the system) or result data.

3 Now check the communication status.

Command Output screen

When the Command No. Address of address 200 is 2

(Program No. is switched) and the command is executed
with the Command Parameter 1 of address 1000 being
10000 (switched-to setting No. 10000), the Command
Execute Address of address 300 is 22, which points out
to a parameter error. (Setting of No. 10000 cannot be
selected.)
Since the Command Execute Address of address 300
is 22, the command to be executed is found to be an
error (22 is a parameter error code).

XG-X Comm-US 1-109

Checking the PLC-Link Communication Status (PLC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics)

Result Output screen

Example of the setting where you output the XYθ data
of the vision unit 0002 from the data output unit 0006.

You can see that the XYθ data of the unit 0002 in the
controller is output to address 700 (X), address 702
(Y), and address 704 (θ).

Reference In setup mode, communication output other

than response for external input commands is
not performed. If you want to check the data
output operation, switch to run mode.

4 Select [Close].

1-110 XG-X Comm-US

Troubleshooting

Control/Data Output via PLC-Link

If operation is not correct

A message "Initializing PLC-Link *th time" Although PLC-Link communication is

appears repeatedly in the lower right of the established, data cannot be written to the
screen. PLC.
The PLC-Link communication with the PLC has failed. The range of the writable data memory is limited. Check
Initializing must be is performed for re-connection the writable range of the PLC.
Check the PLC-Link communication settings, connecting
cable and connecting device.
The communication status is monitored
with the RS-232C monitor, but characters
When the trigger command is issued are garbled.
through PLC-Link, the image capture time
The RS-232C monitor is not compliant with monitoring of
is delayed compared to the trigger signal
communications used in the PLC link communication.
input from the terminal block.
There may be a slight lag between the command request
and command execution compared to the command
request over the terminal block. Variation can be large,
especially when polling is used.

Data cannot be correctly retrieved due to

change of the %Sto output at the leading
edge from the external terminal.
Since %Sto is the data strobe signal of the parallel terminal
output unit, it cannot be used as the strobe signal of the
data output unit.
For the data read timing with the PLC-Link, refer to the
Result Memory Address.

XG-X Comm-US 1-111

Troubleshooting

Error Messages

Error Messages Assigned to System Variable %Error0.

The errors messages below are assigned to %Error0 by default.
The errors assigned to %Error0 can be removed or switched to %Error1 as desired.

Error Message Cause Corrective Action Error

Code
PLC-Link communication has A connection error occurred with the • Check the connection with the PLC and the
failed. PLC when the [PLC-Link (RS-232C)] or settings of the PLC.
[PLC-Link (Ethernet)] function was • If PLC-Link is not used, change
enabled. communication mode to [Disable].
112
• If the error message is displayed after a
trigger input, check that the data memory
destination specified is in the range that
meets the PLC format.

Errors Messages not Assigned to System Variables %Error0 or %Error1

These errors by default are not assigned to %Error0 or %Error1 but can be assigned through the XG VisionEditor software.

Error Message Cause Corrective Action Error

Code
The controller output buffer for The controller output buffer for outputting Extend the time between triggers / processing to
outputting via PLC-Link is full. via PLC-Link is full. allow for data to be output. Note: Results data are 115
not written when the buffer is full.
PLC-Link output buffer is full. The controller output buffer for outputting Reduce the amount of data to be output via PLC-
via PLC-Link is full due to the amount of Link, so the buffer does not start filling up. Extend
data attempting to be outputted. the time between triggers / processing to allow for 116
data to be output. Note: Inspections can be put on
hold until the buffer becomes free.
External command error has An error occurred when executing a Review the command being sent, the program
occurred. command from one of these devices: settings or the device status.
• PC Program
• PLC-Link
• Ethernet
• RS-232C 128
• CC-Link
• External terminals
• EtherNet/IP
• PROFINET
• EtherCAT

1-112 XG-X Comm-US

Control/Data Output Overview of the Control/
via CC-Link Data Output via CC-Link

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

When the controller is connected to the CC-Link unit CA-
NCL20E (option), it can be operated as a remote device
station using CC-Link Ver. 1.10/Ver. 2.00.
The CC-Link connection enables the following functions.
• Controlling the system via CC-Link: Custom instructions
Overview of System Control/
can be sent through CC-Link to control the system.
Data Output • Outputting data via CC-Link: The output destination of
the data output unit can be set to CC-Link to output data
Control/Data Output via from the word devices.
• I/O control via CC-Link: When control system variables
External Terminals are assigned to the CC-Link bit devices, the input/output
can be controlled in the same way as the terminal block
Control/Data Output via PLC- interface or parallel I/O interface of the controller.
• Changing variable values via CC-Link: When special
Link
system variables are assigned to the CC-Link, their
values can be changed efficiently from an external
q Control/Data Output via device (variable synchronization).
CC-Link Point
• Since the CC-Link performs communications
through the link scan, if the signal fluctuates at
high speed, the CC-Link may not be able to
Control/Data Output via pick up these fluctuations.
• The scan cycle varies depending on the
EtherNet/IP
"Count," "Cycles," and "Settings of other devices
on the network." Keep this and the signal
Control/Data Output via variation time in mind when using the CC-Link.
• CC-Link and PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET
PROFINET or EtherCAT cannot be used at the same time
(CC-Link cannot be used when PLC-Link,
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET or EtherCAT is enabled).
Control/Data Output via
Reference The controller communicates with the master
EtherCAT station as a remote device station.

Control/Data Output via

No protocol communication

FTP Client/Server Function

XG-X Comm-US 1-113

Overview of the Control/Data Output via CC-Link

Operation Flow

Checking the CC-Link specifications (Page 1-115)

• Check the specifications of the CC-Link unit, CA-NCL20E, and
precautions for wiring.
• Check the reserved address status or the customer-defined
address of the word device.
• Check the reserved address assignment status or the
customer-defined address of the bit device.


Changing the CC-Link Settings (Page 1-120)
To connect the controller via CC-Link, change the settings with
the XG-X VisionEditor or the controller.
• Set the communication items such as station number,
communication speed, protocol version, number of exclusive
stations, etc.
• Check the assignment status of the word device and set
offset.
• Check the assignment status of the bit device.

Establishing the CC-Link
• If the message "CC-Link communication has failed" appears,
the link is not established.
• The link is established unless the error light of the master
station (PLC) turns on.


Executing inspection process
Data output (Page 1-127)
• The data from the data output unit is written on the word
device (RWr).
• Check data write completion with the Result ready flag.
• When the Result ack flag is ON, read completion is notified.

I/O control (Page 1-129)

• I/O can be controlled by assigning the System Variables to
CC-Link.

Command control (Page 1-130)

• The custom command (Page 2-112) set in advance can be
executed.
• Store the command code and the command parameter in the
word device (RWw) and turn ON the command request flag to
execute the command.
• When the command ready flag is ON, the command can be
executed.
• Check execution of the command with the command
complete flag.

Variable synchronization (Page 1-132)

• The value of a special system variable for variable
synchronization (%InDataFieldbus[ ]) assigned to the word
device can be changed.

1-114 XG-X Comm-US

Preparing the CC-Link connection

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

Installing the CC-Link Unit CA-NCL20E CC-Link Unit
The optional CC-Link unit CA-NCL20E is used when
Specifications
communicating over CC-Link.
Remove the protective cover from the expansion unit
Standard specifications
connector on the right side of the controller and install the
CC-Link unit as shown below. Item
CC-Link station type Ver. 1.10 remote device station
• The controller must be turned off before
Point Ver. 2.00 remote device station
connecting or disconnecting the CA-NCL20E.
• Restart the controller and master station after Communication speed 156 kbps, 625 kbps, 2.5 Mbps, 5
changing the CC-Link settings. Mbps, 10 Mbps
Connection cable Ver. 1.10 compatible CC-Link cable
FANC-110SBH, FA-CBL200PSBH,
CS110
OP-79426, OP-79427
Max. total cable length 156 kbps 1200 m
625 kbps 900 m
2.5 Mbps 400 m
5 Mbps 160 m
10 Mbps 100 m
Count Selectable from 1 station, 2
stations, 3 stations, or 4 stations
Cycle Selectable from 1x, 2x, 4x, and 8x
(Ver.2.00 only)
When Using the Illumination Expansion
Unit and CC-Link Unit Together
Connector Specifications
Mount the camera input unit directly to the controller, then
mount the illumination expansion unit and CC-Link unit to
the right side of the camera input unit. 햷 DA 햲
햸 DB 햳
햹 DG 햴
햺 SLD 햵
햻 (FG) 햶

No. Wire Signal Function

color name
1, 6 Blue DA Communication wire "DA" for CC-Link.
Connects to the master station or other
slave stations (1 and 6 are shorted).
Camera input unit 2, 7 White DB Communication wire "DB" for CC-Link.
CA-E100 Connects to the master station or other
slave stations (2 and 7 are shorted).
Illumination
expansion unit 3, 8 Yellow DG Communication wire "DG" for CC-Link.
CA-DC40E Connects to the master station or other
CC-Link unit
slave stations (3 and 8 are shorted).
CA-NCL20E
4, 9 Bare SLD Shield.
Illumination expansion units and CC-Link units
Point wire Connect the shielded wire from the CC-
cannot be installed between camera input units
Link Ver.
and controllers.
5, 10 - FG Frame ground "FG" for CC-Link.
Ground per Class D earth* (100 W or
less) (5 and 10 are shorted).

* Use a cable with a cross-section area of at least 2 mm2 as the

grounding cable.

XG-X Comm-US 1-115

Preparing the CC-Link connection

CA-NCL20E terminating resistor installation

Connecting to the CC-Link
DA
Network
DA
Terminating
resistor DB

Precautions when wiring DG

SLD
DB
Take note of the following when wiring the CA-NCL20E (FG)

unit.
• When connecting the CA-NCL20E to a CC-Link network/ Reference Because terminals 1 and 6, and terminals 2 and 7,
device, always use a CC-Link Ver.1.10 compatible cable are shorted, the terminating resistor can be
or a cable approved by the CC-Link Partner Association. installed either onto terminals 1 and 2, or onto
Correct operation cannot be assured when using terminals 6 and 7.

another type of cable.

• When a CC-Link cable is used near a high voltage/
current source or cable, electrical noise may cause
operational errors. When using both a CC-Link cable
and high voltage/current devices maintain at least 100
mm of separation between them.

Terminating resistor
When connecting a CA-NCL20E unit to both ends of the
CC-Link network, install a terminating resistor between CA-
NCL20E terminals DA and DB. Make sure to install the
terminating resistors, as they reduce signal noise and
stabilize communications.
Master station

Terminating Terminating
resistor resistor

CA-NCL20E Other unit Other unit Other unit CA-NCL20E

The terminating resistor will differ depending on the

cable type
Two of each are shipped, one for terminating each end of
the network with CA-NCL20E. Use the correct terminating
resistor for the type of CC-Link cable being used.

Cable type Terminating resistor

Ver. 1.10 compatible CC-Link cable 110Ω 1/2W
FANC-110SBH, FA-CBL200PSBH,
CS110
OP-79426, OP-79427
Brown
Brown
Brown
Gold

CC-Link cable
130Ω 1/2W

CC-Link high-performance cable

Orange
Brown

Brown
Gold

1-116 XG-X Comm-US

CC-Link Device Specifications and Reserved Address of the Controller

CC-Link Device Specifications and Reserved Address

of the Controller

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

• Ensure that the same RWr address is not
CC-Link Word Device Specifications Point
assigned to the command result and response
of the command control or to the result data of
the data output unit. If the address assignment
Word device address notation format overlaps, different data is written to the same
address at different times, which may affect
RWrnnn data reading.
nnn: 3 digit decimal number Example of overlapped address assignment:
When the data output unit U0020 is set to output
Reference The same notation method is used for RWw.
one piece of data using RWr offset "002" via the
CC-Link, and the data output and command
response (command area size: 6 words) are
Word device assignment to reserved used at the same time.
address and user-definable address RWr Word First cycle Second
address device name cycle
RWr setting (example when the command area size is
RWr000 Command Result
set to 128 words) RWr001
RWr002 Command First
RWr Worddevice name Remarks
Data1,U0020 command Result data
address
RWr003 Command response of U0020
RWr000 Command Result The command execution
Data1,U0020 data
result is written (0:
RWr004 Command Data2 Second
User-definable address range*1

Success, <Error code>:

RWr005 Command Data2 command
Failure). ←
response
RWr001 data
RWr002 Command Data1 The first command
response data is written. The first command response data in RWr002/
RWr003 Command Data1
003 is overwritten with the result data in the
RWr004 Command Data2 The second command second cycle.
RWr005 Command Data2 response data is written. • To use command control and data output at the
⋅⋅⋅ Command Datann same time via the CC-Link, set the [RWr offset]
for the data output unit taking the command
RWr126 Command Data63 The 63rd command
area size into account.
RWr127 Command Data63 response data is written.

*1 To assign data output to a specific word device, specify an

offset value in the unit of two words from RWr000 in the [RWr
offset] field in the [Advance] tab of the data output unit which uses
CC-Link as the output destination.

XG-X Comm-US 1-117

CC-Link Device Specifications and Reserved Address of the Controller

RWw setting (example when the command area size is

set to 34 words and the starting offset assignment of CC-Link Bit Device Specifications
system variables is set to 34 words)

RWw Worddevice name Remarks Bit Device Address Notation Format

address
RWw000 Command Number The custom
RXnnnx
instruction No. is • nnn: 3 digit decimal number
written. • x: 1 digit hexadecimal number
RWw001 The same notation method is used for RY.
Reference
RWw002 Command Parameter1 The custom
Example:
RWw003 Command Parameter1 instruction
argument "*01" is RX0000, RX0001,···, RX0009, RX000A, RX000B, ···,
written. RX000F, RX0010,···, RX001F, RX0020,···, RX009F, RX010F,
RWw004 Command Parameter2 The custom RX0110,···, RX055F
RWw005 Command Parameter2 instruction
argument "*02" is
written.
... Command Parameternn
RWw032 Command Parameter16 The custom
User-definable
address range

RWw033 Command Parameter16 instruction

argument "*16" is
written.
RWw034 %InDataFieldbus[0] A specified value is
RWw035 %InDataFieldbus[0] written as the
system variable for
variable
synchronization [0].
RWw036 %InDataFieldbus[1] A specified value is
RWw037 %InDataFieldbus[1] written as the
system variable for
variable
synchronization [1].
...
RWw0126 %InDataFieldbus[46] A specified value is
RWw0127 %InDataFieldbus[46] written as the system
variable for variable
synchronization [46].

• The number of word addresses which can

Point
actually be used varies depending on the
setting. Word addresses which cannot be used
are grayed out in the list.
• Ensure that the same RWw address is not
assigned to the command No. and parameter
for the command control or to the special
system variable for variable synchronization. If
the address assignment overlaps, improper
data may be read which can cause errors.
• To use command control and variable
synchronization at the same time via the CC-
Link, set [Starting offset of assignment of
system variables] in [RWw list] by taking the
command area size into account.

1-118 XG-X Comm-US

CC-Link Device Specifications and Reserved Address of the Controller

processes can be device

received. ⋅⋅⋅ Assignable bit
RX0003 Result ready flag Turns on when data device
transmission is RY(mmm-1)F Assignable bit
complete. device
RX0004 Result OR flag Linked to %JgAll.* RYmmm0 (Reserved) Reserved.
RX0005 Assignable bit ⋅⋅⋅ (Reserved) Reserved.
User-definable
address range

device RYmmmA Error reset request Clears Error0 when

... Assignable bit flag the signal switches
device from OFF to ON
RX(mmm-1)F Assignable bit (works the same as
device %Error0Clear).

RXmmm0 (Reserved) Reserved. (Reserved) Reserved.

... (Reserved) Reserved. RYmmmF (Reserved) Reserved.

RXmmmA Error status flag Linked to %Error0. • The high order 4 bits and low order 16 bits of
Point
RXmmmB Remote ready flag Turns ON when CC- the RY addresses are reserved and no variable
Link unit initialization can be assigned.
is complete. • The number of bit addresses that can actually
... (Reserved) Reserved. be used is "mmm × 16". The value mmm
RXmmmF (Reserved) Reserved. depends on the settings as follows:
mmm: First three numbers in the address
The high order 5 bits and low order 16 bits of the (decimal notation). They depend on the number
Point
RX addresses are reserved and no variable can be of exclusive stations and cycle setting, and are
assigned. calculated with the following formula.
- When the cycle is set to 1x:
mmm = (No. of exclusive stations) x 2 - 1
- When the cycle is set to 2x or higher:
mmm = {(No. of exclusive stations) x 2 - 1} x
(Cycle value) - 1

XG-X Comm-US 1-119

Changing the CC-Link Settings

Displaying CC-Link setting screen Changing settings with the controller

On the [CC-Link] menu of the Global settings, the settings
for data input/output over the CC-Link can be changed
Changing settings with XG-X VisionEditor when the controller is connected to the CC-Link unit
On the [CC-Link] menu in the XG-X VisionEditor System CA-NCL20E.
Setting, the settings for data input/output over the CC-Link
can be changed when the controller is connected to the
CC-Link unit CA-NCL20E.

• If any settings other than the [Decimal Point]

Point
settings are changed, the controller must be
restarted for changes to take effect.
• After restarting with the CC-Link set to [Enable],
Reference The controller communicates with the master
the controller will repeat the initialization
station as a remote device station.
process until a connection to the CC-Link unit is
Since CC-Link performs communication through established. If there is no response from the
Point
link scan, if the signal fluctuates at high speed, connected CC-Link unit, the confirmation menu
CC-Link may not be able to pick up these "CC-Link communication has failed" is
fluctuations. The scan cycle changes depending displayed each time initialization fails.
on the number of exclusive stations, cycles, and
settings of other devices on the network. Keep this
and the signal variation time in mind when using
1 On the [Global] menu at the top of the screen,
CC-Link.
select [Communications & I/O] - [CC-Link].
The [CC-Link] menu appears.

1 Select [System Settings] from the [Various Settings]

• By default, the system variables for variable

synchronizing starting at %InDataFieldbus [0] are
assigned to RWw000, 2 words for each item.
• Those items necessary for control by commands are
written via CC-Link to the maximum continuous block of
34 words (by default), where the Command Number is
written to RWw000, and Command Parameter1 to 16 are
written to RWw002 to 034.
• Decreasing the Command area size reduces the • Data output units in the flowchart that specify CC-Link
command area in descending order in units of 2 words as the destination are listed by their unit ID in the write
from RWw033. data range.
• Any device ranges that cannot be used in the current • The items necessary for control by commands are
settings are grayed out. written via CC-Link to a maximum continuous block of
• Data that includes decimal points and is used in 128 words (by default), where the Command Result is
Command Parameter1 to 16 is registered using the written to RWr000, and Command Data1 to 63 are
method chosen in [Decimal Point]. written to RWr002 to 127.
If command control and variable synchronization • Decreasing the Command area size reduces the
Reference
are used via CC-Link at the same time, their data command area in descending order in units of 2 words
ranges may overlap in the word devices used for from RWr127.
RWw even when their default settings are used. • Any device ranges that cannot be used in the current
Avoid this by reducing the command area size to
settings are grayed out.
the least amount of words required, and by
• The decimal data used for the result data and
changing the starting address for synchronizing
variables in the [Starting offset of assignment of Command Data1 to 63 is expressed using the method
system variables] setting on the variable set in [Decimal Point].
synchronization unit.
Reference If data outputs and commands are used at the
same time, their data ranges may overlap. Avoid
this by reducing the command area size to the least
amount of words required, and by changing the
starting address for outputting results in the [Offset
of RWr] setting for the data output unit. For more
details, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.

XG-X Comm-US 1-123

Changing the CC-Link Settings

RWw
Bit assignment (XG-X VisionEditor)
A list of word inputs appear in the [RWw command area
setting] menu. Any user-specified system variable related to parallel
output control can be assigned to bit device outputs and
inputs. Only devices available with the current settings are
displayed.
Since CC-Link performs communication through
Point
link scan, if the signal fluctuates at high speed,
CC-Link may not be able to pick up these
fluctuations. The scan cycle changes depending
on the number of exclusive stations, cycles, and
settings of other devices on the network. Keep this
and the signal variation time in mind when using
CC-Link.

Reference The bits required for commands and data outputs

are assigned to a reserved area and cannot be
• By default, the system variables for variable
changed.
synchronizing starting at %InDataFieldbus [0] are
assigned to RWw000, 2 words for each item. RX setting
• Those items necessary for control by commands are The [RX Assignment] menu appears. This menu is used to
written via CC-Link to the maximum continuous block of assign system variables in the controller to a user-defined
34 words (by default), where the Command Number is area in the bit device output RX range.
written to RWw000, and Command Parameter1 to 16 are
written to RWw002 to 034.
• Decreasing the Command area size reduces the
command area in descending order in units of 2 words
from RWw033.
• Any device ranges that cannot be used in the current
settings are grayed out.
• Data that includes decimal points and is used in
Command Parameter1 to 16 is registered using the
method chosen in [Decimal Point].
Only custom commands can be executed using
Point
the CC-Link.
• Use the columns under [Variable name] and [bit] to
Reference • If command control and variable synchronization assign the desired output-type system variable and its
are used via CC-Link at the same time, their data bit to an RX address. Only system variables related to
ranges may overlap in the word devices used for
parallel port control can be assigned.
RWw even when their default settings are used.
Avoid this by reducing the command area size
• The assignment setting can be moved to another RX
to the least amount of words required, and by address by selecting the line and clicking [∧] or [∨].
changing the starting address for synchronizing • Any device ranges that cannot be used in the current
variables in the [Starting offset of assignment of settings are not displayed.
system variables] setting on the variable
synchronization unit. Reference For more details on system variables that can be
• For more details on the commands available for assigned, refer to "List of System Variables" (Page
the CC-Link, refer to "List of Custom Instructions" 3-448).
(Page 2-116).

1-124 XG-X Comm-US

Changing the CC-Link Settings

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

RY setting
Bit assignment (Controller)
The [RY Assignment] menu appears. This menu is used to
assign system variables in the controller to a user-defined Any user-specified system variable related to parallel
area in the bit device input RY range. output control can be assigned to bit device outputs and
inputs. Only devices available with the current settings are
displayed.
Since CC-Link performs communication through
Point
link scan, if the signal fluctuates at high speed,
CC-Link may not be able to pick up these
fluctuations. The scan cycle changes depending
on the number of exclusive stations, cycles, and
settings of other devices on the network. Keep this
and the signal variation time in mind when using
CC-Link.

Reference The bits required for commands and data outputs

are assigned to a reserved area and cannot be
changed.
• Use the columns under [Variable name] and [bit] to
RX
assign the desired input-type system variable and its bit
The [RX user definition area setting] menu appears. This
to an RY address. Only system variables related to
menu is used to assign system variables in the controller to
parallel port control can be assigned.
a user-defined area in the bit device output RX range.
• The assignment setting can be moved to another RY
address by selecting the line and clicking [∧] or [∨].
• Any device ranges that cannot be used in the current
settings are not displayed.

Reference • For more details on system variables that can be

assigned, refer to "List of System Variables"
(Page 3-448).
• The system variables which have been assigned
to the input terminals as external terminals
cannot be used as another assignment for the
CC-Link.
• Assignment of the same bit on the same system
variable to multiple RY addresses and input
terminals on the parallel port is not allowed.
• Use the columns under [Variable name] and [bit] to
assign the desired output-type system variable and its
bit to an RX address. Only system variables related to
parallel port control can be assigned.
• Any device ranges that cannot be used in the current
settings are not displayed.

Reference For more details on system variables that can be

assigned, refer to "List of System Variables" (Page
3-448).

XG-X Comm-US 1-125

Changing the CC-Link Settings

RY
Create CSP/CSP+ File
The [RY user definition area setting] menu appears. This
menu is used to assign system variables in the controller to This outputs a CSP/CSP+ file that is used when the master
a user-defined area in the bit device input RY range. station references the controller CC-Link settings.
Naming rules of CSP file
• When Ver.1.10 is used: CA-NCL20E_[No. of exclusive
stations].csp
• When Ver.2.00 is used: CA-NCL20E_[No. of exclusive
stations]_V2-00_E[Cycle value].csp
About CSP+
• 0x0658_CA-NCL20E_1.0.0_ja.zip (Japanese)
- 0x0658_CA-NCL20E_1.0.0_ja.cspp
- CA-NCL20E.ico
- CA-NCL20E.bmp
• 0x0658_CA-NCL20E_1.0.0_en.zip (Other Language)
- 0x0658_CA-NCL20E_1.0.0_en.cspp
• Use the columns under [Variable name] and [bit] to
- CA-NCL20E.ico
assign the desired input-type system variable and its bit
- CA-NCL20E.bmp
to an RY address. Only system variables related to
parallel port control can be assigned. Point
The file is not created if any of the parameter
• Any device ranges that cannot be used in the current settings are incorrect. Confirm the settings and
then try again.
settings are not displayed.

Reference • For more details on system variables that can be Reference • The file output path is SD2:/xg/CSP.
assigned, refer to "List of System Variables" • As the changed information and settings
(Page 3-448). configured on the controller and the XG-X
• Assignment of the same bit on the same system VisionEditor system settings are not contained in
variable to multiple RY addresses and input the CSP+ file, the created CSP+ file will always
terminals on the parallel port is not allowed. contain the same content.
• If you connect to a Keyence KV Series device, a
CSP/CSP+ file is not necessary.

Reset
Returns all settings of [CC-Link] to their initial values.

1-126 XG-X Comm-US

Outputting Measurement Data via CC-Link (Data Output)

Outputting Measurement Data via CC-Link

(Data Output)

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

Change the settings so that a data output unit can output data via CC-Link.

Point The CC-Link cannot be used while the PLC Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT is enabled.

Data Output Flow

Data is output from a data output unit. Set the output data and destination addresses for the data output unit.
Use the following procedures to output data from the controller by CC-Link.

Reference • The data output via CC-Link is only performed while the controller is in run mode. Data cannot be output in setup mode.
• With CC-Link, images and other binary data cannot be output.
• No data is output unless all data output units in the flowchart have been executed. In this case, the Result ready flag is
not changed.

Controller PLC

Data Output Unit

Confirm that RY0003: Result ack flag is

turned off.*1

Data output Data is written to the data memory

Write data to RWr.
corresponding to RWr.
Output completion
notice Check the completion of data writing by
When the data writing is completed,
confirming that RX0003: Result ready flag
turn on RX0003: Result ready flag.
changes to on, and then reference the data.
Data reading
Check completion of the data reading by confirming confirmation notice
Turn on RY0003: Result ack flag.
that RY0003: Result ack flag is turned on.

Termination process The change of RX0003: Result ready flag to

Turn off RX0003: Result ready flag.
off is detected.

Turn off RY0003: Result ack flag.

Go to the next flowchart

*1 This is the procedure when handshake is set to ON.

When handshake is set to OFF, the controller overwrites the data memory corresponding to RWr at the execution timing of the data
output unit regardless of the RY0003: Result ack flag status. Then, the RX0003: Result ready flag remains ON. If it is necessary to check
write completion for change from OFF to ON of RX0003: Result ready flag, turn ON RY0003: Result ack flag to turn OFF the Result ready
flag.

Since the address of the word device output is shared between data output and the command control via CC-Link (Page 1-
Point
130), ensure that the data range used for the data output does not overlap with the range used for command response
data.

XG-X Comm-US 1-127

Outputting Measurement Data via CC-Link (Data Output)

Timing Chart (Data output by CC-link)

When handshake is ON

c e
Result ack flag
A
b d b
Result ready flag

a e
Indefinite Total status Total status
Result OR flag*1

a e
Indefinite Output data Output data
RWr

A: 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed)

*1 If you use the Result OR flag, one or more item of data needs to be set to be output from the data output unit to the CC-Link.
(1) The data is updated.
(2) The Result ready flag for the read synchronization signal of the output data turns ON and the data can be read.
(3) When data read is completed, the Result ack Flag turns ON as the signal for data read completion.
(4) Associated with (3), the Result ready flag turns OFF.
(5) Result ack flag turns OFF. This is received and output continues if data is updated.
When handshake is OFF

d e
Result ack flag
A
RX0003 b d
Result ready flag

RX0004 a c
*1 Indefinite Total status Total status
Result OR flag

a c
Indefinite Output data Output data
RWr

A: 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed)

*1 If you use the Result OR flag, one or more item of data needs to be set to be output from the data output unit to the CC-Link.
(1) The data is updated.
(2) The Result ready flag for the read synchronization signal of the output data turns ON and the data can be read.
(3)If data is updated, the Result ready flag stays ON and output continues.
(4)If the Result ack flag turns ON, the Result ready flag turns OFF. This can be used when you want to find out the latest OK/
NG status with as little delay as possible for such applications as when the line is to be stopped when the status is NG.
(5)Result ack flag turns OFF. Thus, you can find out the timing of the next data update.

1-128 XG-X Comm-US

I/O Control via CC-Link

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

Change the settings to use CC-Link to control input/output in the same way as the terminal block interface or parallel I/O
interface of the controller.

• The CC-Link cannot be used while the PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT is enabled.
Point
• For more details on the system variables available for the CC-Link, refer to "List of System Variables" (Page 3-448).

I/O Control Operation (Example of Connection to PLC CC-Link Unit)

When system variables related to parallel output control are assigned to bit devices, multiple I/O signals can be transmitted
through one CC-Link cable.

Controller PLC

RX000E %UnitEditStatus(Unit edit status) The relay corresponding to RX000E turns on.

RY0004 %Trg1 (Trigger 1 input) Turn on the relay corresponding to RY0004.

• Since the CC-Link performs communications through the link scan, if the signal fluctuates at high speed, the CC-Link
Point
may not be able to pick up these fluctuations.
• The scan cycle varies depending on the "Count," "Cycles," and "Settings of other devices on the network." Keep this and
the signal variation time in mind when using the CC-Link.

Reference • By assigning %OutDataAsync to the RX device, the measurement value or the judgment value can be output to the bit
device.
• By assigning %CmdCode, %CmdParam, or %CmdStrobe to the RY device, the custom command may be executed from
the bit device.

XG-X Comm-US 1-129

Controlling the System via CC-Link (Command Control)

Controlling the System via CC-Link

(Command Control)

Predefined commands can be executed at any time.

• The CC-Link cannot be used while the PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT is enabled.
Point
• The commands which are to be executed as a custom instruction must be defined. See "Custom instruction" (Page 2-
112) for more details.
• For more details on the commands available for the CC-Link, refer to "Command List (Available Operation vs. Situation)"
(Page 2-9).

Command Processing Flow with CC-Link (Example of Connection to PLC

CC-Link Unit)
Use the following procedure to use commands to control the system with the CC-Link.

Controller PLC

Write the command No. and command

parameters of a desired command to the data
memory corresponding to RWw000: Command
Number and those corresponding to RWw002
and subsequent addresses respectively.

Confirm that the relay corresponding to RX0002:

Command execution Command ready flag is turned on.
When the controller detects that RY0000: request
Command request flag is turned on, it reads the Turn on the relay corresponding to RY0000:
command from RWw000: Command Number and Command request flag.
the command parameters from RWw002 and
subsequent addresses.

The command execution starts.

Command reception
notice Confirm the start of command execution by
When the command execution has started,
detecting that the relay corresponding to
RX0002: Command ready flag turns off.
RX0002: Command ready flag has turned off.

When the command execution is completed, the Response data output

response data is written to RWr: Command Data The response data is written to the data memory
and the error status is set in RX0001: Command corresponding to RWr: Command Data.
error flag.
Confirm completion of the command execution
Command execution
by detecting that the relay corresponding to
completion notice
RX0000: Command complete flag turns on. RX0000: Command complete flag has turned on.
Reference the response data and command
execution result.
When the controller confirms that RY0000: Confirmation
Command request flag is turned off, it turns off completion notice Turn off the relay corresponding to RY0000:
RX0000: Command complete flag and RX0001:
Command request flag.
Command error flag and turns on RX0002:
Command ready flag.

Reference When a command error occurs, the command execution result data is written to RWr000: Command Result (0: Success,
<Error code>: Failure). The error codes are described in "When an error occurs on command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

1-130 XG-X Comm-US

Controlling the System via CC-Link (Command Control)

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

Timing Chart

RY0000 b e
A
Command
request flag
A
RX0002
A
Command
ready flag

RX0000 A
Command d
complete flag
A
c
RX0001
Command OFF Error OFF
error flag

RWw000
Command Instruction No. Any value
Number
a
RWw
Command Command parameter Any value
Parameter
Obtain the command data before turning off
A
c the Command request flag.
RWr
Command Return values Indefinite
Data

A: 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed)

(1) Store the command number in RWw000 and the starting command parameter in RWw002.
(2) Turn ON RY0000 (Command request flag) and execute the command.
RX0002 (Command ready flag) turns OFF. (The Command ready flag will turn OFF according to the link scan speed)
(3) When the time necessary for the command execution has passed, the return value is stored in Command Data and the
error status in Command error flag. (Command error flag OFF: Command processing is a success, ON: Command
processing is a failure.)
(4) As a check signal for completion of the command execution, RX0000 (Command complete flag) is ON.
(5) To issue the next command, the Command ready flag should be ON and the Command complete flag should be OFF.

XG-X Comm-US 1-131

Changing the Value of a Variable via CC-Link (Variable Synchronization)

Changing the Value of a Variable via CC-Link

(Variable Synchronization)

Change the settings to use CC-Link to change the value of a special system variable for variable synchronization
(%InDataFieldbus[ ]) assigned to the word device.

Point The CC-Link cannot be used while the PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT is enabled.

Reference Refer to "List of System Variables" (Page 3-448) for more details on the system variable %InDataFieldbus[ ].

Variable Synchronization Flow with CC-Link (Example of Connection to

PLC CC-Link Unit)
Use the following procedure for changing the system variable (%InDataFieldbus [ ]) on the controller with CC-Link.

Controller PLC

With the relay corresponding to InDataFieldbus

sync inhibit flag set to ON, write the value that you
want to change to the data memory for the address
assigned with %InDataFieldbus [ ].*1
When the controller detects that RY0001: Reading permission
InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag is turned off, Turn off the relay corresponding to RY0001:
it reads the value from the address to which InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag.*1
%InDataFieldbus[ ] has been assigned.

The read value is applied to image processing

which is executed next.

*1 This is the procedure for controlling the reading timing of one value. CC-Link reads a value for each normal link scan cycle. When the
PLC is writing to multiple DM, a time lag may occur in the application timing. By turning on RY0001: InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag in
advance and writing to DM while reading is inhibited, multiple elements of an array variable can be changed simultaneously without
being affected by the writing timing.

Reference • The value of %InDataFieldbus[ ] is initialized to "0" immediately after the controller is started. If CC-Link communication is
interrupted, the value of %InDataFieldbus[ ] which was last written is retained until the controller is restarted.
• The value is written to data memory as 32-bit signed integer data.

1-132 XG-X Comm-US

Changing the Value of a Variable via CC-Link (Variable Synchronization)

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

Timing Chart
Example when the values of %InDataFieldbus[1] and %InDataFieldbus[2] are changed

InDataFieldbus
sync inhibit flag

RWw nnn
Data1 햳 Data3
(%InDataFieldbus [1])
햲

RWw nnn+2
Data2 Data4
(%InDataFieldbus [2]) 햳
A

Data1 Data3
%InDataFieldbus [1] 햴
A A

Data2 Data4
%InDataFieldbus [2]

A: 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed)

(1) Since the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag is OFF, if RWr corresponding to %InDataFieldbus [1] is rewritten, the value of
%InDataFieldbus [1] is rewritten. (Since the value in RWr is not changed for %InDataFieldbus [2], the value remains the
same.)
(2) Although the RWw value corresponding to %InDataFieldbus [1]/%InDataFieldbus [2] is rewritten, InDataFieldbus sync
inhibit flag is ON and the values of %InDataFieldbus [1] and %InDataFieldbus [2] remain the same. To rewrite multiple
%InDataFieldbus values simultaneously, it is necessary to turn ON the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag and rewrite all
corresponding RWw, and then to turn OFF the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag.
(3) Since the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag is OFF, the values of %InDataFieldbus [1] and %InDataFieldbus [2] are
rewritten. (At least the time for the link scan time is required until rewriting is completed.)

XG-X Comm-US 1-133

Typical CC-Link Setting Procedure

This section explains the operation example to connect the • The number of word device and bit device
Reference
XG-X Series to the Keyence KV Series via CC-Link, output points are determined by the [Count] and
measured/judgment values and control the controller with the [Cycle] setting. In the above settings the word
PW command using CC-Link. device is 128 points, and the bit device 896
points.
• In conjunction with the increase in [Cycle]
multiples, the response times will slow down.
Connecting to the PLC
[Word assignment]
If the settings pertaining to the KV series CC-Link • RWw list: XG-X inputs, PLC write data assignments
Point
are not completed, first set the KV series side • RWr list: XG-X outputs, PLC read data assignments
settings (Page 1-135).
Reference The representative data is assigned as the default
value.

1. Checking the system settings of the XG-X [Bit assignment]

Series • RX Setting: XG-X outputs, PLC read data assignments
• RY Setting: XG-X inputs, PLC write data assignments

1 Start the XG-X VisionEditor and select the program Reference • The representative data is assigned as the
default value.
setting of the workspace which is the target of setting.
• Only the system variables are covered.

2 On the XG-X VisionEditor [Program Setting] tab,

5 Select [OK].
select [System Settings] from the [Various
The changes are saved.
Settings] menu.

6 Upload the system settings to the controller and

3 In the [System Settings] screen, select
then restart the controller.
[Communications & I/O] - [CC-Link].

4 Change the CC-Link settings.

The following setting values are used in this example

(Change them according to the device to be connected.).

1-134 XG-X Comm-US

Typical CC-Link Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

[Base]
2. Changing the KV series settings
• Baud rate: 10 Mbps (match with XG-X)
The other items fundamentally use the
1 Start up the KV STUDIO with the computer and PLC Reference
default values as they are (they can be
connected, select [New project] from the [File] menu. changed to match needs).

2 After entering the [Project name], select the [PLC [Remote I/O for cyclic transmission area]
model], then click [OK]. Set the number of bit device points to 1/16 (896/
16=56).
• Input size: 56
• Output size: 56

[Remote register for cyclic transmission area]

Set to the same number as the number of word device
points.
• Read size: 128

5 Select [Convert] - [Auto-assign relay/DM] in the

Unit Editor, then assign the devices.
When doing automatic assigning, bit devices will be
The [Confirm unit setting information] screen is
assigned as R, and word devices as DM.
displayed.

3 Click [Read unit setting].

6 Save the changes, then close the Unit Editor.

7 Select [Transfer to PLC] from the KV STUDIO

[Monitor/Simulator] menu, then forward the setting
contents to the KV series.

8 Select the [Setting KV-CL20] from the KV STUDIO

[Tool] menu.
4 Select the XG-X series and the CC-Link unit (KV- The [KV-CL20 Settings] screen will appear.
CL20) inside the workspace, and after starting up
the [Unit Editor], set the baud rate and remote 9 Select [New] from the [File] menu via the [KV-CL20
input/output and remote register size settings via Settings].
the [Setup unit(2)] tab.
10Select the [Read from the Unit] from the [Comm
setting] menu via the [KV-CL20 Settings].
The [Read from the Unit] screen will appear.

XG-X Comm-US 1-135

Typical CC-Link Setting Procedure

11 Click [OK]. 18Select [Write to the unit] from the [Comm setting]
The confirmation screen will appear. menu via the [KV-CL20 Settings].
The [Write to the unit] screen will appear.
12Follow the onscreen instructions, and click in
sequence [Yes] - [Yes] - [OK], then the parameter
readouts are completed.

13Select [Auto Configuration] from the [Comm setting]

menu via the [KV-CL20 Settings].
The [Auto Configuration] screen will appear.

19Click [OK].
20Follow the onscreen instructions, and click in
sequence [Yes] - [Yes] - [Yes] - [OK], then the
parameter writing is completed.

21Close the [KV-CL20 Settings] screen.

14Click [OK]. The setting file save confirmation screen will appear.
The confirmation screen will appear.
22Click [Yes], to save the setting file.
15Follow the onscreen instructions, and click in
sequence [Yes] - [Yes] - [Yes] - [OK], then the Auto 23Select [Transfer to PLC] from the [Monitor/Simulator]
Configurations are completed. menu in KV STUDIO.

16Select the [Station Information List Settings] from 24Restart both the XG-X series and the KV series.
the KV STUDIO [CC-Link Settings] menu via the If the KV-CL20 ERR lamp (red) goes out, the CC-Link
[KV-CL20 Settings]. establishment is successful.

17After checking that the [Number of occupied

stations] and [Advanced Settings], and [Remote
stations count] are identical with the XG-X series
system settings, then click [OK].
• Number of occupied stations: 4 stations
• Advanced Settings: 8 times settings
• Remote stations count: 896 points

1-136 XG-X Comm-US

Typical CC-Link Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

4 Check the RWr address used for the output.
Outputting Measured/Judgment • When you assign data in the [Item] column, the output
Values destination RWr address is automatically displayed in
the [RWr Address] column.
• The RWr address start position default value is [0],
1. Setting the output data (Data output unit) and it can be changed via the [Offset of RWr] in the
[Protocol Details] tab.
To output various kinds of measured/
• The correlation between the RWr address and the
judgment values, use the "Data
PLC DM address is set via the KV STUDIO.
output unit." This section describes
how to assign the measured/
judgment values of the following
units to a data output unit as data to
be output.
• Total status judgment of the
flowchart (%JgAll)
• U0002: Pattern search (Position X)
• U0002: Pattern search (Position XY)
• U0004: Area (Area)
• U0005: OCR (Line 1 result string)
• Variable #a
• Variable #b
• U0002: Pattern search (Unit judgment value)
• U0004: Area (Unit judgment value)
• Processing time (%PrcTime)
• Processing start date (%PrcDay)

1 Add a "Data output unit" at the end of the flowchart.

The setting screen of the added "data output unit" is
displayed.

2 Select [CC-Link] for [Output Method] on the

[Output Settings] tab.

3 From the parts list, drag and drop measured/

judgment values you want to output to assign them
into the [Item] column.

Other than dragging and dropping from the parts list,

you can enter values directly.

XG-X Comm-US 1-137

Typical CC-Link Setting Procedure

2. Check the DM correlation with the RWr

3 Select [Communications & I/O] - [CC-Link] via the
XG-X VisionEditor [System Settings] screen, then
and output configuration to RWr click [RWr list].
The contents which are assigned to the RWr address
1 Checking examples of storage of result data RWr. can be confirmed.
The data output unit in the flow is set to output the
result data as per the following.
• Total status (OK=0 / NG=1)
• U0002: Pattern search position X (284.868)
• U0002: Pattern search position XY (X=284.868 /
Y=196.223)
• U0004: Area (17839)
• U0005: OCR 1st row character string. (KEYENCE)
• Variable #a (95)
• Variable #b (348.267) In a default setting state, the [Command Result] and data
• U0002: Pattern search unit judgment value (OK=0 / output unit [U0006] are both assigned to RWr000.
NG=1) Similarly, both are also assigned subsequent to RWr001.
• U0004: Area unit judgment value (OK=0 / NG=1) In this state, since the command response and output
• Processing time (67.477ms) data overlap, there is a need to change the data output
• Processing start date (%PrcDay) (11) storage location by performing the operations from step 4
and after.
2 Check the DM address correlation with the RWr
address via the KV STUDIO. 4 Change the [Command area size] into the required
amount.
Here the command area size (default value 128 words)
is changed into 10 words.

• In the command area, the [CommandResult] is

• The [Leading Read No.] from the [Remote register assigned to RWr000, and 1 Command Data is assigned
for cyclic transmission area] is equivalent to the first to 2 words from RWr002.
address in the RWr device. • Change the size to match the command which is to
- Since the default value will be [DM10400] with the be used.
[Auto-assign relay/DM] operation, check that
RWr000=DM10400. 5 Change the [Offset of RWr] in the [Protocol Details]
- To change it, select [Leading DM No.] from the tab in the data output unit.
[Base] menu. Change the [Offset of RWr] to 10.
• For the first address in the RWw device check the If it is changed, the first address will be 010.
[Leading Write No.].
6 Upload the program setting file and system setting
file to the controller.
After restarting the controller, the output from CC-Link
begins.

1-138 XG-X Comm-US

Typical CC-Link Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

7 After entering the trigger to the XG-X series, check the Typical data output flow (Handshake: ON)
output results via the KV STUDIO Registration monitor.
Check the current values with Device DM10410 as the Controller PLC
beginning. The inspection flowchart is Use a trigger signal or other
processed method to start processing
the inspection flowchart
[Data output unit]
Confirm that the RY0003:
Result ack flag is OFF

[Data output unit]

Writes data to the RWr result
area

[Data output unit] Checks that the RX0003:

When the data writing is Result ready flag is changed
complete, set the RX0003: to ON, and reads the Rwr data
Result ready flag to ON output

[Data output unit]

Check that the RY0003: Set the RY0003:
Result ack flag was changed to Result ack flag to ON
ON to confirm the completion
of the data reading

[Data output unit] Check that the RX0003:

• Judgment values are stored by using two words to Set the RX0003: Result ready flag was changed
Result ready flag to OFF to OFF
show 0 (OK) or 1 (NG).
• Decimal type data is multiplied by 1000 and stored Sets the RY0003:
by using two words: 284.868 to 284868 Result ack flag to OFF

• When XY data is output, the data is stored in the

order of X and Y by using two words for each.
Typical data output flow (Handshake: OFF)
• Integer type data is stored directly by using two
words.
Controller PLC
• Character data is stored as ASCII code by using two
The inspection flowchart is Use a trigger signal or other
words for each character (Only in the case of OCR2 processed method to start processing
unit Trimmed String is one byte used for one the inspection flowchart

character so that two words are used to store a unit [Data output unit]
Writes data to the RWr result
of four characters.). area
- When data is output as "string", the number of DM
[Data output unit] Checks that the RX0003:
used varies depending on the specified number When the data writing is Result ready flag is changed
complete, set the RX0003: to ON, and reads the Rwr data
of characters. This example outputs the "number output
Result ready flag to ON
of characters on the first line" of the OCR unit and
the string is seven characters of "KEYENCE". Set the RY0003:
Result ack flag to ON
However, since [L1: Number of Characters] for
[Block Setup] is set to 10, the range of 20 words
(10 characters) from DM710 to DM729 are used.
- Changing the number of characters setting affects
all the subsequent DM settings. It is
recommended to set an item which may be
changed at the end of the Data output unit.
• Variables are multiplied by 1000 and stored by using
two words: 95 to 95000, 348.267 to 348267
• Judgment values are stored by using two words to
show 0 (OK) or 1 (NG).
• For system variables, integer type data is stored as
is while decimal type data is multiplied by 1000.
They are stored by using 2 words.

XG-X Comm-US 1-139

Typical CC-Link Setting Procedure

• RWr list: Outputs for the XG-X series, and

Controlling the Controller assignments for PLC reading data

1. Checking the system settings of the XG-X

Series

1 Start the XG-X VisionEditor and select the program

setting of the workspace which is the target of
setting.

2 On the XG-X VisionEditor [Program Setting] tab,

Output data (PLC → XG-X: OUT)
select [System Settings] from the [Various
• Command Number: Sets the command number
Settings] menu.
which is to be executed (word)
• Command Parameter#: Sets the #th parameter of
3 In the [System Settings] screen, select the command (presence or absence of parameters
[Communications & I/O] - [CC-Link]. depends upon the command) (word)

Input data (XG-X → PLC: IN)

• Command Result: The Command execution result
will be set (0: Succeeded, <Error code>: Failed)
(word)
• Command Data#: the #th response data for the
command will be set (presence or absence of
response data depends upon the command) (word)

5 Check the bit device assignment states required for

controlling the controller via [Bit assignment].
4 Check the word device assignment states required
[Bit assignment]
for controlling the controller via [Word assignment].
• RX setting: Outputs for the XG-X series, and
[Word assignment] assignments for PLC reading data
• RWw list: Inputs for the XG-X series, and
assignments for the PLC writing data

1-140 XG-X Comm-US

Typical CC-Link Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

• RY setting: Inputs for the XG-X series, and
2. Example of command execution
assignments for the PLC writing data
procedure: Switch program No. (PW)
The following is a typical example of the command
execution procedure. This example uses the PW command
(Change Program) which uses a command parameter.

1 In the [System Settings] screen of the XG-X

VisionEditor, select [Custom Instruction] and check
the command details.

RX and RY addresses which already have

Point
assignments and which cannot be changed from the
default values are grayed out.

Output data (PLC → XG-X: OUT)

• Command request flag: Turned from OFF to ON
when executing commands (bit) • With the default setting assignments, there are the
PW commands, [PW, 1, *01] which switches to an
Input data (XG-X → PLC: IN)
SD1 setting number and the [PW, 2, *01] which
• Command complete flag: When command
switches to an SD2 setting number.
processing completes, turns ON (bit)
• Here the procedures for executing the [PW, 1, *01]
• Command error flag: OFF when command
that switches to an SD1 setting number are
processes succeeds, when it fails turns ON (bit)
explained.
• Command ready flag: When command processing
• The command No. is [2], and, since [*01] is written
can be received, turns ON (bit)
in the Commands and Parameters column, we know
that a command parameter is used.
6 Select [OK].
Specify the program setting number that is to be
Closes the [System Settings] screen.
switched to for [*01] (this time it is switched to
program setting number 11).
7 Upload the system settings to the controller and
then restart the controller.
2 Input the PW command No. into the KV device to
which RWw0000: Command Number is assigned,
and input the program setting No. to switch to into
the KV device to which RWw0002: Command
Parameter1 is assigned.
Here the PW command number, which is [2], is input
into the KV device (DM10528) to which RWw0000:
Command Number was assigned, and the program
number [11] for the switching destination is input into
the KV device (DM10530) to which RWw0002:
Command Parameter1 was assigned.
The DM which is used is 2 words per 1 item.

XG-X Comm-US 1-141

Typical CC-Link Setting Procedure

3 Turn on the KV device (here R39200) to which

RY0000: Command request flag is assigned.
The PW command (the setting number is switched) is
executed.
• Command instruction success: After the command
execution is completed, the KV device (here R33600)
to which the RX0000: Command complete flag was
assigned turns on.
• Command instruction failure: the KV device (here
R33601) to which the RX0001:Command error flag
was assigned turns on, and the error code is written
into the KV device (here DM10400) to which
RWr0000: Command Result was assigned.

Typical command processing flow

Controller PLC

Sets the custom command

number to be executed to the
RWw000: Command Number,
and the command parameters
to the RWw002 and after
Command Parameter

After confirming that the

RX0002: Command ready flag
The command execution starts is ON, set the RY0000:
Command Request flag to ON
to order command execution

· After the command execution · Confirm the completion of

is complete, set the command the command execution by
execution result (0: Succeeded, detecting that the RX0000:
<Error code>: Failed) in Command complete flag
RWr000: Command Result turned ON, and check the
· Sets the error state to the command execution result by
RW0001:Command error flag referencing the content in
when there is a command error RWr: Command Result
· When the command requires · When there is response data,
response data, set the response reference the content in RWr:
data in RWr: Command Data Command Data

Set RY0000:
Command request flag to OFF

1-142 XG-X Comm-US

Checking the CC-Link Communication Status (CC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics)

Checking the CC-Link Communication Status

(CC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics)

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

You can check the system's CC-Link I/O signal communication • Results data in this screen are displayed in
Reference
status with this function. This function is convenient because it a shortened form.
allows you to check communications content when connected Example:
to an external device in situations such as when the appropriate Normal notation!U[0002].RSLT.X[JGL]:MS
data cannot be communicated between connected devices. Shortened form!U2.X[JGL]:MS
• In setup mode, communication output other
The monitor cannot be used when [Enable/ than response for external input commands
Point
Disable] for CC-Link is [Disable] or when CC-Link is not performed. If you want to check the
is not connected. First establish a CC-Link data output operation, switch to run mode.
connection before using the monitor.
RWw command area (Output word device) screen

1 From the [Utilities] menu at the top of the screen,

select [CC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics].
The [CC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics] screen is displayed.

You can see that "1" as the Command Number is input

as the value of RWw000 and "2" as the Command
Parameter1 is input as the value of RWw002.

RX user definition area (Input bit device) screen

2 Select the item you wish to check.

Select Word Device (RWr/RWw) or Bit Device (RX/RY).

3 Now check the communication status.

RWr command area (Input word device) screen

You can see that "1" as the Command ready flag,

Result ready flag, and Result OR flag is output from
the controller as the value of RX002, RX003, and
RX004.

You can see that the result of Command Result was

output as the value of RWr000 and the data specified
to the unit 0002 was output as the value of RWr008,
RWr010, and RWr012 from the controller.

XG-X Comm-US 1-143

Checking the CC-Link Communication Status (CC-Link Monitor & Diagnostics)

RY user definition area (Output bit device) screen

You can see that "1" as the value of the Command

Request flag is input from the PLC side as the value of
RY000.

Reference With the input data (RWr and RX) monitor, you
can manually change the value for the desired
addresses and check those changes on the
PLC by selecting ON for Manual Control
during setup mode.

4 Select [Close].

1-144 XG-X Comm-US

Troubleshooting

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

If operation is not correct

Result OR flag is not output.

The Result OR flag is updated in association with
execution of the data output unit which has CC-Link as the
output destination. When the Result OR flag is used, it is
necessary to output one or more data to CC-Link with the
data output unit.

Result ready flag does not turn OFF

Control of the Result ack flag may not be correct. The
Result ready flag is turned OFF when the Result ack flag is
recognized (recieved by the controller). This is true
whether the handshake is ON or OFF.

Data cannot be correctly retrieved due to

change of the %Sto output at the leading
edge from the external terminal.
Since %Sto is the data strobe signal of the parallel terminal
output unit, it cannot be used as the strobe signal of data
output.
For the data read timing with the CC-Link, refer to the
Result ready flag.

XG-X Comm-US 1-145

Troubleshooting

Error Messages

Error Messages Assigned to System Variable %Error0.

The errors messages below are assigned to %Error0 by default.
The errors assigned to %Error0 can be removed or switched to %Error1 as desired.

Error Message Cause Corrective Action Error

Code
CC-Link communication An error has occurred while starting • Check whether the CC-Link cable is connected
has failed. communication or during correctly.
communication, and communication • Check whether the terminating resistor is attached
cannot be performed correctly. properly.
• Make sure the cable complies with the specified
standards.
• Check whether the baud rate is set correctly 177
according to the cable length specifications.
• Make sure the settings on the master side have not
been changed during the communication session.
• Check whether the controller and master were
restarted after updating the communication
settings.
CC-Link unit (CA-NCL20E) The CC-Link unit is not recognized • Make sure the CC-Link unit is attached correctly.
disconnected. and the controller cannot use CC-Link • Make sure the CC-Link unit is not damaged.
181
communication. • Do not disconnect the CC-Link unit while the
controller and unit are powered on.

Errors Messages not Assigned to System Variables %Error0 or %Error1

These errors by default are not assigned to %Error0 or %Error1 but can be assigned through the XG Vision Editor software.

Error Message Cause Corrective Action Error

Code
External command error An error occurred when executing a Review the command being sent, the program settings
has occurred. command from one of these devices: or the device status.
• PC Program
• PLC-Link
• Ethernet
• RS-232C 128
• CC-Link
• External terminals
• EtherNet/IP
• PROFINET
• EtherCAT
Unable to write to CC-Link The controller output buffer for Reduce the amount of data to be output via CC-Link, so
output buffer. outputting via the CC-Link is full. the buffer does not start filling up. Extend the time
between triggers / processing to allow for data to be 179
output. Note: Results data are not written when the buffer
is full.

1-146 XG-X Comm-US

Troubleshooting

Control/Data Output via CC-Link

Error Message Cause Corrective Action Error
Code
CC-Link output buffer is The controller output buffer for Reduce the amount of data to be output via CC-Link, so
full. outputting via the CC-Link is full. the data is output at a faster rate than it builds up. Or
extend the time between triggers / processing to allow 180
for data to be output. Note: Inspections processing can
be put on hold until the buffer becomes free.

XG-X Comm-US 1-147

Control/Data Output Overview of Control/Data
via EtherNet/IP Output via EtherNet/IP
The XG-X Series supports communication via EtherNet/IP.
EtherNet/IP is an open communications standard whose
specifications are overseen by the ODVA (Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association, Inc.). Communication is possible
between all EtherNet/IP compatible devices regardless of
Overview of System Control/ vendor.
The EtherNet/IP functions supported by the controller are
Data Output as follows:

Control/Data Output via

Fixed-cycle Communication (Implicit)
External Terminals
High speed control can be performed using fixed-cycle
communication at a specified interval (RPI: Request
Control/Data Output via Packet Interval). Also, controls can be made by
referencing and updating variables in the PLC, reducing
PLC-Link the amount of PLC programming.
• Controlling the system: Commands can be assigned
Control/Data Output via with fixed-cycle communication and used to control the
vision system.
CC-Link • Outputting result data: Inspection data results can be
output to EtherNet/IP using fixed-cycle communication.
• I/O control: Using control system variables assigned to
q Control/Data Output via
the fixed-cycle communication, the input/output
EtherNet/IP functions of the I/O terminals of the XG-X can be
controlled via the fixed-cycle communication.
• Changing variable values: When special system
Control/Data Output via variables are assigned to %InDataFieldbus[], their
PROFINET values can be changed via the fixed-cycle
communication (variable synchronization).

Control/Data Output via

EtherCAT

Control/Data Output via

No protocol communication

FTP Client/Server Function

1-148 XG-X Comm-US

Overview of Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

• Settings for fixed-cycle communication, such as
Point
cycle (RPI), data size, timeout, and send trigger
Operation Flow
are performed on the PLC-side. When using
cyclic communication with the XG-X controller, Checking specifications (Page 1-150)
set the RPI to a value of 5 ms or more (1 ms or
• Check if the PLC for connection is the model compliant with
more when using a communication expansion
EtherNet/IP.
unit). Also, when selecting COS (Change of
State) using a PLC (Keyence KV-3000/5000/ • Check the assignment status of input and output data.
5500/7300/7500/8000, KV-nano, etc.) that can 
select a send trigger, set the Inhibit Time to a
Changing Ethernet/IP settings (Page 1-158)
value of 5 ms or more (1 ms or more when using
a communication expansion unit). • Make settings to connect the controller for EtherNet/IP
• Even when RPI has been set to 5 ms or more connection.
(1 ms or more when using a communication Main items: IP address, PLC type, cyclic communication data
expansion unit), the XG-X controller may exhibit size, input data/output data assignment of the controller
processing delays and communication may
temporarily time out or disconnect when used

with other communications such as system Establishing the Ethernet/IP link
measurement setting, menu operations, • You can confirm whether a cyclic communications link has been
commands, FTP or remote desktop. When this established or not by checking [Communication Status] on the
occurs, review the cyclic communication [EtherNet/IP] screen on the controller's Global settings.
settings and conditions used. Be sure to
perform verification of the performance before 
actual operation. Executing necessary processing
• When there are multiple devices connected
Data output (Page 1-166)
together on the network that includes EtherNet/
• The data from the data output unit is written on the data output
IP devices, there can be a heavy load on the
network which may result in constant/temporary area.
communication delays or packet losses. • Check data write completion with the Result ready flag.
Perform a thorough verification before • When the Result ack flag is ON, read completion is notified.
operation.
• EtherNet/IP and PLC-Link, CC-Link, PROFINET I/O control (Page 1-168)
or EtherCAT cannot be used at the same time • With assignment of the system variable related to the terminal
(EtherNet/IP cannot be used when PLC-Link, control, the I/O control can be used.
CC-Link PROFINET or EtherCAT is enabled).
Command control (Page 1-169)
• The custom command (Page 2-112) set in advance can be
Explicit Message Communication executed.
As with implicit fixed-cycle communication, this function • Store the command code and the command parameter in the

can be used for communication applications that do not command input area and turn ON the command request flag to
execute the command.
require fixed-times (Explicit message).
• When the command ready flag is ON, the command can be
There is no functional difference between the explicit
executed.
message communication function on the controller and the • Check execution of the command with the command complete
fixed-cycle communication function. Thus, in most cases flag.
there is no need to use the explicit message function.
Variable synchronization (Page 1-171)
However, it can be used when performing EtherNet/IP
• The value of a special system variable for variable
communication with a PLC that does not support implicit
synchronization (%InDataFieldbus[ ]) can be changed.
fixed-cycle communication (such as the SLC5/05 series).

XG-X Comm-US 1-149

Preparing EtherNet/IP connection

Model compliant with EtherNet/IP connection

For details of each PLC setting method, refer to "Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure" (Page 1-173) and the operation
manual accompanying the PLC.

Keyence Corporation
KV Series

PLC type EtherNet/IP Communication unit Version of firmware

KV-3000 KV-EP21V Ver.2 or later
KV-5000 KV-EP21V Ver.2 or later
KV-5500 - (Built-in port in the unit or KV-EP21V) Ver.2 or later
KV-7300 KV-XLE02, KV-EP21V -
KV-7500 - (Built-in port in the unit or KV-XLE02, KV-EP21V) -
KV-8000 - (Built-in port in the unit or KV-XLE02, KV-EP21V) -
KV Nano KV-NC1EP Ver.1 or later

Rockwell Automation, Inc.

ControlLogix type PLC

PLC type EtherNet/IP Communication unit Version of firmware

1756 ControlLogix 1756-ENBT, 1756-EN2T Ver.13 or later
1756-L81E Ver.32 or later
1769 CompactLogix - (Built in the unit) Ver.32 or later

SLC5/05 type PLC

PLC type EtherNet/IP Communication unit Version of firmware

1747 SLC5/05 - (Built in the unit) OS firmware level Series C, FRN 10
or later
1763 MicroLogix 1100 - (Built in the unit) 16.000 or later

Omron Corporation

PLC type EtherNet/IP Communication unit Version of firmware

SYSMAC CJ2 - (Built-in port in the unit or CJ1W-EIP21) V1.0 or later
SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1W-EIP21 V1.0 or later
SYSMAC CS1 CS1W-EIP21 V1.0 or later
SYSMAC NJ - (Built-in port in the unit) V1.3 or later

1-150 XG-X Comm-US

Preparing the EtherNet/IP Connection (When Using the CA-NEP20E)

Preparing the EtherNet/IP Connection

(When Using the CA-NEP20E)

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Installing the EtherNet/IP Unit CA-NEP20E EtherNet/IP Unit
Specifications
The optional EtherNet/IP unit CA-NEP20E is used when
communicating over EtherNet/IP.
Remove the protective cover from the expansion unit
Standard specifications
connector on the right side of the controller and install the
EtherNet/IP unit as shown below. Item
Point The controller must be turned off before connecting Compliant standard IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
or disconnecting the CA-NEP20E. Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX)
Communication cycle 1 ms min.
Connection cable Category 5e or greater shielded twisted
pair (STP) cable
Node interval 100 m
Communication port RJ45 connector × 2
Communication size 1436 bytes
Supported functions Cyclic communication (Implicit
message), Message communication
(Explicit message) UCMM/Class3-
compliant,
DLR (Device Level Ring)-compliant
Conformance test Complying with Version.CT16
When Using the Illumination Expansion version
Unit and EtherNet/IP Unit Together
Mount the camera input unit directly to the controller, then
mount the illumination expansion unit and EtherNet/IP unit Wiring example (P1 port/P2 port)
to the right side of the camera input unit.

No. Signal name Function

1 TX + Transmission data (+)
2 TX - Transmission data (-)
Camera input unit 3 RX + Reception data (+)
CA-E100
4 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected
Illumination 5 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected
expansion unit
CA-DC40E 6 RX - Reception data (-)
EtherNet/IP unit 7 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected
CA-NEP20E
8 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected

Point Illumination expansion units and EtherNet/IP units

cannot be installed between camera input units
and controllers.

XG-X Comm-US 1-151

Preparing the EtherNet/IP Connection (When Using the CA-NEP20E)

Connecting to an EtherNet/IP
Network
Connect the EtherNet/IP network cable to the P1 port or
the P2 port of the RJ connector. If an adapter is present
downstream of this unit, connect a network cable to the
unused port.

P1 port

P2 port

Point Use a category 5e or greater STP (shielded twisted

pair) cable for the network cable. You can use
either a straight cable or a crossover cable.

1-152 XG-X Comm-US

EtherNet/IP communication specifications

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Standard specifications

XG-X Ethernet port Communication expansion unit (CA-

NEP20E)
Cyclic No. of connections Maximum 32 1 (Exclusive Owner)
communication*1 4 (Input Only)
(Implicit Communication size Follow the PLC connection settings.
communication) To 248 bytes (Connection with Rockwell's SLC5/05)
To 496 bytes (Connection with Rockwell's ControlLogix/CompactLogix)
To 1436 bytes (Connection with Keyence's KV series and Omron's SYSMAC CJ2/CJ1/
CS1/NJ)
Transmission trigger Follow the PLC connection settings.
• Cyclic
• COS*2
Instance ID • 100: Input data (transmission of • 100: Input data (transmission of
controller) communication expansion unit)
• 101: Output data (reception of controller) • 150: Output data (reception of
(254 for Input Only connection) communication expansion unit) (3 for
Input Only)
Message No. of connections Maximum 32 Maximum 6
communication Compliant Explicit UCMM/Class3
(Explicit message) message method
Conformance test Complying with Version.CT15. Complying with Version.CT16.
*1 The conditions for the cyclic communication status to be "connected" are a bidirectional communication (Exclusive Owner) connection
or an Input Only connection being established in the case of the XG-X Ethernet port and a bidirectional communication (Exclusive
Owner) connection being established in the case of a communication expansion unit.
*2 Only the PLC compliant with COS (Keyence's KV-3000/5000/5500/7300/7500/8000, KV-nano, etc.) can be specified. When the COS
transmission trigger is selected, the controller sends the data at the timing when the transmission data is changed. (If the transmission
data is not changed, it sends the data at specified RPI (communication frequency) intervals.) If the transmission data is continuously
changed, the transmission is held during InhibitTime (minimum transmission interval). Also, the target used to check for changes to the
transmission data is the "Result ready flag" and the "Command complete flag" in the case of the XG-X Ethernet port and is the entirety
of the transmission data in the case of a communication expansion unit.

How to use explicit message communication and implicit fixed-cycle communication

Explicit message communication is used with PLC's like the Rockwell MicroLogix PLC. The setup procedure is different
from the implicit fixed-cycle communcation type PLC's like the ControlLogix, but the functionality is the same. Use explicit
message communication for PLC's that do not have implicit communication.

• Since the explicit message communication performs TCP/IP communication, it is not suitable for a high speed control
Point
when compared to the implicit communication using UDP.
• Although the explicit message communication is a communication through TCP/IP, the data may not be delivered
depending on a network status. Design the control (e.g. re-sending with time-out) at the PLC considering such a case.

XG-X Comm-US 1-153

EtherNet/IP communication specifications

Assignment status of cyclic communication data

Example of input data settings (XG-X series → Keyence KV-7500 series)

Example that one XG-X series is connected to the KV-7500 series and that the cyclic communication data size is set to 496
bytes (address 0000 to 0495), the command area size to 100 bytes (address 0020 to 0119), and the result area assignment
start offset to 120 bytes (address 0120 -). (B****/W**** in the table is the assignment example of the KV-7500 link relay and
link register address.)

Setting Address 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
status (byte)
Bit 0000 B007 Reserved B006 Reserved B005 Reserved B004 Result OR B003 Result B002 Cmd B001 Cmd Err B000 Cmd
area Ready Ready Complete
0001 B00F Reserved B00E Reserved B00D Reserved B00C Reserved B00B Trg4 Ready B00A Trg3 B009 Trg2 Ready B008 Trg1 Ready
Ready
0002 B017 Reserved B016 Reserved B015 Reserved B014 Reserved B013 Trg4 Ack B012 Trg3 Ack B011 Trg2 Ack B010 Trg1 Ack
0003 B01F Reserved B01E Reserved B01D Reserved B01C Reserved B01B Remote B01A Err 1 Status B019 Err 0 Status B018 Busy
Ready
0004 B027 Assignable B026 Assignable B025 Assignable B024 Assignable B023 Assignable B022 Assignable B021 Assignable B020 Assignable
0005 B02F Assignable B02E Assignable B02D Assignable B02C Assignable B02B Assignable B02A Assignable B029 Assignable B028 Assignable
0006 B037 Assignable B036 Assignable B035 Assignable B034 Assignable B033 Assignable B032 Assignable B031 Assignable B030 Assignable
0007 B03F Assignable B03E Assignable B03D Assignable B03C Assignable B03B Assignable B03A Assignable B039 Assignable B038 Assignable
Error 0008 W000 Error 0 Code
code area 0009
0010 W001 Error 1 Code
0011
0012 W002 Reserved
0013 Reserved
0014 W003 Reserved
0015 Reserved
Measurement 0016 W004 Total Count
count 0017
area 0018 W005
0019
Command 0020 W006 Command InData (0020)
output area 0021 Result
0022 W007 InData (0022)
0023
0024 W008 Command InData (0024)
0025 Data 1
0026 W009 InData (0026)
0027
0028 W00A Command InData (0028)
0029 Data 2
0030 W00B InData (0030)
0031
0032 W00C InData (0032)
⋅⋅⋅

0114 W035 InData (0114)

0115
0116 W036 Command InData (0116)
0117 Data 24
0118 W037 InData (0118)
0119

1-154 XG-X Comm-US

EtherNet/IP communication specifications

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Setting Address 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
status (byte)
Result output 0120 W038 Result Data InData (0120)
area 0121 1
0122 W039 InData (0122)
0123
0124 W03A Result Data InData (0124)
0125 2
0126 W03B InData (0126)
0127
0128 W03C InData (0128)
0129
0130 W03D InData (0130)
⋅⋅⋅

0490 W0F1 InData (0490)

0491
0492 W0F2 Result Data InData (0492)
0493 94
0494 W0F3 InData (0494)
0495

Names and operations of input signals

Assigned Region Name Remarks

Bit area Cmd Complete Turns ON when command processing is complete.
Cmd Err Turns OFF when command processing is successful and turns ON when it fails.
Cmd Ready Turns ON when command processes can be received.
Result Ready Turns ON when data transmission is complete.
Result OR Linked to %JgAll*.
Trg1 Ready Ready signal for Trigger 1
Trg2 Ready Ready signal for Trigger 2
Trg3 Ready Ready signal for Trigger 3
Trg4 Ready Ready signal for Trigger 4
Trg1 Ack Turns ON when Trigger 1 input is received. Turns OFF when Trigger 1 input is OFF.
Trg2 Ack Turns ON when Trigger 2 input is received. Turns OFF when Trigger 2 input is OFF.
Trg3 Ack Turns ON when Trigger 3 input is received. Turns OFF when Trigger 3 input is OFF.
Trg4 Ack Turns ON when Trigger 4 input is received. Turns OFF when Trigger 4 input is OFF.
Busy Linked to %Busy.
Err 0 Status Linked to %Error0.
Err 1 Status Linked to %Error1.
Remote Ready Linked to %Run.
Error code area Error 0 Code The error code for the cause of the error assigned to %Error0 that occurred last.
Error 1 Code The error code for the cause of the error assigned to %Error1 that occurred last.
Processing count area Total Count Displays the processing count.
Command output area Command Result Displays the command execution result.
Command Data 1 Returns command execution result data 1.
Command Data 2 Returns command execution result data 2.
⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅
Command Data24 Returns command execution result data 24.
Data output area Result Data 1 Returns measurement result data 1.
Result Data 2 Returns measurement result data 2.
⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅
Result Data 94 Returns measurement result data 94.

XG-X Comm-US 1-155

EtherNet/IP communication specifications

Example of output data settings (Keyence KV-7500 series → XG-X series)

Example that one XG-X series is connected to the KV-7500 series and that the cyclic communication data size is set to 496
bytes (address 0000 to 0495), the command area size to 68 bytes (address 0016 to 0083), and the system variable
assignment start offset to 84 bytes (address 0084 -). (B****/W**** in the table is the assignment example of the KV-7500 link
relay and link register address.)

Setting Address 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
status (byte)
Bit 0000 B047 Reserved B046 Reserved B045 Err 1 reset B044 Err 0 reset B043 Result ack B042 Reserved B041 InDataFB B040 Cmd
area request request sync inhibit Request
0001 B04F Reserved B04E Reserved B04D Reserved B04C Reserved B04B Trg4 B04A Trg3 B049 Trg2 B048 Trg1
0002 B057 Reserved B056 Reserved B055 Reserved B054 Reserved B053 Reserved B052 Test B051 Ext B050 Reset
0003 B05F Reserved B05E Reserved B05D Reserved B05C Reserved B05B Reserved B05A Reserved B059 Reserved B058 Reserved
0004 B067 Assignable B066 Assignable B065 Assignable B064 Assignable B063 Assignable B062 Assignable B061 Assignable B060 Assignable
0005 B06F Assignable B06E Assignable B06D Assignable B06C Assignable B06B Assignable B07A Assignable B069 Assignable B068 Assignable
0006 B077 Assignable B076 Assignable B075 Assignable B074 Assignable B073 Assignable B072 Assignable B071 Assignable B070 Assignable
0007 B07F Assignable B07E Assignable B07D Assignable B07C Assignable B07B Assignable B07A Assignable B079 Assignable B078 Assignable
Reserved 0008 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
area 0009 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0010 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0011 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0012 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0013 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0014 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0015 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Command 0016 W0F8 Command OutDat (0016)
input area 0017 number

0018 W0F9 OutDat (0018)

0019
0020 W0FA Cmd OutDat (0020)
0021 Parameter1

0022 W0FB OutDat (0022)

0023
0024 W0FC Cmd OutDat (0024)
0025 Parameter2

0026 W0FD OutDat (0026)

0027
0028 W0FE Cmd OutDat (0028)
0029 Parameter3

0030 W0FF OutDat (0030)

0031
0032 W100 OutDat (0032)
⋅⋅⋅

0079
0080 W118 Cmd OutDat (0080)
0081 Parameter
16
0082 W119 OutDat (0082)
0083

1-156 XG-X Comm-US

EtherNet/IP communication specifications

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Setting Address 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
status (byte)
System variable 0084 W011A %InData OutDat (0084)
area special for 0085 Fieldbus
variable [0]
0086 W011B OutDat (0086)
synchronization
0087
0088 W011C %InData OutDat (0088)
0089 Fieldbus
[1]
0090 W011D OutDat (0090)
0091
0092 W011E OutDat (0092)
0093
⋅⋅⋅

0488 W01E4 %InData OutDat (0488)

0489 Fieldbus
[101]
0490 W01E5 OutDat (0490)
0491
0492 W01E6 %InData OutDat (0492)
0493 Fieldbus
[102]
0494 W01E7 OutDat (0494)
0495

Names and operations of output signals

Assigned Region Name Remarks

Bit area Cmd Request Requests command execution when the signal changes from OFF to ON.
InDataFB sync inhibit When this is ON, reading of %InDataFieldbus[ ] data is not allowed.
Result ack Notifies of data acquisition when the signal changes from OFF to ON.
Err 0 reset request Clears Error0 when the signal changes from OFF to ON.
Err 1 reset request Clears Error1 when the signal changes from OFF to ON.
Trg1 Trigger 1 input
Trg2 Trigger 2 input
Trg3 Trigger 3 input
Trg4 Trigger 4 input
Reset Reset input: Resets the controller (rise cycle).
Ext Disable Trigger reception: During signal input, capturing for all cameras and capture unit operation
will stop (level input).
Test Test run input: During signal input, data output for all ports, %JAHold, and %Sto will be forcibly
stopped and the output buffer will also be cleared (level input).
Command input area Command Number Writes custom command numbers.
Cmd Parameter1 Writes custom command argument "*01".
Cmd Parameter2 Writes custom command argument "*02".
Cmd Parameter3 Writes custom command argument "*03".
⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅
Cmd Parameter16 Writes custom command argument "*16".
Variable synchronization %InDataFieldbus[0] Fieldbus-specific input data 1
specific %InDataFieldbus[1] Fieldbus-specific input data 2
System variable area ⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅
%InDataFieldbus[101] Fieldbus-specific input data 102
%InDataFieldbus[102] Fieldbus-specific input data 103

XG-X Comm-US 1-157

Changing EtherNet/IP settings

1 Select [System Settings] from the [Various Settings]

Displaying EtherNet/IP setting screen menu on the [Program Setting] tab.
The [System Settings] menu appears.

Changing settings with XG-X VisionEditor

2 In the left pane of the [System Settings] menu,
On the [EtherNet/IP] menu in the XG-X VisionEditor System select [Communications & I/O] - [EtherNet/IP].
Settings, the settings for controlling the input and output of The [EtherNet/IP] menu appears.
data via EtherNet/IP through the Ethernet port of the
controller or through an EtherNet/IP unit (CA-NEP20E: 3 Change the settings as required.
option) connected to the controller can be changed. See "EtherNet/IP Settings" (Page 1-160) for more
details on each setting.

4 Click [OK].
To apply changes to the controller, you need to
Point
upload the system settings file to the controller and
then restart the controller.

Reference When using the XG-X Ethernet port, the controller

Ethernet settings such as IP address and subnet
mask are changed on the [Ethernet (TCP/IP)]
screen (Page 1-295).

• Implicit communication settings such as cycle

Point
(RPI), data size, time out, transmission trigger,
etc. are specified at the PLC. When using cyclic
communication with the XG-X controller, set the
RPI to a value of 5 ms or more (1 ms or more
when using a communication expansion unit).
Also, when selecting COS (Change of State)
using a PLC (Keyence KV-3000/5000/5500/
7300/7500/8000, KV-nano, etc.) that can select
a send trigger, set the Inhibit Time to a value of
5 ms or more (1 ms or more when using a
communication expansion unit).
• Even when RPI has been set to 5 ms or more (1 ms
or more when using a communication expansion
unit), the XG-X controller may exhibit processing
delays and communication may temporarily time
out or disconnect when used with other
communications such as system measurement
setting, menu operations, commands, FTP or
remote desktop. When this occurs, review the
cyclic communication settings and conditions
used. Furthermore, be sure to verify if the
performance is acceptable before operation.
• Network traffic may affect the performance of
communication between the EtherNet/IP device
and the controller.
• The EtherNet/IP cannot be used while the PLC
link (Page 1-71), CC-Link (Page 1-113),
PROFINET (Page 1-210), or EtherCAT (Page 1-
252) is enabled.

1-158 XG-X Comm-US

Changing EtherNet/IP settings

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Changing settings with the controller
1 On the [Global] menu at the top of the screen,
select [Communications & I/O] - [EtherNet/IP].
On the [EtherNet/IP] menu in the global settings, the settings for The [EtherNet/IP] menu appears.
controlling the input/output of data via EtherNet/IP through the
Ethernet port of the controller or through an EtherNet/IP unit
2 Select [Enable] in the [Enable/Disable] field.
(CA-NEP20E: option) connected to the controller can be
changed.
3 Select the PLC type to be connected in [PLC].
The default settings for the selected PLC type will be
set.

4 Change the settings as required.

See "EtherNet/IP Settings" (Page 1-160) for more
details on each setting.

5 Click [OK].

Reference When using the XG-X Ethernet port, the controller

Ethernet settings such as IP address and subnet
mask are changed on the [Ethernet (TCP/IP)]
screen (Page 1-295).

• If any settings other than the [Decimal Point]

Point
and [Starting address of output data] inside the
[XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X ->
PLC): Multi BIT Output] settings are changed,
the controller must be restarted for changes to
take effect.
• Implicit communication settings such as cycle
(RPI), data size, time out, transmission trigger,
etc. are specified at the PLC. When using cyclic
communication with the XG-X controller, set the
RPI to a value of 5 ms or more (1 ms or more
when using a communication expansion unit).
Also, when selecting COS (Change of State)
using a PLC (Keyence KV-3000/5000/5500/
7300/7500/8000, KV-Nano, etc.) that can select
a send trigger, set the Inhibit Time to a value of
5 ms or more (1 ms or more when using a
communication expansion unit).
• Even when RPI has been set to 5 ms or more (1 ms
or more when using a communication expansion
unit), the XG-X controller may exhibit processing
delays and communication may temporarily time
out or disconnect when used with other
communications such as system measurement
setting, menu operations, commands, FTP or
remote desktop. When this occurs, review the cyclic
communication settings and conditions used.
Furthermore, be sure to verify if the performance is
acceptable before operation.
• Network traffic may affect the performance of
communication between the EtherNet/IP device
and the controller.

XG-X Comm-US 1-159

Changing EtherNet/IP settings

Reference The values set here are used as the data size when
EtherNet/IP Settings accessing Assembly Object input data (instance
100, attribute 3) and output data (instance 101
[when using the XG-X Ethernet port]/150 [when
Enable/Disable using a communication expansion unit], attribute 3)
using explicit message communication.
Select whether to use EtherNet/IP.
• Disable: EtherNet/IP communication is disabled.
• Enable: EtherNet/IP communication through the XG-X
Decimal Point
Ethernet port is enabled.
• Enable module: EtherNet/IP communication through the Select the data expression method for the input and
communication expansion unit (CA-NEP20E: sold outputs for the MW/MR/MS/MWX/MRX/MSX command
separately) connected to the controller is enabled. parameters, command data outputs, and result outputs.
• Fixed-point (default): Outputs data after multiplying it
EtherNet/IP cannot be used while the PLC link
Point by 1000 as a 32-bit signed integer.
(Page 1-71), CC-Link (Page 1-113), PROFINET
(Page 1-210) or EtherCAT (Page 1-252) is enabled. Select [Parameters] to specify the [Decimal Precision]
You must disable all of them. (1/10, 1/100, 1/1000, or 1/10000; set to 1/1000 by
default).
Depending on the [Decimal Precision] setting:
Point
PLC type 1/10, 1/100, 1/1000, or 1/10000, the measurement
Select the type of connection. result is multiplied by 10, 100, 1000, or 10000
(respectively) and is used as 32 bits of signed
The settings for the selected PLC type appear.
integer data.
Changing the PLC types will initialize some of the
Point • Floating-point: Outputs data as a single-precision
EtherNet/IP settings.
floating point data (32 bit) (Low order byte is stored in
the lowest address.).

Data Size Reference For commands which handle integers, the

command parameters are read as integers that
Specifies the data size assigned to EtherNet/IP fixed-cycle have always rounded off the first decimal place
communication in 4 byte units. Various data areas whose regardless of the settings, and the command data
size areas have been specified with this setting are outputs are written in integers.
assigned from the start address of fixed-cycle
communication. The range that can be specified and the
default settings will differ by the type of PLC that has been
selected.
• Allen-Bradley ControlLogix: 16 to 496 bytes (Default
value: 496 bytes)
• Allen-Bradley SLC5/05: 16 to 248 bytes (Default value:
248 bytes)
• Keyence KV: 16 to 1436 bytes (Default value: 496
bytes)
• OMRON SYSMAC: 16 to 1436 bytes (Default value: 496
bytes)
• Other: 16 to 1436 bytes (Default value: 496 bytes)
The data size that will actually be sent and
Point
received follows the PLC-side connection settings.
It is recommended to set the same value for data
size on the XG-X and the PLC.

1-160 XG-X Comm-US

Changing EtherNet/IP settings

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Communication expansion unit network XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC)
settings (XG-X VisionEditor)
• If incorrect settings are used, the controller and BIT Assignment
Point
other network equipment may not work properly. The [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC): Single
Consult your system administrator or network BIT Input Settings] menu opens when the Bit Assignment
administrator about setting values.
button is pressed. It shows the predefined and customized
• For communication through the XG-X EtherNet/
IP port, set the IP address, subnet mask, and assignment list of bit input data (data to the controller)
default gateway on the [Ethernet] screen. For used with EtherNet/IP.
details, refer to "No protocol communication via
Ethernet" (Page 1-295).

Reference When [Disable] or [Enable] is selected for [Enable/

Disable], the setting details of the controller's XG-X
Ethernet port are displayed.
• IP address:
Enter the IP address (Default value: 192.168.0.20).
• Subnet mask:
Enter a subnet mask (Default value: 255.255. 255.0).
• Default gateway:
Enter a default gateway IP address (Default value:
0.0.0.0).
• Use the columns under [XG-X Input] and [BIT] to assign
The set value is common with the P1 port and P2
Point the desired input-type system variable and its bit to an
port of the communication expansion unit.
address. Only system variables related to parallel port
• Enable DHCP (only when [Enable module] is selected)
control can be assigned.
Select this check box when the network setting
• The assignment setting can be moved to another
information (IP address, subnet mask, and default
address by selecting the line and clicking [∧] or [∨].
gateway) is provided by a DHCP server when the
• Any device ranges that cannot be used in the current
controller starts. (Default: disabled)
settings are not displayed.
• When DHCP is enabled, the settings of the IP
Point Reference For more details on system variables that can be
address, subnet mask, and default gateway
assigned, refer to "List of System Variables" (Page
cannot be changed on the [EtherNet/IP] menu.
3-448).
• If the DHCP server has not been started, the
controller retries DHCP processing until there is • The system variables which have been
Point
a reply from the server. Clear this check box to assigned to the input terminals on the parallel
change to manual assignment of the settings. port cannot be used as another assignment for
the EtherNet/IP.
• Assignment of the same bit on the same system
variable to multiple output data (reception of the
controller) addresses and input terminals on the
parallel port will result in an error.

XG-X Comm-US 1-161

Changing EtherNet/IP settings

BYTE Assignment
XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC)
The [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC): Multi
(Controller)
BIT Input Settings] menu opens when the Byte Assignment
button is pressed. It shows the predefined and customized BIT Assign
assignment list of byte input data (data to the controller) The [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC): Single
used with EtherNet/IP. BIT Input Settings] menu shows the predefined and
customized assignment list of bit input data (data to the
controller) used with EtherNet/IP.

• Starting address of command functions: Specifies the

position to start assignment of items necessary for
command control. In the controller, it is fixed to 16 bytes
and cannot be changed.
Use the columns under [XG-X Input] and [BIT] to assign
• Command function size: Items necessary for
the desired input-type system variable and its bit to an
command control are assigned up to 68 bytes (default)
address. Only system variables related to parallel port
which defines the area size upper limit. Command
control can be assigned.
Numbers are assigned from 16 to 19 bytes, and
Command Parameter 1 to 16 are assigned from 20 to 83 Reference For more details on system variables that can be
bytes. assigned, refer to "List of System Variables" (Page 3-
448).
• Starting address of input data: Specifies the position
to start assignment of %InDataFieldbus[]. By default, 4 • The system variables which have been
Point
bytes for each item from the 84th byte is assigned. assigned to the input terminals on the parallel
When the command control and the variable port cannot be used as another assignment for
the EtherNet/IP.
synchronization are performed at the same time with
• Assignment of the same bit on the same system
EtherNet/IP, overlap of the data range used by the
variable to multiple output data (reception of the
command and the variable synchronization may occur. controller) addresses and input terminals on the
Avoid this by reducing the command area size to the parallel port will result in an error.
least amount of words required, and by changing the
starting address for synchronizing variables in the
[Starting address of input data] setting on the variable
synchronization unit.

Reference • Any device ranges that cannot be used in the

current settings are grayed out.
• The decimal data written to Command
Parameter is expressed using the method set in
[Decimal Point].

1-162 XG-X Comm-US

Changing EtherNet/IP settings

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

BYTE Assign
XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC)
The [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC): Multi
(XG-X VisionEditor)
BIT Input Settings] menu shows the predefined and
customized assignment list of byte input data (data to the BIT Assignment
controller) used with EtherNet/IP. The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC):
Single BIT Output Settings] menu opens when the Bit
Assignment button is pressed. It shows the predefined and
customized assignment list of bit output data (data from
the controller) used with EtherNet/IP.

• Starting address of command functions: Specifies the

position to start assignment of items necessary for
command control. In the controller, it is fixed to 16 bytes
and cannot be changed.
• Command function size: Items necessary for command • Use the columns under [XG-X Output] and [BIT] to
control are assigned up to 68 bytes (default) which are the area assign the desired output-type system variable and its
size upper limit. Command Numbers are assigned from 16 bit to an address. Only system variables related to
to 19 bytes and Command Parameter 1 to 16 are assigned parallel port control can be assigned.
from 20 to 83 bytes. • The assignment setting can be moved to another
• Starting address of input data: Specifies the position address by selecting the line and clicking [∧] or [∨].
to start assignment of %InDataFieldbus[]. By default, 4
Reference For more details on system variables that can be
bytes for each item from the 84th byte is assigned. assigned, refer to "List of System Variables" (Page 3-
• Any device ranges that cannot be used in the 448).
Reference
current settings are grayed out.
• The decimal data written to Command
Parameter is expressed using the method set in
[Decimal Point].

Only custom commands can be executed using

Point
the EtherNet/IP.

XG-X Comm-US 1-163

Changing EtherNet/IP settings

BYTE Assignment
XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC)
The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC): Multi
(Controller)
BIT Output Settings] menu opens when the Byte
Assignment button is pressed. It shows the predefined and BIT Assign
customized assignment list of byte output data (data from The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC):
the controller) used with EtherNet/IP. Single BIT Output Settings] menu shows the predefined
and customized assignment list of bit output data (data
from the controller) used with EtherNet/IP.

• Starting address of command functions: Specifies the

position to start assignment of items necessary for
command control. In the controller, it is fixed to 20 bytes
and cannot be changed.
• Command function size: Items necessary for Use the columns under [XG-X Output] and [BIT] to assign
command control are assigned to 100 bytes (default) of the desired output-type system variable and its bit to an
the area size. Command Results are assigned from 20 address. Only system variables related to parallel port
to 23 bytes and Command Data 1 to 24 are assigned control can be assigned.
from 24 to 119 bytes. Reference For more details on system variables that can be
• Starting address of output data: The data output unit assigned, refer to "List of System Variables" (Page 3-
which has EtherNet/IP as the output device can give the 448).

output after the assignment range set here in the area

set by the fixed-cycle communication data size. If the
data output size is not sufficient, reduce the command
area size to the least amount required, and change the
starting address position for outputting results in the
[Starting address of output data] setting.

Reference • Any address ranges that cannot be used in the

current settings are grayed out.
• The decimal data in the Command Data is
expressed using the method set in [Decimal
Point].

The data range, which is actually used for a

Point
command response, varies depending on the
command. Be sure to provide a sufficient area for
the command response of the command used.

1-164 XG-X Comm-US

Changing EtherNet/IP settings

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

BYTE Assign
Create EDS File
The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC): Multi
BIT Output Settings] menu shows the predefined and The EDS file including the information for the EtherNet/IP
customized assignment list of byte output data (data from function of the controller is output. An EDS file is named
the controller) used with EtherNet/IP. based on the following naming rules.
• In the case of the XG-X2000 Series:
Keyence_5004_0101.eds
• In the case of the XG-X1000 Series:
Keyence_5006_0101.eds
• In the case of a communication expansion unit (CA-
NEP20E):
Keyence_5008_0101.eds
The file is not created if any of the parameter
Point
settings are incorrect. Confirm the settings and
then try again.

Reference • The output path of the file is SD2:/xg/EDS in the

case of the controller and SD2:/xg/EDS_EX in
• Starting address of command functions: Specifies the the case of a communication expansion unit.
position to start assignment of items necessary for • Since the EDS file does not include the
information set or changed by the controller or
command control. In the controller, it is fixed to 20 bytes
the XG-X VisionEditor system settings, the
and cannot be changed.
prepared EDS file always has the same content.
• Command function size: Items necessary for • The icon file for the controller is the *.ico file that
command control are assigned to 100 bytes (default) of is located in the "Doc" folder in the XG-X
the area size. Command Results are assigned from 20 VisionEditor installation folder.
to 23 bytes and Command Data 1 to 24 are assigned • If you connect to a Keyence KV Series device,
an EDS file is not necessary.
from 24 to 119 bytes.
• Starting address of output data: The data output unit
which has EtherNet/IP as the output device can give the
Reset (XG-X VisionEditor)
output after the assignment range set here in the area
set by the fixed-cycle communication data size. If the Returns all settings of [EtherNet/IP] to their initial values.
data output size is not sufficient, reduce the command
area size to the least amount required, and change the
starting address position for outputting results in the
[Starting address of output data] setting.

Reference • Any address ranges that cannot be used in the

current settings are grayed out.
• The decimal data in the Command Data is
expressed using the method set in [Decimal
Point].

The data range, which is actually used for a

Point
command response, varies depending on the
command. Be sure to provide a sufficient area for
the command response of the command used.

XG-X Comm-US 1-165

Outputting measurement data via EtherNet/IP (Data Output)

Outputting measurement data via EtherNet/IP

(Data Output)

Change the settings so that a data output unit can output data via EtherNet/IP.

Point The EtherNet/IP cannot be used while the PLC-Link, CC-Link, PROFINET, or EtherCAT is enabled.

Data Output Flow

Data is output from a data output unit. Set the output data and destination addresses for the data output unit.
Use the following procedures for outputting data from the controller by EtherNet/IP.

Reference • The data output via the EtherNet/IP is performed only when the controller is in run mode. Data cannot be output in setup
mode.
• With EtherNet/IP, images and other binary data cannot be output.
• No data is output unless all data output units in the flowchart have been executed. In this case, the Result ready flag is
not changed.

Controller PLC

Data Output Unit

Confirm that Result ack flag is turned off.*1

Data output
Write data to ResultData and the Result OR flag. Data is written to ResultData and the Result OR flag.

Output completion
nitification Check the completion of data writing by
When the data writing is completed, turn on
confirming that Result ready flag changes to on,
Result ready flag. Data reading and then reference the data.
confirmation
Check completion of the data reading by notification
Turn on Result ack flag.
confirming that Result ack flag is turned on.*1

Termination process
Turn off Result ready flag. The change of Result ready flag to off is detected.

Turn off Result ack flag.

Go to the next flowchart

*1 This is the procedure when handshake is set to ON.

When handshake is set to OFF, regardless of the Result ack flag status, the controller overwrites the corresponding data memory when
the data output unit is executed, and the Result ready flag remains ON. If the process requires writing completion confirmation by
detecting the change of Result ready flag from OFF to ON, turn ON Result ack flag to turn OFF Result ready flag.

Be careful that the data range used for data output does not overlap the command response data.
Point

1-166 XG-X Comm-US

Outputting measurement data via EtherNet/IP (Data Output)

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Timing Chart
When handshake is ON

c e
Result ack flag
A
b d b
Result ready flag

a e
Indefinite Total status Total status
Result OR flag*1

a e
Indefinite Output data Output data
Result Data nnn

A: 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed)

*1 If you use the Result OR flag, one or more item of data needs to be set to be output from the data output unit to the EtherNet/IP.
(1) The data is updated.
(2) The Result ready flag for the read synchronization signal of the output data turns ON and the data can be read.
(3) When data read is completed, the Result ack Flag turns ON as the signal for data read completion.
(4) Associated with (3), the Result ready flag turns OFF.
(5) Result ack flag turns OFF. This is received and output continues if data is updated.

When handshake is OFF

d e
Result ack flag
A
b d
Result ready flag

a c
Indefinite Total status Total status
Result OR flag*1

a c
Indefinite Output data Output data
Result Data nnn

A: 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed)

*1 If you use the Result OR flag, one or more item of data needs to be set to be output from the data output unit to the EtherNet/IP.
(1) The data is updated.
(2) The Result ready flag for the read synchronization signal of the output data turns ON and the data can be read.
(3) If data is updated, the Result ready flag stays ON and output continues.
(4) If the Result ack flag turns ON, the Result ready flag turns OFF. This can be used when you want to find out the latest OK/
NG status with as little delay as possible for such applications as when the line is to be stopped when the status is NG.
(5) Result ack flag turns OFF. Thus, you can find out the timing of the next data update.

XG-X Comm-US 1-167

I/O Control via EtherNet/IP

Change the settings to use EtherNet/IP to control input/output in the same way as the terminal block interface or parallel
I/O interface of the controller.

• The EtherNet/IP cannot be used while the PLC-Link, CC-Link, PROFINET, or EtherCAT is enabled.
Point
• For more details on the system variables available for the EtherNet/IP, refer to "List of System Variables" (Page 3-448).

I/O Control Operation (Example of Connection to PLC EtherNet/IP Unit)

When system variables related to parallel output control are assigned to bit devices, multiple I/O signals can be transmitted
through one LAN cable.

Controller PLC

0004 bit0 %UnitEditStatus (Unit edit status) 0004 bit0 turns on.

0005 bit0 %InDataAsyncA Turn on 0005 bit0.

(Asynchronous data input)

Although each I/O signal is interlocked with operation of the terminal block, the EtherNet/IP performs regular
Point
communications. If the signal fluctuates at high speed, the EtherNet/IP may not be able to pick up these fluctuations. Set
the RPI value considering the signal change time used.

Reference • It is also possible to output measured or judged values to bit devices by assigning %OutDataAsync to the bit address for
the input data (data sent from the controller) and issuing a WP command from the process flow using the Command
Execution unit.
• By assigning %CmdCode, %CmdParam, and %CmdStrobe to the bit area of the output data (reception of the controller),
the custom command may be executed from the bit device.

1-168 XG-X Comm-US

Controlling the System via EtherNet/IP (Command Control)

Controlling the System via EtherNet/IP

(Command Control)

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Predefined commands can be executed at any time.

• The EtherNet/IP cannot be used while the PLC-Link, CC-Link, PROFINET, or EtherCAT is enabled.
Point
• The commands which are to be executed as a custom instruction must be defined. See "Custom instruction" (Page 2-
112) for more details.
• For more details on the commands available for the EtherNet/IP, refer to "Command List (Available Operation vs.
Situation)" (Page 2-9).

Command Processing Flow with EtherNet/IP (Example of Connection to

PLC EtherNet/IP Unit)
Use the following procedure for using commands to control the system with the EtherNet/IP.

Controller PLC

Write the command No. and command

parameters of a desired command to Command
Number and Command Parameter respectively.

Confirm that Command ready flag is turned on.

Command execution
When the controller detects that the Command request
request flag has turned on, it reads the Turn on Command request flag.
command from Command Number and the
command parameters from Command
Parameter.

The command execution starts.

Command reception
When the command execution has started, notification Confirm the start of command execution by
Command ready flag turns off. detecting that Command ready flag has turned off.

Response
When the command execution is completed, the data output*1 The response data is written to Command Data.
response data is written to Command Data and
the error status is set in Command error flag.

Command execution Confirm completion of the command execution

completion notification by detecting that Command complete flag has
Command complete flag turns on. turned on. Reference the response data and
command execution result.
When the controller confirms that Command Confirmation
request flag is turned off, it turns off Command completion notification Turn off Command request flag.
complete flag and Command error flag and turns
on Command ready flag.

*1 No response data will be output to the Command Data for commands without response data.

Reference When a command error occurs, the command execution result data is written to Command Result (0: Success, <Error
code>: Failure). The error codes are described in "When an error occurs on command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 1-169

Controlling the System via EtherNet/IP (Command Control)

Timing Chart

b e
Command A
request flag
A

Command A
ready flag

Command A d
complete flag
A
c
Command OFF Error OFF
error flag

Command
Instruction No. Any value
Number

a
Command
Command parameter Any value
Parameter nnn

Obtain the command data before turning off

A
c the Command request flag.

Command Data nnn Return values Indefinite

A: 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed)

(1) Store the command number in Command Number and the starting command parameter in Command Parameter.
(2) Turn ON the Command request flag and execute the command.
The Command ready flag is also OFF. (To turn OFF the Command ready flag, at least the time for link scan is required.)
(3) When the time necessary for the command execution has passed, the return value is stored in Command Data and the
error status in Command error flag. (Command error flag is OFF: Command processing is a success, ON: Command
processing is a failure.)
(4) As a check signal for completion of the command execution, the Command complete flag is ON.
(5) When the Command request flag is turned OFF to issue the next command, the Command ready flag is also ON and the
Command complete flag is OFF.

1-170 XG-X Comm-US

Changing the Value of a Variable via EtherNet/IP (Variable Synchronization)

Changing the Value of a Variable via EtherNet/IP

(Variable Synchronization)

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Change the settings to use Ethernet/IP to change the value of a special system variable for variable synchronization
(%InDataFieldbus[ ]) assigned to input addressing (PLC to XG-X) for fixed-cycle communication.

Point The EtherNet/IP cannot be used while the PLC-Link, CC-Link, PROFINET, or EtherCAT is enabled.

Reference Refer to "List of System Variables" (Page 3-448) for more details on the system variable %InDataFieldbus[ ].

Variable Synchronization Flow with EtherNet/IP (Example of Connection

to PLC EtherNet/IP Unit)
Use the following procedure for changing the value of %InDataFieldbus [ ] on the controller with the EtherNet/IP.

Controller PLC

With the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag set to ON,

write to %InDataFieldbus[ ] the value that you want
to change.*1
Reading permission
Detects that the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag Turn off the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag.*1
is OFF, and reads the value from
%InDataFieldbus[ ].

The read value is applied to image processing

which is executed next.

*1 This is the procedure for controlling the reading timing of one value. EtherNet/IP reads a value for each cycle specified by RPI. When
the PLC is writing to multiple values of %InDataFieldbus[ ], a time lag may occur in the application timing of each memory. By turning on
the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag in advance and rewriting the value while reading is inhibited, multiple values of %InDataFieldbus[]
can be changed simultaneously without being affected by the writing timing.

• The value of %InDataFieldbus[ ] is initialized to "0" immediately after the controller is started. If EtherNet/IP communication is
Point
interrupted, the value of %InDataFieldbus[ ] which was last written is retained until the controller is restarted.
• The value is written to data memory as 32-bit signed integer data.

XG-X Comm-US 1-171

Changing the Value of a Variable via EtherNet/IP (Variable Synchronization)

Timing Chart
Example when the values of %InDataFieldbus[1] and %InDataFieldbus[2] are changed

InDataFieldbus
sync inhibit flag

Item (Reception of
Data1 햳 Data3
the controller) nnnn
햲

Item (Reception of the

Data2 Data4
controller) nnnn+4 햳
A

Data1 Data3
%InDataFieldbus [1] 햴
A A

Data2 Data4
%InDataFieldbus [2]

A: 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed)

(1) Since the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag is OFF, if the byte area of the output data (reception of the controller)
corresponding to %InDataFieldbus [1] is rewritten, the value of %InDataFieldbus [1] is rewritten at latest after the link
scan time. (Since the byte area of the output data (data to the ctonroller) is not changed for %InDataFieldbus [2], the
value remains the same.)
(2) Although the byte area of the output data (data to the controller) corresponding to %InDataFieldbus [1]/
%InDataFieldbus [2] is rewritten, InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag is ON and the values of %InDataFieldbus [1] and
%InDataFieldbus [2] remain the same. To rewrite multiple %InDataFieldbus values simultaneously, it is necessary to turn
ON the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag and rewrite all corresponding byte area of the output data (data to the
controller), and then to turn OFF the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag.
(3) Since the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag is OFF, the values of %InDataFieldbus [1] and %InDataFieldbus [2] are
rewritten. (At minimum, the time for the link scan time is required until rewriting is completed.)

1-172 XG-X Comm-US

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

This section explains the operation example to connect the XG- 5 In the [System Settings] screen, select
X seires controller to the Keyence KV Series via EtherNet/IP, [Communications & I/O] - [EtherNet/IP].
output measured/judgment values, and control the controller
with the PW command.
6 Change the EtherNet/IP settings.

Connecting to the PLC

If the settings pertaining to the KV series, EtherNet/
Point
IP are not completed, first set the KV series side
settings (Page 1-174).

1. Checking the system settings of the XG-X

Series
The following setting values are used in this example
1 Start the XG-X VisionEditor and select the program (Change them according to the device to be
setting of the workspace which is the target of connected.).
setting. [Communications & I/O - EtherNet/IP Settings]
• Enable/Disable: Enable
2 On the XG-X VisionEditor [Program Setting] tab, • PLC: Keyence KV Series
select [System Settings] from the [Various • Data size: 496 byte
Settings] menu. • Decimal Point: Fixed-point (Decimal Precision:
1/1000)
3 In the [System Settings] screen, select
[XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X <- PLC)][XG-
[Communications & I/O] - [Ethernet (TCP/IP)].
X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X -> PLC)]
Assign data to the bit/byte addresses and specify the
4 Change the EtherNet (TCP/IP) settings.
starting address.

7 Select [OK].
The changes are saved.

8 Upload the system settings to the controller and

then restart the controller.

The following setting values are used in this example

(Change them according to the device to be
connected.).
• IP address: 192.168.0.10
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Default gateway: 0.0.0.0
When using a communication expansion unit (CA-
Point
NEP20E), the IP address and other such settings
are configured on the [EtherNet/IP] screen in step
5.

XG-X Comm-US 1-173

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

2. Changing the KV series settings

5 Select [Convert] - [Auto-assign relay/DM] in the
Unit Editor, and assign the devices.
For automatic assigning, bit devices are assigned to B
1 Start up the KV STUDIO with the computer and PLC (link relay), and byte devices to W (link register).
connected, select [New project] from the [File] menu.

6 Click the icon in the [Setup unit(2)] tab, and set the
2 After entering the [Project name], select the [PLC settings for EtherNet/IP communication with the XG-X
model], then click [OK]. series via the [EtherNet/IP Settings] which starts up.
• Drag and drop the [XG-X1000 Series], [XG-X2000
Series], or [CA-NEP20E(XG-X)] from the [Model
list(1)] tab in the [EtherNet/IP Settings], then add it to
the scan list.
• In the [Initial adapter settings] that appears following
the startup, enter the XG-X series IP address
(192.168.0.10) which was set in the XG-X series’
system settings.

The [Confirm unit setting information] screen is

displayed.

3 Click [Read unit setting].

7 Save the changes, and close the [EtherNet/IP

Settings] and unit editor.

8 Select the [Device cmnt edit window] from the KV

STUDIO [View] menu.
4 Select the EtherNet/IP Communication unit or CPU
The [Device comment edit] screen will appear.
unit which are connected to the XG-X series inside the
workspace, and after starting up the [Unit Editor], set
the KV series IP address in the [Setup unit(2)] tab.
• IP address: 192.168.0.20
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

9 Click [Detail].
The [Register unit device] screen will appear.

1-174 XG-X Comm-US

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

10After checking that the [XG-X1000], [XG-X2000], or
[CA-NEP20E(XG-X)] check box is selected in the Outputting Measured/Judgment
[Select unit] field, click [Reg]. Values

1. Setting the output data (Data output unit)

To output various kinds of measured/
judgment values, use the "Data
output unit." This section describes
how to assign the measured/
judgment values of the following
units to a data output unit as data to
be output.
• Total status judgment of the
flowchart (%JgAll)
• U0002: Pattern search (Position X)
Device comments pertaining to XG-X1000 or XG-X2000 • U0002: Pattern search (Position XY)
are automatically registered. • U0004: Area (Area)
• U0005: OCR (Line 1 result string)
11 Select [Transfer to PLC] from the KV STUDIO • Variable #a
[Monitor/Simulator] menu. • Variable #b
• U0002: Pattern search (Unit judgment value)
12Restart both the XG-X series and the KV series. • U0004: Area (Unit judgment value)
Check that [EtherNet/IP] screen - [Communication • Processing time (%PrcTime)
Status] in the XG-X series [Global] - [Communications • Processing start date (%PrcDay)
& I/O] is connected.

When the KV series Ethernet port LINK LED is constantly

1 Add a "Data output unit" at the end of the flowchart.
The setting screen of the added "data output unit" is
lit, or is constantly unlit
displayed.
It may be that the EtherNet/IP is not properly set, the cable
is not properly connected, or the XG-X series is not started
up. Check the connection equipment (whether the HUB is
operating, etc.).

XG-X Comm-US 1-175

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

2 Select [EtherNet/IP] for [Output Method].

2. Checking the output configuration to the
byte address, and the correlation of the
3 From the parts list, drag and drop measured/
judgment values you want to output to assign them byte address and link register (W)
into the [Item] column.
1 Check the example result data stored in the byte
addresses.
The data output unit in the flowchart is configured to
output the following result data.
• Total status (0: OK, 1: NG)
• U0002: Pattern search position X (430.202)
• U0002: Pattern search position XY (X: 430.202, Y:
243.309)
• U0004: Area (26964)
• U0005: OCR Line 1 result string (KEYENCE)
• Variable #a (95)
• Variable #b (348.267)
• U0002: Pattern search unit judgment value (0: OK,
1: NG)
• U0004: Area unit judgment value (0: OK, 1: NG)
• Processing time (67.477 ms)
Other than dragging and dropping from the parts list,
• Processing start date (8)
you can enter values directly.

4 Check the destination byte addresses used for the

2 Check the correlation of the byte address and link
register (W) via the KV STUDIO.
output.
Start up [EtherNet/IP Settings] via the [Setup unit(2)]
• When you assign data in the [Item] column, the
tab in the KV STUDIO unit editor, click the [+] in the
output destination byte address is automatically
[Class1] for the registered XG-X series icon, then
displayed in the [Address] column. When there are
check the device assignments (in the above notation,
several data output units in the flowchart and some
the output from XG-X series is handled as [IN (Input)]).
byte addresses overlap, you can offset the output
destination of the output data in [OutputOffset] on
the [Parameters] tab.
• The starting address of the byte assignment is the
address where [Result Data1] is assigned for [XG-X
Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X−>PLC)] of
[Communications & I/O - Ethernet/IP Settings] in the
[System Settings] screen of the XG-X VisionEditor
(Byte address 0120 in the sample screen above).
• Check the link relay (B)/link register (W) range
(hexadecimal notation) which is assigned to the
registered XG-X series controller (click [Edit], then
the range can be optionally changed).
• The byte addresses from 0000 – 0007 are assigned
from the top via 2 byte addresses per 1 register from
the link relay (B0000 -), and the byte address 0008
and following are assigned from the link register
W0000.

1-176 XG-X Comm-US

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

3 In the [System Settings] screen of the XG-X 5 After entering the trigger to the XG-X series, check
VisionEditor, select [Communications & I/O] - the output results via the KV STUDIO Registration
[EtherNet/IP] and click [BYTE Assignment] under monitor.
[XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC)]. Check the current values starting from Device W038.
You can check the items assigned to the byte
addresses.

• By default, [Result Data1] , which is the first data

output, is assigned to byte address 0120 where the • Judgment values are stored by using two words to
result data of the data output unit (U0006 in this show 0 (OK) or 1 (NG).
example) is assigned. • Decimal type data is multiplied by 1000 and stored
• Since the result data is output in the unit of 32 bits, by using two words: 124.121 to 124121
four byte addresses are used for one piece of result • When XY data is output, the data is stored in the
data (or one character when the result is characters). order of X and Y by using two words for each.
Also for OCR detected characters and match pattern • Integer type data is stored directly by using two
strings of the 1D code reader unit and 2D code words.
reader unit, four byte addresses are used for one • Character data is stored as ASCII code by using two
character (Only in the case of OCR2 unit Trimmed words for each character (Only in the case of OCR2
String is one byte used for one character so that four- unit Trimmed String is one byte used for one
byte byte addresses are used for units of four character so that two words are used to store a unit
characters.). of four characters.).
- When data is output as "string," the number of
4 Upload the program data and system settings to devices used varies depending on the specified
the controller. number of characters. This example outputs the
After the controller is restarted, the output through "number of characters on the first line" of the OCR
EtherNet/IP starts. unit and the string is seven characters of
"KEYENCE." However, since [L1: Number of
Characters] for [Block Setup] is set to 10, the
range of 20 words (10 characters) from W042 to
W054 are used.
- Changing the number of characters setting affects
all the subsequent device settings.It is
recommended to set an item which may be
changed at the end of the data output unit.
• Variables are multiplied by 1000 and stored by using
two words: 95 to 95000, 348.267 to 348267
• Judgment values are stored by using two words to
show 0 (OK) or 1 (NG).
• System variables of integer type are stored directly
by using two words.Those of decimal type are
multiplied by 1000 and then stored by using two
words.

XG-X Comm-US 1-177

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

Typical data output flow (Handshake: ON)

Controlling the Controller
Controller PLC

The inspection flowchart is Use a trigger signal or other

processed method to start processing the 1. Checking the system settings of the XG-X
inspection flowchart
Data output unit
Series
Confirm that the Result ack flag
is OFF*
1 Start the XG-X VisionEditor and select the program
Write data into ResultData setting of the workspace which is the target of
setting.
When the data writing is When detecting that the Result
complete, set the Result ready ready flag was changed to ON,
flag to ON read the data in the Link register (W)
2 On the XG-X VisionEditor [Program Setting] tab,
Check that the Result ack flag was select [System Settings] from the [Various
changed to ON to confirm the Set the Result ack flag to ON Settings] menu.
completion of the data reading

Set the Result ready flag to OFF Check that the Result ready
flag was changed to OFF
3 In the [System Settings] screen, select
[Communications & I/O] - [EtherNet/IP].
Set the Result ack flag to OFF

* If the data output unit is processed while the Result ack flag is
ON, the data is stored only in the output buffer and is not written
into ResultData. The data stored in the buffer will be written
when the Result ack flag is set to OFF. Be careful that if the
processing of the inspection flowchart continues while the
Result ack flag is ON, the output buffer will overflow and a
trigger input will be disabled.

Typical data output flow (Handshake: OFF)

Controller PLC 4 In [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC)] and

The inspection flowchart is Use a trigger signal or other [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC)], check
processed method to start processing the assignment of bit and byte addresses for the various
the inspection flowchart
items required for controlling the controller.
[Data output unit] When a specific period passes
Write data into ResultData after the trigger input, read the Output data (PLC → XG-X: OUT)
data in the Link register (W) • Command request flag: Set this flag from OFF to ON
to execute a command (bit).
• Command Number: Set the command No. to be
executed (word).
• Command Parameter#: Set the #th argument of the
command (word) (The presence/absence of the
argument depends on the command.).

1-178 XG-X Comm-US

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Input data (XG-X → PLC: IN)
2. Example of command execution
• Command complete flag: This flag turns ON when
the command processing finishes (bit).
procedure: Switch program No. (PW)
• Command error flag: This flag remains OFF when The following is a typical example of the command
the command processing succeeds, and turns ON execution procedure. This example uses the PW command
when the processing fails (bit). (Change Program) which uses a command parameter.
• Command ready flag: This flag is set to ON when the
command processing can be accepted (bit).
1 In the [System Settings] screen of the XG-X
• Command Result: The command execution result is
VisionEditor, select [Custom Instruction] and check
set (0: Succeeded, <Error code>: Failed) (word).
the command details.
• Command Data#: The #th response data of the
command is set (The presence/absence of the
response data depends on the command.)(word).

5 Select [OK].
The changes are saved.

6 Upload the system settings to the controller and

then restart the controller.

• With the default setting assignments, there are the

PW commands, [PW, 1, *01] which switches to an
SD1 setting number and the [PW, 2, *01] which
switches to an SD2 setting number.
• Here the procedures for executing the [PW, 1, *01] that
switches to an SD1 setting number are explained.
• The command No. is [2], and, since [*01] is written
in the Commands and Parameters column, we know
that a command parameter is used.
Specify the program setting number that is to be
switched to for [*01] (this time it is switched to
program setting number 11).

2 Input the command No. into the link register to

which Command Number is assigned, and input the
program setting No. to switch to into the link register
to which Command Parameter1 is assigned.
Here the [2] which is the PW command No. is input
into the link register W0F8, and the switching
destination program number [11] is input into the link
register W0FA to which Command Parameter1 was
assigned.
The link register which is used is 2 words per 1 item.

3 Turn on the link relay (here B040) to which the

Command request flag is assigned.
The PW command (SD1 program number switching)
will be executed.

XG-X Comm-US 1-179

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

4 Check the change in the value of the link relay

(here B00) to which the Command complete flag is Connecting with the Keyence KV
assigned. Series
• Command instruction success: The link relay (here
B00) is turned ON. Use the following communication settings on the controller
• Command instruction failure: The link relay (here B01) when connecting to a Keyence PLC.
to which the Command error flag was assigned turns • Fixed-cycle communication function Max. data size: 496
ON, and the error code is written into the link register bytes
(here W06) to which Command Result was assigned. • Message communication function: UCMM

Typical command processing flow

Supported devices
Controller PLC
• EtherNet/IP port built-in CPU unit KV-5500/7500/8000
Set a desired custom instruction • EtherNet/IP Unit KV-EP21V, KV-NC1EP
No. to execute in Command
Number, and the command
• Ethernet Unit KV-XLE02
parameter(s) in Command
Parameter(s) Reference When using the KV-EP21V with the KV-3000/5000/
5500, connect the KV-EP21V to a CPU unit with CPU
After confirming that the function version 2 or later.
Command ready flag is ON,
The command execution starts set the Command request flag
to ON to order command
execution Changing the settings for fixed-cycle
· After the command · Confirm the completion of communication
execution is complete, set the command execution by
the command execution detecting that the Command For more detailed information about PLC unit configuration
result (0: Succeeded, <Error complete flag turned ON, and the required setting method within KV Series (software
code>: Failed) in Command and check the command used to communicate with PLC to PC), refer to the KV
Result execution result by
STUDIO User's Manual and the KV Series EtherNet/IP
· When a command error referencing the content in
occurs, set the Command Command Result Function User's Manual.
error flag to ON · When there is response Here the setting methods for when the KV-7500 is used are
· When the command data, reference the content explained.
requires response data, set in Command Data
the response data in
Command Data Set the Command request flag 1 Right click KV-7500 in the KV STUDIO unit editor,
to OFF then select [EtherNet/IP setting].

2 Drag and drop the [XG-X1000 Series], [XG-

X2000 Series], or [CA-NEP20E(XG-X)] from the
device list, then add it to the scan list.

1-180 XG-X Comm-US

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

3 Set the controller node address and the IP address Send trigger
via the [Initial adapter settings] screen. Set the input (transmitting from the controller) direction
transmission trigger.

RPI
Set the communication cycle.

<IN (PLC ← Controller)>

• If the Send Trigger is [Cyclic]: Set the value to 5 ms
or more (1 ms or more when using a communication
expansion unit).
If [OK] is clicked, the bi-directional connection • If the Send Trigger is COS (Change Of State): Set
settings will be completed automatically. the value to 20 ms or greater, so that the Production
Reference When RPI is in its default setting, both directions Inhibit Time will be 5 ms or greater.
for the inputs (transmitting from the controller)
Reference When the Send Trigger is set to COS (Change
and the outputs (controller receiving) will be set
Of State), even when the COS is successively
to 10.0 ms.
generated, the span in the Production Inhibit
Time will hold the data transmissions. The
4 Change the settings in accordance with requirements. Production Inhibit Time is automatically set to
Click the scan list connection name, and the connection the value of RPI×1/4.
setting dialog box appears. <OUT (PLC → Controller)> (When selecting bi-
directional connections)
Set the value to 5 ms or more (1 ms or more when
using a communication expansion unit).

Reference • When Send Trigger is set to COS (Change Of

Confirm step 5 if changes are not required. State), uncheck [Keep consistent with IN],
then the outputs can be set to a different RPI
(communication cycle).
• Depending upon the controller measurement
settings, even if set to 5 ms or greater (20ms
or greater when COS is selected), the image
displays and external inputs/outputs, etc.
might be affected. Be sure to implement an
operations performance validation prior to
operating.
• The setting values for RPI, etc. can also be
changed from the settings list window.

5 Check the devices which are being used as the

transmitting and receiving data for the controller
and cyclic communications.

Connection name
Select bi-directional connections or input direction
connections.
• Class1: Are bi-directional connection.
• Monitor data: Is an input (transmitting from the
controller) direction connection

XG-X Comm-US 1-181

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

Reference • The devices which are being used as

transmitting and receiving data are automatically
Connecting with the ControlLogix
assigned. See the KV Series EtherNet/IP PLC from Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Function User's Manual for more details on how
to make changes. Use the following communication settings on the controller
• If the KV STUDIO device comment registration when connecting to a ControlLogix PLC from Rockwell
functions are going to be used, the XG-X series Automation, Inc..
comments will be automatically registered to the
• Fixed-cycle communication function Max. data size: 496
devices which will be used in transmitting and
receiving data. After opening the [Device bytes
comment edit] screen, click [Detail] - [Register • Message communication function: Class3/UCMM
unit device], and after selecting [XG-X1000] or
[XG-X2000] click [Reg].
Changing the settings for fixed-cycle
6 Forward the settings to the PLC. communication
For more detailed information about PLC unit configuration
and the required setting method within RsLinx (software
Transmit data to multiple PLCs (multicast)
used to communicate with PLC to PC), refer to the PLC
If the connection type is set to multicast, the transmission data operation manual.
of the controller can be received by multiple PLCs. Set the
PLC connection settings for each PLC as per the following.
1 Select the connected EIP communication unit
Bi-directional Input direction
(1756-ENBT) that is connected to the controller
connection PLC connection PLC
with the RsLogix5000 I/O configuration, right-click
(Max. 1 unit)
and select [New Module].
Connection name Class1 Monitor data
IN
(input from adapter)
Connection type Multicast Multicast
Data size optional value
RPI (communication optional value
cycles)
OUT
(output to adapter)
Connection type Point-to-point (no setting)
Data size optional value 0
RPI (communication optional value RPI (inputs)
cycle) times 16

Other precautions pertaining to settings 2 [ETHERNET-MODULE (Generic Ethernet Module)]

is added.
As for the decimal formatted data, the value formats change
(MW/MR/MS/MWX/MRX/MSX command parameters, and
result data decimal values are covered) as per the following
depending upon the [Decimal Point] settings.

When [Fixed-point] is selected

The values which have been multiplied 1000 times are
stored as ± decimal numeral 32 bit values. (If Decimal
Precision is set to 1/1000. The values can be multiplied by
10 or more if 1/10 is selected and by a number up to 10000
if 1/10000 is selected.)

When [Floating-point] is selected

Stored in FLOAT (single precision floating point number
type real number) format.
1-182 XG-X Comm-US
Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

3 Change the settings as required. Depending on the controller measurement
Point
settings, the display or external I/O can still be
affected even if the value is set to 5 ms or
more (1 ms or more when using a
communication expansion unit). Be sure to
verify the operating performance before
starting operations.

4 Download the settings to the PLC.

EtherNet/IP communications are enabled as long as the
Device name settings are downloaded before switching to online mode.
Set any name. The following tags are created based
on the name and used as the sending or receiving Sending data to multiple PLC units (InputOnly)
data for fixed-cycle communication. By connecting to multiple PLCs with a InputOnly
• (Device name): I Information that is received from connection configuration, the sending data on the
the controller. controller can be received by multiple PLC units. When
• (Device name): O Information that is sent to the connecting with InputOnly, set each of the PLC units to the
controller. following settings.
• (Device name): C Not used.
Bidirectional PLC connected with
Comm Format communication PLC InputOnly
(Max. 1 unit)
Set to [Data DINT].
RPI value Any value Same value as left
IP Address InputAssembly No. 100 (decimal) Same value as left
Sets the XG-X controller IP address. Instance number
InputAssembly Any value Same value as left
Input (Sending data size for the controller)
data size
• Instance number: 100 (decimal)
OutputAssembly No. 101 (decimal): No. 254 (decimal):
• Data size: Any value up to 124 Instance number When using the When using the
XG-X Ethernet port XG-X Ethernet port
Output (Receiving data size for the controller)
No. 150 (decimal): No. 3 (decimal):
• Instance number 101 (decimal): When using the When using a When using a
XG-X Ethernet port communication communication
expansion unit expansion unit
150 (decimal): When using a
OutputAssembly Any value 0 bytes
communication expansion unit
data size
• Data size: Any value up to 124
Comm Format Data-DINT Input Data
Configuration -DINT
• Instance number: 1 (decimal)
• Data size: 0

Reference When connecting to InputOnly, refer to

"Sending data to multiple PLC units
(InputOnly)" (Page 1-183).

RPI
Set the interval for fixed-cycle communication.

When using InputOnly connection with multiple

Point
PLC units while performing fixed-cycle
communication, the controller input data must be
sent with Multicast packets. When using
ControlLogix, the controller sending is fixed to
Multicast packets, so this is not a problem, but
there are other devices using other connection
systems such as KV or SYSMAC that allow the user
Set the value to 5 ms or more (1 ms or more when to select between Multicast and Point to Point so
using a communication expansion unit). be careful when using them.

XG-X Comm-US 1-183

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

ServiceType, Class, Instance, Attribute

Changing the message communication
Set the value according to the sent message.
settings
• Example 1: When writing to an attribute with the TRG
After performing "Changing the settings for fixed-cycle bit set to 1 for the Vision System Object.
communication" (Page 1-182), use the MSG command in
ServiceType SetAttributeSingle
the ladder program to perform message communication.
ServiceCode - (Cannot be specified)
Reference • For more detailed information about MSG
Class 64Hex
command, refer to [Logix5000 Controllers
Instance 01Hex
General Instructions] (1756-RM003) or other
applicable information. Attribute 69Hex
• When fixed-cycle communication is not used, SourceElement Name of the tag where send data
select Inhibit Module. is stored
SourceLength 1 byte
1 The following tags are defined in the RsLogix5000 (because the attribute size is 1)

[Controller Tags] field. Destination - (Cannot be specified)

• Example2: When acquiring the value of READY1 bit

of Vision System Object upon loading the attribute
ServiceType GetAttributeSingle
ServiceCode - (Cannot be specified)
Class 64Hex
Instance 01Hex
• Tag used for protecting MSG command Attribute 65Hex
administrative information (message - Message SourceElement - (Cannot be specified)
format) SourceLength - (Cannot be specified)
• Tag that includes data sent and received with MSG Destination Name of the tag where receive
command (tx_param, rx_param - DINT format) data will be stored

2 Add MSG command to the RsLogix5000 ladder. • Example 3: When using the result data acquisition
service (4DHex) of Vision System Object upon
service execution

ServiceType Custom
ServiceCode 4DHex
Class 64Hex
Instance 01Hex
Attribute 01Hex
SourceElement Name of the tag where send data
3 Open the [Configuration] tab in the message is stored
command setting dialog box and change the MSG SourceLength 4 bytes
command setting. Destination Name of the tag where receive
data will be stored

- Values for tags included in sent data:

0th element (DINT format) Size of the acquired result
data (bytes)
1st element (DINT format) Head position of the
acquired result data (bytes)
- Values for tags included in received data:
0th element (DINT format) 1st result data set with
output settings on the controller
1st element (DINT format) 2nd result data set with
Message Type
output settings on the controller
Select [CIP Generic]. 2nd element (DINT format) 3rd result data set with
output settings on the controller

1-184 XG-X Comm-US

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

4 Open the [Communication] tab and change the
When accessing data expressed in floating
MSG communication settings.
point format with ControlLogix
1). Uses REAL format tags.

2). Use the COP command to exchange floating point

values with the controller.
• Acquiring floating point values:
Copy the data acquired by the message to the
REAL format tag with COP command.

Path DINT COP command REAL

(32bit) (32bit)
Set the set device name in [Settings for fixed-cycle
communication]. (In the above example, the device is
• Setting the floating point values:
XG-X.)
After placing the floating point values into the REAL
Connected, Cache connection format tag, use the COP command to copy the
• When connected to UCMM: Disable both sides values to data for sending with a message.
(default).
• When connected to Class3: Enable both sides. DINT COP command REAL
(32bit) (32bit)

5 Describe the processing for the sending data

settings and the receiving data acquisitions in the
ladder program, and download it to the PLC.

Other points of note for settings

Data that contains decimal format changes in the following
manner depending on the format set in [Decimal Point].
(This applies to MW/MR/MS/MWX/MRX/MSX command
parameters, and result data fractional values.)

When [Fixed point] is selected

Stored as an integer that is 1000 times the actual value. (If
Decimal Precision is set to 1/1000. The values can be
multiplied by 10 or more if 1/10 is selected for Decimal
Precision and by a number up to 10000 if 1/10000 is
selected.)

When [Floating point] is selected

Stored as a value in single-precision floating point format.

XG-X Comm-US 1-185

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

2 Add the EEM command to the RsLogix500 ladder.

Connecting with the SLC5/05 PLC
from Rockwell Automation, Inc.
When connected to an Rockwell SLC5/05, the following
communications can be used with the controller.
• Message communication function: Class3

Reference • The SLC5/05 Series is not compatible with the

fixed-cycle communication function, but it can
use messaging to access the Assembly Object
in the controller and control the protocols and
data formats in the same way as fixed-cycle
communication. 3 Set the file to use in the EEM command defined in
• The maximum size for exchanging data with
Step 1 in the EEM command control block and
message communication on the SLC5/05 Series
open the Setup Screen.
is 248 bytes.
- When sending or receiving data with explicit
message communication, do not exceed the
set size.
- The data size for the Assembly Object is the
same as the data size from System Settings in
the controller. When using SLC5/05, check that
this value is 248 bytes.

Service, Class, Instance, Attribute

Changing the settings for message
Set the value according to the sent message.
communication
• Example 1: When writing to an attribute with the TRG
Use EEM commands with the ladder program to perform bit set to 1 for the Vision System Object.
message communication.
Service Generic Set Attribute Single
Reference For more details about EEM command, refer to ServiceCode - (Cannot be specified)
[SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual] (1747-
Class 68Hex
RM001) or other applicable information.
Instance 01Hex
Attribute 69Hex
1 The following files are defined in the RsLogix5000
Data Table Address Name of the file where send data
[Data Files] field.
(Send data) will be stored
Size In Words 1 word
(Send data) (because the attribute size is 1)
Data Table Address - (Cannot be specified)
(Receive data)
Size In Words - (Cannot be specified)
(Receive data)

• File used for protecting EEM command

administrative information (message - Integer
format)
• File that includes data sent and received with EEM
command (tx_param, rx_param - Integer format)

1-186 XG-X Comm-US

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

• Example 2: When acquiring the READY bit value of • Example 4: When controlling with the same format
Vision System Object upon loading the attribute and protocols as fixed-cycle data
Service Generic Get Attribute Single Assembly Object attribute3: Accesses the data.
ServiceCode - (Cannot be specified) 1) Acquire input data for the controller
Class 68Hex Service ReadAssembly
Instance 01Hex ServiceCode 0EHex (Cannot be specified)
Attribute 65Hex Class 04Hex (Cannot be specified)
Data Table Address - (Cannot be specified)
Instance 64Hex
(Send data)
Attribute 03Hex (Cannot be specified)
Size In Words - (Cannot be specified)
(Send data) Data Table Address (Cannot be specified)
(Send data)
Data Table Address Name of the file where receive
(Receive data) data will be stored Size In Words (Send (Cannot be specified)
data)
Size In Words 1 word
(Receive data) (because the attribute size is 1) Data Table Address Name of the file where receive
(Receive data) data will be stored
• Example 3: When using the result data acquisition
Size In Words 124 words
service (4DHex) of Vision System Object upon (Receive data)
service execution Value of the File where The desired data format for
Service Custom receive data will be fixed-cycle data
stored communication allocation on
ServiceCode 4DHex
the controller can be acquired.
Class 68Hex
Instance 01Hex * The maximum message size that can be used for
exchanging data with SLC5/05 is 124 words (248
Attribute 01Hex
bytes).
Data Table Address Name of the file where send data
(Send data) will be stored 2) Set the output data on the controller
Size In Words 2 words Service WriteAssembly
(Send data) ServiceCode 10Hex (Cannot be specified)
Data Table Address Name of the file where receive Class 04Hex (Cannot be specified)
(Receive data) data will be stored
Instance 65Hex (When using the XG-X
Size In Words Data size to acquire Ethernet port)
(Receive data)
95Hex (When using a
- Value of the file where send data will be stored: communication expansion unit)
0th element (Integer format): Size of the acquired Attribute 03Hex (Cannot be specified)
result data (bytes) Data Table Address Name of the file where send
1st element (Integer format): - (Send data) data will be stored
2nd element (Integer format): Head position of the Size In Words (Send 124 words
acquired result data (bytes) data)
3rd element (Integer format): - Data Table Address (Cannot be specified)
- Values for files included in received data: (Receive data)
0th element (Integer format): Lower word of the 1st Size In Words (Cannot be specified)
result data set with output settings on the controller (Receive data)
1st element (Integer format): Upper word of the 1st Value of the File where Set the desired data format for
result data set with output settings on the controller send data will be fixed-cycle data
2nd element (Integer format): Lower word of the 2nd stored communication allocation on
result data set with output settings on the controller the controller.
3rd element (Integer format): Upper word of the 2nd
* The maximum message size that can be used for
result data set with output settings on the controller
exchanging data with SLC5/05 is 124 words (248
4th element (Integer format): Lower word of the 3rd
bytes).
result data set with output settings on the controller
5th element (Integer format): Upper word of the 3rd
result data set with output settings on the controller
......

XG-X Comm-US 1-187

Typical EtherNet/IP Setting Procedure

4 Open the [MultiHop] tab and set the IP address for

Example when locally accessing the data
the controller.
expressed in floating point format with the
SLC5/05
1). Prepare a file that contains an array of the Float format
and Integer format (2 elements).

2). Use the COP command and MOV command to

exchange floating point values with the controller.
• Acquiring floating point values:
In the example used in the above figure, the IP
Take the upper word and the lower word from the
address for the controller is 192.168.0.10.
two elements of data in Integer format acquired by
the message, and switch the values into a previously
5 Open the [Send Data] tab or [Receive Data] tab and designed Integer array. Copy the Integer array with
confirm the information in the file that contains the the MOV command. Then, take the copied Integer
data used for sending or receiving. array and use the COP command to copy it to the
Float format file.
MOV command COP command
Integer 0 Integer 1
(16 bit) (16 bit) Float
1 0 (32 bit)
(16 bit) (16 bit)

• Setting the floating point values:

After inserting floating point values in the file in Float
format, use the COP command to copy two words
6 Describe the processing for the sending data
into an Integer array, and switch the upper and lower
settings and the receiving data acquisitions in the
words of the two elements of data in Integer format.
ladder program, and download it to the PLC.
Copy the Integer array with the MOV command.
MOV command COP command
Integer 0 Integer 1
Other points of note for settings (16 bit) (16 bit) Float
1 0 (32 bit)
Data that contains decimal format changes in the following (16 bit) (16 bit)
manner depending on the format set in [Decimal Point].
(This applies to decimal points for MW/MR/MS/MWX/MRX/
MSX command parameters and result data.)

When [Fixed point] is selected

When [Floating point] is selected

Stored as a value in single-precision floating point format.

1-188 XG-X Comm-US

Checking the EtherNet/IP Communication Status (EtherNet/IP Monitor & Diagnostics)

Checking the EtherNet/IP Communication Status

(EtherNet/IP Monitor & Diagnostics)

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

You can check the system's EtherNet/IP I/O signal Output data (received by the controller) byte
communication status with this function. This function is information check screen
convenient because it allows you to check
communications content when connected to an external
device in situations such as when the appropriate data
cannot be communicated between connected devices.
The monitor cannot be used when [Enable/
Point
Disable] for EtherNet/IP is [Disable] or when
EtherNet/IP is not connected. First establish an
EtherNet/IP connection before using the monitor.

1 From the [Utilities] menu at the top of the screen,

select [EtherNet/IP Monitor & Diagnostics].
The [EtherNet/IP Monitor & Diagnostics] screen is
displayed. You can see that 1 was input to Command Number
and 2 was input to Command Parameter 1 (decimal,
unsigned).
Using the down arrow at the upper right corner of the
screen, you can select the value to monitor from
Hexadecimal, Decimal (unsigned), or Decimal
(signed).

Input data (sent by the controller) bit information

check screen

2 Select the item you wish to check.

Select the bit information or the byte information for the
output data (received by the controller) or input data
(sent by the controller).

3 Now check the communication status.

Output data (received by the controller) bit

information check screen You can see that 1 was sent to Command ready flag,
Result ready flag, and Result OR flag from the
controller.

You can see that 1 was sent to Command request flag

from the PLC.

XG-X Comm-US 1-189

Checking the EtherNet/IP Communication Status (EtherNet/IP Monitor & Diagnostics)

Input data (sent by the controller) byte information

check screen

You can see that 390 was sent to Total count and 3
was sent to Command Result as a decimal (unsigned)
from the controller.

Reference With the input data (sent by the controller)

monitor, you can manually change the value
for the desired addresses and check those
changes on the PLC by selecting ON for
Manual Control during setup mode.

4 Select [Close].

1-190 XG-X Comm-US

Troubleshooting

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

If operation is not correct

Checking if the EtherNet/IP is correctly The result data is output from byte address
connected 0120, but the output destination at the PLC
On the controller, check [Utilities] - [EtherNet/IP Monitor & (KV series) is not known.
Diagnostics]. If "Disconnected" is displayed, the When automatic assignment is used for the 1st XG-X in the
communication has failed. Check that the cable (cross KV series, the XG-X result data is written in link register
cable for direct connection), IP address, communication W0038 or later.
settings at the PLC, etc. is correctly configured. In automatic assignment of the KV series, byte addresses
When the connection to Rockwell's SLC5/05 is
0000 to 0007 are assigned to the link relay (B0000 -) and
Point
made, the fixed-cycle communication is not byte addresses from 0008 are assigned to link register
performed. Even if the connection is correct, W0000 for 1 register per 2-byte address from the start.
"Disconnected" is displayed. When the byte address of the result data is 0120, (120-8)/
2 = 56th → 38Hex. The result data is written in W0038 or
later.
Result OR flag is not output.
The result OR flag is updated according to the total status
(OK = 0, NG = 1). When the Result OR flag is used, it is
necessary to output at least one data to the EtherNet/IP
device using the data output unit.

Result ready flag is not changed from ON

status.
Control of the Result ack flag may not be correct. The
Result ready flag is turned OFF when start of the Result
ack flag is sent to the controller. This is true whether the
handshake is ON or OFF.

Data could not be correctly retrieved due to

change of the %Sto output at the leading
edge from the external terminal.
Since %Sto is the data ready signal for the parallel
terminals, it cannot be used as the strobe signal for
EtherNet/IP.
For read timing with EtherNet/IP, monitor the Result ready
flag.
For the data read timing with the EtherNet/IP, refer to the
Result ready flag.

XG-X Comm-US 1-191

Troubleshooting

Error Messages

Error Messages not Assigned to System Variables %Error0 or %Error1

These errors by default are not assigned to %Error0 or %Error1 but can be assigned through the XG-X Vision Editor software.

Error Message Cause Corrective Action Error

Code
External command error has An error occurred when executing a Review the command being sent, the program
occurred. command from one of these devices: settings or the device status.
• PC Program
• PLC-Link
• Ethernet
• RS-232C 128
• CC-Link
• External terminals
• EtherNet/IP
• PROFINET
• EtherCAT
EtherNet/IP communication Disconnection of the fixed-cycle • Check whether the Ethernet cable is connected
has failed. communication has occurred. correctly.
• Check whether the controller and master side
were restarted after updating the 241
communication settings.
• Review the fixed-cycle communication cycle or
time-out setting of the PLC.
Unable to write to EtherNet/IP The controller output buffer for outputting Reset RPI to be output through EtherNet/IP, so the
output buffer. via the EtherNet/IP port is full. data is output faster than it accumulates.
Alternatively, extend the time between triggers / 243
processing to allow for data to be output. Note:
Results data are not written when the buffer is full.
EtherNet/IP output buffer is The controller output buffer for outputting Reset RPI to be output through EtherNet/IP, so the
full. via the EtherNet/IP port is full. data is output at a faster rate than it builds up.
Alternatively, extend the time between triggers /
244
processing to allow for data to be output. Note:
Inspections processing can be put on hold until
the buffer becomes free.

1-192 XG-X Comm-US

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP

message communication

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

See "EtherNet/IP communication specifications" (Page 1-153) for more details on the basic specifications of the
communication.

Object configuration
The controller's XG-X Ethernet port and the EtherNet/IP function provided by the communication expansion unit support the
following objects. Access to these objects can be achieved through the message communication.

Class (Object name) Class ID Instance ID XG-X Ethernet port Communication

expansion unit
Identity Object 1 (01Hex) 1 (01Hex)  
Message Router Object 2 (02Hex) 1 (01Hex)  -
Assembly Object 4 (04Hex) 100 (64Hex): Input  
101 (65Hex): Output  -
150 (95Hex): Output - 
Connection Manager Object 6 (06Hex) 1 (01Hex)  
Device Level Ring Object 71(47Hex) 1 (01Hex) - 
QoS Object 72(48Hex) 1 (01Hex) - 
Vision System Object 104 (68Hex) 1 (01Hex)  
Port Object 244 (F4Hex) 1 (01Hex)  -
TCP/IP Interface Object 245 (F5Hex) 1 (01Hex)  
EtherNet Link Object 246 (F6Hex) 1 (01Hex)  
: Supported, -: Not supported

Reference • For detailed procedures for issuing the message with the PLC device in use, refer to the PLC operation manual.
• This manual mainly describes the Vision System Object which is the object specific to the controller. For other objects,
refer to the EtherNet/IP specifications (www.odva.org) issued by ODVA.

Notation for description

To explain the attribute and service of the object, the following terms are used.

Notation of data
• The bit position in the data is described by Bit n. (Bit0 represents LSB.)
• The array type data is shown by []. Example: DWORD[10] (DWORD type, number of elements 10 arrays)

Data type
The data type is specified by the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:

Data type Conditional Range

expressions Minimum Maximum
BOOL Boolean 0: FALSE 1: TRUE
SINT Short integer -128 127
INT Integer -32768 32767
DINT Double precision integer -231 231-1
USINT Unsigned short integer 0 255
UINT Unsigned integer 0 65535
UDINT Unsigned double 0 232-1
precision integer
BYTE Bit string: 8 bits – –
WORD Bit string: 16 bits – –
DWORD Bit string: 32 bits – –
REAL No. of floating points Range of single-precision floating point

Reference All values are stored in little endian.

XG-X Comm-US 1-193

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

ClassID: 4 (04Hex) Assembly Object

Conditional expressions
The same data which is sent/received in the cyclic communication can be directly accessed/controlled in the message
communication.
This is used when you want to control a model not compliant with the cyclic communication (e.g. Rockwell's SLC5/05) in
the same data format as the cyclic communication.

Point Note that in the message communication, regular control in the cyclic communication cannot be performed.

Instance: 100 (64Hex)

It is the information for input assembly, and the information sent by the controller in the cyclic communication.

Attribute

Attribute ID Access Name Data type Parameters

3 (03Hex) Get data BYTE array It is the information specified by the input data of the cyclic communication
data assignment in the global settings. It includes the controller status,
command execution results, result data, etc.
4 (04Hex) Get size UINT Attribute3 size (for each byte)
It is the size specified by the cyclic communication data size of the cyclic
communication data assignment in the global settings.

Example of input assembly format

The input assembly configuration is in accordance with the fixed-cycle communication data assignment in the system
settings.
As an example, the configuration below is used:
• Fixed-cycle communication data size: 496 bytes
• Command output area: Start address 0020 (fixed), end address 0119
• Result data area: Start address 0120, end address 0495

Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Result Result Command Command Command
OR flag ready flag ready flag error flag complete flag
1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Trg4 Ready Trg3 Ready Trg2 Ready Trg1 Ready
2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Trg4 Ack Trg3 Ack Trg2 Ack Trg1 Ack
3 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Remote Error 1 Error 0 Busy
ready flag status flag status flag
4 Assignable bit
5
6
7
8 Error0 code
9
10 Error1 code
11

1-194 XG-X Comm-US

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
12 Reserved
13
14
15
16 Total count
17
18
19
20 Command Result
21
22
23
24 Command Data1 (32-bit integer or floating point)*
25
26
27
28 Command Data2 (32-bit integer or floating point)*
29
30
31
32 Command Data3 (32-bit integer or floating point)*
33
34
35
36 Command Data4 (32-bit integer or floating point)*
37
38
39
120 ResultData1 (32-bit integer or floating point)*
121
122
123
124 ResultData2 (32-bit integer or floating point)*
125
126
127
* The decimal point format is in accordance with the setting of [Decimal Point] in the global settings. (Fixed point: Integer multiplying
decimal value by 1,000 (If Decimal Precision is set to 1/1000. The values can be multiplied by 10 or more if 1/10 is selected for Decimal
Precision and by a number up to 10000 if 1/10000 is selected.), Floating point: Single-precision floating point)

Service

Service code Name Parameters

14 (0EHex) GetAttributeSingle Retrieves the attribute value.

XG-X Comm-US 1-195

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Instance: 101 (65Hex)/150 (95Hex)

This is the information for output assembly, and the information received by the controller in fixed-cycle communication.
The value is 101 when using the XG-X Ethernet port and 150 when using a communication expansion unit.

Attribute

Attribute ID Access Name Data type Parameters

3 (03Hex) Get/ Set data BYTE array This is the information specified by the output data of the fixed-cycle
communication data assignment in the system settings. System
control, command input, %InDataFieldbus[] synchronous
information, etc. can be written.
4 (04Hex) Get size UINT Attribute3 size (for each byte)
This is the size specified by the fixed-cycle communication data size of
the fixed-cycle communication data assignment in the system settings.

Example of output assembly format

The output assembly configuration is in accordance with the fixed-cycle communication data assignment in the system
settings.
As an example, the configuration below is used:
• Fixed-cycle communication data size: 496 bytes
• Command input area: Start address 0016 (fixed), end address 0083
• %InDataFieldbus[] synchronous area: Start address 0084, end address 0495

Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

0 Reserved Reserved Error 1 reset Error 0 reset Result Reserved InDataFieldb Command
request flag request flag ack flag us sync request flag
inhibit flag
1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Trg4 Trg3 Trg2 Trg1
2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Test Ext Reset
3 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
4 Assignable bit
5
6
7
8 Reserved
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 Command Number
17
18
19
20 Command Parameter1 (32-bit integer or floating point)*
21
22
23

1-196 XG-X Comm-US

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
24 Command Parameter2 (32-bit integer or floating point)*
25
26
27
28 Command Parameter3 (32-bit integer or floating point)*
29
30
31
32 Command Parameter4 (32-bit integer or floating point)*
33
34
35
84 %InDataFieldbus[0] (32-bit signed integer data)
85
86
87
88 %InDataFieldbus[1] (32-bit signed integer data)
89
90
91
* The decimal point format is set in the [Decimal Point] setting in the system settings. (Fixed point: Integer multiplying decimal value by
1,000 (If Decimal Precision is set to 1/1000. The values can be multiplied by 10 or more if 1/10 is selected for Decimal Precision and by
a number up to 10000 if 1/10000 is selected.), Floating point: Single-precision floating point)

Service

Service code Name Parameters

14 (0EHex) GetAttributeSingle Retrieves the attribute value.
16 (10Hex) SetAttributeSingle Set a value to the attribute. Availability of setting is determined by the
accessibility of the attribute.

XG-X Comm-US 1-197

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

ClassID: 104 (68Hex) Vision System Object

Conditional expressions
This is the object specific to the controller. It provides attributes and services necessary for control of the system in
message communication.
For details of control with attributes, refer to the control sequence in the fixed-cycle communication.

Instance: 1 (01Hex)
Attribute

Attribute ID Access Name Data type Parameters

100 (64Hex) Get Vision System BYTE Displays the status of the controller.
Object Status • Bit 0: Error 0 Status
• Bit 1: Error 1 Status
• Bit 2: Remote ready flag
101 (65Hex) Get Process DWORD Displays the measurement status.
Status • Bit 0: Trg1 Ready
• Bit 1: Trg2 Ready
• Bit 2: Trg3 Ready
• Bit 3: Trg4 Ready
• Bit 4: Reserved
• Bit 5: Reserved
• Bit 6: Reserved
• Bit 7: Reserved
• Bit 8: Trg1 ack
• Bit 9: Trg2 ack
• Bit 10: Trg3 ack
• Bit 11: Trg4 ack
• Bit 12: Reserved
• Bit 13: Reserved
• Bit 14: Reserved
• Bit 15: Reserved
• Bit 16: Busy
• Bit 17-31: Reserved
102 (66Hex) Get/Set RESET BOOL Initializes the measurement processing.
0->1: Measurement processing is initialized.
103 (67Hex) Get/Set TEST BOOL Controls the output.0->When 0 to 1, the output buffer is
cleared.
• 1: Output control
• 0: Enable outputs
104 (68Hex) Get/Set EXT BOOL The trigger input is controlled.
• 1: Trigger input control
• 0: Trigger input enabled
105 (69Hex) Get/Set TRG BYTE Inputs the trigger.
• Bit 0: Trg1
• Bit 1: Trg2
• Bit 2: Trg3
• Bit 3: Trg4
• Bit 4: Reserved
• Bit 5: Reserved
• Bit 6: Reserved
• Bit 7: Reserved

1-198 XG-X Comm-US

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Attribute ID Access Name Data type Parameters
106 (6AHex) Get Results BYTE Displays the result output status.
Status • Bit 0: Result ready flag
• Bit 1: Result OR flag
107 (6BHex) Get/Set Result BOOL Controls handshake of the result output.
ack flag
108 (6CHex) Get Inspection Result DWOR[124] Displays the result data. The data size is fixed to 248 bytes
when Rockwell's SLC5/05 is selected as the PLC type, and to
496 bytes when other device is selected. The size specified by
the cyclic communication assignment from the starting
address can be retrieved.
109 (6DHex) Get/Set Command request BOOL Requests the custom command number.
flag • 1: Requesting command execution.
• 0: Not requesting command execution.
110 (6EHex) Get/Set Command Structure Specifies the custom command number and the parameter.
Command UINT The data size is fixed to 248 bytes when Rockwell's SLC5/05 is
Number selected as the PLC type, and to 496 bytes when other device
is selected.
Reserved UINT
* In Set, only the size requiring update can be specified
Command DWORD (integral multiple of 4 bytes).
Param
111 (6FHex) Get Command Status BYTE Displays the command execution status.
• Bit 0: Command complete flag
• Bit 1: Command error flag
• Bit 2: Command ready flag
112 (70Hex) Get Command Result Structure Displays the command execution result.
Command UINT The data size is fixed to 248 bytes when Rockwell's SLC5/05 is
Result selected as the PLC type, and to 496 bytes when other device
is selected. The data size varies depending on the command
Reserved UINT
execution result. The data size is fixed to 248 bytes maximum
Command DWORD
when Rockwell's SLC5/05 is selected as the PLC type, and to
Data 496 bytes when other device is selected.
113 (71Hex) Get Total count UDINT Displays the number of measurements.
114 (72Hex) Get/Set InDataFieldbus DINT Sets and refers to the value from %InDataFieldbus[0].
* In Set, only the size requiring update can be specified
(integral multiple of 4 bytes). The data size in Get is fixed to
248 bytes when Rockwell's SLC5/05 is selected as the PLC
type, and to 496 bytes when other device is selected. There is
no attribute equivalent to InDataFieldbus sync Inhibit flag
which is present in the cyclic communication. It is immediately
indicated.
115 (73Hex) Get NGCount UDINT Displays the number of NG.
116 (74Hex) Get/Set Program ID Structure Sets and refers to the setting number.
SD No. UINT Specifies the SD card (1-2) that the setting number is stored
on.
Program No. UINT Specifies the setting number (0-999).
117 (75Hex) Get/Set Program Name BYTE[61] Sets and refers to the BYTE array (1 character per byte) for the
setting name (60 characters maximum).
118 (76Hex) Get Program Load UINT Displays the setting change status/result with attributes 116
Status and 117.
• 0: Setting change success
• 1: Setting change failure
• 2: Setting changing

* In Get access, the GetAttributeSingle service (0EHex) is used. In Set, the SetAttributeSingle service (10Hex) is used.

XG-X Comm-US 1-199

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Service

Service code Name Parameters

5 (05Hex) Reset Initializes the measurement processing.
14 (0EHex) GetAttributeSingle Retrieves the attribute value.
16 (10Hex) SetAttributeSingle Set a value to the attribute. Availability of setting is determined by the accessibility of the
attribute.
75 (4BHex) Capture Executes image capture of the specified camera.
76 (4CHex) Command execution Issues the command request. Returns the command execution result with the message
response.
77 (4DHex) Retrieves results data. Retrieves the measurement result.
78 (4EHex) %InDataFieldbus[] rewrite Rewrites the %InDataFieldbus[] value.
79 (4FHex) Area assignment Retrieves the fixed-cycle communication assignment setting.
information retrieval
80 (50Hex) Clear error Clears the error status.

%InDataFieldbus[] is updated. From a desired offset position, the %InDataFieldbus[] value of a desired consecutive size
can be updated.
- Transmission parameter
Name Data type Parameters
Count UINT Number of %InDataFieldbus[] to be set (Specify the number.)
Offset UINT Offset number of %InDataFieldbus[] to be set (Example: To
update from %InDataFieldbus[10], specify 10.)
Data DINT [] Array of %InDataFieldbus[] value to be set. It is the data of
specified size x 4 bytes.

- Return error code

Error Code Name Parameters
09 (09Hex) Parameter value error Offset or size is an incorrect value.
21 (15Hex) Parameter size too large The parameter size is too large or the value adding the size to the
offset exceeds the %InDataFieldbus[] range.
19 (13Hex) Parameter size too small Parameter size is too small.

- Result data: None

In message communication, a processing delay may occur. If this delay is a problem, change the fixed-cycle
Point
communication or terminal input setting.

Reference The offset and the size can be specified regardless of the fixed-cycle communication assignment offset setting.

1-202 XG-X Comm-US

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

• Area assignment information retrieval service (4FHex)
Address and size in each area assigned to the fixed-cycle communication are retrieved.
- Transmission parameter
Name Data type Parameters
Direction UINT Direction
• 0: Reception side
• 1: Transmission side
index UINT Direction is 0 (reception side).
• 0: Bit area
• 1: Fixed byte data area
• 2: CommandParam area
• 3: InDataFieldbus area
Direction is 1 (transmission side).
• 0: Bit area
• 1: Fixed byte data area
• 2: CommandData area
• 3: ResultData area

- Return error code

Error Code Name Parameters
09 (09Hex) Parameter value error A value other than 0, 1, 2, and 3 is specified as the parameter
value.
21 (15Hex) Parameter size too large A parameter larger than 2 bytes is specified.
19 (13Hex) Parameter size too small If there is no parameter

- Result data:
Name Data type Parameters
Size UINT Size of specified area
Offset UINT Starting address of specified area

• Error clear service (50Hex)

Error status is cleared.
- Transmission parameter
Name Data type Parameters
index UINT Error to be cleared
• Bit 0: Error0
• Bit 1: Error1

- Return error code

Error Code Name Parameters
09 (09Hex) Parameter value error A value other than 1, 2, and 3 is specified as the parameter.
21 (15Hex) Parameter size too large A parameter larger than 2 bytes is specified.
19 (13Hex) Parameter size too small There is no parameter specified.

- Result data: None

In message communication, a processing delay may occur. If this delay is a problem, change the fixed-cycle
Point
communication or terminal input setting.

XG-X Comm-US 1-203

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Attribute
Controlling the system with EtherNet/IP Attribute existing in the specified class or instance is
message communication specified. For details of attribute in each class, refer to
"EtherNet/IP communication specifications" (Page 1-153)
and specifications of the EtherNet/IP function issued by
How to use message communication ODVA.
The controller functions as the message communication Reference To obtain specifications issued by ODVA, refer to
server. The procedure for issuing the message the following URL:
communication varies depending on the device. For ODVA web site: www.odva.org/
details, refer to "EtherNet/IP communication specifications"
Service
(Page 1-153) and manuals of each device.
Execution details are specified. The major service used by
IP address: the controller are as follows:
Specifies the controller IP address. • Access to attribute:
GetAttributeSingle/SetAttributeSingle
Class, instance: • Service specific to object:
Specifies the following class and instance equipped with Service prepared for each object.
the EtherNet/IP function of the controller.

Class name Class ID Instance ID

Control using the message communication
Identity Object 1 (01Hex) 1 (01Hex)
When the system is controlled in the message
Message Router 2 (02Hex) 1 (01Hex)
Object communication, gain access to the Vision System Object.
Assembly Object 4 (04Hex) 100 (64Hex): Input The Vision System Object provides the following services.
101 (65Hex): Output Service name Service ID Description
(when using the XG-X
Reset 5 (05Hex) Resets the controller
Ethernet port)
measurement items. It is the
150 (95Hex): Output same as the reset command of
(when using a communication the custom command.
expansion unit)
GetAttribute 14 (0EHex) Retrieves the specified
Connection Manager 6 (06Hex) 1 (01Hex) Single attribute value.
Object
SetAttribute 16 (10Hex) Writes the value to the
Vision System 104 (68Hex) 1 (01Hex) Single specified attribute.
Object
Capture 75 (4BHex) Inputs the specified trigger
Port Object 244 (F4Hex) 1 (01Hex) signal to capture the image.
TCP/IP Interface 245 (F5Hex) 1 (01Hex) Command 76 (4CHex) This command executes a
Object execution custom instruction.
Ethernet Link Object 246 (F6Hex) 1 (01Hex) Retrieves 77 (4DHex) Retrieves the measurement
results data. result.
Reference The class mainly used in the message
communication with the controller is as follows: %InDataField 78 (4EHex) Rewrites the
• Vision System Object: It is the object specific to bus[] rewrite %InDataFieldbus[] value.
the controller. This object is responsible for all Area 79 (4FHex) Retrieves the assignment
controls as the image sensor. assignment information of each area
• Assembly Object: The PLC not compliant with information (command area, system
the cyclic communication can achieve control retrieval variable assignment area,
the same as the cyclic communication by result area, etc.) assigned as
directly reading/writing the data of this object. the cyclic communication data.
Clear error 80 (50Hex) Clears the error status.

Reference For details of each service, refer to "EtherNet/IP

communication specifications" (Page 1-153). For
details of the PLC settings, refer to "Typical EtherNet/
IP Setting Procedure" (Page 1-173).

1-204 XG-X Comm-US

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Resetting the controller with Controlling the image capture with
EtherNet/IP message communication EtherNet/IP message communication
With message communication, the controller
measurements can be reset using the reset service of the Control image capture service (4BHex)
Vision System Object.
The specified trigger is input and the image is captured.

Controller PLC
Control reset service (05Hex)
The measurement details are reset. Execution details are
Image capture service
the same as resetting in I/O.

Response
Controller PLC

To use this service, the following conditions must

Reset service Point
be satisfied.
• The EtherNet/IP must be started in valid status.
• The EtherNet/IP must be valid in external trigger
Response type settings.
• The EtherNet/IP must not be locked in the LK
command.
• %Trg1Ready to %Trg4Ready corresponding to the
specified trigger information is true (READY status).
Data example
Transmission data
Data example
Class ID 68Hex Vision System Object
When triggers 1 and 2 are input, the trigger information
Instance ID 01Hex Fixed value
specifies 0x03 which is 1 for bit 0 and bit 1.
Service ID 05Hex Reset service
Attribute ID – – Transmission data
Data – –
Class ID 68Hex Vision System Object
Instance ID 01Hex Fixed value
Response
Service ID 4BHex Image capture service
Execution result Execution result Attribute ID – –
Additional code None Data 0th byte 03Hex bit0: Trg1 valid
bit1: Trg2 valid
bit2: Trg3 invalid
Execution result bit3: Trg4 invalid
0 (00Hex): Execution of the service is successful. bit4: Reserved
bit5: Reserved
bit6: Reserved
bit7: Reserved

Response
Execution result Execution result
Additional code None

XG-X Comm-US 1-205

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Execution result
• 0 (00Hex): Execution of the service is successful. Sending commands with EtherNet/
• 9 (09Hex): Data value is incorrect (invalid value). IP message communication
• 16 (10Hex): The service is not accepted. (Any of the
specified trigger is not Ready.)
• 19 (13Hex): The data size is incorrect (too small). Control command service (4CHex)
• 21 (15Hex): The data size is incorrect (too large). Command data is executed.

Controller PLC

Command execution service

Response

To use this service, the following conditions must

Point
be satisfied.
• The EtherNet/IP must be started in valid status.
• The EtherNet/IP must not be locked in the LK
command.
• The Command read flag must be true (ready for
acceptance).

Reference • The upper limit of the data which can be

specified and retrieved in command input and
command output is fixed to 248 bytes when
Rockwell's SLC5/05 is selected as the PLC type,
and to 496 bytes when other device is selected.
It is not related to the command area size
assigned to the fixed-cycle communication area
in the [System Settings] menu.
• The command output data returns the response
for the result data size of the command executed.

Data example
The Switch program command (PW, 1, *1) in SD1 is
registered to custom command number 2, and the
program is changed to program 10 in the example below.

Transmission data

Class ID 68Hex Vision System Object

Instance ID 01Hex Fixed value
Service ID 4CHex Command execution service
Attribute ID – –
Data 0th byte 02Hex Setting change to custom
command number 2 in SD1
1st byte 00Hex
2nd byte 00Hex
3rd byte 00Hex
4th byte 0AHex Setting number 10 (0AHex)
5th byte 00Hex
6th byte 00Hex
7th byte 00Hex

1-206 XG-X Comm-US

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Response data
Retrieving the measurement data
Execution result Execution result
with the EtherNet/IP message
Additional code Refer to the following.
Data 0th byte 0th byte of execution result
communication (data retrieval)
1st byte 00Hex
2nd byte 00Hex
Control result data retrieval service
3rd byte 00Hex
(4DHex)
Execution result The offset and the size are specified in bytes with the result
• 0 (00Hex): Execution of the service is successful. data assigned in output settings, and the result data is
• 19 (13Hex): The data size is incorrect (too small). retrieved.
• 21 (15Hex): The data size is incorrect (too large).
• 31 (1FHex): Error specific to the vendor has occurred. Controller PLC
Detail reason is indicated by additional code.
Additional code Result data retrieval service
Error code of the binary command is stored.
Response
2 (02Hex) Command error The requested command
does not exist.
The upper limit size of the result data which can be
3 (03Hex) Command The received command
retrieved is the result data area size assigned to the fixed-
operation inhibited cannot be performed.
cycle communication area. The data size is limited to 248
22 (16Hex) Parameter error Either the parameter count or
bytes when Rockwell's SLC5/05 is selected as the PLC
range is incorrect.
type, and to 496 bytes when other device is selected. If the
80 (50Hex) Incorrect password The specified password
does not match. size exceeding this value is specified, the data for the
81 (51Hex) Command ignored Command is received from a returnable size is returned.
device which inhibits input. To use this service, the following conditions must
Point
be satisfied.
• The EtherNet/IP must be started in valid status.
• The result data must be assigned to the fixed-
cycle communication area.
• [EtherNet/IP] must be set as the output device
in the data output unit.
• The measurement with the current settings must
be completed (number of measurements is 1 or
more).

XG-X Comm-US 1-207

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Data example Changing %InDataFieldbus[] value

Retrieving 20 bytes starting from the 12th byte of the result with EtherNet/IP message
data
communication
Transmission data (%InDataFieldbus[] rewrite)
Class ID 68Hex Vision System Object
Instance ID 01Hex Fixed value
Control %InDataFieldbus[] rewrite service
Service ID 4DHex Result data retrieval (4EHex)
service
Attribute ID – – %InDataFieldBus[] values can be continuously rewritten.
Data 0th byte 14Hex Retrieves 20 bytes.
Controller PLC
1st byte 00Hex
2nd byte 0CHex Retrieves result data from the
12th byte Synchronizing system
variables change service
3rd byte 00Hex
Response data Response

Execution result Execution result %InDataFieldbus[] allows data to be specified from areas
Additional code OFF outside the fixed-cycle communication data assignment
Data 0th byte 12th byte of result data and offset setting range. (000 to 399)
1st byte 13th byte of result data • To use this service, the following conditions
Point
2nd byte 14th byte of result data must be satisfied.
3rd byte 15th byte of result data - The EtherNet/IP must be started in valid
status.
Snip
- The EtherNet/IP must not be locked with the
16th byte 28th byte of result data
LK command.
17th byte 29th byte of result data • %InDataFieldbus[] assigned to the
18th byte 30th byte of result data %InDataFieldbus[] synchronous area in the
19th byte 31st byte of result data fixed-cycle communication assignment is
overwritten during execution of the fixed-cycle
communication. If %InDataFieldbus[] is
Execution result updated in the message communication during
• 0 (00Hex): Execution of the service is successful. execution of the fixed-cycle communication,
• 9 (09Hex): Data value is incorrect. (The offset or size is specify %InDataFieldbus[] which is not
negative value or too large, and it is not appropriate.) assigned in the system variable
synchronization.
• 19 (13Hex): The data size is incorrect (too small).
• 21 (15Hex): The data size is incorrect (too large).

1-208 XG-X Comm-US

Communicating with the system in EtherNet/IP message communication

Control/Data Output via EtherNet/IP

Data example
12345678Hex is written in all five %InDataFieldbus[] from
%InDataFieldbus[3] to %InDataFieldbus[7].
Transmission data

Class ID 68Hex Vision System Object

Instance ID 01Hex Fixed value
Service ID 4EHex %InDataFieldbus[] rewrite
service
Attribute ID – –
Data 0th byte 05Hex Rewrites five
%InDataFieldbus[].
1st byte 00Hex
2nd byte 03Hex Rewrites from
%InDataFieldbus[3].
3rd byte 00Hex
4th byte 78Hex Value written in
5th byte 56Hex %InDataFieldbus[3].

6th byte 34Hex

7th byte 12Hex
8th byte 78Hex Value written in
9th byte 56Hex %InDataFieldbus[4].

10th byte 34Hex

11th byte 12Hex
Snip
20th byte 78Hex Value written in
21th byte 56Hex %InDataFieldbus[7].

22th byte 34Hex

23th byte 12Hex

Response data

Execution result Execution result

Additional code OFF

Execution result
• 0 (00Hex): Execution of the service is successful.
• 9 (09Hex): Data value is incorrect. (Not in valid
%InDataFieldbus[] range.)
• 19 (13Hex): The data size is incorrect (too small).
• 21 (15Hex): The data size is incorrect (too large).

XG-X Comm-US 1-209

Control/Data Output Overview of Control/Data
via PROFINET Output Using PROFINET
The communication using PROFINET is supported.
PROFINET is an open communication standard provided by
PI (PROFIBUS & PROFINET International) to allow
communication between supporting devices of any
vendors. The XG-X Series belongs to Conformance Class A.
Overview of System Control/
The PROFINET connection provides the following functions:
Data Output

Control/Data Output via Data I/O communication (cyclic

communication)
External Terminals
Communicating at specified update time intervals allows
high-speed control performed every several to several
Control/Data Output via
tens of microseconds. It is easier to writing PLC programs
PLC-Link because you can control the controller by referencing and
updating the variables and devices in the PLC without
Control/Data Output via considering communication.
• Controller control: You can control the controller by
CC-Link issuing commands in the cyclic communication.
• Result data output: You can specify PROFINET as an
Control/Data Output via output device for the data output unit and output data
through the cyclic communication.
EtherNet/IP
• I/O control: By assigning control-related system
variables in the cyclic communication, you can control
q Control/Data Output via input/output in the same way as using the terminal block
PROFINET or parallel I/O interface of the controller.
• Changing variable values: By assigning a special system
variable %InDataFieldbus[], you can externally change the
Control/Data Output via value of a variable efficiently (variable synchronization).
EtherCAT

Control/Data Output via

No protocol communication

FTP Client/Server Function

1-210 XG-X Comm-US

Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

• Be sure to set the update time of the cyclic
Point
communication to 4 ms or more (1 ms or more
Operation Flow
when using a communication expansion unit).
• Even when the update time of the cyclic Check the specifications (Page 1-212).
communication has been set to 4 ms or more
• Check whether the PLC to be connected supports the
(1 ms or more when using a communication
PROFINET connection.
expansion unit), the XG-X controller may exhibit
• Check the input/output data assignments.
processing delays and communication may
temporarily time out or disconnect when used 
with other communications such as system
Change the PROFINET settings (Page 1-220).
measurement setting, menu operations,
commands, FTP or remote desktop. When this • Configure the settings to use PROFINET to connect the
occurs, review the cyclic communication controller.
settings and conditions used. Be sure to check Major setting items: IP address of the controller, PROFINET
for these and other problems in the operating device name, and input/output data assignments
performance before entering production.

• In a network where many devices including a
PROFINET device are connected, delay or Establish the PROFINET communication.
packet loss may occur sometimes when a • You can confirm whether PROFINET communications have
heavy load is applied to the network constantly been established or not by checking [Communication
or temporarily. Be sure to make thorough
Status] on the [PROFINET Monitor & Diagnostics] screen
verification before entering production.
or [Communication Status] on the [PROFINET] screen on
• PROFINET and PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
or EtherCAT cannot be used at the same time the controller's Global settings.
(PROFINET cannot be used when PLC-Link, 
CC-Link, EtherNet/IP or EtherCAT is enabled).
Execute necessary processing.
Data output (Page 1-227)
Record data communication • Data from the data output unit is written into the data
output area.
(non-cyclic communication) • Check the Result ready flag to confirm the completion
This method can be used for communication which does of the data writing.
• Set the Result ack flag to ON to notify that the reading
not require regularity like the cyclic communication. This
has been completed.
transmission method uses dedicated commands to read/
write data records (1024 bytes/record) and can access the I/O control (Page 1-229)
addresses exceeding the maximum size allowed to the • Use I/O control by assigning system variables related
cyclic communication (1408 bytes or 1248 bytes when to terminal control.
using a communication expansion unit).
Command control (Page 1-230)
• Predefined custom instructions can be executed.
• To execute a command, write a command code and
command parameters into the command input area
and set the Command request flag to ON.
• A command can be executed when the Command
ready flag is ON.
• Check the Command complete flag to confirm the
completion of the command execution.

Variable synchronization (Page 1-232)

• Change the value of a system variable dedicated for
variable synchronization (%InDataFieldbus[]).

XG-X Comm-US 1-211

Preparation for the PROFINET Connection

PROFINET Connection Supporting Models

For more details of the setting procedure of each PLC, refer to "Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure" (Page 1-234) and the
instruction manual included with the PLC.

Siemens PLCs

PLC model PROFINET communication unit Firmware version

S7 300 Series - (included in the main unit) V2.6 and later
Example: CPU315-2 PN/DP
S7 400 Series - (included in the main unit) V5.3 and later
Example: CPU414-3 PN/DP
S7 1200 Series - (included in the main unit) V2.0 and later
Example: CPU1212C
S7 1500 Series - (included in the main unit) V1.8.2
Example: CPU1511

OMRON PLC

PLC model PROFINET communication unit Firmware version

SYSMAC CJ2/CJ1 CJ1W-PNT21 V1.04 and later

1-212 XG-X Comm-US

Preparing the PROFINET Connection (When Using the CA-NPN20E)

Preparing the PROFINET Connection (When Using

the CA-NPN20E)

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

Installing the PROFINET Unit CA-NPN20E PROFINET Unit
Specifications
The optional PROFINET unit CA-NPN20E is used when
communicating over PROFINET.
Remove the protective cover from the expansion unit
Standard specifications
connector on the right side of the controller and install the
PROFINET unit as shown below. Item
Point The controller must be turned off before connecting Compliant standard IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
or disconnecting the CA-NPN20E. Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX)
Communication cycle 1 ms min.
Connection cable Category 5e or greater shielded twisted
pair (STP) cable
Node interval 100 m
Communication port RJ45 connector × 2
Communication size 1248 bytes
Supported functions Data I/O communication (cyclic
communication)
Record data communication (non-cyclic
communication)
Applicable protocol LLDP, DCP, MRP, SNMP
Conformance test Complying with Conformance Class C
When Using the Illumination Expansion version V2.34
Unit and PROFINET Unit Together
Mount the camera input unit directly to the controller, then
mount the illumination expansion unit and PROFINET unit Wiring example (P1 port/P2 port)
to the right side of the camera input unit.

No. Signal name Function

1 TX + Transmission data (+)
2 TX - Transmission data (-)
Camera input unit 3 RX + Reception data (+)
CA-E100
4 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected
Illumination 5 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected
expansion unit
CA-DC40E 6 RX - Reception data (-)
PROFINET unit 7 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected
CA-NPN20E
8 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected
Point Illumination expansion units and PROFINET units
cannot be installed between camera input units
and controllers.

XG-X Comm-US 1-213

Preparing the PROFINET Connection (When Using the CA-NPN20E)

Connecting to an PROFINET
Network
Connect the PROFINET network cable to the P1 port or the
P2 port of the RJ connector. If a slave unit is present
downstream of this unit, connect a network cable to the
unused side.

P1 port

P2 port

Point Use a category 5e or greater STP (shielded twisted

pair) cable for the network cable. You can use
either a straight cable or a crossover cable.

1-214 XG-X Comm-US

PROFINET Communication Specifications of the Controller

PROFINET Communication Specifications of the

Controller

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

Basic Specifications
The PROFINET communication of this system supports two types of communication: "data I/O communication (cyclic
communication)" and "record data communication (non-cyclic communication)."

Data I/O communication (cyclic communication)

This is a function to make periodic communication at specified update time intervals and is suitable for real time control.
• The update time and communication size depend on the connection settings on the PLC (maximum communication
size: 1408 bytes or 1248 bytes when using a communication expansion unit).
• See "Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure" (Page 1-234) for more details.

Record data communication (non-cyclic communication)

This is a communication method to use dedicated commands to access to a "record" which is a piece of byte information
divided in the unit of 1024 bytes.
• Two types of commands, Read Record and Write Record are available.When these commands are executed, a
response to the command is returned.
• This method can be used for communication which does not require real time processing.
• It is possible to access to the addresses exceeding the maximum size allowed to the cyclic communication (1408 bytes
or 1248 bytes when using a communication expansion unit).
• Ensure that the writing size is specified in units of 4 bytes.
• Each record is assigned with an index. Data is accessed based on the specified index and size.
For the controller's XG-X Ethernet port and for communication expansion units, the accessible ranges for each piece of
byte information are as follows:

Output data (received by the controller) - Read/write

Index Accessible address

XG-X port Expansion unit
1 0008 to 1031 0008 to 1007
2 1032 to 2055 1008 to 2007
3 (None) 2008 to 2055

Input data (sent from the controller) - Read only

Index Accessible address

XG-X port Expansion unit
10 0008 to 1031 0008 to 1007
11 1032 to 2055 1008 to 2007
12 2056 to 3079 2008 to 3007
13 3080 to 4103 3008 to 4007
14 (None) 4008 to 4103

• The Read Record and Write Record commands are issued from the PLC by using the "RDREC" (SFB 52) and "WRREC"
(SFB 53) blocks respectively. See "Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure" (Page 1-234) for more details.

If the Write Record command is issued while the Parameter module is being written in the cyclic communication, memory
Point
area conflict may occur. Design the use of the Write Record command to avoid the memory area conflict with the cyclic
communication.

XG-X Comm-US 1-215

PROFINET Communication Specifications of the Controller

Example of input data settings (from XG-X Series to Siemens SIMATIC S7-300 Series)
This is an example when one controller of the XG-X Series is connected to the Siemens SIMATIC S7-300 Series and
Command function size] is set to 100 bytes (addresses 0020 to 0119) and [Starting address of output data] is set to 120
bytes (from address 0120) (I***/PIB***/PID in the table show assignment examples of the I addresses of the SIMATIC S7-
300.).

Setting Address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
status (Byte)
Bit area 0000 I0.7 Reserved I0.6 Reserved I0.5 Reserved I0.4 Result OR I0.3 Result I0.2 Cmd I0.1 Cmd Err I0.0 Cmd
Ready Ready Complete
0001 I1.7 Reserved I1.6 Reserved I1.5 Reserved I1.4 Reserved I1.3 Trg4 Ready I1.2 Trg3 I1.1 Trg2 Ready I1.0 Trg1 Ready
Ready
0002 I2.7 Reserved I2.6 Reserved I2.5 Reserved I2.4 Reserved I2.3 Trg4 Ack I2.2 Trg3 Ack I2.1 Trg2 Ack I2.0 Trg1 Ack
0003 I3.7 Reserved I3.6 Reserved I3.5 Reserved I3.4 Reserved I3.3 Remote I3.2 Err 1 Status I3.1 Err 0 Status I3.0 Busy
Ready
0004 Bit 7 of Assignable Bit 6 of Assignable Bit 5 of Assignable Bit 4 of Assignable Bit 3 of Assignable Bit 2 of Assignable Bit 1 of Assignable Bit 0 of Assignable
PIB256 PIB256 PIB256 PIB256 PIB256 PIB256 PIB256 PIB256
0005 Bit 7 of Assignable Bit 6 of Assignable Bit 5 of Assignable Bit 4 of Assignable Bit 3 of Assignable Bit 2 of Assignable Bit 1 of Assignable Bit 0 of Assignable
PIB257 PIB257 PIB257 PIB257 PIB257 PIB257 PIB257 PIB257
0006 Bit 7 of Assignable Bit 6 of Assignable Bit 5 of Assignable Bit 4 of Assignable Bit 3 of Assignable Bit 2 of Assignable Bit 1 of Assignable Bit 0 of Assignable
PIB258 PIB258 PIB258 PIB258 PIB258 PIB258 PIB258 PIB258
0007 Bit 7 of Assignable Bit 6 of Assignable Bit 5 of Assignable Bit 4 of Assignable Bit 3 of Assignable Bit 2 of Assignable Bit 1 of Assignable Bit 0 of Assignable
PIB259 PIB259 PIB259 PIB259 PIB259 PIB259 PIB259 PIB259
Error 0008 PIW Error 0 code
code 0009 420
area
0010 PIW Error 1 code
0011 422

Reserved 0012 PID Reserved

area 0013 424 Reserved
0014 Reserved
0015 Reserved
Total 0016 PID Total count
count 0017 428
area
0018
0019
Command 0020 PID Command Result
output 0021 432
area
0022
0023
0024 PID Command Data 1
0025 436

0026
0027
0028 PID Command Data 2
0029 440

0030
0031
⋅⋅⋅

0116 PID Command Data 24

0117 528

0118
0119

1-216 XG-X Comm-US

PROFINET Communication Specifications of the Controller

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

Setting Address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
status (Byte)
Data 0120 PID Result Data 1
output 0121 532
area
0122
0123
0124 PID Result Data 2
0125 536

0126
0127
⋅⋅⋅

Names and operations of input signals

Assigned Region Name Remarks
Bit area Cmd Complete Turns ON when command processing is complete.
Cmd Err Turns OFF when command processing is successful and turns ON when it fails.
Cmd Ready Turns ON when command processes can be received.
Result Ready Turns ON when data transmission is complete.
Result OR Linked to %JgAll*.
Trg1 Ready Ready signal for Trigger 1
Trg2 Ready Ready signal for Trigger 2
Trg3 Ready Ready signal for Trigger 3
Trg4 Ready Ready signal for Trigger 4
Trg1 Ack Turns ON when Trigger 1 input is received. Turns OFF when Trigger 1 input is OFF.
Trg2 Ack Turns ON when Trigger 2 input is received. Turns OFF when Trigger 2 input is OFF.
Trg3 Ack Turns ON when Trigger 3 input is received. Turns OFF when Trigger 3 input is OFF.
Trg4 Ack Turns ON when Trigger 4 input is received. Turns OFF when Trigger 4 input is OFF.
Busy Linked to %Busy.
Err 0 Status Linked to %Error0.
Err 1 Status Linked to %Error1.
Remote Ready Linked to %Run.
Error code area Error 0 Code The error code for the cause of the error assigned to %Error0 that occurred last.
Error 1 Code The error code for the cause of the error assigned to %Error1 that occurred last.
Processing count area Total Count Displays the processing count.
Command output area Command Result Displays the command execution result.
Command Data 1 Returns command execution result data 1.
Command Data 2 Returns command execution result data 2.
⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅
Command Data24 Returns command execution result data 24.
Data output area Result Data 1 Returns measurement result data 1.
Result Data 2 Returns measurement result data 2.
⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅

XG-X Comm-US 1-217

PROFINET Communication Specifications of the Controller

Example of output data settings (from Siemens SIMATIC S7-300 Series to XG-X Series)
This is an example when one controller of the XG-X Series is connected to the Siemens SIMATIC S7-300 Series with
[Command function size] set to 68 bytes (addresses 0016 to 0083) and [Starting address of input data] is set to 84 bytes
(from address 0084) (Q***/PQB***/PQD*** in the table show assignment examples of the Q addresses of the SIMATIC S7-
300 Series.).

Setting Address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
status (Byte)
Bit area 0000 Q0.7 Reserved Q0.6 Reserved Q0.5 Err 1 reset Q0.4 Err 0 reset Q0.3 Result ack Q0.2 Reserved Q0.1 InDataFB Q0.0 Cmd
request request sync inhibit Request
0001 Q1.7 Reserved Q1.6 Reserved Q1.5 Reserved Q1.4 Reserved Q1.3 Trg4 Q1.2 Trg3 Q1.1 Trg2 Q1.0 Trg1
0002 Q2.7 Reserved Q2.6 Reserved Q2.5 Reserved Q2.4 Reserved Q2.3 Reserved Q2.2 Test Q2.1 Ext Q2.0 Reset
0003 Q3.7 Reserved Q3.6 Reserved Q3.5 Reserved Q3.4 Reserved Q3.3 Reserved Q3.2 Reserved Q3.1 Reserved Q3.0 Reserved
0004 Bit 7 of Assignable Bit 6 of Assignable Bit 5 of Assignable Bit 4 of Assignable Bit 3 of Assignable Bit 2 of Assignable Bit 1 of Assignable Bit 0 of Assignable
PQB256 PQB256 PQB256 PQB256 PQB256 PQB256 PQB256 PQB256
0005 Bit 7 of Assignable Bit 6 of Assignable Bit 5 of Assignable Bit 4 of Assignable Bit 3 of Assignable Bit 2 of Assignable Bit 1 of Assignable Bit 0 of Assignable
PQB257 PQB257 PQB257 PQB257 PQB257 PQB257 PQB257 PQB257
0006 Bit 7 of Assignable Bit 6 of Assignable Bit 5 of Assignable Bit 4 of Assignable Bit 3 of Assignable Bit 2 of Assignable Bit 1 of Assignable Bit 0 of Assignable
PQB258 PQB258 PQB258 PQB258 PQB258 PQB258 PQB258 PQB258
0007 Bit 7 of Assignable Bit 6 of Assignable Bit 5 of Assignable Bit 4 of Assignable Bit 3 of Assignable Bit 2 of Assignable Bit 1 of Assignable Bit 0 of Assignable
PQB259 PQB259 PQB259 PQB259 PQB259 PQB259 PQB259 PQB259
Reserved 0008 PQD420 Reserved
Region 0009

0010
0011
0012 PQD424 Reserved
0013
0014
0015
Command 0016 PQD42 Command Number
input area 0017 8

0018
0019
0020 PQD43 Cmd Parameter1
0021 2

0022
0023
0024 PQD43 Cmd Parameter2
0025 6

0026
0027
0028 PQD44 Cmd Parameter3
0029 0

0030
0031
⋅⋅⋅

0080 PQD49 Cmd Parameter16

0081 2

0082
0083

1-218 XG-X Comm-US

PROFINET Communication Specifications of the Controller

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

Setting Address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
status (Byte)
Variable 0084 PQD49 %InDataFieldbus[0]
synchro- 0085 6
nization-
0086
specific
system 0087
Variable 0088 PQD50 %InDataFieldbus[1]
area 0
0089
0090
0091
⋅⋅⋅

Names and operations of output signals

Assigned Region Name Remarks
Bit area Cmd Request Requests command execution when the signal changes from OFF to ON.
InDataFB sync inhibit When this is ON, reading of %InDataFieldbus[ ] data is not allowed.
Result ack Notifies of data acquisition when the signal changes from OFF to ON.
Err 0 reset request Clears Error0 when the signal changes from OFF to ON.
Err 1 reset request Clears Error1 when the signal changes from OFF to ON.
Trg1 Trigger 1 input
Trg2 Trigger 2 input
Trg3 Trigger 3 input
Trg4 Trigger 4 input
Reset Reset input: Resets the controller (rise cycle).
Ext Disable Trigger reception: During signal input, capturing for all cameras and capture unit operation
will stop (level input).
Test Test run input: During signal input, data output for all ports, %JAHold, and %Sto will be forcibly
stopped and the output buffer will also be cleared (level input).
Command input area Command Number Writes custom command numbers.
Cmd Parameter1 Writes custom command argument "*01".
Cmd Parameter2 Writes custom command argument "*02".
Cmd Parameter3 Writes custom command argument "*03".
⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅
Cmd Parameter16 Writes custom command argument "*16".
Variable synchronization %InDataFieldbus[0] Fieldbus-specific input data 1
specific %InDataFieldbus[1] Fieldbus-specific input data 2
System variable area
⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅

XG-X Comm-US 1-219

Changing the PROFINET Settings

1 Select [System Settings] from the [Various Settings]

Opening the PROFINET Setting menu on the [Program Setting] tab.
Screen The [System Settings] screen is displayed.

2 In the left pane of the [System Settings] screen,

To change the settings with the XG-X select [Communications & I/O] - [PROFINET].
VisionEditor The [PROFINET] screen is displayed.

In the [PROFINET] screen of [System Settings] of the XG-X

VisionEditor, you can change various settings to use
3 Change the settings as required.
See "PROFINET Setting Items Which can be Set with
PROFINET to control the input/output of various data
the System" (Page 1-222) for more details on the
through the Ethernet port of the controller.
setting of each item.

4 Click [OK].
To apply the change to the controller, you need to
Point
upload the system settings to the controller and
then restart the controller.

BYTE assignment
XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ←
The [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC): Multi
PLC) (XG-X VisionEditor) BIT Input Settings] screen is displayed.This screen lists the
byte address assignment of output data (received by the
BIT assignment
controller).
The [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC): Single
BIT Input Settings] screen is displayed.This screen lists the
bit address assignment of output data (received by the
controller).

• Starting address of command functions: Specify the

position to start assignment of items necessary for
command control. With the controller, this address is
fixed to byte 16 and cannot be changed.
• Command function size: Items necessary for
• In the [XG-X Input] and [BIT] columns, you can assign a command control are assigned up to 68 bytes (default)
desired input-type system variable related to terminal which is the area size upper limit.The custom instruction
control and its bit to each address. No. (Command Number) is assigned from bytes 16 to
• You can also move the assignment setting to another 19, and command parameters (Command Parameter1
address by selecting a line and clicking [∧] or [∨]. to 16) are assigned from bytes 20 to 83.
• Device ranges that cannot be used in the current setting • Starting address of input data: Specify the position to
are not displayed. start assignment of %InDataFieldbus[] for system
variable synchronization. By default, the position has
• The system variables which have already been
Point already been assigned from byte 84, four bytes for each
assigned to the input terminals in the terminal
item. When the command control and variable
block & parallel port cannot be assigned again
for PROFINET. synchronization are performed simultaneously with
• The same bit of the same system variable PROFINET, some of the data range used by the
cannot be assigned to multiple output data command control and variable synchronization may
(received by the controller) addresses or be overlap. When this occurs, minimize the command
assigned again to the input terminal in the
function size and change the starting address for the
terminal block & parallel port.
variable synchronization in the [Starting address of input
data] setting of the variable synchronization.

Reference • Bytes 8 to 1408 (or 8 to 1248 when using a

communication expansion unit) can be used for
the cyclic communication. For the record data
communication, all byte addresses can be used.
• The data representation format when decimal
data is written as Command Parameter depends
on the format specified at [Decimal Point].

XG-X Comm-US 1-223

Changing the PROFINET Settings

BYTE assign
XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ←
The [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC): Multi
PLC) (Controller) BIT Input Settings] screen is displayed.This screen lists the
byte address assignment of output data (received by the
BIT assign
controller).
The [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC): Single
BIT Input Settings] screen is displayed.This screen lists the
bit address assignment of output data (received by the
controller).

• Starting address of command functions: Specify the

position to start assignment of items necessary for
command control. With the controller, this address is
fixed to byte 16 and cannot be changed.
In the [XG-X Input] and [BIT] columns, you can assign a
• Command function size: Items necessary for
desired input-type system variable related to terminal
command control are assigned up to 68 bytes (default)
control and its bit to each address.
which is the area size upper limit.The custom instruction
• The system variables which have already been No. (Command Number) is assigned from bytes 16 to
Point
assigned to the input terminals in the terminal
19, and command parameters (Command Parameter1
block & parallel port cannot be assigned again
for PROFINET.
to 16) are assigned from bytes 20 to 83.
• The same bit of the same system variable • Starting address of input data: Specify the position to
cannot be assigned to multiple output data start assignment of %InDataFieldbus[] for system
(received by the controller) addresses or be variable synchronization. By default, the position has
assigned again to the input terminal in the already been assigned from byte 84, four bytes for each
terminal block & parallel port.
item.

Reference • Bytes 8 to 1408 (or 8 to 1248 when using a

Only custom instructions can be executed with

Point
PROFINET.

1-224 XG-X Comm-US

Changing the PROFINET Settings

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

BYTE assignment
XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X →
The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC): Multi
PLC) (XG-X VisionEditor) BIT Output Settings] screen is displayed.This screen lists
the byte address assignment of input data (sent from the
BIT assignment
controller).
The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC):
Single BIT Output Settings] screen is displayed.This
screen lists the bit address assignment of input data (sent
from the controller).

• Starting address of command functions: Specify the

position to start assignment of items necessary for
command control. With the controller, this address is
fixed to byte 20 and cannot be changed.
• Command function size: Items necessary for
• In the [XG-X Output] and [BIT] columns, you can assign command control are assigned up to 100 bytes (default)
a desired output-type system variable related to terminal which is the area size.The command result (Command
control and its bit to each address. Result) is assigned from bytes 20 to 23, and command
• You can also move the assignment setting to another response data (Command Data1 to 24) are assigned
address by selecting a line and clicking [∧] or [∨]. from bytes 24 to 119.
• Starting address of output data: The data output unit
which uses PROFINET as an output device can output
data to the assignment range starting from this address
within the area set at [Cyclic Data Size]. If the data
output size is insufficient, minimize the command
function size to the least amount required, and change
the starting address for the data output assignment in
the [Starting address of output data] setting.

Reference • Bytes 8 to 1408 (or 8 to 1248 when using a

communication expansion unit) can be used for
the cyclic communication. For the record data
communication, all byte addresses can be used.
• The decimal data representation format in
Command Data depends on the format
specified at [Decimal Point].

The data range actually used for a command

Point
response varies depending on the command. Be
sure to provide a sufficient area for the command
response of the command to be used.

XG-X Comm-US 1-225

Changing the PROFINET Settings

• Starting address of output data: The data output unit

XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → which uses PROFINET as an output device can output
PLC) (Controller) data to the assignment range starting from this address
within the area set at [Cyclic Data Size]. If the data
BIT assign output size is insufficient, minimize the command
function size to the least amount required, and change
The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC):
the starting address for the data output assignment in
Single BIT Output Settings] screen is displayed.This the [Starting address of output data] setting.
screen lists the bit address assignment of input data (sent
Reference • Bytes 8 to 1408 (or 8 to 1248 when using a
from the controller). communication expansion unit) can be used for
the cyclic communication. For the record data
communication, all byte addresses can be used.
• The decimal data representation format in
Command Data depends on the format
specified at [Decimal Point].

The data range actually used for a command

Point
response varies depending on the command. Be
sure to provide a sufficient area for the command
response of the command to be used.

Create GSDML File

This option is used to output the GSDML and icon files
In the [XG-X Output] and [BIT] columns, you can assign a which contain the information about the PROFINET
desired output-type system variable related to terminal functions of the controller. Each file name is as follows.
control and its bit to each address. In the case of the XG-X2000 Series
• GSDML-V2.32-Keyence-XG-X2000-20180727.xml
BYTE assign • GSDML-01FD-XG-X2000.bmp
The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC): Multi
BIT Output Settings] screen is displayed.This screen lists In the case of the XG-X1000 Series
the byte address assignment of input data (sent from the • GSDML-V2.32-Keyence-XG-X1000-20180727.xml
controller). • GSDML-01FD-XG-X1000.bmp

In the case of a communication expansion unit (CA-

NPN20E)
• GSDML-V2.34-Keyence-XG-X1K2K-CA-NPN20E-
20191031.xml
• GSDML-01FD-XG-X1K2K-CA-NPN20E.bmp
These files are not created if any of the parameter
Point
settings are incorrect. Correct the incorrect
settings and then try again.

Reference • The output path of the file in the controller is

SD2:/xg/GSDML in the case of the controller and
SD2:/xg/GSDML_EX in the case of a
communication expansion unit.
• Since the GSDML file does not contain the
• Starting address of command functions: Specify the information set or changed in the system
settings of the controller and the XG-X
position to start assignment of items necessary for VisionEditor, the content of the created GSDML
command control. With the controller, this address is file is always the same.
fixed to byte 20 and cannot be changed.
• Command function size: Items necessary for
command control are assigned up to 100 bytes (default) Reset (XG-X VisionEditor)
which is the area size.The command result (Command
Returns all settings on the [PROFINET] screen to their
Result) is assigned from bytes 20 to 23, and command initial values.
response data (Command Data1 to 24) are assigned
from bytes 24 to 119.

1-226 XG-X Comm-US

Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication to Output Measurement Data (Data Output)

Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication to

Output Measurement Data (Data Output)

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

Change the settings so that the data output unit outputs data through PROFINET.

Point PROFINET cannot be used when the PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or EtherCAT is enabled.

Data Output Flow

Data is output from the data output unit. The data and addresses for the output are set in the data output unit.
The controller outputs the data through PROFINET in the procedure shown below.

Reference • The data output through PROFINET is possible only in run mode. Data will not be output in setup mode.
• Binary data, such as images, cannot be output with PROFINET.
• When none of the data output units in the flowchart is processed, no data will be output. In such a case, the Result ready
flag does not change.

Controller PLC

Data output unit

Check that the Result ack flag is turned OFF.*1
Data output
Write data to ResultData and the Result OR flag. Data is written to ResultData and the Result OR flag.

Output
completion notice Confirm the completion of the data writing by
When the data writing is complete,
detecting that the Result ready flag was changed
set the Result ready flag to ON.
to ON, and reference the data.
Data reading
Confirm the completion of the data reading by confirmation notice
detecting that the Result ack flag was changed to Set the Result ack flag to ON.
ON.*1

Closing process
Set the Result ready flag to OFF. Detect that the Result ready flag was changed to
OFF.

Set the Result ack flag to OFF.

To the next flow

*1 This is a procedure for when handshake is set to ON.

If handshake is OFF, the controller overwrites when the data output unit is processed regardless of the status of the Result ack flag, and
the Result ready flag remains ON. If you need to confirm the completion of writing based on the change of the Result ready flag from
OFF to ON, set the Result ready flag to OFF by setting the Result ack flag to ON.

Point Confirm that the data range used for the data output does not overlap with the data range of the command response data.

XG-X Comm-US 1-227

Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication to Output Measurement Data (Data Output)

Timing Chart

When handshake is ON

c e
Result ack flag
A
b d b
Result ready flag

a e
Indefinite Total status Total status
Result OR flag*1

a e
Indefinite Output data Output data
Result Data nnn

A: 0 ms or more (depending on the link scan speed)

*1 If you use the Result OR flag, one or more item of data needs to be set to be output from the data output unit to the PROFINET.
(1) The data is updated.
(2) The Result ready flag for the read synchronization signal of the output data turns ON and the data can be read.
(3) When data read is completed, the Result ack Flag turns ON as the signal for data read completion.
(4) Associated with (3), the Result ready flag turns OFF.
(5) Result ack flag turns OFF. This is received and output continues if data is updated.

When handshake is OFF

d e
Result ack flag
A
RX0003 b d
Result ready flag

RX0004 a c
Indefinite Total status Total status
Result OR flag*1

a c
Indefinite Output data Output data
Result Data nnn

A: 0 ms or more (depending on the link scan speed)

*1 If you use the Result OR flag, one or more item of data needs to be set to be output from the data output unit to the PROFINET.
(1) The data is updated.
(2) The Result ready flag for the read synchronization signal of the output data turns ON and the data can be read.
(3) If data is updated, the Result ready flag stays ON and output continues.
(4) If the Result ack flag turns ON, the Result ready flag turns OFF. This can be used when you want to find out the latest
OK/NG status with as little delay as possible for such applications as when the line is to be stopped when the status is
NG.
(5) Result ack flag turns OFF. Thus, you can find out the timing of the next data update.

1-228 XG-X Comm-US

Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication for I/O Control

Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication for I/O

Control

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

Change the settings to use PROFINET to control input/output in the same way as using the terminal block or parallel I/O
interface of the controller.

PROFINET cannot be used when the PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or EtherCAT is enabled.
Point

Conceptual Diagram of I/O Control (Example Connection with the PROFINET

Unit of a PLC)
By assigning the system variables related to terminal control to bit devices, you can use multiple I/O signals with a single
LAN cable.

Controller PLC

0004 bit0 %UnitEditStatus (Unit edit status) 0004 bit0 turns on.

0005 bit0 %InDataAsyncA Turn on 0005 bit0.

(Asynchronous data input)

The PROFINET communication is based on periodic communication.As a result, although the I/O signals operate
Point
according to the terminal block operation, some instantaneous changes of the signals may not be detected. To avoid the
problem, set the update time by considering the actual signal change time.

Reference • It is also possible to output measured or judged values to bit devices by assigning %OutDataAsync to the bit address for
the input data (data sent from the controller) and issuing a WP command from the process flow using the Command
Execution unit.
• It is also possible to execute custom instructions from bit devices by assigning %CmdCode, %CmdParam, and
%CmdStrobe to the bit address for the output data (received by the controller).

XG-X Comm-US 1-229

Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication to Control the Controller (Command Control)

Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication to

Control the Controller (Command Control)
Predefined commands can be executed at a desired timing.

• PROFINET cannot be used when the PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or EtherCAT is enabled.
Point
• You need to set desired commands as custom instructions in advance.

Command Processing Flow Using PROFINET (Example Connection with

the PROFINET Unit of a PLC)
The controller is controlled with the commands through PROFINET in the procedure shown below.

Controller PLC

Write the command No. and command

parameters of a desired command to Command
Number and Command Parameter respectively.

Command Confirm that the Command ready flag is ON.

When the controller detects that the Command
execution request
request flag has turned on, it reads the
command from Command Number and the
command parameters from Command Parameter. Set the Command request flag to ON.

The command execution starts.

Command
acceptance notice Confirm the start of the command execution by
After the command execution starts,
detecting that the Command ready flag turned
set the Command ready flag to OFF.
OFF.

Response data output*

When the command execution is complete, write 1

the response data into Command Data and set The response data is written to Command Data.
an error status in the Command error flag.

Command execution Confirm the completion of the command

completion notice execution by detecting that the Command
Set the Command complete flag to ON.
complete flag turned ON, and reference the
response data and command execution result.
After confirming that the Command request flag Confirmation
is OFF, set the Command complete flag and completion notice
Set the Command request flag to OFF.
Command error flag to OFF, and set
the Command ready flag to ON.

*1 For commands which produce no response data, no response data is output to Command Data.

Reference When a command error occurs, the command execution result is written into Command Result (0: Succeeded, <Error
code>: Failed).

1-230 XG-X Comm-US

Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication to Control the Controller (Command Control)

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

Timing diagram

(2) (5)
Command A
request flag
A

Command A
ready flag

Command A (4)
complete flag
A
(3)
Command OFF Error status OFF
error flag

Command
Command No. Arbitrary
Number

(1)
Command
Command parameter Arbitrary
Parameter nnn

Command data must be obtained before

A
(3) setting the Command request flag to OFF.

Command Data nnn Return value Undefined

A: 0 ms or more (depending on the link scan speed)

(1) The command No. is stored in Command Number and the first command parameter is stored in Command Parameter.
(2) The Command request flag is set to ON to allow command execution.
The Command ready flag is also OFF. (To turn OFF the Command ready flag, at least the time for link scan is required.)
(3) When the time required for the command execution elapses, the return value is stored in Command Data and an error
status is stored in the Command error flag (When the Command error flag is OFF: Command execution succeeded, ON:
Command execution failed).
(4) The Command complete flag turns ON as a confirmation signal of command execution completion.
(5) When the Command request flag is set to OFF to allow the next command to be issued, the Command ready flag turns
ON and the Command complete flag turns OFF.

XG-X Comm-US 1-231

Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication to Change Variable Value (Variable Synchronization)

Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication to

Change Variable Value (Variable Synchronization)
Change the settings to use PROFINET to change the value of a special system variable for variable synchronization
(%InDataFieldbus[]) assigned to the output data (received by the controller) of the cyclic communication.

Point PROFINET cannot be used when the PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or EtherCAT is enabled.

Variable Synchronization Flow Using PROFINET (Example Connection

with the PROFINET Unit of a PLC)
When PROFINET is used, the value of %InDataFieldbus[] in the controller is changed in the following procedure.

Controller PLC

With the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag set to ON,

write to %InDataFieldbus[ ] the value that you want
to change.*1

Read permission
Detects that the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag
is OFF, and reads the value from Turn off the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag.*1
%InDataFieldbus[ ].

Apply the read value to the image processing

performed immediately after the reading.

*1 This is the procedure for controlling the reading timing of one value. EtherNet/IP reads a value for each cycle specified by RPI. When
the PLC is writing to multiple values of %InDataFieldbus[ ], a time lag may occur in the application timing of each memory. Setting the
InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag to ON beforehand to inhibit reading and then writing the values during the period ensure simultaneous
change of multiple %InDataFieldbus[] values without being affected by the write timing.

• The value of %InDataFieldbus[] is initialized to "0" immediately after the startup of the controller. If the PROFINET
Point
communication is interrupted, the last value written into %InDataFieldbus[] is retained until the controller is restarted.
• The value is written into the data memory as 32-bit signed integer data.

1-232 XG-X Comm-US

Using the PROFINET Cyclic Communication to Change Variable Value (Variable Synchronization)

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

Timing diagram
Example when the values of %InDataFieldbus[1] and %InDataFieldbus[2] are changed

InDataFieldbus
sync inhibit flag

Output data
(received by Data1 (2) Data3
the controller) nnnn
(1)
Output data
(received by Data2 Data4
(2)
the controller) nnnn+4
A

Data1 Data3
%InDataFieldbus [1] (3)
A A

Data2 Data4
%InDataFieldbus [2]

A: 0 ms or more (depending on the link scan speed)

(1) Since the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag is OFF, when a value is written into the byte address of the output data
(received by the controller) corresponding to %InDataFieldbus[1], the value of %InDataFieldbus[1] is changed after the
link scan time at the latest (The value of %InDataFieldbus[2] does not change because the value in the byte address of
the output data (received by the controller) is not changed.).
(2) Values are written into the byte addresses of the output data (received by the controller) corresponding to
%InDataFieldbus[1] and %InDataFieldbus[2], however, the values of %InDataFieldbus[1] and %InDataFieldbus[2] do
not change because the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag is ON. To change multiple %InDataFieldbus values
simultaneously, you need to set the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag to ON, write and change the values in all of the
corresponding byte addresses of the output data (received by the controller) , and then set the InDataFieldbus sync
inhibit flag to OFF.
(3) Since the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag turned OFF, the values of the %InDataFieldbus[1] and %InDataFieldbus[2]
are changed (At least the time for a link scan is required before the change is complete.).

XG-X Comm-US 1-233

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

This section explains the operation example to connect the

XG-X Series to the Siemens S7-300 Series via PROFINET,
2. Changing the settings of the Siemens S7-
output measured/judgment values, and control the 300 Series
controller with the PW command.

Connecting to the CPU 1 After connecting the PC and the CPU, start
SIMATIC Manager and select [New] from the [File]
menu.
1. Checking the system settings of the XG-X
Series 2 Enter the project name in the [Name] field and click
[OK].
1 Start the XG-X VisionEditor and select the program
setting of the workspace which is the target of
setting.

2 On the XG-X VisionEditor [Program Setting] tab,

select [System Settings] from the [Various
Settings] menu.

3 In the [System Settings] screen, select

[Communications & I/O] - [PROFINET].

4 Change the PROFINET settings.

3 Right-click the project name in the Object

Hierarchy of SIMATIC Manager, and select [Insert
New Object] - [SIMATIC 300 Station].

The following setting values are used in this example

(Change them according to the device to be connected.).
[Communications & I/O - PROFINET Settings]
• Enable / Disable: Enable
• PROFINET Device Name: xg-x2000 [SIMATIC 300] is added to the project.
• Decimal Point: Fixed-point (Decimal Precision:
1/1000)

[XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC)]

[XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC)]
Assign data to the bit/byte addresses and specify the 4 Expand the Object Hierarchy, select [SIMATIC 300],
starting address. and then double-click [Hardware].

5 Select [OK].
The changes are saved.

6 Upload the system settings to the controller and The [HW Config] screen is displayed.
then restart the controller.

1-234 XG-X Comm-US

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

5 In the Hardware Catalog, expand [SIMATIC 300] - 7 Enter the IP address and subnet mask of the CPU
[RACK-300], then drag and drop [Rail] into the and click [New].
Station Window. The [Properties - New subnet Industrial Ethernet]
screen is displayed.

[Rail] is added to the Station Window. 8 Click [OK].

The screen returns to the [Properties - Ethernet
6 Drag and drop the CPU to be connected from the interface PN-IO] screen.
Hardware Catalog and add it to the hardware
configuration diagram. 9 Click [OK].

10When this is the first setting of the XG-X Series,

you need to install the GSDML file.
• In the [HW Config] screen, select [Install GSD File]
from [Options].

The [Properties - Ethernet interface PN-IO] screen is

displayed.

• In the [Install GSD Files] screen, click [Browse] and

specify the folder containing the GSDML file.
• Specify the file you want to install and then click
[Install] to install the GSDML file of the XG-X Series.

Reference The GSDML file can be created by selecting

[Create GSDML file] on the setting screen
displayed by selecting [Communications & I/
O] - [PROFINET] in the [System Settings] of
the XG-X VisionEditor or by selecting
[Communications & I/O] - [PROFINET] in the
Global settings menu of the XG-X Series.

XG-X Comm-US 1-235

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

11 In the Hardware Catalog in the [HW Config] screen, 13Enter the same name as the PROFINET device
expand [PROFINET IO] - [Additional Field Devices] - name of the connected XG-X Series in the [Device
[Sensors] - [Keyence Machine Vision System], and name] field.
drag and drop [XG-X1XXX], [XG-X2XXX], or [XG-
X1K2K-CA-NPN20E] under [PROFINET-IO-System]
in the Station Window.

• PROFINET Device Name: xg-x1000 or xg-x2000,

XG-X1K2K-CA-NPN20E

The XG-X1XXX, XG-X2XXX, or XG-X1K2K-CA-NPN20E

is added to the Station Window, and all modules that
14Click [Ethernet].
The [Properties - Ethernet interface xg-x1000] screen,
can be used with the XG-X Series are added
[Properties - Ethernet interface xg-x2000] screen, or
automatically.
[Properties - Ethernet interface XG-X1K2K-CA-
Reference If [PROFINET-IO-System] is not shown in the NPN20E] screen is displayed.
Station Window, right-click [PN-IO] of the CPU
and select [Insert PROFINET IO System].
15Enter the IP address for the connected XG-X Series
in the [IP address] field.

12Double-click the XG-X icon in the [HW Config]

screen.
The [Properties - xg-x1000] screen, [Properties - xg-
x2000] screen, or [Properties - XG-X1K2K-CA- • IP address: 192.168.0.10
NPN20E] screen is displayed.

16Click [OK].
17Click [OK].
18In the [HW Config] screen, select [Station] - [Save
and Compile] to save the setting.

19In the [HW Config] screen, select [PLC] -

[Download] to download the setting to the CPU.

1-236 XG-X Comm-US

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

20Set the mode switch of the CPU to RUN.
When the connection succeeds, the RUN LED (green) Outputting Measured/Judgment
of the CPU illuminates. Values
Reference The connection can also be checked at
[Communication Status] in the [PROFINET
Monitor & Diagnostics] screen or [PROFINET] 1.Setting the output data (Data output unit)
screen in Global settings.
To output various kinds of measured/
If the RUN LED does not illuminate, judgment values, use the "data output
• the PROFINET setting may be incorrect, the cable may unit." This section describes how to
not be connected properly, or the XG-X series may not assign the measured/judgment values
be turned on. of the following units to a data output
• Once the communication becomes unconnected, the unit as data to be output.
RUN LED goes off. In such a case, use the mode switch • Total status judgment of the
of the CPU to execute MRES, and then switch to the flowchart (%JgAll)
RUN mode again. • U0002: Pattern search (Position X)
• U0002: Pattern search (Position XY)
• U0004: Area (Area)
• U0005: OCR (Line 1 result string)
• Variable #a
• Variable #b
• U0002: Pattern search (Unit judgment value)
• U0004: Area (Unit judgment value)
• Processing time (%PrcTime)
• Processing start date (%PrcDay)

1 Add a "data output unit" at the end of the flowchart.

The setting screen of the added "data output unit" is
displayed.

2 Select [PROFINET] for [Output Method].

3 From the parts list, drag and drop measured/judgment

values you want to output to assign them into the
[Item] column.

Other than dragging and dropping from the parts list,

you can enter values directly.
XG-X Comm-US 1-237
Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

4 Check the destination byte addresses used for the

2. Checking the format of the output to the byte
output.
• When you assign data in the [Item] column, the
addresses and the relationship between the
output destination byte address is automatically byte addresses and I addresses, and setting
displayed in the [Address] column. When there are the Variable Table
several data output units in the flowchart and some
byte addresses overlap, you can offset the output 1 Check the example result data stored in the byte
destination of the output data in [Output Offset] on addresses.
the [Parameters] tab. The data output unit in the flowchart is configured to
• The starting address of the byte assignment is the output the following result data.
address where [Result Data1] is assigned for [XG-X • Total status (0: OK, 1: NG)
Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC)] of • U0002: Pattern search position X (430.202)
[Communications & I/O - PROFINET Settings] in the • U0002: Pattern search position XY (X: 430.202, Y:
[System Settings] screen of the XG-X VisionEditor 243.309)
(Byte address 0120 in the sample screen above). • U0004: Area (26964)
• U0005: OCR Line 1 result string (KEYENCE)
• Variable #a (95)
• Variable #b (348.267)
• U0002: Pattern search unit judgment value (0: OK,
1: NG)
• U0004: Area unit judgment value (0: OK, 1: NG)
• Processing time (67.477 ms)
• Processing start date (8)

2 In the [HW Config] screen of the SIMATIC Manager

check the relationship between the byte addresses
and I addresses.
Click the XG-X series icon in the [HW Config] screen
and check the assignment of the input byte devices.

• Check the range of the input byte addresses of the

XG-X Series.
• The input byte addresses 0008 to 0135 are
assigned to I420 to 547, and input byte addresses
0136 to 0295 are assigned to I260 to 419.

Reference The address assignment may vary depending

on the setting.

1-238 XG-X Comm-US

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

3 In the [System Settings] screen of the XG-X The [Properties - Variable Table] screen is displayed.
VisionEditor, select [Communications & I/O] -
[PROFINET] and click [BYTE Assignment] under
[XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC)].
You can check the items assigned to the byte
addresses.

6 Click [OK].
A Variable Table is added to [Blocks] of SIMATIC
Manager.

• By default, [Result Data1] , which is the first data

output, is assigned to byte address 0120 where the
7 Select [Blocks] in the Object Hierarchy of the
SIMATIC Manager, and double-click Variable Table
result data of the data output unit (U0006 in this
"VAT_1" you added.
example) is assigned.
• Since the result data is output in the unit of 32 bits,
four byte addresses are used for one piece of result
data (or one character when the result is characters)
(Only in the case of OCR2 unit Trimmed String is one
byte used for one character so that four byte
The [Var - VAT_1] screen is displayed.
addresses are used for units of four characters.).

4 Upload the program data and system settings to

8 Add I addresses which correspond to input byte
addresses 0120 to 0203 to the Variable Table in the
the controller.
unit of two words (four bytes).
After the controller is restarted, the output through
Enter the destination address in [Address] and specify
PROFINET starts.
the display format of the output data in [Display format].

5 Right-click [S7 Program] in the Project Tree of

SIMATIC Manager, and select [Insert New Object] -
[Variable Table].

XG-X Comm-US 1-239

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

9 Select [Variable] - [Monitor] of the Variable Table to Typical data output flow (Handshake: ON)
enter monitor mode, and then input a trigger to the
XG-X Series and check the output result. Controller PLC

Check the current values starting from I address 532. Use a trigger signal or other
The inspection flowchart is
method to start processing
processed
the inspection flowchart

Data output unit

Confirm that the Result ack
flag is OFF*

Write data into ResultData

When detecting that
When the data writing is
the Result ready flag was
complete, set the Result ready
changed to ON, read the data
flag to ON
in the I address (PID)
Check that the Result ack flag
was changed to ON to confirm
the completion of the data Set the Result ack flag to ON
reading

Set the Result ready flag Check that the Result ready
to OFF flag was changed to OFF
• Judgment values are stored by using two words to
show 0 (OK) or 1 (NG). Sets the Result ack flag to OFF

• Decimal type data is multiplied by 1000 and stored

• If the data output unit is processed while the Result ack flag is
by using two words: ON, the data is stored only in the output buffer and is not written
124.121 to 124121 into ResultData. The data stored in the buffer will be written
• When XY data is output, the data is stored in the when the Result ack flag is set to OFF. Be careful that if the
order of X and Y by using two words for each. processing of the inspection flowchart continues while the
Result ack flag is ON, the output buffer will overflow and a
• Integer type data is stored directly by using two words.
trigger input will be disabled.
• Character data is stored as ASCII code by using two
words for each character (Only in the case of OCR2 Typical data output flow (Handshake: OFF)
unit Trimmed String is one byte used for one
character so that two words are used to store a unit Controller PLC
of four characters.). Use a trigger signal or other
The inspection flowchart is
- When data is output as "string," the number of devices method to start processing
processed
used varies depending on the specified number of the inspection flowchart

characters. This example outputs the "number of

When a specific period passes
characters on the first line" of the OCR unit and the string [Data output unit]
after the trigger input, read
Write the data into ResultData
is seven characters of "KEYENCE."However, since [L1: the data in the I address (PID)
Number of Characters] for [Block Setup] is set to 10, the
range of 20 words (10 characters) from PID264 to
PID300 are used.
- Changing the number of characters setting affects all
the subsequent device settings.It is recommended to
set an item which may be changed at the end of the
data output unit.
• Variables are multiplied by 1000 and stored by using
two words:
9.5 to 9500, 348.267 to 348267
• Judgment values are stored by using two words to
show 0 (OK) or 1 (NG).
• System variables of integer type are stored directly
by using two words.Those of decimal type are
multiplied by 1000 and then stored by using two
words.

1-240 XG-X Comm-US

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

Input data (XG-X → PLC: IN)
Controlling the Controller • Command complete flag: This flag turns ON when
the command processing finishes (bit).
• Command error flag: This flag remains OFF when
1. Checking the system settings of the XG-X the command processing succeeds, and turns ON
Series when the processing fails (bit).
• Command ready flag: This flag is set to ON when the
1 Start the XG-X VisionEditor and select the program command processing can be accepted (bit).
setting of the workspace which is the target of • Command Result: The command execution result is
setting. set (0: Succeeded, <Error code>: Failed) (word).
• Command Data#: The #th response data of the
2 On the XG-X VisionEditor [Program Setting] tab, command is set (The presence/absence of the
select [System Settings] from the [Various response data depends on the command.)(double
Settings] menu. word).

3 In the [System Settings] screen, select 5 Select [OK].

[Communications & I/O] - [PROFINET]. The changes are saved.

4 In [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC)] 6 Upload the system settings to the controller and
and [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → then restart the controller.
PLC)], check the assignment of the bit and byte
addresses required for controlling the controller.

Output data (PLC → XG-X: OUT)

• Command request flag: Set this flag from OFF to ON
to execute a command (bit).
• Command Number: Set the command No. to be
executed (word).
• Command Parameter#: Set the #th argument of the
command (double word) (The presence/absence of
the argument depends on the command.).

XG-X Comm-US 1-241

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

The relationships between the items required for the

2. Example of command execution
command control are as follows:
procedure: Switch program No. (PW) • Command Number (Output address 0016 of
The following is a typical example of the command XG-X Series): PQD428
execution procedure. This example uses the PW command • Command Parameter1 (Output address 0020 of
(Change Program) which uses a command parameter. XG-X Series): PQD432
• Command request flag (Output address 0000 bit 0
of XG-X Series): Q0.0
1 In the [System Settings] screen of the XG-X
• Command complete flag (Input address 0000 bit 0
VisionEditor, select [Custom Instruction] and check
of XG-X Series): I0.0
the command details.
• Command error flag (Input address 0000 bit 1 of
XG-X Series): I0.1
• Command Result (Input address 0020 of
XG-X Series): PID432

Reference The address assignment may vary depending

on the setting.

3 In the Object Hierarchy of the SIMATIC Manager

select [S7 Program] and then double-click
[Symbols].

2 In the [HW Config] screen of the SIMATIC Manager

check the relationship between the addresses used
by the command and I addresses/Q addresses.
The [Symbol Editor] screen is displayed.

4 Define the symbols as follows.

5 Open the Variable Table of the SIMATIC Manager

and enter the following I addresses/Q addresses in
the [Address] column.

Click the XG-X1000 icon or the XG-X2000 icon in the

[HW Config] screen and check the assignment of the
following addresses.

For Command Number, Command Parameter1, and

Command Result, change the values in the [Display
format] column to [DEC] so that the values are
displayed in decimal notation.
1-242 XG-X Comm-US
Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

6 Enter the command No. into the Q address where Typical command processing flow
Command Number was assigned, and enter the
command parameter in the Q address where Controller PLC
Command Parameter1 was assigned. Set a desired custom
instruction No. in Command
Number, and the command
parameter(s) in Command
Parameter(s)

After confirming that

the Command ready flag is
The command execution starts ON, set the Command
request flag to ON to order
command execution

· After the command · Confirm the completion of

In this example, enter "2" as the command No. and execution is complete, set the command execution by
the command execution detecting that the Command
"11" as the command parameter in order to execute
result (0: Succeeded, <Error complete flag turned ON,
"PW,1,*01" to switch to the program No. 11. code>: Failed) in Command and check the command
Result execution result by
· When an command error referencing the content in
7 Select [Variable] - [Monitor] in the Variable Table to occurs, set the Command
error flag to ON
Command Result
· When there is response
enter monitor mode. · When the command data, reference the content
requires response data, set in Command Data
the response data in
8 Select [Variable] - [Activate Modify Values] in the Command Data Command request flag to OFF
Variable Table to apply the entered values.

9 Enter 1 (true) in the Q address where the Command

request flag was assigned (Q0.0 in this example).

10Select [Variable] - [Activate Modify Values] in the

Variable Table to apply the entered value.
The PW command (Change Program of SD1) is
executed.

11 Check the change of the value in the I address

where the Command complete flag was assigned.
• When the command execution succeeded: I
address where the Command complete flag was
assigned (I0.0 in this example) contains 1 (true).
• When the command execution failed: I address
where the Command error flag was assigned (I0.1 in
this example) contains 1 (true) and an error code is
written into the I address where the Command
Result was assigned (PID432).

XG-X Comm-US 1-243

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

2 Double-click the XG-X1000, XG-X2000, or XG-X icon in

Connecting with the Siemens the [HW Config] screen and set [Device name] and [IP
SIMATIC S7-300 Series address].

When connected with the Siemens CPU, the controller can

use the following types of communication:
• Cyclic communication using the maximum data size of
1408 bytes (1248 bytes when using a communication
expansion unit)
• Record data communication (non-cyclic
communication) for reading input/output byte data up to
1024 bytes by using "RDREC" (SFB 52)
• Writing output byte data up to 1024 bytes by using
"WRREC" (SFB 53)

Changing the settings for the cyclic

communication 3 To change the update time of the cyclic
communication, click the XG-X1000, XG-X2000, or
For more details of the CPU unit configuration and settings
XG-X icon in the [HW Config] screen, double-click
required for the communication with the CPU, refer to the
[Interface], and change the value of [Update time]
instruction manual of the CPU.
in the [Properties - Interface] screen.

1 In the [HW Config] screen of the SIMATIC Manager,

select [XG-X1XXX], [XG-X2XXX], or [XG-X1K2K-CA-
NPN20E] from the Hardware Catalog and drag and
drop it under [PROFINET-IO-System] in the Station
Window.

If the GSDML file of the XG-X Series has not

Point
been installed yet, [XG-X1XXX], [XG-X2XXX],
or [XG-X1K2K-CA-NPN20E] is not shown in
the Hardware Catalog. When this is the first
Even when a value of 4 ms or more (1 ms or
setting of the XG-X Series, select [Options] - Point
more when using a communication expansion
[Install GSD File] and install the GSDML file.
unit) is set, the screen display or external
input/output may be affected depending on
the measurement setting of the XG-X Series.
Be sure to verify the operating performance
before entering production.

1-244 XG-X Comm-US

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

4 Change the sizes of [Parameter Byte Modules] and
Changing the settings for the record data
[Result Byte Modules].
To change the value from the default, right-click the
communication
module and select [Delete] to delete it. After completing the procedure of "Changing the settings
for the cyclic communication" (Page 1-244), use the
"RDREC" (SFB 52) block in the ladder program to enable
the record data communication.
The XG-X Series supports the following Record commands:

Index Content Attribute

1 Parameter (Output addresses 0008 Read/write
to 1031 of XG-X)
2 Parameter (Output addresses 1032 Read/write
to 2055 of XG-X)
10 Result Data (Input addresses 0008 Read only
to 1031 of XG-X)
11 Result Data (Input addresses 1032 Read only
to 2055 of XG-X)
12 Result Data (Input addresses 2056 Read only
to 3079 of XG-X)
Then drag and drop a module of a desired size from 13 Result Data (Input addresses 3080 Read only
[Parameter Byte Modules] or [Result Byte Modules] in to 4103 of XG-X)
the Hardware Catalog.
In this example, specify 10 for Index and use "RDREC"
(SFB 52) to read the data of 1024 bytes stored in the input
addresses 0008 to 1031 of the XG-X.

1 In the Object Hierarchy of the SIMATIC Manager,

select [S7 Program] and then double-click [Symbols].

The [Symbol Editor] screen is displayed.

Point
The CPU will not operate properly when even 2 Define the symbols as follows.
one of the Bit Modules (Slots 1 to 5, Slots 12 to
16) is deleted. Do not delete Bit Modules.

5 In order to apply the settings to the CPU, select

[Station] - [Save and Compile] in the [HW Config]
screen and then select [PLC] - [Download] to
download the settings to the CPU.
After the settings have been downloaded, switch the
CPU to RUN mode and the PROFINET communication
is enabled.

XG-X Comm-US 1-245

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

3 In the Object Hierarchy of the SIMATIC Manager 6 Create the following ladder.
select [Blocks] and then double-click [OB1].

The [Properties - Organization Block] screen is

displayed.

Reference • ID needs to be a hexadecimal value

corresponding to [Diagnostic address] in
the XG-X Series to which the command will
be sent.
• The [Diagnostic address] can be seen in
the [HW Config] screen of the SIMATIC
Manager in this example, the diagnostic
address is 2043 (0x7FB in hexadecimal
notation).

4 Select [LAD] for [Created in Language] and click 7 Download the setting file to the CPU and set the
[OK]. CPU to RUN mode.
Even when you select download in the [LAD/
Point
5 Under [Overview] in the [LAD/STL/FBD - OB1] STL/FBD] screen, sometimes the changes in
screen, select [Libraries] - [Standard Library] - the setting may not be applied to the CPU. In
[System Function Blocks] and drag and drop such a case, select download in the [SIMATIC
Manager] screen.
[SFB52 RDREC DP] into [Network] of the ladder to
add it.
8 Open the Variable Table of the SIMATIC Manager
and add the following variables.

1-246 XG-X Comm-US

Typical PROFINET Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

9 Select [Variable] - [Monitor] in the Variable Table to
start monitoring.

10In the Variable Table, enter 1 (true) in the [Modify

value] column for [Read Data] (M200.0).

11 Select [Variable] - [Activate Modify Values] in the

Variable Table to apply the entered value to the
memory of the CPU.
"RDREC" (SFB 52) is executed and the values in the
input byte addresses 0008 to 1031 are read into
MD1000 to 2020.

XG-X Comm-US 1-247

Checking the PROFINET Communication Status (PROFINET Monitor & Diagnostics)

Checking the PROFINET Communication Status

(PROFINET Monitor & Diagnostics)

You can check the system's PROFINET I/O signal Output data (received by the controller) byte
communication status with this function. This function is information check screen
convenient because it allows you to check
communications content when connected to an external
device in situations such as when the appropriate data
cannot be communicated between connected devices.
The monitor cannot be used when [Enable/
Point
Disable] for PROFINET is [Disable] or when
PROFINET is not connected. First establish a
PROFINET connection before using the monitor.

1 From the [Utilities] menu at the top of the screen,

select [PROFINET Monitor & Diagnostics].
The [PROFINET Monitor & Diagnostics] screen is
displayed. You can see that 1 was input to Command Number and
2 was input to Command Parameter 1 (decimal,
unsigned).
Using the down arrow at the upper right corner of the
screen, you can select the value to monitor from
Hexadecimal, Decimal (unsigned), or Decimal (signed).

Input data (sent by the controller) bit information

check screen

2 Select the item you wish to check.

Select the bit information or the byte information for the
output data (received by the controller) or input data
(sent by the controller).

3 Now check the communication status.

Output data (received by the controller) bit You can see that 1 was sent to Command ready flag,
information check screen Result ready flag, and Result OR flag from the controller.

You can see that 1 was sent to Command request flag

from the PLC.

1-248 XG-X Comm-US

Checking the PROFINET Communication Status (PROFINET Monitor & Diagnostics)

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

Input data (sent by the controller) byte information
check screen

You can see that 390 was sent to Total count and 3
was sent to Command Result as a decimal (unsigned)
from the controller.

Reference With the input data (sent by the controller)

monitor, you can manually change the value
for the desired addresses and check those
changes on the PLC by selecting ON for
Manual Control during setup mode.

4 Select [Close].

XG-X Comm-US 1-249

Troubleshooting

Problems and Countermeasures

I want to check whether the PROFINET Ethernet settings, such as the IP address,
connection has been established were changed unexpectedly.
successfully. In PROFINET, the IP address of the controller specified on
On the controller, check [Utilities] - [PROFINET Monitor & the PLC overwrites the Ethernet settings (such as the IP
Diagnostics]. When [Disconnected] is shown here, the address) specified on the controller at the beginning of the
communication has failed. Check again the cable communication. You need to set the correct Ethernet
connection, IP address, and the communication settings settings of the controller on the PLC.
on the PLC.

The behavior is different from that

The Result OR flag is not output. specified with the module address setting
The Result OR flag is updated when the data output unit assigned on the PLC.
which uses PROFINET as an output device is processed. When any of the bit modules are deleted, the behavior may
At least one piece of data must be output via the data become different from that specified with the module
output unit from PROFINET before the Result OR flag can address setting assigned on the PLC.
be used. Do not delete the bit modules.

The Result ready flag remains ON and does

not change.
The Result ack flag may not be controlled properly. The
Result ready flag turns off when the rise of the Result ack
flag is recognized during sending (received by the
controller). This is true whether the handshake is ON or
OFF.

I tried to read data when the %Sto output

from the terminal block changes to rise, but
could not obtain the data properly.
The %Sto is a strobe signal dedicated to the data for the
parallel terminal output unit.It cannot be used as a strobe
signal for other data output.
For the data read timing through PROFINET, reference the
Result ready flag.

1-250 XG-X Comm-US

Troubleshooting

Control/Data Output via PROFINET

Error Messages

Error messages which are not assigned to either system variable %Error0 or %Error1
By default, the following error messages are not assigned to either %Error0 or %Error1, so that no output is provided even when
the error occurs. You can assign them to %Error0 or %Error1 as necessary.

Message Cause Countermeasure Error

factor No.
External command error has A command error has occurred during Review the command or program data.
occurred. the processing of a command input from
the following devices:
• PC application
• PLC-Link
• Ethernet
128
• RS-232C
• CC-Link
• Terminal block & parallel port
• EtherNet/IP
• PROFINET
• EtherCAT
PROFINET communication The communication was disconnected (It • Check that the Ethernet cable is connected
has failed. is automatically recovered when properly.
possible.). • Confirm that both of the XG-X Series and
master unit have been restarted after the 257
communication settings were updated.
• Review the settings on the PLC including the
communication cycle and timeout time.
Unable to write to PROFINET The output buffer for PROFINET is full. Change the update time on the PLC so that the
output buffer. rate of data output to PROFINET exceeds the rate
of data output from the flowchart, or set the trigger 259
interval longer (The result output is disabled while
the output buffer is full.).
PROFINET output buffer is full. The output buffer for PROFINET is full. Change the update time on the PLC so that the
rate of data output to PROFINET exceeds the rate
of data output from the flowchart, or set the trigger
260
interval longer (When the output buffer is full,
measurement is suspended until the buffer
becomes available.).

XG-X Comm-US 1-251

Control/Data Output via Overview of Control/Data
EtherCAT Output Using EtherCAT
The communication using EtherCAT is supported.
EtherCAT is the open real-time Ethernet network originally
developed by Beckhoff. This system operates as an
EtherCAT slave, and the functions shown below can be
realized by way of EtherCAT communication.
Overview of System Control/
Data Output
Process data object communication
Control/Data Output via (Cyclic communication)
External Terminals Communicating at specified update time intervals allows
high-speed control performed every several to several
tens of microseconds. Also, writing programs on the PLC
Control/Data Output via becomes easier because you can control the controller by
PLC-Link referencing and updating the variables and devices in the
PLC without considering communication.
• Controller control: You can control the controller by
Control/Data Output via
issuing commands in the cyclic communication.
CC-Link • Result data output: You can specify EtherCAT as an
output device for the data output unit and output data
through the cyclic communication.
Control/Data Output via
• I/O control: By assigning control-related system
EtherNet/IP variables in the cyclic communication, you can control
input/output in the same way as using the terminal block
Control/Data Output via or parallel I/O interface of the controller.
• Changing variable values: By assigning a special system
PROFINET variable %InDataFieldbus[], you can externally change the
value of a variable efficiently (variable synchronization).
q Control/Data Output via Point • Be sure to set the update time of the cyclic
communication to 500 μs or longer.
EtherCAT • Even if you specify the update time of the cyclic
communication to 500 μs or longer, the
processing may be delayed or the
Control/Data Output via communication may be disconnected by
No protocol communication temporary timeout due to the excessive load
applied to the controller temporarily or
continuously when there are other communication
FTP Client/Server Function functions being used in the controller such as
measurement settings, dialog operations,
commands, FTP, or remote desktop. When this
occurs, review the cyclic communication settings
and conditions used. Be sure to check for these
and other problems in the operating performance
before entering production.
• In a network where many devices, including
EtherCAT devices, are connected, delay or
packet loss may occur sometimes when a heavy
load is applied to the network constantly or
temporarily. Be sure to make thorough
verification before entering production.
• EtherCAT and PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or
PROFINET cannot be used at the same time
(EtherCAT cannot be used when PLC-Link, CC-
Link , EtherNet/IP or PROFINET is enabled).

1-252 XG-X Comm-US

Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

Mailbox communication Operation Flow
(non-cyclic communication)
This method can be used for communication which does Check the specifications (Page 1-255)
not require regularity like the cyclic communication. This • Check whether the PLC to be connected is a model that
communication method uses dedicated commands to supports EtherCAT connection.
read/write data records and can access addresses • Check the input/output data assignments.
exceeding the maximum size allowed to cyclic 
communication (536 bytes for input and 532 bytes for
Change the EtherCAT settings (Page 1-262)
output).
• Configure the settings to use EtherCAT to connect the controller.
Major setting items: Device ID and input/output data
assignments


Establish the EtherCAT communication
• You can confirm whether EtherCAT communications have been
established or not by checking [Communication Status] on the
[EtherCAT Monitor & Diagnostics] screen or [Communication
Status] on the [EtherCAT] screen on the controller's Global
settings.


Execute necessary processing.
Data output (Page 1-269)
• Data from the data output unit is written into the data
output area.
• Check the Result ready flag to confirm the completion
of the data writing.
• Set the Result ack flag to ON to notify that the reading
has been completed.

I/O control (Page 1-271)

• Use I/O control by assigning system variables related
to terminal control.

Command control (Page 1-272)

• Predefined custom instructions can be executed.
• To execute a command, write the command code and
command parameters into the command input area
and set the Command request flag to ON.
• A command can be executed when the Command
ready flag is ON.
• Check the Command complete flag to confirm the
completion of the command execution.

Variable synchronization (Page 1-274)

• Change the value of the system variable dedicated for
variable synchronization (%InDataFieldbus[]).

XG-X Comm-US 1-253

Preparing the EtherCAT connection

Installing the EtherCAT Unit CA-NEC20E EtherCAT Unit

The optional EtherCAT unit CA-NEC20E is used when
Specifications
communicating over EtherCAT.
Remove the protective cover from the expansion unit
Standard specifications
connector on the right side of the controller and install the
EtherCAT unit as shown below.
Item
Point • The controller must be turned off before Compliant standard IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
connecting or disconnecting the CA-NEC20E.
Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX)
• Restart the controller and master station after
changing the EtherCAT settings. Communication cycle 500 μs min.
Connection cable Category 5e or greater shielded twisted
pair (STP) cable
Node interval 100 m
Communication port RJ45 connector × 2
Communication size 536 bytes (input), 532 bytes (output)
Supported functions Process data object communication
(cyclic communication)
Mailbox communication (non-cyclic
communication)
Supports CoE
Explicit Device Identification
Conformance test Complying with Version.2.1.0.2.
version
When Using the Illumination Expansion
Unit and EtherCAT Unit Together
Mount the camera input unit directly to the controller, then Wiring example (IN port/OUT port)
mount the illumination expansion unit and EtherCAT unit to
the right side of the camera input unit.

No. Signal Function

name
1 TX + Transmission data (+)
2 TX - Transmission data (-)
Camera input unit 3 RX + Reception data (+)
CA-E100
4 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected
Illumination 5 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected
expansion unit
CA-DC40E 6 RX - Reception data (-)
EtherCAT unit 7 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected
CA-NEC20E
8 - 75 Ω terminating resistance connected
Point Illumination expansion units and EtherCAT units
cannot be installed between camera input units and
controllers.

1-254 XG-X Comm-US

Preparing the EtherCAT connection

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

Point Use a category 5e or greater STP (shielded twisted
Connecting to an EtherCAT pair) cable for the network cable. You can use
Network either a straight cable or a crossover cable.

Connect the master-side network cable to the IN port of the

RJ connector. If a slave unit is present downstream of this
unit, connect a network cable to the OUT port of the RJ
connector.

Connect the master-side

network cable.
(IN port)

Connect the slave-side

network cable.
(OUT port)

EtherCAT Connection Supporting Models

For details of each PLC setting method, refer to "Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure" (Page 1-276) and the operation
manual accompanying the PLC.

Beckhoff PLC

PLC model EtherCAT Version of firmware Software used Version of software used
Communication unit
C6920-0050 (TwinCAT) - (Built in the unit) Windows7 Ultimate TwinCAT3 v3.1.4020(Build4020)
Service Pack1

OMRON PLC

PLC model EtherCAT Version of firmware Software used Version of software used
Communication unit
NJ101-9000 - (Built in the unit) 1.1.521 Sysmac Studio Ver.1.15
NJ301-1100 - (Built in the unit) 1.1.521 Sysmac Studio Ver.1.15

XG-X Comm-US 1-255

EtherCAT communication specifications of the controller

EtherCAT communication specifications of the

controller

Standard specifications
This system supports two types of EtherCAT communication: "process data object communication (cyclic communication)"
and "mailbox communication (non-cyclic communication)."

Process Data Object Communication (Cyclic Communication)

This is a function that performs periodic communication at specified update time intervals and is suitable for real-time
control.
• The update time and communication size depend on the connection settings on the PLC (the maximum size for cyclic
communication is 536 bytes for input and 532 bytes for output).
• See "Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure" (Page 1-276) for more details.

Mailbox Communication (non-cyclic communication)

This is a communication method in which dedicated commands are used to access "objects" in which byte information is
divided into units of 1000 bytes.
• Commands such as reading (SDO Upload) and writing (SDO Download) are available. When these commands are
executed, a response to the command is returned.
• This method can be used for communication which does not require real time processing.
• It is possible to access to the addresses exceeding the maximum size allowed to the cyclic communication (input: 536
bytes, output: 532 bytes).
• Each record is assigned with an index. Data is accessed based on the specified index and size.
The accessible ranges for each byte information are as follows:

Output data (received by the controller) - Read/write

Index Accessible address
2019H 0020 to 1019
201AH 1020 to 2019
201BH 2020 to 2055

Input data (sent from the controller) - Read only

Index Accessible address
200CH 0024 to 1023
200DH 1024 to 2023
200EH 2024 to 3023
200FH 3024 to 4023
2010H 4024 to 4103

Point If the SDO Download command is issued while the Parameter module is being written in the cyclic communication, memory
area conflict may occur. Design the use of the SDO Download command in such a way as to avoid the memory area conflict
with the cyclic communication.

1-256 XG-X Comm-US

EtherCAT communication specifications of the controller

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

Process Data Object Map
The data that can be assigned as process data objects are shown below.
Use the configuration software to select the indexes to assign as process data objects.

Index Initial Size Name Assignable Data Index

(Hex) Assignment (Bytes) (Hex)
1600H  4 ControlBit 2011: 01 to 20 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1601H  4 OutBit 2012: 01 to 20 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1602H  4 Command Number 2013 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1603H 32 Parameter 32Byte 2014: 01 to 08 Objects from 1603H to 1607H cannot be
1604H 64 Parameter 64Byte 2015: 01 to 10 assigned at the same time. Select and
assign one object at a time.
1605H  128 Parameter 128Byte 2016: 01 to 20
1606H 256 Parameter 256Byte 2017: 01 to 40
1607H 512 Parameter 512Byte 2018: 01 to 80
1A00H  4 StatusBit 2001: 01 to 20 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1A01H  4 InBit 2002: 01 to 20 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1A02H  2 Error 0 code 2003 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1A03H  2 Error 1 code 2004 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1A04H  4 Total count 2005 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1A05H  4 Command Result 2006 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1A06H 32 Result Data 32Byte 2007: 01 to 08 Objects from 1A06H to 1A0AH cannot be
1A07H 64 Result Data 64Byte 2008: 01 to 10 assigned at the same time. Select and
assign one object at a time.
1A08H  128 Result Data 128Byte 2009: 01 to 20
1A09H 256 Result Data 256Byte 200A: 01 to 40
1A0AH 512 Result Data 512Byte 200B: 01 to 80

XG-X Comm-US 1-257

EtherCAT communication specifications of the controller

Example of input data settings (from XG-X Series to Beckhoff C6920-0050)

This is an example when one controller of the XG-X Series is connected to the Beckhoff C6920-0050 and [Command
function size] is set to 100 bytes (addresses 0020 to 0119) and [Starting address of output data] is set to 120 bytes (BIT
**.*/**.* in the table is the assignment example of Address(Input) for the C6920-0050. The leading address varies
depending on the settings.)

Setting Address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
status (Byte)
Bit area 0000 BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Result OR BIT Result BIT Cmd BIT Cmd Err BIT Cmd
39.7 39.6 39.5 39.4 39.3 Ready 39.2 Ready 39.1 39.0 Complete
0001 BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Trg4 BIT Trg3 BIT Trg2 BIT Trg1
40.7 40.6 40.5 40.4 40.3 Ready 40.2 Ready 40.1 Ready 40.0 Ready
0002 BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Trg4 Ack BIT Trg3 Ack BIT Trg2 Ack BIT Trg1 Ack
41.7 41.6 41.5 41.4 41.3 41.2 41.1 41.0
0003 BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Remote BIT Err 1 BIT Err 0 BIT Busy
42.7 42.6 42.5 42.4 42.3 Ready 42.2 Status 42.1 Status 42.0
0004 BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable
43.7 43.6 43.5 43.4 43.3 43.2 43.1 43.0
0005 BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable
44.7 44.6 44.5 44.4 44.3 44.2 44.1 44.0
0006 BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable
45.7 45.6 45.5 45.4 45.3 45.2 45.1 45.0
0007 BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable
46.7 46.6 46.5 46.4 46.3 46.2 46.1 46.0
Error 0008 47.0 Error 0 code
code 0009
area
0010 49.0 Error 1 code
0011
Total 0016 51.0 Total count
count 0017
area
0018
0019
Command 0020 55.0 Command Result
output 0021
area
0022
0023
0024 59.0 Command Data 1
0025
0026
0027
0028 63.0 Command Data 2
0029
0030
0031
⋅⋅⋅

0116 151.0 Command Data 24

0117
0118
0119

1-258 XG-X Comm-US

EtherCAT communication specifications of the controller

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

Setting Address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
status (Byte)
Command 0120 155.0 Result Data 1
output 0121
area
0122
0123
0124 159.0 Result Data 2
0125
0126
0127
⋅⋅⋅

Names and operations of input signals

Assigned Region Name Remarks

XG-X Comm-US 1-259

EtherCAT communication specifications of the controller

Example of output data settings (from Beckhoff C6920-0050 to XG-X Series)

This is an example when one controller of the XG-X Series is connected to the Beckhoff C6920-0050 with [Command
function size] set to 68 bytes (addresses 0016 to 0083) and [Starting address of input data] is set to 84 bytes (from address
0084) (BIT **.*/**.* in the table is the assignment example of Address(Output) for the C6920-0050. The leading address
varies depending on the settings.)

Setting Address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
status (Byte)
Bit area 0000 BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Err 1 reset BIT Err 0 reset BIT Result BIT Reserved BIT InDataFB BIT Cmd
39.7 39.6 39.5 request 39.4 request 39.3 ack 39.2 39.1 sync 39.0 Request
inhibit
0001 BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Trg4 BIT Trg3 BIT Trg2 BIT Trg1
40.7 40.6 40.5 40.4 40.3 40.2 40.1 40.0
0002 BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Test BIT Ext BIT Reset
41.7 41.6 41.5 41.4 41.3 41.2 41.1 41.0
0003 BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved BIT Reserved
42.7 42.6 42.5 42.4 42.3 42.2 42.1 42.0
0004 BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable
43.7 43.6 43.5 43.4 43.3 43.2 43.1 43.0
0005 BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable
44.7 44.6 44.5 44.4 44.3 44.2 44.1 44.0
0006 BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable
45.7 45.6 45.5 45.4 45.3 45.2 45.1 45.0
0007 BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable BIT Assignable
46.7 46.6 46.5 46.4 46.3 46.2 46.1 46.0
Command 0016 47.0 Command Number
input area 0017

0018
0019
0020 51.0 Cmd Parameter1
0021
0022
0023
0024 55.0 Cmd Parameter2
0025
0026
0027
0028 59.0 Cmd Parameter3
0029
0030
0031
⋅⋅⋅

0080 111.0 Cmd Parameter16

0081
0082
0083

1-260 XG-X Comm-US

EtherCAT communication specifications of the controller

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

Setting Address Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
status (Byte)
Variable 0084 115.0 %InDataFieldbus[0]
synchronization
specific system 0085
Variable area 0086

0087
0088 119.0 %InDataFieldbus[1]
0089
0090
0091
⋅⋅⋅

Names and operations of output signals

position to start assignment of items necessary for
command control. With the controller, this address is
fixed to byte 16 and cannot be changed.
• Command function size: Items necessary for
command control are assigned up to 68 bytes (default)
which is the area size upper limit.The custom instruction In the [XG-X Input] and [BIT] columns, you can assign a
No. (Command Number) is assigned from bytes 16 to desired input-type system variable related to terminal
19, and command parameters (Command Parameter1 control and its bit to each address.
to 16) are assigned from bytes 20 to 83. • The system variables which have already been
Point
• Starting address of input data: Specify the position to assigned to the input terminals in the terminal
start assignment of %InDataFieldbus[] for system block & parallel port cannot be assigned again
for EtherCAT.
variable synchronization. By default, the position has
• The same bit of the same system variable
already been assigned from byte 84, four bytes for each
cannot be assigned to multiple output data
item. When the command control and variable (received by the controller) addresses or be
synchronization are performed simultaneously with assigned again to the input terminal in the
EtherCAT, some of the data range used by the terminal block & parallel port.
command control and variable synchronization may
overlap. When this occurs, minimize the command
function size and change the assignment starting
address for the variable synchronization in the [Starting
address of input data] setting of the variable
synchronization.

Reference • Up to 536 bytes for input and 532 bytes for

output can be used in cyclic communication. In
non-cyclic communication, the entire byte area
can be used.
• The data representation format when decimal
data is written to Command Parameter follows
the format specified at [Decimal Point].

XG-X Comm-US 1-265

Changing the EtherCAT Settings

BYTE Assign
XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X →
The [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC): Multi
BIT Input Settings] screen is displayed.This screen lists the
PLC) (XG-X VisionEditor)
byte address assignment of output data (received by the
BIT Assignment
controller).
The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC):
Single BIT Output Settings] screen is displayed.This
screen lists the bit address assignment of input data (sent
from the controller).

• Starting address of command functions: Specify the

position to start assignment of items necessary for
command control. With the controller, this address is
fixed to byte 16 and cannot be changed.
• In the [XG-X Output] and [BIT] columns, you can assign
• Command function size: Items necessary for
a desired output-type system variable related to terminal
command control are assigned up to 68 bytes (default)
control and its bit to each address.
which is the area size upper limit.The custom instruction
• You can also move the assignment setting to another
No. (Command Number) is assigned from bytes 16 to
address by selecting a line and clicking [∧] or [∨].
19, and command parameters (Command Parameter1
to 16) are assigned from bytes 20 to 83.
• Starting address of input data: Specify the position to
start assignment of %InDataFieldbus[] for system
variable synchronization. By default, the position has
already been assigned from byte 84, four bytes for each
item.

Reference • Up to 536 bytes for input and 532 bytes for

Only custom instructions can be executed with

Point
EtherCAT.

1-266 XG-X Comm-US

Changing the EtherCAT Settings

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

BYTE Assignment
XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X →
The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC): Multi
BIT Output Settings] screen is displayed. This screen lists
PLC) (Controller)
the byte address assignment of input data (sent from the
BIT Assign
controller).
The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC):
Single BIT Output Settings] screen is displayed. This
screen lists the bit address assignment of input data (sent
from the controller).

• Starting address of command functions: Specify the

position to start assignment of items necessary for
command control. With the controller, this address is
fixed to byte 20 and cannot be changed.
• Command function size: Items necessary for
command control are assigned an area size of 100
In the [XG-X Output] and [BIT] columns, you can assign a
bytes (default).The command result (Command Result)
desired output-type system variable related to terminal
is assigned from bytes 20 to 23, and command
control and its bit to each address.
response data (Command Data1 to 24) are assigned
from bytes 24 to 119. BYTE Assign
• Starting address of output data: The data output unit The [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC): Multi
which uses EtherCAT as an output device can output BIT Output Settings] screen is displayed. This screen lists
data to the assignment range starting from this address the byte address assignment of input data (sent from the
within the area set at [Cyclic Data Size]. If the data controller).
output size is insufficient, minimize the command
function size to the least amount required, and change
the starting address for the data output assignment in
the [Starting address of output data] setting.

Reference • Up to 536 bytes for input and 532 bytes for

output can be used in cyclic communication. In
non-cyclic communication, the entire byte area
can be used.
• The decimal data representation format in
Command Data follows the format specified at
[Decimal Point].

The data range actually used for a command

Point
response varies depending on the command. Be • Starting address of command functions: Specify the
sure to provide a sufficient area for the command
position to start assignment of items necessary for
response of the command to be used.
command control. With the controller, this address is
fixed to byte 20 and cannot be changed.
• Command function size: Items necessary for
command control are assigned an area size of 100
bytes (default). The command result (Command Result)
is assigned from bytes 20 to 23, and command
response data (Command Data1 to 24) are assigned
from bytes 24 to 119.
XG-X Comm-US 1-267
Changing the EtherCAT Settings

• Starting address of output data: The data output unit

which uses EtherCAT as an output device can output
data to the assignment range starting from this address
within the area set at [Cyclic Data Size]. If the data
output size is insufficient, minimize the command
function size to the least amount required, and change
the starting address for the data output assignment in
the [Starting address of output data] setting.

Reference • Up to 536 bytes for input and 532 bytes for

Point The data range actually used for a command

response varies depending on the command. Be
sure to provide a sufficient area for the command
response of the command to be used.

Create ESI File

Outputs the ESI file shown below, which includes information
related to the controller's EtherCAT function.
• In the case of the XG-X2000 Series:
Keyence XG-X2xxx_CA-NEC20E.xml
• In the case of the XG-X1000 Series:
Keyence XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E.xml

Point This file is not created if any of the parameter

settings are incorrect. Correct the incorrect settings
and then try again.

Reference • The output path of the file in the controller is:

SD2:/xg/ESI.
• Since the ESI file does not contain information
set or changed in the system settings of the
controller and the XG-X VisionEditor, the content
of the created ESI file is always the same.

Reset
Returns all settings on the [EtherCAT] screen to their initial
values.

1-268 XG-X Comm-US

Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication to Output Measurement Data (Data Output)

Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication to

Output Measurement Data (Data Output)

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

Change the settings so that the data output unit outputs data through EtherCAT.

Point EtherCAT cannot be used when the PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or PROFINET is enabled.

Data Output Flow

Data is output from the data output unit. The data and addresses for the output are set in the data output unit.
The controller outputs the data through EtherCAT in the procedure shown below.

Reference • The data output through EtherCAT is possible only in run mode. Data will not be output in setup mode.
• Binary data, such as images, cannot be output with EtherCAT.
• When none of the data output units in the flowchart is processed, no data will be output. In such a case, the Result ready
flag does not change.

Controller PLC

Data output unit

Check that the Result ack flag is turned OFF.*1
Data output
Write data to ResultData and the Result OR flag. Data is written to ResultData and the Result OR flag.

Closing process
Set the Result ready flag to OFF. Detect that the Result ready flag was changed to
OFF.

Set the Result ack flag to OFF.

To the next flow

*1 This is a procedure for when handshake is set to ON.

Point Confirm that the data range used for the data output does not overlap with the data range of the command response data.

XG-X Comm-US 1-269

Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication to Output Measurement Data (Data Output)

Timing Chart

When handshake is ON

c e
Result ack flag
A
b d b
Result ready flag

a e
Indefinite Total status Total status
Result OR flag*1

a e
Indefinite Output data Output data
Result Data nnn

A: 0 ms or more (depending on the link scan speed)

*1 If you use the Result OR flag, one or more item of data needs to be set to be output from the data output unit to the EtherCAT.
(1) The data is updated.
(2) The Result ready flag (the read synchronization signal of the output data) turns ON and the data can be read.
(3) When data reading is completed, the Result ack flag turns ON as the signal for data reading completion.
(4) Associated with (3), the Result ready flag turns OFF.
(5) The result ack flag turns OFF. This is received and output continues if data is updated.

When handshake is OFF

Result ack flag

Result ready flag

Indefinite Total status Total status

Result OR flag*1

Indefinite Output data Output data

Result Data nnn

A: 0 ms or more (depending on the link scan speed)

*1 If you use the Result OR flag, one or more item of data needs to be set to be output from the data output unit to the EtherCAT.
(1) The data is updated.
(2) The Result ready flag (the read synchronization signal of the output data) turns ON and reading becomes possible.
(3) If data is updated, the Result ready flag stays ON and output continues.
(4) If the Result ack flag turns ON, the Result ready flag turns OFF. This can be used when you want to find out the latest OK/
NG status with as little delay as possible for such applications as when the line is to be stopped when the status is NG.
(5) The result ack flag turns OFF. Thus, you can find out the timing of the next data update.

1-270 XG-X Comm-US

Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication for I/O Control

Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication for I/O

Control

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

Change the settings to use EtherCAT to control input/output in the same way as using the terminal block or parallel I/O
interface of the controller.

Point EtherCAT cannot be used when the PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or PROFINET is enabled.

Conceptual Diagram of I/O Control (Example Connection with the EtherCAT

Unit of a PLC)
By assigning the desired system variables related to terminal control to bit devices, you can use multiple I/O signals with a
single LAN cable.

Controller PLC

0004 bit0 %UnitEditStatus (Unit edit status) 0004 bit0 turns on.

0005 bit0 %InDataAsyncA Turn on 0005 bit0.

(Asynchronous data input)

The EtherCAT communication is based on periodic communication. As a result, although the I/O signals operate according
Point
to the terminal block operation, some instantaneous changes of the signals may not be detected. To avoid the problem, set
the update time by considering the actual signal change time.

Reference • It is also possible to output measured or judgment values to bit devices by assigning %OutDataAsync to the bit address for
the input data (data sent from the controller) and issuing a WP command from the process flow using the Command
Execution unit.
• It is also possible to execute custom instructions from bit devices by assigning %CmdCode, %CmdParam, and
%CmdStrobe to the bit address for the output data (received by the controller).

XG-X Comm-US 1-271

Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication to Control the Controller (Command Control)

Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication to

Control the Controller (Command Control)
Predefined commands can be executed at the desired timing.

• EtherCAT cannot be used when the PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or PROFINET is enabled.
Point
• You need to set the desired commands to execute as custom instructions in advance.

Command Processing Flow Using EtherCAT (Example Connection with

the EtherCAT Unit of a PLC)
The controller is controlled with the commands through EtherCAT in the procedure shown below.

Controller PLC

Write the command No. and command

parameters of a desired command to Command
Number and Command Parameter respectively.

Command Confirm that the Command ready flag is ON.

The command execution starts.

Command
acceptance notice Confirm the start of the command execution by
After the command execution starts,
detecting that the Command ready flag turned
set the Command ready flag to OFF.
OFF.

Response data output*

When the command execution is complete, write 1

the response data into Command Data and set The response data is written to Command Data.
an error status in the Command error flag.

Command execution Confirm the completion of the command

*1 For commands which produce no response data, no response data is output to Command Data.

Reference When a command error occurs, the command execution result is written into Command Result (0: Succeeded, <Error
code>: Failed).

1-272 XG-X Comm-US

Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication to Control the Controller (Command Control)

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

Timing diagram

(2) (5)
Command A
request flag
A

Command A
ready flag

Command A (4)
complete flag
A
(3)
Command OFF Error status OFF
error flag

Command
Command No. Arbitrary
Number

(1)
Command
Command parameter Arbitrary
Parameter nnn

Command data must be obtained before

A
(3) setting the Command request flag to OFF.

Command Data nnn Return value Undefined

A: 0 ms or more (depending on the link scan speed)

(1) The command No. is stored in Command Number and the first command parameter is stored in Command Parameter.
(2) The Command request flag is set to ON to order command execution.
The Command ready flag is also set to OFF. (To turn OFF the Command ready flag, at least the time for link scan is
required.)
(3) When the time required for the command execution elapses, the return value is stored in Command Data and an error
status is stored in the Command error flag (When the Command error flag is OFF: Command processing succeeded,
ON: Command processing failed).
(4) The Command complete flag turns ON as a confirmation signal of command execution completion.
(5) When the Command request flag is set to OFF to allow the next command to be issued, the Command ready flag turns
ON and the Command complete flag turns OFF.

XG-X Comm-US 1-273

Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication to Change Variable Value (Variable Synchronization)

Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication to Change

Variable Value (Variable Synchronization)
Change the settings to use EtherCAT to change the value of a special system variable for variable synchronization
(%InDataFieldbus[]) assigned to the output data (received by the controller) of the cyclic communication.

Point EtherCAT cannot be used when the PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or PROFINET is enabled.

Variable Synchronization Flow Using EtherCAT (Example Connection

with the EtherCAT Unit of a PLC)
When EtherCAT is used, the value of %InDataFieldbus[] in the controller is changed in the following procedure.

Controller PLC

With the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag set to ON,

write to %InDataFieldbus[ ] the value that you want
to change.*1

Read permission
Detects that the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag
is OFF, and reads the value from Turn off the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag.*1
%InDataFieldbus[ ].

Apply the read value to the image processing

performed immediately after the reading.

*1 This is the procedure for controlling the reading timing of one value. EtherCAT reads a value for each cycle specified by RPI. When the
PLC is writing to multiple values of %InDataFieldbus[ ], a time lag may occur in the application timing of each memory. Setting the
InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag to ON beforehand to inhibit reading and then writing the values during the period ensure simultaneous
change of multiple %InDataFieldbus[] values without being affected by the write timing.

• The value of %InDataFieldbus[] is initialized to "0" immediately after the startup of the controller. If the EtherCAT
Point
communication is interrupted, the last value written into %InDataFieldbus[] is retained until the controller is restarted.
• The value is written into the data memory as 32-bit signed integer data.

1-274 XG-X Comm-US

Using the EtherCAT Cyclic Communication to Change Variable Value (Variable Synchronization)

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

Timing diagram
Example when the values of %InDataFieldbus[1] and %InDataFieldbus[2] are changed

InDataFieldbus
sync inhibit flag

Output data
(received by Data1 (2) Data3
the controller) nnnn
(1)
Output data
(received by Data2 Data4
(2)
the controller) nnnn+4
A

Data1 Data3
%InDataFieldbus [1] (3)
A A

Data2 Data4
%InDataFieldbus [2]

A: 0 ms or more (depending on the link scan speed)

(1) Since the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag is OFF, when a value is written into the byte address of the output data
(received by the controller) corresponding to %InDataFieldbus[1], the value of %InDataFieldbus[1] is changed after the
link scan time at the latest (The value of %InDataFieldbus[2] does not change because the value in the byte address of
the output data (received by the controller) is not changed.).
(2) Values are written into the byte addresses of the output data (received by the controller) corresponding to
%InDataFieldbus[1] and %InDataFieldbus[2]. However, the values of %InDataFieldbus[1] and %InDataFieldbus[2] do
not change because the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag is ON. To change multiple %InDataFieldbus values
simultaneously, you need to set the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag to ON, write and change the values in all of the
corresponding byte addresses of the output data (received by the controller) , and then set the InDataFieldbus sync
inhibit flag to OFF.
(3) Since the InDataFieldbus sync inhibit flag turned OFF, the values of the %InDataFieldbus[1] and %InDataFieldbus[2]
are changed (At least the time for a link scan is required before the change is complete.).

XG-X Comm-US 1-275

Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure

This section explains an operation example that shows how

2. Changing the C6920-0050 settings
to connect the XG-X Series to a C6920-0050 made by
Beckhoff via EtherCAT and to establish communication.
1 Start the C6920-0050, and then copy the ESI file for the
XG-X Series "Keyence XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E.xml" or
Connecting to the CPU "Keyence XG-X2xxx_CA-NEC20E.xml" to the folder
shown below.
1. Changing the system settings of the XG-X (In the following path, the "x" part of the "3.x" folder
Series varies depending on the version of TwinCAT3 that you
are using. Change this part to match your
1 Start the XG-X VisionEditor and select the program environment.)
setting of the workspace which is the target of C:\TwinCAT\3.x\Config\Io\EtherCAT
setting.
Reference To create the ESI file, on the XG-X Series
2 On the XG-X VisionEditor [Program Setting] tab, [Global] menu, select [Communications & I/O]
- [EtherCAT] to display the settings screen,
select [System Settings] from the [Various
and then select [Create ESI File].
Settings] menu.

3 In the [System Settings] screen, select

2 Start TwinCAT3. On the [File] menu, select [New] -
[Project].
[Communications & I/O] - [EtherCAT].

4 Change the EtherCAT settings.

3 Check that [Installed] - [Templates] - [TwinCAT
Projects] has been selected, and then enter the
project name in the [Name] field and click [OK].
In this example, we have entered "TwinCAT Project1."

The following setting values are used in this example

(Change them according to the device to be connected.).

[Communications & I/O - EtherCAT Settings]

• Enable / Disable: Enable
• Device ID: 00001
4 On the [TwinCAT] menu, select [Restart TwinCAT
(Config Mode)]. Alternatively, click [Restart
• Decimal Point: Fixed-point (Decimal Precision:
TwinCAT (Config Mode)].
1/1000)
The [Restart TwinCAT System in Config Mode] screen
[XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC)] is displayed.
[XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC)]
Assign data to the bit/byte addresses and specify the 5 Click [OK].
starting address.

5 Select [OK].
The changes are saved.

6 Upload the system settings to the controller and

then restart the controller.

1-276 XG-X Comm-US

Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

6 Use an Ethernet cable to connect the C6920-0050
3. Checking the status of the cyclic
and the XG-X Series.
In this example, we have connected the network cable
communication
from the C6920-0050 to the IN port of the CA-NEC20E,
Checking from the XG-X Series (CA-NEC20E)
as shown below.

If the indicator (RUN) on the XG-X Series (CA-NEC20E)

is lit, the connection has been established and cyclic
communication is being performed.

C6920-0050 Checking from TwinCAT3

To the IN port
of the CA-NEC20E
1 In [Solution Explorer], double-click [TwinCAT
Project1] - [I/O] - [Devices] - [Device3 (EtherCAT)] -
[Box1 (XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E)] or [Box1 (XG-
X2xxx_CA-NEC20E)], and then open the [Online]
tab on the displayed screen.

7 In [Solution Explorer], right-click [TwinCAT

2 Check the display of the [Current State] field.
Project1] - [I/O] - [Devices], and then select [Scan]
If [OP] is displayed, cyclic communication is being
on the shortcut menu that is displayed.
performed.
The [HINT: Not all types of devices can be found
automatically] screen is displayed.

8 Select [OK].
The [2 new I/O devices found] screen is displayed.

9 Check that the check box for the same device as

the network interface name of the port of the
C6920-0050 connected to the XG-X Series is
selected, and then click [OK].

The [Scan for boxes] screen is displayed.

10Click [Yes].
The [Activate Free Run] screen is displayed.

11 Click [Yes].

XG-X Comm-US 1-277

Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure

4 Check the destination byte addresses used for the

Outputting Measured/Judgment output.
Values • When you assign data in the [Item] column, the
output destination byte address is automatically
displayed in the [Address] column. When there are
1. Setting the output data (Data output unit) several data output units in the flowchart and some
byte addresses overlap, you can offset the output
To output various kinds of measured/
destination of the output data by means of [Output
judgment values, use the "data output
Offset] on the [Parameters] tab.
unit." This section describes as an
• The starting address of the byte assignment is the
example how to assign the measured/
address where [Result Data1] is assigned for [XG-X
judgment values of the following units
Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X → PLC)] of
to a data output unit as data to be
[Communications & I/O - EtherCAT Settings] in the
output.
[System Settings] screen of the XG-X VisionEditor.
• Total status judgment of the flowchart (%JgAll)
• In this example, we have configured the settings as
• U0002: Pattern search (Position X)
shown below.
• U0002: Pattern search (Position XY)
- Command function size: 92 bytes
• Variable #a
- Starting address of output data: 112 byte
• Variable #b
• U0002: Pattern search (Unit judgment value)
• Processing time (%PrcTime)
• Processing start date (%PrcDay)

1 Add a "data output unit" at the end of the flowchart.

The setting screen of the added "data output unit" is
displayed.

2 Select [EtherCAT] for [Output Method].

3 From the parts list, drag and drop measured/judgment

values you want to output to assign them into the
[Item] column.

Other than dragging and dropping from the parts list,

you can enter the items directly.

1-278 XG-X Comm-US

Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

2. Using TwinCAT to check the data output Controlling the Controller
by the XG-X Series.

In [Solution Explorer], open [TwinCAT Project1] - [I/O] - 1. Checking the system settings of the XG-X
[Devices] - [Box1 (XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E)] or [Box1 Series
(XG-X2xxx_CA-NEC20E)] - [Module1 (Result Data
128Byte)], and then double-click [Result Data 1 In XG-X VisionEditor, select [Communications &
128Byte]. I/O] - [EtherCAT] from the [System Settings] menu.

A list of the byte data output by the XG-X Series is

displayed. 2 In [XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X ← PLC)]
and [XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X →
PLC)], check the assignment of the bit and byte
addresses for the various items required for
controlling the controller.

• In the [Result Data 128Byte] field, the data output by

the XG-X Series is displayed starting with Command
Output data (PLC → XG-X: OUT)
Data1.
• Command request flag: Set this flag from OFF to ON
• In this example, the command area size has been
to execute a command (bit).
set to 92 bytes. So, with the 4 bytes of the Command
• Command Number: Set the command No. to be
Result part subtracted, 88 bytes (Command Data1
executed (word).
to Command Data22) are displayed in Result Data1
• Command Parameter#: Set the #th parameter of the
to Result Data22.
command (double word) (The presence/absence of
• The data to be output set with the data output unit is
parameters and the number of parameters depends
displayed starting with Result Data23.
on the command.)

Reference You can check the XG-X Series output data

other than the above data by double-clicking
([Status Bit] to [Command Result]) under
[Box1 (XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E)] or [Box1 (XG-
X2xxx_CA-NEC20E)].

XG-X Comm-US 1-279

Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure

Input data (XG-X → PLC: IN)

2. Example of command execution
• Command complete flag: This flag turns ON when
the command processing finishes (bit).
procedure: Switch program No. (PW)
• Command error flag: This flag remains OFF when The following is a typical example of the command
the command processing succeeds, and turns ON execution procedure. This example uses the PW command
when the processing fails (bit). (Switch program No.) which uses a command parameter.
• Command ready flag: This flag is set to ON when
Point If the program setting to switch to does not exist in
command processing can be accepted (bit).
the SD1 of the XG-X Series that is executing the
• Command Result: The command execution result is command, a command execution error will occur.
set (0: Succeeded, <Error code>: Failed) (word). Check for this data in advance on the XG-X Series.
• Command Data#: The #th response data of the
command is set (The presence/absence of the 1 In XG-X VisionEditor, select [Custom Instruction]
response data depends on the command.)(double from the [System Settings] menu, and then check
word). the number of the command to execute (for the PW
command, the default setting is [2]).
In this example, we have configured the settings as
shown below.
• XG-X Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X <- PLC): Multi
2 In [Solution Explorer], open [TwinCAT Project1] -
[I/O] - [Devices] - [Box1 (XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E)] or
BIT Input Settings
[Box1 (XG-X2xxx_CA-NEC20E)], and then double-
- Command function size: 68 bytes
click [Command Number].
- Starting address of input data: 84 byte
• XG-X Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X -> PLC): Reference If the [TwinCAT Project1] tab is already open,
switch to the [Command Number] screen not
Multi BIT Output Settings
by double-clicking it but by clicking it.
- Command function size: 92 bytes
- Starting address of output data: 112 byte
3 Right-click [Command Number] displayed on the
[TwinCAT Project1] tab, and then select [Online
3 Select [OK].
Write] on the shortcut menu that is displayed.
The changes are saved.

4 In the [Set Value Dialog] dialog box that is

4 Upload the system settings to the controller and
displayed, enter [2] (the PW command number) in
then restart the controller.
the [Dec] field, and then click [OK].

1-280 XG-X Comm-US

Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

5 In [Solution Explorer], open [TwinCAT Project1] - [I/ 9 Check that the [Command ready flag] displayed on
O] - [Devices] - [Box1 (XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E)] or the [TwinCAT Project1] tab is [1] and that the XG-X
[Box1 (XG-X2xxx_CA-NEC20E)] - [Module2 Series is in a state in which commands can be
(Parameter 128Byte)], and then click [Parameter executed.
128Byte].
A list of the byte data to input into the XG-X Series is 10In [Solution Explorer], open [TwinCAT Project1] - [I/
displayed. O] - [Devices] - [Box1 (XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E)] or
[Box1 (XG-X2xxx_CA-NEC20E)], and then click
[ControlBit].
A list of the bit data to input into the XG-X Series is
displayed.

11 Right-click [Command request flag] displayed on

the [TwinCAT Project1] tab, and then select [Online
Write '1'] on the shortcut menu that is displayed.
After detecting that the [Command request flag] value
has changed from 0 to 1, the XG-X Series executes the
PW command (switches the number of the SD1
program setting).

• Starting with Command Parameter1, the data to 12In [Solution Explorer], open [TwinCAT Project1] -
input into the XG-X Series is stored in [Parameter [I/O] - [Devices] - [Box1 (XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E)] or
128Byte]. [Box1 (XG-X2xxx_CA-NEC20E)], and then click
• In this example, the command area size has been [StatusBit].
set to 68 bytes. So, with the 4 bytes of the Command • When the command was executed successfully, the
Number part subtracted, 64 bytes (Command [Command complete flag] is set to 1, and the
Parameter1 to Command Parameter16) are stored in [Command error flag] is set to 0.
Parameter1 to Parameter16. • When the command execution failed, the
• %InDataFieldbus is stored starting from [Command error flag] is set to 1, and the error code
Parameter17. is written to [Command Result].
• After the command is executed, the [Command
ready flag] is set to 0.
6 Right-click [Parameter1] displayed on the [TwinCAT
• Returning the [Command request flag] from 1 to 0
Project1] tab, and then select [Online Write] on the
causes the [Command ready flag] to be set to 1,
shortcut menu that is displayed.
which switches the state to one in which the next
command can be executed.
7 In the [Set Value Dialog] dialog box that is
displayed, enter [1] in the [Dec] field as the first
parameter (the number of the program setting to
switch to) of the PW command, and then click [OK].

8 In [Solution Explorer], open [TwinCAT Project1] - [I/

O] - [Devices] - [Box1 (XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E)] or
[Box1 (XG-X2xxx_CA-NEC20E)], and then click
[StatusBit].
A list of the bit data output by the XG-X Series is
displayed.

XG-X Comm-US 1-281

Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure

Using Mailbox Communication Using TwinCAT3 Functions to Change the

Mailbox Communication Data

Using TwinCAT3 Functions to Check the 1 Double-click the data to change.

Values of Mailbox Communication Data The [Set Value Dialog] screen is displayed.

1 In [Solution Explorer], double-click [TwinCAT 2 Enter a value in the [Dec], [Hex], [Float], [Bool], or
Project1] - [I/O] - [Devices] - [Device3 (EtherCAT)] - [Binary] field, and then click [OK].
[Box1 (XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E)] or [Box1 (XG-
X2xxx_CA-NEC20E)], and then open the [CoE -
Online] tab on the displayed screen.
The list of data that can be read with mailbox
communication is displayed.

Reference When you click the [CoE - Online] tab, all the
data within the XG-X Series that can be read
are read automatically (this operation may take
some time).

2 Click the data to read in order to check it.

• Data for which a [+] mark is displayed to the left of
[Index] is array type data. You can click the [+] mark
to check the value of each data within the array.
• The value displayed in the [Value] field for data that
has a [+] mark indicates the number of elements in
the array.
• You can select [Update List] to manually update the
data.
• When the [Auto Update] check box is selected, the
data is updated automatically.

1-282 XG-X Comm-US

Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

Accessing the Byte Data Area 1. Using TwinCAT3 Functions to Check the
through Mailbox Communication Byte Information Values

Mailbox communication is used to access "objects" in 1 In [Solution Explorer], double-click [TwinCAT

which byte information is divided into units of 1000 bytes. Project1] - [I/O] - [Devices] - [Device3 (EtherCAT)] -
• This method can be used for communication which [Box1 (XG-X1xxx_CA-NEC20E)] or [Box1 (XG-
does not require real time processing. X2xxx_CA-NEC20E)], and then open the [CoE -
• It is possible to access addresses exceeding the Online] tab on the displayed screen.
maximum size allowed to cyclic communication (536 The list of data that can be read with mailbox
bytes for input and 532 bytes for output). communication is displayed.
• Each object is assigned an index and a sub-index,
Reference When you click the [CoE - Online] tab, all the
which are then specified in order to access the data.
data within the XG-X Series that can be read
are read automatically (this operation may take
some time).
Accessible Ranges for Each Piece of Byte
Information 2 Click the data to read in order to check it.
In this example, 1000 bytes from input address 3024 to
Output data (received by the controller) input address 4023 on the XG-X Series are checked.
Index (Hexadecimal) Accessible address
2019H 0020 to 1019 3 Click the [+] next to index 200FH to expand the list.
201AH 1020 to 2019 The value of each address is displayed under [Value].
201BH 2020 to 2055

Input data (sent from the controller)

Index (Hexadecimal) Accessible address

200CH 0024 to 1023
200DH 1024 to 2023
200EH 2024 to 3023
200FH 3024 to 4023
2010H 4024 to 4103

XG-X Comm-US 1-283

Typical EtherCAT Setting Procedure

2. Using TwinCAT3 Functions to Change

the Byte Information Values
In this example, output address 1020 on the XG-X Series is
changed.

Point Before using mailbox communication to change an

output address value, check that the address is
not assigned to cyclic communication. If you use
this method to change the value of an output
address assigned to cyclic communication, a
memory area conflict will occur.

1 Click the [+] next to index 201AH to expand the list.

The value of each address is displayed under [Value].

2 Double-click [201A:01 (sub-index 01H of index

201AH)].
The [Set Value Dialog] screen is displayed.

3 Enter a value in the [Dec], [Hex], [Float], [Bool], or

[Binary] field, and then click [OK].

4 Check the value of [201A:01] under [Value].

1-284 XG-X Comm-US

Checking the EtherCAT Communication Status (EtherCAT Monitor & Diagnostics)

Checking the EtherCAT Communication Status

(EtherCAT Monitor & Diagnostics)

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

You can check the system's EtherCAT I/O signal Output data (received by the controller) byte
communication status with this function. This function is information check screen
convenient because it allows you to check
communications content when connected to an external
device in situations such as when the appropriate data
cannot be communicated between connected devices.
The monitor cannot be used when [Enable/
Point
Disable] for EtherCAT is [Disable] or when
EtherCAT is not connected. First establish an
EtherCAT connection before using the monitor.

1 From the [Utilities] menu at the top of the screen,

select [EtherCAT Monitor & Diagnostics].
The [EtherCAT Monitor & Diagnostics] screen is
displayed. You can see that 1 was input to Command Number and
2 was input to Command Parameter1 (decimal,
unsigned).
Using the down arrow at the upper right corner of the
screen, you can also select the value to monitor from
Hexadecimal, Decimal (unsigned), or Decimal (signed).

Input data (sent by the controller) bit information

check screen

2 Select the item you wish to check.

Select the BIT Assign or the BYTE Assign of the XG-X
Implicit Input Addressing (XG-X <- PLC) or the XG-X
Implicit Output Addressing (XG-X -> PLC).

3 Now check the communication status.

Output data (received by the controller) bit You can see that 1 was sent to Command ready flag,
information check screen Result ready flag, and Result OR flag from the controller.

You can see that 1 was sent to Command request flag

from the PLC.

XG-X Comm-US 1-285

Checking the EtherCAT Communication Status (EtherCAT Monitor & Diagnostics)

Input data (sent by the controller) byte information

check screen

You can see that 390 was sent to Total count and 3
was sent to Command Result as a decimal (unsigned)
from the controller.

Reference With the input data (sent by the controller)

monitor, you can forcibly change the value for
the desired addresses and check those
changes on the PLC by selecting ON for
Manual Control during setup mode.

4 Select [Close].

1-286 XG-X Comm-US

Troubleshooting

Control/Data Output via EtherCAT

Problems and Countermeasures

I want to check whether the EtherCAT

connection has been established
successfully.
On the controller, check [Utilities] - [EtherCAT Monitor &
Diagnostics]. When [Disconnected] is shown here, the
communication has failed. Check again the cable
connection, Device ID, and the communication settings on
the PLC.

The Result OR flag is not output.

The Result OR flag is updated when the data output unit
which uses EtherCAT as an output device is processed. At
least one piece of data must be output via the data output
unit from EtherCAT before the Result OR flag can be used.

The Result ready flag remains ON and does

I tried to read data when the %Sto output

from the terminal block changes to rise, but
could not obtain the data properly.
The %Sto is a strobe signal dedicated to the data for the
parallel terminal output unit. It cannot be used as a strobe
signal for other data output.
For the data read timing through EtherCAT, reference the
Result ready flag.

XG-X Comm-US 1-287

Troubleshooting

No protocol communication

FTP Client/Server Function

XG-X Comm-US 1-289

No protocol communication via RS-232C

Getting Started Connecting to a PC

The system connects with a computer via an RS-232C cable, The controller can be connected to your computer using a
and measured values and judgment results can be output, dedicated serial cable (optional).
and the system can be controlled via the RS-232C. Refer to,
When the PC has a D-sub 9-pin connector
"Control via commands" (Page 2-2) for more details on
controlling.

OP-26487 (2.5m)

Standard specifications
OP-26486
• Connector: RJ-11 (port 1) XG-X Series PC
• Standards: The connected device must comply with EIA
(Electronic Industries Association) RS-232C standards. When the PC has a D-sub 25-pin connector

Item Compatibility
Communication Full-duplex
System OP-26487 (2.5m)
Synchronous system Asynchronous
Transmission Code ASCII (Part binary code) OP-26485
Data Length 8-bit XG-X Series PC
Stop-bit 1-bit/2-bit
• In the connection examples above, flow control
Parity-bit None/odd/even Point
is not possible.
Communication speed 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200/
• Use the system setting details to select the
230400 bps
system’s communications settings and
Start Delimiter STX/ENQ/ASCII Code/None
communications modes. Refer to, "Changing the
End Delimiter CR/CR + LF/LF/EXT/ASCII Code settings" (Page 1-291) for more details. In
Flow Control None, CTS/RTS addition, the No protocol mode baud rate and
Maximum cable 15 m parity bits can be checked and changed via the
length [RS-232C (no protocol)] in the System settings.

Connector specifications (RS-232C port)

The specifications of the RS-232C port on the controller
are as follows:

No. Signal Signal Description Signal direction

1 CS (CTS) Data Transmission Output
Permission
2 Not used — —
3 SD (TXD) Data Transmission Input
4 SG (GND) GND —
5 RD (RXD) Data Reception Output
6 RS (RTS) Data Transmission Input
Request

Reference Since the controller uses the RS-232C modem

definition, SD is assigned to input and RD is
assigned to output.

1-290 XG-X Comm-US

No protocol communication via RS-232C

Control/Data Output via No protocol communication

Changing settings with the controller
Changing the settings On the [RS-232C] menu in the Global settings, various
settings for data input/output in no protocol can be
Displaying the RS-232C setting screen changed.

Changing settings with XG-X VisionEditor

In the [RS-232C] menu in the XG-X VisionEditor System
Settings, various settings for data input/output via no
protocol can be changed and then uploaded to the
controller.

1 On the [Global] menu at the top of the screen, select

[Communications & I/O] - [RS-232C].
The [RS-232C] menu appears.

2 Change the settings as required.

See "RS-232C Settings" (Page 1-292) for more details
1 Select [System Settings] from the [Various Settings] on each setting.
menu on the [Program Setting] tab.
The [System Settings] menu appears. 3 To apply settings, click [OK].

2 In the left pane of the [System Settings] menu,

select [Communications & I/O] - [RS-232C (no
protocol)].
The [RS-232C (no protocol)] menu appears.

3 Change the settings as required.

See "RS-232C Settings" (Page 1-292) for more details
on each setting.

4 Click [OK].
To apply the changes to the controller, upload the
Point
global settings file to the controller and then restart
the controller.

XG-X Comm-US 1-291

No protocol communication via RS-232C

End Delimiter
RS-232C Settings
The specified delimiter is output at the end of the output
Port data.
Select the assignment of function to the RS-232C port from • CR(default): CR (=0x0D) is output as the end delimiter.
between [Data Output / Command Control] (default • CR + LF: CR (=0x0D) + LF (=0x0A) is output as the end
setting) or [CA Series Touch Panel]. delimiter.
• LF: LF (=0x0A) is output as the end delimiter.
If [Port] is changed using the touch panel, the
Point • ETX: ETX (=0x03) is output as the end delimiter.
touch panel can not be used after change is set.
To restore it, you need a USB handheld controller • ASCII Code: The desired ASCII code value is output as
(OP-87983) or a special mouse (OP-87506). the end delimiter.

Baud rate Use individual delimiters per function

Select 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or When this option is checked, for each of the result data
230400 (bps) for the baud rate. output, command reception, and command response, the
start/end delimiters can be specified for each function.
Stop Bit • For the controller, select [Edit] to specify a desired
Select [1] (default) or [2] for the stop bit. value.
• The values which can be specified as the start/end
Parity Bit
delimiters are the same as those which can be specified
Select [None] (default), [Odd], or [Even] for the parity bit. with normal [Start Delimiter] and [End Delimiter]
settings.
Flow Control
Select [None] (default) or [CTS/RTS] for the flow control. Reference When the [Use individual delimiters per function]
option is checked, normal [Start Delimiter] and
[End Delimiter] settings are not operated.
Start Delimiter
The specified delimiter is output at the head of the output When the system settings are uploaded, the
Point
data. delimiter settings in the Ethernet settings are
• STX: STX (=0x02) is output as the start delimiter. always uploaded to the controller regardless of
whether or not [Include controller name and
• ENQ: ENQi=0x05) is output as the start delimiter.
Ethernet settings.] is selected.
• ASCII Code: The desired ASCII code value is output as
the start delimiter. CV Compatible Trigger Response
• None (default): The start delimiter is not output. If you select this check box, you can make trigger
command responses compatible with the CV-5000 Series.
For details, refer to "Detailed Setting of Non-protocol
Communication" (Page 1-303).

1-292 XG-X Comm-US

No protocol communication via RS-232C

Control/Data Output via No protocol communication

3 Set the communication speed.
An example of communicating Change settings according to the settings of the
with the controller using terminal controller.
software and no protocol mode Example of host settings in using Tera Term

You can use terminal software to communicate with the

controller. In this example, the operation process using
Tera Term (free software) is described.

Reference See the following URL for details on Tera Term (as
of January 2019).
ja.osdn.net/projects/ttssh2/releases/

1 Prepare terminal software.

Install terminal software such as Tera Term (freeware).

2 Start terminal software on your PC and configure

4 Connect the host.
settings for the host.
If Tera Term is used, click [OK] after configuring the
• Host: Select [Serial].
host computer connections.
• Port: Select the port used for RS-232C
See "Standard instruction" (Page 2-9) for more details
communication of the PC.
on issuing commands.
Example of host settings in using Tera Term

XG-X Comm-US 1-293

No protocol communication via RS-232C

3 Use the following operations as required.

Verifying the Status of • To stop data being displayed on screen: Click
RS-232C Communication [Stop].

The RS-232C Diagnostic tool allows for the checking of the • To clear the log: Click [Clear].
status of incoming and outgoing signals via the RS-232 • To save the log to the SD card: Click [Save] to
port of the controller. This feature is very useful for verifying save the log as text data. The log is saved in the
the communication status and content between the "\xg\rs_log\" folder on the specified SD card with the
controller and external equipment. The most recent name "File creation date YYMMDD_HHMMSS_SD
communication content (up to 10 KB) can also be saved No._ProgramNo.log".
for later review. Reference The SD card slot can be specified in [System
Settings] - [File Output] - [RS-232C / Ethernet
(TCP/IP) Log] - [Save to] in the XG-X VisionEditor
1 From the [Utilities] menu at the top of the screen,
(default: SD2).
select [RS-232C Monitor].
The [RS-232C Monitor] menu appears.
4 Click [Close].

2 Verify the communication status.

The communication data is updated in response to
incoming and outgoing RS-232C commands.
• A "<" appears at the beginning of the data when
output from the controller, and a ">" appears at the
beginning of the data when received by the
controller.
• Characters other than ASCII code are displayed as
hexadecimal.

Reference In Offline mode, the only RS-232

communication output that occurs are
responses to commands sent from external
devices. To check whether data output from
the program is functioning correctly, switch to
Run mode.

1-294 XG-X Comm-US

No protocol communication via Ethernet

Control/Data Output via No protocol communication

Getting Started Changing the settings
When the controller is connected to a PC through the
Ethernet cable, the measurement values or judgment Displaying Ethernet setting screen
results can be output through Ethernet or the system can
be controlled. See "Control via commands" (Page 2-2) for Changing settings with XG-X VisionEditor
more details on control. In the [Ethernet] menu in the XG-X VisionEditor system
• Consult your system administrator or network settings, various settings for data input/output via no
Point
administrator when connecting to an existing protocol can be changed and can then be uploaded to the
LAN. If any incorrect settings are made, the controller.
controller as well as other network equipment
may not work properly.
• The controller may truncate parts of the output
data, depending on the network conditions.
(The controller does not resend data with
packet loss)
• Some delays may occur during data
transmission between the network and the
controller, depending on the network conditions.
If a response is required, such as a trigger
input, communicating via the I/O interface is
recommended.
• If a firewall is present on the FTP server or the
network of the FTP server, the connection may
fail. In this case, you need to disable the firewall
or take other measures.
For details, consult the network administrator or
1 Select [System Settings] from the [Various
Settings] menu on the [Program Setting] tab.
manufacturer of the PC.
• Use equipment that is intended for use in a The [System Settings] menu appears.
factory environment (such as hubs and LAN
cables) for the network. Using commercial 2 In the left pane of the [System Settings] menu, select
equipment meant for office applications may
[Communications & I/O] - [Ethernet (TCP/IP)].
cause unstable operation.
The [Ethernet (TCP/IP)] menu appears.

3 Change the settings as required.

See "Ethernet settings" (Page 1-296) for more details
on each setting.

4 Click [OK].
To apply the changes to the controller, upload the
Point
global settings file to the controller and then restart
the controller.

XG-X Comm-US 1-295

No protocol communication via Ethernet

Changing settings with the controller

Ethernet settings
On the [Ethernet] menu in the global settings, various settings
for data input/output via no protocol can be changed. If incorrect settings are used, the controller and
Point
other network equipment may not work properly.
Consult your system administrator or network
administrator about setting values.

IP address
Enter the IP address of the controller (Default value:
192.168.0.10).

Subnet mask
Enter a subnet mask (Default value: 255.255. 255.0).

Default gateway
Enter a default gateway IP address (Default value: 0.0.0.0).
• The IP address specified as the destination for
Point
1 On the [Global] menu at the top of the screen, archive data using FTP must be unique.
select [Communications & I/O] - [Ethernet (TCP/IP)]. • If the PLC-Link (Ethernet) is enabled, the IP
The [Ethernet (TCP/IP)] menu appears. address must not be the same as the IP
address on the other end of the PLC link.
• If PLC-Link (Ethernet) or EtherNet/IP is enabled
2 Change the settings as required. and the settings are changed, the controller
See "Ethernet settings" (Page 1-296) for more details must be restarted for changes to take effect.
on each setting.
Enable BOOTP
Select this option when the network setting information (IP
3 To apply settings, click [OK].
address, subnet mask, and default gateway) is provided
by a BOOTP server when the controller starts up. (Default:
Invalid). The provided network information is used in the
global settings. If retrieval of information from the BOOTP
server fails at the next startup, the system will start with the
saved settings.
• When BOOTP is enabled, the settings of the IP
Point
address, sub-net mask, and default gateway
cannot be changed on the [Ethernet] menu.
• If the BOOTP server is not started, the controller
retries BOOTP processing for about 3 minutes
at startup. To interrupt the BOOTP processing,
press the ESC key on the console.
• If a retry times out, the system starts operation
with the network setting saved in the global
settings.

Reference The verified BOOTP servers are:

• IP Setting Tool by Keyence
• BOOTP-DHCP server by Rockwell Automation,
Inc.
• BootP server by WAGO

1-296 XG-X Comm-US

No protocol communication via Ethernet

Control/Data Output via No protocol communication

Port Use individual delimiters per function
Enter the port number used for data I/O on the controller. When this option is checked, for each of the result data
• Command & Data Output: Enter the port number used output, command reception, and command response, the
for non-protocol specific commands and data output. start/end delimiters can be specified for each function.
(Default: 8500). • For the controller, select [Edit] to specify a desired
• PC Program: Enter the port number used to value.
communicate with PC programs (XG-X VisionEditor, XG- • The values which can be specified as the start/end
X VisionTerminal, and ActiveX controls). (Default: 8502) delimiters are the same as those which can be specified
Note that PC programs use three consecutive ports from with normal [Start Delimiter] and [End Delimiter]
the specified number. For example, when 8710 is settings.
specified, ports 8710 to 8712 are used by PC programs; When the [Use individual delimiters per function]
Reference
and when 10108 is specified, ports 10108 to 10110 are option is checked, normal [Start Delimiter] and
used. [End Delimiter] settings are not operated.

• The same port number cannot be specified for When the system settings are uploaded, the
Point Point
[Command & Data Output], [PC Program], and delimiter settings in the Ethernet settings are
[VNC Server Setup]. always uploaded to the controller regardless of
• In addition to the above port numbers, port whether or not [Include controller name and
number 9010 is also used when communicating Ethernet settings.] is selected.
with Keyence software.
CV Compatible Trigger Response
Start Delimiter
If you select this check box, you can make trigger
The specified delimiter is output at the head of the output
command responses compatible with the CV-5000 Series.
data.
For details, refer to "Detailed Setting of Non-protocol
• STX: STX (=0x02) is output as the start delimiter.
Communication" (Page 1-303).
• ENQ: ENQi=0x05) is output as the start delimiter.
• ASCII Code: The desired ASCII code value is output as MAC Address (Controller only)
the start delimiter. MAC address of the controller is displayed (Cannot be
• None (default): The start delimiter is not output. changed).

End Delimiter Jumbo Frame

The specified delimiter is output at the end of the output When performing communication with jumbo frames,
data. select [4KB] (default: disabled).
• CR(default): CR (=0x0D) is output as the end delimiter.
• This is only enabled when a communication
• CR + LF: CR (=0x0D) + LF (=0x0A) is output as the end Point
expansion unit (CA-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E)
delimiter. is connected to the controller.
• LF: LF (=0x0A) is output as the end delimiter. • When using jumbo frames, all devices on the
• ETX: ETX (=0x03) is output as the end delimiter. network must support jumbo frames.
• ASCII Code: The desired ASCII code value is output as
the end delimiter.

XG-X Comm-US 1-297

No protocol communication via Ethernet

5 Start [Command Prompt] on the PC.

One-to-one connection with a PC
This section describes how to prepare and communicate
when the controller is controlled in a one-to-one
connection with a PC, and not via the LAN. To connect to
your PC, an optional cross cable (3 m) OP-66843 should
be used.

Reference To start the command prompt (Windows 7),

click the [Start] menu then click [All Programs]
- [Accessories] - [Command Prompt].
Cross cable (3 m)
(OP-66843)
6 Enter [ping] followed by the IP address of the
controller in alphanumeric characters and press
Connecting the controller to a PC the Enter key.

When the IP address of the controller is

1 Change the TCP-IP settings on the controller. [192.168.0.10]
The system uses the TCP/IP settings specified in the Enter [ping 192.168.0.10].
System Settings in XG-X VisionEditor. For more details,
refer to "Controller System Settings" in the XG-X
VisionEditor Reference Manual.
The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
settings can be viewed and changed using [Ethernet]
on the system settings.

2 Change the TCP-IP settings on a PC.

When the controller is directly connected to a PC with
a cross cable, set the IP address between 192.168.0.1
and 192.168.0.255 excluding 192.168.0.10 (when the If the controller and the PC are properly configured, a
subnet mask of the controller and PC are message [Reply from (the IP address of the controller)
255.255.255.0). ~ ] will appear.
See the instruction manual for your computer or LAN
settings for more information.

3 Turn off the controller and the PC and connect the

Ethernet connector on the PC to the Ethernet port
using a cross cable.

4 Turn on the controller and the PC.

1-298 XG-X Comm-US

No protocol communication via Ethernet

Control/Data Output via No protocol communication

When [Request timed out] appears 3 Connect the host.
If a message [Request timed out] appears and the If Tera Term is used, click [OK] after configuring the
correct IP address of the controller has been specified host computer connections.
in the ping command, the setting and configuration of The command system used in communication is the
the controller and the PC is incorrect. same as that of the no protocol mode in RS-232C. For
more details, refer to "Standard Instruction" in the XG-X
VisionEditor Reference Manual.

Setting example of Tera Term Terminal Setup

Check that the steps from 1 to 4 described on the

previous page have been properly performed.

An example of communicating with the

controller using Telnet software and no
protocol mode
You can use Telnet software to communicate with the
controller. In this example, the operation process using
Tera Term (free software) is described.

Reference See the following URL for details on Tera Term (as
of January 2019).
ja.osdn.net/projects/ttssh2/releases/

1 Prepare Telnet software.

Install Telnet software such as Tera Term (freeware).

2 Start Telnet software on your PC and configure

settings for the host.
• Host: Enter the IP address of the controller. (Default
value: 192.168.0.10)
• Enter the communication port specified for the
controller. (Default value: 8500).

Example of host settings in using Tera Term

XG-X Comm-US 1-299

No protocol communication via Ethernet

One-to-n connection with a PC Notes on one-to-n connections

This section describes how to setup communications when • Multiple controllers cannot exchange data with each
more than one controller is controlled by one PC via a LAN. other or control each other.
• The maximum number of computers that can be
connected at once depends on the software and
hardware of the devices connected. For more details,
contact the manufacturer of the software or hardware of
the devices connected.
• Consult your system administrator or network
administrator when connecting to an existing LAN. If any
HUB incorrect settings are made, the system, as well as other
(router)
network equipment may not work properly.
The baud rate and /or connection stability may vary
depending on the combination of connected devices and
the network status. Make sure to check the operational
functionality of the network before starting actual
Differences between one-to-one operation.
connections and one-to-n connections
Preparation and control methods for one-to-n connection
are basically the same as those for one-to-one connection.
However, the following points differ.
• To connect multiple controllers, a hub or router that
supports 1000BASE-T or 100BASE-TX is required.
(Keyence recommends 1000BASE-T.)
• To connect a controller to a hub (or router), use a
commercial straight cable. Keyence recommends using
a shielded twisted pair (STP) straight cable, category 5e
or greater.
• The IP addresses of the controllers on the network and that of
the PC must be different to prevent communication
breakdown.
An example of using two controllers (In this example
the subnet mask of the controller and PC is
255.255.255.0)
- IP address of the first controller: 192.168.0.10 (default)
- IP address of the second controller: 192.168.0.11
(changed because the default value would be the
same as first controller)
- The IP address of the PC: 192.168.0.12 (changed to
not interfere with the other addresses but using the
same first three ABC classes)
• If a router is used, the Ethernet settings of the controllers
must be changed according to the settings of the router.
For more details, see the instruction manual of the router
or consult your system or network administrator.

1-300 XG-X Comm-US

No protocol communication via Ethernet

Control/Data Output via No protocol communication

3 Use the following operations as required.
Checking the Ethernet • To temporarily stop updating the content
Communication Status displayed on the screen: Click [Stop].
(Ethernet (TCP/IP) Monitor) • To clear the log: Click [Clear].
• To save the log to the SD card: Click [Save] to
You can check the system's Ethernet communication
save the log as text data. The log is saved in the
status on the controller's Ethernet (TCP/IP) monitor. This
"\xg\rs_log\" folder on the specified SD card with the
function is convenient because it allows you to check
name "File creation date YYMMDD_HHMMSS_SD
communications content when connected to an external
No._ProgramNo.log".
device in situations such as when the appropriate data
cannot be communicated between connected devices. Reference The SD card slot can be specified in [System
Settings] - [File Output] - [Screen Capture] -
[Save to] in the XG-X VisionEditor (default: SD2).
1 From the [Utilities] menu at the top of the screen,
select [Ethernet (TCP/IP) Monitor]. 4 Select [Close].
The [Ethernet (TCP/IP) Monitor] screen is displayed.

2 Now check the communication status.

The current communication content is changed real
time according to the command input/output.
• "<" is given to the head of the output data from the
controller while ">" is given to the head of the input
data to the controller.
• Numbers other than ASCII code are displayed in
"Hexadecimal".

Reference In setup mode, communication output other

than response for external input commands is
not performed. If you want to check the data
output operation, switch to run mode.

XG-X Comm-US 1-301

Outputting result data via no protocol communication

Change the settings of the data output unit in the flowchart - Format 1 to 16: Output data using the format setting
so that the data will be output from the specified no defined in the [Data output format setting] dialog.
protocol communication interface. - Character: Output the data as character strings.
For more details, see "Data Output Unit" in the XG-X
- Non-ASCII: Output the data as control characters.
Reference
VisionEditor Reference Manual. - ASCII Code: The output content is replaced to the
1-byte ASCII code value (0x01 to 0x7F) and output.
• Data can only be output when the controller is in
Point
run mode. Data cannot be output in other • If [PLC-Link], [CC-Link], [EtherNet/IP],
Point
modes. [PROFINET], or [EtherCAT] is selected for
• Images cannot be output via no protocol [Output Method], settings are limited as
communication. To output images or other follows:
binary data, select PC Program (XG-X Vision - If Character, Non-ASCII, or ASCII Code is
Terminal or ActiveX control) as the destination. selected as the format, the item line is
grayed out, and the data are excluded
from the output.
1 In Flowchart View, double-click the data output unit - If [Format 1 to 16] is selected as the
to change its settings. format, data is output but not using the
The properties menu of the data output unit is displayed. pre-determined format setting.
• If [Auto] is selected, variables are set to
"use +/- prefix", "zero suppression: OFF",
2 Click the [Output Settings] tab. and "7 integer digits, 3 decimal places".
• Item: Specify the data to be output such as
3 Specify details for the output data.
variables, result data, desired character strings, or
Reference When using no protocol communication, it is control characters. To assign a variable or result
unnecessary to change settings on the data, including an array, describe the index (from 0)
[Protocol Details] tab of the data output unit.
to start output directly in the setting.
Output Method • Number: When array type data is specified, enter
Specify the destination of the data output. the number of data pieces to be output.
• RS-232C: Output data to RS-232C. • Preview: Check the data output based on the
• Ethernet (TCP/IP): Output data to Ethernet. specified data and quantity.
The available destination varies depending on • /: Move the selected line upward or downward.
Point
the [System Settings] menu settings. When [Auto] is selected for [Format], the
Reference
format of a variable will automatically be set to
Reference Some setting items in the [Output Settings] tab "use + prefix", "zero suppression: OFF", and "7
change depending on the specified integer digits and 3 decimal places".
destination.
Delimiter
Data Format Select the character to separate the output data and header
Define the format of the data to be output. from a comma, tab, space, or none (do not use a delimiter).
When the [Format Setting] menu is displayed, combine
Full output buffer
the following setting items to define format 1 to 16.
Specify which should have priority when the output
• +/- prefix: Check this option to add a + sign to a
buffer becomes full: Image processing (flowchart
positive value for output.
transition) or data output.
• Zero suppression: Check this option to use zero
• Skip output item: Give priority to image processing
suppression.
and skip data output temporarily.
• No. digits: Specify the number of integer digits.
• Wait for free space: Give priority to data output and
• No. Decimal places: Specify the number of decimal
resume image processing after data output is complete.
places.

Output List 4 Click [OK].

Specify the output data (256 lines maximum). If there is any other data output unit in the flowchart,
• Format: Specify the format of the data to be output. repeat the steps from step 1 for each unit.
- Auto: Output data using the format of the
referenced result data.

1-302 XG-X Comm-US

Detailed Setting of Non-protocol Communication

Control/Data Output via No protocol communication

According to your implementation environment, the trigger • The response for the command input from
Point
command response of the controller can be changed to ActiveX is neither in accordance with the
the format compatible with the CV-3000/5000 series Ethernet settings nor RS-232C settings.
controller and the data delimiter for custom instructions • When multiple capture units are provided and
the flow is changed by several inputs of
can be changed to a desired character.
triggers, the data output unit adds "T1," to the
head in the CV compatible mode whatever
number of times T1 to T4 are input (Although
Processing the trigger command there is no individual trigger response, error
response for T1 to T4 is individually returned).
response in CV compatible mode • Even in the CV compatible mode, when
[Execute] of the data output unit is [Never
The trigger command response can be changed to the
Execute] or when the data output unit is not
format compatible with the CV-3000/5000 series controller. executed once as the result of flow branching,
When the XG-X series controller is implemented in the response for T1 to T4 is not returned.
inspection that has used a CV-3000/5000 series controller, • When the CV compatible mode is enabled, the
setting changes on other devices on the line can be following are set.
- The start delimiter is fixed to [None]. The end
minimized.
delimiter can be set to either [CR] or [CR+LF].
(The delimiter setting for each function is
disabled.)
Operation in CV compatible mode - The [Delimiter] setting for the custom
instruction setting and the output unit of result
Operating conditions data are disabled. ([Comma] is always
applied as the data delimiter.)
When the conditions below are satisfied, the system
operates in the mode compatible with the CV-3000/5000
series controller (CV compatible mode).
• [CV Compatible Trigger Response] is valid.
• The data output unit in which RS-232C or Ethernet is
specified as the output device is available (One or more
output items are specified in the data output unit
concerned).

Trigger command response in CV compatible mode

The CV compatible mode operates as follows:
• With any input from T1 to T4, response as T1 is given.
• "T1," is output from the data output unit.
- "T1<Specified delimiter>" is given and output.
- Even when the trigger is input through any route such
as terminal input, ActiveX, internal trigger, etc.,
"T1<Specified delimiter>" is given and output.
• In error response, response of "ER,T1,**" is given for any
of T1 to T4.

XG-X Comm-US 1-303

Detailed Setting of Non-protocol Communication

To change the setting in XG-X VisionEditor To change the settings with the controller
Check the [CV Compatible Trigger Response] option on Check [CV Compatible Trigger Response] on the [RS-
the [RS-232C] screen and [Ethernet] screen in the system 232C] screen and [Ethernet] screen in the Global settings.
settings.
When the system settings are uploaded, the CV
Point
compatible mode settings are always uploaded to
the controller regardless of whether or not [Include
controller name and Ethernet settings] is selected.

1-304 XG-X Comm-US

Detailed Setting of Non-protocol Communication

Control/Data Output via No protocol communication

Specifying a desired data delimiter To change the settings with the controller
of the custom command Change settings in the [Delimiter] field on the [Custom
Instruction Settings] screen in the Global settings.
When a custom instruction is executed with its name in
non-protocol communication (Ethernet and RS-232C), a
desired data delimiter can be specified for the custom
instruction.

Delimiter which can be specified

• Comma (default): Comma is output as the delimiter.
• Tab: Tab is output as the delimiter.
• Space: Space (blank) is output as the delimiter.
• ASCII Code: The desired ASCII code value is output as
the delimiter.
If the following errors occur due to input of the
Point
built-in command, the delimiter set here is applied.
• 02: Command error (There is no applicable
command.)
• 91: Time out error

To change the setting in XG-X VisionEditor

Change settings in the [Delimiter] field on the [Custom
Instruction] screen in the system settings.

XG-X Comm-US 1-305

Troubleshooting

Error Messages

Error Messages Assigned to System Variable %Error0.

The error messages below are assigned to %Error0 by default.
The errors assigned to %Error0 can be removed or switched to %Error1 as desired.

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective Action
Code
Ethernet cable is not An error occurred with the LAN cable • Make sure the LAN cable is connected to the
connected. when using Ethernet as the destination controller and the PC.
for a data output unit. • Make sure there are no problems (kinks, breaks
etc) with the Ethernet or USB cable. 144
• Check the LAN cable type (cross, straight).
• Make sure the orange LED connection indicator
of the Ethernet connector is lit.
Ethernet communication has An error occurred in the Ethernet • Check whether the PC / PLC at the other end of
failed. connection when using Ethernet as the the connection is ready to transmit/receive data.
destination for a data output unit. • Check that the communication software for 145
Ethernet is running on the PC / PLC and that the
PC / PLC is connected with the controller.
An Ethernet communication Ethernet communication has been down • Check whether the PC / PLC at the other end of
time out error has occurred. for 10 or more seconds when using the connection is ready to transmit/receive data.
Ethernet as the destination for a data • Check that the communication software for 146
output unit. Ethernet is running on the PC / PLC and that the
PC / PLC is connected with the controller.
An RS-232C communication RS-232C communication has been down • Make sure flow control is not set to [Enable] in
time out error has occurred. for 60 or more seconds when using RS- the RS-232C settings.
232C as the destination for a data output • Make sure hardware flow control is not enabled 162
unit. on the PC / PLC.
• Make sure the serial cable is not disconnected.

1-306 XG-X Comm-US

Troubleshooting

Control/Data Output via No protocol communication

Errors Messages not Assigned to System Variables %Error0 or %Error1
These errors by default are not assigned to %Error0 or %Error1 but can be assigned through the XG-X Vision Editor
software.

Error Message Cause Corrective Action Error

Code
External command error has An error occurred when executing a Review the command being sent, the program
occurred. command from one of these devices: settings or the device status.
• PC Program
• PLC-Link
• Ethernet
• RS-232C 128
• CC-Link
• Parallel Port
• EtherNet/IP
• PROFINET
• EtherCAT
Unable to write to Ethernet The controller output buffer for outputting Reduce the amount of data to be output via
output buffer. via the Ethernet port is full. Ethernet, so the data is output at a faster rate than
it builds up. Or extend the time between triggers / 147
processing to allow for data to be output. Note:
Results data are not written when the buffer is full.
Ethernet output buffer is full. The controller output buffer for outputting Reduce the amount of data to be output via
via the Ethernet port is full. Ethernet, so the data is output at a faster rate than
it builds up. Or extend the time between triggers /
148
processing to allow for data to be output. Note:
Inspections processing can be put on hold until
the buffer becomes free.
Unable to write to RS-232C The controller output buffer for outputting Reduce the amount of data to be output via RS-
output buffer. via the RS-232C port is full. 232C, so the data is output at a faster rate than it
builds up. Or extend the time between triggers / 163
processing to allow for data to be output. Note:
Results data are not written when the buffer is full.
RS-232C output buffer is full. The controller output buffer for outputting Reduce the amount of data to be output via RS-
via the RS-232C port is full. 232C, so the data is output at a faster rate than it
builds up. Or extend the time between triggers /
164
processing to allow for data to be output. Note:
Inspections processing can be put on hold until
the buffer becomes free.

XG-X Comm-US 1-307

FTP client/server function Using the FTP Client/
Server functions
The FTP (File Transfer Protocol) client/server function allows
access via the Ethernet interface to an FTP server
(VisionDataStorage or PC, a network-enabled hard disk with
FTP server capability) and is used for various purposes
including the following.
Overview of System Control/
Data Output
Outputting archived data with the FTP
Control/Data Output via Client Function (Page 1-309)
External Terminals Files can be outputted to an FTP server by specifying
[FTP] as the output destination for archived data (images
and results) which was stored with the archive function on
Control/Data Output via
the controller.
PLC-Link Files can also be output to an FTP server that supports
SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol).
Control/Data Output via
CC-Link
Directly access the controller’s SD card
Control/Data Output via from an external FTP client via the FTP
EtherNet/IP server function (Page 1-313)
By causing the controller to function as an FTP server, the
Control/Data Output via controller’s SD card can be directly accessed from an
external FTP client so that files can be sent and received,
PROFINET
and deleted, and folders can be created/deleted.

Control/Data Output via

EtherCAT

Control/Data Output via

No protocol communication

q FTP Client/Server Function

1-308 XG-X Comm-US

Outputting Archived Data with the FTP Client Function

FTP client/server function

Files can be outputted to an FTP server by specifying
[FTP] as the output destination for images and data when Changing the FTP Settings on the
using the image archive function on the controller. Controller
Additionally, it can be specified as the output destination
for the desired measurement results from the data output Specify the settings of the FTP server to which the data will
unit and image data of the image variable from the image be output.
output unit. Reference These settings are shared with the FTP server
settings for the master OK/NG images in retest
• This function supports output of measurement
Point mode. For more details on retest mode, refer to the
result data, image data of image variables and
XG-X Series User's Manual.
archive data (archive images and archive result
data). The output of other data and files is not
supported. To output result files and large image
files, an FTP server that supports the APPE Before changing the settings
command is required.
Configure the FTP server and obtain the following setting
• Other than PCs, a commercially-available
network-enabled hard disk called NAS (Network parameters.
Attached Storage) can be used as an FTP • IP address of the FTP server: The address must be
server to receive data, as long as it has FTP unique on the network including the controller.
server capability. To output result files and large • User name to log in to the FTP server
image files, a NAS that supports the APPE
• Password to log in to the FTP server
command is required. Regarding the availability
of FTP server functionality and APPE command
• Home directory of the logged in user
support, check with the NAS manufacturer.
• If a firewall is present on the FTP server or the
network of the FTP server, the connection may Changing the settings
fail. In this case, you need to disable the firewall
or take other measures. For details, consult the
network administrator or manufacturer of the 1 Select [Other Settings] - [Target Server Settings] -
PC. [FTP] from the [Various Settings] menu on the
• Data output using the FTP client function can be [Program Setting] tab.
used in conjunction with any other The [Target FTP Server Settings] menu appears.
communication methods, including those that
use the Ethernet port. If data is output using
several different methods, the communication 2 Enter [Server IP Address], [User ID] and [Password]
speed of the controller may be slow in used to log in, and then click [OK].
comparison with the output speed when using a Confirm settings of the target FTP server before entering
single method. the parameters (default: 192.168.0.30 for the server IP
For more details on the archive function, refer to the
address, anonymous for the user name and a blank
Reference
XG-X VisionEditor Reference Manual. space for the password).

XG-X Comm-US 1-309

Outputting Archived Data with the FTP Client Function

For the address of the FTP server, specify a

3 When necessary, change the detailed FTP settings
Point
unique value among other IP addresses on by selecting [System Settings] from the [Various
the network including the controller IP Settings] menu on the [Program Setting] tab.
address displayed in the menu (default: When the [System Settings] menu appears, select
192.168.0.10). [Communications & I/O] - [FTP] in the left pane to
• Use [Ping] and [Check Login] to check the display the FTP client settings.
Reference
connection to and login on the FTP server
set with [Server IP Address].
• To set the controller IP address and other
Ethernet port settings, select
[Communications & I/O] - [Ethernet (TCP/
IP)] in the left pane of the [System Settings]
menu. See the XG-X VisionEditor Reference
Manual for more details.

Specify FTP Output Base Path

When the option is checked, the base path for FTP
output can be specified.
Reference In normal situations, it is unnecessary to
Note that the base path specified here applies to all
change the default values.
FTP outputs such as archive output, result output (data
and image) and target classification output. Timeout
Enter the timeout period in seconds to wait for a response
Create Sub Folder with Controller Identifier
from the FTP server during data output (default: 5 seconds).
Select the subfolder name for controller identification
Connection retry count
from the format below.
Enter the number of attempts to log in when
• None (default): Subfolder is not created.
• IP address: Uses the controller IP address as the
connection to the FTP server fails (default: 1).
subfolder name. Server port No.
• %ControllerId: The content of system variable Enter the port number of the FTP server used for
%ControllerId is used as the subfolder name. control (default: 21 [22 when using SFTP]).
• Controller Name: The controller name is used as the
subfolder name. The controller name can be specified by Passive mode
[System Settings] - [Controller Name] in the system Click to check this option when using FTP in passive
settings (for XG VisionEditor) or [System Settings] - mode (default: ON (Passive mode)).
[Controller Name] in Setup mode (for controller).
SFTP
• PROFINET Device Name: The PROFINET device name is
used as the subfolder name. Note that the subfolder Select this check box when using SFTP transmission
specified here applies to all FTP outputs such as archive (default: OFF).
output, result output (data and image), and target • When using SFTP, it is recommended to
Point
classification output. disable the FTP server function (Page 1-
313) to further increase security.
• If [Controller Name] is selected without
Point • When the [SFTP] check box is selected,
setting of the controller name, the subfolder
the default [Server Port No.] setting
is not created and the action is the same as changes to 22.
[None]. • FTP output to a VisionDataStorage is not
• When using SFTP (Page 1-310), only ASCII supported for SFTP transmission. When using
characters can be used. SFTP with a VisionDataStorage, use the
dedicated USB cable (OP-88263: sold
Set as Recipe Target separately) for output to the VisionDataStorage.
If checked, the FTP output base path settings can be
set to be recipe targets. Refer to the XG-X VisionEditor
Reference Manual for more details on the recipe High speed mode
functions. Increases the processing priority of the FTP client and
increases the data output speed. (default: OFF).
When high speed mode is enabled, the
Point
response time for screen updates and other
operations may be slower than when high
speed mode is disabled.

1-310 XG-X Comm-US

Outputting Archived Data with the FTP Client Function

FTP client/server function

3 In [Output Location] on the [Archive Conditions]
Changing the Archive Function tab, specify [FTP] as the output destination.
Settings on the Controller This allows the controller to automatically output
archived image and result data to the FTP server when
Specify the FTP server as the output destination to store the archive condition is satisfied.
archived data.

Reference This section explains procedures from the state 4 When necessary, change the output destination in
where setting of archive data storage settings on the FTP server on the [Output Settings] tab.
the controller has been completed. For more details
on the archive function, see the XG-X VisionEditor
Reference Manual.

1 Select [Image Archive] from the [Various Settings]

menu on the [Program Setting] tab.
The [Image Archive] screen appears.

Destination
Specify the path to the folder to output archived data
from the location immediately below the home
directory of the FTP server (default: xg\hist\).
• When you use the Buffalo NAS, the
Point
connection may fail unless the path to the
2 Select the number of the archive condition to destination folder is specified in a specific
output archived data, and then click [Edit]. format in accordance with the product
The [No.X] screen appears. specifications. The recommended format is
as follows. Contact the manufacturer of
your NAS for details.
Recommended format (for Buffalo TS
Series)
mnt\array1\[Home directory of NAS]\xg\hist
(Example when a folder named xgx2000 is
specified to be accessible via FTP in NAS:
mnt\array1\xgx2000\xg\hist)
• When using SFTP (Page 1-310), only ASCII
characters can be used.

XG-X Comm-US 1-311

Outputting Archived Data with the FTP Client Function

New folder rule • When the sequential number exceeds the

Point
This rule is for creating new folders for saving archive data. limit, the count rolls over to 0. This may
• None: The archive data is saved in a specified result in old output data files being
destination folder without separating new folders. overwritten if the new folder rule is set to
• Date: The archive data is saved in a folder created [None] or [Date], or if the number of
images set for [No. Images] is greater than
below the specified destination folder when each output
the maximum serial number. Note that if
begins. Folders are named [No.]_[YYMMDD]. When the you select [Specified] and do not change
date changes, a new folder is created and this becomes the file name every time you save a file, the
the new destination folder for archive data. existing file will be overwritten.
• No. Images: The archived data is saved in a folder Furthermore, note that even if you are
outputting multiple image variables, the file
created below the specified destination folder.
is overwritten resulting in that you can only
Folders are named [No.]_[YYMMDD]_[HHMMSS].
output one image.
When the number of images in the folder reaches • When using SFTP (Page 1-310), only ASCII
the specified limit, a new folder is created and this characters can be used.
becomes the new destination folder for archive data.
Reference If [Sequential] is specified, the fixed name can
If you select [None] and continue to save a be rewritten to desired characters with the OW
Point
large number of files to the same folder, command (Page 2-76).
saving may be time-consuming.
Image format
File naming rule This specifies the file format for saving the image data.
These are rules for naming files when saved. • BMP: Outputs the image as a Windows bitmap file
• Auto: Files are named automatically with the date (24-bit color: color camera, 8-bit gray scale:
and time when the data was output, monochrome camera).
[YYMMDD]_[HHMMSS]_[Count]_[No.].extension • BMP (1/2-pixel Resolution): Outputs the image as
(bmp/jpg/png (image file) and hst (results file)). a Windows bitmap file, reducing the number of
• Sequential: The files are named as vertical and horizontal pixels to 1/2 (24-bit color:
[Sequential_fixed name_image bmp/jpg/png] color camera, 8-bit gray scale: monochrome
(image file) and [Sequential_fixed name.hst] (results camera).
file). Specify the maximum number of images in the • BMP (1/4-pixel Resolution): Outputs the image as
[Sequence Limit] field, and a fixed name to use in a Windows bitmap file, reducing the number of
the [Fixed Name] field. Each field may contain no vertical and horizontal pixels to 1/4 (24-bit color:
more than 32 characters. color camera, 8-bit gray scale: monochrome
• Specified: Files are named as [Fixed camera).
Name].extension (bmp/jpg/png (image file) and hst • BMP (1/8-pixel Resolution): Outputs the image as
(results file)). For [Fixed Name], you can enter up to a Windows bitmap file, reducing the number of
64 half-width alphanumeric characters. vertical and horizontal pixels to 1/8 (24-bit color:
• Custom: Click [Edit File Name] to display the [Edit color camera, 8-bit gray scale: monochrome
File Name] screen and use [Measured Value & camera).
Variable], [Date & Time], [String], [Externally • JPG: Outputs the image as a JPEG file.
Specified String], and [Image Identifier] to edit the • PNG: Outputs the image as a PNG file.
format of the output file name. For more details, see
the XG-X VisionEditor Reference Manual.
5 Click [OK].

1-312 XG-X Comm-US

Using Controller as FTP Server (FTP server function)

FTP client/server function

This function allows the controller to function as an FTP Allow anonymous user
server, enabling you to directly access the controller's SD Check this option when allowing the access of
card from an external FTP client and send, receive, or anonymous users (default: disabled).
delete files, or create or delete folders. When anonymous users access the controller,
Reference
they cannot manipulate files and folders
• To access the controller from an FTP client, use
Point located in the controller nor transfer files to the
the user account and password set with
controller. (Only file retrieval is allowed.)
[Account Settings] under [Other Settings].
• When an FTP client accesses the controller, the Listen Port
default folder is [/SD1/]. To access SD2, directly Enter the port number opened for FTP clients (default:
enter [/SD2/].
21).
• USB HDD cannot be used.
• If a file or folder name is not comprised of To ensure that the change to your [Listen Port]
Point
alphanumeric characters, accessing it may fail. setting takes effect, reboot the controller.
• Up to two users are allowed to access
simultaneously.
• This function does not affect measurements.
4 Click [OK].

• The FTP server function and FTP client function

can be used simultaneously. However, when
using SFTP with the FTP client function (Page 1-
309), it is recommended to disable the FTP
server function to increase security.

1 Select [System Settings] from the [Various Settings]

menu on the [Program Setting] tab.
The [System Settings] screen is displayed.

2 In the left pane of the [System Settings] menu,

select [FTP].
The FTP menu appears.

3 Change the settings as required.

Enable Controller FTP Server Function

Check this option when using the controller as the FTP
server (default: enabled).
To ensure that the change to your [Enable
Point
Controller FTP Server Function] setting takes
effect, reboot the controller.

XG-X Comm-US 1-313

Troubleshooting

Error Messages

Error Messages Assigned to System Variable %Error0.

The errors messages below are assigned to %Error0 by default.
The errors assigned to %Error0 can be removed or switched to %Error1 as desired.

Error
Error Message Cause Corrective Action
Code
Failed to connect to FTP The FTP server is not operating. Make sure the PC and FTP server on the NAS
server. device (network archived storage) are configured
and operating correctly.
An error occurred in the LAN connection • Make sure the Ethernet cable is connected to
with the FTP server. the controller and the PC or the NAS device
(network archived storage) running the FTP
server.
• Make sure the Ethernet cable is not 224
disconnected.
• Check the Ethernet cable type (cross,
straight).
• Make sure the orange LED indicator
(connection) of the Ethernet connector is lit.
The IP address for the FTP server is Check the server IP address settings in the FTP
incorrect. server (Page 1-309).
Failed to login to FTP server. The user ID and/or password for logging Make sure the user ID and password specified in
in to the FTP server is incorrect. the FTP server settings match the same settings
defined in the FTP server (Page 1-309).
225
Connecting by SFTP failed. The user ID and password for the SFTP Check the SFTP connection settings (connection-
server have been set correctly, but the permitted IP address, user ID, etc.) with the SFTP
SFTP connection failed. server administrator or the network administrator.
FTP data output time out error The controller logged in and began • Check the connection between the controller
has occurred. writing a file but was unable to complete and the NAS device (network archived
the process with a specified time. storage) running the FTP server software. 226
• Make sure the FTP server is operating
correctly.
Failed to create file / folder on The controller was able to log into the • Make sure the user account has write
FTP server. FTP server, but was not able to create a privileges on the FTP server.
file. • Check the available disk space on the NAS
device (network archived storage) running
the FTP server software.
• Check the connection between the controller
and the NAS device (network archived 227
storage) running the FTP server software.
• Make sure the FTP server is operating
correctly.
APPE command failed when attempting To output the result data of the defect
to output the results of the target classification, the FTP server must support the
classification to the FTP server. APPE command.

1-314 XG-X Comm-US

Chapter
2

Commands
Commands

Documentation for the installation and configuration methods

of the controller, software, and CAD data can be downloaded
from the following URL.
www.keyence.com/xgxus

XG-X Comm-US 2-1

Control via commands Overview of Control
via Commands
You can use no protocol communication with an external
device, such as a PC, via Ethernet or RS-232C to control
the system and output data via commands. Although the
commands are common for communication via the
external terminals, PLC link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
q Control via commands
PROFINET, EtherCAT, and command execution unit, the
available commands vary depending on the device and
operation mode.

Command Type
The following two types of commands can be used for the
controller and XG-X VisionEditor.

Standard instruction (Page 2-9)

The standard instructions are used for basic input/output
operation and are provided by default.

Custom instruction (Page 2-112)

A custom instruction is defined as a set of standard
instructions. It can be defined according to use such as
assigning several commands to one custom instruction for
sequential execution, or specifying fixed values for some
command parameters to skip input.

2-2 XG-X Comm-US

Overview of Control via Commands

Command execution when retesting (online)

Notes on command input/output

Control via commands

• Commands issued from the command execution unit
in the retest flow: Not executed.
• Commands that can be executed from the command
Command execution times execution unit in the main measurement flow: In
The command execution times fluctuate depending upon accordance with run mode in "Command List (Available
the image processing loads and the kinds of operations to Operation vs. Situation)" (Page 2-9). However, the
the controller at those times. For applications such as following commands give an error:
those where the next inspection is set to wait for command BC, BU, CL, DC, DO, ECU, ECV, FNW, FT, FV, FW, GW, HC,
completion before starting, be mindful of the fluctuations in HS, ICU, ICV, KY, PMW, PN, PRW, PV, PW, R0, RPN, RPT,
wait time. RPW, S0, SC, SS, UC, UW, VW, WI, ZM
• Commands that can be executed via no protocol,
PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET,
Command execution EtherCAT, and external terminals: In accordance with
run mode in "Command List (Available Operation vs.
Operation mode Situation)" (Page 2-9). However, the following
The command availability for each operation mode (run, commands give an error:
setup mode) and device varies depending on the BPL, BPW, CL, DDF, ECU, ECV, FNR, FNW, HC, HS, ICU,
command. See "Command List (Available Operation vs. ICV, PMW, PN, PRW, PW, R0, RPN, RPT, RPW, S0, SS,
Situation)" (Page 2-9) for more details. UC
• Commands that can be executed from the handheld
Command execution when retesting (offline)
controller/dialog: In accordance with run mode in
• Commands that can be executed via no protocol,
"Command List (Available Operation vs. Situation)"
PLC link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT
(Page 2-9). However, the following commands give an
and external terminal: In accordance with the setup
error:
mode in "Command List (Available Operation vs.
BPL, BPW, BS, CA, CD, CL, CPW, CW, DDF, DSR, DSW,
Situation)" (Page 2-9). However, the following
ECU, ECV, FNW, HC, HS, ICU, ICV, LK, OE, OPW, OW,
commands give an error:
PMW, PN, PRW, PW, R0, RPN, RPT, RPW, RS, RU, S0,
Mode Control related commands (R0/S0), System
SS, STR, STW, TE, UC, WO, WP
control related commands (WG), 3D related commands
• The following commands are executed relative to the
(XTC)
setting content of the retest flow.
• Commands that can be executed from the command
Data input/output-related commands (MW, MS, IW, IS),
execution unit : In accordance with the setup mode
system control-related commands (UT, NU, NW, UE, TG,
under Command Execution Unit in "Command List
AT), and utility-related commands (TC, TS)
(Available Operation vs. Situation)" (Page 2-9). However,
commands that cannot be executed on the XG-X
VisionEditor simulation availability and XTC commands
will not execute.
• Commands that can be executed from the handheld
controller / dialog: In accordance with the setup mode in
"Command List (Available Operation vs. Situation)" (Page 2-
9). However, the following commands give an error:
Mode Control related commands (R0/S0), System control
related commands (WG), 3D related commands (XTC)

XG-X Comm-US 2-3

Overview of Control via Commands

Command execution during mode transition

Restrictions on parameters
• If a command is issued during mode transition, the
command is placed on stand-by and executed once the Specification of variables and parameters
mode has transitioned. Operation availability is • Variables and values can be used for parameter where
determined by the mode during execution and an error numerical values are allowed.
is returned if operation is not possible. • For a scalar variable, some parameters may need to be
• Only the following commands can be executed during specified:
retest changeover and all other commands return an - Example 1: To use the X coordinate of a circle type
error. global variable "$c" as a parameter, specify "$c.CX".
- Mode transition during retesting (offline): Trigger- - Example 2: To use an element of a scalar array type local
related commands (T1 to T8, TA) variable "#a" as a parameter, specify "#a[10]".
- Mode transition during retesting (online): Trigger- • The values of system variables cannot be changed
related commands (T1 to T8, TA), Console virtual input except in the instance where WP or WO command is
(KY), Echo (EC), Cancel stand-by (WG), Data input/ used.
output-related commands (MR, IR, MW*, MS*, IW*, IS*, • The setting parameters and result data cannot be used.
MRX, IRX, MWX, MSX, IWX, ISX, RP, WP, WO)
*If the command issuing device is the handheld controller/ Restriction on characters
dialog, an error will be returned. • Control codes other than "," (comma), ";" (semicolon),
• Command execution while the program is being "CR" (carriage return), and "LF" (line feed) cannot be
changed: Although commands issued while the used.
program is being changed will give an error, commands • If it is necessary to input "," (comma) which is the
issued after the program change has been completed delimiter of the command for the string argument of a
will be executed. command, input "', " (quotation + comma).
• Command execution during simulation: Differs
depending on the command. For details, see Restriction on symbols (External terminals, PLC link,
"Command List (Available Operation vs. Situation)" CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT)
(Page 2-9). The following restrictions are imposed on character strings
• Command execution while retest measurements are regarded as symbols (character strings used for command
being carried out: The following commands return an parameters other than numerical values, such as NX or
error. AL).
Reset (RS), Restart (RB) • When a command is executed via PLC link, CC-Link,
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, symbols cannot be
sent from the PLC.
• To use symbols, you need to define them in a custom
instruction in advance. To use a symbol differently,
switch between those custom instructions already
defined.

Restriction on the number of parameters (External

terminals)
• When a command is executed via the external terminal,
%CmdParam shall be the first parameter.
• To use two or more parameters, assign system variables
%InDataAsyncA through H to the terminals, and define
the names of variables in a custom instruction.

2-4 XG-X Comm-US

Overview of Control via Commands

Operation when parameters are less than those

Password handling
required for command input (CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,

Control via commands

PROFINET, EtherCAT) Passwords are accepted as "single-byte alphanumeric
For control via the CC-Link, if the command area size for characters and symbols (4 to 32 digits)".
RWw is insufficient for the parameters required by a
Passwords are handled differently by commands
command, the parameters with no area assigned are Point
depending on their type.
assumed to have a value of 0 during the command • When the password is set as "single-byte
execution. If the command area size in the output data alphanumeric characters and symbols (4 to 32
area of the EtherNet/IP, PROFINET or EtherCAT is digits)":
insufficient for the parameters required by a command, a - A double quotation mark (") needs to be
parameter error occurs. placed before the password because it is
treated as a character string.
Maximum number of characters - If "," or ";" is used in a password, it is
Up to 256 characters can be entered in one instruction recognized as a "separator of the command"
and "delimiter of the command" respectively
(excluding line feed codes).
when such a password is entered via an
external command and does not properly
function. However, by specifying "ASCII Code"
Value output format for reading commands for a delimiter of custom instruction settings
and setting 0x3B (";") as the value, it can be
Basic format policy
set so that ";" will not be recognized as a
Output values are unsigned, meaning they will always have a termination character of a command.
positive value. Only the output values which may take - If a password of "single-byte alphanumeric
negative values are signed (even when the value is positive). characters and symbols (4 to 32 digits)" is
• Integer digits: The integer digits are set to the minimum changed as an argument of PLC-Link, CC-
number to output the maximum output value. Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, the
• Decimal places: Generally, no decimal places are used. command is executed assuming that two
words (32 bits) of the data memory contain
If the decimal value in an output value is significant, six
one character. In this case, you do not need to
decimal places are set.
provide a double quotation mark (").
Although the possible range of program number • When the password is set as "single-byte
Point
and unit ID's is from 0 to 999, these values are alphanumeric characters(4 digits:0000 to
exceptions and are output in four integer digits. 9999)":
- Scalar type variable can be used for the
Restrictions on the number of digits for specifying password parameter.
numerical values In this case, you do not need to provide a
The following restrictions are imposed on the command double quotation mark (").
input format:
Commands which use the administrator password
• Values available for integer input
The administrator password is used as the User Account 0
- Signed
- 10 integer digits password.
• Values available for decimal input • If the command matches the User Account 0 password,
- Signed it is executable.
- 10 integer digits • If User Account 0 does not exist, the command is always
- 6 decimal places not executable.

When a decimal value is specified for a command

Point
argument other than MW or MS, the value is
rounded off to the nearest integer before
processing.

XG-X Comm-US 2-5

Overview of Control via Commands

Controller reset/Program change Registration Numbers of Images Captured

If a command is input but the controller is reset or the with LumiTrax mode/LumiTrax Specular
program is changed before the command is executed, the Reflection Mode
command operation is terminated with an 03 error.
The registered image number [(Camera No.) - (Specified
No.)] becomes as follows when registering images that are
captured with LumiTrax mode/LumiTrax Specular
When an error occurs on command
Reflection mode.
acceptance
When LumiTrax mode/LumiTrax Specular Reflection
An error response "ER, **, nn" will be returned.
mode is used and the image variables that are the
The error response consists of the following information:
targets of batch registration are specified
• **: Received command that caused the error
The images are registered all at once in the registered
• nn: 2-digit error code
image number ranges below.
- 02: Command error (The received command is
For images captured with LumiTrax mode:
invalid.)
• Normal Image: 000 to 099
- 03: Command action disabled (The received
• Shape Image 1: 200 to 299
command cannot work.)
• Shape Image 2: 300 to 399
- 22: Parameter error (The value of parameter data or
• Shape Image 3: 400 to 499
the number of data pieces is outside the range.)
• Texture Pattern Image: 500 to 599
- 80: Password error (The specified password does not
• Gradient X Image: 600 to 699
match.)
• Gradient Y Image: 700 to 799
- 81: Command acceptance disabled (The command
For images captured with LumiTrax Specular Reflection mode:
was received while the device cannot accept it.)
• Normal Image: 000 to 099
- 91: Timeout error
• Specular Reflection Image: 200 to 299
Reference • For control via PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, • Diffuse Reflection Image: 300 to 399
PROFINET, or EtherCAT, only error codes are
• Shape Image 1: 400 to 499
received.
• Shape Image 2: 500 to 599
• Error codes are not output when controlled via
the external terminals. • Phase X Image: 600 to 699
• Phase Y Image: 700 to 799
• Gloss Ratio Image: 800 to 899
Restrictions on commands related to For more details on the type of the images captured with
registered image Nos. LumiTrax mode/LumiTrax Specular Reflection mode, see
the XG-X Series User's Manual.
• Registered images can be specified using the numbers
ranging from 000 to 999. However, available numbers Registration example:
for images of 3D cameras or the LJ-X/LJ-V are restricted When only the normal image, shape image 1, and texture
as follows. pattern image are enabled as the image types to be
acquired with LumiTrax mode and when the images are
Type of image variables Available registered
registered to the registered image number 3, three images
image Nos.
are registered as shown below.
Other than resultant image 000 to 499
• Normal Image: 003
Resultant image 500 to 999
• Shape Image 1: 203
• For the capture unit, specifying image variables for • Texture Pattern Image: 503
height and grayscale images allows both images to be
saved. In this case, the grayscale image is saved with When Standard Lighting mode is used or when the
the No. of a specified registered image No. + 500. image variables that are not the targets of batch
registration are specified
Only one image is registered to a range from 000 to 999 in
the conventional way.

2-6 XG-X Comm-US

Overview of Control via Commands

Registration Numbers of Images Captured Registration numbers of images captured

Control via commands

with MultiSpectrum Mode with 3D Capture mode
When registering images captured with MultiSpectrum When registering images captured with 3D Capture mode,
mode, they are each given a registration number [(Camera they are each given a registration number [(Camera No.) -
No.) - (Specified No.)] as follows. (Specified No.)] as follows.

When MultiSpectrum mode is used and the image When the image variables that are the targets of batch
variables that are the targets of batch registration are registration are specified
specified The images are registered all at once in the 2 types of
The images are registered all at once in the 9 types of registered image number ranges below.
registered image number ranges below. • Grayscale/Color Image: 000 to 399
• Average Grayscale Image: 000 to 099 • Height Image: 500 to 899
• UV (Ultraviolet) Image: 100 to 199 For more details on these types of images, see the XG-X
• B (Blue) Image: 200 to 299 Series User’s Manual.
• G (Green) Image: 300 to 399
• AM (Amber) Image: 400 to 499 Registration example:
• R (Red) Image: 500 to 599 When 3D Capture mode is used and images are registered
• FR (Farred) Image: 600 to 699 to registered image number 3, two images are registered
• IR (Infrared) Image: 700 to 799 as shown below.
• W (White) Image: 800 to 899 • Grayscale/Color Image: 003
For more details on the type of the images captured with • Height Image: 503
MultiSpectrum mode, see the XG-X Series User's Manual.
When the image variables that are not the targets of
Registration example: batch registration are specified
When only the R image, G image, and B image are Only one image is registered to a range from 000 to 999 in
enabled as the image types to be acquired with the conventional way.
MultiSpectrum mode and when the images are registered
to the registered image number 3, four images are
registered as shown below.
• Average Grayscale Image: 003
• R Image: 503
• G Image: 303
• B Image: 203

When Standard Lighting mode is used or when the

image variables that are not the targets of batch
registration are specified
Only one image is registered to a range from 000 to 999 in
the conventional way.

XG-X Comm-US 2-7

Overview of Control via Commands

Registration numbers of images captured

with Outline Capture mode
When registering images captured with Outline Capture
mode, they are each given a registration number [(Camera
No.) - (Specified No.)] as follows.

When the image variables that are the targets of batch

registration are specified
The images are registered all at once in the 4 types of
registered image number ranges below.
• Grayscale/Color Image: 000 to 099
• Texture Pattern Image: 200 to 299
• Profile Image: 300 to 399
• Profile Composite Image: 400 to 499
For more details on these types of images, see the XG-X
Series User’s Manual.

Registration example:
When Outline Capture mode is used and images are
registered to registered image number 3, four images are
registered as shown below.
• Normal Image: 003
• Texture Pattern Image: 203
• Profile Image: 303
• Profile Composite Image: 403

When the image variables that are not the targets of

batch registration are specified
Only one image is registered to a range from 000 to 999 in
the conventional way.

2-8 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Command List (Available Operation vs. Situation)

Control via commands

 = Possible

Simulation
Availability by device
Supported version availability
PLC-Link/

Edit Simulation
No protocol
CC-Link/ Command Handheld

Simulator
Description Name (including External
EtherNet/IP/ Execution controller/
ActiveX no terminals
PROFINET/ Unit dialog
protocol)
EtherCAT
Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run
Cancel Auto Calibration
1.0 ACC       × ×  
(Page 2-90)
Execute Auto Calibration
1.0 ACE       × ×  
(Page 2-90)
Check Auto Calibration Result
1.0 ACR       × × × ×
(Page 2-90)
End Auto Calibration
1.0 ACS       × ×  
(Page 2-91)
Interrupt sectional inspection
2.3 ASI           
(Page 2-38)
Automatic tuning
1.0 AT           
(Page 2-38)
Capture image
1.0 BC           
(Page 2-66)
Load Setting in the Background
1.0 BPL ×  ×  ×  ×  × 
(Page 2-104)
Change Setting in the Background
1.0 BPW ×  ×  ×  ×  × 
(Page 2-106)
Register Image
1.0 BS            
(Page 2-22)
Execute Retest Images
2.8 BTE       × ×  
(Page 2-108)
Cancel Retest Images
2.8 BTC       × ×  
(Page 2-109)
Check Retest Images Result
2.8 BTR       × ×  
(Page 2-109)
Open Edit unit menu
1.0 BU ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-61)
Register character to library
1.0 CA            
(Page 2-34)
Custom instruction execution
1.0 CC   × × × ×      
(Page 2-96)
Delete character from library
1.0 CD            
(Page 2-35)
Clear error
1.0 CE            
(Page 2-26)
Change of the number of lines
1.0 CL ×  ×  ×  ×  × 
(Page 2-85)
Update Capture Position
1.0 CPW            
(Page 2-92)
Read REG
1.0 CR            
(Page 2-37)
Check Calibration Status
1.0 CSR       × ×  
(Page 2-91)
Write REG
1.0 CW            
(Page 2-36)
Read Z-direction Measurement
Range Center 2.6 CZR ×  ×  × × × × × ×
(Page 2-86)

XG-X Comm-US 2-9

Standard instruction

Simulation
Availability by device

Supported version
availability
PLC-Link/

Edit Simulation
No protocol
CC-Link/ Command Handheld

Simulator
Description Name (including External
EtherNet/IP/ Execution controller/
ActiveX no terminals
PROFINET/ Unit dialog
protocol)
EtherCAT
Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run
Change Z-direction
Measurement Range Center 2.6 CZW ×  ×  ×  ×  × 
(Page 2-86)
Close menu
1.0 DC           
(Page 2-59)
For VisionDatabase
Delete the output image 1.0 DDF          
(Page 2-92)
Open menu
1.0 DO ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-60)
Read menu ID
1.0 DR     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-61)
For VisionDatabase
Reading External Input String 1.0 DSR            
(Page 2-94)
For VisionDatabase
Change External Input String 1.0 DSW            
(Page 2-93)
Echo
1.0 EC   × × × × × × × ×
(Page 2-98)
Export Unit Settings CSV File
1.0 ECU           
(Page 2-100)
Export Variable Initial Values
CSV File 1.0 ECV           
(Page 2-102)
Read show/hide flowchart status
1.0 FI     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-84)
Read focus screen No.
1.0 FR ×  ×  × × × × × ×
(Page 2-53)
Fit
1.0 FT ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-56)
Show flowchart in run mode
1.0 FV ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-84)
Change focus screen
1.0 FW ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-52)
Read page No.
1.0 GR ×  ×  × × × × × ×
(Page 2-51)
Switch page No.
1.0 GW ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-50)
Clear archived data
1.0 HC           
(Page 2-64)
Start/stop archive
1.0 HE           
(Page 2-64)
Read archive status
1.0 HR     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-64)
Save archived data
1.0 HS           
(Page 2-65)
Import Unit Settings CSV File
1.0 ICU ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-99)
Import Variable Initial Values
CSV File 1.0 ICV           
(Page 2-101)
Integer read from variable
1.0 IR     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-42)

2-10 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Simulation
Availability by device

Supported version
availability

Control via commands

PLC-Link/

Edit Simulation
No protocol
CC-Link/ Command Handheld

Simulator
Description Name (including External
EtherNet/IP/ Execution controller/
ActiveX no terminals
PROFINET/ Unit dialog
protocol)
EtherCAT
Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run
Integer read from array variable
1.0 IRX × ×   × × × × × ×
(Page 2-49)
Simultaneous integer write to
variable 1.0 IS            
(Page 2-42)
Simultaneous integer write to
array variable 1.0 ISX × ×   × × × × × ×
(Page 2-48)
Integer write to variable
1.0 IW            
(Page 2-41)
Integer write to array variable
1.0 IWX × ×   × × × × × ×
(Page 2-47)
Console virtual input
1.0 KY         × × 
(Page 2-97)
Start/stop modification logging
1.0 LE          
(Page 2-66)
Enable/disable device input
1.0 LK           
(Page 2-17)
Read modification logging status
1.0 LQ     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-66)
Changing the measured value
before correction of measured
1.1 MCC           
value correction
(Page 2-94)
Measured value correction
reading 1.1 MCR     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-96)
Measured value correction writing
1.1 MCW           
(Page 2-95)
Read from variable
1.0 MR     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-41)
Read from array variable
1.0 MRX × ×   × × × × × ×
(Page 2-46)
Simultaneous write to variable
1.0 MS            
(Page 2-40)
Simultaneous write to array variable
1.0 MSX × ×   × × × × × ×
(Page 2-45)
Write to variable
1.0 MW            
(Page 2-39)
Write to array variable
1.0 MWX × ×   × × × × × ×
(Page 2-44)
Read registered image No.
1.0 NR     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-25)
Update referenced registered
image No. 1.0 NU            
(Page 2-25)
Write registered image No.
1.0 NW            
(Page 2-24)
Enable/disable output
1.0 OE            
(Page 2-18)
Read destination folder name
1.0 OPR            
(Page 2-82)
Rewrite destination folder name
1.0 OPW            
(Page 2-80)

XG-X Comm-US 2-11

Standard instruction

Simulation
Availability by device

Supported version
availability
PLC-Link/

Edit Simulation
No protocol
CC-Link/ Command Handheld

Simulator
Description Name (including External
EtherNet/IP/ Execution controller/
ActiveX no terminals
PROFINET/ Unit dialog
protocol)
EtherCAT
Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run
Read fixed name in file naming rule
1.0 OR            
(Page 2-78)
Change fixed name in file naming rule
1.0 OW            
(Page 2-76)
Copy program
1.0 PC           
(Page 2-75)
Delete program
1.0 PD           
(Page 2-76)
Move program
1.0 PM           
(Page 2-75)
Profile measurement item number
reading 1.1 PMR ×  ×  × × × × × ×
(Page 2-57)
Profile measurement item number
switching 1.1 PMW ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-57)
Change program name
1.0 PN           
(Page 2-32)
Program No. readout
1.0 PR     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-21)
Profile result display condition
reading 1.1 PRR ×  ×  × × × × × ×
(Page 2-58)
Profile result display condition
switching 1.1 PRW ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-58)
Change password
1.0 PS            
(Page 2-67)
Display Profile
1.0 PV ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-67)
Switch program No.
1.0 PW           
(Page 2-20)
Switch to run mode
1.0 R0           
(Page 2-19)
Restart
1.0 RB       × ×  
(Page 2-22)
Return to beginning of flowchart
1.0 RE       × ×  
(Page 2-26)
Read image type
1.0 RI     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-54)
Read run/setup mode
1.0 RM     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-19)
Read from terminal variable
1.0 RP     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-43)
Copy Recipe
1.0 RPC           
(Page 2-88)
Delete Recipe
1.0 RPD           
(Page 2-89)
Move Recipe
1.0 RPM           
(Page 2-89)
Change Recipe Name
1.0 RPN           
(Page 2-89)
Read Recipe No.
1.0 RPR     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-88)

2-12 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Simulation
Availability by device

Supported version
availability

Control via commands

PLC-Link/

Edit Simulation
No protocol
CC-Link/ Command Handheld

Simulator
Description Name (including External
EtherNet/IP/ Execution controller/
ActiveX no terminals
PROFINET/ Unit dialog
protocol)
EtherCAT
Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run
Change Recipe No.
(Specify Recipe Name) 1.0 RPT           
(Page 2-87)
Change Recipe No.
(Specify Recipe No.) 1.0 RPW           
(Page 2-87)
Update position reference
1.0 RR            
(Page 2-27)
Reset
1.0 RS           
(Page 2-21)
Update image reference
1.0 RU            
(Page 2-28)
Switch to setup mode
1.0 S0           
(Page 2-19)
Scroll
1.0 SC ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-56)
Shading correction execution
1.0 SD       × ×  
(Page 2-30)
Shading correction value write
1.0 SE       × ×  
(Page 2-31)
Shading correction value read
1.0 SI       × ×  
(Page 2-31)
Shading correction reset
1.0 SR       × ×  
(Page 2-30)
Setting save
1.0 SS           
(Page 2-22)
Read externally specified string
2.5 STR            
(Page 2-83)
Change externally specified string
2.5 STW            
(Page 2-83)
Trigger 1
1.0 T1       × ×  
(Page 2-15)
Trigger 2
1.0 T2       × ×  
(Page 2-15)
Trigger 3
1.0 T3       × ×  
(Page 2-15)
Trigger 4
1.0 T4       × ×  
(Page 2-15)
Issue all triggers
1.0 TA       × ×   
(Page 2-15)
Statistics data clear
1.0 TC           
(Page 2-62)
Enable/disable trigger input
1.0 TE            
(Page 2-16)
Teaching
1.0 TG            
(Page 2-29)
Timer
1.0 TM × × × × × ×   × ×  
(Page 2-72)
Read trigger acceptance
1.0 TQ     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-16)
Read date/time
1.0 TR     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-72)
Save statistical data
1.0 TS           
(Page 2-63)

XG-X Comm-US 2-13

Standard instruction

Simulation
Availability by device

Supported version
availability
PLC-Link/

Edit Simulation
No protocol
CC-Link/ Command Handheld

Simulator
Description Name (including External
EtherNet/IP/ Execution controller/
ActiveX no terminals
PROFINET/ Unit dialog
protocol)
EtherCAT
Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run Setup Run
Write date/time
1.0 TW ×  ×  ×  ×  × 
(Page 2-71)
Read Time Zone
1.3 TZR     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-74)
Write Time Zone
1.3 TZW ×  ×  ×  ×  × 
(Page 2-73)
Add user account
1.0 UA           
(Page 2-69)
Change user login
1.0 UC ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-68)
Delete user account
1.0 UD           
(Page 2-70)
Reset unit after test
1.0 UE           
(Page 2-34)
Search Unit No.
1.0 UQ     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-99)
Read display unit ID
1.0 UR ×  ×  × × × × × ×
(Page 2-52)
Test unit
1.0 UT           
(Page 2-33)
Change display unit ID
1.0 UW ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-51)
Version information readout
1.0 VI     × × × × × ×
(Page 2-97)
Read display template ID
1.0 VR ×  ×  × × × × × ×
(Page 2-50)
Change display template ID
1.0 VW ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-49)
Waiting status release
1.0 WG       × ×  
(Page 2-27)
Read user account
1.0 WH   × × × × × × × ×
(Page 2-68)
Change image type
1.0 WI           
(Page 2-53)
Write terminal offset
1.0 WO            
(Page 2-43)
Write to terminal variable
1.0 WP            
(Page 2-43)
Execute 3D Calibration
(for XR camera) 1.0 XTC  ×  ×  ×  ×  ×
(Page 2-102)
Execute 3D Calibration
(for XT camera) 2.3 XCE  ×  ×  ×  ×  ×
(Page 2-103)
Zoom
1.0 ZM ×  ×  ×  ×  ×  
(Page 2-55)

2-14 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Trigger (T1 to T4/TA) TA: Issue All Triggers

Control via commands

This command issues all triggers T1 to T4.

T1 to T4: Issue Trigger Send TA

This command issues a specified trigger to the capture Receive TA

unit waiting for the trigger.

Send T1 Issue Trigger 1. Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time.
T2 Issue Trigger 2.
Even if some triggers were not used, an error
T3 Issue Trigger 3. Point
will not result.
T4 Issue Trigger 4.

Receive T1 Error Code

T2 • 03: The command was sent when all triggers
could not be accepted or when trigger input
T3
was disabled.
T4
(when all %Trg*Ready are not turned on).
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Reference If there is no capture unit waiting for the
trigger, a 03 error is returned. Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
Error Code command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• 03: The command was sent when triggers could not
be accepted or when trigger input was disabled
(when all %Trg*Ready are not turned on).
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-15

Standard instruction

Relationship to the flow editor and [Trigger On/Off]

I/O Control (TE/TQ/LK/OE) setting
• When [Trigger On/Off] is set to [Trigger Off]: During
edit operation, trigger input to the controller is
TE: Enable/Disable Trigger Input disabled regardless of the TE command and %Ext
When "TE,0" is sent, the Ready terminal (%Trg*Ready) is setting.
set to remain off and thus no trigger input will be accepted • When [Trigger On/Off] is set to [Trigger On]: During
(both internal and external triggers). edit operation, trigger input to the controller is
enabled or disabled depending on the relationship
Send TE,n
between the TE command and %Ext setting.
Receive TE

TQ: Read Trigger Acceptance

• n: Enable/disable settings
This command checks whether the controller accepts
1: Enable
trigger input or not.
0: Disable
Send TQ
Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time. Receive TQ,n

• When "TE,1" is sent, the terminal is reset to

Point
normal. n: Enabled/disabled status
• Even if "TE,1" is sent while the trigger input
1: Enabled
is enabled, or if "TE,0" is sent while the
trigger input is disabled, it is not 0: Disabled
considered an error.
• The trigger disabled status cannot be Reference This command does not affect the
stored in settings. measurement processing time.
• Trigger input is reset to be enabled when
the controller is turned off and on. Error Code
22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Error Code
Reference For more details about errors other than those
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. listed above, see "When an error occurs on
The parameter data is invalid. command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

Relationship with %Ext

Although the TE command has the same function as
%Ext, the controller is set based on the AND result of
the settings. Consequently, using the TE command
may mean the actual status is different from the ON/
OFF status (level) of the %Ext terminal.Example:
Example: When "TE,0" is sent while %Ext is off (trigger
enabled), the trigger input is disabled.

Relationship with camera settings

When the operation is switched to camera settings in
setup mode or to remote capture mode, the trigger
input is enabled temporarily.

2-16 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

LK: Enable/Disable Device Input Point

• Even when input from the handheld

Control via commands

controller is disabled, the controller virtual
This command enables or disables the input from a input command can be used.
specified device. • Once this command is set, the setting is
stored as the global setting and effective
Send LK,n,m,ssss even when the controller is restarted.
Receive LK • You can cancel the disabled input status
by turning the controller off and on while
holding down the No.1 and No.2 buttons
simultaneously.
• n: Enable/disable settings
• The LK command itself can also be used
1: Enable with the device from which the input is
0: Disable disabled, if the password is correct.
• You need to place a double quotation mark
• m: Target device
(") before ssss.
0: RS-232C (no protocol) • If "," or ";" is used in ssss, it is recognized as
1: PLC a "delimiting character of the command"
and "delimiter of the command"
2: Ethernet
respectively when the password is entered
3: Handheld controller (Touch panel, via an external command and it will not
mouse) properly function. However, by specifying
4: CC-Link "ASCII Code" for Delimiter in the custom
instruction settings and setting 0x3B (";") as
5: EtherNet/IP
the value, it can be set so that ";" will not be
6: PROFINET recognized as a termination character of a
7: EtherCAT command.
• If ssss is changed as an argument of PLC-
• ssss: Administrator password (single-byte
Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or
alphanumeric characters and symbols
EtherCAT, the command is executed
(4 to 32 digits)) assuming that two words (32 bits) of the
data memory contain one character. In this
Reference • This command does not affect the case, you do not need to provide a double
measurement processing time. quotation mark (").
• If [Register personal user IDs to the user • When the password is set as "single-byte
accounts] is enabled in the account alphanumeric characters(4 digits:0000 to
settings, the password of the user ID 9999)",scalar type variable can be used for
registered to user account number 0 the password parameter.
becomes the administrator password, and In this case, you do not need to provide a
the password set on user account number 0 double quotation mark (").
cannot be used. • If a command other than LK is input from
an input disabled device, error code 81 is
always returned and the command is not
executed.

Error Code
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The parameter data is invalid.
• 80: The password is wrong.
• 81: A command other than LK was input from
an input disabled device.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-17

Standard instruction

Parallel terminal output

OE: Enable/Disable Output
• Outputs to the external terminals to which %Sto,
This command controls data output to the external device. %OutDataA to H, %OutDataAsyncA to H, and
%JAHold are assigned stop immediately and the
Send OE,n
terminals are reset to normal.
Receive OE
• Even while output is disabled, the values of
%OutDataAsyncA to H and %JAHold changes. However,
such changes are not applied to the external terminals.
n: Enable/disable settings
• As for %Sto and %OutDataA to H, the values of
1: Enable
variables do not change while the output is disabled.
0: Disable • When output is enabled, the current values of
%OutDataAsyncA to H and %JAHold are immediately
Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time. applied to the external terminals.
• As for %Sto and %OutDataA to H, output is resumed at
• This command controls the following
Point the next execution of the terminal output unit.
output functions:
Result output (Ethernet, RS-232C, PLC link, Target Classification
CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, • The output is immediately interrupted.
SD card, USB HDD, PC program, FTP, • When output is enabled, the output is resumed from
VisionDataStorage (USB)), image output
the next target classification output.
(SD card, PC program, FTP,
VisionDataStorage (USB), USB HDD), Error Code
archive output (SD card, PC program, FTP,
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
VisionDataStorage (USB), USB HDD),
terminal output (external terminals), target The parameter data is invalid.
classification output (SD card, FTP,
Reference For more details about errors other than those
VisionDataStorage (USB), USB HDD) and
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
VisionDatabase.
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• The data/image output to the output buffer
of the output units is disabled and the Relationship with %Test
output buffer is cleared. • There is no priority setting between OE and %Test.
• Even if "OE,1" (enable) is sent while the
The internal operation is enabled or disabled in the
output is enabled or "OE,0" (disable) is sent
order the event changed.
while the output is disabled, it is not
considered to be an error. Example: When "OE,1" (enable) is input while %Test
is ON (disable), output is enabled. After this, when
Data/image output
%Test is set to OFF (enable) once and set to ON
• Output is stopped at the end of each unit.
(disable) again, output is disabled.
• When output is enabled, the output is resumed at
• Output is enabled or disabled based on the status
the next execution of a unit.
(level) of %Test immediately after the controller is
Archive output turned on, reset, or the program is changed.
• The output is stopped after one generation of data Exmaple: When "OE,1" (enable) is input while %Test
(measurement count) is output. is ON (disable), output is enabled. After this, when
• When output is enabled, the output is resumed from the program is changed, output is disabled because
the next archive output. %Test is ON (disable).

Relationship with the flow editor and [Output On/Off]

setting in the unit properties dialog
• When [Output On/Off] is set to [Output Off]: During
edit operation, output from the controller is disabled
regardless of the OE command and %Test setting.
• When [Output On/Off] is set to [Output On]: During
edit operation, output from the controller is enabled
or disabled depending on the relationship between
the OE command and %Test setting.

2-18 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Mode Control (R0/S0/RM) RM: Read Run/Setup Mode

Control via commands

This command obtains the current operation mode.

R0: Switch to Run Mode Send RM

This command switches the controller from setup mode to Receive RM,n

run mode.

Send R0 • n: Mode
Receive R0 0: Setup mode
1: Run mode

If the controller is already in run mode, the This command does not affect the
Point Reference
command finishes normally without making measurement processing time.
any changes.
Error Code
Error Code
22: The number of parameters is invalid.
22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Reference For more details about errors other than those
Reference For more details about errors other than those listed above, see "When an error occurs on
listed above, see "When an error occurs on command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

S0: Switch to Setup Mode

This command switches the controller from run mode to
setup mode.

Send S0

Receive S0

Reference When the process is waiting status to a waiting

unit or capture unit, the unit execution is forced
to stop and the controller enters setup mode.
When a different unit is being executed, the
controller enters setup mode after execution of
the unit is complete.

If the controller is already in setup mode, the

Point
command finishes normally without making
any changes.

Error Code
22: The number of parameters is invalid.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-19

Standard instruction

Error Code
Program Control (PW/PR) • 03: The program number does not exist.
The SD card has not been inserted or cannot
PW: Switch Program No. be accessed.
The program with the specified name does not
This command closes all open menus and loads the
exist.
specified program from the SD card.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Send PW,d,nnn The parameter data is invalid.
PW,d,nnn,t
Reference For more details about errors other than those
PW,ssss
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
PW,ssss,t command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
Receive PW

• d: SD card No. (1 or 2)
1: SD1
2: SD2
• nnn: Program No. (0 to 999)
• ssss: Program name
• t: Saving of program No. after the switch (0 or 1)
0 or omitted: Do not save the program No. after the switch.
1: Save the program No. after the switch.

Reference • When this command is received while the

process is waiting status to a timing unit or
capture unit, the unit execution is forced to
stop and the program is changed.
• When the process starts waiting status to a
timing unit or capture unit after this command
is received, the program is changed.
• In cases other than those above, the
program is changed after the flowchart
processing finishes.
• If more than one program has the specified
program name, the system searches for the
program number from 000 to 999 in SD1
and then 000 to 999 in SD2, then loads the
corresponding program which is found first.
• You need to place a double quotation mark
(") before ssss.
• When this command is executed as a custom
instruction with one argument (Example:
PW,*01) via PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET, or EtherCAT, it is executed in the
format for specifying the program name. The
character string of the argument is read on
the assumption that two words (32 bits) of the
data memory contain one character. In this
case, you do not need to provide a double
quotation mark (").
• To use the target program when the
controller is turned on or restarted and
parameter t has been omitted or set to 0, it
is necessary to carry out the procedures for
saving the program such as issuing an SS
command after program change.

Point Any changes to the setting data is discarded.

2-20 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

PR: Program No. Readout System control (RS/RB/SS/BS/NW/

Control via commands

This command returns the SD card number and program NR/NU/CE/RE/WG/RR/RU/TG/SD/
number of the current program.
SR/SI/SE/PN/ASI)
Send PR (1)

PR,NM (2) RS: Reset

Receive PR,d,nnnn Response to (1)
This command performs all of the following:
PR,ssss Response to (2)
• Initialize all system variables that can be initialized.
Clear all buffers including the image buffer.
• Cancel the trigger/event waiting status of the unit.
• d: SD card No. (1 or 2)
• Create a new file name for the file used to store data.
1: SD1
• Initialize the user-defined local variables for which
2: SD2
[Initialize on reset] is selected.
• nnn: Current program No. (0 to 999)
• Initialize the user-defined global variables for which
• ssss: Program name
[Initialize on reset] is selected.
• NM: Read program name
• Initialize %JAHold.
Reference This command does not affect the • Return to the beginning of the flowchart.
measurement processing time. • Clear all archived data.
• Clear all statistical data.
Error Code • All results of the target classification are cleared.
22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Send RS
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on Receive RS
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

Reference • When the process is waiting status to a

waiting unit or capture unit, the unit
execution is forced to stop and the
controller is reset.
• When a unit other than that above is being
executed, the controller is reset after the
execution of the unit is complete.

Error Code
22: The number of parameters is invalid.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-21

Standard instruction

RB: Reboot BS: Register Image

NR: Read Registered Image No. NU: Update Referenced Registered Image No.

Control via commands

This command returns the registered image number This command changes the registered image number for a
currently used for measurement. specified unit that uses variable referencing to change the
registered image. The current value in the variable is
Send NR,mmm retrieved and used to change the registered image
NR,mmm,x number. When necessary, the reference image information
is updated with the registered image of that number.
Receive NR,nnn
Send NU,mmm

Receive NU
• mmm: Unit ID 0 to 999
• nnn: Registered image No. 0 to 999
• mmm: Unit ID 0 to 999 (AL: All units)
• x: When the unit ID for an image operation
unit or plugin unit was specified: Source • This command executes by waiting for
Reference
image No. (1 or 2) completion of the current unit and then
When the unit ID for a calibration unit was stopping the process temporarily before
specified: Teaching image No. (1 to 16) moving to the next unit.
• The region and color extraction information
• This command does not affect the settings use the current values.
Reference
measurement processing time.
• You must load the registered image from the file
• Even when variable referencing is used for Point
in the SD card.
the specified registered image, the number
• Regardless of the specification of the unit ID,
of the registered image actually used is
the reference image information will be updated
returned (instead of the value of the
for all units which use the registered image of
referenced variable).
the same number as the changed one (When
the registered image number is changed to 001
Error Code
in one unit, the reference image information will
• 03: The specified unit ID does not exist. also be updated for other units which use the
The unit of the specified unit ID does not have registered image No. 001.).
a registered image number. • Even when the registered image number used
for teaching of a calibration unit is changed,
The [Registered Image] option is not set for
teaching is not performed.
the source image specified in the image • For images of 3D cameras or the LJ-X/LJ-V,
operation unit. available registered image Nos. and other
A source image number or teaching image behaviors are restricted. For more details, refer
to "Restrictions on commands related to
number was specified for units other than
registered image Nos." (Page 2-6).
image operation, plugin, and calibration units.
Source image 2 was specified for the image Error Code
operation unit which uses Source image 1 • 03: There are no units which use variable referencing
only. to change the registered image number.
The specified teaching image number is The registration of the reference image
outside the range of the teaching images information failed.
specified in the calibration unit. The image memory is insufficient.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. The reference of a registered image is invalid in
The specified parameter is outside the range. the image operation unit which references the
same registered image as the specified unit.
Reference For more details about errors other than those • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
listed above, see "When an error occurs on The specified parameter is outside the range.
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

Reference For more details about errors other than those

(When the latest result is loaded as the Send RU,mmm

reference value)
Receive RU
The specified unit has not been executed
successfully.
The referenced unit was not executed or was • mmm: Unit ID 0 to 999
executed but resulted in an error. (AL: All units)
(When the recalculation result of the registered
Reference • This command executes by waiting for
image is loaded as the reference value)
completion of the current unit and then
The recalculation result of the registered
stopping the process temporarily before
image for the referenced unit is an error. moving to the next unit.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. • The registered image is set to the currently
The specified parameter is outside the range. used image. The region, image
enhancement filter, and color extraction
settings use the current reference values.
Reference For more details about errors other than those
• This command is used to apply changes in
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
the setting parameter values to image
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
processing when [High speed mode OFF
(on-demand updates)] is set for the unit
(Pattern Search unit, ShapeTrax3A unit, and
units using the Subtract filter) with reference
image information.

• This command uses an already loaded

Point
image as the registered image.
Consequently, the registered image will not
be reloaded from the SD card.
• Even when the RU command is issued for
a calibration unit, teaching is not
performed.

2-28 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
TG: Teaching

Control via commands

• 03: The unit ID does not exist.
The specified unit does not have reference This command conducts teaching for a specified
image information. calibration unit using the currently set registered image.

The specified unit is not allowed to update Send TG,mmm

reference image information.
Receive TG
The registration of the reference image
information failed.
The specified unit has reference image • mmm: Unit ID 0 to 999
information and high speed mode is set to ON.
Reference This command executes by waiting for
AL was specified but there is no unit which completion of the current unit and then
can update reference image information or stopping the process temporarily before
registration of the reference image information moving to the next unit.
failed at least once (except in the instance the
03 error occurred due to another reason but Error Code
registration succeeded for at least one unit). • 03: The unit does not exist or the specified unit is
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. not a calibration unit.

The specified parameter is outside the range. Teaching could not be started.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Reference For more details about errors other than those The specified parameter is outside the range.
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). For more details about errors other than those
Reference
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-29

Standard instruction

SD: Shading Correction Execution SR: Shading Correction Reset

This command calculates the shading correction value This command resets the shading correction value applied
using the settings from the reference image and applies to the specified line scan camera.
that value to the specified line scan camera.
Send SR,n
Send SD,n (1) Receive SR
SD,n,ssss (2)

Receive SD
• n: Camera No. 1 to 4

Reference This command executes by waiting for

• n: Camera No. 1 to 4 completion of the current unit and then
• ssss: Image variable name stopping the process. The flow moves to the
start unit.
(1) Use the system image variable of the specified line
scan camera as the reference image. Error Code
(2) Use the specified user image variable as the reference • 03: The specified camera is not a line scan
image. camera.
Reference • The conditions to calculate the shading Resetting of the shading correction failed.
correction value are set in [Shading • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Correction] in the waveform viewer and are
The specified parameter is outside the range.
saved in the global settings file (env.dat).
• This command executes by waiting for
completion of the current unit and then Reference For more details about errors other than those
stopping the process. The flow moves to listed above, see "When an error occurs on
the start unit. command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

Error Code
• 03: The specified camera is not a line scan
camera.
LumiTrax Specular Reflection mode is enabled
with the specified camera
Execution of the shading correction failed.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.
The specified image variable does not exist.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-30 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

SI: Shading Correction Value Read SE: Shading Correction Value Write

Control via commands

This command reads the shading correction value of the This command writes the shading correction value
line scan camera from the specified CSV file and applies it applied to the specified line scan camera to the SD card
to the specified line scan camera. as a CSV file.

Send SI,n,d,ssss Send SE,n

Receive SI Receive SE

• n: Camera No. 1 to 4 • n: Camera No. 1 to 4

• d: SD card No. (1 or 2)
Reference • The SD card number is set in [Shading
1: SD1 Correction] in the waveform viewer and is
2: SD2 saved in the global settings file (env.dat).
• ssss: CSV file name • The name of the file which stores the data
conforms to the file naming rules.
• The source CSV file folder is fixed to /xg/ • If the destination folder is not available, it is
Reference
linecam/. created. If the same file name already
• This command executes by waiting for exists, it is overwritten.
completion of the current unit and then • This command does not affect the
stopping the process. The flow moves to measurement processing time.
the start unit.
Error Code
Error Code • 03: The specified camera is not a line scan
• 03: Reading of the shading correction value failed. camera.
The memory card has not been inserted or The memory card has not been inserted or
cannot be accessed. cannot be accessed.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range. The specified parameter is outside the range.
The specified file name is invalid.
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-31

Standard instruction

PN Change Program Name ASI Interrupt Sectional Inspection

This command changes the name of the specified This command forcibly completes the inspection that is
program No. being executed in sectional inspection mode and enables
the execution of the next inspection from the start.
Send PN,d,nnn,ssss

PN,d,nnn,xxxx Send ASI

Receive PN Receive ASI

Reference • If execution is in progress on a unit, this

• d: SD card No. (1 or 2)
command waits for the completion of this
1: SD1 unit's execution, and then forcibly jumps to
2: SD2 the end unit.
• If the flowchart is in a waiting status caused
• nnn: Program No. 0 to 999
by a waiting unit or an image capture unit,
• ssss: Program name this command immediately completes the
• xxxx: Scalar array variable execution on this unit, and then forcibly
(System variables cannot be specified.) jumps to the end unit.

Reference This command does not affect the Error Code

measurement processing time. • 03: Sectional inspection is disabled.

• If the target program is being executed on • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Point
the controller, the changed data is not
saved on the program file. Reference For more details about errors other than those
• You need to place a double quotation mark listed above, see "When an error occurs on
(") before ssss. command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• If ssss is changed as an argument of PLC-
Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or
EtherCAT, the command is executed
assuming that two words (32 bits) of the data
memory contain one character. In this case,
you do not need to provide a double
quotation mark (").
At this time, reading stops if the command
reaches 64 characters or an element with a
value of 0 assuming two words (32 bits) of
the data memory contain one character in
the PLC-Link.
For CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and
EtherCAT, reading stops if the command
reaches 16 characters or an element with a
value of 0 assuming every two words (4 bits)
in Command Param contain one character.
• Only program names in the language set in
the System Settings can be changed.

Error Code
• 03: The program No. does not exist.
The memory card has not been inserted or
cannot be accessed.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-32 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
Unit Test (UT/UE)

Control via commands

• 03: The unit ID does not exist.
The specified unit ID is not the ID of the unit
available for the unit test (vision unit, image
UT : Test Unit
operation unit, position adjustment unit,
Reinspects a unit specified by a number using the same calculation unit, and on-screen graphics unit).
image from the previous flowchart execution cycle. • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
• If the current image of the specified unit has been The specified parameter is outside the range.
generated by the unit test of an image operation, plugin,
or calibration unit, that image is used for the For more details about errors other than those
Reference
measurement. listed above, see "When an error occurs on
• If the current image has not been generated by the unit command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
test of an image operation, plugin, or calibration unit and
a user menu unit is being executed, the image of the
current flowchart is used for the measurement.
• If the specified unit is being edited in the unit properties
menu based on the registered image, that registered
image is used for the measurement.

Send UT,mmm

UT,mmm, n
Receive UT

• mmm: unit ID 0 to 999

• n: Display update 0: Do not update the
setting display.
1: Update the display.

Reference • This command executes by waiting for

completion of the current unit and then
stopping the process temporarily before
moving to the next unit.
• The result of the unit test is cleared when:
- The controller is reset.
- The program number is changed.
- The current flowchart process is
complete.
- The execution of a user menu unit starts.
- The execution of a user menu unit is
complete.
- The UE command (Page 2-34) is
executed.
- Unit editing in the unit properties dialog is
completed.
- The reference position information is
updated using the registered image by
the RR command or the launcher menu.

XG-X Comm-US 2-33

Standard instruction

UE: Reset Unit After Test OCR/OCR2/2D code reader/1D

This command deletes the test results for a single unit. code reader related command
Send UE (CA/CD/CW/CR/AT)
Receive UE

CA: Register Character to Library

Reference This command executes by waiting for This command registers a character specified in the latest
completion of the current unit and then
search result*1, archived image, or archived results with
stopping the process temporarily before
moving to the next unit.
the library as a specified registration character.

Send CA,nnn,m,aa,ccc
Error Code
22: The number of parameters is invalid. CA,nnn,h,j,m,aa,ccc

Receive CA
The unit test result of the unit being edited
Point
using the registered image will not be deleted.
*1 The latest image (image captured with the trigger input) is
Reference For more details about errors other than those registered with the library. If the latest image is a black
listed above, see "When an error occurs on image, the preceding image will be used. (If the preceding
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). image is also a black image, that black image will be used.)
If the CA command is issued without execution of the OCR/
OCR2 unit, the OCR measurement is executed for the latest
image and the result is registered.
If the input image of the OCR/OCR2 unit has been
generated by the unit test of an image operation unit, plugin
unit, or calibration unit, execute the UT command for the
OCR/OCR2 unit immediately before this command. The
OCR measurement for the result image (UT result image) of
the unit test is executed and the result is registered.

• nnn: Unit ID 0 to 999

• m: Line No. of the 1 to 2
search result
• aa: Character No. of the 1 to 20
search result
• ccc: Intended registration OCR unit:
character -1 to 59 (-1: No operation)
OCR2 unit:
-1 to 62 (-1: No
operation. Up to 68
only when "Lower
Case Letters" is
selected for User
Character Selection.)
See "Character Code
Table for OCR/OCR2 Unit"
(Page 2-110) for more
details.
• h: Image archive 0 to 7
conditions
• j: Go back to jth archive 0 to (Archive condition
from the current one count -1)

2-34 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Reference • This command executes by waiting for CD: Delete Character from Library

Control via commands

completion of the current unit and then
stopping the process temporarily before This command deletes the character of the last registration
moving to the next unit. number for a specified registration character from the
• Executing the UT command (Page 2-33) for library.
the target OCR unit immediately before this
command registers the result of the unit test. Send CD,nnn,ccc

• You cannot specify the registration number. Receive CD

Point
The number next to the last registration
number will be assigned automatically.
• To specify the image archive condition, you • nnn: Unit ID 0 to 999
need to record both the archived image • ccc: Registration OCR unit:
and archived result beforehand.
character -1 to 59 (-1: No operation)
• The simulation functions do not support the
specifications of the image archive
OCR2 unit:
condition (an 03 error will occur). -1 to 62 (-1: No operation.
Up to 68 only when "Lower
Error Code Case Letters" is selected for
• 03: The SD card has not been inserted or cannot User Character Selection.)
be accessed. See "Character Code Table
The unit does not exist or the specified unit is for OCR/OCR2 Unit" (Page
not an OCR/OCR2 unit. 2-110) for more details on
A library file does not exist. registration characters.
Registration of the character with the library
Reference This command executes by waiting for
failed. completion of the current unit and then
The specified archived image or archived stopping the process temporarily before
result does not exist. moving to the next unit.

• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.

Error Code
The specified parameter is outside the range.
• 03: The SD card has not been inserted or cannot
be accessed.
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on The unit does not exist or the specified unit is
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). not an OCR/OCR2 unit.
A library file does not exist.
The specified registration character has not
been registered.
Deletion of the character from the library
failed.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-35

Standard instruction

(2) Set the value of a scalar array type variable xxxx in

CW: Write REG
ASCII codes as the content of REG for the mth line/mth
This command changes the REG for an OCR/OCR2 unit, match condition in unit ID nnn.
2D code reader, or 1D code reader. The operation varies • Elements of the scalar array type variable (global or
depending on the format. See "Character Code Table for local) xxxx are read as ASCII codes (decimal
OCR/OCR2 Unit" (Page 2-110) for more details on the numbers) from the element specified with the index
and are interpreted as a character string.
ASCII codes that can be specified on the OCR/OCR2.
• The reading finishes when it reaches the maximum
Send CW,nnn,m,ssss (1) length of REG, the end of the array, or an element of
value 0.
CW,nnn,m,xxxx (2)
• If you want to process less than 20 elements of an
CW,nnn (3)
array containing 20 or more elements with an OCR
Receive CW unit or less than 40 elements of an array containing
40 or more elements with an OCR2 unit, you must
provide an element of value 0 at the end.
• nnn: Unit ID 0 to 999 • For a 2D Code Reader tool, the reading finishes
• m: Line No. OCR/OCR2 unit: 1 to 2 when it reaches 512 characters, the end of the array,
2D code reader unit: 1 to 16 or an element of value 0 (If you want to read less
1D code reader unit: 1 to 16 than 512 elements of the array containing 512 or
more elements, you must provide an element of
• ssss: Text OCR unit:
value 0 at the end.).
Number of characters 0 to 20
• For a 1D Code Reader tool, if you want to read less
OCR2 unit: than 128 elements of the array containing 128 or
Number of characters 0 to 40 more elements, you must provide an element of value
2D code reader unit: Number 0 at the end.
of characters 0 to 200 (3) Set the latest reading result of the unit with unit ID nnn
1D code reader unit: Number as REG for the unit.
of characters 0 to 128 If the unit has not been measured, REG is cleared
• xxxx: Scalar type array variable: Number of (replaced with a space in an OCR/OCR2 unit).
arrays 1 to 10000 Reference • This command executes by waiting for
completion of the current unit and then
The value of REG will return to its previous stopping the process temporarily before
Point
status before being written when the controller moving to the next unit.
is reset or turned off, unless it is saved • For the following case, * is set to REG on
manually using the SS command etc. the OCR/OCR2 unit.
- CW,nnn,m,
(1) Set ssss as the content of REG for the mth line/mth - CW,nnn,m,xxxx, (The starting
match condition in unit ID nnn. element value of xxxx is 0.)
Executing the UT command (Page 2-33) for
• You need to place a double quotation mark (")
the target unit immediately before this
before ssss. command registers the result of the unit test.
• If you use this command with PLC-link, CC-Link, • Here, 1 single byte character is indicated
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, CW, nnn, m, *01 as 1 character. 2-byte characters such as
Chinese character or Kana is equivalent to
and so on are defined in a custom instruction, and
2 characters of the indication above.
data is stored as two words (32 bits) for 1 character
from the CommandParam1 address and executed.
In this case, double quotation marks (") are not
required.
• For PLC-Link, you can set up to 64 characters, and
for CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT,
you can set up to 16 characters. Reading stops if
the command reaches an element with a value of 0.

2-36 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
CR: Read REG

Control via commands

• 03: A unit that is not OCR/OCR2, 2D code reader,
or 1D code reader is specified. This command reads the REG for an OCR/OCR2 unit, 2D
REG has not been set. code reader, or 1D code reader. The operation varies
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. depending on the format.

The specified parameter is outside the range. Send CR,nnn,m (1)

CR,nnn,m,xxxx (2)
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on Receive CR,ssss Response to (1)
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
CR Response to (2)

• nnn: Unit ID 0 to 999

• m: Line number/ OCR/OCR2 unit: 1 to 2
match 2D code reader unit: 1 to 16
condition 1D code reader unit: 1 to 16
number
• ssss: Text OCR unit:
Number of characters 0 to 20
OCR2 unit:
Number of characters 0 to 40
2D code reader unit: Number
of characters 0 to 512
1D code reader unit: Number
of characters 0 to 128
• xxxx: Scalar type array variable No. of arrays 1* to
10000
* Should be equal to or more than the number of characters
of REG set for the target unit

(1) The content of REG for the mth line/mth match condition
in unit ID nnn is returned as a command response.
When this command is executed via the PLC Link, CC-
Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, two words
are used for one character.
If the command is executed from ActiveX, the
Point
area exceeding 500 characters is discarded.
(2) The content of REG for the mth line/mth match
condition in unit ID nnn is stored as ASCII codes into
the elements of a scalar array type variable xxxx from
the element specified by the index.
• The character string of REG is stored into a scalar
array type variable (global or local) xxxx as ASCII
codes.
• When the reading reaches the maximum length of
REG or the end of the character string, 0 is stored
and the operation finishes.

Reference • This command does not affect the

measurement processing time.
• Here, 1 single byte character is indicated
as 1 character. 2-byte characters such as
Chinese or Japanese characters are
equivalent to 2 characters of the indication
above.

XG-X Comm-US 2-37

Standard instruction

Error Code
AT: Automatic Tuning
• 03: A unit that is not OCR/OCR2, 2D code reader,
or 1D code reader is specified. This command performs automatic tuning on the specified
Insufficient number of array elements. 2D and 1D code reader units using the input image or
registered image.
REG has not been set.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. Send AT,mmm,n
The specified parameter is outside the range. Receive AT

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on • mmm: Unit ID 0 to 999
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• n: Image selection 0: Captured image
for automatic 1: Registered image
tuning

• When [Captured image] is specified, the system

operates as follows:
- If AT command is issued from the command execution
unit: Executes automatic tuning using the latest image of
the specified unit. If the latest image does not exit, use
one previous image.
- If AT command is issued from elsewhere: Executes
automatic tuning using the previous flow image. If the
current image of the specified unit has been generated by
the execution of an image operation unit, plugin unit, or
calibration unit, that image is used for automatic tuning. If
the current image has not been generated by unit execution
and the user menu unit is being executed, automatic tuning
is executed using the latest image of the specified unit.
• After execution of automatic tuning, the unit test
execution result is updated to the unit test execution
result and the execution result display is updated.

Reference This command executes by stopping the

measurement temporarily.

2-38 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
Data I/O (MW/MS/MR/IW/IS/IR/WP/

Control via commands

• 03 : The unit does not exist or the specified unit is
not a 2D or 1D code reader. RP/WO)
Automatic tuning failed.
• 22 : The number of parameters is invalid. MW: Write to Variable
The specified parameter is outside the range.
This command changes the value of a specified scalar
Reference For more details about errors other than those type variable (global or local) to a specified value. The
listed above, see "When an error occurs on variable is updated immediately when this command is
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). executed.

Send MW,aaaa,nnnn

MW,aaaa,nnnn,bbbb,mmmm
Values of up to 16 variables can be changed.

Receive MW

• aaaa: Target variable

• bbbb: Target variable
• nnnn: Value or variable name to be written
• mmmm: Value or variable name to be written

Reference This command does not affect the

measurement processing time.

• Values of up to 16 variables can be changed

Point
simultaneously. The values are changed
simultaneously and reading/writing by other
processes is disabled during the change.
• The maximum value which can be written via no
protocol communication is within 10 integers
and 6 decimals.
• To change the value of a non-scalar type
variable or an array type variable, use the unit of
one element of a scalar type variable.
- Example 1: Specify as follows to change
the value of a circle variable #a:
Send MW,#a.CX,200,#a.CY,150,#a.CR,100

- Example 2: Specify as follows to change

the value of the first element of a scalar
array type variable #b[10]:
Send MW,#b[0],200

• The values of system variables, setting

parameters and result data cannot be changed.
• The values are updated immediately when this
command is executed.
• Although this command changes the current
value of the variable, it does not affect the initial
value of the program file. To save the change,
you need to select [Copy current value to initial
value at save] in the [Variables] dialog and then
issue the SS command.
• When PLC Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET, or EtherCAT is used, the data type
used for data memory which stores command
parameters is always fixed to decimals (The use
of fixed point or floating point depends on the
global setting.).

XG-X Comm-US 2-39

Standard instruction

Error Code
MS: Simultaneous Write to Variable
• 22: The specified variable is not found.
The number of parameters is invalid. This command writes a specified value for a variable but
changes it when the process reaches the first capture unit
The specified parameter is outside the range.
of the flowchart or the end unit at the end of the flowchart.

Reference For more details about errors other than those Send MS,aaaa,nnnn
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). MS,aaaa,nnnn,bbbb,mmmm
Values of up to 16 variables can be changed.

Receive MS

• aaaa: Target variable

• bbbb: Target variable
• nnnn: Value or variable name to be written
• mmmm: Value or variable name to be written

Reference This command does not affect the

measurement processing time.

• The variables are updated when the

Point
process reaches the first capture unit of the
flowchart or the end unit of the flowchart.
• The maximum value which can be written
via no protocol communication is within 10
integers and 6 decimals.
• For other details, see MW command (Page
2-39).

Error Code
• 22: The specified variable is not found.
The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-40 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

MR: Read from Variable IW : Integer Write to Variable

Control via commands

This command reads the value of a specified scalar type This command rounds off a specified value to the nearest
variable. integer and writes it as the value of a specified variable.
The variable is updated immediately when this command
Send MR,aaaa
is executed.
MR,aaaa,bbbb
Values of up to 16 variables can be read. Send IW,aaaa,nnnn

Receive MR,nnnn IW,aaaa,nnnn,bbbb,mmmm

Values of up to 16 variables can be changed.
MR,nnnn,mmmm
Receive IW

• aaaa: Name of the target variable

• bbbb: Name of the target variable • aaaa: Target variable
• nnnn: Value of the target variable • bbbb: Target variable
• mmmm: Value of the target variable • nnnn: Value or variable name to be written
• mmmm: Value or variable name to be written
Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time.
Reference This command does not affect the
• The maximum value that can be read via measurement processing time.
Point
no protocol communication is within 10
• When the PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
integers and 6 decimals. Point
PROFINET, or EtherCAT is used, the data
• To read a non-scalar type variable or an
type used for data memory that stores the
array type variable, use the unit of one
command parameter is always fixed to
element of a scalar type variable.
integers.
- Example 1: Specify as follows to read a
• The values are updated immediately when
circle variable #a:
this command is executed.
Send MR,#a.CX,#a.CY,#a.CR
• The value which can be written via no
Receive MR,+0000000200.000000, protocol communication is within 10
+0000000150.000000, integers with a sign.
+0000000100.000000 • For other details, see MW command (Page
2-39).
- Example 2: Specify as follows to read the
first element of a scalar array type Error Code
variable #b[10]:
• 22: The specified variable is not found.
Send MR,#b[0]
The number of parameters is invalid.
Receive MR,+0000000200.000000
The specified parameter is outside the range.
• The values of setting parameters and result
data cannot be read. Reference For more details about errors other than those
• When PLC Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, listed above, see "When an error occurs on
PROFINET, or EtherCAT is used, the data command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
type used for data memory which stores
command data is always fixed to decimals
(The use of fixed point or floating point
depends on the global setting.).

Error Code
• 22: The specified variable is not found.
The number of parameters is invalid.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-41

Standard instruction

IS: Simultaneous Integer Write to Variable IR: Integer Read from Variable
This command writes a specified value to a variable as This command reads the value of a specified variable,
integers but changes it when the process reaches the first rounds it off to the nearest integer, and outputs the result.
capture unit of the flowchart or the end unit of the
Send IR,aaaa
flowchart.
IR,aaaa,bbbb
Send IS,aaaa,nnnn Values of up to 16 variables can be read.
IS,aaaa,nnnn,bbbb,mmmm Receive IR,nnnn
Values of up to 16 variables can be changed.
IR,nnnn,mmmm
Receive IS

• aaaa: Name of the target variable

• aaaa: Target variable • bbbb: Name of the target variable
• bbbb: Target variable • nnnn: Value of the target variable
• nnnn: Value or variable name to be written • mmmm: Value of the target variable
• mmmm: Value or variable name to be written
Reference This command does not affect the
Reference This command does not affect the measurement processing time.
measurement processing time.
• The output is in an integer format (10
Point
• The variables are updated when the integers with a sign).
Point
process reaches the first capture unit of the • When the PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
flowchart or the end unit of the flowchart. PROFINET or EtherCAT is used, the data
• The value which can be written via no type used for data memory that stores the
protocol communication is within 10 command data is always fixed to integers.
integers with a sign. • For other details, see MR command (Page
• For other details, see MW command (Page 2-41).
2-39).
Error Code
Error Code • 22: The specified variable is not found.
• 22: The specified variable is not found. The number of parameters is invalid.
The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range. Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
For more details about errors other than those command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
Reference
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-42 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

WP: Write to Terminal Variable RP: Read from Terminal Variable

Control via commands

This command changes the value of the system variable This command reads the status of a specified terminal.
which allows terminal assignment and can be written via a
Send RP,aaaa
command. The variable is updated immediately when this
command is executed. Receive RP,nnnn

Send WP,aaaa,nnnn

Receive WP • aaaa: Target system variable

(%OutDataAsyncA to %OutDataAsyncH)
• nnnn: Read value
• aaaa: Target system variable
(%OutDataAsyncA to %OutDataAsyncH) Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time.
• nnnn: Value or variable name to be written
(-2147483648 to 2147483647) Point
When this command is executed, the current
array value will be read.
Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time. Error Code
• 22: The specified variable is not one of
The values are updated immediately when
Point
this command is executed. %OutDataAsyncA to %OutDataAsyncH.
The number of parameters is invalid.
Error Code
• 22: The specified variable is not one of Reference For more details about errors other than those
%OutDataAsyncA to %OutDataAsyncH. listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.

WO: Write Terminal Offset

Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on This command writes aaaa*bbbb to %CmdParamOffset.
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
Send WO,aaaa,bbbb

Receive WO

• aaaa: Offset scale

• bbbb: Offset value

Reference This command does not affect the

measurement processing time.

Error Code
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

Point For WO command arguments,

%CmdParamOffset is not added.

XG-X Comm-US 2-43

Standard instruction

Error Code
PLC Communication (PLC Link, • 03: Insufficient number of array elements.
CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, • 22: The specified variable does not exist.
EtherCAT)-specific Data I/O (MWX/ The number of parameters is invalid.
MSX/MRX/IWX/ISX/IRX) The specified parameter is outside the range.
The specified variable is not an array type.

MWX: Write to Array Variable Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
This command changes the values of a specified array command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
variable (global or local) of a specified type. The variable is
updated immediately when this command is executed. Example of the command parameter input for the MWX
• Depending on the specified variable type and number command to use the PLC Link (Command parameter
of variable elements, the system references the data address = 1000)
memory starting from the command parameter address • Example 1: To change two elements of a scalar array
for the PLC link, or the word devices starting from
variable #a (No. of elements: 3) from the first one
Command Parameter1 for the CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
MWX,#a[0],2
PROFINET, or EtherCAT.
1000 #a[0] Updated
• The data memory is read as a decimal type in 32 bit
units. (The use of fixed point or floating point depends 1001
on the global setting.). 1002 #a[1] Updated
• Up to 1000 elements of an array variable can be 1003
changed simultaneously. However, reading/writing by 1004 #a[2] Not updated
other processes is disabled during the change. 1005
• Example 2: To change two elements of a circle variable
Send MWX,aaaa,n
#b (No. of elements: 3) from the first one
Receive MWX
MWX,#b[0],2
1000 #b[0].CX Updated
• aaaa: Name of the target array variable 1001
• n: Number of elements of the variable (1 to 1002 #b[0].CY Updated
1000) 1003
1004 #b[0].CR Updated
Reference This command executes by stopping the 1005
measurement temporarily.
1006 #b[1].CX Updated
• The current values when this command is 1007
Point
executed will be used. 1008 #b[1].CY Updated
• The values of system variables, setting 1009
parameters and result data cannot be 1010 #b[1].CR Updated
changed.
1011
• Although this command changes the current
values of the variable, they are not saved in 1012 #b[2].CX Not updated
the program file. To save the change, you 1013
need to execute the SS command. 1014 #b[2].CY Not updated
• If the number of variable elements "n" you 1015
specified exceeds the range of the array, the
1016 #b[2].CR Not updated
values are changed until the range is
1017
exceeded, and then an execution error is
returned.
• When executed via the CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET, or EtherCAT, this command reads
the addresses of the specified number from
the first element of the command parameter,
without referencing the [Command function
size] value specified in the global setting.

2-44 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

• Example 3: To change two elements of a scalar array

MSX: Simultaneous Write to Array Variable

Control via commands

type variable #c (No. of elements: 3) from the second
one This command changes the values of a specified array
MWX,#c[1],2 variable (global or local) of a specified type. The variable is
- #c[0] Not updated updated when the process reaches the end unit of the
- flowchart.
1000 #c[1] Updated • Depending on the specified variable type and number
1001 of variable elements, the system references the data
1002 #c[2] Updated memory starting from the command parameter address
1003 for the PLC link, or the word devices starting from
Command Parameter1 for the CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
If "MWX,#c[1],3" is specified, the number of PROFINET, or EtherCAT.
Point
elements exceeds the range of the array and
• The data memory is read as a decimal type in 32 bit
an error occurs after the element #c[2] is
units. (The use of fixed point or floating point depends
updated.
on the global setting.).
• Up to 1000 elements of an array variable can be
changed simultaneously. However, reading/writing by
other processes is disabled during the change.

Send MSX,aaaa,n

Receive MSX

• aaaa: Name of the target array variable

• n: Number of elements of the variable (1 to
1000)

Reference • This command executes by stopping the

measurement temporarily.
• For details on how to specify the first
element of an array variable, refer to the
examples of MWX command (Page 2-44).

• The current values when this command is

Point
executed will be used.
• The values of system variables, setting
parameters and result data cannot be
changed.
• Although this command changes the
current values of the variable, they are not
saved in the program file. To save the
change, you need to execute the SS
command.
• If the number of variable elements "n" you
specified exceeds the range of the array,
the values are changed until the range is
exceeded, and then an execution error is
returned.
• When executed via the CC-Link, EtherNet/
IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, this command
reads the addresses of the specified
number from the first element of the
command parameter, without referencing
the [Command function size] value
specified in the global setting.

XG-X Comm-US 2-45

Standard instruction

Error Code
MRX: Read from Array Variable
• 03: Insufficient number of array elements.
• 22: The specified variable does not exist. This command reads the values of a specified array
variable (global or local) of a specified type.
The number of parameters is invalid.
• Depending on the specified variable type and number
The specified parameter is outside the range.
of variable elements, the system outputs to the
The specified variable is not an array type.
command data output address for the PLC link, or the
word devices starting from Command Data1 for the CC-
Reference For more details about errors other than those
Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT.
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). • The values are stored into the data memory as a
decimal type in 32 bit units. (The use of fixed point or
floating point depends on the global setting.).
• Up to 1000 elements of an array variable can be read
simultaneously. However, reading/writing by other
processes is disabled during the reading.

Send MRX,aaaa,n

Receive MRX

• aaaa: Name of the target array variable

• n: Number of elements of the variable (1 to
1000)

Reference • This command executes by stopping the

measurement temporarily.
• For details on how to specify the first
element of an array variable, refer to the
examples of MWX command (Page 2-44).

• When this command is executed, the

Point
current array value will be read.
• The values of system variables, setting
parameters and result data cannot be
read.
• If the number of variable elements "n" you
specified exceeds the range of the array,
the variable values are not read and an
execution error is returned.

Error Code
• 03: Insufficient number of array elements.
• 22: The specified variable does not exist.
The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.
The specified variable is not an array type.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-46 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
IWX: Integer Write to Array Variable

Control via commands

• 03: Insufficient number of array elements.
This command reads the value in the data memory of the • 22: The specified variable does not exist.
parameter address as an integer and writes it to an array
The number of parameters is invalid.
variable (global or local). The variable is updated
The specified parameter is outside the
immediately when this command is executed.
range.
• Depending on the specified variable type and number
The specified variable is not an array type.
of variable elements, the system references the data
memory starting from the command parameter address
Reference For more details about errors other than those
for the PLC link, or the word devices starting from
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
Command Parameter1 for the CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
PROFINET, or EtherCAT.
• The data memory is read as an integer type in 32 bit
units.
• Up to 1000 elements of an array variable can be
changed simultaneously. However, reading/writing by
other processes is disabled during the change.

Send IWX,aaaa,n

Receive IWX

• aaaa: Name of the target array variable

• n: Number of elements of the variable (1 to
1000)

Reference • This command executes by stopping the

measurement temporarily.
• For details on how to specify the first
element of an array variable, refer to the
examples of MWX command (Page 2-44).

• The current values when this command is

XG-X Comm-US 2-47

Standard instruction

Error Code
ISX: Simultaneous Integer Write to Array
• 03: Insufficient number of array elements.
Variable
• 22: The specified variable does not exist.
This command reads the values in the data memory of the The number of parameters is invalid.
parameter address as integers and writes them to an array The specified parameter is outside the range.
variable (global or local). The variable is updated when the
The specified variable is not an array type.
process reaches the end unit of the flowchart.
• Depending on the specified variable type and number
Reference For more details about errors other than those
of variable elements, the system references the data listed above, see "When an error occurs on
memory starting from the command parameter address command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
for the PLC link, or the word devices starting from
Command Parameter1 for the CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET, or EtherCAT.
• The data memory is read as an integer type in 32 bit
units.
• Up to 1000 elements of an array variable are changed
simultaneously. However, reading/writing by other
processes is disabled during the change.

Send ISX,aaaa,n

Receive ISX

• aaaa: Name of the target array variable

• n: Number of elements of the variable (1 to
1000)

Reference • This command executes by stopping the

measurement temporarily.
• For details on how to specify the first
element of an array variable, refer to the
examples of MWX command (Page 2-44).

• The current values when this command is

2-48 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

IRX: Integer Read from Array Variable Display (VW/VR/GW/GR/UW/UR/

Control via commands

This command reads values of an array variable (global or FW/FR/WI/RI/ZM/SC/FT/PMW/PMR/
local), rounds them off to the nearest integer, and outputs
PRW/PRR)
the result to the data memory of the parameter address.
• Depending on the specified variable type and number
of variable elements, the system outputs to the VW: Change Display Template ID
command data output address for the PLC link, or the
This command switches the display to a specified display
word devices starting from Command Data1 for the CC-
template.
Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT.
• The values are stored into the data memory as an Send VW,n
integer type in 32 bit units. Receive VW
• Up to 1000 elements of an array variable can be read
simultaneously. However, reading/writing by other
processes is disabled during the reading. n: Display template 0 to 99
ID
Send IRX,aaaa,n
PV: Previous display template
Receive IRX
NX: Next display template

Reference • This command does not affect the

• aaaa: Name of the target array variable measurement processing time.
• n: Number of elements of the variable (1 to • When this command is executed while the
1000) process is temporarily paused due to a user
menu unit, the results of the units executed
Reference • This command executes by stopping the thus far are applied to the camera screen
measurement temporarily. display.
• For details on how to specify the first
element of an array variable, refer to the Error Code
examples of MWX command (Page 2-44). • 03: The specified display template does not exist.

• When this command is executed, the The current screen is the flowchart display,
Point
current array value will be read. flow editor, or screen editor.
• The values of system variables, setting Any of the following menus are open:
parameters and result data cannot be View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection
read.
Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including
• If the number of variable elements "n" you
specified exceeds the range of the array, the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target
the variable values are not read and an Classification
execution error is returned. • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.
Error Code
• 03: Insufficient number of array elements.
Reference For more details about errors other than those
• 22: The specified variable does not exist. listed above, see "When an error occurs on
The number of parameters is invalid. command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

The specified parameter is outside the range.

The specified variable is not an array type.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-49

Standard instruction

VR: Read Display Template ID GW: Switch Page No.

This command reads the current display template ID. This command displays the specified page.

Send VR Send GW,nnnn

Receive VR,n Receive GW

n: Display template ID 0 to 99 nnnn: Page No. 1 to 9999

PV: Previous page
Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time. NX: Next page

Reference • This command does not affect the

Error Code
measurement processing time.
• 03: Any of the following menus are open: • When this command is executed while the
View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection process is temporarily paused due to a user
Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including menu unit, the results of the units executed
the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target thus far are applied to the camera screen
display.
Classification
The current screen is the flowchart display, Even when an undefined page number is
Point
flow editor, or screen editor. specified, it is not considered to be an error.
However, in such a case the page frame does
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
not appear because the page is not defined.

Reference For more details about errors other than those Error Code
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• 03: Any of the following menus are open:
View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection
Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including
the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target
Classification
The current screen is the flowchart display,
flow editor, or screen editor.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-50 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

GR: Read Page No. UW: Change Display Unit ID

Control via commands

This command reads the current page number. This command changes the camera screen to display the
unit with the specified unit ID.
Send GR

Receive GR,nnnn Send UW,n,mmm

UW,aa,mmm

UW,n,bb
Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time. UW,aa,bb

Parameter details Receive UW

nnnn: Page No. 1 to 9999

n: Camera screen No. (0 to 9)

Error Code
mmm: Unit ID 0 to 999
• 03: Any of the following menus are open:
View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection aa: Symbol specifying the camera screen
Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including FC: Focused camera screen
the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target AL: All camera screens
Classification bb: Symbol specifying the unit
The current screen is the flowchart display, PV: Previous unit
flow editor, or screen editor. NX: Next unit
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Reference • This command does not affect the
measurement processing time.
Reference For more details about errors other than those
• When this command is executed while the
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
process is temporarily paused due to a user
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
menu unit, the results of the units executed
thus far are applied to the camera screen
display.

Error Code
• 03: The specified unit ID does not exist for the
specified camera screen number.
The timing is inappropriate to switch the unit ID.
The specified camera screen number does
not exist.
The unit is not targeted with [Display Unit
Refinement] on the camera settings screen.
The current screen is the flowchart display,
flow editor, or screen editor.
Any of the following menus are open:
View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection
Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including
the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target
Classification
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-51

Standard instruction

UR: Read Display Unit ID FW: Change Focus Screen

This command reads the unit ID of the unit currently This command selects a specified camera screen.
displayed on the camera screen.
Send FW,n
Send UR,n Receive FW
Receive UR,mmm

n: Camera 0 to 9
• n: Camera 0 to 9 screen No.
screen No. PV: Previous camera screen
FC: Focused camera screen No. NX: Next camera screen
• mmm: Unit ID 0 to 999
Reference • This command does not affect the
Reference This command does not affect the measurement processing time.
measurement processing time. • When this command is executed while the
process is temporarily paused due to a user
Point If no unit has been set, -1 is returned. menu unit, the results of the units executed
thus far are applied to the camera screen
display.
Error Code
• 03: The specified camera screen number does Error Code
not exist. • 03: The specified camera screen does not exist.
The current screen is the flowchart display, The camera screen cannot be changed.
flow editor, or screen editor. The current screen is the flowchart display,
Any of the following menus are open: flow editor, or screen editor.
View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection Any of the following menus are open:
Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection
the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including
Classification the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. Classification
The specified parameter is outside the range. • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
Reference For more details about errors other than those
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-52 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

FR: Read Focus Screen No. WI: Change Image Type

Control via commands

This command reads the camera screen number of the This command changes the type of image processed on a
currently selected screen. specified camera screen.

Send FR Send WI,n,m

Receive FR,n Receive WI

n: Camera screen No. of the 0 to 9 • n: Camera screen No. (0 to 9)

selected camera screen FC: Focused camera screen
AL: All camera screens
Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time. • m: Type of processed image (0 to 10)
0: Raw image 1 (No graphics)
Error Code
1: Raw image 2
• 03: Any of the following menus are open:
2: Color-extracted image
View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection
3: Filtered image
Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including
the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target 4: Contrast image
Classification 5: Color extracted image 1 (Available only
The current screen is the flowchart display, when the Color menu is open)
flow editor, or screen editor. 6: Color extracted image 2 (Available only
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. when the Color menu is open)
7: Filtered image 2 (Available only when
Reference For more details about errors other than those flowchart is in edit or display mode)
listed above, see "When an error occurs on 8: Grayscale image (The grayscale image
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). related to the height image is displayed.
It is only available when the height
camera is used in the program.)
9: Zero plane image (Available only when
the height measurement unit - zero plane
specification dialog is open)
10: Normal image (Displays the LumiTrax
Normal image)
11: Average Grayscale image
12: Color-Difference image
13: Subtracted image
PV: Type of the previous image
NX: Type of the next image

Reference This command does not affect the

measurement processing time.

XG-X Comm-US 2-53

Standard instruction

Error Code
RI: Read Image Type
• 03: The specified camera screen number does
not exist. This command reads the type of image processed on a
The specified display template does not exist. specified camera screen.

The current screen is the screen editor. Send RI,n

View Files, Image Viewer, Target Classification, Receive RI,m
or Waveform Viewer is open.
The camera screen number displaying the 3D
view is specified. • n: Camera screen No. (0 to 9)
The screen displaying the profile view is FC: Focused camera screen
specified. • m: Type of processed image (0 to 10)
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. 0: Raw image 1 (No graphics)
The specified parameter is outside the range. 1: Raw image 2
The specified the type of processing image 2: Color-extracted image
dose not supported (eg, a normal image was 3: Filtered image
specified as the type of processing image in a 4: Contrast image
setting not using LumiTrax)
5: Color extracted image 1
6: Color extracted image 2
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on 7: Filtered image 2
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). 8: Grayscale image
9: Zero plane image
10: Normal Image
11: Average Grayscale image
12: Color-Difference image
13: Subtracted image

Reference This command does not affect the

measurement processing time.

Error Code
• 03: The specified camera screen number does
not exist.
The specified display template does not exist.
View Files, Image Viewer, Target Classification,
or Waveform Viewer is open.
The camera screen number displaying the 3D
view is specified.
The screen displaying the profile view is
specified.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-54 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
ZM: Zoom

Control via commands

• 03: The specified camera screen number does
This command zooms in or out of the camera screen not exist.
based on the specified magnification settings. The current screen is the flowchart display,
Send ZM,n,m,zzzz,xxx,yyy flow editor, or screen editor.
Any of the following menus are open:
ZM,n,m,zzzz
View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection
ZM,n,m,zzzz,xxx,yyy,XXX,YYY
Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including
ZM,n,c,zzzz,XXX,YYY the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target
ZM,n,c,zzzz Classification
Receive ZM The screen number selected is displaying a 3D
image.

• n: Camera screen No. 0 to 9 On the Screen Editor, the detected point/

inspection region tracking setting is on.
FC: Camera screen No. of the
focused camera screen The screen displaying the profile view is
• m: Zooming method 0: Absolute ratio, 1: Relative specified.
ratio • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
• c: Zooming method 2: Camera coordinate The specified parameter is outside the range.
(Camera coordinate) system with absolute ratio
3: Camera coordinate
Reference For more details about errors other than those
system with relative ratio
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
• zzzz: Zoom ratio (%) -2499 to 2500 (Absolute command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
ratio: 1 to 2500, Relative
ratio: -2499 to 2499)
• xxxx: Zoom center coordinate X -1024 to 1024
• yyy: Zoom center coordinate Y -1024 to 1024
• XXX: Center coordinate X of -32768 to 32767
camera coordinates
• YYY: Center coordinate Y of -32768 to 32767
camera coordinates

Reference • This command does not affect the

measurement processing time.
• When coordinates are omitted, (0,0) is
assumed regardless of the coordinate system.
• The "zoom center coordinates" refer to the
zooming center position based on the
coordinate system with the origin located at the
top left corner of the camera screen, and the
"center coordinates of the camera coordinates"
refer to the zooming center position based on
the coordinate system with the origin located at
the top left corner of a captured image.

• When the relative ratio is selected and the

Point
sum of the current ratio and zoom ratio is
not within the range of 1 to 2500, the ratio
will be 1 or 2500, whichever is closer.
• When both center coordinate options are
specified, the camera coordinates precede
regardless of the coordinates specified for
the "Zooming method", and only the ratio
setting (absolute/relative) is effective in the
"Zooming method" setting.

XG-X Comm-US 2-55

Standard instruction

SC: Scroll FT: Fit

This command moves a specified camera screen in This command adjusts the magnification of the camera
parallel with the original position by a specified distance. screen so that it fits in the display frame.

Send SC,n,dx,dy Send FT,n

Receive SC Receive FT

• n: Camera 0 to 9
• n: Camera 0 to 9 screen No.
screen No. FC: Camera screen No. of the
FC: Camera screen No. of the focused camera screen
focused camera screen
Reference This command does not affect the
• dx: Distance X No range limit measurement processing time.
• dy: Distance Y No range limit
Error Code
Reference This command does not affect the • 03: The specified camera screen number does
measurement processing time. not exist.
The current screen is the flowchart display,
Error Code
flow editor, or screen editor.
• 03: The specified camera screen number does
Any of the following menus are open:
not exist. View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection
The current screen is the flowchart display, Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including
flow editor, or screen editor. the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target
Classification
Any of the following menus are open:
The camera screen number displaying the 3D
View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection
view is specified.
Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including
The screen displaying the profile view is specified.
the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Classification
The specified parameter is outside the range.
The camera screen number selected is
displaying a 3D image. For more details about errors other than those
Reference
The screen displaying the profile view is listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
specified.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-56 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

PMW: Profile Measurement Item Number PMR: Profile Measurement Item Number

Control via commands

Switching Reading
This command switches the measurement item number of This command reads the measurement item number of the
the profile view. profile view.

Send PMW,n,m Send PMR,n

PMW,aa,m PMR,FC

Receive PMW Receive PMR,m

• n: Camera 0 to 9
screen No. • n: Camera 0 to 9
• aa: FC: Focused camera screen screen No.
AL: All camera screens • FC: Focused camera screen
• m: Measurement 0 to 31 • m: Measurement 0 to 31
item number item number

Reference This command does not affect the Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time. measurement processing time.

Error Code Error Code

• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range. • 03: The specified camera screen number does
There are too many parameter digits. not exist.
• 03: The specified camera screen number does The current screen is the flowchart display,
not exist. flow editor, or screen editor.
The current screen is the flowchart display, Any of the following menus are open:
flow editor, or screen editor. View Files, Waveform Viewer, Target
Any of the following menus are open: Classification
View Files, Waveform Viewer, Target
Classification Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-57

Standard instruction

PRW: Profile Result Display Condition PRR: Profile Result Display Condition
Switching Reading
This command switches the result display condition of the This command reads the profile result display condition
profile view. and the profile number.

Send PRW,n,m,p Send PRR,n

PRW,n,m,p,l PRR,FC
PRW,aa,m,p
Receive PRR,m,p,l
PRW,aa,m,p,l

Receive PRW
• n: Camera 0 to 9
• n: Camera 0 to 9 screen No.
screen No.
• FC: Focused camera screen
• aa: FC: Focused camera screen
• m: Result display condition
AL: All camera screens
0: Display condition 1
• m: Result display condition
1: Display condition 2
0: No change
2: Display condition 3
1: Display condition 1
3: Display condition 4
2: Display condition 2
• p: Profile No. 1 to 4
3: Display condition 3
• l: Multiple profile view
4: Display condition 4
0: OFF
• p: Profile No.
1: ON
0: No change
1: Profile No. 1 Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time.
2: Profile No. 2
3: Profile No. 3 Error Code
4: Profile No. 4 • 22: The specified number of parameters is
• l: Multiple profile view incorrect.
0: OFF The specified parameter is outside the range.
1: ON There are too many parameter digits.
If "l" is omitted, there will be no change to • 03: The specified camera screen number does
the existing multiple profile view. not exist.

Error Code The current screen is the flowchart display,

flow editor, or screen editor.
• 22: The specified number of parameters is
incorrect. Any of the following menus are open:
View Files, Waveform Viewer, Target
The specified parameter is outside the range.
Classification
There are too many parameter digits.
• 03: The specified camera screen number does For more details about errors other than those
Reference
not exist. listed above, see "When an error occurs on
The current screen is the flowchart display, command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
flow editor, or screen editor.
Any of the following menus are open:
View Files, Waveform Viewer, Target
Classification

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-58 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
Dialog (DC/DO/DR/BU)

Control via commands

• 03: The specified menu is a menu which cannot
be closed (startup menu).
The process failed to pause movement to the
DC: Close Menu
next unit.
This command closes the menu of the specified ID. (only when the specified menu is a unit
properties menu)
Send DC,AL
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
DC,nnnnnnnn
The specified parameter is outside the range.
DC,nnnnnnnn ,a

Receive DC Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• nnnnnnnn: Menu ID (0 to 99999999)
To close a unit properties menu, specify the menu
ID consisting of the unit ID in the first four digits
and the unit properties menu number in the last
four digits.
Example: To close a menu with a unit ID of 0004
and unit properties menu number of 3, specify
00040003.
For more details on unit properties menu numbers,
refer to the items in the "List of Unit Properties" of
the XG-X VisionEditor Reference Manual.
• a: Optional ID
0: Close a specified menu together with all
menus which were opened on top of the
specified menu.
1: Close all menus which were opened on top
of the specified menu but do not close the
specified menu.
• AL: Close all menus.

Reference • When a unit properties menu is specified to

be closed, this command executes by
waiting for completion of the current unit
and then stopping the process temporarily
before moving to the next unit.
• This command does not affect the
measurement processing time when a unit
properties menu is not included in the
menus to be closed.

When 1 is set for the optional ID, handling of

Point
the confirmation menu displayed from the
specified menu is different as follows:
• When the specified menu is a unit
properties menu: The confirmation menu
displayed from the menu with ID "X" cannot
be closed with the command "DC, X, 1".
• When the specified menu is not a unit
properties menu: The confirmation menu
displayed from the menu with ID "X" can be
closed with the command "DC, X, 1".

XG-X Comm-US 2-59

Standard instruction

Error Code
DO: Open Menu
• 03: The menu does not exist.
This command opens the menu of the specified ID. The menu cannot be opened.
The process failed to pause movement to the
Send DO,nnnnnnnn
next unit. (only when the specified menu is a
DO,nnnnnnnn,c
unit properties menu)
Receive DO
When a different standard menu is already
open, you may not be able to open another
nnnnnnnn: Menu ID 0 to 99999999 standard menu when it is specified.
To open a unit properties menu, specify The current screen is the flowchart display or
the menu ID consisting of the unit ID in flow editor.
the first four digits and the unit properties When the number of a non-connected camera
menu number in the last four digits. is specified.
Example: • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
• To open a menu with a unit ID of 0004 and The specified parameter is outside the range.
unit properties menu number of 3, specify
00040003. Reference For more details about errors other than those
For more details on unit properties menu listed above, see "When an error occurs on
numbers, refer to the items in the "List of command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
Unit Properties" of the XG-X VisionEditor
Reference Manual.
c: Camera number 1 to 4
If a Capture unit is specified with the unit
ID, the tab for the specified camera will
open as long as an enabled camera
number is specified (if the camera
number is omitted, the tab for the camera
with the smallest number among the
enabled cameras will open).
When a unit other than the Capture unit is
specified with the unit ID, the camera
number parameter is ignored.

Reference • When a unit properties menu is specified to

be opened, this command executes by
waiting for completion of the current unit
and then stopping the process temporarily
before moving to the next unit.
• This command does not affect the
measurement processing time when the
menu to be opened is not a unit properties
menu.

Point The startup settings that will be applied when

the Unit Properties menu is opened are the
configured unit edit startup settings.

2-60 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

DR: Read Menu ID BU: Open Unit Properties Menu

Control via commands

This command reads the ID of the selected menu. This command opens a unit properties menu.

Send DR Send BU,nnn,mmm

Receive DR,nnnnnnnn BU,nnn,mmm,c

Receive BU

nnnnnnnn: Menu ID 0 to 99999999

nnn: unit ID 0 to 999
Reference • This command does not affect the
measurement processing time. mmm: Unit properties menu No. 0 to 999
• The number of digits of the ID to be read For more details on unit properties menu
depends on the file format of the program. numbers, refer to the items in the "List of Unit
Properties" of the XG-X VisionEditor Reference
Error Code
Manual.
• 03: A menu is not open.
c: Camera number 1 to 4
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
If a Capture unit is specified with the unit ID,
The specified parameter is outside the range.
the tab for the specified camera will open as
long as an enabled camera number is
Reference For more details about errors other than those
specified (if the camera number is omitted,
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). the tab for the camera with the smallest
number among the enabled cameras will
open).
When a unit other than the Capture unit is
specified with the unit ID, the camera
number parameter is ignored.

Reference This command executes by waiting for

completion of the current unit and then
stopping the process temporarily before
moving to the next unit.

Point The startup settings that will be applied when

the Unit Properties menu is opened are the
configured unit edit startup settings.

XG-X Comm-US 2-61

Standard instruction

Error Code
• 03: The unit does not exist or the specified menu
Utility (TC/TS/HE/HR/HC/HS/LE/
number does not exist for the specified unit. LQ/BC/PV)
A unit properties menu is already open but
another unit properties menu was specified.
TC: Clear Statistics Data
The unit property menu cannot be opened.
The process failed to pause movement to the Clears statistical data.
next unit. After the data is cleared, the statistical analysis operation
is resumed.
The current screen is the flowchart display or
flow editor. Send TC
When a different standard menu is already Receive TC
open, you may not be able to open another
standard menu when it is specified.
Reference This command does not affect the
When the number of a non-connected camera
measurement processing time. It stops the
is specified.
statistical analysis and is executed
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. immediately.
The specified parameter is outside the range.
Error Code
For more details about errors other than those • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Reference
listed above, see "When an error occurs on For more details about errors other than those
Reference
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-62 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
TS: Save Statistical Data

Control via commands

• 03: The saving failed because:
This command saves statistical data to the SD card. The SD card has not been inserted.
Send TS,n,[Folder name] The destination folder or file cannot be
created.
Receive TS
The destination file cannot be opened.
The SD card is full.
• n: SD card No. (1 or 2) • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
1: SD1 The specified parameter is outside the range.
2: SD2 The folder name or SD card number is
• [Folder name]: Character string of maximum 221 invalid.
characters The number of specified characters is 0 or
(Example: \xg\stat)(Single-byte characters only) exceeds the maximum number.
Any one of the following invalid characters
Reference • This command does not affect the
is used:
measurement processing time.
0x7F, 0x80, 0xA0, 0xFD and later, *, ? '""',
• This command does not affect the statistical
'<', '>', '|', '/'
analysis operation.

• When the statistical data becomes larger Reference For more details about errors other than those
Point
than the archived data, part of the listed above, see "When an error occurs on
measurement result may not be saved command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
(because the oldest data is overwritten).
• Two CSV files will be created
(Measurement result and measurement
item name).
• The name of the file which stores the data
conforms to the file naming rules.
• If the destination folder does not exist, a
new folder will be created.
• If a destination file already exists, it will be
overwritten (regardless of read-only or
other file attributes).
• Once the data is saved, it will not be output
any more (including data saved from the
statistics menu).
• When all archived data has been saved
and there is no statistical data to be saved,
the command finishes successfully.

XG-X Comm-US 2-63

Standard instruction

HE: Start/Stop Archive HR: Read Archive Status

This command starts or stops the archive operation. This command reads the current value of the system
Send HE,c variable (%Hist0Status to %Hist31Status) corresponding to
a specified archive condition number.
Receive HE
Send HR,n
c: Start archiving (1), stop archiving (0) Receive HR,m
Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time. • n: Archive condition No.(0 to 31)
• m: Control status (Value of %Hist0Status to %Hist31Status)
Error Code
Reference • This command does not affect the
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
measurement processing time.
The specified parameter is outside the range. • This command does not affect archive
• 81: The archived data cannot be accessed. operation.
(The data is currently being used by other • See "List of System Variables" (Page 3-448)
software.) for more details on %Hist*Status.

For more details about errors other than those This command is not required to obtain
Reference Point
listed above, see "When an error occurs on authority to access the archived data.
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). Consequently, error code 81 is not displayed
even when archived data is being used by
other software.

Error Code
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

HC: Clear Archived Data

This command clears the archived data for a specified
archive condition number.

Send HC,n

Receive HC

n: Archive condition No. (0 to 31 or AL (all data))

Reference This command does not affect the

measurement processing time.

Error Code
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.
• 81: The archived data cannot be accessed.
(The data is currently being used by other software.)

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-64 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

HS: Save Archived Data Point

• Operation for parameter combination pattern

Control via commands

(2):
This command obtains authority to access the archived - All specified image/result data is saved
data and save the data to the SD card/USB HDD. regardless of whether it is already saved or
not.
Send HS,aa,n,bb,cc - When there is no archived data to be saved,
Receive HS an error occurs.

Error Code
• aa: Data to be output: • 03: Data saving failed at least once.
AL (image and result), IM (image) or RS (result) (for each of image data and result data)
• n: Archive condition No. (0 to 31) The SD card or USB HDD has not been
• bb: Measurement count: inserted or cannot be accessed.
AL (all generations), NW (latest measurement), The SD card or USB HDD is full.
or integer (measurement count) The parameter combination is pattern (2) and:
• cc: Image variable name: The measurement count is set as NW or
AL (all image variables) or character string an integer but the corresponding
(image variable name) (This parameter archived data does not exist.
cannot be specified when the data to be
The measurement count is set as AL but
output is set to RS (result).)
one generation of archived data does not
The operation varies depending on combination pattern of exist.
the parameters:
The measurement count is set as AL but
• Combination pattern (1):
Data to be output = AL (both), measurement count the data archived when this command
= AL (all generations), image variable name was received does not exist when it is
= AL (all image variables) output (because it was overwritten).
Data to be output = IM (image), measurement count
The [Output Location] was set to [FTP] or
= AL (all generations), image variable name
= AL (all image variables) [VisionDataStorage (USB) ].
Data to be output = RS (result), measurement count • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
= AL (all generations)
The specified parameter is outside the range.
• Combination pattern (2): Combinations other than above
The specified archive condition is invalid.
Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time. The data to be output is specified as AL
but the archive condition is set to not
• If the archived data is being used by other
Point archive both image and result.
software, the command ends by returning an 81
error.
The data to be output is specified as IM
• Output Location (SD Card/USB HDD), the file but the archive condition is set not to
format (BMP/JPG/PNG), resolution setting, and file archive images.
naming rule conform to the archive condition. The data to be output is specified as RS
• If the destination folder does not exist, a new folder
but the archive condition is set not to
will be created.
• If a destination file already exists, it will be
archive results.
overwritten (regardless of read-only or other file The specified image variable (character
attributes). string) is not a valid variable or has not
• Even when an error occurs during the process, the been specified to be archived.
command tries to save all specified data (The
• 81: The archived data cannot be accessed.
process is not interrupted.)
• Operation for parameter combination pattern (1): (The data is currently being used by other
- Once the data is saved to the SD card, or USB software.)
HDD, it will no longer be output (including data
saved from an Image Archive menu). Reference For more details about errors other than those
- When there is no archived data to be saved, the listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command ends successfully. (An error is issued command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
only when access to the SD card, or USB HDD,
failed.)

XG-X Comm-US 2-65

Standard instruction

LE: Start/Stop Modification Logging BC: Capture Image

This command starts or stops the modification logging This command captures an image of the screen and saves
function. it to the SD card or FTP server.

Send LE,d Send BC (1)

Receive LE BC,FTP (2)

BC,USB (3)

Receive BC
d: Start/stop setting
1: Start
(1) Save screen capture to the SD card as a file.
0: Stop
The file name and the save destination folder can
Reference This command does not affect the be specified in [System Settings] - [File Output] -
measurement processing time. [Screen Capture] in the XG-X VisionEditor.
(2) Save screen capture to the FTP server.
The start command issued during the logging
Point The file name and the save destination folder can
and the stop command while the logging is
stopped are not considered to be an error. be specified by using the same method as with the
SD card or by using the OW or OPW command.
Error Code
When using SFTP (Page 1-310), only ASCII
Point
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. characters can be used.
The specified parameter is outside the range.
(3) Save screen capture to the VisionDataStorage
connected via a USB cable. The file name and the
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on save destination folder can be specified by using
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). the same method as with the SD card or by using
the OW or OPW command.

Reference This command does not affect the

LQ: Read Modification Logging Status measurement processing time.

This command reads the status of modification logging This command shows [Capturing Image] at
Point
when operating or stopped. the lower right of the screen.

Send LQ Error Code

Receive LQ,d • 03: The SD card has not been inserted or cannot
be accessed.
The SD card is full.
d: Logging status
FTP output or VisionDataStorage (USB) output
1: Started
failed.
0: Stopped
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.

Reference This command does not affect the

measurement processing time. Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
Error Code command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.

The specified parameter is outside the range.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-66 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

PV Display Profile Account (PS/WH/UC/UA/UD)

Control via commands

This command specifies the Display Profile ON/OFF and
Reference For more details on the password used in the
profile position.
command, see "Password handling" (Page 2-5).
Send PV,n,m,xxxx,yyyy
(Screen specified by the number)
PS: Change Password
PV,FC,m,xxxx,yyyy
(Focused screen) This command changes the password of a specified user.
Receive PV Send PS,uuuu,ssss,tttt

Receive PS

• n: Screen number: 0 to 9
• m: Display Profile • uuuu: User account name
- 0: OFF Character string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric
- 1: Horizontal direction characters, "-" (hyphen) and "_"
- 2: Vertical direction (underscore).
- 3: Horizontal + Vertical direction • ssss: Old password (single-byte alphanumeric
• xxxx: Profile position X 0 to 16383 characters and symbols (4 to 32 digits))

• yyyy: Profile position Y 0 to 16383 • tttt: New password (single-byte alphanumeric

characters and symbols (4 to 32 digits))
Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time. Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time.
Error Code
• You need to place a double quotation mark (")
Point
• 03: The specified camera screen number does before ssss and tttt.
not exist. • If "," or ";" is used in ssss or tttt, it is recognized
The current screen is the flowchart display, as a "delimiting character of the command" and
"delimiter of the command" respectively when
flow editor, or screen editor.
the password is entered via an external
Any of the following menus are open: command and does not properly function.
View Files, Register Image, Color, Inspection However, by specifying "ASCII Code" for
Region, Library, and Unit Properties (including Delimiter of the custom instruction settings and
the Edit Unit Menu), Waveform Viewer, Target setting 0x3B (";") as the value, it can be set so
that ";" will not be recognized as a termination
Classification
character of a command.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. • If ssss and tttt are changed as an argument of
The specified parameter is outside the range. PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or
EtherCAT, the command is executed assuming
For more details about errors other than those that two words (32 bits) of the data memory
Reference
listed above, see "When an error occurs on contain one character. In this case, you do not
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). need to provide a double quotation mark (").
• When the password is set as "single-byte
alphanumeric characters(4 digits:0000 to
9999)",scalar type variable can be used for the
password parameter.
In this case, you do not need to provide a
double quotation mark (").
• If [Register personal user IDs to the user
accounts] is enabled in the account settings,
specify the name and password of the user ID,
not the name and password of the user account.

XG-X Comm-US 2-67

Standard instruction

Error Code
UC: Change Login User
• 03: The specified user account does not exist, the SD
card has not been inserted or cannot be accessed. This command changes the user account.
The SD card is full. Send UC,uuuu,ssss
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Receive UC
• 80: The old password is incorrect.

For more details about errors other than those • uuuu: Name of the user account to switch to
Reference
listed above, see "When an error occurs on Character string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). characters, "-" (hyphen) and "_"
(underscore).
• ssss: Password of the user account to switch to
WH: Read User Account (single-byte alphanumeric characters and
symbols (4 to 32 digits))
This command reads the account which is currently
logged in. • If the user account is changed while menus
Reference
are open, all of the open menus will be
Send WH
closed or the startup menu set for the
Receive WH,n,uuuu changed user account will open.
• When a unit properties menu is open, this
WH,n,uuuu,iiii
command executes by waiting for
(When [Register personal user IDs to the
completion of the current unit and then
user accounts] is enabled in the account
stopping the process temporarily before
settings)
moving to the next unit. This command
does not affect the measurement
processing time when a unit properties
• n: User account No. 0 to 4 dialog is not open.
• uuuu: User account name
• You need to place a double quotation mark
Character string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric Point
(") before ssss.
characters, "-" (hyphen) and "_" • If "," or ";" is used in ssss, it is recognized as
(underscore). a "delimiting character of the command"
and "delimiter of the command"
• iiii: User ID
respectively when the password is entered
Character string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric via an external command and does not
characters, "-" (hyphen) and "_" properly function. However, by specifying
(underscore). "ASCII Code" for Delimiter of the custom
instruction settings and setting 0x3B (";") as
Reference This command does not affect the the value, it can be set so that ";" will not be
measurement processing time. recognized as a termination character of a
command.
Error Code • If ssss is changed as an argument of PLC-
Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or
22: The number of parameters is invalid.
EtherCAT, the command is executed
Reference For more details about errors other than those assuming that two words (32 bits) of the
listed above, see "When an error occurs on data memory contain one character. In this
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). case, you do not need to provide a double
quotation mark (").
• When the password is set as "single-byte
alphanumeric characters(4 digits:0000 to
9999)",scalar type variable can be used for
the password parameter.
In this case, you do not need to provide a
double quotation mark (").
• If [Register personal user IDs to the user
accounts] is enabled in the account
settings, specify the name and password
of the user ID, not the name and password
of the user account.

2-68 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
UA: Add User Account

Control via commands

• 03: The specified user account does not exist, or
the flow is being edited. This command adds a user.
The process failed to pause movement to the Send UA,n,uuuu,ssss,tttt
next unit. (only when a unit properties dialog is
Receive UA
open)
Saving of the System Settings file failed.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. • n: Number of the new user account (0 to 4)
• 80: The password is incorrect. • uuuu: Name of the new user account
Character string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric
Reference For more details about errors other than those characters, "-" (hyphen) and "_"
listed above, see "When an error occurs on (underscore).
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• ssss: Password of the new user account (single-
byte alphanumeric characters and
symbols (4 to 32 digits))
• tttt: Password of the Administrator (single-byte
alphanumeric characters and symbols (4
to 32 digits))

Reference This command does not affect the

measurement processing time.

• You need to place a double quotation mark

Point
(") before ssss and tttt.
• If "," or ";" is used in ssss or tttt, it is
recognized as a "delimiting character of the
command" and "delimiter of the command"
respectively when the password is entered
via an external command and does not
properly function. However, by specifying
"ASCII Code" for Delimiter of the custom
instruction settings and setting 0x3B (";") as
the value, it can be set so that ";" will not be
recognized as a termination character of a
command.
• If ssss and tttt are changed as an argument
of PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET, or EtherCAT, the command is
executed assuming that two words (32
bits) of the data memory contain one
character. In this case, you do not need to
provide a double quotation mark (").
• When the password is set as "single-byte
alphanumeric characters(4 digits:0000 to
9999)",scalar type variable can be used for
the password parameter.
In this case, you do not need to provide a
double quotation mark (").
• If [Register personal user IDs to the user
accounts] is enabled in the account
settings, the operation becomes one in
which the name and password of the user
ID, not the name and password of the user
account, are specified to add a user ID to
user account number n.
• If [Register personal user IDs to the user
accounts] is enabled in the account
settings, the password of the user ID
registered to user account number 0
becomes the administrator password, and
the password set for user account number
0 itself cannot be used.

XG-X Comm-US 2-69

Standard instruction

Error Code
UD: Delete User Account
• 03: The user with the specified user account name
has already been registered. This command deletes a specified user.
The maximum number of user IDs have been
Send UD,uuuu,ssss
registered for the specified user account
number (when [Register personal user IDs to Receive UD
the user accounts] is enabled in the account
settings).
The specified user account number does not
• uuuu: Name of the user account to be deleted
exist (when [Register personal user IDs to the
user accounts] is enabled in the account • ssss: Administrator password (single-byte
settings). alphanumeric characters and symbols (4 to 32
digits))
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
• 80: The administrator password is incorrect. Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

• You need to place a double quotation mark
listed above, see "When an error occurs on Point
(") before ssss.
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• If "," or ";" is used in ssss, it is recognized as
a "delimiting character of the command"
and "delimiter of the command"
respectively when the password is entered
via an external command and does not
properly function. However, by specifying
"ASCII Code" for Delimiter of the custom
instruction settings and setting 0x3B (";") as
the value, it can be set so that ";" will not be
recognized as a termination character of a
command.
• If ssss is changed as an argument of PLC-
Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or
EtherCAT, the command is executed
assuming that two words (32 bits) of the
data memory contain one character. In this
case, you do not need to provide a double
quotation mark (").
• When the password is set as "single-byte
alphanumeric characters(4 digits:0000 to
9999)",scalar type variable can be used for
the password parameter.
In this case, you do not need to provide a
double quotation mark (").
• If [Register personal user IDs to the user
accounts] is enabled in the account
settings, specify the name of the user ID,
not the name of the user account.
• If [Register personal user IDs to the user
accounts] is enabled in the account
settings, the password of the user ID
registered to user account number 0
becomes the administrator password, and
the password set for user account number
0 itself cannot be used.

2-70 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
Date/Time (TW/TR/TM/TZW/TZR)

Control via commands

• 03: The specified user account does not exist.
The specified user is the start up user account
or the current user.
TW: Write Date/Time
When, in the case where [Register personal
user IDs to the user accounts] is enabled in This command sets the date and time of the controller.
the account settings, there is only one user ID
registered to the specified user account. Send TW,yy,mo,dd,hh,mi,ss

• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. TW,yyyy,mo,dd,hh,mi,ss

• 80: The administrator password is incorrect. Receive TW

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on • yy: Year: Lower two digits of the western
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
calendar (08 for 2008)
0 to 99
When 00 to 99 is specified, 2000 will be
added to the value before processing.
• yyyy: Year 2000 to 2099
• mo: Month 1 to 12
• dd: Day 1 to 31
• hh: Hour 0 to 23
(24-hour format)
• mi: Minute 0 to 59
• ss: Second 0 to 59

Reference This command does not affect the

measurement processing time.

Error Code
• 03: The date/time setting failed.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-71

Standard instruction

TR : Read Date/Time TM: Timer

This command reads the current date and time on the This command starts execution of a specified command
controller. string after a specified delay period. This command can
only be used for Command Execution units.
Send TR

Receive TR,yy,mo,dd,hh,mi,ss Send TM,nnnn,ssss

Receive TM

• yy: Lower two digits of the western 0 to 99

calendar (16 for 2016) • nnnn: Period to delay execution (100 to 60000
• mo: Month 1 to 12 ms)
• dd: Day 1 to 31 Although this parameter can be set in units
of 1 ms, the actual execution will be
• hh: Hour (24-hour format) 0 to 23
controlled in units of 100 ms.
• mi: Minute 0 to 59
• ssss: Command string (All commands should be
• ss: Second 0 to 59
specified within 256 characters.)
Reference This command does not affect the
Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time.
measurement processing time.
Error Code
• If a custom instruction is being executed,
Point
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid. the execution of this command is delayed
For more details about errors other than those until the custom instruction is complete.
Reference
listed above, see "When an error occurs on • The response of the timer command will be
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). returned at the point when the timer is set
successfully.
• Limitations of a recursive timer setting
- A timer command cannot be used within
ssss.
- You cannot define a custom instruction
which uses a timer command within ssss.
• Only one timer can be set for each
controller.
• When a timer command is issued while the
controller is waiting for timer expiration, an
error is returned.
• The syntax of the command string
specified within ssss is not checked.

STW/STR) This command moves the program folder with a specified
program number to another program number. If a program
folder exists in the destination, it is deleted before the copy
PC: Copy Program operation.
When the program folder is copied successfully, the
This command copies the program folder with a specified
original folder is deleted.
program number to another program number. If a program
folder exists in the destination, it is deleted before the copy Send PM,d,nnn,e,mmm
operation. Receive PM

Send PC,d,nnn,e,mmm

Receive PC
• d: Source SD card No. 1 to 2
1: SD1
• d: Source SD card No. 1 to 2 2: SD2
1: SD1 • nnn: Program No. of the program 0 to 999
2: SD2 to be moved

• nnn: Program No. of the program 0 to 999 • e: Destination SD card No. 1 to 2

to be copied 1: SD1
• e: Destination SD card No. 1 to 2 2: SD2
1: SD1 • mmm: Program No. to which the 0 to 999
2: SD2 program is moved

• mmm: Program No. to which the 0 to 999 • This command does not affect the
Reference
program is copied measurement processing time.
• This command only moves the files. If you
Reference • This command does not affect the want to switch the controller to the program,
measurement processing time. you need to issue the PW command (Page
• This command only copies the files. If you 2-20) separately.
want to switch the controller to the program,
you need to issue the PW command (Page Error Code
2-20) separately.
• 03: The program folder with the specified program
Error Code number does not exist.

• 03: The program folder with the specified program The SD card has not been inserted or cannot
number does not exist. be accessed.

The SD card has not been inserted or cannot The target files are being used by other
be accessed. processes.

The target files are being used by other The same program number on the same SD
processes. card was specified for the source and
destination.
The same program number on the same SD
card was specified for the source and SD card memory full. (The process finishes
destination. halfway through copying. In this case, the
original files are not deleted including those
SD Card memory full. (The process finishes
which have been copied successfully.)
halfway through copying.)
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
The specified parameter is outside the range.
The specified parameter is outside the range.
Reference For more details about errors other than those
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-75

Standard instruction

PD: Delete Program OW: Change Fixed Name in File Naming Rule
This command deletes the program folder with a specified This command changes the fixed name in the file naming rule
program number. used for data output unit, image output unit, screen capture
(output to the FTP server or VisionDataStorage (USB)), or
Send PD,d,nnn
archiving.
Receive PD
Send OW,nnn, ssss (1)

OW,nnn, xxxx (2)

• d: SD card No. 1 to 2
OW,HIST,m, ssss (3)
1: SD1
OW,HIST,m, xxxx (4)
2: SD2
OW,SCF, ssss (5)
• nnn: Program No. 0 to 999
OW,SCF, xxxx (6)
Reference This command does not affect the OW,SCF,l,ssss (7)
measurement processing time.
OW,SCF,l,xxxx (8)

Error Code Receive OW

• 03: The program folder with the specified program

• nnn: Unit ID 0 to 999
number does not exist.
• ssss: Text Number of Refer to each
The SD card has not been inserted or cannot
characters detailed
be accessed.
explanation.
The target files are being used by other
• xxxx: Numerical Number of 1 to 10000
processes.
array variable elements
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
• m: Image Archive No. 0 to 31
The specified parameter is outside the range.
• l: Device 0 to 1
For more details about errors other than those 0: FTP
Reference
listed above, see "When an error occurs on 1: VisionDataStorage (USB)
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
(1) Change the fixed name in the file naming rule for the
unit with unit ID nnn to ssss.
• You need to place a double quotation mark (")
before ssss.
• If you use this command with PLC-link, CC-Link,
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, OW, nnn, *01, and
so on are defined in a custom instruction, and data is
stored as two words (32 bits) for 1 character from the
CommandParam1 address and executed.
In this case, double quotation marks (") are not required.
• For no protocol communication and PLC-Link, you
can set up to 64 characters, and for CC-Link,
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT, you can set
up to 16 characters.
The reading finishes when it reaches an element of
value 0.
(2) Set the value of a numerical array type variable xxxx in
ASCII codes as the fixed name in the file naming rule
for the unit with unit ID nnn.
• The elements of the numerical array type variable
(global or local) xxxx are read as (typical) ASCII
codes from the specified element and are
interpreted as a character string.
• The reading finishes when it reaches the 64th character,
the end of the array, or an element of value 0.
2-76 XG-X Comm-US
Standard instruction

• 03: The specified unit is not a data output unit or
destination settings for when the screen capture is to
be saved on an FTP server. image output unit.
• The elements of the numerical array type variable (global The [Device] setting is not the SD card, USB
or local) xxxx are read as ASCII codes from the specified HDD, PC program, FTP or VisionDataStorage
element and are interpreted as a character string. (USB) on the data output unit.
• The reading finishes when it reaches the 239th character, • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
the end of the array, or an element of value 0. The specified parameter is outside the range.
(7) Change the folder name in the output destination
The specified folder name is invalid.
settings for when the screen capture is to be saved to
- The number of characters exceed the maximum
the specified output destination to ssss. number.
• You need to place a double quotation mark (") before ssss. - Any one of the following invalid characters is used.
• If you use this command with PLC-link, CC-Link, 0x7F, 0x80, 0xA0, 0xFD and later, *, ?, '"', '<', '>', '|'
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, OPW, SCF, 1, *01, - The specified folder name includes the drive name
and so on are defined in a custom instruction, and data is (SD1: \ , SD2: \, or USB: \).
stored as two words (32 bits) for 1 character from the
CommandParam1 address and executed. Reference For more details about errors other than those
In this case, double quotation marks (") are not required. listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• For no protocol communication, you can set up to
239 characters, for PLC-Link, you can set up to 249
characters, and for CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET,
and EtherCAT, you can set up to 16 characters.
The reading finishes when it reaches an element of
value 0.
(8) Set the value of a numerical array type variable xxxx in
ASCII codes as the folder name in the output
destination settings for when the screen capture is to
be saved to the specified output destination.
• The elements of the numerical array type variable (global
or local) xxxx are read as ASCII codes from the specified
element and are interpreted as a character string.
• The reading finishes when it reaches the 239th character,
the end of the array, or an element of value 0.
• System variables cannot be specified.
Point
• When using SFTP (Page 1-310) with the
FTP client function, only ASCII characters
can be used.

Reference • This command executes by stopping the

measurement temporarily.
• The folder name will be updated at the
following timing:
- Data output unit (when the destination is
other than PC program): At the next
output event
- Data output unit (when the destination is
PC program): When the controller is reset,
the program is changed, or the next
logging starts
- Image output unit: At the next output event
- Image archive: At the next image archive
event
- Screen capture: At the next capturing event

XG-X Comm-US 2-81

Standard instruction

(5) The folder name in the output destination settings for

OPR: Read Destination Folder Name
when the screen capture is to be saved on an FTP
This command reads the data destination folder name of server is returned in the command response.
the data output unit, image output unit, screen capture, or • When this command is executed via the PLC Link,
image archive. (Example: xg\hist) CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, two
words contain one character.
Send OPR,nnn (1)
(6) The folder name in the output destination settings for
OPR,nnn, xxxx (2)
when the screen capture is to be saved on an FTP
OPR,HIST,m (3) server is stored as ASCII codes into a numerical array
OPR,HIST,m,xxxx (4) type variable xxxx.
OPR,SCF (5) • The folder name is stored as ASCII codes into an
array type variable xxxx.
OPR,SCF,xxxx (6)
• When the reading reaches the maximum length of
OPR,SCF,l (7)
the folder name or the end of the character string, 0
OPR,SCF,l,xxxx (8) is stored and the operation finishes.
Receive OPR,ssss Response to (1)(3)(5)(7) (7) The specified output folder name in the output
OPR Response to (2)(4)(6)(8) destination settings for when the screen capture is to
be saved to the specified output destination is
• nnn: Unit ID 0 to 999 returned in the command response.
• ssss: Text Number of 0 to 255 • When this command is executed via the PLC Link,
characters CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, two
words contain one character.
• xxxx: Numerical array Number of No limit *
(8) The folder name in the output destination settings for
type variable elements
when the screen capture is to be saved to the
• m: Image Archive No. 0 to 31
specified output destination is stored as ASCII codes
• l: Device 0 to 1
into a numerical array type variable xxxx.
0: FTP
• The folder name is stored as ASCII codes into an
1: VisionDataStorage (USB)
array type variable xxxx.
* Should be equal to or more than the number of characters • When the reading reaches the maximum length of
of the destination folder set for the target unit the folder name or the end of the character string, 0
(1) The folder name for the unit with unit ID nnn is returned is stored and the operation finishes.
in the command response.
• When this command is executed via the PLC-Link, • The path after the drive name (SD1: \, SD2: \, or
Point
CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, two USB: \) is read for the destination folder name.
• System variables cannot be specified.
words contain one character.
(2) The folder name for the unit with unit ID nnn is stored as Reference This command does not affect the
ASCII codes into a numerical array type variable (global measurement processing time.
or local) xxxx.
• When the reading reaches the maximum length of Error Code
the destination folder or the end of the character
string, 0 is stored and the operation finishes. • 03: The specified unit is not a data output unit or
(3) The folder name for the archive condition No. m is image output unit.
returned in the command response. The data output unit's [Device] setting is not
• When this command is executed via the PLC Link, the SD card, USB HDD, PC program, FTP or
CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, two VisionDataStorage (USB).
words contain one character. Insufficient number of array elements.
(4) The folder name for the archive condition No.m is stored
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
as ASCII codes into a numerical array type variable xxxx.
• The destination folder is stored as ASCII codes in The specified parameter is outside the range.
array variable xxxx.
Reference For more details about errors other than those
• When the reading reaches the maximum length of
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
the destination folder or the end of the character command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
string, 0 is stored and the operation finishes.
2-82 XG-X Comm-US
Standard instruction

Error Code
STW: Change externally specified string

Control via commands

• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
Change the externally specified string set to the output file The specified parameter is outside the range.
name. The externally specified string is invalid.
- The number of characters exceed the
Send STW,n, ssss (1)
maximum number.
STW,n, xxxx (2)
- Any one of the following invalid characters
Receive STW is used.
0x81 to 0x9F, 0xE0 to 0xFC
• n: Externally 0 to 9
specified string Reference For more details about errors other than those
• ssss: Text Number of 0 to 64 listed above, see "When an error occurs on
characters command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

• xxxx: Numerical array Number of 1 to 10000

type variable elements
STR: Read externally specified string
(1) Change externally specified string n to ssss.
• You need to place a double quotation mark (") Read the externally specified string set to the output file
before ssss. name.
• If you use this command with PLC-Link, CC-Link,
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, STW, n, *01 Send STR,n (1)
and so on are defined in a custom instruction, and STR,n, xxxx (2)
data is stored as 2 words (32 bits) for 1 character
Receive STR, ssss Response to (1)
from the CommandParam1 address and executed.
In this case, double quotation marks (") are not STR Response to (2)
required.
• For no protocol communication and PLC-Link, you • n: Externally 0 to 9
can set up to 64 characters, and for CC-Link, specified string
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT, you can set • ssss: Text Number of 0 to 64
up to 16 characters. characters
The reading finishes when it reaches an element of
• xxxx: Numerical array Number of 1 to 10000
value 0.
type variable elements
(2) Set the value of a numerical array type variable xxxx as
externally specified string n. (1) Externally specified string n is returned in the
• The elements of the numerical array type variable command response. When this command is executed
(global or local) xxxx are read as ASCII codes from via the PLC Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or
the specified element and are interpreted as a EtherCAT, two words contain one character.
character string. (2) Externally specified string n is stored as ASCII code in
• The reading finishes when it reaches the 64th numerical array type variable (global variable, local
character, the end of the array, or an element of variable) xxxx from the specified element. When the
value 0. reading reaches the maximum length of the externally
Point
When using SFTP (Page 1-310) with the FTP specified string or the end of the character string, 0 is
client function, only ASCII characters can be stored and the operation finishes.
used.
Reference This command does not affect the
Reference • This command executes by waiting for measurement processing time.
completion of the current unit and then
stopping the process temporarily before Error Code
moving to the next unit. • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
• The externally specified string will be
The specified parameter is outside the range.
updated with the following timing:
- Image output unit: At the next output event
- Image archive: At the next image archive event. Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-83

Standard instruction

Flowchart Display Control (FV/FI) FI: Read Show/Hide Flowchart Status

This command returns whether the controller run screen is
set to show or hide the flowchart.
FV: Show Flowchart in Run Mode
Send FI
This command switches the controller run screen to show
Receive FI,d
or hide the flowchart.

RPM: Move Recipe RPN: Change Recipe Name

Control via commands

Destination recipe settings are all overwritten by the source This command changes the name of the specified recipe
recipe settings. If a recipe is moved successfully, the number.
source recipe settings are completely deleted. If the specified recipe setting is currently in
Reference
Reference • If moving fails along the process, the settings use, the name is not saved after it is changed.
remain as they were before moving began. To save it, issue the save (SS) command
• This command only moves the recipe setting separately.
content. To use a new recipe setting, issue the
RPW command separately. Send RPN,nnn,ssss (1)

RPN,nnn,xxxx (2)
Send RPM,mmm,nnn
Receive RPN
Receive RPM

• mmm: Source Recipe No. (0 - 999) • nnn: Recipe No. (0 - 999)

• nnn: Destination Recipe No. (0 - 999) • ssss: Recipe Name
• xxxx: Numerical array variable (system
Reference This command does not affect the variables cannot be specified)
measurement processing time.
Reference This command does not affect the
Error Code measurement processing time.

• 03: The Recipe No. does not exist.

(1)Rewrite the name of the recipe setting No. nnn to ssss.
The memory card has not been inserted or
cannot be accessed. • You need to place a double quotation mark (")
before ssss.
• 22: The number of command parameters or the • If you use this command with PLC-link, CC-Link,
range is invalid. EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, RPN, nnn, *01
and so on are defined in a custom instruction, and
Reference For more details about errors other than those
data is stored as two words (32 bits) for 1 character
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
from the CommandParam1 address and executed.
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
In this case, double quotation marks (") are not
required.
• For PLC-Link, you can set up to 64 characters, and
RPD: Delete Recipe Setting for CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT,
you can set up to 16 characters. Reading stops if
This command deletes all the details of the specified the command reaches an element with a value of 0.
recipe setting. (2)Set the numerical array variable xxxx value as ASCII code to
the name of recipe setting No. nnn.
Send RPD,mmm
• Elements of the numerical array type variable (global
Receive RPD or local) xxxx are read as ASCII codes (common)
from the element specified with the index and are
• mmm: Recipe No. (0 - 999) interpreted as a character string.
• If an element that is the 64th character, the end of
Reference This command does not affect the the array, or the value of which is 0 is reached, the
measurement processing time. reading ends.

Error Code Error Code

• 03: The Recipe No. does not exist. • 03: The Recipe No. does not exist.
The memory card has not been inserted or The memory card has not been inserted or
cannot be accessed. cannot be accessed.
• 22: The number of command parameters or the • 22: The number of command parameters or the
range is invalid. range is invalid.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

XG-X Comm-US 2-89

Standard instruction

Robot Vision (ACE/ACC/ACR/ACS/ ACC: Cancel Auto Calibration

CSR/CPW) Stops the automatic calibration that is being executed.

Send ACC

ACE: Execute Auto Calibration Receive ACC

Opens the auto calibration dialog box of the specified

calibration file and executes auto calibration. Reference This command does not affect the
measurement processing time.
Send ACE,s,nnn,m
Error Code
Receive ACE

• 22: The number of command parameters or the

range is invalid.
• s: File Type
1: Local Reference For more details about errors other than those
2: Global listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• nnn: Calibration data No. (0 - 127)
• m: Calibration type
0: Calibration
ACR: Check Auto Calibration Result
1: Tool Center Calculation
2: High-Precision Calculation Returns the auto calibration result.

This command is executed by waiting for the Send ACR,m

Reference
completion of the current unit processing and Receive ACR,t
then stopping the process temporarily before
moving to the next unit.

• m: Calibration type
Error Code
0: Calibration
• 03: When the specified file number is a file 1: Tool Center Calculation
created by manual calibration 2: High-Precision Calculation
When auto calibration cannot be started (does • t: Calibration execution result
not meet start conditions) 0: Success
When the auto calibration dialog box cannot 1: Fail or not executed (includes half-done state)
be opened Execution result of high-precision calculation
When %RBCtrlStatus or %RBCalibExecStatus 0: Success or stopped (through an operation)
is 1 1: Fail or not executed
• 22: The number of command parameters or the
Reference This command does not affect the
range is invalid.
measurement processing time.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

Error Code
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• 03: When auto calibration is being executed
When the auto calibration file is not being
edited
• 22: The number of command parameters or the
range is invalid.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-90 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

ACS: End Auto Calibration CSR: Check Calibration Status

Control via commands

Saves the auto calibration state and then ends calibration. Returns the status of the specified calibration data.

Send ACS,s Send CSR,s,nnn

Receive ACS Receive CSR,t

• s: 0: Save the file and end • s: File Type

1: End without saving to file 1: Local
2: Global
Reference This command does not affect the
• nnn: Calibration data No. (0 - 127)
measurement processing time.
• t: Calibration status
Error Code 0: Completed
1: Other than completed
• 03: When auto calibration is being executed
When executed while manual calibration is Reference This command does not affect the
being edited measurement processing time.
When the auto calibration file is not being
Error Code
edited
• 22: The number of command parameters or the • 03: When the specified calibration file does not
range is invalid. exist
When auto calibration is being executed
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on • 22: The number of command parameters or the
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). range is invalid.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-91

Standard instruction

CPW: Update Capture Position VisionDatabase (DDF/DSW/DSR)

Updates the capture position of the specified robot
coordinate conversion unit.
DDF: Delete the output image
Send CPW,c,x,y,z,rx,ry,rz
The images output via the VisionDatabase function are
Receive CPW
deleted in accordance with the VisionDatabase settings.
This command is only received and then a response is
returned.
• c: Unit ID (0 - 999)
Delete processing is implemented separately after the
• x: X position (-9999.999 - 9999.999)
command is received.
• y: Y position (-9999.999 - 9999.999)
Reference The DDF command can be implemented at any
• z: Height (-9999.999 - 9999.999)
time, it does not depend on the [Timing of Deletion]
• rx: Angle X (-179.9 - 180.0) setting.
• ry: Angle Y (-179.9 - 180.0)
• rz: Angle Z (-179.9 - 180.0) Send DDF
Receive DDF
This command is only enabled When the
Point
Calibration Data (for On-Hand camera) is
specified or when "Master Pos. to Detected Reference This command does not affect the
Pt." is selected for Direction. measurement processing time.

Reference • This command does not affect the Error Code

measurement processing time.
• You can also specify the position, height, • 03: A command is received during deletion
and angle in exponential form. To specify in
processing.
exponential form, use the following format:
- Mantissa: -9.9999999999999999 - • 22: Some unnecessary parameters are included.
+9.9999999999999999
Reference For more details about errors other than those
(Integer is one digit; integer plus decimal
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
is one to 17 digits; the plus sign (+) can
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
be omitted)
- Exponent part: e-308 - e+308
("e" can be capitalized; the plus sign (+)
can be omitted; integer is one to three
digits)
Example: 1.23e2

Error Code

• 03: When the unit of the specified unit ID is not a

robot coordinate conversion unit
When the capture position of the specified
robot coordinate conversion unit cannot be
updated
• 22: The number of command parameters or the
range is invalid.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-92 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
DSW: Change External Input String

Control via commands

• 22: Some unnecessary parameters are included.
Change the External Input String available to export to
VisionDatabase to the specified string ssss. A character that cannot be used has been
specified.
Send DSW,n,ssss (1)
The number of parameters is incorrect.
DSW,n,xxxx (2)
Reference For more details about errors other than those
Receive DSW
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

Reference This command does not affect the

measurement processing time.

• n: Specifies the External Input String to

change
0: External Input String 1
1: External Input String 2
External input strings 1 and 2 are used
when stipulating 2 kinds of optional
character strings.
• ssss: Changing string (Number of characters
0 - 200)
• xxxx: Numerical array variable (Number of
array elements 1 - 10000)

Case of (1)
Point
• The external input string is rewritten with
ssss.
• A double quotation mark (“) needs to be
placed in front of ssss.
• If implementing via the PLC link, CC-Link,
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, define
DSW, n, *01 and so on via custom
commands, and store the data as two
words (32 bits) for 1 character beginning
from the CommandParam1 address, and
then execute the command.
In this case double quotation marks (") are
not needed.
• Up to 64 characters can be stipulated via
the PLC link, and up to 16 characters can
be stipulated via CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET, or EtherCAT, and for the
character string’s terminal position stipulate
the value 0.
Case of (2)
• The numerical type array variable xxxx
values are read as ASCII codes, and the
specified external input string is rewritten
with the read character string.
• If an element that is the 200th character,
the end of the array, or the value of which is
0 is reached, the reading ends.

XG-X Comm-US 2-93

Standard instruction

DSR: Reading External Input String Measurement Correction

Read the External Input String that will be exported to (MCC/MCW/MCR)
VisionDatabase.
Reference The measurement item numbers (m:) when a 3D-blob
Send DSR,n (1) unit is specified with a command related to measurement
DSR,n,xxxx (2) correction (MCC/MCW/MCR) are shown below.
00: Height/01: Volume/02: Area/03: Feret X/04: Feret Y/
Receive DSR,ssss Case of (1) 05: Long Side/06: Short Side/07: Major Axis/
08: Minor Axis/09: Oval Maj.Axis/10: Oval Min.Axis/
DSR,n Case of (2)
11: Perimeter/12: Position X/13: Position Y/
14: Max. Height X/15: Max. Height Y/16: Max. Height Z/
17: Max. Height H/18: Ave. Height Z/19: Ave. Height H/
Reference This command does not affect the 20: Min. Height X/21: Min. Height Y/22: Min. Height Z/
measurement processing time. 23: Min. Height H/24: Concave Volume/
25: Convex Volume/26: Concave Area/27: Convex Area
• n: Specifies the External Input String to
read
0: External Input String 1 MCC: Changing Meas. Value before Correction
1: External Input String 2 of Measured Value Correction
• ssss: Read string (Number of characters 0 -
This command calculates the measured value before
200)
correction for the specified value.
• xxxx: Numerical array variable (Number of
array elements 1 - 10000) Send MCC,uuu,m,nnnn
MCC,uuu,m,nnnn,aaaa
Case of (1)
Point Receive MCC
• The external input string details are stored
in ssss.
• If implemented via PLC link, CC-Link, • uuu: Unit ID 0 to 999
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, 2 • m: Measurement 0 to 31 (fixed to 0 when a
words are used per each character. item number 3D geometry unit
Case of (2) is specified)
• The external input string is stored as an
• nnnn: Value or variable name
ASCII code in the numerical type array
variable (global variable, local variable) • aaaa: Target variable
xxxx.
Reference This command does not affect the measurement
• If the fixed character string maximum
processing time.
length, or character string termination is
reached, 0 is stored and the readout ends. Error Code

Error Code • 22: The specified number of parameters is incorrect.

The specified parameter is outside the range.
• 22: Some unnecessary parameters are included. There are too many parameter digits.

A character that cannot be used has been • 03: The unit does not exist or the unit specified is
not a profile measurement, continuous profile
specified. measurement, 3D geometry, or 3D blob unit.
The number of parameters is incorrect. When a 3D geometry unit is specified and a
value other than 0 is specified for the
Reference For more details about errors other than those measurement item number argument.
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
When a profile measurement unit, continuous
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
profile measurement unit, or 3D blob unit is
specified and a non-targetable measurement
item number is specified.
The calculation of the Meas. Value before
Correction failed.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-94 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
MCW: Measured Value Correction Writing

Control via commands

• 22: The specified number of parameters is
This command changes the measured value correction incorrect.
setting of the specified measurement item number for a The specified parameter is outside the range.
given unit and also calculates the corrected value.
There are too many parameter digits.
(1) Change the correction method to 1-point correction,
• 03: The unit does not exist or the unit specified is
and then specify the value before correction and the
not a profile measurement, continuous profile
value after correction to calculate the corrected value.
measurement, 3D geometry, or 3D blob unit.
(2) Change the correction method to 1-point correction,
When a 3D geometry unit is specified and a
subtract the specified offset value from the set value
value other than 0 is specified for the
after correction, and then set this result as the
measurement item number argument.
corrected value.
(3) Change the correction method to 2-point correction, When a profile measurement unit, continuous
and then specify the value before correction and the profile measurement unit, or 3D blob unit is
value after correction for corrected values 1 and 2 in specified and a non-targetable measurement
order to calculate these values. item number is specified.
(4) Change the correction method to 2-point correction, The correction calculation failed.
perform an inverse calculation on coefficients A and B
from the set value after correction, and then set this Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
result as the corrected value.
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
Send MCW,uuu,m,n,c,f .......................... (1)
MCW,uuu,m,n,o ............................ (2)
MCW,uuu,m,n,c1,f1,c2,f2 ............. (3)
MCW,uuu,m,n,a,b ......................... (4)

Receive MCW

• uuu: Unit ID 0 to 999

• m: Measurement 0 to 31 (fixed to 0 when a
item number 3D geometry unit
is specified)
AL: All measurement
items
• n: Correction method
0: 1-point correction
1: 2-point correction
• c: Value before correction
• f: Value after correction
• o: Offset value
• c1: Value 1 before correction
• c2: Value 2 before correction
• f1: Value 1 after correction
• f2: Value 2 after correction
• a: Coefficient A
• b: Coefficient B

Reference This command will be executed after the

completion of the unit processing that is
currently being executed and will pause the
transition to the next unit.

XG-X Comm-US 2-95

Standard instruction

MCR: Measured Value Correction Reading Others (CC/KY/VI/EC/UQ/ICU/ECU/

This command reads the measured value correction ICV/ECV/XTC/XCE/BPL/BPW/BTE/
setting of the specified measurement item number for a
BTC/BTR)
given unit.

Send MCR,uuu,m
CC: Execute Custom Instruction
Receive MCR,0,c,f,o
................................. During 1-point correction This command executes a custom instruction.
MCR,1,c1,f1,c2,f2,a,b
................................. During 2-point correction Send CC,nnn

CC,nnn,p1
• uuu: Unit ID 0 to 999 CC,nnn,p1,p2,p3,...,pN
• m: Measurement 0 to 31 (fixed to 0 when a Receive CC (when batch response mode is
item number 3D geometry unit selected)
is specified)
• c: Value before correction • nnn: Custom instruction No. 0 to 127
• f: Value after correction • p1: First parameter of the custom Any value
• o: Offset value instruction
• c1: Value 1 before correction • p2: Second parameter of the Any value
• c2: Value 2 before correction custom instruction

• f1: Value 1 after correction • ⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅ Any value

• f2: Value 2 after correction • p15: Fifteenth parameter of the Any value
custom instruction
• a: Coefficient A
• p16: Sixteenth parameter of the Any value
• b Coefficient B
custom instruction
Reference This command does not affect the
Reference • To edit the execution content of the custom
measurement processing time.
instruction, see "Controller Global Settings".
• Whether this command affects the
Error Code
measurement processing time depends on
• 22: The specified number of parameters is the properties of the commands in the
incorrect. custom instruction to be executed.

The specified parameter is outside the range. • In the individual response mode, the
Point
There are too many parameter digits. response will be returned from each of the
standard instructions to be executed. An
• 03: The unit does not exist or the unit specified is error code will also be returned from each
not a profile measurement, continuous profile of the standard instructions.
measurement, 3D geometry, or 3D blob unit. • In the batch response mode, "CC" is the only
response even if the standard instructions to
When a 3D geometry unit is specified and a be executed are of the type that yields a
value other than 0 is specified for the return value. Therefore, select the individual
measurement item number argument. response mode if a return value is required.
In the case of error occurrence, the error
When a profile measurement unit, continuous code for the standard instruction that first
profile measurement unit, or 3D blob unit is encountered the error will be returned.
specified and a measurement item number not • When [No response] is selected, no
response will be returned.
added to these units is specified.
Error Code
Reference For more details about errors other than those • 03: The specified custom instruction does not exist.
listed above, see "When an error occurs on • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-96 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

KY: Console Virtual Input VI: Version Information Readout

Control via commands

This command allows a communication command to serve This command reads the system information (model,
as the input from the button of the handheld controller. firmware version) from the controller.

Send KY,mm Send VI

KY,mm,mm (Pressing two buttons Receive VI, [Model], [Firmware version]

simultaneously)

Receive KY
• Model: Character string representing the model
• Firmware version:
• mm: Key code Character string of 14 characters ([four-
0: No. 0 button digit number showing the first number of
1: No. 1 button the major version].[four-digit number
2: No. 2 button showing the second number of the major
3: No. 3 button version].[Four-digit number showing the
minor version])
4: No. 4 button
5: No. 5 button Reference • This command does not affect the
6: No. 6 button measurement processing time.
• The character string for the model is "XG-X
7: No. 7 button
(the model's four digit value)" and when "LJ"
8: No. 8 button is appended at the end of the value, it
11: Lower left These codes correspond to represents an LJ-X/LJ-V dedicated controller.
12: Down the numeric keypad of the PC. • The firmware version consists of two digits
showing the major version and four digits
13: Lower right The value of each code is
showing the minor version (Example:
obtained by adding 10 to the
14: Left "1.0.0000" means major version 1.0 and
number assigned to the key in minor version 0000).
16: Right
each direction from key 5 at Output example for the XG-X2002 Version
17: Upper left
the center. 1.0.0000:
18: Up VI,XG-X2002,0001.0000.0000
19: Upper right
Error Code
Reference This command does not affect the • 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
measurement processing time.

• The response to KY will be returned when Reference For more details about errors other than those
Point
the command is accepted, instead of when listed above, see "When an error occurs on
the process caused by KY is complete. command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
• There may be cases where a process
caused by KY (such as capturing an When PLC Communication (PLC Link, CC-Link,
image) will be performed after the EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT) is used
response to KY is returned. Consequently, The received data is represented as values.
execution of the command entered after KY • Return value 1: Numerical value in the model
may be delayed.
• Return value 2: Indicates the controller type in value.
- 0: Nomal type
Error Code
- 1: LJ type
• 22: The number of parameters is invalid.
• Return value 3: First number of the major version of the
The parameter data is invalid.
firmware version information
• Return value 4: Second number of the major version of
Reference For more details about errors other than those
the firmware version information
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). • Return value 5: Value of the minor version of the
firmware version information

XG-X Comm-US 2-97

Standard instruction

Output example for PLC link:

EC: Echo
When the model is "XG-X2502", the firmware version is
"1.0.0000", and the command response is output to the This command returns the same character string as the
memory starting from DM0000 one that was sent from the external device.

DM0000 Send EC,ssss

2502
DM0001 Receive EC,ssss
DM0002
0
DM0003
DM0004 ssss: Character string of 128 characters or less
1 (alphabet and numbers only)
DM0005
DM0006
0 Reference This command does not affect the
DM0007 measurement processing time.
DM0008
0 Error Code
DM0009
• 22: The characters in the parameter exceed 128
characters.
The character string of the parameter includes
a character other than those specified above.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-98 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

UQ: Search Unit No. ICU: Import Unit Settings CSV File

Control via commands

This command searches the unit corresponding to the This command imports the specified CSV file from the
specified name in the flowchart and then returns the unit Program No. folder and applies the contents to the unit
number. When multiple units with the same name exist, it settings.
returns the lowest unit number. If you specified a CSV reference file, only the unit settings
listed in the CSV reference file are imported from the
Send UQ,ssss
source settings.
UQ,xxxx
Send ICU,nnnnn
Receive UQ,nnn
ICU,nnnnn,t
: Format with a specified result log output
ssss: Unit name ICU,nnnnn,mmmmm,t
xxxx: Scalar array variable : Format with reference CSV file and result log
output specified
(System variables cannot be specified.)
nnn: Unit number 0 to 999 Receive ICU,0
: If an error did not occur during import

Reference This command does not affect the ICU,1

file will be exported. Receive XTC

Exporting is performed by variable (for variables that have
multiple elements, such as arrays, all elements that belong c: Camera number (1 or 3)
to a variable will be exported). m: 0 Executes 3D calibration
1 Initializes 3D calibration
Send ECV,nnnnn
u: 0 Sets Screen Update mode to [Trigger]
ECV,nnnnn,t
: Format with a specified result log output 1 Sets Screen Update mode to [Live
Image]
ECV,nnnnn,mmmmm,t
: Specifies items to export This command can only be executed on a
Point
Receive ECV,0 screen other than the Correction screen of
Global Settings (with the exception of 3D
Calibration). When executing the command, a
nnnnn: The name of the CSV file.
calibration target is required (OP-87740 or OP-
Specify a number between 00000 and 99999. 87741).
The file name is from v00000.csv to v99999.csv
mmmmm: Number of the CSV reference file name. Error Code
Specify a number between 00000 and 99999. • 03 The specified camera is not XR
The file name is from v00000.csv to v99999.csv 3D calibration failed
t: 0 The values are exported with the The command was issued on a screen for
(When column for comments about the which the XTC command cannot be executed
omitted)
variables left blank. • 22 The number of command parameters or the
1 Comments about the variables range is invalid.
are also exported.
The number of arguments is invalid

Reference This command does not affect the

measurement processing time. Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
Error Code command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

• 03 There is no memory card or it cannot be accessed.

The CSV file of the specified name does not exist.
There are no settings targeted for export.
• 22 The number of command parameters or the
range is invalid.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-102 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code
XCE: Execute 3D Calibration

Control via commands

• 03 The specified camera is not XT.
(for XT camera)
3D calibration failed.
This command executes 3D calibration for the 3D camera The command was issued on a screen for
(XT) of the specified ID. which the XCE command cannot be executed.
When this command is executed, the 3D Calibration menu • 22 The number of command parameters or the
opens and indicates the same behavior as when executing range is invalid.
calibration manually.
The number of arguments is invalid.
Send XCE, c, m[, u]
Reference For more details about errors other than those
Receive XCE
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
XCE,t command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

c: Camera number (1 or 3)
m: 0 Start 3D calibration, transition to calibration
mode, and return to the 3D calibration start
screen.
1 Check the warm-up information.
2 Open the height adjustment screen.
3 Execute the 3D calibration of plane 1.
4 Execute the 3D calibration of plane 2.
5 End 3D calibration and return to setup
mode.
6 Return the calibration data to its factory
default.
t: Warm-up status
0 Warm-up complete
1 Warm-up not complete

Point • 3D calibration can only be started in setup

mode. All other operations can only be
executed in calibration mode.
• To calibrate an XT camera, a calibration
target (OP-88400, OP-88401) is required.
• The calibration data is updated when the
calibration of plane 2 is successful.

XG-X Comm-US 2-103

Standard instruction

BPL: Load Setting in the Background Point • This command is used in combination with the BPW
command. You can import the source program
This command loads program settings in the background. settings in advance using the BPL command and
execute the BPW command at the desired time to
Send BPL,d,nnn,m change the program settings.
When specifying a value • If you specified a program setting name and a
program setting exists with the same name, the SD
BPL,"ssss cards are searched in the order of SD1 000 → SD1
When specifying a name 999 → SD2 000 → SD2 999 and the program setting
Receive BPL that is found first is imported.
• In order to not impact controller operations, settings
are loaded with a low processing priority.
d: SD card No. • The load time depends upon the operation load.
1 SD1 • The controller must not be in Setup mode nor running
the below operations:
2 SD2 - Edit Flowchart
nnn: Setting No. (0 - 999) - Edit Unit
- Image Viewer
ssss: Program Setting Name - Editing that pauses operations (target
m: Mode (can be omitted) classification condition settings and the like)
- Statistics
0 Overwrites the initial value for the
- Adjustment utility that pauses operations
variable. (When omitted) (robot connection settings, robot calibration
1 The initial value for the variable data management, and so on)
• If you specify the program setting name
depends on the [Keep Controller Initial
with PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
Value] setting. PROFINET, or EtherCAT, BPL,*01, and so on
are defined in a custom instruction, and
• If you use the ECU or ICU commands to data is stored as two words (32 bits) for 1
Important
import or export a CSV file while the character from the CommandParam1
controller is operating, the settings may not address and executed. In this case, double
change correctly. Do not combine the ECU quotation marks (") are not required. For
or ICU commands with the BPL command. PLC-Link, you can set up to 32 characters,
and for CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or
• If you change the program settings by
EtherCAT, you can set up to 16 characters.
editing the unit or the like while settings are
The reading finishes when it reaches an
being loaded in the background with the
address of value 0.
BPL command, the loaded background
settings may be discarded. Settings may fail Error Code
to change with the BPW command.
• You cannot save the current settings while
• 03 The setting number does not exist.
settings are being loaded in the background There is no memory card or it cannot be accessed.
with the BPL command. The SS command The program setting of the specified name does not exist.
returns a 03 error.
Settings failed to load.
Reference • This command has no impact on the • 22 The number of command parameters or the range is invalid.
measurement processing time. However,
• 30 Change error due to something related to capture.
SD card output will be paused.
• A small [Loading Program Settings] menu • 31 Change error due to something related to image variables.
will appear to the bottom right while the • 32 Change error due to something related to image
command executes, and the handheld archives and VisionDatabase.
controller, mouse, and touch panel are
• 33 Change error due to something related to target
disabled until the settings change.
• The command processing time depends upon classification.
the operation load. • 34 Change error due to something related to output.
• 35 Change error due to something related to a recipe.
• 36 Change error due to something related to memory
consumption.

Reference For more details about errors other than those listed
above, see "When an error occurs on command
acceptance" (Page 2-6).

2-104 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Operation Restrictions Setting Details

Control via commands

There are restrictions on the program settings that can Resources If settings cannot be changed due to the memory
use this command. consumption of program settings, an error will occur.
In addition, since this command assumes that the • If image memory consumption of the
switching is between “program settings that were destination program settings exceeds 100%
However, for units that have High Speed mode
created by copying off of a single program setting as turned off, or if the image source for the image
their source*”, if program settings that were created operation and PlugIn units is a registered
via other methods are used, errors may occur even if image, settings cannot be loaded in some
these restriction conditions are satisfied. cases even if the image consumption is set to
less than 100% because space is required to
Setting Details load the registered image in the background.
Camera/Capture If there are differences in the source and destination • If program memory consumption of the source
Settings settings for the following, an error will occur: or destination program settings exceeds 50%
• Camera Selection • If processing capacity consumption of the source
Multi-Camera
• Image Capture Buffer ON/OFF Count or destination program settings exceeds 50%
Image Variable • If there are differences in the number of image
• Trigger Settings
• Light Model Settings archives displayed on the display template.
• Capture Unit * In concrete terms, this means that the Capture unit,
• Multi-Camera Image Variable
image variables, processes involving output (Data
Image Variable If there are differences in the source and destination Output unit, Parallel Terminal Output unit, Image
settings, an error will occur.
Output unit, VisionDatabase Output Settings, Target
(Variable Name, Type, Processed, Quantity)
Classification) and archive condition settings must all
Image Archive If there are differences in the source and destination
settings, an error will occur.
be used in the same state as when they were copied
Settings
• Image Archive Settings (state where no additions or deletions have been
VisionDataBase
• VisionDataBase Output Settings made). Other units can be edited freely.
Output Settings
• (All settings including Enable/Disable,
Reference, and Archive Objects)
Target If there are differences in the source and destination
Classification settings for the following, an error will occur:
• Target Classification/Include Image Output
Settings
• Target Classification Map (Select Camera,
Display Settings), Conditions, Judgment
Conditions
Even if there are no differences in the above
settings, if the unit IDs for the following units are
different, an error will occur:
• Defect
• Blob
• Grayscale Blob
Device If there is a data output unit, image output unit, or
parallel terminal output unit, and the source and
destination units have a different unit ID and/or
type, an error will occur.
(Each output unit cannot be added or deleted.)
The settings for each unit must also be the same.
Recipe Setting If the source or destination are using recipes, an
error will occur.

XG-X Comm-US 2-105

Standard instruction

BPW: Change Setting in the Background Point • If the parameters are not specified, the
settings change to the settings loaded in
This command changes to the program settings that were advance with the BPL command. There is
loaded in the background. If the end unit is reached, the impact on the measurement processing
settings change immediately and return to the start unit. If time (10 ms or less).
the standby unit is waiting, the process stops immediately, • If the parameters are specified, the settings
the settings change and return to the start unit. are loaded in the background and if the end
unit is reached, the settings change
Send BPW immediately. As the settings are loaded in
No Format the background, there is no impact on the
measurement processing time.
BPW,d,nnn,m
• This command can only be executed when
When specifying a value
the controller is not in Run mode and
BPW,"ssss
retesting is not being performed.
When specifying a name
• The following settings are maintained even
Receive BPW after settings change.
- Processing count
Not specified Changes to the settings loaded in advance - Variable values (local variables, global
(Omitted) with the BPL command. variables, and system variables)
d: SD card No. - Images in the image capture buffer
- Archived images
1 SD1
- Result data and images in the output
2 SD2 buffer
nnn: Setting No. (0 - 999) • The following settings are cleared when
settings change.
ssss: Program Setting Name
- Statistical data
m: Mode (can be omitted) - Archived data
0 Overwrites the initial value for the variable. • If you edit the settings, such as adding units
(When omitted) and so on, on the controller after changing
settings with the BPW command, you
1 The initial value for the variable depends on
the [Keep Controller Initial Value] setting. cannot perform editing which will make the
program memory and processing capacity
consumption exceed 50%.
• If you specify the program setting name
with PLC-Link, CC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET, or EtherCAT, BPW,*01, and so
on are defined in a custom instruction, and
data is stored as two words (32 bits) for 1
character from the CommandParam1
address and executed. In this case, double
quotation marks (") are not required. For
PLC-Link, you can set up to 32 characters,
and for CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or PROFINET,
EtherCAT, you can set up to 16 characters.
The reading finishes when it reaches an
address of value 0.

2-106 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

Error Code Setting Details

Control via commands

• 03 The setting number does not exist. Target If there are differences in the source and
There is no memory card or it cannot be accessed. Classification destination settings for the following, an error will
occur:
The program setting of the specified name • Target Classification/Include Image Output
does not exist. Settings
• Target Classification Map (Select Camera,
(When parameters are omitted) settings are Display Settings), Conditions, Judgment
not loaded with the BPL command Conditions
Even if there are no differences in the above
• 22 The number of command parameters or the range settings, if the unit IDs for the following units are
is invalid. different, an error will occur:
• Defect
• 30 Change error due to something related to capture.
• Blob
• 31 Change error due to something related to image • Grayscale Blob
variables. Device If there is a data output unit, image output unit, or
• 32 Change error due to something related to image parallel terminal output unit, and the source and
destination units have a different unit ID and/or
archives and VisionDatabase. type, an error will occur.
• 33 Change error due to something related to target (Each output unit cannot be added or deleted.)
The settings for each unit must also be the same.
classification.
Recipe Setting If the source or destination are using recipes, an
• 34 Change error due to something related to output. error will occur.
• 35 Change error due to something related to a recipe. Resources If settings cannot be changed due to the memory
• 36 Change error due to something related to memory consumption of program settings, an error will
occur.
consumption. • If image memory consumption of the
destination program settings exceeds 100%
Reference For more details about errors other than those However, for units that have High Speed mode
listed above, see "When an error occurs on turned off, or if the image source for the image
operation and PlugIn units is a registered
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
image, settings cannot be loaded in some
cases even if the image consumption is set to
Operation Restrictions less than 100% because space is required to
There are restrictions on the program settings that can load the registered image in the background.
• If program memory consumption of the source
use this command.
or destination program settings exceeds 50%
• If processing capacity consumption of the
Setting Details
source or destination program settings
Camera/ If there are differences in the source and exceeds 50%
Capture destination settings for the following, an error will • If there are differences in the number of image
Settings occur: archives displayed on the display template.
Multi-Camera • Camera Selection
Image Variable • Image Capture Buffer ON/OFF Count
• Trigger Settings
• Light Model Settings
• Capture Unit
• Multi-Camera Image Variable
Image Variable If there are differences in the source and
destination settings, an error will occur.
(Variable Name, Type, Processed, Quantity)
Image Archive If there are differences in the source and
Settings destination settings, an error will occur.
VisionDataBase • Image Archive Settings
Output Settings • VisionDataBase Output Settings
• (All settings including Enable/Disable,
Reference, and Archive Objects)

XG-X Comm-US 2-107

Standard instruction

Error Code
BTE: Execute Retest Images
• 03: Retesting (Retest Images) could not be run.
This command switches the system to setup mode and The image strip or [Image Viewer] screen is
executes retesting (Retest Images). If this command is displayed.
issued in run mode, moving to the next unit will be
• 22: The number of parameters or parameter range
interrupted and the system will switch to setup mode to run
is invalid.
Retest Images. Once retesting has completed, the system
will switch back to run mode. Reference For more details about errors other than those
listed above, see "When an error occurs on
Send BTE,s command acceptance" (Page 2-6).
BTE,AL

Receive BTE

s: Target master image

0 Pass (OK) master images
1 Fail (NG) master images
AL: Pass (OK) master images and fail (NG)
master images

Reference This command will be executed after the

completion of the unit processing that is
currently being executed and will interrupt the
transition to the next unit. Once the command
has completed, the workflow returns to the
start unit.

Point • If the command is issued with AL, the pass

(OK) master images are retested and then
the fail (NG) master images are retested. If
there is a mismatch with the expected value
for a pass (OK) master image, fail (NG)
master images are not retested.
• During the execution of Retest Images, the
system variable that stores the execution
status of Retest Images “%BatchRetestBusy”
(Page 3-459) turns ON (=1). Additionally, a
dialog box that shows the progress will
appear and retesting can be stopped using
the "Stop" button.
• If an expected value settings file for retesting
images (CSV file) is specified in “Options” in
“Image Viewer”, the retest results are only
compared against the expected values.
• The execution result is stored in the system
variable “%BatchRetestStatus” (Page 3-459).
- 0: Matched with expected values
- 1: Did not match with expected values
- 2: There was error that does not allow
retesting to continue or retesting was
aborted
- 3: Not run
• When the BTE command is executed or
when Retest Images is run manually, the
system variable that stores the execution
result “%BatchRetestStatus” is first
initialized and set to "3" (Not run), and it will
then be overwritten with the test result after
Retest Images is completed.
When retesting is executed per image or
when the UT command (Retest) is
executed, the system variable
“%BatchRetestStatus” is not updated.

2-108 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

BTC: Cancel Retest Images BTR: Check Retest Images Result

Control via commands

This command aborts retesting that is in progress. The This command reads the execution result of Retest Images
value which signifies that execution was aborted is stored from the system variable “%BatchRetestStatus” (Page 3-459).
in the system variable that stores the execution result
Send BTR
“%BatchRetestStatus” (Page 3-459) and the value which
signifies that Retest Images is not being executed is stored Receive BTR,t

in the system variable that stores the execution status of

t: Execution result of Retest Images
Retest Images “%BatchRetestBusy” (Page 3-459).
• When retesting pass (OK) master images
The image that was being retested at the time of the
0 All OK
cancelation remains displayed as is on the image display.
1 At least one image failed (NG)
Send BTC
2 There was error that does not allow
Receive BTC retesting to continue or retesting was
aborted
Reference This command does not affect the measurement
processing time. 3 Not run
• When retesting fail (NG) master images
Error Code
0 All NG
• 22: The number of parameters or parameter 1 At least one image passed (OK)
range is invalid. 2 There was error that does not allow
For more details about errors other than those retesting to continue or retesting was
Reference
listed above, see "When an error occurs on aborted
command acceptance" (Page 2-6). 3 Not run
• When an expected value settings file for
retesting images (CSV file) is specified
0 Matched with expected values
1 Did not match with expected values
2 There was error that does not allow
retesting to continue or retesting was
aborted
3 Not run

Reference This command does not affect the measurement

processing time.

Error Code

• 03: Retesting images

• 22: The number of parameters or parameter
range is invalid.

Reference For more details about errors other than those

listed above, see "When an error occurs on
command acceptance" (Page 2-6).

XG-X Comm-US 2-109

Standard instruction

Character Code Table for OCR/ Registration

Character code dedicated Character code under
for CA/CD/calculation OCR/OCR2 unit
OCR2 Unit character
reference conversion rule
Characters
All character codes used in this system are decimal indicated by
(a) to (z) are
numbers. There are two types of code including user- supported only Character code used by the Character code used by the
by the OCR2
specified characters (1) to (20). unit when
CA/CD commands and the CW command, the data
"Lower Case calculation result conversion output of the OCR/OCR2
Reference • Normal ASCII codes 32 to 126 (0x20 to 0x7e) can Letters" is of the OCR/OCR2 unit unit, and the calculation unit
be used only for the Decimal to ASCII option in the selected for
User Character
On-screen Graphics unit. Selection.
• The codes which can be used for the calculation
X 33 88
result conversion of the OCR/OCR2 unit are within
Y 34 89
the range 0 to 35 (Maximum).
Z 35 90
Character code dedicated Character code under - 36 45
for CA/CD/calculation OCR/OCR2 unit . 37 46
reference conversion rule
Registration : 38 58
character Character code used by the Character code used by the
/ 39 47
CA/CD commands and the CW command, the data
calculation result conversion output of the OCR/OCR2 / (a) 40 97
of the OCR/OCR2 unit unit, and the calculation unit
0 (b) 41 98
Unspecified -1 Cannot be specified
1 (c) 42 99
0 0 48
2 (d) 43 100
1 1 49
3 (e) 44 101
2 2 50
4 (f) 45 102
3 3 51
5 (g) 46 103
4 4 52
6 (h) 47 104
5 5 53
7 (i) 48 105
6 6 54
8 (j) 49 106
7 7 55
9 (k) 50 107
8 8 56
: (l) 51 108
9 9 57
; (m) 52 109
A 10 65
< (n) 53 110
B 11 66
= (o) 54 111
C 12 67
> (p) 55 112
D 13 68
? (q) 56 113
E 14 69
@ (r) 57 114
F 15 70
A (s) 58 115
G 16 71
B (t) 59 116
H 17 72
* Cannot be specified 42
I 18 73
# Cannot be specified 35
J 19 74
(space) Cannot be specified 32
K 20 75
(* 60 40
L 21 76
)* 61 41
M 22 77
+* 62 43
N 23 78
(u) 63 117
O 24 79
(v) 64 118
P 25 80
(w) 65 119
Q 26 81
(x) 66 120
R 27 82
(y) 67 121
S 28 83
(z) 68 122
T 29 84
* This is only supported by OCR2 units.
U 30 85
V 31 86
W 32 87

2-110 XG-X Comm-US

Standard instruction

ASCII code table (hexadecimal/decimal notation)

Control via commands

When the detected character of the OCR/OCR2 unit is referred in the calculation, the ASCII code value of each character is
returned. The ASCII code value (hexadecimal, decimal) is as follows:

Symbol (* )* +* - . / :
Hexadecimal 28 29 2B 2D 2E 2F 3A
number
Decimal 40 41 43 45 46 47 58
number

Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Hexadecimal 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
number
Decimal 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
number

Alphabet A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Hexadecimal 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D
number
Decimal 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77
number
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Hexadecimal 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A
number
Decimal 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
number

a b c d e f g h i j k l m
Hexadecimal 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D
number
Decimal 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109
number
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Hexadecimal 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A
number
Decimal 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122
number

Other SPACE
Hexadecimal 20
number
Decimal 32
number

to Program No. SD1-009
• Pw1, 9
- Pw1: Custom instruction name
- 9: Command parameter for a custom instruction argument "*01"
• CC, 2, 9
- CC: Execute custom instruction command
- 2: Custom instruction No.
- 9: Command parameter for a custom instruction argument "*01"

Reference To execute a custom instruction via the PLC Link,

CC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, or
External Terminal, specify the custom instruction
No. and custom instruction argument.

2-114 XG-X Comm-US

Custom instruction

Example 2: Defining the change display template

Control via commands

command referencing a variable #NgCam,
"NgVW", as custom instruction No. 19
Set an instruction to reference the value of the variable during
command execution and to change the display template ID to
show the image of the camera with an error. This allows you to
execute the instruction for an appropriate display template
according to the variable value obtained in the calculation unit,
even when the information in the flowchart (camera with an error)
is unknown at the destination of the instruction. Use the following
format to set this instruction as custom instruction No. 19.

Input format (Items displayed in the [Custom Instruction]

menu)

Custom
Instruction
instruction Execution content
No.
name
VW, #NgCam
• VW: Change display template ID
19 NgVW • #NgCam: The first parameter which
specifies the display template is defined as
a scalar type local variable "#NgCam".

Example of issuing the command

• NgVW
- NgVW: Custom instruction name (command
parameter unnecessary)
• CC, 19
- CC: Execute custom instruction command
- 19: Custom instruction No. (command parameter
unnecessary)

XG-X Comm-US 2-115

List of Custom Instructions

The following list shows the content and assignment of the custom instructions provided by default in [Custom instruction]
of the global setting (Page 2-112).

Reference For more details on the individual commands in each custom instruction and related parameters, see "Standard instruction"
(Page 2-9).

Custom Assigned commands Description

instruction No.
0 SS Save program
1 WO,100,*01 Write terminal offset
2 PW,1,*01 Switch program No. (SD1)
3 PW,2,*01 Switch program No. (SD2)
4 BS,&Cam1Img,*01 Register image (Camera1)
5 BS,&Cam2Img,*01 Register image (Camera 2)
6 BS,&Cam3Img,*01 Register image (Camera3)
7 BS,&Cam4Img,*01 Register image (Camera 4)
8 RR,AL Update position reference using the current image
9 BC Capture image
10 HS,IM,*01,AL,AL Save archived data
11 UW,FC,*01 Change display unit ID
12 VW,*01 Change display template ID
13 GW,*01 Switch page No.
14 TS,2,\xg\stat Save statistical data
15 T1 Issue trigger
16 T2 Issue trigger
17 T3 Issue trigger
18 T4 Issue trigger
19 BPL,1,*01,*02 Load Setting in the Background (SD1)
20 BPL,2,*01,*02 Load Setting in the Background (SD2)
21 BPW,1,*01 Change Setting in the Background (SD1)
22 BPW,2,*01 Change Setting in the Background (SD2)
23 TA Issue all triggers
24 TE,*01 Enable/disable trigger input
25 TQ Read trigger acceptance
26 LK,*01,*02,*03 Enable/disable device input
27 OE,*01 Enable/disable output
28 R0 Switch to run mode
29 S0 Switch to setup mode
30 RM Read run/setup mode
31 PW,*01,*02 Switch program No.
32 PR Program No. readout
33 RS Reset
34 RB Restart
35 SS Save program
36 NW,AL,*01 Write registered image No.
37 NW,*01,*02 Write registered image No.
38 NR,*01 Read registered image No.
39 NU,AL Update referenced registered image No.
40 NU,*01 Update referenced registered image No.
41 CE,*01 Clear error

2-116 XG-X Comm-US

List of Custom Instructions

Custom Assigned commands Description

Control via commands

instruction No.
42 RE Return to beginning of flowchart
43 WG,*01 Waiting status release
44 RR,AL,*01 Updating the reference position adjustment value
45 RR,*01,*02 Updating the reference position adjustment value
46 RU,AL Update image reference
47 RU,*01 Update image reference
48 TG,*01 Teaching
49 UT,*01,*02 Test Unit
50 UE Reset unit after test
51 CA,*01,*02,*03,*04 Register character to library
52 CA,*01,*02,*03,*04,*05,*06 Register character to library
53 CD,*01,*02 Delete character from library
54 CW,*01 Write REG
55 CW,*01,*02,*03 Write REG
56 CR,*01,*02 Read REG
57 WO,*01,*02 Write terminal offset
58 VW,*01 Change display template ID
59 VW,PV Change display template ID
60 VW,NX Change display template ID
61 VR Read display template ID
62 GW,*01 Switch page No.
63 GW,PV Switch page No.
64 GW,NX Switch page No.
65 GR Read page No.
66 UW,FC,*01 Change display unit ID
67 UW,FC,PV Change display unit ID
68 UW,FC,NX Change display unit ID
69 UR,FC Read display unit ID
70 FW,*01 Change camera screen
71 FW,PV Change camera screen
72 FW,NX Change camera screen
73 FR Read camera screen No.
74 WI,FC,*01 Change image type
75 RI,FC Read image type
76 ZM,FC,*01,*02,*03,*04 Zoom
77 SC,FC,*01,*02 Scroll
78 FT,FC Fit
79 DC,*01,*02 Close dialog
80 DC,AL Close dialog
81 DO,*01 Open dialog
82 DR Read dialog ID
83 BU,*01,*02 Open unit properties dialog
84 TC Statistics data clear
85 TS,*01,\xg\stat Save statistical data
86 HE,*01 Start/stop archive
87 HR,*01 Read archive status
88 HC,*01 Clear archived data

XG-X Comm-US 2-117

List of Custom Instructions

Custom Assigned commands Description

instruction No.
89 HC,AL Clear archived data
90 HS,IM,*01,AL,AL Save archived data
91 HS,AL,*01,AL,AL Save archived data
92 LE,*01 Start/stop modification logging
93 LQ Read modification logging status
94 BC Capture image
95 PS,Administrator,*01,*02 Change password
96 PS,Operator,*01,*02 Change password
97 WH Read user account
98 UC,Administrator,*01 Change login user
99 UC,Operator,*01 Change login user
100 TW,*01,*02,*03,*04,*05,*06 Write date/time
101 TR Read date/time
102 PC,*01,*02,*03,*04 Copy program
103 PM,*01,*02,*03,*04 Move program
104 PD,*01,*02 Delete program
105 OW,*01,*02 Change fixed name in file naming rule
106 OR,*01 Read fixed name in file naming rule
109 FV,*01 Show flowchart in run mode
110 FI Read show/hide flowchart status
111 KY,*01 Console virtual input
112 KY,*01,*02 Console virtual input
113 VI Version information readout

2-118 XG-X Comm-US

Chapter
3
Appendix

Appendix

Documentation for the installation and configuration methods

of the controller, software, and CAD data can be downloaded
from the following URL.
www.keyence.com/xgxus

XG-X Comm-US 3-1

List of Setting Parameters Overview of the Setting Parameters/
/ Result Data / Error Codes Result Data/ Error Codes List
This section provides a list of setting parameters for each
unit.
The list provides information about unit settings as well as
a list of result data upon unit execution.
Both setting parameters and result data can be referenced
q List of Setting Parameters /
as read-only data through direct input in a calculation unit
Result Data / Error Codes or by using the Watch View in the format: !U[Unit ID].Name
(Prefixed by "PRM" for a setting parameter and by "RSLT"
List of System Variables for result data). Parameters and result data can also be
referenced by dragging and dropping from the parts list.
Error codes are categorized as error codes (UEIDs) output
as result data for a unit that has encountered an execution
error and calculation error codes (ERRCs) output only by
calculation units.

Reference Error codes are categorized as error codes (UEIDs)

output as result data for a unit that has encountered
an execution error and calculation error codes
(ERRCs) output only by calculation units.

3-2 XG-X Comm-US

Overview of the Setting Parameters/Result Data/ Error Codes List

Unit type Category Result

Using the List of Setting Unit parameter
data
Parameters/Result Data

Image enhancement filter settings

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Inspection region settings

Inspection region results

Color extraction settings
List Organization

Unit properties settings

Pattern region settings
Both lists of setting parameters and result data are

Common settings

Common results
organized into two sections; common data and unit

Image settings
specific data (apart from units which do not have specific
data).
The following table shows the common data categories
and their application to each unit type.
Color Grouping Vision tool
  -  - -   
Unit
Table of units and applicable common data categories
OCR Unit Vision tool     -    
Unit type Category
Unit parameter
Result OCR2 Unit Vision tool     -    
data
2D Code Reader Vision tool
    -    
Image enhancement filter settings

Unit
1D Code Reader Vision tool
    -    
Unit
Inspection region settings

Inspection region results

Color extraction settings

Unit properties settings

3D Comparison Vision tool   -  -    

Pattern region settings

Height Measurement Vision tool

  -  -   
Common settings

-
Common results

Unit
Image settings

Profile Measurement Vision tool

  - - -   - 
Unit
Continuous Profile Vision tool
  -  -   - 
Measurement Unit
Capture Unit Image 3D Geometry Unit Vision tool   - - -   - 
 - - - - -  - -
acquisition 3D blob Vision tool   -  -    
Area Unit Vision tool     -     Position Position
  - - - -  - 
Pattern Search Vision tool Adjustment Unit Adjustment
        
Unit Branch Unit Flowchart
 - - - - -  - 
ShapeTrax3A Unit Vision tool          Functions
PatternTrax Unit Vision tool          Join Unit Flowchart
 - - - - -  - -
Functions
Edge Position Unit Vision tool     -    
Loop Function Flowchart
Edge Width Unit Vision tool     -      - - - - -  - 
Unit Functions
Edge Pitch Unit Vision tool     -    
Loop End Unit Flowchart
Edge Angle Unit Vision tool     -      - - - - -  - -
Functions
Edge Pairs Unit Vision tool     -     Break Unit Flowchart
 - - - - -  - -
Defect Unit Vision tool     -     Functions
Blob Unit Vision tool     -     Start Unit Flowchart
 - - - - -  - -
Grayscale Blob Vision tool Functions
    -    
Unit End Unit Flowchart
 - - - - -  - -
Profile Position Vision tool Functions
    -    
Unit Calculation Unit Operations  - - - - -  - 
Profile Width Unit Vision tool     -     Group Judgment Operations
 - - - - -  - -
Profile Defect Unit Vision tool     -     Unit

Multi-Profile Vision tool Image Operation Operations

    -         -    
Defect Unit Unit
C PlugIn Unit Operations    - -    -
Intensity Unit Vision tool     -    
Calibration Unit Operations   -  - -   
Color Unit Vision tool   -  - -   

XG-X Comm-US 3-3

Overview of the Setting Parameters/Result Data/ Error Codes List

Unit type Category Result Naming Convention

Unit parameter
data
The following naming convention is used to refer to each

Image enhancement filter settings

parameter/data in the program.

Inspection region settings

Setting parameter

Inspection region results

Color extraction settings

Unit properties settings

Pattern region settings
!U[Unit ID].Name
(The symbol "!" is a prefix to the format and "PRM." is a
Common settings

Common results
prefix to each parameter name.)
Image settings

Result data
!U[Unit ID].Name
(The symbol "!" is a prefix to the format and "RSLT." is a
prefix to each result data name.)
Contour Region Operations
 -   -    
Generator Unit Reference
During manual input, the auto-complete function
becomes operational.
Defect Extraction Operations
 - - - - -  -  This function is useful as it shows the list of
Operation Unit
available units when "!" is typed. And enables the
Image Stitching Operations selection of different setting parameters and result
 - - - - -  - 
Unit data by typing ".".
Robot Coordinate Operations
  - - - -  - 
Conversion Unit
Robot Coordinate Operations
Setting parameter/result data with array
  - - - -  - 
Operation Unit structure
Pause Unit Timing  - - - - -  - 
• In the following list of setting parameters and result data,
Timer Start Unit Timing  - - - - -  -  an array may be used to contain multiple information
Timer End Unit Timing  - - - - -  -  within one unit. The first item (Index 0) is used as an
Terminal I/O Delay Timing example and the subsequent items are shown in
 - - - - -  -  simplified forms.
Unit
• An array which contains more than one detection is
Variable Delay Timing
 - - - - -  -  represented by a [*].
Unit
User Menu Unit Timing  - - - - -  - 
On-screen Display Typical notation used at the end of items
  - - - -  - 
Graphics Unit
Parallel Terminal Output Unit parameter
 - - - - -  - 
Output Unit • HL (Upper limit): The upper limit used for judgment.
Data Output Unit Output  - - - - -  -  • LL (Lower limit): The lower limit used for judgment.
Image Output Unit Output  - - - - -  - 
Result data
Command Commands
 - - - - -  -  • MS (Measured value): The measured result data from
Execution Unit
the unit.
• AB (Absolute measured value): The measured result
data before the origin coordinates are changed, the
coordinate axes are corrected, or scaling is applied.
• EC (Encoder measured value): The measured result
data based on a coordinate system where the encoder
value is reflected when a line scan camera or LJ-X/LJ-V
series head is used in Continuous capture.
• JG (Judgment value): The result of a judged value (OK
/ Pass: 0, NG / Fail: 1).
• RG (Region setting value): The value output as the
measured result before the origin coordinates are
changed, the coordinate axes are corrected, or scaling
or a position correction is applied.

3-4 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Lower limit
Upper limit

Result data
Category

Name

No. of

No. of
Label

Value
Common Unit type PRM.CMN.UTYP Area 0 X X X 
Pattern search 1
ShapeTrax3A 73
PatternTrax 50
Edge position 4
Edge width 5
Edge pitch 6
Edge angle 8
Edge pair 9
Profile position 12
Profile width 13
Profile defect 40
Multi-profile defect 59
Defect 10
Blob 11
Grayscale blob 45
Intensity 14
Color 15
Color Grouping 62
OCR 17
OCR2 63
2D code reader 44
1D code reader 47
Height measurement 48
Profile 54
Measurement Unit
Continuous Profile 57
Measurement Unit
3D Geometry Unit 56
3D Comparison 65
3D blob 64
Start 19
End 20
Branch 22
Join 23
Loop function 24
Timer start 27
Timer end 28
Pause 29
Variable delay 30
Terminal I/O delay 31
User menu 32
Calculation 38
Group Judgment 67
(Start)
Group Judgment 68
(End)
Image operation 41
Contour Region 60
Generator
Defect Extraction 58
Operation
Robot Coordinate 51
Conversion
Robot Coordinate 52
Operation

XG-X Comm-US 3-5

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Lower limit
Upper limit

Result data
Category

Name

No. of

No. of
Label

Value
Common Unit type PRM.CMN.UTYP Calibration 43
(continued)
Image Stitching 46
On-screen 18
graphics
Command 34
Execution
Data output 35
Parallel terminal 36 X X X 
output
Image output 37
Position 39
Adjustment
Capture 21 X X X X
Loop end 25
Break 26
C Plug In 42
Unit ID PRM.CMN.UID 0 999 0 4 0 X X X 
Unit Name PRM.CMN.UNM Character string up to 100 bytes X 
General Unit execution PRM.CMN.ENB Always execute 0    
Never execute 1
Comment PRM.CMN.CMNT Character string up to 512 bytes X X X 
Inspection Position Adjustment ID PRM.CMN.PUID - 999 0 4 0 X X X 
region
Parameters Scaling PRM.CMN.SCL OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1
Common Total Status Target PRM.CMN.JGAC Not include 0 X X X 
Include 1
Total Error Target PRM.CMN.ERAC Not include 0 X X X 
Include 1
Camera 1 Judgment PRM.CMN.CJGAC[0] Not include 0 X X X 
Target Include 1
Camera 2 Judgment PRM.CMN.CJGAC[1] Not include 0 X X X 
Target Include 1
Camera 3 Judgment PRM.CMN.CJGAC[2] Not include 0 X X X 
Target Include 1
Camera 4 Judgment PRM.CMN.CJGAC[3] Not include 0 X X X 
Target Include 1

3-6 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Image setting

System variable Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Captured image PRM.CMN.IIMG X X X 
setting:
Common Registered image No. PRM.CMN.RIMG 0 999 0 3 0 X X X 
Assign variable to PRM.CMN.UVR Enable 1 1 0 X X X 
registered image No.
Disable 0
Reference variable PRM.CMN.RIREF   X 
Assign variable only PRM.CMN.UPEN Enable 1 1 0 X X X 
when changing
programs Disable 0

Output Contrast Image/ PRM.CMN.MIMGEN Enable 1 X X X 

Binary Image
Disable 0
Contrast Image/Binary PRM.CMN.MIMG X X X 
Image: Use for
processing

XG-X Comm-US 3-7

List of setting parameters

Color Extraction

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Color Color type PRM.CLREXT.WAY OFF -1 X X X 
Extraction
Common Color to 0
Binary
Color to Gray 2
Gray 3
RGB Gray 5
R Grayscale 6
G Grayscale 7
B Grayscale 8
Fine Color 4
Enable Color PRM.CLREXT.CEXTEN Enable 1 X X X X
Extraction
Disable 0
Color Sensitivity PRM.CLREXT.ESEN 3 10 0 2 0 X X X 
Extraction:
Color to Extraction area PRM.CLREXT.EW 3 32 1 2 0 X X X 
Binary
Background color PRM.CLREXT.BCLR Black 0 X X X 
White 255
Array reference PRM.CLREXT.AREF   X 
Hue: Min PRM.CLREXT.HTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Hue: Max PRM.CLREXT.HTH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Saturation: Min PRM.CLREXT.STH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Saturation: Max PRM.CLREXT.STH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness: Min PRM.CLREXT.VTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness: Max PRM.CLREXT.VTH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Color Sensitivity PRM.CLREXT.ESEN 3 10 0 2 0 X X X 
Extraction:
Color to Extraction area PRM.CLREXT.EW 3 32 1 2 0 X X X 
Gray
Array reference PRM.CLREXT.AREF   X 
Hue: Min PRM.CLREXT.HTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Hue: Max PRM.CLREXT.HTH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Hue Slope: Min PRM.CLREXT.HCO:LL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Hue Slope: Max PRM.CLREXT.HCO:HL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Saturation: Min PRM.CLREXT.STH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Saturation: Max PRM.CLREXT.STH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Saturation Slope: PRM.CLREXT.SCO:LL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Min
Saturation Slope: PRM.CLREXT.SCO:HL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Max
Brightness: Min PRM.CLREXT.VTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness: Max PRM.CLREXT.VTH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness Slope: PRM.CLREXT.VCO:LL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Min
Brightness Slope: PRM.CLREXT.VCO:HL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Max

3-8 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Color Extraction Settings (Image Operation Unit/PlugIn Unit: Source Image 1)

System variable Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Color type PRM.CLREXT1.WAY OFF -1 X X X 
image 1:
Color Color to 0
Extraction Binary
Color to Gray 2
Gray 3
RGB Gray 5
R Grayscale 6
G Grayscale 7
B Grayscale 8
Enable Color PRM.CLREXT1. Enable 1 X X X X
Extraction CEXTEN
Disable 0
Source Sensitivity PRM.CLREXT1.ESEN 3 10 0 2 0 X X X 
image 1:
Color Extraction area PRM.CLREXT1.EW 3 32 1 2 0 X X X 
Extraction:
Color to Background color PRM.CLREXT1.BCLR Black 0 X X X 
Binary
White 255
Array reference PRM.CLREXT1.AREF   X 
Hue: Min PRM.CLREXT1.HTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Hue: Max Max 255 255 0 3 0   X 
PRM.CLREXT1.HTH:HL
Saturation: Min PRM.CLREXT1.STH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Saturation: Max PRM.CLREXT1.STH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness: Min PRM.CLREXT1.VTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness: Max PRM.CLREXT1.VTH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Source Sensitivity PRM.CLREXT1.ESEN 3 10 0 2 0 X X X 
image 1:
Color Extraction area PRM.CLREXT1.EW 3 32 1 2 0 X X X 
Extraction:
Color to Array reference PRM.CLREXT1.AREF   X 
Gray
Hue: Min PRM.CLREXT1.HTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Hue: Max PRM.CLREXT1.HTH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Hue Slope: Min PRM.CLREXT1.HCO:LL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Hue Slope: Max PRM.CLREXT1.HCO:HL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Saturation: Min PRM.CLREXT1.STH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Saturation: Max PRM.CLREXT1.STH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Saturation Slope: PRM.CLREXT1.SCO:LL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Min
Saturation Slope: PRM.CLREXT1.SCO:HL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Max
Brightness: Min PRM.CLREXT1.VTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness: Max PRM.CLREXT1.VTH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness Slope: PRM.CLREXT1.VCO:LL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Min
Brightness Slope: PRM.CLREXT1.VCO:HL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Max

XG-X Comm-US 3-9

List of setting parameters

Color Extraction Settings (Image Operation Unit/PlugIn Unit: Source Image 2)

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Color type PRM.CLREXT2.WAY OFF -1 X X X 
image 2:
Color Color to 0
Extraction Binary
Color to Gray 2
Gray 3
RGB Gray 5
R Grayscale 6
G Grayscale 7
B Grayscale 8
Enable Color PRM.CLREXT2. Enable 1 X X X X
Extraction CEXTEN
Disable 0
Source Sensitivity PRM.CLREXT2.ESEN 3 10 0 2 0 X X X 
image 2:
Color Extraction area PRM.CLREXT2.EW 3 32 1 2 0 X X X 
Extraction:
Color to Background color PRM.CLREXT2.BCLR Black 0 X X X 
Binary
White 255
Array reference PRM.CLREXT2.AREF   X 
Hue: Min PRM.CLREXT2.HTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Hue: Max PRM.CLREXT2.HTH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Saturation: Min PRM.CLREXT2.STH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Saturation: Max PRM.CLREXT2.STH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness: Min PRM.CLREXT2.VTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness: Max PRM.CLREXT2.VTH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Source Sensitivity PRM.CLREXT2.ESEN 3 10 0 2 0 X X X 
image 2:
Color Extraction area PRM.CLREXT2.EW 3 32 1 2 0 X X X 
Extraction:
Color to Array reference PRM.CLREXT2.AREF   X 
Gray
Hue: Min PRM.CLREXT2.HTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Hue: Max PRM.CLREXT2.HTH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Hue Slope: Min PRM.CLREXT2.HCO:LL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Hue Slope: Max PRM.CLREXT2.HCO:HL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Saturation: Min PRM.CLREXT2.STH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Saturation: Max PRM.CLREXT2.STH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Saturation Slope: PRM.CLREXT2.SCO:LL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Min
Saturation Slope: PRM.CLREXT2.SCO:HL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Max
Brightness: Min PRM.CLREXT2.VTH:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness: Max PRM.CLREXT2.VTH:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
Brightness Slope: PRM.CLREXT2.VCO:LL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Min
Brightness Slope: PRM.CLREXT2.VCO:HL 10 100 10 3 0   X 
Max

3-10 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Color Extraction Settings (MultiSpectrum Mode)

System variable Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Color No. of colors PRM.MCLREXT.FG_N 0 32 0 2 0 × × × 
Extraction
(MultiSpectrum): No. of colors PRM.MCLREXT.BG_N 0 32 0 2 0 × × × 
Common Color type PRM.MCLREXT.WAY OFF -1 × × × 
Color to 0
Binary
Color to Gray 1
Fine Color 2
RGB Gray 3
Refer to 4
Other Unit
Reference Unit ID PRM.MCLREXT.MCRUID -1 999 -1 3 0 × × × 
(Averaging) Size PRM.MCLREXT.FKSZ 3: VGA 63 3 3 0 × × × 
7: 2M/5M
(Averaging) Enable/ PRM.MCLREXT.SMENB 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Disable
(Averaging) No. of times PRM.MCLREXT.PTMS 1 9 1 1 0 × × × 
Brightness range, whole PRM.MCLREXT.CMN_BR 0 50 0 2 1 × × × 
Color range, whole PRM.MCLREXT.CMN_CH 1 999.999 0.001 3 3 × × × 
Color (Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Extraction Enable/Disable [0].EN
(MultiSpectrum):
Extraction color (Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI 1 999.999 0.001 3 3 × × × 
Color range [0].CHROM
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI 0 50 0 2 1 × × × 
Brightness range [0].BRIGHT
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCUV
color (UV)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCB
color (B)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCG
color (G)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCAM
color (AM)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCR
color (R)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCFR
color (FR)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCIR
color (IR)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCW
color (W)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI - -99999.999 99999.999 5 3 × × × 
Color information [0].CDIST[s]
(Extracted Colors 1) PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI
[1].***
···

···

(Extracted Colors PRM.MCLREXT.CFG.CI

31) [31].***

XG-X Comm-US 3-11

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Color (Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Extraction Enable/Disable [0].EN
(MultiSpectrum):
Exclusion color (Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI 1 999.999 0.001 3 3 × × × 
Color range [0].CHROM
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI 0 50 0 2 1 × × × 
Brightness range [0].BRIGHT
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCUV
color (UV)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCB
color (B)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCG
color (G)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCAM
color (AM)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCR
color (R)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCFR
color (FR)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCIR
color (IR)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCW
color (W)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI - -99999.999 99999.999 5 3 × × × 
Color information [0].CDIST[s]
(Excluded Colors 1) PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI
[1].***
···

···

(Excluded Colors PRM.MCLREXT.CBG.CI

31) [31].***

3-12 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Color Extraction Settings (MultiSpectrum Mode: Image Operation Unit/PlugIn

Unit: Source Image 1)

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

System variable Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Color Extraction No. of colors PRM.MCLREXT1.FG_N 0 32 0 2 0 × × × 
(MultiSpectrum):
Common No. of colors PRM.MCLREXT1.BG_N 0 32 0 2 0 × × × 
Color type PRM.MCLREXT1.WAY OFF -1 × × × 
Color to 0
Binary
Color to Gray 1
Fine Color 2
RGB Gray 3
Refer to 4
Other Unit
Reference Unit ID PRM.MCLREXT1.MCRUID -1 999 -1 3 0 × × × 
(Averaging) Size PRM.MCLREXT1.FKSZ 3: VGA 63 3 3 0 × × × 
7: 2M/5M
(Averaging) Enable/ PRM.MCLREXT1.SMENB 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Disable
(Averaging) No. of times PRM.MCLREXT1.PTMS 1 9 1 1 0 × × × 
Brightness range, whole PRM.MCLREXT1.CMN_BR 0 50 0 2 1 × × × 
Color range, whole PRM.MCLREXT1.CMN_CH 1 999.999 0.001 3 3 × × × 
Color Extraction (Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
(MultiSpectrum): Enable/Disable [0].EN
Extraction color
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI 1 999.999 0.001 3 3 × × × 
Color range [0].CHROM
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI 0 50 0 2 1 × × × 
Brightness range [0].BRIGHT
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCUV
color (UV)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCB
color (B)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCG
color (G)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCAM
color (AM)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCR
color (R)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCFR
color (FR)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCIR
color (IR)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCW
color (W)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI - -99999.999 99999.999 5 3 × × × 
Color information [0].CDIST[s]
(Extracted Colors 1) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI[1].***
···

···

(Extracted Colors 31) PRM.MCLREXT1.CFG.CI[31].***

XG-X Comm-US 3-13

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Color Extraction (Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
(MultiSpectrum): Enable/Disable [0].EN
Exclusion color
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI 1 999.999 0.001 3 3 × × × 
Color range [0].CHROM
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI 0 50 0 2 1 × × × 
Brightness range [0].BRIGHT
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCUV
color (UV)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCB
color (B)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCG
color (G)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCAM
color (AM)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCR
color (R)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCFR
color (FR)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCIR
color (IR)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCW
color (W)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI - -99999.999 99999.999 5 3 × × × 
Color information [0].CDIST[s]
(Excluded Colors 1) PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI
[1].***
···

···

(Excluded Colors PRM.MCLREXT1.CBG.CI

31) [31].***

3-14 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Color Extraction Settings (MultiSpectrum Mode: Image Operation Unit/PlugIn

Unit: Source Image 2)

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

System variable Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Color Extraction No. of colors PRM.MCLREXT2.FG_N 0 32 0 2 0 × × × 
(MultiSpectrum):
Common No. of colors PRM.MCLREXT2.BG_N 0 32 0 2 0 × × × 
Color type PRM.MCLREXT2.WAY OFF -1 × × × 
Color to 0
Binary
Color to Gray 1
Fine Color 2
RGB Gray 3
Refer to 4
Other Unit
Reference Unit ID PRM.MCLREXT2.MCRUID -1 999 -1 3 0 × × × 
(Averaging) Size PRM.MCLREXT2.FKSZ 3: VGA 63 3 3 0 × × × 
7: 2M/5M
(Averaging) Enable/ PRM.MCLREXT2.SMENB 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Disable
(Averaging) No. of times PRM.MCLREXT2.PTMS 1 9 1 1 0 × × × 
Brightness range, whole PRM.MCLREXT2.CMN_BR 0 50 0 2 1 × × × 
Color range, whole PRM.MCLREXT2.CMN_CH 1 999.999 0.001 3 3 × × × 
Color Extraction (Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
(MultiSpectrum): Enable/Disable [0].EN
Extraction color
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI 1 999.999 0.001 3 3 × × × 
Color range [0].CHROM
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI 0 50 0 2 1 × × × 
Brightness range [0].BRIGHT
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCUV
color (UV)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCB
color (B)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCG
color (G)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCAM
color (AM)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCR
color (R)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCFR
color (FR)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCIR
color (IR)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCW
color (W)
(Extracted Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI - -99999.999 99999.999 5 3 × × × 
Color information [0].CDIST[s]
(Extracted Colors 1) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI[1].***
···

···

(Extracted Colors 31) PRM.MCLREXT2.CFG.CI[31].***

XG-X Comm-US 3-15

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Color Extraction (Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
(MultiSpectrum): Enable/Disable [0].EN
Exclusion color
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI 1 999.999 0.001 3 3 × × × 
Color range [0].CHROM
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI 0 50 0 2 1 × × × 
Brightness range [0].BRIGHT
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCUV
color (UV)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCB
color (B)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCG
color (G)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCAM
color (AM)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCR
color (R)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCFR
color (FR)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCIR
color (IR)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each [0].AVCW
color (W)
(Excluded Colors 0) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI - -99999.999 99999.999 5 3 × × × 
Color information [0].CDIST[s]
(Excluded Colors 1) PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI
[1].***
···

···

(Excluded Colors PRM.MCLREXT2.CBG.CI

31) [31].***

3-16 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Inspection region
* "Full Image" for the image operation unit

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

System variable Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Inspection Enable region PRM.RGN.RGNEN Enable 1 X X X 
region
Disable 0
Shape PRM.RGN.SHP None * 0 X X X 
Rectangle 1
Rotated 2
rectangle
(* Edge angle
unit only)
Rotated 3
rectangle
(* Units other
than the edge
angle unit)
Circle 4
Oval 5
Ring 6
Arc 7
Polygon 8
Composition 15
region
Inspection Upper left XY PRM.RGN.LUXY 5 0  X  
region:
Rectangle Upper left X PRM.RGN.LUX 16383 0 5 0    
Upper left Y PRM.RGN.LUY 16383 0 5 0    
Lower right XY PRM.RGN.RDXY 5 0  X  
Lower right X PRM.RGN.RDX 16383 0 5 0    
Lower right Y PRM.RGN.RDY 16383 0 5 0    
Inspection Width PRM.RGN.WI 16383 1 5 0    
region:
Rotated Height PRM.RGN.HI 16383 1 5 0    
rectangle: Segment PRM.RGN.SH 16383 1 5 0    
(Edge height
angle
unit only) Center XY PRM.RGN.RCXY 5 0  X  
Center X PRM.RGN.RCX 16382 0 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.RCY 16382 0 5 0    
Rotation angle PRM.RGN.T 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Inspection Width PRM.RGN.WI 16383 1 5 0    
region:
Rotated Height PRM.RGN.HI 16383 1 5 0    
rectangle: Center XY PRM.RGN.RCXY 5 0  X  
(Units
other than Center X PRM.RGN.RCX 16382 0 5 0    
the edge
angle unit) Center Y PRM.RGN.RCY 16382 0 5 0    
Rotation angle PRM.RGN.T 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Inspection Center XY PRM.RGN.CXY 5 0  X  
region:
Circle Center X PRM.RGN.CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius PRM.RGN.CR 9600 0 4 0    
Inspection Center XY PRM.RGN.CXY 5 0  X  
region:
Oval Center X PRM.RGN.CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.RGN.CR1 2580 8 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.RGN.CR2 2580 8 4 0    
Rotation angle PRM.RGN.T 359.9 0.0 3 1    

XG-X Comm-US 3-17

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Inspection Center XY PRM.RGN.CXY 5 0  X  
region:
Ring Center X PRM.RGN.CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.RGN.CR1 9600 0 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.RGN.CR2 9600 0 4 0    
Inspection Center XY PRM.RGN.CXY 5 0  X  
region:
Arc Center X PRM.RGN.CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.RGN.CR1 9600 0 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.RGN.CR2 9600 0 4 0    
Start angle PRM.RGN.STA 359.9 0.0 3 1    
End angle PRM.RGN.ENA 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Inspection No. of vertices PRM.RGN.PN 12 0 2 0 X X X 
region:
Polygon Max. No. of PRM.RGN.MXPN 12 12 12 2 0 X X X X
vertices
Point * XY PRM.RGN.PXY[*] 5 0  X  
Point * X PRM.RGN.PX[*] 16383 0 5 0    
Point * Y PRM.RGN.PY[*] 16383 0 5 0    
Composition Enable region PRM.RGN.CMP[0].RGNEN Enable 1 X X X 
region 0
Disable 0
Shape PRM.RGN.CMP[0].SHP OFF 0 X X X 
Rectangle 1
Rotated 3
rectangle
Circle 4
Oval 5
Ring 6
Arc 7
Polygon 8
Enable mask PRM.RGN.CMP[0].MSKEN Enable 1 X X X 
Disable 0
Composition Upper left XY PRM.RGN.CMP[0].LUXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Rectangle Upper left X PRM.RGN.CMP[0].LUX 16383 0 5 0    
Upper left Y PRM.RGN.CMP[0].LUY 16383 0 5 0    
Lower right XY PRM.RGN.CMP[0].RDXY 5 0  X  
Lower right X PRM.RGN.CMP[0].RDX 16383 0 5 0    
Lower right Y PRM.RGN.CMP[0].RDY 16383 0 5 0    
Composition Width PRM.RGN.CMP[0].WI 16383 1 5 0    
region 0:
Rotated Height PRM.RGN.CMP[0].HI 16383 1 5 0    
rectangle Center XY PRM.RGN.CMP[0].RCXY 5 0  X  
Center X PRM.RGN.CMP[0].RCX 16382 0 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.CMP[0].RCY 16382 0 5 0    
Rotation angle PRM.RGN.CMP[0].T 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Composition Center XY PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Circle Center X PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CR 9600 0 4 0    

3-18 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Composition Center XY PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Oval Center X PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CR1 2580 8 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CR2 2580 8 4 0    
Rotation angle PRM.RGN.CMP[0].T 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Composition Center XY PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Ring Center X PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CR1 9600 0 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CR2 9600 0 4 0    
Composition Center XY PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Arc Center X PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CR1 9600 0 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.RGN.CMP[0].CR2 9600 0 4 0    
Start angle PRM.RGN.CMP[0].STA 359.9 0.0 3 1    
End angle PRM.RGN.CMP[0].ENA 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Composition No. of vertices PRM.RGN.CMP[0].PN 12 0 2 0 X X X 
region 0:
Polygon Max. No. of PRM.RGN.CMP[0].MXPN 12 12 12 2 0 X X X X
vertices
Point * XY PRM.RGN.CMP[0].PXY[*] 5 0  X  
Point * X PRM.RGN.CMP[0].PX[*] 16383 0 5 0    
Point * Y PRM.RGN.CMP[0].PY[*] 16383 0 5 0    
Composition PRM.RGN.CMP[1].*** 
region 1

⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

Composition PRM.RGN.CMP[31].*** 
region 31
Mask Enable mask PRM.RGN.MSK[0].RGNEN Enable 1 X X X 
region 0
Disable 0
Shape PRM.RGN.MSK[0].SHP OFF 0 X X X 
Rectangle 1
Rotated 3
rectangle
Circle 4
Oval 5
Ring 6
Arc 7
Polygon 8
Mask Upper left XY PRM.RGN.MSK[0].LUXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Rectangle Upper left X PRM.RGN.MSK[0].LUX 16383 0 5 0    
Upper left Y PRM.RGN.MSK[0].LUY 16383 0 5 0    
Lower right XY PRM.RGN.MSK[0].RDXY 5 0  X  
Lower right X PRM.RGN.MSK[0].RDX 16383 0 5 0    
Lower right Y PRM.RGN.MSK[0].RDY 16383 0 5 0    
Mask Width PRM.RGN.MSK[0].WI 16383 1 5 0    
region 0:
Rotated Height PRM.RGN.MSK[0].HI 16383 1 5 0    
rectangle Center XY PRM.RGN.MSK[0].RCXY 5 0  X  
Center X PRM.RGN.MSK[0].RCX 16382 0 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.MSK[0].RCY 16382 0 5 0    
Rotation angle PRM.RGN.MSK[0].T 359.9 0.0 3 1    

XG-X Comm-US 3-19

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Mask Center XY PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Circle Center X PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CR 9600 0 4 0    
Mask Center XY PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Oval Center X PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CR1 2580 8 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CR2 2580 8 4 0    
Rotation angle PRM.RGN.MSK[0].T 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Mask Center XY PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Ring Center X PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CR1 9600 0 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CR2 9600 0 4 0    
Mask Center XY PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Arc Center X PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CR1 9600 0 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.RGN.MSK[0].CR2 9600 0 4 0    
Start angle PRM.RGN.MSK[0].STA 359.9 0.0 3 1    
End angle PRM.RGN.MSK[0].ENA 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Mask No. of vertices PRM.RGN.MSK[0].PN 12 0 2 0 X X X 
region 0:
Polygon Max. No. of PRM.RGN.MSK[0].MXPN 12 12 2 0 X X X X
vertices
Point * XY PRM.RGN.MSK[0].PXY[*] 5 0  X  
Point * X PRM.RGN.MSK[0].PX[*] 16383 0 5 0    
Point * Y PRM.RGN.MSK[0].PY[*] 16383 0 5 0    
Mask PRM.RGN.MSK[1].***
region 1
Mask PRM.RGN.MSK[2].***
region 2
Mask PRM.RGN.MSK[3].***
region 3
Processed Processed image PRM.RGN.IMG.IRGNEN ON 1 X X X 
image region
region OFF 0
Area PRM.RGN.IMG.DC Black 0    
White 255

3-20 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Inspection Region (for Multi-Profile Defect/Contour Region Generator)

System variable Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Model Line (Auto Extract Settings) PRM.RGN.FLEXE.AESTW Narrow 1 × × × 
Region: Search Step Width
Standard 2
Common
Wide 3
(Auto Extract Settings) PRM.RGN.FLEXE.AEPRD DarkerBrighter 2 × × × 
Edge Search Direction
BrighterDarker 1
(Default Settings) PRM.RGN.FLEXD.RGWD 20 200 5 3 0 × × × 
Region Width
(Default Settings) PRM.RGN.FLEXD.RGPRD  16 × × × 
Detection Direction
 17
(Default Settings) PRM.RGN.FLEXD.RGEGD Both 3 × × × 
Edge Direction BrighterDarker 1
DarkerBrighter 2
Region Count PRM.RGN.FLEX.MXFN 0 128 0 3 0 × × × 
Region array No. PRM.RGN.FLEX.ARID[s] 0 999 0 3 0 × × × 
Model Line Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].RGNEN Enable 1 × × × ×
Region: Region enabled Disable 0
Individual
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].SHP Auto Extract 0 1 0 × × × ×
Shape
Line 1
Arc 2
Ring 3
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].RGNO 0 999 0 3 0 × × × 
Region No.
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].RGWD 20 200 5 3 0 × × × 
Region Width
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].RGPRD  16 × × × 
Detection Direction
 17
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].RGEGD Both 3 × × × 
Edge Direction BrighterDarker 1
DarkerBrighter 2
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].RGBML Circle 1 × × × 
Model Line Line 2
Oval 3
Free Curve 4
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].SMR 20.000 200.000 0.000 3 3 × × × 
Smoothing Range (%)
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].RID 0 3599 -3600 4 0 × × × 
Specified Edge
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].DFEN 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Defect Detection
Enabled
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].DTNO 0 4 0 1 0 × × × 
Detection Condition
Setting
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].CPN 0 16384 0 5 0 × × × ×
No. of control points
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].CONTP.CP 5 0 × × × 
Control point XY XY[s]
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].CONTP.CP 331 16383 0 5 0 × × × 
Control point X X[s]
Inspection Region 0: PRM.RGN.FLEX[0].CONTP.CP 337 16383 0 5 0 × × × 
Control point Y Y[s]
Inspection Region 1 PRM.RGN.FLEX[1].***
···

···

Inspection Region 127 PRM.RGN.FLEX[127].***

XG-X Comm-US 3-21

List of setting parameters

Pattern region

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Pattern Enable region PRM.PTRN.RGNEN Enable 1 X X X 
region
Disable 0
Shape PRM.PTRN.SHP OFF 0 X X X 
Rectangle 1
Rotated 3
rectangle
Circle 4
Oval 5
Ring 6
Arc 7
Polygon 8
Pattern Upper left XY PRM.PTRN.LUXY 5 0  X  
region:
Rectangle Upper left X PRM.PTRN.LUX 16383 0 5 0    
Upper left Y PRM.PTRN.LUY 16383 0 5 0    
Lower right XY PRM.PTRN.RDXY 5 0  X  
Lower right X PRM.PTRN.RDX 16383 0 5 0    
Lower right Y PRM.PTRN.RDY 16383 0 5 0    
Pattern Width PRM.PTRN.WI 16383 1 5 0    
region:
Rotated Height PRM.PTRN.HI 16383 1 5 0    
rectangle Center XY PRM.PTRN.RCXY 5 0  X  
Center X PRM.PTRN.RCX 16382 0 5 0    
Center Y PRM.PTRN.RCY 16382 0 5 0    
Rotation angle PRM.PTRN.T 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Pattern Center XY PRM.PTRN.CXY 5 0  X  
region:
Circle Center X PRM.PTRN.CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.PTRN.CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius PRM.PTRN.CR 9600 0 4 0    
Pattern Center XY PRM.PTRN.CXY 5 0  X  
region:
Oval Center X PRM.PTRN.CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.PTRN.CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.PTRN.CR1 2580 8 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.PTRN.CR2 2580 8 4 0    
Rotation angle PRM.PTRN.T 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Pattern Center XY PRM.PTRN.CXY 5 0  X  
region:
Ring Center X PRM.PTRN.CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.PTRN.CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.PTRN.CR1 9600 0 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.PTRN.CR2 9600 0 4 0    
Pattern Center XY PRM.PTRN.CXY 5 0  X  
region:
Arc Center X PRM.PTRN.CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.PTRN.CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.PTRN.CR1 9600 0 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.PTRN.CR2 9600 0 4 0    
Start angle PRM.PTRN.STA 359.9 0.0 3 1    
End angle PRM.PTRN.ENA 359.9 0.0 3 1    

3-22 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Pattern No. of vertices PRM.PTRN.PN 12 0 4 0 X X X 
region:
Polygon Max. No. of PRM.PTRN.MXPN 12 12 12 4 0 X X X X
vertices
Point * XY PRM.PTRN.PXY[*] 5 0  X  
Point * X PRM.PTRN.PX[*] 16383 0 5 0    
Point * Y PRM.PTRN.PY[*] 16383 0 5 0    
Mask Enable mask PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].RGNEN Enable 1 X X X 
region 0
Disable 0
Shape PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].SHP OFF 0 X X X 
Rectangle 1
Rotated 3
rectangle
Circle 4
Oval 5
Ring 6
Arc 7
Polygon 8
Multiple area 16
Mask Upper left XY PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].LUXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Rectangle Upper left X PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].LUX 16383 0 5 0    
Upper left Y PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].LUY 16383 0 5 0    
Lower right XY PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].RDXY 5 0  X  
Lower right X PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].RDX 16383 0 5 0    
Lower right Y PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].RDY 16383 0 5 0    
Mask Width PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].WI 16383 1 5 0    
region 0:
Rotated Height PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].HI 16383 1 5 0    
rectangle Center XY PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].RCXY 5 0  X  
Center X PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].RCX 16382 0 5 0    
Center Y PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].RCY 16382 0 5 0    
Rotation angle PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].T 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Mask Center XY PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Circle Center X PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CR 9600 0 4 0    
Mask Center XY PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Oval Center X PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CR1 2580 8 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CR2 2580 8 4 0    
Rotation angle PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].T 359.9 0.0 3 1    
Mask Center XY PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Ring Center X PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CR1 9600 0 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CR2 9600 0 4 0    
Mask Center XY PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CXY 5 0  X  
region 0:
Arc Center X PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0    
Center Y PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0    
Radius 1 PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CR1 9600 0 4 0    
Radius 2 PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].CR2 9600 0 4 0    
Start angle PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].STA 359.9 0.0 3 1    
End angle PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].ENA 359.9 0.0 3 1    

XG-X Comm-US 3-23

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Mask No. of vertices PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].PN 12 0 4 0 X X X 
region 0:
Polygon Max. No. of PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].MXPN 12 12 12 4 0 X X X X
vertices
Point * XY PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].PXY[*] 5 0  X  
Point * X PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].PX[*] 16383 0 5 0    
Point * Y PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].PY[*] 16383 0 5 0    
Mask Shape of multiple PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].PFSHP Rectangle 1    
region 0: figure
Multiple Circle 0
area Size PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].PFSZ 10 100 3 3 0    
(ShapeTrax3A
Unit only) Number of PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].PFN 0 15 0 2 0    
multiple figure
Maximum PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].MXPFN 15 15 15 2 0 X X X X
quantity
Array reference PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].PFAR    
Position * XY PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].PFXY[*] 5 0 
Position * X PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].PFX[*] 160 16383 0 5 0 X X X 
Position * Y PRM.PTRN.MSK[0].PFY[*] 160 16383 0 5 0 X X X 
Mask PRM.PTRN.MSK[1].***
region 1
Mask PRM.PTRN.MSK[2].***
region 2
Mask PRM.PTRN.MSK[3].***
region 3

3-24 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Image Enhancement Filter

System variable Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Filter Type PRM.FLTR[0].FTYP None 0 X X X 
enhance 0
Binary 17
Expand 1
Shrink 2
Average 5
Median 6
Sharpen 7
Sobel X 11
Sobel Y 12
Sobel 13
Prewitt 15
Roberts 16
Laplacian 14
Subtract 19
Preserve 22
intensity
Contrast 23
conversion
Image 24
extraction
Shading 25
correction
Blur 26
Custom 18
Custom 27
(Advance)
Blob 50
Scratch 82
Defect
Extraction
Noise 83
Isolation
Contrast 84
Expansion
Convex Hull 110
Average 75
(height
image)
Median 76
(height
image)
Gaussian 77
Smoothing 80
Invalid pixel 51
suppression
Spike noise 85
cut
Image 102
Extraction
(3D)
Image Upper limit PRM.FLTR[0].BIN:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
enhance 0:
Binary Lower limit PRM.FLTR[0].BIN:LL 128 255 0 3 0   X 
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-25

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Size PRM.FLTR[0].FKSZ 3x3 0   X 
enhance 0:
Expand 5x5 1
7×7 2
9×9 3
11×11 4
13×13 5
15×15 6
17×17 7
19×19 8
21×21 9
23×23 10
25×25 11
27×27 12
29×29 13
31×31 14
Direction PRM.FLTR[0].PRD X 1   X 
Y 2
XY 3
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
Border PRM.FLTR[0].CFR ON 0   X 
OFF 1
Processing Shape PRM.FLTR[0].FKSHP Square 0 X X X 
Circle 1
Image Size PRM.FLTR[0].FKSZ 3x3 0   X 
enhance 0:
Shrink 5x5 1
7×7 2
9×9 3
11×11 4
13×13 5
15×15 6
17×17 7
19×19 8
21×21 9
23×23 10
25×25 11
27×27 12
29×29 13
31×31 14
Direction PRM.FLTR[0].PRD X 1   X 
Y 2
XY 3
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
Border PRM.FLTR[0].CFR ON 0   X 
OFF 1
Processing Shape PRM.FLTR[0].FKSHP Square 0 X X X 
Circle 1

3-26 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Size PRM.FLTR[0].FKSZ 3×3 0 X X X 
enhance 0:
Average 5×5 1
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
Expansion PRM.FLTR[0].SPEX ON 0 1 0   X 
suppression OFF 1
Image Size PRM.FLTR[0].FKSZ 3x3 0   X 
enhance 0:
Median 5x5 1
7×7 2
9×9 3
11×11 4
13×13 5
15×15 6
17×17 7
19×19 8
21×21 9
23×23 10
25×25 11
27×27 12
29×29 13
31×31 14
Size PRM.FLTR[0].FKSZ 3×3 0 X X X 
(height image) 5×5 1
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
Expansion PRM.FLTR[0].SPEX ON 0 1 0   X 
suppression OFF 1
Image Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
enhance 0:
Sharpen
Image Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
enhance 0:
Sobel
X
Image Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
enhance 0:
Sobel
Y
Image Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
enhance 0:
Sobel
Image Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
enhance 0:
Prewitt
Image Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
enhance 0:
Roberts
Image Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
enhance 0:
Laplacian
Image Mask area PRM.FLTR[0].STMS 2 9 0 1 0   X 
enhance 0:
Subtract Extract PRM.FLTR[0].ECLR Bright & Dark 0   X 
Bright 1
Dark 2
Registered image PRM.FLTR[0].HSM Fixed (fast) 1 X X X 
Updated each 0
process (slow)
User updated 2
(fast)

XG-X Comm-US 3-27

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
enhance 0:
Subtract Large area mode PRM.FLTR[0].SBLAM Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Image Reference PRM.FLTR[0].RUID -1 999 -1 3 0   X 
enhance 0: Unit ID
Preserve
intensity Base value PRM.FLTR[0].RVSW Refer unit 0 X X X 
specification results
User set 1
Base value PRM.FLTR[0].RVAL 0.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   X 
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Image Offset PRM.FLTR[0].OFFS 0 255 -255 3 0   X 
enhance 0:
Contrast Span PRM.FLTR[0].SPAN 1.0 7.9 0.0 1 1   X 
conversion Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Image Extract color PRM.FLTR[0].ECLR Bright 1   X 
enhance 0:
Image Dark 2
extraction Reduction size PRM.FLTR[0].ESZ 5 39 3 3 0   X 
Direction PRM.FLTR[0].PRD X 1   X 
Y 2
XY 3
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Border PRM.FLTR[0].CFR ON 0   X 
OFF 1
Image Correction PRM.FLTR[0].MTD Average 0   X 
Enhance 0: method correction
Shading
Correction Median 1
correction
Shading 2
correction
High-speed 3
shading
correction
Reduction size PRM.FLTR[0].ESZ 16 2000 4 4 0   X 
Direction PRM.FLTR[0].PRD X 1   X 
Y 2
XY 3
Extract color PRM.FLTR[0].ECLR Bright 1 X X X 
Dark 2
Bright & Dark 0
Individual 3
Bright gain PRM.FLTR[0].GNBR 2.0 10.0 0.0 2 1   X 
Bright noise cut PRM.FLTR[0].NSBR 0.0 255.0 0.0 3 1   X 
Dark gain PRM.FLTR[0].GNDR 2.0 10.0 0.0 2 1   X 
Dark noise cut PRM.FLTR[0].NSDR 0.0 255.0 0.0 3 1   X 
Uniform contrast PRM.FLTR[0].ENUNF ON 1   X 
OFF 0
Border PRM.FLTR[0].CFR ON 0   X 
OFF 1
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Image Level PRM.FLTR[0].BLDG 1 99 1 2 0   X 
Enhance 0:
Blur Direction PRM.FLTR[0].PRD X 1   X 
Y 2
XY 3
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 

3-28 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Size PRM.FLTR[0].FKSZ 3x3 0 X X X 
enhance 0:
Custom 5x5 1
Offset PRM.FLTR[0].OFFS 0 255 -255 3 0   X 
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
Array reference PRM.FLTR[0].AREF   X 
Filter coefficient 0 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC00 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 1 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC01 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 2 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC02 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 3 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC03 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 4 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC04 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 5 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC05 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 6 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC06 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 7 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC07 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 8 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC08 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 9 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC09 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 10 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC10 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 11 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC11 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 12 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC12 1.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 13 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC13 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 14 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC14 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 15 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC15 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 16 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC16 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 17 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC17 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 18 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC18 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 19 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC19 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 20 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC20 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 21 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC21 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 22 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC22 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 23 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC23 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 24 PRM.FLTR[0].FKC24 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Image Size PRM.FLTR[0].FKSZ 3x3 0 X X X 
Enhance 0:
Custom 5x5 1
Advance 7x7 2
9x9 3
11 x 11 4
13 x 13 5
15 x 15 6
17 x 17 7
19 x 19 8
21 x 21 9
Operation PRM.FLTR[0].PMTD Convolution 0 X X X 
Expand 1
Shrink 2
Filter coefficient PRM.FLTR[0].FKCE   X 
Divisor PRM.FLTR[0].DIV 1.000 99999.999 0.001 5 3   X 
Shift PRM.FLTR[0].OFFS 0 255 -255 3 0   X 
Negative pixel PRM.FLTR[0].MNTR Fixed to 0 0   X 
correction
Absolute 1
value
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
Border PRM.FLTR[0].CFR ON 0   X 
OFF 1

XG-X Comm-US 3-29

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Detect PRM.FLTR[0].DC White 255   X 
enhance 0:
Blob Black 0
Count PRM.FLTR[0].DBN 30 9999 1 4 0   X 
Fill holes PRM.FLTR[0].FILL OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Active border PRM.FLTR[0].CAN OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Detection order PRM.FLTR[0].LOD Y>X: Ascend 5   X 
X>Y: Ascend 6
X:Ascend 1
X:Descend 2
Y:Ascend 3
Y:Descend 4
Area:Ascend 14
Area: 13
Descend
Roundness: 16
Ascend
Roundness: 15
Descend
Clockwise 9
Counterclockwise 10
Starting angle PRM.FLTR[0].STA 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Primary target PRM.FLTR[0].LBS All 0 X X X 
specification
Specified 1
Primary target PRM.FLTR[0].LLBS 0 9998 0 4 0   X 
Pixel values after PRM.FLTR[0].CODC 255 255 0 3 0   X 
conversion:
Detected color
Pixel values after PRM.FLTR[0].COBC 0 255 0 3 0   X 
conversion:
Background
color
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Area filter PRM.FLTR[0].ARI_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Roundness filter PRM.FLTR[0].CIR_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Major axis filter PRM.FLTR[0].MAA_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Axes ratio filter PRM.FLTR[0].RTO_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Distributed oval PRM.FLTR[0].MAA2_EN Disable 0   X 
filter
Enable 1
Aspect ratio filter PRM.FLTR[0].RTO2_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Area filter: PRM.FLTR[0].ARI_THRES:HL 99999999 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Maximum
Area filter: PRM.FLTR[0].ARI_THRES:LL 100 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Minimum
Roundness filter: PRM.FLTR[0].CIR_THRES:HL 1.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Maximum
Roundness filter: PRM.FLTR[0].CIR_THRES:LL 0.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Minimum
Major axis filter: PRM.FLTR[0].MAA_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum

3-30 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Major axis filter: PRM.FLTR[0].MAA_THRES: LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
enhance 0: Minimum
Blob
(continued) Axes ratio filter: PRM.FLTR[0].RTO_THRES: HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum
Axes ratio filter: PRM.FLTR[0].RTO_THRES: LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum
Distributed oval PRM.FLTR[0].MAA2_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter: Maximum
Distributed oval PRM.FLTR[0].MAA2_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter: Minimum
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.FLTR[0].RTO2_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.FLTR[0].RTO2_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum
Image Level PRM.FLTR[0].IPO_DG 1 19 1 1 0    
enhance 0:
Inv. Pixel Adj. Width PRM.FLTR[0].IPO_PS Large 0 1 0    
Suppress. Small 1
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0    
Outline PRM.FLTR[0].IPO_CCF ON 0 1 0    
Interpolation OFF 1
Suppression
Smoothing Size PRM.FLTR[0].IPO_SMSZ Match w/ 0 1 0    
Level
Narrow 1
Normal 2
Wide 3
Processing PRM.FLTR[0].IPO_CFT Square 0 1 0    
Shape Circle 1
Image Processing PRM.FLTR[0].LSMTD Scratch Defect 0 1 0    
enhance 0: Method Extraction
Scratch
Defect High-Speed 1
Extraction Scratch Defect
Extraction
Reduction PRM.FLTR[0].RDR 2 32 1 2 0    
Extract Size PRM.FLTR[0].BG_RDR 4 32 2 2 0    
Extract Tone PRM.FLTR[0].LSTC Dark 1 1 0    
Bright 0
Bright & Dark 2
Gain PRM.FLTR[0].GNM 2.0 99.9 0.0 2 1    
Linearity PRM.FLTR[0].LNRTY 2 4 1 1 0    
Linear Length PRM.FLTR[0].SMLVL 2 16 1 2 0    
Noise Cut PRM.FLTR[0].NSR 0.0 255.0 0.0 3 1    
Extraction PRM.FLTR[0].ATYP All Angles 0 1 0    
Direction Specify 1
Angle
Starting Angle PRM.FLTR[0].TANG 0.000 179.999 0.000 3 3    
Angle Range PRM.FLTR[0].ARG 45.000 90.000 1.000 2 3    
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0    
Image Target Tone PRM.FLTR[0].CLR Dark 1 1 0    
enhance 0:
Noise Bright 0
Isolation Process Type PRM.FLTR[0].PROCTYP Remove 0 1 0    
Extract 1
Area PRM.FLTR[0].ARSZ 10 99999999 1 8 0    
Reduction PRM.FLTR[0].RDR 2 32 1 2 0    
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0    

XG-X Comm-US 3-31

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Expansion Width PRM.FLTR[0].CEI 15 30 0 2 0    
enhance 0:
Contrast Noise Cut PRM.FLTR[0].SNRDR 0 30 0 2 0    
Expansion Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0    
Image Detection Color PRM.FLTR[0].DC White 255    
enhance 0:
Convex Black 0
Hull Difference PRM.FLTR[0].DIFF_EN ON 1    
Detection OFF 0
Noise Cut PRM.FLTR[0].SNRDR 0 99 0 2 0    
Fill Holes PRM.FLTR[0].FILL ON 1    
OFF 0
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0    
Image Size PRM.FLTR[0].FKSZ 3x3 0    
enhance 0:
Gaussian 5x5 1
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0    
Expansion PRM.FLTR[0].SPEX ON 0    
suppression OFF 1
Image Size PRM.FLTR[0].FKSZ 3 127 3 3 0    
enhance 0:
Smoothing Width PRM.FLTR[0].FKW 3 127 3 3 0    
Height PRM.FLTR[0].FKH 3 127 3 3 0    
Border PRM.FLTR[0].CFR ON 0    
OFF 1
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0    
Expansion PRM.FLTR[0].SPEX ON 0 1 0    
suppression OFF 1
Image Cut Size PRM.FLTR[0].CSZ 4 30 2 2 0    
enhance 0:
Spike Cut Threshold PRM.FLTR[0].CTH 0.5 99.999 0.000 2 3    
Noise Cut (mm) (CA-DQP25X:1.0)
Cut Target PRM.FLTR[0].CDR Upper 0    
Lower 1
Both 2
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0    
Enable Specify PRM.FLTR[0].CPDEN Enable 1 1 0    
Processing Disable 0
Direction
Processing PRM.FLTR[0].CPD X Direction 0 1 0    
Direction Type Y Direction 1
XY Individual 2
X Direction Cut PRM.FLTR[0].CSZ_X 4 30 2 2 0    
Size
Y Direction Cut PRM.FLTR[0].CSZ_Y 4 30 2 2 0    
Size

3-32 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

System variable Referencing

Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Extraction PRM.FLTR[0].EDIR High 1    
enhance 0: Direction
Image Low 2
Extraction High/Low 0
(3D)
Direction PRM.FLTR[0].PRD X 1    
Y 2
XY 3
Extraction Size PRM.FLTR[0].ESZ 11 99 3 2 0    
Extraction Height PRM.FLTR[0].NSTH:HL 999.999 999.999 0.000 3 3    
Range Upper
Limit
Extraction Height PRM.FLTR[0].NSTH:LL 0.005 999.999 0.000 3 3    
Range Lower
Limit
Segment Size PRM.FLTR[0].SGSZ 2 2 1 1 0    
Border PRM.FLTR[0].CFR ON 0    
OFF 1
Count PRM.FLTR[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0    
Image PRM.FLTR[1].***
enhance 1
···

···

Image PRM.FLTR[12].***
enhance 12

XG-X Comm-US 3-33

List of setting parameters

Image Enhancement Filter Settings (Image Operation Unit: Source Image)

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Filter PRM.FLTR1[0].FTYP None 0 X X X 
image 1: Data Type
Image Binary 17
Enhance 0 Expand 1
Shrink 2
Average 5
Median 6
Sharpen 7
Sobel X 11
Sobel Y 12
Sobel 13
Prewitt 15
Roberts 16
Laplacian 14
Preserve 22
intensity
Contrast 23
conversion
Image 24
extraction
Shading 25
correction
Blur 26
Custom 18
Custom 27
(Advance)
Blob 50
Scratch 82
Defect
Extraction
Noise 83
Isolation
Contrast 84
Expansion
Source Upper limit PRM.FLTR1[0].BIN:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
image 1:
Image Lower limit PRM.FLTR1[0].BIN:LL 128 255 0 3 0   X 
Enhance 0: Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Binary

3-34 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Size PRM.FLTR1[0].FKSZ 3x3 0   X 
image 1:
Image 5x5 1
Enhance 0: 7x7 2
Expand
9x9 3
11 x 11 4
13 x 13 5
15 x 15 6
17 x 17 7
19 x 19 8
21 x 21 9
23 x 23 10
25 x 25 11
27 x 27 12
29 x 29 13
31 x 31 14
Direction PRM.FLTR1[0].PRD X 1   X 
Y 2
XY 3
Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
Border PRM.FLTR1[0].CFR ON 0   X 
OFF 1
Processing PRM.FLTR1[0].FKSHP Square 0    
Shape
Circle 1
Source Size PRM.FLTR1[0].FKSZ 3x3 0   X 
image 1:
Image 5x5 1
Enhance 0: 7x7 2
Shrink
9x9 3
11 x 11 4
13 x 13 5
15 x 15 6
17 x 17 7
19 x 19 8
21 x 21 9
23 x 23 10
25 x 25 11
27 x 27 12
29 x 29 13
31 x 31 14
Direction PRM.FLTR1[0].PRD X 1   X 
Y 2
XY 3
Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
Border PRM.FLTR1[0].CFR ON 0   X 
OFF 1
Processing PRM.FLTR1[0].FKSHP Square 0    
Shape
Circle 1
Source Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Image
Enhance 0:
Average

XG-X Comm-US 3-35

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Image Size PRM.FLTR1[0].FKSZ 3x3 0   X 
Enhance 0: 5x5 1
Median
7x7 2
9x9 3
11 x 11 4
13 x 13 5
15 x 15 6
17 x 17 7
19 x 19 8
21 x 21 9
23 x 23 10
25 x 25 11
27 x 27 12
29 x 29 13
31 x 31 14
Processing PRM.FLTR1[0].FKSHP Square 0    
Shape
Circle 1
Source Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Image
Enhance 0:
Sharpen
Source Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Image
Enhance 0:
Sobel
X
Source Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Image
Enhance 0:
Sobel
Y
Source Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Image
Enhance 0:
Sobel
Source Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Image
Enhance 0:
Prewitt
Source Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Image
Enhance 0:
Roberts
Source Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Image
Enhance 0:
Laplacian
Source Reference PRM.FLTR1[0].RUID -1 999 -1 3 0   X 
image 1: Unit ID
Image
Enhance 0: Base value PRM.FLTR1[0].RVSW Refer unit 0 X X X 
Preserve specification results
intensity User set 1
Base value PRM.FLTR1[0].RVAL 0.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   X 
Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 

3-36 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Offset PRM.FLTR1[0].OFFS 0 255 -255 3 0   X 
image 1:
Image Span PRM.FLTR1[0].SPAN 1.0 7.9 0.0 1 1   X 
Enhance 0: Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Contrast
conversion
Source Extract color PRM.FLTR1[0].ECLR Bright 1   X 
image 1:
Image Dark 2
Enhance 0: Reduction size PRM.FLTR1[0].ESZ 5 39 3 2 0   X 
Image
extraction Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Direction PRM.FLTR1[0].PRD X 1   X 
Y 2
XY 3
Border PRM.FLTR1[0].CFR ON 0   X 
OFF 1
Source Correction PRM.FLTR1[0].MTD Average 0   X 
image 1: method correction
Image
Enhance 0: Median 1
Shading correction
Correction Shading 2
correction
High-speed 3
shading
correction
Reduction size PRM.FLTR1[0].ESZ 16 2000 4 4 0   X 
Direction PRM.FLTR1[0].PRD X 1   X 
Y 2
XY 3
Extract color PRM.FLTR1[0].ECLR Bright 1 X X X 
Dark 2
Bright & Dark 0
Individual 3
Bright gain PRM.FLTR1[0].GNBR 2.0 10.0 0.0 2 1   X 
Bright noise cut PRM.FLTR1[0].NSBR 0.0 255.0 0.0 3 1   X 
Dark gain PRM.FLTR1[0].GNDR 2.0 10.0 0.0 2 1   X 
Dark noise cut PRM.FLTR1[0].NSDR 0.0 255.0 0.0 3 1   X 
Uniform contrast PRM.FLTR1[0].ENUNF ON 1   X 
OFF 0
Border PRM.FLTR1[0].CFR ON 0   X 
OFF 1
Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Source Level PRM.FLTR1[0].BLDG 1 99 1 2 0   X 
image 1:
Image Direction PRM.FLTR1[0].PRD X 1   X 
Enhance 0: Y 2
Blur
XY 3
Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-37

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Size PRM.FLTR1[0].FKSZ 3x3 0 X X X 
image 1:
Image 5x5 1
Enhance 0: Offset PRM.FLTR1[0].OFFS 0 255 -255 3 0   X 
Custom
Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
Array reference PRM.FLTR1[0].AREF   X 
Filter coefficient 0 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC00 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 1 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC01 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 2 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC02 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 3 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC03 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 4 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC04 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 5 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC05 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 6 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC06 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 7 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC07 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 8 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC08 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 9 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC09 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 10 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC10 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 11 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC11 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 12 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC12 1.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 13 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC13 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 14 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC14 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 15 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC15 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 16 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC16 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 17 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC17 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 18 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC18 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 19 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC19 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 20 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC20 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 21 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC21 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 22 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC22 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 23 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC23 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Filter coefficient 24 PRM.FLTR1[0].FKC24 0.0 32.0 -32.0 2 1   X 
Source Size PRM.FLTR1[0].FKSZ 3x3 0 X X X 
image 1:
Image 5x5 1
Enhance 0: 7x7 2
Custom
Advance 9x9 3
11 x 11 4
13 x 13 5
15 x 15 6
17 x 17 7
19 x 19 8
21 x 21 9
Operation PRM.FLTR1[0].PMTD Convolution 0 X X X 
Expand 1
Shrink 2
Filter coefficient PRM.FLTR1[0].FKCE   X 
Divisor PRM.FLTR1[0].DIV 1.000 99999.999 0.001 5 3   X 
Shift PRM.FLTR1[0].OFFS 0 255 -255 3 0   X 
Negative pixel PRM.FLTR1[0].MNTR Fixed to 0 0   X 
correction
Absolute 1
value
Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 9 0 1 0   X 
Border PRM.FLTR1[0].CFR ON 0   X 
OFF 1

3-38 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Detect PRM.FLTR1[0].DC White 255   X 
image 1:
Image Black 0
Enhance 0: Count PRM.FLTR1[0].DBN 30 9999 1 4 0   X 
Blob
Fill holes PRM.FLTR1[0].FILL OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Active border PRM.FLTR1[0].CAN OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Detection order PRM.FLTR1[0].LOD Y>X: Ascend 5   X 
X>Y: Ascend 6
X:Ascend 1
X:Descend 2
Y:Ascend 3
Y:Descend 4
Area:Ascend 14
Area:Descend 13
Roundness: 16
Ascend
Roundness: 15
Descend
Clockwise 9
Counterclockwise 10
Starting angle PRM.FLTR1[0].STA 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Primary target PRM.FLTR1[0].LBS All 0 X X X 
specification
Specified 1
Primary target PRM.FLTR1[0].LLBS 0 9998 0 4 0   X 
Pixel values after PRM.FLTR1[0].CODC 255 255 0 3 0   X 
conversion:
Detected color
Pixel values after PRM.FLTR1[0].COBC 0 255 0 3 0   X 
conversion:
Background
color
Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Area filter PRM.FLTR1[0].ARI_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Roundness filter PRM.FLTR1[0].CIR_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Major axis filter PRM.FLTR1[0].MAA_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Axis ratio filter PRM.FLTR1[0].RTO_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Distributed oval PRM.FLTR1[0].MAA2_EN Disable 0   X 
filter
Enable 1
Aspect ratio filter PRM.FLTR1[0].RTO2_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Area filter: PRM.FLTR1[0].ARI_THRES: 99999999 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Maximum HL
Area filter: PRM.FLTR1[0].ARI_THRES: 100 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Minimum LL
Roundness filter: PRM.FLTR1[0].CIR_THRES: 1.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Maximum HL
Roundness filter: PRM.FLTR1[0].CIR_THRES: 0.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Minimum LL
Major axis filter: PRM.FLTR1[0].MAA_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum
Major axis filter: PRM.FLTR1[0].MAA_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum
Axes ratio filter: PRM.FLTR1[0].RTO_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum

XG-X Comm-US 3-39

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Axes ratio filter: PRM.FLTR1[0].RTO_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
image 1: Minimum
Image
Enhance 0: Distributed oval Maximum 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Blob filter: Maximum PRM.FLTR1[0].MAA2_THRES:HL
(continued) Distributed oval Minimum 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter: Minimum PRM.FLTR1[0].MAA2_THRES:LL
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.FLTR1[0].RTO2_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.FLTR1[0].RTO2_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum
Source Processing PRM.FLTR1[0].LSMTD Scratch 0 1 0    
image 1: Method Defect
Image Extraction
enhance 0:
Scratch High-Speed 1
Defect Scratch
Extraction Defect
Extraction
Reduction PRM.FLTR1[0].RDR 2 32 1 2 0    
Extract Size PRM.FLTR1[0].BG_RDR 4 32 2 2 0    
Extract Tone PRM.FLTR1[0].LSTC Dark 1 1 0    
Bright 0
Bright & Dark 2
Gain PRM.FLTR1[0].GNM 2.0 99.9 0.0 2 1    
Linearity PRM.FLTR1[0].LNRTY 2 4 1 1 0    
Linear Length PRM.FLTR1[0].SMLVL 2 16 1 2 0    
Noise Cut PRM.FLTR1[0].NSR 0.0 255.0 0.0 3 1    
Extraction PRM.FLTR1[0].ATYP All Angles 0 1 0    
Direction Specify 1
Angle
Starting Angle PRM.FLTR1[0].TANG 0.000 179.999 0.000 3 3    
Angle Range PRM.FLTR1[0].ARG 45.000 90.000 1.000 2 3    
Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0    
Source Target Tone PRM.FLTR1[0].CLR Dark 1 1 0    
image 1:
Image Bright 0
enhance 0: Process Type PRM.FLTR1[0].PROCTYP Remove 0 1 0    
Noise
Isolation Extract 1
Area PRM.FLTR1[0].ARSZ 10 99999999 1 8 0    
Reduction PRM.FLTR1[0].RDR 2 32 1 2 0    
Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0    
Source Expansion Width PRM.FLTR1[0].CEI 15 30 0 2 0    
image 1:
Image Noise Cut PRM.FLTR1[0].SNRDR 0 30 0 2 0    
enhance 0: Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0    
Contrast
Expansion

3-40 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Cut Size PRM.FLTR1[0].CSZ 4 30 2 2 0    
image 1:
Image Cut Threshold PRM.FLTR1[0].CTH 0.050 99.999 0.000 2 3    
enhance 0: (mm)
Spike Noise
Cut Cut Target PRM.FLTR1[0].CDR Upper 0    
Lower 1
Both 2
Count PRM.FLTR1[0].PTMS 1 1 0 1 0    
Enable Specify PRM.FLTR1[0].CPDEN Enable 1 1 0    
Processing Disable 0
Direction
Processing PRM.FLTR1[0].CPD X Direction 0 1 0    
Direction Type Y Direction 1
XY Individual 2
X Direction Cut PRM.FLTR1[0].CSZ_X 4 30 2 2 0    
Size
Y Direction Cut PRM.FLTR1[0].CSZ_Y 4 30 2 2 0    
Size
Source PRM.FLTR1[1].***
image 1:
Image
enhance 1
···

···

Source PRM.FLTR1[12].***
image 1:
Image
enhance 12
Source PRM.FLTR2[*].***
image 2:
Source PRM.FLTR3[*].***
image 3:

XG-X Comm-US 3-41

List of setting parameters

Capture Unit

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Parameters Capture priority PRM.DTL.BPRI[*] 1 4 1 1 0 X X X X
Camera 1 Enable camera PRM.CAM1.CM_EN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Disable 0
Shutter speed (area PRM.CAM1.SSPD 16.67 9000.00 0.01 4 2   X X
camera)
Shutter speed (line PRM.CAM1.LSSPD 50 20000 2 5 0   X X
scan camera)
Camera sensitivity PRM.CAM1.GN_S 3.0 9.0 1.0 1 1   X X
R shift PRM.CAM1.GN_R_OT 0 255 -255 3 0 X X X X
G shift PRM.CAM1.GN_G_OT 0 255 -255 3 0 X X X X
B shift PRM.CAM1.GN_B_OT 0 255 -255 3 0 X X X X
R span * PRM.CAM1.GN_R_CF[*] 1 7.9 0.0 1 1 X X X X
G span * PRM.CAM1.GN_G_CF[*] 1 7.9 0.0 1 1 X X X X
B span * PRM.CAM1.GN_B_CF[*] 1 7.9 0.0 1 1 X X X X
White balance PRM.CAM1.WB_EN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Use system settings Disable 0
White balance PRM.CAM1.WB_R 1.000 5.000 0.000 1 3   X X
R multiplier
White balance PRM.CAM1.WB_G 1.000 5.000 0.000 1 3   X X
G multiplier
White balance PRM.CAM1.WB_B 1.000 5.000 0.000 1 3   X X
B multiplier
CCD line offset PRM.CAM1.SL_OT 0 2049 0 4 0   X X
Camera PRM.CAM1.BCND 0 3 0 1 0 X X X X
combination No.
Trigger selection PRM.CAM1.TID 0 3 0 1 0 X X X X
Trigger delay time PRM.CAM1.TDLY 0 999.999 0 3 3   X X
Trigger delay time PRM.CAM1.TDLYC 0 65535 0 5 0   X X
(Encoder pulse
specification)
HDR PRM.CAM1.HDR_EN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Disable 0
Lowlight level PRM.CAM1.HDR_SL 1 6 0 1 0 X X X X
Highlight level PRM.CAM1.HDR_HL 1 6 0 1 0 X X X X
No. of images PRM.CAM1.HDR_N 3 13 1 2 0 X X X X
No. of images PRM.CAM1.HDR_NMD Auto (speed 0 1 0 X X X X
setting priority)
Auto (quality 1
priority)
Brightness PRM.CAM1.HDR_BR 50 100 0 3 0   X X
Contrast PRM.CAM1.HDR_CN 50 100 0 3 0   X X
Number of lines PRM.CAM1.LLN 4 0 X X X X
Overlapping lines PRM.CAM1.LOLN 4 0 X X X X
Total number of lines PRM.CAM1.LTLN 6 0 X X X X
Rotation PRM.CAM1.ROTA None 0 3 0 X X X X
90°Rotate 90
270°Rotate 270

3-42 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Camera1: Filter Type PRM.CAM1.HG_FTYP None 0 1 0 X X X X
3D Imaging Median 1
Gaussian 3
Average 2
Count PRM.CAM1.HG_PTMS 1 9 0 1 0 X X X X
XY Normalization PRM.CAM1.HG_XYNM OFF 0 1 0 X X X X
ON 1
ON(fast) 2
Space Encoding PRM.CAM1.HG_SPEN OFF 0 1 0 X X X X
ON(2-image) 2
ON(3-image) 3
ON(4-image) 4
ON(Max.) 1
Projector PRM.CAM1.HG_PRSL 1 0 1 0 X X X X
2 1
1+2 2
One-Shot HDR PRM.CAM1.HG_OSHDR OFF 0 1 1 0 1 0 X X X X
ON 1
HDR (No. of Captures) PRM.CAM1.HG_HDR 1 3 1 1 0 X X X X
Capture Height Image PRM.CAM1.ENB_3D ON 1 1 0 X X X X
OFF 0
Capture 2D Image PRM.CAM1.ENB_2D ON 1 1 0 X X X X
OFF 0
2D Image Type PRM.CAM1.OIMG_TYP Color 0 1 0 X X X X
Monochrome 1
Remove Halations and PRM.CAM1.TXT_EN ON 1 1 0 X X X X
Shadows OFF 0
2D Image Shutter PRM.CAM1.SSPD_2D 2.40 200.00 0.05 4 2   X X
Speed
Hairline Influence PRM.CAM1.ARR_EN ON 1 1 0 X X X X
Suppression OFF 0
Gain PRM.CAM1.DGA 1 0 1 0 X X X X
2 1
4 2
Projection Pattern PRM.CAM1.HG_PRPT Standard 0 1 0 X X X X
Echo 1
Suppression
Allow Single Projector PRM.CAM1.HG_SPPEN ON 1 1 0 X X X X
Data OFF 0
Fill Hole Suppression: PRM.CAM1.RVBEN ON 1 1 0 X X X X
Enabled OFF 0
Fill Hole Suppression: PRM.CAM1.RVBAR_EN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Area Enabled Disable 0
Fill Hole Suppression: PRM.CAM1.RVBAR_THRES:LL 0.0100 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4 X X X X
Area (Lower Limit)
Fill Hole Suppression: PRM.CAM1.RVBCL_EN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Perimeter Enabled Disable 0
Fill Hole Suppression: PRM.CAM1.RVBCL_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3 X X X X
Perimeter (Lower
Limit)
Fill Hole Suppression: PRM.CAM1.RVBCD_EN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Roundness Enabled Disable 0
Fill Hole Suppression: PRM.CAM1.RVBCD_THRES:HL 1.000 1.000 0.000 1 3 X X X X
Roundness (Upper
Limit)

XG-X Comm-US 3-43

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Camera1: Fill Hole Suppression: PRM.CAM1.RVBCD_THRES:LL 0.000 1.000 0.000 1 3 X X X X
3D Imaging Roundness (Lower
(continued) Limit)
Fill Hole Suppression: PRM.CAM1.RVBRTD_EN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Rectangularity Disable 0
Enabled
Fill Hole Suppression: PRM.CAM1.RVBRTD_THRES:H 1.000 1.000 0.000 1 3 X X X X
Rectangularity (Upper L
Limit)
Fill Hole Suppression: PRM.CAM1.RVBRTD_THRES: 0.000 1.000 0.000 1 3 X X X X
Rectangularity (Lower LL
Limit)
Projector Selection PRM.CAM1.HG_PRSL T+B+L+R 6 1 0 X X X X
T+B 2
L+R 5
T 0
B 1
L 3
R 4
Low Contrast PRM.CAM1.HG_LCRRJ Low 1 1 0 X X X X
Rejection Mid 2
High 3
Outlier Removal PRM.CAM1.HG_OTLRM None 0 1 0 X X X X
Low 1
Mid 2
High 3
2-axis Projection PRM.CAM1.HG_DAPOFF OFF 0 1 0 X X X X
ON 1
Single Projected Part PRM.CAM1.HG_SPPR OFF 0 1 0 X X X X
Removal ON 1
Invalid Pixel PRM.CAM1.IPO_EN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Suppression: Enable Disable 0
Invalid Pixel
Suppression
Invalid Pixel PRM.CAM1.IPO_DG 1 19 1 1 0 X X X X
Suppression: Level
Invalid Pixel PRM.CAM1.IPO_SMSZ Match w/ 0 1 0   X 
Suppression: Level
Smoothing Size Narrow 1
Normal 2
Wide 3
Invalid Pixel PRM.CAM1.IPO_PS Large 0 1 0 X X X X
Suppression: Small 1
Adjustment Width
Invalid Pixel PRM.CAM1.IPO_CCF ON 1 1 0 X X X X
Suppression: Outline OFF 0
Interpolation Suppress
Invalid Pixel PRM.CAM1.IPO_CFT Square 0 1 0 X X X X
Suppression: Circle 1
Processing Shape
Target PRM.CAM1.IPO_IMG Height Image 0 1 0 X X X X
Grayscale 1
Image
Height+Grays 2
cale
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.CAM1.CEN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Enable Spike Noise Disable 0
Cut
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.CAM1.CSZ 1 30 2 2 0 X X X X
Cut Size

3-44 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Camera1: Spike Noise Cut: PRM.CAM1.CTH 0.5 99.999 0 2 3 X X X X
3D Imaging Cut Threshold (CA-DQP25X:1.0)
(continued) Spike Noise Cut: PRM.CAM1.CDR Upper 0 1 0 X X X X
Cut Target Lower 1
Both 2
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.CAM1.CPDEN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Enable Specify Disable 0
Processing Direction
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.CAM1.CPD X Direction 0 1 0 X X X X
Processing Direction Y Direction 1
Type
XY Individual 2
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.CAM1.CSZ_X 4 30 2 2 0 X X X X
X Direction Cut Size
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.CAM1.CSZ_Y 4 30 2 2 0 X X X X
Y Direction Cut Size
Smoothing: PRM.CAM1.SMEN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Enable Smoothing Disable 0
Smoothing: PRM.CAM1.SMSZ 5 127 3 3 0 X X X X
Smoothing Size
Smoothing: PRM.CAM1.SPEX OFF 1 1 0 X X X X
Expansion ON 0
Suppression
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VCEN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Enable Vibration Disable 0
Correction
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_ECH Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Set Individually by Disable 0
Head
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_CTY[*] Plane (Zθ) 0 1 0 X X X X
Correction Type Plane (Z) 1
Uniform 2
Section (Z)
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_STAB[*] Weak 0 1 0 X X X X
Correction Strength Normal 1
Strong 2
Very Strong 3
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_RTY[*] Whole 0 1 0 X X X X
Correction Reference 1 Rectangle 1
Region
2 Rectangles 2
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_AER[*] 1 999.999 0 3 3 X X X X
Allowable Range for
Reference Detection
(mm)
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_SLN[*] 16383 16383 0 5 0 X X X X
Reference Number of
Lines
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_LUXY[*] 5 0 X X X X
Rect. Upper Left XY
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_LUX[*] 4 0 X X X X
Rect. Upper Left X
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_LUY[*] 5 0 X X X X
Rect. Upper Left Y
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_RDXY[*] 5 0 X X X X
Rect. Lower Right XY
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_RDX[*] 4 0 X X X X
Rect. Lower Right X
Vibration Correction: PRM.CAM1.VC_RDY[*] 5 0 X X X X
Rect. Lower Right Y

XG-X Comm-US 3-45

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Camera1: 2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHDEN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
3D Imaging Enable 2-Head Dead Disable 0
(continued) Angle Cut
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_FTY Dead Angle 0 1 0 X X X X
Processing Type Cut
Noise Cut 1
Height Diff. 2
Display
Dead Angle 3
Cut (Far)
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_GGIMG Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Combine Grayscale
Images Disable 0

2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_AHD 0.1 999.999 0 3 3 X X X X

Noise Judgment
Threshold (mm)
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_GEN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Use Grayscale Image
Also in Dead Angle Disable 0
Judgment
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_LUXY 5 0 X X X X
Rect. Upper Left XY
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_LUX 0 1023 0 4 0 X X X X
Rect. Upper Left X
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_LUY 5 0 X X X X
Rect. Upper Left Y
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_RDXY 5 0 X X X X
Rect. Lower Right XY
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_RDX 1023 1023 0 4 0 X X X X
Rect. Lower Right X
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_RDY 5 0 X X X X
Rect. Lower Right Y
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_DRY 0 0.999 -0.999 1 3 X X X X
Ry Angular Difference
(deg)
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_DRZ 0 0.999 -0.999 1 3 X X X X
Rz Angular Difference
(deg)
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_DRX 0 0.999 -0.999 1 3 X X X X
Rx Angular Difference
(deg)
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_BRSLT Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Start from previous
result Disable 0

2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_SHX 0 9999.999 -999.999 4 3 X X X X

X Offset
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_SHY 0 9999.999 -999.999 4 3 X X X X
Y Offset
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.DHD_SHZ 0 999999.999 -99999.999 6 3 X X X X
Z Offset
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.LS_MRL Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Vertical Invert: Sensor
Head Unit A Disable 0

2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.LS_MRR Enable 1 1 0 X X X X

Vertical Invert: Sensor
Head Unit B Disable 0

2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.LS_OFSTEN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X

Enable Y Offset Disable 0
2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.LS_OFSTL 0 16384 0 5 0 X X X X
Y Offset: Sensor Head
Unit A

3-46 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Camera1: 2-Head Dead Angle Cut: PRM.CAM1.LS_OFSTR 0 16384 0 5 0 X X X X
3D Imaging Y Offset: Sensor Head
(continued) Unit B
Dead Zone Noise Removal: PRM.CAM1.DNREN Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Enable Dead Zone Noise
Removal Disable 0

Dead Zone Noise Removal: PRM.CAM1.DNR_POS After 0 1 0 X X X X

Dead Zone Location Before 1
After/Before 2
Before/After 3
Dead Zone Noise Removal: PRM.CAM1.DNR_ANG (LJ-X8020: 45) 70 5 2 0 X X X X
Dead Zone Angle (LJ-X8060: 35)
(LJ-X8080: 35)
(LJ-X8200: 22)
(LJ-X8400: 18)
(LJ-X8900: 15)
Dead Zone Noise Removal: PRM.CAM1.DNR_CNT 10 99 1 2 0 X X X X
Detection Count
Dead Zone Noise Removal: PRM.CAM1.DNR_RNG 100 950 50 3 0 X X X X
Dead Zone Processing
Range
Dead Zone Noise Removal: PRM.CAM1.DNR_SKP 1 Point 1 2 0 X X X X
Skipping 2 Points 2
4 Points 4
8 Points 8
16 Points 16
Spike Noise Cut (1) PRM.CAM1.CEN1 Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Enable Spike Noise
Cut (1) Disable 0

Spike Noise Cut (1) PRM.CAM1.CSZ1 1 30 2 2 0 X X X X

Cut Size (1)
Spike Noise Cut (1) PRM.CAM1.CTH1 0.5 99.999 0 2 3 X X X X
Cut Threshold (1) (CA-DQP25X:1.0)
Spike Noise Cut (1) PRM.CAM1.CDR1 Upper 0 1 0 X X X X
Cut Target (1) Lower 1
Both 2
Spike Noise Cut (1) PRM.CAM1.CPDEN1 Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
Enable Specify
Processing Disable 0
Direction (1)
Spike Noise Cut (1) PRM.CAM1.CPD1 X Direction 0 1 0 X X X X
Processing Y Direction 1
Direction Type (1)
XY Individual 2
Spike Noise Cut (1) PRM.CAM1.CSZ_X1 4 30 2 2 0 X X X X
X Direction Cut Size
(1)
Spike Noise Cut (1) PRM.CAM1.CSZ_Y1 4 30 2 2 0 X X X X
Y Direction Cut Size
(1)
Camera 2* PRM.CAM2.***
Camera 3* PRM.CAM3.***
Camera 4* PRM.CAM4.***
Trigger Capture on trigger PRM.DTL.WTRG Enable 1 1 0 X X X X
setting input Disable 0
Screen update PRM.DTL.DISP Trigger 0 1 0   X X
Live Image 1

XG-X Comm-US 3-47

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

3-50 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
LumiTrax Fine Feature Search PRM.LTRX1.TFENB Disabled 0 1 0    
mode Enabled 1
Settings 1
(continued) Vibration Correction PRM.LTRX1.OENB Disabled 0 1 0    
Enabled 1
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SH_FS[0] 4 999 1 3 0    
Feature Size
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SH_FM[0] 2 5 0 1 0    
Feature Size Margin
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SH_GA[0] 1.0 9.9 0.1 1 1    
Contrast
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SH_LV[0] 128 255 0 3 0    
Level
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SH_NR[0] 0.0 255.0 0.0 3 1    
Noise Cut
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SH_TR[0] Off 0 1 0    
Texture Pattern Cut Weak 1
Strong 2
Very Strong 3
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SH_ENO[0] 1 0    
Image Selection
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SH_GI[0] 0 255 0 3 0    
Guided Filter
Shape Image 2 PRM.LTRX1.SH_***[1]
Shape Image 3 PRM.LTRX1.SH_***[2]
Texture Pattern Image: PRM.LTRX1.TXT_GA 1.0 99.9 0.1 1 1    
Contrast
Texture Pattern Image: PRM.LTRX1.TXT_AHS Off 0 1 0    
Halation Cut Weak 1
Strong 2
Very Strong 3
Texture Pattern Image: PRM.LTRX1.TXT_ENO 1 0    
Image Selection
Gradient X Image: PRM.LTRX1.GRX_ENO 1 0    
Image Selection
Gradient Y Image: PRM.LTRX1.GRY_ENO 1 0    
Image Selection
Normal Image: PRM.LTRX1.REF1_ENO 1 0    
Image Selection
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PTSTXY 5 3    
Center XY
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PTSTX 0.0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Center X
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PTSTY 0.0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Center Y
Search Region PRM.LTRX1.RGN
Upper Left XY PRM.LTRX1.RGN.LUXY 5 0    
Upper Left X PRM.LTRX1.RGN.LUX 16383 0 5 0    
Upper Left Y PRM.LTRX1.RGN.LUY 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right XY PRM.LTRX1.RGN.RDXY 5 0    
Lower Right X PRM.LTRX1.RGN.RDX 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right Y PRM.LTRX1.RGN.RDY 16383 0 5 0    
Pattern Region PRM.LTRX1.PTRN
Upper Left XY PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.LUXY 5 0    
Upper Left X PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.LUX 16383 0 5 0    
Upper Left Y PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.LUY 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right XY PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.RDXY 5 0    
Lower Right X PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.RDX 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right Y PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.RDY 16383 0 5 0    

XG-X Comm-US 3-51

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
LumiTrax PRM.LTRX2.***
mode
Settings 2
LumiTrax PRM.LTRX3.***
mode
Settings 3
LumiTrax PRM.LTRX4.***
mode
Settings 4
LumiTrax LumiTrax light PRM.LTRX1.LTAS Unset -1 × × × 
Specular Light 1 0
Reflection
Mode Light 2 1
Setting 1 Light 3 2
Light 4 3
Light 5 4
Light 6 5
Light 7 6
Light 8 7
Light 9 8
Light 10 9
Light 11 10
Light 12 11
Light 13 12
Light 14 13
Light 15 14
Light 16 15
Light intensity PRM.LTRX1.VLM 511 1023 0 4 0   × 
Emitted Pattern Size PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DLPL Small 0 × × × 
Medium 1
Large 2
Use Transmitted Light PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DFLTL Reflected 0 × × × 
Light
Installation
Transmitted 1
Light
Installation
Object Movement PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DFLWMV From Camera 0 × × × 
Direction Base to Top
From Camera 1
Top to Base
Light cable direction PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DFLLTD Reference 0 × × × 
Direction
90° 90
180° 180
270° -90
Share light of other PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DLSH Do Not Share -1 × × × 
camera Camera 1 0
Camera 2 1
Camera 3 2
Camera 4 3
Specular Reflection PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.GLGN 3.0 20.0 0.1 2 1  × × 
Image: Gain
Specular Reflection PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.GLDE None 0 × × × 
Image: Directional X Direction 1
emphasis
Y Direction 2

3-52 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
LumiTrax Specular Reflection PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.GLDEDG Weak 1   × 
Specular Image: Intensity Strong 2
Reflection Degree
Mode Very strong 3
Setting 1 Diffuse Reflection PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DIGN 3.0 20.0 0.1 2 1  × × 
(continued) Image: Gain
Diffuse Reflection PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DIDE None 0 × × × 
Image: Directional X Direction 1
emphasis
Y Direction 2
Diffuse Reflection PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DIDE Weak 1   × 
Image: Emphasis Strong 2
degree
Very strong 3
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHGA[0] 3.0 99.9 0.1 2 1   × 
Contrast
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHFS[0] 4 999 1 3 0   × 
Feature Size
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHFM[0] 2 5 0 1 0   × 
Feature Size Margin
Shape Image 1: Level PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHLV[0] 128 255 0 3 0   × 
Shape Image 1: Noise PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHNR[0] 0.0 255.0 0.0 3 1   × 
Cut
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHAM[0] OFF 0 × × × 
Absolute Value Mode ON 1
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSDE[0] None 0 × × × 
Directional emphasis X Direction 1
Y Direction 2
Shape Image 1: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSDEDG[0] Weak 1   × 
Emphasis degree
Strong 2
Very strong 3
Shape Image 2: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHGA[1] 3.0 99.9 0.1 2 1   × 
Contrast
Shape Image 2: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHFS[1] 4 999 1 3 0   × 
Feature Size
Shape Image 2: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHFM[1] 2 5 0 1 0   × 
Feature Size Margin
Shape Image 2: Level PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHLV[1] 128 255 0 3 0   × 
Shape Image 2: Noise PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHNR[1] 0.0 255.0 0.0 3 1   × 
Cut
Shape Image 2: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSHAM[1] OFF 0 × × × 
Absolute Value Mode ON 1
Shape Image 2: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSDE[1] None 0 × × × 
Directional emphasis X Direction 1
Y Direction 2
Shape Image 2: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DSDEDG[1] Weak 1   × 
Emphasis degree Strong 2
Very strong 3
Gloss Ratio Image: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.BAGN 1.0 99.9 0.1 2 1   × 
Gain
Gloss Ratio Image: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DGNY 128 255 0 3 0   × 
Level
Specular Reflection PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.GL_EN 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Image: Select image
Diffuse Reflection PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.DI_EN 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Image: Select image
Shape Image 1: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.SH_EN[0] 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
image
Shape Image 2: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.SH_EN[1] 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
image

XG-X Comm-US 3-53

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
LumiTrax Phase X Image: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.PX_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Specular image
Reflection Phase Y Image: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.PY_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Mode image
Setting 1
(continued) Gloss Ratio Image: PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.BA_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Select image
Normal Image: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.NO_EN 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
image
X1 Image: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.X1_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
image
X2 Image: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.X2_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
image
X3 Image: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.X3_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
image
X4 Image: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.X4_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
image
Y1 Image: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.Y1_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
image
Y2 Image: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.Y2_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
image
Y3 Image: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.Y3_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
image
Y4 Image: Select PRM.LTRX1.SPRF.Y4_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
image
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PTSTXY 5 3    
Center XY
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PTSTX 0.0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Center X
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PTSTY 0.0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Center Y
Search Region PRM.LTRX1.RGN
Upper Left XY PRM.LTRX1.RGN.LUXY 5 0    
Upper Left X PRM.LTRX1.RGN.LUX 16383 0 5 0    
Upper Left Y PRM.LTRX1.RGN.LUY 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right XY PRM.LTRX1.RGN.RDXY 5 0    
Lower Right X PRM.LTRX1.RGN.RDX 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right Y PRM.LTRX1.RGN.RDY 16383 0 5 0    
Pattern Region PRM.LTRX1.PTRN
Upper Left XY PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.LUXY 5 0    
Upper Left X PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.LUX 16383 0 5 0    
Upper Left Y PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.LUY 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right XY PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.RDXY 5 0    
Lower Right X PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.RDX 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right Y PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.RDY 16383 0 5 0    
LumiTrax PRM.LTRX2.***
Specular
Reflection
Mode
Setting 2
LumiTrax PRM.LTRX3.***
Specular
Reflection
Mode
Setting 3
LumiTrax PRM.LTRX4.***
Specular
Reflection
Mode
Setting 4

3-54 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
MultiSpectrum LED intensity for UV PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.LIN[0] 511 1023 0 4 0   × 
Mode LED intensity for B PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.LIN[1] 511 1023 0 4 0   × 
Setting 1
LED intensity for G PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.LIN[2] 511 1023 0 4 0   × 
LED intensity for AM PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.LIN[3] 511 1023 0 4 0   × 
LED intensity for R PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.LIN[4] 511 1023 0 4 0   × 
LED intensity for FR PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.LIN[5] 511 1023 0 4 0   × 
LED intensity for IR PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.LIN[6] 511 1023 0 4 0   × 
LED intensity for W PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.LIN[7] 511 1023 0 4 0   × 
Share Lighting With PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.DLSH Do Not Share -1 × × × 
Other Cameras Camera 1 0
Camera 2 1
Camera 3 2
Camera 4 3
Track Moving Object PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.MENB 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Ambient Light Cut PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.ABM 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Enable lighting color PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.WENB[0] 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
UV
Enable lighting color B PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.WENB[1] 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Enable lighting color G PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.WENB[2] 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Enable lighting color PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.WENB[3] 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
AM
Enable lighting color R PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.WENB[4] 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Enable lighting color PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.WENB[5] 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
FR
Enable lighting color PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.WENB[6] 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
IR
Enable lighting color PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.WENB[7] 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
W
Vibration correction PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.OENB 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Fine feature search PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.TFENB 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 

Search sensitivity PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.SNS Low (-3) × × × 

Rather low (-2)
Somewhat low
(-1)
Normal (0)
Somewhat
high (1)
Rather high
(2)
High (3)
Very high (4)
Search accuracy PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.PRC Very rough × × × 
(-3)
Rough (-2)
Somewhat
rough (-1)
Normal (0)
Somewhat fine
(-1)
Fine (2)
Very fine (3)
Match % lower limit PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.DLV 60.000 99.999 0.000 2 3 × × × 
Angle Range (°) PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.ARG 0.000 90.000 0.000 2 3 × × × 

XG-X Comm-US 3-55

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
MultiSpectrum Lighting color PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.LCLR UV 0 1 0 × × × 
Mode B 1
Setting 1
(continued) G 2
AM 3
R 4
FR 5
IR 6
W 7
Individual settings PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.VIND 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Enable color image PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.COL_EN 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Enable Color- PRM.LTRX1.MLSP.EXCOL_EN 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Difference Image
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PTSTXY 5 3    
Center XY
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PTSTX 0.0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Center X
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PTSTY 0.0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Center Y
Search Region PRM.LTRX1.RGN
Upper Left XY PRM.LTRX1.RGN.LUXY 5 0    
Upper Left X PRM.LTRX1.RGN.LUX 16383 0 5 0    
Upper Left Y PRM.LTRX1.RGN.LUY 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right XY PRM.LTRX1.RGN.RDXY 5 0    
Lower Right X PRM.LTRX1.RGN.RDX 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right Y PRM.LTRX1.RGN.RDY 16383 0 5 0    
Pattern Region PRM.LTRX1.PTRN
Upper Left XY PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.LUXY 5 0    
Upper Left X PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.LUX 16383 0 5 0    
Upper Left Y PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.LUY 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right XY PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.RDXY 5 0    
Lower Right X PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.RDX 16383 0 5 0    
Lower Right Y PRM.LTRX1.PTRN.RDY 16383 0 5 0    
MultiSpectrum PRM.LTRX2.MLSP.***
Mode
Setting 2
MultiSpectrum PRM.LTRX3.MLSP.***
Mode
Setting 3
MultiSpectrum PRM.LTRX4.MLSP.***
Mode
Setting 4
3D Capture PRM.CAM1.TEXEN 1 0    
Mode 2D Capture Settings: PRM.CAM1.TEXCN 1 8 0.1 1 1    
Settings 1 Contrast
Capture Settings: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.SSPD 5 100 0.5 3 1    
Shutter Speed (3D)
Capture Settings: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.GN_S 3 7 1 1 1    
Camera Sensitivity
(3D)
Capture Settings: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.MSHDR_EN 1 0    
Multi-Shot HDR
Capture Settings: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.MSHDR_RATIO 1/2 2 1 0    
HDR Ratio 1/4 4
1/8 8
1/16 16
Capture Settings: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.TPC 4 0 8 1 0    
Projection Count 8 1

3-56 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
3d Capture Capture Settings: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.TVLM 1023 1023 0 4 0    
Mode Light Volume (3D)
Settings 1 Calibration Settings: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.TCLB_ID 0 127 0 3 0    
(continued) Calibration Data ID
Calibration Settings: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.SZCTYP 1 0 × × × ×
Scaling Calculation
Height
Noise Cut: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.TRH 1 0    
Hole Noise
Suppression
Noise Cut: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.AMBNC 1 0    
Ambient Light Noise
Cut
Noise Cut: Smoothing PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.ESSMTH 0.5 999.9 0.0 3 1    
Threshold
Noise Cut: Smoothing PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.ESSMEN OFF 0 1 0    
Processing ON 1
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.SNC_EN 1 0    
Enable Spike Noise
Cut
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FLTR_SP 1 0    
Spike Noise Cut
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FLTR_SP.CSZ 4 30 2 2 0    
Cut Size
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FLTR_SP.CTH 0.05 99.999 0 2 3    
Cut Threshold
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FLTR_SP.CDR Upper 0 1 0    
Cut Target Lower 1
Both 2
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FLTR_SP.CPDEN 1 0    
Enable Processing
Direction Specification
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FLTR_SP.CPD X 0 1 0    
Processing Direction Y 1
XY individual 2
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FLTR_SP.CSZ_X 4 30 2 2 1    
X Direction Cut Size
Spike Noise Cut: PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FLTR_SP.CSZ_Y 4 30 2 2 1    
Y Direction Cut Size
Invalid Pixel PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FV_EN 1 0    
Suppression:
Enable Invalid Pixel
Suppression
Invalid Pixel PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FLTR_FV 1 0    
Suppression:
Invalid Pixel
Suppression
Invalid Pixel PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FLTR_FV.IPO_DG 1 19 1 1 0    
Suppression:
Level
Invalid Pixel PRM.LTRX1.PP_TD.FLTR_FV.IPO_CCF OFF 0 1 0    
Suppression: ON 1
Outline Interpolation
Suppression
3d Capture PRM.CAM2.***
Mode PRM.LTRX2.***
Settings 2
3d Capture PRM.CAM3.***
Mode PRM.LTRX3.***
Settings 3
3d Capture PRM.CAM4.***
Mode PRM.LTRX4.***
Settings 4

XG-X Comm-US 3-57

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Outline Capture Mode PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.MENB Disabled 0 1 0.5    
Capture Settings: Enabled 1
Mode Track Moving Object
Settings Capture Mode PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.ABM Disabled 0 1 0.5    
Settings: Enabled 1
Ambient Light Cut
Track Moving Object PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.ARG 0 90 0 2 3    
Parameters: Angle
Range (°)
Track Moving Object PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.SNS Lowest -3 1 0    
Parameters: Lower -2
Search Sensitivity
Low -1
Normal 0
High 1
Higher 2
Highest 3
Highest+ 4
Track Moving Object PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.PRC Lowest -3 1 0    
Parameters: Lower -2
Search Accuracy
Low -1
Normal 0
High 1
Higher 2
Highest 3
Track Moving Object PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.DLV 60 99.999 0 2 3    
Parameters: Minimum
Match %
Track Moving Object PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.TFENB Disabled 0 1 0    
Parameters: Fine Enabled 1
Feature Search
Track Moving Object PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.OENB Disabled 0 1 0    
Parameters: Vibration Enabled 1
Correction
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.PTSTXY 5 3    
Center:
Registered Pattern
Center XY
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.PTSTX 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Center:
Registered Pattern
Center X
Registered Pattern PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.PTSTY 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Center:
Registered Pattern
Center Y
Lighting Parameters: PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.LPW Standard 0 1 0   × ×
Lighting Width
Narrow 1
Lighting Parameters: PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.LVFCE 512 1023 0 4 0    
Volume (For Texture/
Outline)
Outline Image: PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.EXMD Standard 0 1 0   × ×
Extraction Mode
Hole Outline 1
Accentuation 1
Hole Outline 2
Accentuation 2
Texture Cut 3
Outline Image: PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.EXLV 30 99 1 2 0    
Extraction Level

3-58 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Outline Outline Image: PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.CHSPLV Weak 0 1 0   × ×
Capture Outline Change Slightly Weak 1
Mode Suppression
Settings 1 Medium 2
(continued) Slightly Strong 3
Strong 4
Outline Image: PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.OLSGSZ 1x1 0 1 0    
Segment Size 2x2 1
Outline Image: PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.NCLV Weak 3 1 0    
Noise Cut
Slightly Weak 4
Normal 0
Slightly Strong 1
Strong 2
Outline Image: PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.DNCLV 1 99 0 2 0    
Extraction Strength
Search Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.RGN.LUXY 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Upper Left XY
Search Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.RGN.LUX 16383 0 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Upper Left X
Search Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.RGN.LUY 16383 0 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Upper Left Y
Search Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.RGN.RDXY 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Lower Right XY
Search Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.RGN.RDX 16383 0 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Lower Right X
Search Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.RGN.RDY 16383 0 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Lower Right Y
Pattern Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.PTRN.LUXY 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Upper Left XY
Pattern Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.PTRN.LUX 16383 0 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Upper Left X
Pattern Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.PTRN.LUY 16383 0 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Upper Left Y
Pattern Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.PTRN.RDXY 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Lower Right XY
Pattern Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.PTRN.RDX 16383 0 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Lower Right X
Pattern Region PRM.LTRX1.PP_OL.PTRN.RDY 16383 0 5 0    
(Rectangle):
Lower Right Y
Outline PRM.LTRX2.***
Capture
Mode
Settings 2
Outline PRM.LTRX3.***
Capture
Mode
Settings 3
Outline PRM.LTRX4.***
Capture
Mode
Settings 4

XG-X Comm-US 3-59

List of setting parameters

Area Unit

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Detect PRM.DTL.DC White 255   X 
condition
Black 0
Parameters Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Coordinate value PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjustment
Before 1
position
adjustment
Limits Area: Upper limit PRM.DTL.AR:HL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Area: Lower limit PRM.DTL.AR:LL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 

3-60 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Pattern Search Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Image variable PRM.DTL.UPIR Enable 1 X X X 
setting assignment
Disable 0
Reference PRM.DTL.PIV X X X 
variable
Detection Angle: + range PRM.DTL.ARG:HL 0.000 180.000 0.000 3 3   X 
condition
Angle: - range PRM.DTL.ARG:LL 0.000 0.000 -179.999 3 3   X 
Count PRM.DTL.MXN 1 99 1 2 0 X X X 
Search sensitivity PRM.DTL.SNS 0 4 -3 1 0   X 
Search accuracy PRM.DTL.PRC 0 3 -3 1 0   X 
Minimum match % PRM.DTL.DLV 60.000 99.999 0.000 2 3   X 
Detection order PRM.DTL.LOD Y>X: Ascend 5   X 
X>Y: Ascend 6
X:Ascend 1
X:Descend 2
Y:Ascend 3
Y:Descend 4
Match%: 12
Ascend
Match%: 11
Descend
Clockwise 9
Counterclockwise 10
Starting angle PRM.DTL.STA 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Parameters Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Detection point PRM.DTL.DTXY 4 3  X X 
offset XY
Detection point PRM.DTL.DTX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3   X 
offset X
Detection point PRM.DTL.DTY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3   X 
offset Y
Pattern base XY PRM.DTL.PTSTXY 5 3 X X X X
Pattern base X PRM.DTL.PTSTX 0.000 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X X
Pattern base Y PRM.DTL.PTSTY 0.000 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X X
Large area PRM.DTL.PTLAM Disable 0 X X X 
search mode
Mode 1 1
Mode 2 2
Coordinate value PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjustment
Before 1
position
adjustment
Primary target PRM.DTL.LLB 0 98 0 2 0 X X X 
Registered image PRM.DTL.PHSM Fixed (fast) 1 X X X 
update
Update each 0
process (slow)
User updated 2
(fast)

XG-X Comm-US 3-61

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Count: Upper PRM.DTL.N:HL - 99 0 2 0   X 
limit
Count: Lower PRM.DTL.N:LL - 99 0 2 0   X 
limit
Position X: Upper PRM.DTL.X:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position X: Lower PRM.DTL.X:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position Y: Upper PRM.DTL.Y:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position Y: Lower PRM.DTL.Y:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Angle: Upper PRM.DTL.T:HL - 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
limit
Angle: Lower limit PRM.DTL.T:LL - 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Match %: Upper PRM.DTL.C:HL - 99.999 0.000 2 3   X 
limit
Match %: Lower PRM.DTL.C:LL - 99.999 0.000 2 3   X 
limit

3-62 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

ShapeTrax3A Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Use Variable for PRM.DTL.UPIR Enable 1 X X X 
Settings Registered Image
Disable 0
Reference Variable PRM.DTL.PIV 0 0 0 X X X 
Feature Feature Extraction PRM.DTL.EFMD Automatic 1 X X X 
Extraction Settings
Automatic 2
Condition
(Low Contrast)
Custom 0
Fine Feature: PRM.DTL.REFLV 30 255 1 3 0   X 
Registered:
Minimum Intensity
Coarse Feature: PRM.DTL.RECLV 30 255 1 3 0   X 
Registered:
Minimum Intensity
Fine Feature: Current: PRM.DTL.IEFLV 30 255 1 3 0   X 
Minimum Intensity
Coarse Feature: PRM.DTL.IECLV 30 255 1 3 0   X 
Current:
Minimum Intensity
Sensitivity PRM.DTL.RRM Fast 4   X 
Standard 5
Detailed 6
Custom 1
Fine Feature Search: PRM.DTL.FFRR 0 10 0 2 0   X 
Image Reduction
Coarse Feature Search: PRM.DTL.CFRR 4 10 0 2 0   X 
Image Reduction
Coarse Feature Search: PRM.DTL.CFRRG 4 10 0 2 0   X 
Feature Reduction
Large Area Search PRM.DTL.STLAM Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Feat. Densification PRM.DTL.MPDMD None 0   X 
Weak 1
Moderate 2
Strong 3
Automatic 4
Draw Feature Drawing PRM.DTL.MGM_EN OFF 0 X X X X
Feature Tool
ON 1
Condition Angle : + Range PRM.DTL.ARG:HL 30.000 180.000 0.000 3 3   X 
Angle : - Range PRM.DTL.ARG:LL -30.000 0.000 -179.999 3 3   X 
Scale: Upper Limit PRM.DTL.SRG:HL 1.000 2.000 1.000 1 3   X 
Scale: Lower Limit PRM.DTL.SRG:LL 1.000 1.000 0.500 1 3   X 
Count PRM.DTL.MXN 1 2000 1 4 0 X X X 
Reverse Detection PRM.DTL.FEK OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Detection Region PRM.DTL.EDR ON 1 X X X 
Expansion
OFF (Long Side) 2
OFF (Short Side) 0
Min. Match% PRM.DTL.DLV 60.000 99.999 0.000 2 3   X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-63

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Condition Detection Order PRM.DTL.LOD X:Ascend 1   X 
(continued)
X:Descend 2
Y:Ascend 3
Y:Descend 4
Match%:Ascend 12
Match%:Descend 11
Feature Pixel 49
Count 1:Ascend
Feature Pixel 48
Count 1:Descend
Feature Pixel 51
Count 2:Ascend
Feature Pixel 50
Count 2:Descend
Clockwise 9
Counterclockwise 10
Scale:Ascend 32
Scale:Descend 33
Scale Disjunction: 34
Ascend
Scale Disjunction: 35
Descend
Detection Order PRM.DTL.LOD From Upper Left 5   X 
(Rightward)
From Upper Left 6
(Downward)
From Upper Right 42
(Leftward)
From Upper Right 46
(Downward)
From Lower Left 43
(Rightward)
From Lower Left 45
(Upward)
From Lower Right 44
(Leftward)
From Lower Right 47
(Upward)
Starting Angle PRM.DTL.STA 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Fine Search PRM.DTL.PRCM Detailed 0   X 
Accuracy
Fast 1
Grouping Method PRM.DTL.LGTYP Pattern Length 0   X 
(Long Side)
Pattern Length 1
(XY Individual)
Specified Value 2
Grouping Range PRM.DTL.LGLEN 20 9999 1 4 0   X 
Allowable Distortion PRM.DTL.ELARG 0 50 0 2 0   X 
Adjacent PRM.DTL.EXD 30 999 0 3 0   X 
Processing:
Minimum Distance
Adjacent PRM.DTL.EXA 30 180 0 3 0   X 
Processing: Angle

3-64 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Condition Adjacent Processing: PRM.DTL.EASAN 0 degree 1   X 
(continued) Starting Angle
0/180 degree 2
0/120/240 3
degree
0/90/180/270 4
degree
Adjacent Processing: PRM.DTL.EXS 10 100 0 3 0   X 
Minimum Scale
Overlap Elimination PRM.DTL.OR_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Elimination Target PRM.DTL.ORMD Other Than 0   X 
Best Match
All 1
Overlap Area (%) PRM.DTL.ORAR 30 100 0 3 0   X 
Rotation Line Rotation PRM.DTL.AFS_EN Disable 0 X X X 
Direction- Correction Direction-
Added Search Enable 1
Added
Search Rot. Feat. PRM.DTL.AFS_DMD ON 1   X 
Densification
OFF 0
Rotation Center PRM.DTL.AFS_RTC specified point 0 X X X 
Reference
Selection center of gravity 1

Rotation Center PRM.DTL.AFS_XY 4 3   X 

Offset XY
Rotation Center PRM.DTL.AFS_X 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3   X 
Offset X
Rotation Center PRM.DTL.AFS_Y 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3   X 
Offset Y
Rotation Center PRM.DTL.AFS_SXY 5 3 X X X X
Reference Point XY
Rotation Center PRM.DTL.AFS_SX 0.000 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X X
Reference Point X
Rotation Center PRM.DTL.AFS_SY 0.000 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X X
Reference Point Y
Concentricity PRM.DTL.AFS_ECCRG 0 50 0 2 0   X 
Margin Range
Rotation Condition PRM.DTL.AFS_WT Whole Circum. 0 X X X 
180° Rotation 1
Polygon 2
Follow Angle PRM.DTL.AFCAP ON 1 X X X 
Range in Detection
Conditions OFF 0

Rotation Condition PRM.DTL.AFS_VN 6 16 3 2 0   X 

Vertex Count
Rotation Enabled PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].RGNEN Enable 1 X X X 
Feature
Disable 0
Region 0
Shape Settings PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].SHP None 0 X X X 
Rectangle 1
Rotated 3
Rectangle
Circle 4
Oval 5
Ring 6
Arc 7
Use as Mask PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].MSKEN Enable 1 X X X 
Disable 0

XG-X Comm-US 3-65

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Rotation Upper Left XY PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].LUXY 5 0   X 
Feature
Upper Left X PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].LUX 16383 0 5 0   X 
Region 0:
Rectangle Upper Left Y PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].LUY 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower Right XY PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].RDXY 5 0   X 
Lower Right X PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].RDX 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower Right Y PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].RDY 16383 0 5 0   X 
Rotation Width PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].WI 16383 1 5 0   X 
Feature
Height PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].HI 16383 1 5 0   X 
Region 0:
Rotated Center XY PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].RCXY 5 0   X 
Rectangle
Center X PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].RCX 16382 0 5 0   X 
Center Y PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].RCY 16382 0 5 0   X 
Angle PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].T 359.9 0 3 1   X 
Rotation Center XY PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Feature
Center X PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Region 0:
Circle Center Y PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CR 9600 0 4 0   X 
Rotation Center XY PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Feature
Center X PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Region 0:
Oval Center Y PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CR1 2580 8 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CR2 2580 8 4 0   X 
Angle PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].T 359.9 0 3 1   X 
Rotation Center XY PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Feature
Center X PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Region 0:
Ring Center Y PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CR1 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CR2 9600 0 4 0   X 
Rotation Center XY PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Feature
Center X PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Region 0:
Arc Center Y PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CR1 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].CR2 9600 0 4 0   X 
Starting Angle PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].STA 359.9 0 3 1   X 
End Angle PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[0].ENA 359.9 0 3 1   X 
Rotation Direction-Added Search: PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[1].***
Rotation Feature Region 1
Rotation Direction-Added Search: PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[2].***
Rotation Feature Region 2
Rotation Direction-Added Search: PRM.DTL.AFS_RGN[3].***
Rotation Feature Region 3
Detect. Display All PRM.DTL.QDS ON 1   X 
Target Candidates
OFF 0
Selection
Conditions Overlay Display PRM.DTL.QOV ON 1   X 
OFF 0
(Condition 1) PRM.DTL.QZ1_ELA Link w/ Current 0 X X X 
Feature Extraction Feat.
Settings
Specify Value 1
(Condition 2) PRM.DTL.QZ2_ELA Link w/ Current 0 X X X 
Feature Extraction Feat.
Settings
Specify Value 1

3-66 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detect. (Condition 1) PRM.DTL.QZ1M Disable 0 X X X 
Target Enable Condition
Enable 1
Selection
Conditions (Condition 1) PRM.DTL.QZ1_LLV 10 255 1 3 0   X 
(continued) Feature Min.
Intensity
(Condition 1) PRM.DTL.QZ1_THM Or Less are 1   X 
Feature Pixel Ratio Retained
Mode
Or More are 0
Retained
(Condition 1) PRM.DTL.QZ1_TH 0 999999 0 6 0   X 
Feature Pixel Count
(Condition 2) PRM.DTL.QZ2M Disable 0 X X X 
Enable Condition
Enable 1
(Condition 2) PRM.DTL.QZ2_LLV 10 255 0 3 0   X 
Feature Min.
Intensity
(Condition 2) PRM.DTL.QZ2_THM Or Less are 1   X 
Feature Pixel Ratio Retained
Mode
Or More are 0
Retained
(Condition 2) PRM.DTL.QZ2_TH 0 999999 0 6 0   X 
Feature Pixel Count
Detection Enabled PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].RGNEN Enable 1 X X X 
Target
Disable 0
Selection
Region 1-0 Shape Settings PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].SHP None 0 X X X 
Rectangle 1
Rotated 3
Rectangle
Circle 4
Oval 5
Ring 6
Arc 7
Use as Mask PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].MSKEN Enable 1 X X X 
Disable 0
Detection Upper Left XY PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].LUXY 5 0   X 
Target
Upper Left X PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].LUX 16383 0 5 0   X 
Selection
Region 1-0: Upper Left Y PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].LUY 16383 0 5 0   X 
Rectangle
Lower Right XY PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].RDXY 5 0   X 
Lower Right X PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].RDX 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower Right Y PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].RDY 16383 0 5 0   X 
Detection Width PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].WI 16383 1 5 0   X 
Target
Height PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].HI 16383 1 5 0   X 
Selection
Region 1-0: Center XY PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].RCXY 5 0   X 
Rotated
Center X PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].RCX 16382 0 5 0   X 
Rect
Center Y PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].RCY 16382 0 5 0   X 
Angle PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].T 359.9 0 3 1   X 
Detection Center XY PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Target
Center X PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Selection
Region 1-0: Center Y PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Circle
Radius PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CR 9600 0 4 0   X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-67

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Center XY PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Target
Center X PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Selection
Region 1-0: Center Y PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Oval
Radius 1 PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CR1 2580 8 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CR2 2580 8 4 0   X 
Angle PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].T 359.9 0 3 1   X 
Detection Center XY PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Target
Center X PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Selection
Region 1-0: Center Y PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Ring
Radius 1 PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CR1 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CR2 9600 0 4 0   X 
Detection Center XY PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Target
Center X PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CX 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Selection
Region 1-0: Center Y PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CY 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Arc
Radius 1 PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CR1 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].CR2 9600 0 4 0   X 
Starting Angle PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].STA 359.9 0 3 1   X 
End Angle PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[0].ENA 359.9 0 3 1   X 
Detection PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[1].***
Target
Selection
Region 1-1
Detection PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[2].***
Target
Selection
Region 1-2
Detection PRM.DTL.QZ1_RGN[3].***
Target
Selection
Region 1-3
Detection PRM.DTL.QZ2_RGN[*].***
Target
Selection
Region 2-*
Parameters Registered Image PRM.DTL.PHSM Fixed (fast) 1 X X X 
Updated each 0
process (slow)
User updated 2
(fast)
Primary Target PRM.DTL.LLB 0 1999 0 4 0 X X X 
Pattern No.
Timeout Time PRM.DTL.TIO 5.0 60.0 0.5 2 1 X X X 
Coordinate System PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjust
Before 1
position adjust
Origin Point XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin Point X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Point Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Detection Point PRM.DTL.DTC specified point 0 X X X 
Offset Option
center of gravity 1
Detection Point PRM.DTL.DTXY 4 3   X 
Offset XY
Detection Point PRM.DTL.DTX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3   X 
Offset X

3-68 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Parameters Detection Point PRM.DTL.DTY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3   X 
(Continued) Offset Y
Registered Pattern PRM.DTL.PTSTXY 5 3 X X X X
Center XY
Registered Pattern PRM.DTL.PTSTX 0.000 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X X
Center X
Registered Pattern PRM.DTL.PTSTY 0.000 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X X
Center Y
Limits Number of Patterns: PRM.DTL.N:HL 9999 0 4 0   X 
Upper Limit
Number of Patterns: PRM.DTL.N:LL 9999 0 4 0   X 
Lower Limit
X Position of Pattern: PRM.DTL.X:HL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
X Position of PRM.DTL.X:LL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Pattern: Lower Limit
Y Position of Pattern: PRM.DTL.Y:HL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Y Position of Pattern: PRM.DTL.Y:LL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Angle of Pattern: PRM.DTL.T:HL 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Upper Limit
Angle of Pattern: PRM.DTL.T:LL 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Lower Limit
% Match of Pattern: PRM.DTL.C:HL 99.999 0 2 3   X 
Upper Limit
% Match of Pattern: PRM.DTL.C:LL 99.999 0 2 3   X 
Lower Limit
Scale of Pattern: PRM.DTL.S:HL 9.999 0 1 3   X 
Upper Limit
Scale of Pattern: PRM.DTL.S:LL 9.999 0 1 3   X 
Lower Limit
Feature Pixel Count PRM.DTL.QZ1:HL 999999 0 6 0   X 
1: Upper Limit
Feature Pixel Count PRM.DTL.QZ1:LL 999999 0 6 0   X 
1: Lower Limit
Feature Pixel Count PRM.DTL.QZ2:HL 999999 0 6 0   X 
2: Upper Limit
Feature Pixel Count PRM.DTL.QZ2:LL 999999 0 6 0   X 
2: Lower Limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-69

List of setting parameters

PatternTrax Unit

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Use Variable for PRM.DTL.UPIR Enable 1 1 0 X X X 
Settings Registered Image Disable 0
Feature Sensitivity PRM.DTL.RRM Low 4 1 0 X X X 
Extraction Normal 5
Condition
High 6
Custom 1
Fine Feature Search: PRM.DTL.FFRR 4 16 0 2 0   X 
Image Reduction
Coarse Feature Search: PRM.DTL.CFRR 8 16 0 2 0   X 
Image Reduction
Accuracy PRM.DTL.PRCM Low 1 1 0   X 
Normal 2
High 0
Highest 3
Large Area Search PRM.DTL.STLAM OFF 0 1 0 X X X 
ON 1
Noise Cut PRM.DTL.FNE 10 255 0 3 0   X 
Gain PRM.DTL.FGN 2.0 20.0 1.0 2 1   X 
Feature Extraction Size PRM.DTL.FES 2 2000 2 4 0   X 
Deformity Margin (%) PRM.DTL.DFTO 0 100 0 3 0   X 
Angle Sensitivity PRM.DTL.ANSM Low 1 1 0 X X X 
Normal 2
High 3
Custom 0
Angle Step Width (times) PRM.DTL.ANSR 1.0 9.9 0.1 1 1   X 
Display Feature PRM.DTL.DMD Fine 0 1 0   X 
Coarse 1
Detection Angle Range (0 - +180) PRM.DTL.ARG:HL 30.000 180.000 0.000 3 3   X 
Conditions Angle Range (0 - -179.99) PRM.DTL.ARG:LL -30.000 0.000 -179.999 3 3   X 
Maximum Number of PRM.DTL.MXN 1 2000 1 4 0 X X X 
Possible Patterns
Reverse Detection PRM.DTL.FEK OFF 0 1 0   X 
ON 1
Detection Outside of PRM.DTL.FRE OFF 1 1 0 X X X 
Search Region ON 0
Minimum Match % PRM.DTL.DLV 60.000 99.999 0.000 2 3   X 

3-70 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Detection Order PRM.DTL.LOD X:Ascend 1 2 0   X 
Conditions X:Descend 2
(Continued)
Y:Ascend 3
Y:Descend 4
Match%:Ascend 12
Match%:Descend 11
Clockwise 9
Counterclockwise 10
From Upper Left 5
(Rightward)
From Upper Left 6
(Downward)
From Upper 42
Right (Leftward)
From Upper 46
Right
(Downward)
From Lower Left 43
(Rightward)
From Lower Left 45
(Upward)
From Lower 44
Right (Leftward)
From Lower 47
Right (Upward)
Starting Angle PRM.DTL.STA 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Detection Region PRM.DTL.EDR OFF 0 1 0   X 
Expansion ON 1
Parameters Grouping Method PRM.DTL.LGTYP Pattern Length 0 1 0   X 
(Long Side)
Pattern Length 1
(XY Individual)
Specified Value 2
Grouping Range PRM.DTL.LGLEN 20 9999 1 4 0   X 
Registered Image PRM.DTL.PHSM Fixed (fast) 1 1 0 X X X X
Updated each 0
process (slow)
User updated 2
(fast)
Primary Target Pattern PRM.DTL.LLB 0 1999 0 4 0 X X X 
No.
Adjacent Processing: PRM.DTL.EXD 30 999 0 3 0   X 
Minimum Distance
Adjacent Processing: PRM.DTL.EXA 180 180 0 3 0   X 
Angle

XG-X Comm-US 3-71

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

3-78 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Defect Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Detection PRM.DTL.PRD X 1 X X X 
condition direction Y 2
XY 3
Ring 8
Radius 10
Individual setting PRM.DTL.IND OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1
High speed PRM.DTL.HSM ON 1 X X X 
mode OFF 0
Defect level PRM.DTL.SLV:LL 10 254 0 3 0   X 
Element size: X/ PRM.DTL.SEGX 16 256 1 3 0   X 
Radius
Element size: Y/ PRM.DTL.SEGY 16 256 1 3 0   X 
Ring
Comparison PRM.DTL.CGM Auto 1 X X X 
setting Manual 0
Element shift: X/ PRM.DTL.CGPX 4 2432 1 4 0   X 
Radius
Element shift: Y/ PRM.DTL.CGPY 4 2432 1 4 0   X 
Ring
Compare PRM.DTL.COFX 1 2432 1 4 0   X 
element: X/
Radius
Compare PRM.DTL.COFY 1 2432 1 4 0   X 
element:Y/
Ring
Gain PRM.DTL.ST_GN 1.0 99.0 1.0 2 1   X 
Ignore intensity PRM.DTL.USIN ON 0   X 
OFF 1
Grouping PRM.DTL.SGR OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1
Additional group PRM.DTL.EGR_EN Disable 0 X X X 
result Enable 1
Count PRM.DTL.MXN 1 99 1 2 0 X X X 
Upper defect PRM.DTL.SVL:HL 99999999 99999999 1 8 0   X 
Lower defect PRM.DTL.SVL:LL 1 99999999 1 8 0   X 
Roundness filter PRM.DTL.CIR_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Major axis filter PRM.DTL.MAA_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Axes ratio filter PRM.DTL.RTO_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Distributed oval PRM.DTL.MAA2_EN Disable 0   X 
filter Enable 1
Aspect ratio filter PRM.DTL.RTO2_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Roundness filter: PRM.DTL.CIR_THRES:HL 1.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Maximum
Roundness filter: PRM.DTL.CIR_THRES:LL 0.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Minimum
Major axis filter: PRM.DTL.MAA_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum
Major axis filter: PRM.DTL.MAA_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum
Axes ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum

XG-X Comm-US 3-79

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Axes ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
condition Minimum
(continued)
Distributed oval PRM.DTL.MAA2_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter: Maximum
Distributed oval PRM.DTL.MAA2_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter: Minimum
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO2_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO2_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum
Fill holes PRM.DTL.FILL OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Active border PRM.DTL.CAN OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Detection order PRM.DTL.LOD Y>X: Ascend 5   X 
X>Y: Ascend 6
X:Ascend 1
X:Descend 2
Y:Ascend 3
Y:Descend 4
Area:Ascend 14
Area:Descend 13
Clockwise 9
Counterclockwise 10
Out → Center 20
Center → Out 21
Parameters Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Coordinate value PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjustment
Before 1
position
adjustment
Primary target PRM.DTL.LLB 0 98 0 2 0 X X X 
Limits Total defect area: PRM.DTL.TSA:HL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Upper limit
Total defect area: PRM.DTL.TSA:LL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Lower limit
Group count: PRM.DTL.N:HL - 99 0 2 0   X 
Upper limit
Group count: PRM.DTL.N:LL - 99 0 2 0   X 
Lower limit
Defect area: PRM.DTL.GSA:HL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Upper limit
Defect area: PRM.DTL.GSA:LL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Lower limit
Group center X: PRM.DTL.GX:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Group center X: PRM.DTL.GX:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Group center Y: PRM.DTL.GY:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Group center Y: PRM.DTL.GY:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Target Target PRM.DTL.CLSEN[0] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Classification classification
type 00 setting
⋅⋅⋅

Target PRM.DTL.CLSEN[19] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
classification
type 19 setting

3-80 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Blob Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Detect PRM.DTL.DC White 255   X 
condition Black 0
Count PRM.DTL.MXN 30 9999 1 4 0 X X X 
Fill holes PRM.DTL.FILL OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Active border PRM.DTL.CAN OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Detection order PRM.DTL.LOD Y>X: Ascend 5   X 
X>Y: Ascend 6
X:Ascend 1
X:Descend 2
Y:Ascend 3
Y:Descend 4
Area:Ascend 14
Area:Descend 13
Roundness: 16
Ascend
Roundness: 15
Descend
Clockwise 9
Counterclockwise 10
Starting angle PRM.DTL.STA 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Angle range PRM.DTL.EXT_AX OFF 2   X 
180° 0
360° 1
Primary target PRM.DTL.LB All 0 X X X 
specification Specified 1
Primary target PRM.DTL.LLB 0 9998 0 4 0 X X X 
Area filter: PRM.DTL.ARI_THRES:HL 99999999 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Maximum
Area filter: PRM.DTL.ARI_THRES:LL 100 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Minimum
Roundness filter: PRM.DTL.CIR_THRES:HL 1.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Maximum
Roundness filter: PRM.DTL.CIR_THRES:LL 0.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Minimum
Major axis filter: PRM.DTL.MAA_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum
Major axis filter: PRM.DTL.MAA_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum
Axes ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum
Axes ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum
Distributed oval PRM.DTL.MAA2_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter: Maximum
Distributed oval PRM.DTL.MAA2_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter: Minimum
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO2_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO2_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum
Major / minor axis PRM.DTL.R2_EN Disable 0 X X X 
detection Enable 1
Minimum bounding PRMDTLMBR_EN Disable 0 X X X 
rectangle Enable 1
measurement
detection
Distributed oval PRM.DTL.ELP_EN Disable 0 X X X 
detection Enable 1

XG-X Comm-US 3-81

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Parameters Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Coordinate value PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjustment
Before 1
position
adjustment
Limits Count: Upper limit PRM.DTL.N:HL - 9999 0 4 0   X 
Count: Lower limit PRM.DTL.N:LL - 9999 0 4 0   X 
Position X: Upper PRM.DTL.X:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position X: Lower PRM.DTL.X:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position Y: Upper PRM.DTL.Y:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position Y: Lower PRM.DTL.Y:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Angle: Upper limit PRM.DTL.T:HL - 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Angle: Lower limit PRM.DTL.T:LL - 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Area: Upper limit PRM.DTL.AR:HL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Area: Lower limit PRM.DTL.AR:LL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Feret diameter X: PRM.DTL.FX:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Feret diameter X: PRM.DTL.FX:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Feret diameter Y: PRM.DTL.FY:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Feret diameter Y: PRM.DTL.FY:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Perimeter: Upper PRM.DTL.CL:HL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
limit
Perimeter: Lower PRM.DTL.CL:LL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
limit
Roundness: PRM.DTL.CD:HL - 9.999 0.000 1 3   X 
Upper limit
Roundness: PRM.DTL.CD:LL - 9.999 0.000 1 3   X 
Lower limit
Major axis: Upper PRM.DTL.MAA:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Major axis: Lower PRM.DTL.MAA:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Minor axis: Upper PRM.DTL.MIA:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Minor axis: Lower PRM.DTL.MIA:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Axes ratio: Upper PRM.DTL.RTO:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Axes ratio: Lower PRM.DTL.RTO:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Distributed oval, PRM.DTL.MAA2:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
major axis: Upper limit
Distributed oval, PRM.DTL.MAA2:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
major axis: Lower limit
Distributed oval, PRM.DTL.MIA2:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
minor axis: Upper limit
Distributed oval, PRM.DTL.MIA2:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
minor axis: Lower limit
Aspect ratio: PRM.DTL.RTO2:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Aspect ratio: PRM.DTL.RTO2:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Target Target classification PRM.DTL.CLSEN[0] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Classification type 00 setting
…

Target classification PRM.DTL.CLSEN[19] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 

type 19 setting

3-82 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Grayscale Blob Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Detection target PRM.DTL.DBC Bright 0 X X X 
condition Dark 1
Bright & Dark 2
Individual 3
Base intensity PRM.DTL.DILT Average value 0 X X X 
type Median value 1
Specified 2
value
Mode 3
Base intensity PRM.DTL.IIL 128 255 0 3 0   X 
specified value
Bright detection PRM.DTL.DI_THRES:HL 10 254 0 3 0   X 
level
Dark detection PRM.DTL.DI_THRES:LL 10 254 0 3 0   X 
level
Bright / dark PRM.DTL.IND OFF 0 X X X 
individual setting ON 1
High speed PRM.DTL.HSM ON 1 X X X 
mode OFF 0
Element PRM.DTL.SEGX 16 256 1 3 0   X 
Size: X/Radius
Element PRM.DTL.SEGY 16 256 1 3 0   X 
Size: Y/Ring
Element PRM.DTL.CGM Auto 1 X X X 
Interval setting Manual 0
Element shift: X PRM.DTL.CGPX 4 2432 1 4 0   X 
Element shift: Y PRM.DTL.CGPY 4 2432 1 4 0   X 
Count PRM.DTL.MXN 10 9999 1 4 0 X X X 
Fill holes PRM.DTL.FILL OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Active border PRM.DTL.CAN OFF 0   X 
ON 1

XG-X Comm-US 3-83

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Detection order PRM.DTL.LOD Y>X: Ascend 5   X 
condition X>Y: Ascend 6
(continued)
X:Ascend 1
X:Descend 2
Y:Ascend 3
Y:Descend 4
Area:Ascend 14
Area:Descend 13
Roundness: 16
Ascend
Roundness: 15
Descend
Clockwise 9
Counterclockwise 10
Volume: 37
Ascend
Volume: 36
Descend
Average 39
intensity
difference:
Ascend
Average 38
intensity
difference:
Descend
Maximum 41
intensity
difference:
Ascend
Maximum 40
intensity
difference:
Descend
Starting angle PRM.DTL.STA 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Angle range PRM.DTL.EXT_AX OFF 2   X 
180° 0
360° 1
Primary target PRM.DTL.LB All 0 X X X 
specification Specified 1
Primary target PRM.DTL.LLB 0 9998 0 4 0 X X X 
Volume detection PRM.DTL.VOL_EN Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Major / minor axis PRM.DTL.R2_EN Disable 0 X X X 
detection Enable 1
Distributed oval PRM.DTL.ELP_EN Disable 0 X X X 
detection Enable 1
Area filter: PRM.DTL.ARI_THRES:HL 99999999 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Upper Limit
Area filter: PRM.DTL.ARI_THRES:LL 100 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Lower Limit
Volume filter: PRM.DTL.VOL_THRES:HL 99999999999 99999999999 0 11 0   X 
Upper Limit
Volume filter: PRM.DTL.VOL_THRES:LL 0 99999999999 0 11 0   X 
Lower Limit
Average intensity PRM.DTL.AVI_THRES:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
level filter:
Upper Limit

3-84 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Average intensity PRM.DTL.AVI_THRES:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
condition level filter:
(continued) Lower Limit
Maximum PRM.DTL.MXI_THRES:HL 255 255 0 3 0   X 
intensity level
filter: Upper Limit
Maximum PRM.DTL.MXI_THRES:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
intensity level
filter: Lower Limit
Roundness filter: PRM.DTL.CIR_THRES:HL 1.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Upper limit
Roundness filter: PRM.DTL.CIR_THRES:LL 0.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Lower limit
Major axis filter: PRM.DTL.MAA_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Major axis filter: PRM.DTL.MAA_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Axes ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Axes ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Distributed oval PRM.DTL.MAA2_THRES: HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter:
Upper Limit
Distributed oval PRM.DTL.MAA2_THRES: LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter:
Lower Limit
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO2_THRES: HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.DTL.RTO2_THRES: LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Parameters Coordinate value PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjustment
Before 1
position
adjustment
Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Limits Total area: Upper PRM.DTL.TAR:HL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
limit
Total area: Lower PRM.DTL.TAR:LL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
limit
Count: Upper limit PRM.DTL.N:HL - 9999 0 4 0   X 
Count: Lower limit PRM.DTL.N:LL - 9999 0 4 0   X 
Position X: Upper PRM.DTL.X:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position X: Lower PRM.DTL.X:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position Y: Upper PRM.DTL.Y:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position Y: Lower PRM.DTL.Y:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Angle: Upper limit PRM.DTL.T:HL - 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Angle: Lower limit PRM.DTL.T:LL - 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Area: Upper limit PRM.DTL.AR:HL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Area: Lower limit PRM.DTL.AR:LL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
Volume: Upper PRM.DTL.VOL:HL - 99999999999 0 11 0   X 
limit
Volume: Lower PRM.DTL.VOL:LL - 99999999999 0 11 0   X 
limit
Average intensity PRM.DTL.AVI:HL - 999 0 3 0   X 
difference:
Upper limit
Average intensity PRM.DTL.AVI:LL - 999 0 3 0   X 
difference:
Lower limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-85

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Maximum PRM.DTL.MXI:HL - 999 0 3 0   X 
(continued) intensity
difference:
Upper limit
Maximum PRM.DTL.MXI:LL - 999 0 3 0   X 
intensity
difference:
Lower limit
Feret diameter X: PRM.DTL.FX:HL - 99999.999 0.0 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Feret diameter X: PRM.DTL.FX:LL - 99999.999 0.0 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Feret diameter Y: PRM.DTL.FY:HL - 99999.999 0.0 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Feret diameter Y: PRM.DTL.FY:LL - 99999.999 0.0 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Perimeter: Upper PRM.DTL.CL:HL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
limit
Perimeter: Lower PRM.DTL.CL:LL - 99999999 0 8 0   X 
limit
Roundness: PRM.DTL.CD:HL - 9.999 0.000 1 3   X 
Upper limit
Roundness: PRM.DTL.CD:LL - 9.999 0.000 1 3   X 
Lower limit
Major axis: Upper PRM.DTL.MAA:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Major axis: Lower PRM.DTL.MAA:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Minor axis: Upper PRM.DTL.MIA:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Minor axis: Lower PRM.DTL.MIA:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Axes ratio: Upper PRM.DTL.RTO:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Axes ratio: Lower PRM.DTL.RTO:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Distributed oval, PRM.DTL.MAA2:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
major axis: Upper
limit
Distributed oval, PRM.DTL.MAA2:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
major axis: Lower
limit
Distributed oval, PRM.DTL.MIA2:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
minor axis: Upper
limit
Distributed oval, PRM.DTL.MIA2:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
minor axis: Lower
limit
Aspect ratio: PRM.DTL.RTO2:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Aspect ratio: PRM.DTL.RTO2:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Target Target classification PRM.DTL.CLSEN[0] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Classification type 00 setting
…

Target classification PRM.DTL.CLSEN[19] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 

type 19 setting

3-86 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Profile Position Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Trend direction PRM.DTL.TRD ↓ 7 X X X 
condition → 5
Clockwise 8
Scan direction PRM.DTL.PRD → 5   X 
← 4
↓ 7
↑ 6
Forward 5
Reverse 4
Center → 11
Out
Out → 10
Center
Edge direction PRM.DTL.EGD Both 3   X 
Light to dark 1
Dark to light 2
Specified edge PRM.DTL.RID 0 3599 -3600 4 0   X 
Edge sensitivity PRM.DTL.SEN 30 100 0 3 0   X 
Edge detection PRM.DTL.FLW 5 100 0 3 0   X 
width
Upper edge PRM.DTL.EI:HL 255.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   X 
intensity
Lower edge PRM.DTL.EI:LL 5.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   X 
intensity
Segment size PRM.DTL.SGSA 10.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Ring)
Segment shift PRM.DTL.MVSA 5.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Ring)
Start angle (Ring) PRM.DTL.STA 0.00 359.99 0.00 3 2   X 
Segment size PRM.DTL.SGSA 10.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Arc)
Segment shift PRM.DTL.MVSA 5.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Arc)
Segment offset PRM.DTL.STOFA 0.00 359.99 0.00 3 2   X 
(Arc)
Segment size PRM.DTL.SGSR 10 9999 1 4 0   X 
(Other)
Segment shift PRM.DTL.MVSR 5.00 9999.99 0.01 4 2   X 
(Other)
Segment offset PRM.DTL.STOFR 0 9999 0 4 0   X 
(Other)
Primary target PRM.DTL.LB Maximum 4 X X X 
specification Minimum 5
Specified 1
Primary target PRM.DTL.LLB 0 4999 0 4 0 X X X 
Angled edge PRM.DTL.WPR OFF 0   X 
detection ON 1
Segment count PRM.DTL.MXN 100 5000 1 4 0 X X X 
Circle/line PRM.DTL.DEC OFF 0 X X X 
detection Circle 1
Line 2
Best fit correction PRM.DTL.REA OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Acceptable PRM.DTL.ASR 5.0 999.9 0.0 3 1   X 
abnormal gap
Maximum PRM.DTL.ASL 25 100 0 3 0   X 
abnormal size

XG-X Comm-US 3-87

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Parameters Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Coordinate value PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjustment
Before 1
position
adjustment
Out of image PRM.DTL.OSM Normal 0   X 
Fast 1
Limits Detected PRM.DTL.DSGN:HL - 9999 0 4 0   X 
segments: Upper
limit
Detected PRM.DTL.DSGN:LL - 9999 0 4 0   X 
segments: Lower
limit
Position X (Max): PRM.DTL.XHI:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Position X (Max): PRM.DTL.XHI:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Position X (Min): PRM.DTL.XLO:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Position X (Min): PRM.DTL.XLO:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Position X: Upper PRM.DTL.X:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position X: Lower PRM.DTL.X:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position Y (Max): PRM.DTL.YHI:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Position Y (Max): PRM.DTL.YHI:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Position Y (Min): PRM.DTL.YLO:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Position Y (Min): PRM.DTL.YLO:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Position Y: Upper PRM.DTL.Y:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Position Y: Lower PRM.DTL.Y:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
limit
Distance (Max): PRM.DTL.PHI:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Distance (Max): PRM.DTL.PHI:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Distance (Min): PRM.DTL.PLO:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Distance (Min): PRM.DTL.PLO:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Distance: Upper PRM.DTL.P:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Distance: Lower PRM.DTL.P:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
limit
Radius (Max): PRM.DTL.RWHI:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Radius (Max): PRM.DTL.RWHI:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Radius (Min): PRM.DTL.RWLO:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Radius (Min): PRM.DTL.RWLO:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Radius: Upper limit PRM.DTL.RW:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Radius: Lower limit PRM.DTL.RW:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 

3-88 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Profile Width Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Measurement PRM.DTL.FTYP Outer gap 4 X X X 
condition mode
Inner gap 5
Outer 7
diameter
Inner 8
diameter
Trend direction PRM.DTL.TRD ↓ 7 X X X 
→ 5
Clockwise 8
Scan direction PRM.DTL.PRD → 5   X 
← 4
↓ 7
↑ 6
Forward 5
Reverse 4
Center→ Out 11
Out → 10
Center
Edge direction PRM.DTL.EGD Both 3   X 
Light to dark 1
Dark to light 2
Edge sensitivity PRM.DTL.SEN 30 100 0 3 0   X 
Edge detection PRM.DTL.FLW 5 100 0 3 0   X 
width
Upper edge PRM.DTL.EI:HL 255.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   X 
intensity
Lower edge PRM.DTL.EI:LL 5.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   X 
intensity
Upper edge PRM.DTL.WHI 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
width
Lower edge PRM.DTL.WLO 1.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
width
Segment size PRM.DTL.SGSA 10.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Ring)
Segment shift PRM.DTL.MVSA 5.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Ring)
Start angle (Ring) PRM.DTL.STA 0.00 359.99 0.00 3 2   X 
Segment size PRM.DTL.SGSA 10.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Arc)
Segment shift PRM.DTL.MVSA 5.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Arc)
Segment offset PRM.DTL.STOFA 0.00 359.99 0.00 3 2   X 
(Arc)
Segment size PRM.DTL.SGSR 10 9999 1 4 0   X 
(Other)
Segment shift PRM.DTL.MVSR 5.00 9999.99 0.01 4 2   X 
(Other)
Segment offset PRM.DTL.STOFR 0 9999 0 4 0   X 
(Other)
Primary target PRM.DTL.LB Maximum 4 X X X 
specification
Minimum 5
Specified 1
Primary target PRM.DTL.LLB 0 4999 0 4 0 X X X 
Angled edge PRM.DTL.WPR OFF 0   X 
detection
ON 1
Segment count PRM.DTL.MXN 100 5000 1 4 0 X X X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-89

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

3-90 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Profile Defect Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Edge Trend direction PRM.DTL.TRD ↓ 7 X X X 
detection
condition → 5
Clockwise 8
Scan direction PRM.DTL.PRD → 5   X 
← 4
↓ 7
↑ 6
Forward 5
Reverse 4
Center → Out 11
Out → Center 10
Edge direction PRM.DTL.EGD Both 3   X 
Light to dark 1
Dark to light 2
Specified edge PRM.DTL.RID 0 3599 -3600 4 0   X 
Edge sensitivity PRM.DTL.SEN 30 100 0 3 0   X 
Edge detection PRM.DTL.FLW 5 100 0 3 0   X 
width
Upper edge PRM.DTL.EI:HL 255.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   X 
intensity
Lower edge PRM.DTL.EI:LL 5.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   X 
intensity
Segment size PRM.DTL.SGSA 5.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Ring)
Segment shift PRM.DTL.MVSA 3.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Ring)
Start angle (Ring) PRM.DTL.STA 0.00 359.99 0.00 3 2   X 
Segment size PRM.DTL.SGSA 5.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Arc)
Segment shift PRM.DTL.MVSA 3.00 359.99 0.01 3 2   X 
(Arc)
Segment offset PRM.DTL.STOFA 0.00 359.99 0.00 3 2   X 
(Arc)
Segment size PRM.DTL.SGSR 5 9999 1 4 0   X 
(Other)
Segment shift PRM.DTL.MVSR 3.00 9999.99 0.01 4 2   X 
(Other)
Segment offset PRM.DTL.STOFR 0 9999 0 4 0   X 
(Other)
Angled edge PRM.DTL.WPR OFF 0   X 
detection
ON 1
Segment count PRM.DTL.MXN 200 5000 1 4 0 X X X 
Defect Target shape PRM.DTL.BML Line 2 X X X 
detection
condition Circle 1
Oval 3
Free curve 4
Smoothing range PRM.DTL.SMR 15 100 1 3 0   X 
Detection PRM.DTL.SDTD + 0 X X X 
direction
- 1
+/- 2
+/- 3
(individual)

XG-X Comm-US 3-91

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Defect Detection PRM.DTL.SDTP 3.00 9999.99 0.00 4 2   X 
detection threshold (+)
condition
(continued) Detection PRM.DTL.SDTM 3.00 9999.99 0.00 4 2   X 
threshold (-)
Defect level filter PRM.DTL.SLTP:HL 9999.99 9999.99 0.00 4 2   X 
(+): Maximum
Defect level filter PRM.DTL.SLTP:LL 0.00 9999.99 0.00 4 2   X 
(+): Minimum
Defect level filter PRM.DTL.SLTM:HL 9999.99 9999.99 0.00 4 2   X 
(-): Maximum
Defect level filter PRM.DTL.SLTM:LL 0.00 9999.99 0.00 4 2   X 
(-): Minimum
Defect width filter PRM.DTL.SWTP:HL 9999 9999 0 4 0   X 
(+): Maximum
Defect width filter PRM.DTL.SWTP:LL 0 9999 0 4 0   X 
(+): Minimum
Defect width filter PRM.DTL.SWTM:HL 9999 9999 0 4 0   X 
(-): Maximum
Defect width filter PRM.DTL.SWTM:LL 0 9999 0 4 0   X 
(-): Minimum
Defect size filter PRM.DTL.SGTP:HL 9999999.99 9999999.99 0.00 7 2   X 
(+): Maximum
Defect size filter PRM.DTL.SGTP:LL 0.00 9999999.99 0.00 7 2   X 
(+): Minimum
Defect size filter PRM.DTL.SGTM:HL 9999999.99 9999999.99 0.00 7 2   X 
(-): Maximum
Defect size filter PRM.DTL.SGTM:LL 0.00 9999999.99 0.00 7 2   X 
(-): Minimum
Count PRM.DTL.MXSN 30 5000 1 4 0 X X X 
Detection order PRM.DTL.LOD Segment: 24   X 
Ascend
Segment: 25
Descend
X:Ascend 1
X:Descend 2
Y:Ascend 3
Y:Descend 4
Defect level: 26
Ascend
Defect level: 27
Descend
Defect width: 28
Ascend
Defect width: 29
Descend
Defect size: 30
Ascend
Defect size: 31
Descend
Primary target PRM.DTL.LB All 0 X X X 
specification
Specified 1
Primary target PRM.DTL.LLB 0 4999 0 4 0 X X X 

3-92 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

XG-X Comm-US 3-93

List of setting parameters

Multi-Profile Defect Unit

Numerical
Selection Referencing
value format

No. of decimal places

No. of integer digits

System Variable

Unit properties
Category Setting item Name Initial value Upper limit Lower limit

User variable

Result data
Label

Value
Image Optimize The Detection PRM.DTL.SETCC 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Settings Conditions (Dedicated
for Profile Images)
Detection Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.DCEN[0] 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Condition (Edge Detection)
Enable Detection
Condition
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SEN[0] 30 100 0 3 0   × 
(Edge Detection) Edge
Sensitivity
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.FLW[0] 5 100 0 3 0   × 
(Edge Detection) Edge
Detection Width
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.EI[0]:LL 5.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   × 
(Edge Detection) Edge
intensity lower limit
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SGSA[0] 5 9999 1 4 0 × × × 
(Edge Detection)
Segment Size (Pixels)
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.MVSA[0] 3.00 9999.99 0.01 4 2 × × × 
(Edge Detection)
Segment Shift (Pixels)
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SDTD[0] + 0
(Defect Detection)
Defect Direction - 1
+/- 2
+/- (individual) 3
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SDTP[0] 3.00 9999.99 0.00 4 2   × 
(Defect Detection)
Detection threshold
plus side
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SDTM[0] 3.00 9999.99 0.00 4 2   × 
(Defect Detection)
Detection threshold
minus side
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SLTP[0]:HL 9999.99 9999.99 0.00 4 2   × 
(Defect Detection)
Defect level filter plus
side upper limit
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SLTP[0]:LL 0.00 9999.99 0.00 4 2   × 
(Defect Detection)
Defect level filter plus
side lower limit
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SLTM[0]:HL 9999.99 9999.99 0.00 4 2   × 
(Defect Detection)
Defect level filter
minus side upper limit
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SLTM[0]:LL 0.00 9999.99 0.00 4 2   × 
(Defect Detection)
Defect level filter
minus side lower limit
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SWTP[0]:HL 9999 9999 0 4 0   × 
(Defect Detection)
Defect Width filter
plus side upper limit
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SWTP[0]:LL 0 9999 0 4 0   × 
(Defect Detection)
Defect Width filter
plus side lower limit
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SWTM[0]:HL 9999 9999 0 4 0   × 
(Defect Detection)
Defect Width filter
minus side upper limit
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SWTM[0]:LL 0 9999 0 4 0   × 
(Defect Detection)
Defect Width filter
minus side lower limit

3-94 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Numerical
Selection Referencing
value format

No. of decimal places

No. of integer digits

System Variable

Unit properties
Category Setting item Name Initial value Upper limit Lower limit

User variable

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Result data
Label

Value
Detection Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SGTP[0]:HL 9999999.99 9999999.99 0.00 7 2   × 
Condition (Defect Detection)
(continued) Defect Size filter plus
side upper limit
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SGTP[0]:LL 0.00 9999999.99 0.00 7 2   × 
(Defect Detection)
Defect Size filter plus
side lower limit
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SGTM[0]:HL 9999999.99 9999999.99 0.00 7 2   × 
(Defect Detection)
Defect Size filter
minus side upper limit
Detection Condition 0: PRM.DTL.SGTM[0]:LL 0.00 9999999.99 0.00 7 2   × 
(Defect Detection)
Defect Size filter
minus side lower limit
Detection Condition 1 PRM.DTL.***[1]
···
···

Detection Condition 4 PRM.DTL.***[4]

Defect Detection PRM.DTL.MXSN 30 5000 1 4 0 × × × 
Condition: Detection
Count (Overall)
Defect Detection PRM.DTL.MXSNR 30 5000 1 4 0 × × × 
Condition: Detection
Count (Each Region)
Defect Detection PRM.DTL.LOD Segment 24   × 
Condition: Label order Ascend
Segment 25
Descend
X Ascend 1
X Descend 2
Y Ascend 3
Y Descend 4
Defect level 26
Ascend
Defect level 27
Descend
Defect Width 28
Ascend
Defect Width 29
Descend
Defect Size 30
Ascend
Defect Size 31
Descend
Defect Detection PRM.DTL.LB All 0 × × × 
Condition: Type of
Primary Target Number-specified 1

Defect Detection PRM.DTL.LLB 0 4999 0 4 0 × × × 

Condition: Primary
Target No.
Intersection Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_EN[0] 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Details Enable Intersection
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_EXT[0] OFF 0
Region Extension
ON 1
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_SRG[0] 100 200 1 3 0 × × × 
Intersection Search
Range (Pixels)
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_OVR[0] 5 200 0 3 0 × × × 
Offset (Pixels)
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_INS[0] OFF 0 × × × 
Corner Inspection
ON 1
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_PRD[0] Outward 5 × × × 
Detection Direction
Inward 4

XG-X Comm-US 3-95

List of setting parameters

Numerical
Selection Referencing
value format

No. of decimal places

No. of integer digits

System Variable

Unit properties
Category Setting item Name Initial value Upper limit Lower limit

User variable

Result data
Label

Value
Intersection Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_EGD[0] Both 3 × × × 
Details Edge Direction
(continued)
Brighter 1
Darker
Darker 2
Brighter
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_DTNO[0] 0 4 0 1 0 × × × 
Corner Detection
Condition
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_WDT[0] 50 500 10 3 0 × × × 
Corner Inspection
Width (Pixels)
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_OHT[0] 50 200 0 3 0 × × × 
Burr Inspection
Range (Pixels)
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_ARID0[0] - 127 0 5 0 × × × 
Array No. of region 0
constituting the
intersection
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_ARID1[0] - 127 0 5 0 × × × 
Array No. of region 1
constituting the
intersection
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_TERM0[0] 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
End of region 0
constituting the
intersection
Intersection Setting 0: PRM.DTL.CRS_TERM1[0] 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
End of region 1
constituting the
intersection
Intersection Setting 1 PRM.DTL.CRS_***[1]
···
···

Intersection Setting PRM.DTL.CRS_***[127]

127
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_DCEN[0] 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Condition 0: (Edge
Detection) Enable
detection condition
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_SEN[0] 30 100 0 3 0   × 
Condition 0: (Edge
Detection) Edge
sensitivity
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_FLW[0] 5 100 0 3 0   × 
Condition 0: (Edge
Detection) Edge
Detection Width
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_EI[0]:LL 5.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   × 
Condition 0: (Edge
Detection) Edge
intensity lower limit
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_SGSA[0] 5 9999 1 4 0 × × × 
Condition 0: (Edge
Detection) Segment
Size (Pixels)
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_MVSA[0] 3.00 9999.99 0.01 4 2 × × × 
Condition 0: (Edge
Detection) Segment
Shift (Pixels)
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_CGT[0]:HL 9999999.99 9999999.99 0000000.00 7 2   × 
Condition 0: (Defect
Detection Condition)
Corner area filter
upper limit
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_CGT[0]:LL 9999999.99 9999999.99 0000000.00 7 2   × 
Condition 0: (Defect
Detection Condition)
Corner area filter
lower limit

3-96 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Numerical
Selection Referencing
value format

No. of decimal places

No. of integer digits

System Variable

Unit properties
Category Setting item Name Initial value Upper limit Lower limit

User variable

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Result data
Label

Value
Intersection Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_CDT[0]:HL 99999.99 99999.99 -99999.99 5 2   × 
Details Condition 0: (Defect
(continued) Detection Condition)
Corner distance filter
upper limit
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_CDT[0]:LL 99999.99 99999.99 -99999.99 5 2   × 
Condition 0: (Defect
Detection Condition)
Corner distance filter
lower limit
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_***[1]
Condition 1
···
···

Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_***[4]

Condition 4
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_LOD Intersection 54   × 
Condition: (Defect No.: Descend
Detection) Label
order Intersection 55
No.: Ascend
Corner Area: 56
Descend
Corner Area: 57
Ascend
Corner 58
Distance:
Descend
Corner 59
Distance:
Ascend
Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_LB All 0 × × × 
Condition: (Defect
Detection) Type of Number- 1
Primary Target specified

Corner Detection PRM.DTL.CRS_LLB 0 127 0 3 0 × × × 

Condition: (Defect
Detection) Primary
Target
Details Origin Point XY PRM.DTL.OGXY
Origin Point X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 × × × 
Origin Point Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 × × × 
Selection PRM.DTL.THM Auto 0   × 
Manual 1
Selection Settings PRM.DTL.THRM 50.00 99.99 0.00 2 2   × 
(manual)
Undetected Points PRM.DTL.UPT Disregard 0 × × × 
Maximize 1
Minimize 2
Interpolate 3
Selection Rate PRM.DTL.CGFT Total Diff. From 0   × 
Model Line
Total Diff. From 1
Threshold
Apply Also to Model PRM.DTL.UUP 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Line Calculation
Store Edge Position of PRM.DTL.OEP 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
All Segments to
Memory
Judgment Total detected PRM.DTL.TDSGN:HL - 99999 0 6 0   × 
conditions segments: Upper limit
Total detected PRM.DTL.TDSGN:LL - 99999 0 6 0   × 
segments: Lower limit
No. of detected PRM.DTL.DSGNL:HL - 99999 0 6 0   × 
segments (min.):
Upper limit
No. of detected PRM.DTL.DSGNL:LL - 99999 0 6 0   × 
segments (min.):
Lower limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-97

List of setting parameters

Numerical
Selection Referencing
value format

No. of decimal places

No. of integer digits

System Variable

Unit properties
Category Setting item Name Initial value Upper limit Lower limit

User variable

Result data
Label

Value
Judgment Total Defect Count: PRM.DTL.TSTN:HL - 9999 0 4 0   × 
conditions Upper limit
(continued)
Total Defect Count: PRM.DTL.TSTN:LL - 9999 0 4 0   × 
Lower limit
Total Size: Upper limit PRM.DTL.TSTG:HL - 9999999.999 0.000 7 3   × 
Total Size: Lower limit PRM.DTL.TSTG:LL - 9999999.999 0.000 7 3   × 
Defect Size: Upper PRM.DTL.STG:HL - 9999999.999 0.000 7 3   × 
limit
Defect Size: Lower PRM.DTL.STG:LL - 9999999.999 0.000 7 3   × 
limit
Defect Position X: PRM.DTL.STX:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   × 
Upper limit
Defect Position X: PRM.DTL.STX:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   × 
Lower limit
Defect Position Y: PRM.DTL.STY:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   × 
Upper limit
Defect Position Y: PRM.DTL.STY:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   × 
Lower limit
Corner area: Upper limit PRM.DTL.CGL:HL - 9999999.99 0.00 7 2   × 
Corner area: Lower limit PRM.DTL.CGL:LL - 9999999.99 0.00 7 2   × 
Corner distance: PRM.DTL.CDSL:HL - 99999.99 -99999.99 5 2   × 
Upper limit
Corner distance: PRM.DTL.CDSL:LL - 99999.99 -99999.99 5 2   × 
Lower limit

Intensity Unit

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value

Parameters Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 

Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Coordinate value PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjustment
Before 1
position
adjustment
Limits Average intensity: PRM.DTL.DA:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Upper limit
Average intensity: PRM.DTL.DA:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Lower limit
Intensity deviation: PRM.DTL.DD:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Upper limit
Intensity deviation: PRM.DTL.DD:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Lower limit
Intensity: Upper limit PRM.DTL.D:HL - 999 0 3 0   X 
Intensity: Lower limit PRM.DTL.D:LL - 999 0 3 0   X 

3-98 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Color Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Colorspace PRM.DTL.PRA RGB 0 X X X 
condition
HSB 3
MultiSpectrum 4
mode
Parameters Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Coordinate value PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjustment
Before 1
position
adjustment
Limits Average intensity PRM.DTL.RA:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
R: Upper limit
Average intensity PRM.DTL.RA:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
R: Lower limit
Average intensity PRM.DTL.GA:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
G: Upper limit
Average intensity PRM.DTL.GA:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
G: Lower limit
Average intensity PRM.DTL.BA:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
B: Upper limit
Average intensity PRM.DTL.BA:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
B: Lower limit
Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.RD:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
R: Upper limit
Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.RD:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
R: Lower limit
Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.GD:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
G: Upper limit
Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.GD:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
G: Lower limit
Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.BD:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
B: Upper limit
Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.BD:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
B: Lower limit
Intensity R: Upper PRM.DTL.R:HL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Intensity R: Lower PRM.DTL.R:LL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Intensity G: Upper PRM.DTL.G:HL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Intensity G: Lower PRM.DTL.G:LL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Intensity B: Upper PRM.DTL.B:HL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Intensity B: Lower PRM.DTL.B:LL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Average intensity PRM.DTL.HUA:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
H: Upper limit
Average intensity PRM.DTL.HUA:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
H: Lower limit
Average intensity S: PRM.DTL.SAA:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Upper limit
Average intensity S: PRM.DTL.SAA:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Lower limit
Average intensity V: PRM.DTL.VAA:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Upper limit
Average intensity PRM.DTL.VAA:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
B: Lower limit
Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.HUD:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
H: Upper limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-99

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.HUD:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
(continued) H: Lower limit
Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.SAD:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
S: Upper limit
Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.SAD:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
S: Lower limit
Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.VAD:HL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
V: Upper limit
Intensity deviation PRM.DTL.VAD:LL - 999.999 0.000 3 3   X 
V: Lower limit
Intensity H: Upper PRM.DTL.HUE:HL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Intensity H: Lower PRM.DTL.HUE:LL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Intensity S: Upper PRM.DTL.SAT:HL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Intensity S: Lower PRM.DTL.SAT:LL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Intensity V: Upper PRM.DTL.VAL:HL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Intensity V: Lower PRM.DTL.VAL:LL - 999 0 3 0   X 
limit
Judgment Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_UVA:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Conditions for UV: Upper limit
(MultiSpectrum
Mode) Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_UVA:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for UV: Lower limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_BA:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for B: Upper limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_BA:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for B: Lower limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_GA:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for G: Upper limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_GA:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for G: Lower limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_AMA:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for AM: Upper limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_AMA:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for AM: Lower limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_RA:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for R: Upper limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_RA:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for R: Lower limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_FRA:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for FR: Upper limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_FRA:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for FR: Lower limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_IRA:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for IR: Upper limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_IRA:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for IR: Lower limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_WA:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for W: Upper Limit
Gray Intensity Ave. PRM.DTL.MC_WA:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
for W: Lower limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_UVD:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for UV:
Upper limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_UVD:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for UV:
Lower limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_BD:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for B:
Upper limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_BD:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for B:
Lower limit

3-100 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Judgment Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_GD:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Conditions Deviation for G:
(MultiSpectrum Upper limit
Mode)
(continued) Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_GD:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for G:
Lower limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_AMD:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for AM:
Upper limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_AMD:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for AM:
Lower limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_RD:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for R:
Upper limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_RD:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for R:
Lower limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_FRD:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for FR:
Upper limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_FRD:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for FR:
Lower limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_IRD:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for IR:
Upper limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_IRD:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for IR:
Lower limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_WD:HL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for W:
Upper limit
Gray Intensity PRM.DTL.MC_WD:LL - 999.999 0.0 3 3   × 
Deviation for W:
Lower limit
Intensity of UV: PRM.DTL.MC_UV:HL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Upper limit
Intensity of UV: PRM.DTL.MC_UV:LL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Lower limit
Intensity of B: PRM.DTL.MC_B:HL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Upper limit
Intensity of B: PRM.DTL.MC_B:LL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Lower limit
Intensity of G: PRM.DTL.MC_G:HL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Upper limit
Intensity of G: PRM.DTL.MC_G:LL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Lower limit
Intensity of AM: PRM.DTL.MC_AM:HL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Upper limit
Intensity of R: PRM.DTL.MC_R:HL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Upper limit
Intensity of R: PRM.DTL.MC_R:LL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Lower limit
Intensity of FR: PRM.DTL.MC_FR:HL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Upper limit
Intensity of FR: PRM.DTL.MC_FR:LL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Lower limit
Intensity of IR: PRM.DTL.MC_IR:HL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Upper limit
Intensity of IR: PRM.DTL.MC_IR:LL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Lower limit
Intensity of W: PRM.DTL.MC_W:HL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Upper limit
Intensity of W: PRM.DTL.MC_W:LL - 999 0 3 0   × 
Lower limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-101

List of setting parameters

Color Grouping Unit

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Color group 0 Enable/Disable color PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].EN 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
group
Group name PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].GRNM × × × 
(Extraction color 0) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].EN 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Enable/Disable
(Extraction color 0) Color PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].CHROM 1 999.999 0.001 3 3 × × × 
range
(Extraction color 0) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].BRIGHT 0 0 50 2 1 × × × 
Brightness range
(Extraction color 0) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].AVCUV - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (UV)
(Extraction color 0) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].AVCB - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (B)
(Extraction color 0) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].AVCG - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (G)
(Extraction color 0) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].AVCAM - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (AM)
(Extraction color 0) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].AVCR - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (R)
(Extraction color 0) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].AVCFR - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (FR)
(Extraction color 0) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].AVCIR - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (IR)
(Extraction color 0) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].AVCW - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (W)
(Extraction color 0) Color PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[0].CDIST[s] - -99999.999 99999.999 5 3 × × × 
distribution information
(Extraction color 1) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[1].***
···

···

(Extraction color 15) PRM.CGRP.GRP[0].CI[15].***

Color group 1 PRM.CGRP.GRP[1].***
···

···

Color group 15 PRM.CGRP.GRP[15].***

3-102 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Excluded (Excluded Color 0) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].EN 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Colors Enable/Disable
(Excluded Color 0) Color PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].CHROM 1 999.999 0.001 3 3 × × × 
range
(Excluded Color 0) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].BRIGHT 0 0 50 2 1 × × × 
Brightness range
(Excluded Color 0) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].AVCUV - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (UV)
(Excluded Color 0) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].AVCB - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (B)
(Excluded Color 0) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].AVCG - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (G)
(Excluded Color 0) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].AVCAM - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (AM)
(Excluded Color 0) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].AVCR - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (R)
(Excluded Color 0) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].AVCFR - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (FR)
(Excluded Color 0) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].AVCIR - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (IR)
(Excluded Color 0) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].AVCW - 999.999 0 3 3 × × × 
Mean value of each
color (W)
(Excluded Color 0) Color PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[0].CDIST[s] - -99999.999 99999.999 5 3 × × × 
distribution information
(Excluded Color 1) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[1].***
···

···

(Excluded Color 15) PRM.CGRP.CBG.CI[15].***

Color Refer to Other Unit PRM.DTL.REF_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
extraction
Reference Unit PRM.DTL.RUID -1 999 -1 8 0 × × × 
settings

XG-X Comm-US 3-103

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Individual (Averaging) Size PRM.CGRP.FKSZ 7 63 3 3 0 × × × 
setting
(Averaging) Enable/ PRM.CGRP.SMENB 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Disable
(Averaging) No. of times PRM.CGRP.PTMS 1 9 1 1 0 × × × 
Measurement method PRM.DTL.ARRT 1 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Proportion Calculation PRM.DTL.ARGN_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Target
Origin coordinate X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 × × × 
Origin coordinate Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 × × × 
Select coordinate axis PRM.DTL.CRD 0 256 0 3 0 × × × 
system
Select origin coordinate PRM.DTL.ORG 0 256 0 3 0 × × × 
system

Error If Primary PRM.DTL.PCFE_EN 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 

Candidate Is Not Found
Judgment Primary Candidate PRM.DTL.MXARGID[0] 0 1 0 1 0   × 
conditions (Group No.)
Primary Candidate
(Area) (%)
Area: Upper limit PRM.DTL.MXAR:HL - 99999999 0 8 0   × 
Area: Lower limit PRM.DTL.MXAR:LL - 99999999 0 8 0   × 
Area (%): Upper limit PRM.DTL.MXRT:HL - 100.0 0.0 3 1   × 
Area (%): Lower limit PRM.DTL.MXRT:LL - 100.0 0.0 3 1   × 
Area of all groups
Area: Upper limit PRM.DTL.ESAR:HL - 99999999 0 8 0   × 
Area: Lower limit PRM.DTL.ESAR:LL - 99999999 0 8 0   × 
Individual Area (Area)
(%) (Group 0)

Area: Upper limit PRM.DTL.GAR[0]:HL - 99999999 0 8 0   × 

Area: Lower limit PRM.DTL.GAR[0]:LL - 99999999 0 8 0   × 
Area (%): Upper limit PRM.DTL.GRT[0]:HL - 100.0 0.0 3 1   × 
Area (%): Lower limit PRM.DTL.GRT[0]:LL - 100.0 0.0 3 1   × 
Individual Area (Area) PRM.DTL.***[1]:**
(%) (Group 1)
···

···

Individual Area (Area) PRM.DTL.*[15]:

(%) (Group 15)

3-104 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

OCR Unit

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Block Character color PRM.DTL.CCL White 255   X 
setting
Black 0
Block mode PRM.DTL.COM Auto 0 X X X 
Fixed 1
Character PRM.DTL.STDR → 5   X 
reading direction
← 4
↓ 6
↑ 7
Number of lines PRM.DTL.SLCT 1 2 1 1 0 X X X 
Detection PRM.DTL.SCOD Forward 7   X 
direction
Reverse 6
Size 13
Line rotation PRM.DTL.SERO OFF 0   X 
correction
ON 1
Detection method PRM.DTL.SCOM Waveform 0 X X X 
Specify ratio 1
Ratio setup: Start PRM.DTL.SSHG01 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
position
Ratio setup: PRM.DTL.SSHG02 50.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Height
Ratio setup: End PRM.DTL.SSHGE 100.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
position
Smoothing filter PRM.DTL.SWEC 0 99 0 2 0   X 
Maximum line PRM.DTL.MRW 1.000 1.000 0.100 1 3   X 
ratio
Line detection PRM.DTL.SCOT 40 255 0 3 0   X 
Minimum line PRM.DTL.SNWD 10 255 0 3 0   X 
height
Line extraction PRM.DTL.SNHG 25 255 0 3 0   X 
Line 1: Number of PRM.DTL.CCCT1 10 20 1 2 0 X X X 
characters
Line 1: Detection PRM.DTL.CCOD1 Forward 7   X 
direction
Reverse 6
Size 13
Line 1: Character PRM.DTL.CESP1 OFF 0   X 
tilt correction
ON 1
Line 1: Detection PRM.DTL.CCOM1 Waveform 0 X X X 
method
Specify ratio 1
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW01_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup: Start
position
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW02_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (1-2)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW03_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (2-3)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW04_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (3-4)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW05_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (4-5)

XG-X Comm-US 3-105

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Block Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW06_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
setting Ratio setup:
(continued) Height (5-6)

Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW07_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 

Ratio setup:
Height (6-7)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW08_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (7-8)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW09_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (8-9)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW10_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (9-10)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW11_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (10-11)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW12_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (11-12)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW13_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (12-13)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW14_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (13-14)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW15_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (14-15)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW16_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (15-16)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW17_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (16-17)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW18_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (17-18)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW19_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (18-19)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW20_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (19-20)
Line 1: Ratio PRM.DTL.CCWE_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
setup
End position
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CWEC1 0 99 0 2 0   X 
Smoothing filter
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CART1 1.000 9.999 0.100 1 3   X 
Max. Width /
Height Ratio
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCOT1 40 255 0 3 0   X 
Character
detection
Line 1: Minimum PRM.DTL.CNWD1 5 255 0 3 0   X 
Character Width
Line 1: Character PRM.DTL.CNHG1 25 255 0 3 0   X 
extraction
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CEFA1 OFF 0 X X X 
Fine adjustment
ON 1
Line 2: Number of PRM.DTL.CCCT2 10 20 1 2 0 X X X 
characters

3-106 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Block Line 2: Detection PRM.DTL.CCOD2 Forward 7   X 
setting direction
(continued) Reverse 6
Size 13
Line 2: Character PRM.DTL.CESP2 OFF 0   X 
tilt correction
ON 1
Line 2: Detection PRM.DTL.CCOM2 Waveform 0 X X X 
method
Specify ratio 1
Line 2: Ratio PRM.DTL.CCW01_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
setup
Start position
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW02_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (1-2)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW03_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (2-3)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW04_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (3-4)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW05_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (4-5)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW06_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (5-6)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW07_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (6-7)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW08_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (7-8)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW09_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (8-9)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW10_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (9-10)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW11_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (10-11)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW12_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (11-12)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW13_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (12-13)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW14_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (13-14)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW15_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (14-15)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW16_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (15-16)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW17_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (16-17)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW18_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (17-18)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW19_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (18-19)

XG-X Comm-US 3-107

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Block Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW20_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 
setting Ratio setup:
(continued) Height (19-20)

Line 2: Ratio PRM.DTL.CCWE_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X 

setup
End position
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CWEC2 0 99 0 2 0   X 
Smoothing filter
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CART2 1.000 9.999 0.100 1 3   X 
Max. Width /
Height Ratio
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCOT2 40 255 0 3 0   X 
Character
detection
Line 2: Minimum PRM.DTL.CNWD2 5 255 0 3 0   X 
Character Width
Line 2: Character PRM.DTL.CNHG2 25 255 0 3 0   X 
extraction
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CEFA2 OFF 0 1 1 0 X X X 
Fine adjustment
ON 1
Fixed block: PRM.DTL.FRN 0 20 0 2 0 X X X 
Number of
characters
Fixed Width PRM.DTL.WI[0] 81 2432 1 4 0   X 
block:
Rotated Height PRM.DTL.HI[0] 121 2432 1 4 0   X 
rectangle Center XY PRM.DTL.RCXY[0] 5 0  X X 
0
Center X PRM.DTL.RCX[0] 256 16382 0 5 0   X 
Center Y PRM.DTL.RCY[0] 240 16382 0 5 0   X 
Rotation angle PRM.DTL.T[0] 0.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
Fixed PRM.DTL.***[1] 
block:
Rotated
rectangle
1

…

Fixed PRM.DTL.***[19] 
block:
Rotated
rectangle
19
Fixed Fine adjustment PRM.DTL.EFAF OFF 0 X X X 
block:
Rotated ON 1
rectangle
(common)

3-108 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Parameters Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Coordinate value PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjustment
Before 1
position
adjustment
Zero suppression PRM.DTL.CAZS OFF 0 X X X 
Space 1
forward
Space 2
backward
Remove 3
zeros
Calculation result PRM.DTL.COC 10 36 10 2 0 X X X 
conversion: N-
adic number
Calculation result PRM.DTL.PLN 1 6 1 1 0 X X X 
conversion: No.
of digits
Mirror inversion PRM.DTL.ENMR OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1
Character PRM.DTL.GDLL 10 255 0 3 0 X X X 
contrast lower
limit
Noise PRM.DTL.ACB OFF 0 X X X 
cancellation
ON 1
Primary target PRM.DTL.LLB 0 39 0 2 0 X X X 
Calendar Offset: Year PRM.DTL.OFYR 0 10 -10 2 0   X 
Settings
Offset: Month PRM.DTL.OFMN 0 12 -12 2 0   X 
Offset: Day PRM.DTL.OFDY 0 1999 -1999 4 0   X 
Offset: Time PRM.DTL.OFTM 0 24 -24 2 0   X 
Allowable error: + PRM.DTL.SLH 0 3599 0 4 0   X 
Allowable error: - PRM.DTL.SLL 0 3599 0 4 0   X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-109

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: PRM.DTL.JIDA1[0] 0 0   X 
Registered string:
1st character 1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A 10
B 11
C 12
D 13
E 14
F 15
G 16
H 17
I 18
J 19
K 20
L 21
M 22
N 23
O 24
P 25
Q 26
R 27
S 28
T 29
U 30
V 31
W 32
X 33
Y 34
Z 35
- 36
⋅ 37
: 38
/ 39
/ 40
0 41
1 42
2 43
3 44
4 45
5 46
6 47
7 48
8 49
9 50

3-110 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: PRM.DTL.JIDA1[0] : 51   X 
(continued) Registered string: (continued)
1st character ; 52
(continued) < 53
= 54
> 55
? 56
@ 57
A 58
B 59
SPACE 61
* 62
# 63
Year4 64
Year2 65
Month 66
Day 67
Hour 68
REG 70
eYear(0) 71
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

eYear(9) 80
eMonth(0) 81
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

eMonth(9) 90
eDay(0) 91
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

eDay(9) 100
eHour(0) 101
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

eHour(9) 110
eMinute(0) 111
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

eMinute(9) 120
Shift(0) 121
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

Shift(9) 130
Line 1: PRM.DTL.JIDA1[1] Registered string:   X 
Registered string: Same as those for
2nd character JIDA1[0]
…

Line 1: PRM.DTL.JIDA1[19] Registered string:   X 

Registered string: Same as those for
20th character JIDA1[0]
Line 2: Registered PRM.DTL.JIDA2[0] Registered string:   X 
string: Same as those for
1st character JIDA1[0]
…

Line 2: Registered PRM.DTL.JIDA2[19] Registered string:   X 

string: Same as those for
20th character JIDA1[0]

XG-X Comm-US 3-111

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Library Library index PRM.DTL.DCI 0 999 0 3 0 X X X 
setting
Library block PRM.DTL.UDC Same as 0 X X X X
mode Area
New setting 1
Character color PRM.DTL.DCCL White 255   X X
Black 0
Block mode PRM.DTL.SCOM Auto 0 X X X X
Fixed 1
Character PRM.DTL.DSTDR → 5   X X
reading direction
← 4
↑ 6
↓ 7
Number of lines PRM.DTL.DSLCT 1 2 1 1 0 X X X X
Detection PRM.DTL.DSCOD Forward 7   X X
direction
Reverse 6
Size 13
Line rotation PRM.DTL.DSERO OFF 0   X X
correction
ON 1
Detection method PRM.DTL.DSCOM Waveform 0 X X X X
Specify ratio 1
Ratio setup: Start PRM.DTL.DSSHG01 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
position
Ratio setup: PRM.DTL.DSSHG02 50.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Height
Ratio setup: End PRM.DTL.DSSHGE 100.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
position
Smoothing filter PRM.DTL.DSWEC 0 99 0 2 0   X X
Maximum line PRM.DTL.DMRW 1.000 1.000 0.100 1 3   X X
ratio
Line detection PRM.DTL.DSCOT 40 255 0 3 0   X X
Minimum line PRM.DTL.DSNWD 10 255 0 3 0   X X
height
Line extraction PRM.DTL.DSNHG 25 255 0 3 0   X X
Line 1: Number PRM.DTL.DCCCT1 10 20 1 2 0 X X X X
Of Characters
Line 1: Detection PRM.DTL.DCCOD1 Forward 7   X X
Direction
Reverse 6
Size 13
Line 1: Character PRM.DTL.DCESP1 OFF 0   X X
tilt correction
ON 1
Line 1: Detection PRM.DTL.DCCOM1 Waveform 0 X X X X
method
Specify ratio 1
Line 1: Ratio PRM.DTL.DCCW01_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
setup
Start position
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW02_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (1-2)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW03_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (2-3)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW04_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (3-4)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW05_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (4-5)

3-112 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Library Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW06_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
setting Ratio setup:
(continued) Height (5-6)

Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW07_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X

Ratio setup:
Height (6-7)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW08_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (7-8)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW09_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (8-9)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW10_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (9-10)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW11_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (10-11)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW12_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (11-12)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW13_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (12-13)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW14_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (13-14)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW15_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (14-15)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW16_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (15-16)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW17_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (16-17)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW18_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (17-18)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW19_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (18-19)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCCW20_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (19-20)
Line 1: Ratio PRM.DTL.DCCWE_1 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
setup
End position
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCWEC1 0 99 0 2 0   X X
Smoothing filter
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCART1 1.000 9.999 0.100 1 3   X X
Max. width /
Height ratio
Line 1: Character PRM.DTL.DCCOT1 40 255 0 3 0   X X
detection
Line 1: Minimum PRM.DTL.DCNWD1 5 255 0 3 0   X X
Character Width
Line 1: Character PRM.DTL.DCNHG1 25 255 0 3 0   X X
extraction
Line 1: PRM.DTL.DCEFA1 OFF 0 X X X X
Fine adjustment
ON 1
Line 2: Number of PRM.DTL.DCCCT2 10 20 1 2 0 X X X X
characters
Line 2: Detection PRM.DTL.DCCOD2 Forward 7   X X
direction
Reverse 6
Size 13

XG-X Comm-US 3-113

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Library Line 2: Character PRM.DTL.DCESP2 OFF 0   X X
setting tilt correction
(continued) ON 1
Line 2: Detection PRM.DTL.DCCOM2 Waveform 0 X X X X
method
Specify ratio 1
Line 2: ratio setup PRM.DTL.DCCW01_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Start position
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW02_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (1-2)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW03_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (2-3)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW04_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (3-4)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW05_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (4-5)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW06_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (5-6)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW07_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (6-7)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW08_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (7-8)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW09_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (8-9)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW10_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (9-10)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW11_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (10-11)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW12_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (11-12)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW13_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (12-13)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW14_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (13-14)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW15_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (14-15)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW16_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (15-16)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW17_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (16-17)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW18_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (17-18)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW19_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (18-19)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCW20_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup:
Height (19-20)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCWE_2 0.00 100.00 0.00 3 2   X X
Ratio setup
End position

3-114 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Library Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCWEC2 0 99 0 2 0   X X
setting Smoothing filter
(continued)
Line 2: Max. PRM.DTL.DCART2 1.000 9.999 0.100 1 3   X X
width / Height
ratio
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCCOT2 40 255 0 3 0   X X
Character
detection
Line 2: Minimum PRM.DTL.DCNWD2 5 255 0 3 0   X X
Character width
Line 2: Character PRM.DTL.DCNHG2 25 255 0 3 0   X X
extraction
Line 2: PRM.DTL.DCEFA2 OFF 0 X X X X
Fine adjustment
ON 1
Library Fixed block: PRM.DTL.DFRN 0 20 0 2 0 X X X X
setting: Number of
Fixed characters
block:
Rotated
rectangle
(common)
Library Width PRM.DTL.D_WI[0] 81 2432 1 4 0   X X
setting:
Fixed Height PRM.DTL.D_HI[0] 121 2432 1 4 0   X X
block: Center XY PRM.DTL.D_RCXY[0] 5 0  X X X
Rotated
rectangle Center X PRM.DTL.D_RCX[0] 256 16382 0 5 0   X X
0
Center Y PRM.DTL.D_RCY[0] 240 16382 0 5 0   X X
Rotation angle PRM.DTL.D_T[0] 0.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X X
Library PRM.DTL.D_***[1]
setting:
Fixed
block:
Rotated
rectangle
1
…

Library PRM.DTL.D_***[19]
setting:
Fixed
block:
Rotated
rectangle
19
Library Fine adjustment PRM.DTL.DEFAF OFF 0 X X X X
setting:
Fixed ON 1
block:
Rotated
rectangle
(common)

XG-X Comm-US 3-115

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.LTS1 All 0   X 
character: All characters
Character 1
groups
Specified 2
order
Specified 3
character
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[0] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "0"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[1] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "1"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[2] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "2"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[3] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "3"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[4] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "4"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[5] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "5"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[6] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "6"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[7] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "7"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[8] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "8"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[9] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "9"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[10] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "A"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[11] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "B"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[12] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "C"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[13] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "D"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[14] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "E"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[15] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "F"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[16] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "G"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[17] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "H"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[18] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "I"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[19] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "J"

3-116 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[20] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
All "K"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[21] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "L"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[22] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "M"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[23] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "N"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[24] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "O"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[25] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "P"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[26] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "Q"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[27] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "R"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[28] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "S"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[29] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "T"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[30] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "U"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[31] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "V"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[32] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "W"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[33] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "X"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[34] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "Y"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[35] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "Z"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[36] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "-"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[37] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "."
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[38] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ":"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[39] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "/"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[40] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "/"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[41] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "0"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[42] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "1"

XG-X Comm-US 3-117

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[43] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
All "2"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[44] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "3"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[45] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "4"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[46] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "5"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[47] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "6"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[48] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "7"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[49] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "8"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[50] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "9"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[51] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ":"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[52] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ";"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[53] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "<"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[54] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "="
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[55] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ">"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[56] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "?"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[57] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "@"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[58] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "A"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[59] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "B"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS01_1 - -1 X X X 
character:
1st character All 0
characters
Character 1
groups
Specified 2
order
Specified 3
character
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC01_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
1st character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS02_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
2nd character as those for
CTS01_1

3-118 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC02_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
2nd character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS03_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
3rd character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC03_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
3rd character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS04_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
4th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC04_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
4th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS05_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
5th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC05_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
5th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS06_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
6th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC06_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
6th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS07_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
7th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC07_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
7th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS08_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
8th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC08_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
8th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS09_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
9th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC09_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
9th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS10_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
10th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC10_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
10th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS11_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
11th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC11_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
11th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS12_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
12th character as those for
CTS01_1

XG-X Comm-US 3-119

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC12_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
12th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS13_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
13th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC13_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
13th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS14_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
14th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC14_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
14th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS15_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
15th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC15_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
15th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS16_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
16th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC16_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
16th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS17_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
17th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC17_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
17th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS18_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
18th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC18_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
18th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS19_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
19th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC19_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
19th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS20_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
20th character as those for
CTS01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC20_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
20th character "*"
Line 1: PRM.DTL.L1CRR1:LL - 99 0 2 0   X 
Correlation:
Minimum
Line 1: Stability: PRM.DTL.L1STBL:LL - 99 0 2 0   X 
Minimum

3-120 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.LTS2 All 0   X 
(continued) character: characters
All
Character 1
groups
Specified 2
order
Specified 3
character
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS01_2 - -1 X X X 
character:
1st character All 0
characters
Character 1
groups
Specified 2
order
Specified 3
character
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC01_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
1st character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS02_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
2nd character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC02_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
2nd character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS03_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
3rd character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC03_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
3rd character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS04_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
4th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC04_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
4th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS05_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
5th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC05_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
5th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS06_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
6th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC06_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
6th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS07_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
7th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC07_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
7th character "*"

XG-X Comm-US 3-121

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS08_2 Reference X X X 
(continued) character: character: Same
8th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC08_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
8th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS09_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
9th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC09_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
9th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS10_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
10th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC10_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
10th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS11_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
11th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC11_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
11th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS12_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
12th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC12_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
12th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS13_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
13th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC13_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
13th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS14_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
14th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC14_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
14th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS15_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
15th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC15_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
15th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS16_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
16th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC16_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
16th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS17_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
17th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC17_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
17th character "*"

3-122 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS18_2 Reference X X X 
(continued) character: character: Same
18th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC18_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
18th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS19_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
19th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC19_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
19th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS20_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
20th character as those for
CTS01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC20_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
20th character "*"
Line 2: PRM.DTL.L2CRR1:LL - 99 0 2 0   X 
Correlation:
Minimum
Line 2: Stability: PRM.DTL.L2STBL:LL - 99 0 2 0   X 
Minimum

XG-X Comm-US 3-123

List of setting parameters

OCR2 Unit

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Block Character color PRM.DTL.CCL White 255   X 
setting
Black 0
Block mode PRM.DTL.COM Auto 0 X X X 
Fixed 1
Recognition 2
Block Character PRM.DTL.STDR → 5   X 
setting reading direction
← 4
(Auto/
↓ 6
Recognition)
↑ 7
Number of lines PRM.DTL.SLCT
(When Auto) 1 2 1 1 0 X X X 
(When Recognition) 1 1 1 1 0 X X X X
Detection PRM.DTL.SCOD Forward 7   X 
direction
Reverse 6
Size 13
Line rotation PRM.DTL.SERO OFF 0   X 
correction
ON 1
Detection method PRM.DTL.SCOM Waveform 0 X X X 
Specify ratio 1
Ratio setup: Start PRM.DTL.SSHG01 0 100 0 3 2   X 
position
Ratio setup: PRM.DTL.SSHG02 50 100 0 3 2   X 
Height
Ratio setup: End PRM.DTL.SSHGE 100 100 0 3 2   X 
position
Smoothing filter PRM.DTL.SWEC 0 99 0 2 0   X 
Maximum line PRM.DTL.MRW 1 1 0.1 1 3   X 
ratio
Line detection PRM.DTL.SCOT 40 255 0 3 0   X 
Minimum line PRM.DTL.SNWD 10 255 0 3 0   X 
height
(When Auto)
Upper Noise PRM.DTL.SNWD 5 255 0 3 0   X 
Height
(When Recognition)
Line extraction PRM.DTL.SNHG 25 255 0 3 0   X 
Line 1: Number of PRM.DTL.CCCT1
characters
(When Auto) 10 20 1 2 0 X X X 
(When Recognition) 40 40 1 2 0 X X X 
Line 1: Detection PRM.DTL.CCOD1 Forward 7   X 
direction
Reverse 6
Size 13
Line 1: Character PRM.DTL.CESP1 OFF 0   X 
tilt correction
ON 1
Line 1: Detection PRM.DTL.CCOM1 Waveform 0 X X X 
method
Specify ratio 1
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW01_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup: Start
position
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW02_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (1-2)

3-124 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Block Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW03_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
setting Ratio setup:
(Auto/ Height (2-3)
Recognition)
(continued) Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW04_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (3-4)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW05_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (4-5)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW06_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (5-6)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW07_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (6-7)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW08_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (7-8)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW09_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (8-9)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW10_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (9-10)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW11_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (10-11)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW12_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (11-12)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW13_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (12-13)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW14_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (13-14)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW15_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (14-15)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW16_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (15-16)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW17_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (16-17)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW18_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (17-18)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW19_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (18-19)
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCW20_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (19-20)
Line 1: Ratio PRM.DTL.CCWE_1 0 100 0 3 2   X 
setup
End position
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CWEC1 0 99 0 2 0   X 
Smoothing filter
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CART1 1 9.999 0.1 1 3   X 
Max. Width /
Height Ratio
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CCOT1 40 255 0 3 0   X 
Character
detection

XG-X Comm-US 3-125

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Block Line 1: Minimum PRM.DTL.CNWD1 5 255 0 3 0   X 
setting Character Width
(Auto/ (When Auto)
Recognition)
(continued) Line 1: Upper PRM.DTL.CNWD1 5 255 0 3 0   X 
Noise Width
(When Recognition)
Line 1: Character PRM.DTL.CNHG1 25 255 0 3 0   X 
extraction
Line 1: PRM.DTL.CEFA1 OFF 0 X X X 
Fine adjustment
ON 1
Line 2: Number of PRM.DTL.CCCT2 10 20 1 2 0 X X X 
characters
Line 2: Detection PRM.DTL.CCOD2 Forward 7   X 
direction
Reverse 6
Size 13
Line 2: Character PRM.DTL.CESP2 OFF 0   X 
tilt correction
ON 1
Line 2: Detection PRM.DTL.CCOM2 Waveform 0 X X X 
method
Specify ratio 1
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW01_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup
Start position
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW02_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (1-2)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW03_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (2-3)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW04_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (3-4)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW05_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (4-5)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW06_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (5-6)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW07_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (6-7)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW08_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (7-8)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW09_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (8-9)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW10_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (9-10)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW11_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (10-11)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW12_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (11-12)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW13_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (12-13)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW14_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (13-14)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW15_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (14-15)

3-126 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Block Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW16_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
setting Ratio setup:
(Auto/ Height (15-16)
Recognition)
(continued) Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW17_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (16-17)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW18_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (17-18)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW19_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (18-19)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCW20_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup:
Height (19-20)
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCWE_2 0 100 0 3 2   X 
Ratio setup
End position
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CWEC2 0 99 0 2 0   X 
Smoothing filter
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CART2 1 9.999 0.1 1 3   X 
Max. Width /
Height Ratio
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CCOT2 40 255 0 3 0   X 
Character
detection
Line 2: Minimum PRM.DTL.CNWD2 5 255 0 3 0   X 
Character Width
(When Auto)
Line 2: Upper PRM.DTL.CNWD2 5 255 0 3 0   X 
Noise Width
(When Recognition)
Line 2: Character PRM.DTL.CNHG2 25 255 0 3 0   X 
extraction
Line 2: PRM.DTL.CEFA2 OFF 0 X X X 
Fine adjustment
ON 1
Block Fixed block: PRM.DTL.FRN 0 20 0 2 0 X X X 
setting Number of
(Fixed) characters
Block Width PRM.DTL.WI[0] 81 2432 1 4 0   X 
setting
(Fixed Height PRM.DTL.HI[0] 121 2432 1 4 0   X 
block: Center XY PRM.DTL.RCXY[0] 5 0  X X 
Rotated
rectangle Center X PRM.DTL.RCX[0] 256 16382 0 5 0   X 
0)
Center Y PRM.DTL.RCY[0] 240 16382 0 5 0   X 
Rotation angle PRM.DTL.T[0] 0 359.9 0 3 1   X 
Block PRM.DTL.***[1]
setting
(Fixed
block:
Rotated
rectangle
1)
…

Block PRM.DTL.***[19]
setting
(Fixed
block:
Rotated
rectangle
19)
Block Fine adjustment PRM.DTL.EFAF OFF 0 X X X 
setting
(Fixed ON 1
block:
Rotated
rectangle
(common))

XG-X Comm-US 3-127

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Block Shading level PRM.DTL.BINTH 20 255 0 3 0   X 
setting
(Recogniti X direction PRM.DTL.ITPX 0 255 0 3 0   X 
on) interpolation
(pixel)
Y direction PRM.DTL.ITPY 0 255 0 3 0   X 
interpolation
(pixel)
Character PRM.DTL.PDIR Clockwise 8   X 
reading direction
Counter- 9
clockwise
Upper period PRM.DTL.PRDHL 0.4 1 0 1 3   X 
height
(Line height ratio)
Tuning Target: PRM.DTL.TT_CCCT1 OFF 0 X X X 
Number of
Characters ON 1

Tuning Target: PRM.DTL.TT_BINTH OFF 0 X X X 

Shading level
ON 1

Tuning Target: PRM.DTL.TT_CART1 OFF 0 X X X 

Upper character
width ON 1

Tuning Target: PRM.DTL.TT_CNWD1 OFF 0 X X X 

Upper noise
width ON 1

Tuning Target: PRM.DTL.TT_SNWD OFF 0 X X X 

Upper noise
height ON 1

Tuning Target: PRM.DTL.TT_ITPX OFF 0 X X X 

X-direction
interpolation ON 1

Tuning Target: PRM.DTL.TT_ITPY OFF 0 X X X 

Y-direction
interpolation ON 1

(Number of PRM.DTL.FZSCN OFF 0 X X X 

Characters)
Follow Zero ON 1
Suppress
Library Library PRM.DTL.DICTYP Built-in 0 X X X 
setting classification Library
Library No. 1

Library number PRM.DTL.DCI - 999 0 3 0 X X X 

Parameters Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 

Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Coordinate value PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjustment
Before 1
position
adjustment
Calculation result PRM.DTL.COC 10 36 10 2 0 X X X 
conversion: N-
adic number
Calculation result PRM.DTL.PLN 1 6 1 1 0 X X X 
conversion: No.
of digits
Mirror inversion PRM.DTL.ENMR OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1

3-128 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Parameters Character PRM.DTL.GDLL 10 255 0 3 0 X X X 
(continued) contrast lower
limit
(When Auto/
Fixed)
Border Exclusion PRM.DTL.ACB OFF 0 X X X 
(When Auto/
Fixed) ON 1

Border Exclusion PRM.DTL.CAN OFF 0 X X X 

(When
Recognition) ON 1

Primary target PRM.DTL.LLB 0 39 0 2 0 X X X 

Large Area Mode PRM.DTL.CDLAM Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Calendar Offset: Year PRM.DTL.OFYR 0 10 -10 2 0   X 
Settings
Offset: Month PRM.DTL.OFMN 0 12 -12 2 0   X 
Offset: Day PRM.DTL.OFDY 0 1999 -1999 4 0   X 
Offset: Hour PRM.DTL.OFTM 0 24 -24 2 0   X 
Offset Calculation PRM.DTL.CAOFST YMD 0   X 
Order H
H D  M 1
Y
Overflow PRM.DTL.CAOVFL Carry Over 0   X 
Handling
Fix to Month 1
End
Fix to Month 2
Start
Zero Suppress PRM.DTL.CAZS None 0 X X X 

Space 1
forward
Space 2
backward
Remove 3
zeros
Allowable error: + PRM.DTL.SLHI 0 3599 0 4 0   X 

Allowable error: - PRM.DTL.SLLI 0 99999 0 5 0   X 

Limits Line 1: PRM.DTL.JIDA1[0] 0 0   X 

Registered string:
1st character 1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A 10
B 11
C 12
D 13
E 14
F 15
G 16
H 17

XG-X Comm-US 3-129

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: PRM.DTL.JIDA1[0] I 18   X 
(continued) Registered string: (continued) J 19
1st character
K 20
(continued)
L 21
M 22
N 23
O 24
P 25
Q 26
R 27
S 28
T 29
U 30
V 31
W 32
X 33
Y 34
Z 35
- 36
⋅ 37
: 38
/ 39
//a 40
0/b 41
1/c 42
2/d 43
3/e 44
4/f 45
5/g 46
6/h 47
7/i 48
8/j 49
9/k 50
:/l 51
;/m 52
</n 53
=/o 54
>/p 55
?/q 56
@/r 57
A/s 58
B/t 59
SPACE 61
* 62
# 63
Year4 64
Year2 65
Month 66
Day 67
Hour 68

3-130 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: PRM.DTL.JIDA1[0] REG 70   X 
(continued) Registered string: (continued)
1st character eYear(0) 71
(continued) eYear(1)
⋅⋅⋅ 72

⋅⋅⋅
eYear(8) 79
eYear(9) 80
eMonth(0) 81
eMonth(1) 82
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

eMonth(8) 89
eMonth(9) 90
eDay(0) 91
eDay(1) 92
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

eDay(8) 99
eDay(9) 100
eHour(0) 101
eHour(1) 102
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

eHour(8) 109
eHour(9) 110
eMinute(0) 111
eMinute(1) 112
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

eMinute(8) 119
eMinute(9) 120
Shift(0) 121
Shift(1) 122
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

Shift(8) 129
Shift(9) 130
( 131
) 132
+ 133
u 134
v 135
w 136
x 137
y 138
z 139
Minute 155
Line 1: PRM.DTL.JIDA1[1] Registered string:   X 
Registered string: Same as those for
2nd character JIDA1[0]
…

Line 1: PRM.DTL.JIDA1[19] Registered string:   X 

Registered string: Same as those for
20th character JIDA1[0]
Line 2: Registered PRM.DTL.JIDA2[0] Registered string:   X 
string: Same as those for
1st character JIDA1[0]
…

Line 2: Registered PRM.DTL.JIDA2[19] Registered string:   X 

string: Same as those for
20th character JIDA1[0]

XG-X Comm-US 3-131

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.LTS1 All 0   X 
(continued) character: All characters
Character 1
groups
Specified 2
order
Specified 3
character
All numbers 4
All letters/All 5
Upper Case
All symbols 7
All special 6
characters/
All Lower
Case
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[0] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "0"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[1] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "1"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[2] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "2"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[3] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "3"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[4] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "4"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[5] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "5"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[6] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "6"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[7] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "7"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[8] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "8"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[9] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "9"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[10] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "A"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[11] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "B"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[12] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "C"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[13] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "D"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[14] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "E"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[15] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "F"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[16] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "G"

3-132 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[17] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
All "H"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[18] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "I"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[19] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "J"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[20] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "K"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[21] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "L"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[22] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "M"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[23] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "N"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[24] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "O"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[25] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "P"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[26] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "Q"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[27] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "R"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[28] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "S"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[29] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "T"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[30] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "U"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[31] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "V"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[32] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "W"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[33] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "X"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[34] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "Y"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[35] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "Z"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[36] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "-"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[37] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "."
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[38] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ":"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[39] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "/"

XG-X Comm-US 3-133

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[40] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
All "/"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[41] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "0"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[42] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "1"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[43] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "2"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[44] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "3"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[45] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "4"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[46] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "5"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[47] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "6"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[48] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "7"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[49] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "8"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[50] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "9"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[51] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ":"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[52] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ";"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[53] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "<"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[54] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "="
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[55] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ">"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[56] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "?"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[57] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "@"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[58] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "A"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[59] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "B"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[60] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "("
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[61] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ")"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[62] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "+"

3-134 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[63] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
All "(space)"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[64] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "u"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[65] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "v"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[66] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "w"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[67] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "x"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[68] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "y"
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC1[69] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "z"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS01_1 - -1 X X X 
character:
1st character All 0
characters
Character 1
groups
Specified 2
order
Specified 3
character
All numbers 4
All letters/All 5
Upper Case
All symbols 7
All special 6
characters/
All Lower
Case
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC01_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
1st character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS02_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
2nd character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC02_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
2nd character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS03_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
3rd character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC03_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
3rd character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS04_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
4th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC04_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
4th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS05_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
5th character as those for
CTSC01_1

XG-X Comm-US 3-135

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC05_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
5th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS06_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
6th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC06_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
6th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS07_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
7th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC07_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
7th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS08_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
8th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC08_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
8th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS09_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
9th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC09_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
9th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS10_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
10th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC10_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
10th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS11_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
11th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC11_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
11th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS12_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
12th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC12_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
12th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS13_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
13th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC13_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
13th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS14_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
14th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC14_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
14th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS15_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
15th character as those for
CTSC01_1

3-136 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC15_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
15th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS16_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
16th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC16_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
16th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS17_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
17th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC17_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
17th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS18_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
18th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC18_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
18th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS19_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
19th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC19_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
19th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS20_1 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
20th character as those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC20_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
20th character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS21_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
21st character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC21_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
21st character "*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS22_1 Reference X X X 
character: 22nd character:
character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC22_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
22nd character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS23_1 Reference X X X 
character:23rd character:
character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC23_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
23rd character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS24_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
24th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC24_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
24th character"*"

XG-X Comm-US 3-137

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS25_1 Reference X X X 
(continued) character: character:
25th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC25_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
25th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS26_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
26th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC26_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
26th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS27_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
27th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC27_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
27th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS28_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
28th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC28_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
28th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS29_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
29th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC29_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
29th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS30_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
30th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC30_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
30th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS31_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
31st character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC31_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
31st character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS32_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
32nd character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC32_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
32nd character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS33_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
33rd character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC33_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
33rd character"*"

3-138 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS34_1 Reference X X X 
(continued) character: character:
34th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC34_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
34th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS35_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
35th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC35_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
35th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS36_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
36th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC36_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
36th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS37_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
37th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC37_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
37th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS38_1 Reference X X X 
character:38th character:
character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC38_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
38th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS39_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
39th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC39_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
39th character"*"
Line 1: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS40_1 Reference X X X 
character: character:
40th character Same as
those for
CTSC01_1
Line 1: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC40_1[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
40th character"*"
Line 1: PRM.DTL.L1CRR1:LL - 99 0 2 0   X 
Correlation:
Minimum
Line 1: Stability: PRM.DTL.L1STBL:LL - 99 0 2 0   X 
Minimum
No. of characters in PRM.DTL.COCN1:HL
line 1: Upper limit
(When Auto/Fixed) - 20 0 2 0   X 
(When Recognition) - 40 0 2 0   X 

No. of characters in PRM.DTL.COCN1:LL

line 1: Lower limit
(When Auto/Fixed) - 20 0 2 0   X 
(When Recognition) - 40 0 2 0   X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-139

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.LTS2 All 0   X 
(continued) character: All characters
Character 1
groups
Specified 2
order
Specified 3
character
All numbers 4
All letters/All 5
Upper Case
All symbols 7
All special 6
characters/
All Lower
Case
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[0] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "0"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[1] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "1"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[2] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "2"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[3] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "3"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[4] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "4"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[5] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "5"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[6] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "6"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[7] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "7"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[8] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "8"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[9] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "9"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[10] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "A"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[11] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "B"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[12] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "C"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[13] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "D"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[14] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "E"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[15] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "F"

3-140 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[16] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
All "G"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[17] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "H"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[18] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "I"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[19] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "J"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[20] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "K"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[21] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "L"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[22] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "M"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[23] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "N"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[24] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "O"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[25] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "P"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[26] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "Q"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[27] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "R"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[28] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "S"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[29] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "T"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[30] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "U"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[31] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "V"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[32] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "W"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[33] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "X"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[34] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "Y"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[35] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "Z"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[36] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "-"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[37] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "."
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[38] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ":"

XG-X Comm-US 3-141

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[39] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
All "/"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[40] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "/"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[41] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "0"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[42] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "1"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[43] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "2"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[44] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "3"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[45] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "4"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[46] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "5"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[47] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "6"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[48] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "7"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[49] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "8"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[50] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "9"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[51] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ":"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[52] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ";"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[53] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "<"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[54] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "="
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[55] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ">"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[56] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "?"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[57] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "@"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[58] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "A"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[59] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "B"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[60] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "("
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[61] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All ")"

3-142 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[62] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) character:
All "+"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[63] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "(space)"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[64] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "u"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[65] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "v"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[66] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "w"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[67] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "x"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[68] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "y"
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.LTSC2[69] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
All "z"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS01_2 - -1 X X X 
character:
1st character All 0
characters
Character 1
groups
Specified 2
order
Specified 3
character
All numbers 4
All letters/All 5
Upper Case
All symbols 7
All special 6
characters/
All Lower
Case
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC01_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
1st character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS02_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
2nd character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC02_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
2nd character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS03_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
3rd character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC03_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
3rd character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS04_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
4th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC04_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
4th character "*"

XG-X Comm-US 3-143

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS05_2 Reference X X X 
(continued) character: character: Same
5th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC05_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
5th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS06_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
6th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC06_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
6th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS07_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
7th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC07_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
7th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS08_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
8th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC08_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
8th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS09_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
9th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC09_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
9th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS10_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
10th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC10_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
10th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS11_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
11th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC11_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
11th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS12_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
12th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC12_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
12th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS13_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
13th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC13_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
13th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS14_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
14th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC14_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
14th character "*"

3-144 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS15_2 Reference X X X 
(continued) character: character: Same
15th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC15_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
15th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS16_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
16th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC16_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
16th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS17_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
17th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC17_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
17th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS18_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
18th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC18_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
18th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS19_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
19th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC19_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
19th character "*"
Line 2: Reference PRM.DTL.CTS20_2 Reference X X X 
character: character: Same
20th character as those for
CTSC01_2
Line 2: Specified PRM.DTL.CTSC20_2[*] 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
character:
20th character "*"
Line 2: PRM.DTL.L2CRR1:LL - 99 0 2 0   X 
Correlation:
Minimum
Line 2: Stability: PRM.DTL.L2STBL:LL - 99 0 2 0   X 
Minimum
Line 2: Number of PRM.DTL.COCN2:HL
Characters:
Upper limit - 20 0 2 0   X 
Line 2: Number of PRM.DTL.COCN2:LL
Characters:
Lower limit - 20 0 2 0   X 
(Detected PRM.DTL.FZSCL OFF 0   X 
Character Count
Setting) Follow ON 1
Zero Suppress
(Character PRM.DTL.FZSCT OFF 0   X 
Detection
Restriction ON 1
Setting) Follow
Zero Suppress

XG-X Comm-US 3-145

List of setting parameters

2D code reader Unit

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Detection Code type PRM.DTL.CDTYP QR 0 X X X 
condition Micro QR 1
Data Matrix 2
Rectangle 3
data Matrix
PDF417 4
MicroPDF417 5
Composite 6
Code
Auto tuning: cell size PRM.DTL.E_CSIZE Manual 0 X X X 
(pixels) Automatic 1
Auto tuning: Contrast PRM.DTL.E_EIT Manual 0 X X X 
level Automatic 1
Auto tuning: No. of PRM.DTL.E_CNUM Manual 0 X X X 
cells Automatic 1
Auto tuning: Cell PRM.DTL.E_CCLR Manual 0 X X X 
color Automatic 1
Auto tuning: Mirror PRM.DTL.E_MRI Manual 0 X X X 
reading Automatic 1
Auto tuning: Base PRM.DTL.E_STDA Manual 0 X X X 
angle Automatic 1
1 cell size PRM.DTL.CSIZE 0.00 200.00 0.00 3 2  X X 
(pixels) *1
Contrast level PRM.DTL.EIT Highest (2) 2  X X 
High (1) 1
Normal (0) 0
Low (-1) -1
Lowest (-2) -2
No. of cells PRM.DTL.CNUM Any 0  X X 
21x21 1
25x25 2
29x29 3
33x33 4
37x37 5
41x41 6
45x45 7
49x49 8
53x53 9
57x57 10
61x61 11
65x65 12
69x69 13
73x73 14
77x77 15
81x81 16
85x85 17
89x89 18
93x93 19
97x97 20
101x101 21

3-146 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Detection No. of cells PRM.DTL.CNUM 105x105 22  X X 
condition (continued) (continued) 109x109 23
(continued)
113x113 24
117x117 25
121x121 26
125x125 27
129x129 28
133x133 29
137x137 30
141x141 31
145x145 32
149x149 33
153x153 34
157x157 35
161x161 36
165x165 37
169x169 38
173x173 39
177x177 40
Any 0
11x11 1
13x13 2
15x15 3
17x17 4
Any 0
10x10 1
12x12 2
14x14 3
16x16 4
18x18 5
20x20 6
22x22 7
24x24 8
26x26 9
32x32 10
36x36 11
40x40 12
44x44 13
48x48 14
52x52 15
64x64 16
72x72 17
80x80 18
88x88 19
96x96 20
104x104 21
120x120 22
132x132 23
144x144 24
Any 0
8x18 1

XG-X Comm-US 3-147

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Detection No. of cells PRM.DTL.CNUM 8x32 2  X X 
condition (continued) (continued) 12x26 3
(continued)
12x36 4
16x36 5
16x48 6
Cell color PRM.DTL.CCLR Both 0  X X 
Black on 1
white
background
White on 2
black
background
Mirror reading PRM.DTL.MRI Both 0  X X 
Without 1
inversion
With 2
inversion
Base angle PRM.DTL.STDA 0.000 180.000 -179.999 3 3  X X 
Angle Range PRM.DTL.ANGR 180.000 180.000 0.000 3 3   X 
Size variation PRM.DTL.SVA Small 0   X 
Medium 1
Large 2
Unlimited 3
Distortion correction PRM.DTL.DTO None 0   X 
Linear 1
Fine search PRM.DTL.DM OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Code Type PRM.DTL.CDTYP QR 0 1 0 X X X 
Micro QR 1
DataMatrix 2
Rectangle 3
DataMatrix
PDF417 4
MicroPDF417 5
Composite 6
Code
Auto Tune Enabled : PRM.DTL.E_DCT 1 0 X X X 
Code Detail
Auto Tune Enabled : PRM.DTL.E_BCT 1 0 X X X 
1D Code Type
Auto Tune Enabled : PRM.DTL.E_BDCT 1 0 X X X 
1D Code Detail
Auto Tune Enabled : PRM.DTL.E_LENMX 1 0 X X X 
Code Length (Max)
Auto Tune Enabled : PRM.DTL.E_LENMN 1 0 X X X 
Code Length (Min)
Auto Tune Enabled : PRM.DTL.E_MSIZE 1 0 X X X 
Min. Bar Width
Code Detail PRM.DTL.DCT None 0 1 0 X X X 
CC-A 1
CC-B 2
CC-C 3

3-148 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Detection 1D Code Type PRM.DTL.BCT None 0 1 0 X X X 
condition EAN/JAN/ 3
(continued)
UPC
GS1 4
Databar
GS1 128 2
1D Code Detail PRM.DTL.BDCT None 0 2 0 X X X 
EAN-13, 1
UPC-A
EAN-13, 7
UPC-A & 2-
digit
EAN-13, 4
UPC-A & 5-
digit
EAN-8 2
EAN-8 & 2- 8
digit
EAN-8 & 5- 5
digit
UPC-E 3
UPC-E & 2- 9
digit
UPC-E & 5- 6
digit
Databar 10
Databar 11
Stacked
Databar 12
Limited
Databar 13
Expanded
Code Length (Max) PRM.DTL.LEN_MX 128 128 1 3 0  X X 
Code Length (Min) PRM.DTL.LEN_MN 1 128 1 3 0  X X 
Min. Bar Width PRM.DTL.MSIZE 0.00 200.00 0.00 3 2  X X 
(pixels)

XG-X Comm-US 3-149

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Parameters Coordinate value PRM.DTL.CRD After 0 X X X 
position
adjustment
Before 1
position
adjustment
Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000
Symbol identifier PRM.DTL.SID None 0 X X X 
Output 1
ECI (Expansion PRM.DTL.ECI Ignore 0 X X X 
channel Output 1
interpretation)
Start digit PRM.DTL.SDG 1 9999 1 4 0   X 
Data Length PRM.DTL.DLEN 100 512 1 3 0 X X X 
Timeout PRM.DTL.TOUT 3 60 0.01 2 2   X 
Data split PRM.DTL.DSPL OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1
Data split 1
Enable PRM.DTL.ESPL[0] Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Start digit PRM.DTL.SDGS[0] 1 512 1 3 0 X X X 
Length PRM.DTL.DLENS[0] 1 512 1 3 0 X X X 
Data split 2 PRM.DTL.***[1]
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
Data split 8 PRM.DTL.***[7]
Fixed length output PRM.DTL.FLO OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1
Fill character PRM.DTL.FCH "_" X X X 
Error output PRM.DTL.ECO OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1
Error code PRM.DTL.ECD "error" Character X X X 
(1 to 16 characters) string up to 16
bytes
Verification PRM.DTL.VRF OFF 0 X X X 
ISO/IEC 1
15415
AIM DPM-1- 2
2006
SAE 3
AS9132
Large Area Mode PRM.DTL.CDLAM Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Limits Multi-reference PRM.DTL.MCND Off 0 X X X 
On 1
No. of match PRM.DTL.MNUM 0 16 0 2 0 X X X 
conditions

3-150 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Limits Match condition 1 PRM.DTL.***[0]
(continued)
Match range PRM.DTL.MRNG[0] All data 0 0 8 0 X X X 
(DATA)
Data Range 1
(DATA1)
Data Range 2
(DATA2)
Data Range 3
(DATA3)
Data range 4
(DATA4)
Data range 5
(DATA5)
Data range 6
(DATA6)
Data range 7
(DATA7)
Data range 8
(DATA8)
Use in unit pass PRM.DTL.IUJ[0] Included 0 X X X 
/ fail results Not included 1
Calculation result PRM.DTL.COC2[0] 10 36 10 2 0   X 
conversion:
N-adic number
Calculation result PRM.DTL.PLN2[0] 1 6 1 1 0   X 
conversion: No.
of characters
Calculation PRM.DTL.CAZS_C[0] OFF 0   X 
result Space forward 1
conversion:
Zero Space 2
suppression backward
Remove zeros 3
Date & time PRM.DTL.OFYR[0] 0 10 -10 2 0   X 
conversion:
Offset: Year
Date & time PRM.DTL.OFMN[0] 0 12 -12 2 0   X 
conversion:
Offset: Month
Date & time PRM.DTL.OFDY[0] 0 1999 -1999 4 0   X 
conversion:
Offset: Day
Date & time PRM.DTL.OFTM[0] 0 24 -24 2 0   X 
conversion:
Offset: Hour
Date conversion: PRM.DTL.SLH[0] 0 3599 0 4 0   X 
Allowable error:
(second) +
Date conversion: PRM.DTL.SLL[0] 0 3599 0 4 0   X 
Allowable error:
(second) -
Date conversion: PRM.DTL.CAZS_Y[0] OFF 0   X 
Zero Space forward 1
suppression
Space 2
backward
Remove zeros 3
"#", "*" and "!" PRM.DTL.UOS[0] Special 0   X 
processing characters
Normal 1
characters

XG-X Comm-US 3-151

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Limits Match condition 2 PRM.DTL.***[1]
(continued) ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
Match condition 16 PRM.DTL.***[15]
Match pattern 1
Match pattern 1: PRM.DTL.MPTN1[0] Year4 320 32767 0 5 0   X 
1st digit Year2 321
Month 322
Day 323
Hour 324
REG 326
Others:
Character code
(1 byte)
Match pattern 1: PRM.DTL.MPTN1[1] Same as Match pattern 1:
2nd digit PRM.DTL.MPTN1[0]
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
Match pattern 1: PRM.DTL.MPTN1[31] Same as Match pattern 1:
32nd digit PRM.DTL.MPTN1[0]
Match pattern 2
Match pattern 2: PRM.DTL.MPTN2[0] Same as Match pattern 1:
1st digit PRM.DTL.MPTN1[0]
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
Match pattern 2 PRM.DTL.MPTN2[31] Same as Match pattern 1:
32nd digit PRM.DTL.MPTN1[0]
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
Match pattern 16
Match pattern 16: PRM.DTL.MPTN16[0] Same as Match pattern 1:
1st digit PRM.DTL.MPTN1[0]
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
Match pattern 16: PRM.DTL.MPTN16 Same as Match pattern 1:
32nd digit [31] PRM.DTL.MPTN1[0]
Read data length: PRM.DTL.ID_LEN:HL 999 0 3 0   X 
Upper limit
Read data length: PRM.DTL.ID_LEN:LL 999 0 3 0   X 
Lower limit
Position X: Upper limit PRM.DTL.X:HL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Position X: Lower limit PRM.DTL.X:LL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Position Y: Upper limit PRM.DTL.Y:HL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Position Y: Lower limit PRM.DTL.Y:LL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Detection angle: PRM.DTL.T:HL 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Upper limit
Detection angle: PRM.DTL.T:LL 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Lower limit

3-152 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Limits Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ISO_E_DEC 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
(continued) Condition: Decode
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_E_SC 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Symbol Contrast
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_E_MOD 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Modulation
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_E_RM 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Reflect. Margin
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_E_FPD 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Fixed Pat.Dmg.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_E_AN 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Axial N-uniform.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_E_GN 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Grid N-uniform.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_E_UEC 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Unused Err.Crr.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_E_FID 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Form.Info.Dmg.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_E_VID 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Vers.Info.Dmg.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_E_PGH 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Print Growth H.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_E_PGV 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Print Growth V.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.ISO_ALL:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Grade: Lower Limit
Decode: Lower Limit PRM.DTL.ISO_DEC:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Symbol Contrast: PRM.DTL.ISO_SC:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Modulation: Lower PRM.DTL.ISO_MOD:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Limit
Reflect. Margin: PRM.DTL.ISO_RM:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Fixed Pat.Dmg.: PRM.DTL.ISO_FPD:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Axial N-uniform.: PRM.DTL.ISO_AN:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Grid N-uniform.: PRM.DTL.ISO_GN:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Unused Err.Crr.: PRM.DTL.ISO_UEC:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Form.Info.Dmg.: PRM.DTL.ISO_FID:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Vers.Info.Dmg.: PRM.DTL.ISO_VID:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Print Growth H.: PRM.DTL.ISO_PGH:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-153

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Limits Print Growth V.: PRM.DTL.ISO_PGV:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
(continued) Lower Limit
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.AIM_E_DEC 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Condition: Decode
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_E_CC 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Cell Contrast
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_E_CM 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Cell Modulation
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_E_RM 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Reflect. Margin
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_E_FPD 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Fixed Pat.Dmg.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_E_AN 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Axial N-uniform.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_E_GN 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Grid N-uniform.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_E_UEC 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Unused Err.Crr.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_E_FID 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Form.Info.Dmg.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_E_VID 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Vers.Info.Dmg.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_E_PGH 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Print Growth H.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_E_PGV 0 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Print Growth V.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.AIM_ALL:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Grade: Lower Limit
Decode: Lower Limit PRM.DTL.AIM_DEC:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Cell Contrast: Lower PRM.DTL.AIM_CC:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Limit
Cell Modulation: PRM.DTL.AIM_CM:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Reflect. Margin: PRM.DTL.AIM_RM:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Fixed Pat.Dmg.: PRM.DTL.AIM_FPD:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Axial N-uniform.: PRM.DTL.AIM_AN:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Grid N-uniform.: PRM.DTL.AIM_GN:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Unused Err.Crr.: PRM.DTL.AIM_UEC:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Form.Info.Dmg.: PRM.DTL.AIM_FID:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Vers.Info.Dmg.: PRM.DTL.AIM_VID:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit

3-154 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Limits Print Growth H.: PRM.DTL.AIM_PGH:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
(continued) Lower Limit
Print Growth V.: PRM.DTL.AIM_PGV:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.SAE_E_QZ 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Quiet Zone
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.SAE_E_SC 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Symbol Contrast
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.SAE_E_AD 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Angular Dist.
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.SAE_E_MF 1 1 0 1 0 X X X 
Grade Condition:
Module Fill
Overall Symbol PRM.DTL.SAE_ALL:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Grade: Lower Limit
Quiet Zone: Lower PRM.DTL.SAE_QZ:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Limit
Symbol Contrast: PRM.DTL.SAE_SC:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Lower Limit
Angular Dist.: Lower PRM.DTL.SAE_AD:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Limit
Module Fill: Lower PRM.DTL.SAE_MF:LL 4 0 1 0   X 
Limit
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_DEC 1 1 0 1 0    
Condition: Decode
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_EDG 1 1 0 1 0    
Condition: Edge
Determination
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_SC 1 1 0 1 0    
Condition: Symbol
Contrast
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_MINR 1 1    
Condition: Minimum
Reflectance
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_MINE 1 1    
Condition: Minimum
Edge Contrast
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_MOD 1 1    
Condition: Modulation
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_QZ 1 1    
Condition: Minimum
Quiet Zone
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_DCD 1 1    
Condition: Decodability
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_DEF 1 1    
Condition: Defects
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_CY 1 1    
Condition: Codeword
Yield
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_CPQ 1 1    
Condition: Codeword
Print Quality
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.ST_E_UEC 1 1    
Condition: Unused Error
Correction
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_DEC 1 1    
Condition: Decode

XG-X Comm-US 3-155

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Limits Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_EDG 1 1    
(continued) Condition: Edge
Determination
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_SC 1 1    
Condition: Symbol
Contrast
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_MINR 1 1    
Condition: Minimum
Reflectance
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_MINE 1 1    
Condition: Minimum
Edge Contrast
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_MOD 1 1    
Condition: Modulation
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_QZ 1 1    
Condition: Minimum
Quiet Zone
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_DCD 1 1    
Condition: Decodability
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_DEF 1 1    
Condition: Defects
Overall Symbol Grade: PRM.DTL.ST_ALL:LL 4.0 0.0 1 1    
Lower Limit

*1 The lower limit of "Cell Size (pixels)" is 1.00 unless "Size variation" is set to [Unlimited].

3-156 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

1D Code Reader Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

System
Integer
Label

Value
Condition Code type PRM.DTL.CDTYP CODE39 1 X X X 
CODE128 2
EAN/JAN/ 3
UPC
GS1 4
Databar
ITF 5
Codabar/ 6
NW-7
Pharmacode 7
Auto Tune Enabled: PRM.DTL.E_DCDTYP Disabled 0 X X X 
Code Detail Enabled 1
Auto Tune Enabled: PRM.DTL.E_MSIZE Disabled 0 X X X 
Min. Bar Width Enabled 1
Auto Tune Enabled: PRM.DTL.E_EIT Disabled 0 X X X 
Contrast Level Enabled 1
Auto Tune PRM.DTL.E_CCLR Disabled 0 X X X 
Enabled:Bar Color Enabled 1
Auto Tune Enabled: PRM.DTL.E_LENMX Disabled 0 X X X 
Code Length (Max) Enabled 1
Auto Tune Enabled: PRM.DTL.E_LENMN Disabled 0 X X X 
Code Length (Min) Enabled 1
Auto Tune Enabled: PRM.DTL.E_STDA Disabled 0 X X X 
Base Angle Enabled 1
Code Detail PRM.DTL.DCDTYP None 0 X X X X
EAN-13, 1
UPC-A
EAN-8 2
UPC-E 3
EAN-13, 4
UPC-A &
5-digit
EAN-8 & 5
5-digit
UPC-E & 6
5-digit
EAN-13, 7
UPC-A &
2-digit
EAN-8 & 8
2-digit
UPC-E & 9
2-digit
Databar 10
Databar 11
Stacked
Databar 12
Limited
Databar 13
Expanded

XG-X Comm-US 3-157

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

System
Integer
Label

Value
Condition Min. Bar Width PRM.DTL.MSIZE 0.00 200.00 0.00 3 2  X X 
(continued) (pixels)
Contrast Level PRM.DTL.EIT Highest(2) 2  X X 
High(1) 1
Normal(0) 0
Low(-1) -1
Lowest(-2) -2
Bar Color PRM.DTL.CCLR Both 0  X X 
Black 1
White 2
Code Length (Max) PRM.DTL.LEN_MX 128 128 1 3 0  X X 
Code Length (Min) PRM.DTL.LEN_MN 1 128 1 3 0  X X 
Base Angle PRM.DTL.STDA 0.000 180.000 -179.999 3 3  X X 
Check Digit PRM.DTL.CHKDG OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1
Modulus 16 2
Modulus 11 3
Modulus 10/ 4
Weight 2
Modulus 10/ 5
Weight 3
7 Check DR 6
Modulus 7
11-A
Lunes 8
Size Variation PRM.DTL.SVA Small 0   X 
Medium 1
Large 2
Unlimited 3
Read Direction PRM.DTL.RDDR → 5   X 
← 4
↑ 6
↓ 7
Parameters Coordinate Value PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjust
Before 1
position adjust
Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000
Symbology Identifier PRM.DTL.SID None 0 X X X 
Output 1
Start Digit PRM.DTL.SDG 1 128 1 4 0   X 
Length PRM.DTL.DLEN 100 128 1 3 0 X X X 
Decoding Timeout PRM.DTL.TOUT 3 60 0.01 2 2   X 
Data Split Enable/ PRM.DTL.DSPL OFF 0 X X X 
Disable ON 1

3-158 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

System
Integer
Label

Value
Parameters Splits 1
(continued) Enable PRM.DTL.ESPL[0] Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Start Digit PRM.DTL.SDGS[0] 1 128 1 3 0 X X X 
Length PRM.DTL.DLENS[0] 1 128 1 3 0 X X X 
Splits 2 PRM.DTL.***[1]
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
Splits 8 PRM.DTL.***[7]
Fixed Length PRM.DTL.FLO OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1
Fill Character PRM.DTL.FCH "_" X X X 
Error Output PRM.DTL.ECO OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1
Error Code PRM.DTL.ECD "error" 16-byte max X X X 
(1 to 16 characters) string
Verification PRM.DTL.VRF OFF 0 1 0    
ISO/IEC 1
15416
Large Area Mode PRM.DTL.CDLAM Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Limits Multi Reference PRM.DTL.MCND OFF 0 X X X 
ON 1
Number of Multi PRM.DTL.MNUM 0 16 0 2 0 X X X 
References
Reference 1 PRM.DTL.MPTN1[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 2 PRM.DTL.MPTN2[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 3 PRM.DTL.MPTN3[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 4 PRM.DTL.MPTN4[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 5 PRM.DTL.MPTN5[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 6 PRM.DTL.MPTN6[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 7 PRM.DTL.MPTN7[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 8 PRM.DTL.MPTN8[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 9 PRM.DTL.MPTN9[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 10 PRM.DTL.MPTN10[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 11 PRM.DTL.MPTN11[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 12 PRM.DTL.MPTN12[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 13 PRM.DTL.MPTN13[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 14 PRM.DTL.MPTN14[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 15 PRM.DTL.MPTN15[0] 5 0 X X X 
Reference 16 PRM.DTL.MPTN16[0] 5 0 X X X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-159

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

System
Integer
Label

Value
Limits Reference 1 Setting PRM.DTL.***[0]
(continued) Data Range PRM.DTL.MRNG[0] All 0 0 8 0 X X X 
Split 1 1
Split 2 2
Split 3 3
Split 4 4
Split 5 5
Split 6 6
Split 7 7
Split 8 8
Use in unit pass / PRM.DTL.IUJ[0] Disabled 0 X X X 
fail results Enabled 1
Calc Result PRM.DTL.COC2[0] 10 36 10 2 0   X 
Converted:
N-adic number
Calc Result PRM.DTL.PLN2[0] 1 6 1 1 0   X 
Converted:
Number of
characters
Calc Result PRM.DTL.CAZS_C[0] None 0   X 
Converted: Space 1
Zero forward
Suppression
Space 2
backward
Remove 3
zeros
Date & Time PRM.DTL.OFYR[0] 0 10 -10 2 0   X 
Offset: Year
Date & Time PRM.DTL.OFMN[0] 0 12 -12 2 0   X 
Offset: Month
Date & Time PRM.DTL.OFDY[0] 0 1999 -1999 4 0   X 
Offset: Day
Date & Time PRM.DTL.OFTM[0] 0 24 -24 2 0   X 
Offset: Hour
Date & Time PRM.DTL.SLH[0] 0 3599 0 4 0   X 
Offset: Positive
Allowable Error:
Seconds
Date & Time PRM.DTL.SLL[0] 0 3599 0 4 0   X 
Offset: Negative
Allowable Error:
Seconds
Date & Time PRM.DTL.CAZS_Y[0] None 0   X 
Offset: Zero Space 1
Suppression forward
Space 2
backward
Remove 3
zeros
Processing PRM.DTL.UOS[0] Special 0   X 
Normal 1
Reference 2 Setting PRM.DTL.***[1]
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
Reference 16 Setting PRM.DTL.***[15]

3-160 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

System
Integer
Label

Value
Limits Code Length : PRM.DTL.ID_LEN:HL 999 0 3 0   X 
(continued) Upper Limit
Code Length : PRM.DTL.ID_LEN:LL 999 0 3 0   X 
Lower Limit
X Position of Code: PRM.DTL.X:HL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
X Position of Code: PRM.DTL.X:LL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Y Position of Code: PRM.DTL.Y:HL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Y Position of Code: PRM.DTL.Y:LL 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Deviation Angle of PRM.DTL.T:HL 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Code: Upper Limit
Deviation Angle of PRM.DTL.T:LL 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Code: Lower Limit
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_DEC 1 0    
Condition: Decode
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_EDG 1 0    
Condition: Edge
Determination
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_SC 1 0    
Condition: Symbol
Contrast
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_MINR 1 0    
Condition: Minimum
Reflectance
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_MINE 1 0    
Condition: Minimum Edge
Contrast
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_MOD 1 0    
Condition: Modulation
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_QZ 1 0    
Condition: Minimum Quiet
Zone
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_DCD 1 0    
Condition: Decodability
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_DEF 1 0    
Condition: Defects
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_WNR 1 0    
Condition: Wide to Narrow
Ratio
Overall Symbol Grade PRM.DTL.BC_E_CGAP 1 0    
Condition: Intercharacter
Gap
Overall Symbol Grade: PRM.DTL.BC_ALL:LL 4.0 0.0 1 1    
Lower Limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-161

List of setting parameters

Height Extraction/Height Binarization

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Height Specification PRM.HGTEXT.HGTEXT_TYPE Height 0 X X X 
Extraction/ Method extraction
Height
Binarization Height 1
binarization
Extraction Method PRM.HGTEXT.HWAY None 0 X X X 
1 Point 1
3 Points 2
(Plane)
Real-time 3
Enable Height PRM.HGTEXT.HEXTEN Enable 1 X X X 
Extraction Disable 0
Extraction Size PRM.HGTEXT.EW 16 99 1 2 0 X X X 
Calc. Method PRM.HGTEXT.HMTD None 0 X X X 
Ave. Height 1
Plane 2
Free-form 3
Plane
Extract Height PRM.HGTEXT.EH Upper Part 0 X X X 
Lower Part 1
Both 2
Noise Cut PRM.HGTEXT.HEN 0.0 9.999 0.0 1 3   X 
Gain PRM.HGTEXT.GN 13 4000 1 4 0   X 
(CA-DQP25X:6)
Height Per Tone PRM.HGTEXT.R_GN 0 9.9999 0.0001 1 4 X X X 
Invalid Pixels PRM.HGTEXT.HFM Default 0 X X X 
Background 1
Specified 2
Invalid Pix. Value PRM.HGTEXT.HFMV 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Extract Size PRM.HGTEXT.ESZ 32 1024 4 3 0   X 
Border PRM.HGTEXT.CFR ON 0   X 
OFF 1
Plane Formula Info. PRM.HGTEXT.PPABC 3 6   X 
XYZ
X Slope PRM.HGTEXT.PPA 0.0 1 -1 1 6   X 
Y Slope PRM.HGTEXT.PPB 0.0 1 -1 1 6   X 
Z Intercept PRM.HGTEXT.PPC 0.0 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Extract Direction PRM.HGTEXT.PRD X 1 3 3 1   X 
Y 2
XY 3
Z Offset PRM.HGTEXT.ZOFFS 0.0 999.999 -999.999   X 
Make Specified PRM.HGTEXT.XSB_SPUP X X X 
Height and Up
Black
Offset from Section PRM.HGTEXT.XSB_OFFB 10 999.999 0 3 3   X 
Plane Height

3-162 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Height Extract Height PRM.HGTEXT.EH Upper Part 0   X 
Extraction/
Height Lower Part 1
Binary Both 2
Processing
(continued) Cross Section 3
Extract Use Region PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.RGNEN Enable 1 X X X 
Region: Disable 0
Common
Shape Settings PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.SHP Same as Insp. 0 X X X 
Region
Rectangle 1
Rotated 3
Rectangle
Circle 4
Oval 5
Ring 6
Arc 7
Polygon 8
Extract Upper Left XY PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.LUXY 5 0   X 
Region: Upper Left X PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.LUX 160 16383 0 5 0   X 
Rectangle
Upper Left Y PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.LUY 160 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower Right XY PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.RDXY 5 0   X 
Lower Right X PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.RDX 360 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower Right Y PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.RDY 320 16383 0 5 0   X 
Extract Width PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.WI 201 16383 1 5 0   X 
Region: Height PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.HI 161 16383 1 5 0   X 
Rotated
Center XY PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.RCXY 5 0   X 
Rectangle
Center X PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.RCX 260 16382 0 5 0   X 
Center Y PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.RCY 240 16382 0 5 0   X 
Angle PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.T 0.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
Extract Center XY PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CXY 5 0   X 
Region: Center X PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Circle
Center Y PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CR 120 9600 0 4 0   X 
Extract Center XY PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CXY 5 0   X 
Region: Center X PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Oval
Center Y PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CR1 120 2580 8 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CR2 180 2580 8 4 0   X 
Angle PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.T 0.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
Extract Center XY PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CXY 5 0   X 
Region: Center X PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Ring
Center Y PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CR1 120 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CR2 60 9600 0 4 0   X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-163

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Extract Center XY PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CXY 5 0   X 
Region: Center X PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Arc
Center Y PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CR1 120 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.CR2 30 9600 0 4 0   X 
Starting Angle PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.STA 45.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
End Angle PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.ENA 315.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
Extract Number of Nodes PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.PN 0 12 0 2 0 X X X 
Region: Max Number of PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.MXPN 12 12 12 2 0 X X X X
Polygon Nodes
XY Position PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.PXY[*] 5 0   X 
X Position PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.PX[*] 331 16383 0 5 0   X 
Y Position PRM.HGTEXT.RGN.PY[*] 337 16383 0 5 0   X 
Mask 0 Enabled PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0]. Enable 1 X X X 
Settings: RGNEN Disable 0
Common
Shape Settings PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].SHP None 0 X X X 
Rectangle 1
Rotated 3
Rectangle
Circle 4
Oval 5
Ring 6
Arc 7
Polygon 8
Mask 0 Upper Left XY PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].LUXY 5 0   X 
Settings: Upper Left X PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].LUX 200 16383 0 5 0   X 
Rectangle
Upper Left Y PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].LUY 180 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower Right XY PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].RDXY 5 0   X 
Lower Right X PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].RDX 320 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower Right Y PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].RDY 300 16383 0 5 0   X 
Mask 0 Width PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].WI 121 16383 1 5 0   X 
Settings: Height PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].HI 121 16383 1 5 0   X 
Rotated
Center XY PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].RCXY 5 0   X 
Rectangle
Center X PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].RCX 260 16382 0 5 0   X 
Center Y PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].RCY 240 16382 0 5 0   X 
Angle PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].T 0.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
Mask 0 Center XY PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Settings: Center X PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Circle
Center Y PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CR 60 9600 0 4 0   X 
Mask 0 Center XY PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Settings: Center X PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Oval
Center Y PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CR1 60 2580 8 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CR2 100 2580 8 4 0   X 
Angle PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].T 0.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 

3-164 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection
String following !U[n].

Decimal point format

value
Mnemonic string

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
Integer
Label

Value
Mask 0 Center XY PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Settings: Center X PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Ring
Center Y PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CR1 80 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CR2 40 9600 0 4 0   X 
Mask 0 Center XY PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Settings: Center X PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Arc
Center Y PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CR1 200 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].CR2 100 9600 0 4 0   X 
Starting Angle PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].STA 45.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
End Angle PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].ENA 315.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
Mask 0 Number of Nodes PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].PN 0 12 0 2 0 X X X 
Settings: Max Number of PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].MXPN 12 12 12 2 0 X X X X
Polygon Nodes
XY Position PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].PXY[*] 5 0   X 
X Position PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].PX[*] 331 16383 0 5 0   X 
Y Position PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[0].PY[*] 337 16383 0 5 0   X 
Mask 1 PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[1].***
Settings
Mask 2 PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[2].***
Settings
Mask 3 PRM.HGTEXT.MSK[3].***
Settings

XG-X Comm-US 3-165

List of setting parameters

Height Measurement Unit

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Height Maximum Number of PRM.DTL.MXN 1 10000 1 5 0 X X X 
Measurement Possible Heights
Use Maximum Height PRM.DTL.MXHP_EN Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Use Minimum Height PRM.DTL.MNHP_EN Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Use Average Height PRM.DTL.AVHP_EN Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Use Valid Pix. Count PRM.DTL.EP_EN Disable 0 X X X 
Enable 1
Use Concave/Convex PRM.DTL.AR_EN Disable 0 X X X 
Area
Enable 1
Use Concave/Convex PRM.DTL.VOL_EN Disable 0 X X X 
Volume
Enable 1
Use Standard PRM.DTL.DVHP_EN Disable 0 X X X 
Deviation
Enable 1
Coordinate System PRM.DTL.CRD After position 0 X X X 
adjust
Before position 1
adjust
Origin Point XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 X X X 
Origin Point X PRM.DTL.OGX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 X X X 
Origin Point Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 X X X 
Height Direction Unit PRM.DTL.HOU mm 0 X X X 
μm 1
Region Update Mode PRM.DTL.RUM Update Each 0 X X X 
Process
Update By User 1
Result Display Region PRM.DTL.LLB 0 9999 0 4 0 X X X 
No.
Count: Upper Limit PRM.DTL.N:HL - 10000 0 5 0   X 
Count: Lower Limit PRM.DTL.N:LL - 10000 0 5 0   X 
Maximum Height X: PRM.DTL.MXX:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Maximum Height X: PRM.DTL.MXX:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Maximum Height Y: PRM.DTL.MXY:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Maximum Height Y: PRM.DTL.MXY:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Maximum Height Z: PRM.DTL.MXZ:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Maximum Height Z: PRM.DTL.MXZ:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Maximum Height H: PRM.DTL.MXH:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit

3-166 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Height Maximum Height H: PRM.DTL.MXH:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Measurement Lower Limit
(continued)
Minimum Height X: PRM.DTL.MNX:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Minimum Height X: PRM.DTL.MNX:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Minimum Height Y: PRM.DTL.MNY:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Minimum Height Y: PRM.DTL.MNY:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Minimum Height Z: PRM.DTL.MNZ:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Minimum Height Z: PRM.DTL.MNZ:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Minimum Height H: PRM.DTL.MNH:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Minimum Height H: PRM.DTL.MNH:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Average Height Z: PRM.DTL.AVZ:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Average Height Z: PRM.DTL.AVZ:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Average Height H: PRM.DTL.AVH:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Average Height H: PRM.DTL.AVH:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Valid Pix. Count: PRM.DTL.EPA:HL - 99999999.0 0.0 8 0   X 
Upper Limit
Valid Pix. Count: PRM.DTL.EPA:LL - 99999999.0 0.0 8 0   X 
Lower Limit
Concave Area: Upper PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:HL - 999999.999 0.0 6 3   X 
Limit
Concave Area: Lower PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:LL - 999999.999 0.0 6 3   X 
Limit
Convex Area: Upper PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:HL - 999999.999 0.0 6 3   X 
Limit
Convex Area: Lower PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:LL - 999999.999 0.0 6 3   X 
Limit
Concave Volume: PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:HL - 9999999.999 0.0 7 3   X 
Upper Limit
Concave Volume: PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:LL - 9999999.999 0.0 7 3   X 
Lower Limit
Convex Volume: PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:HL - 9999999.999 0.0 7 3   X 
Upper Limit
Convex Volume: PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:LL - 9999999.999 0.0 7 3   X 
Lower Limit
Standard Deviation Z: PRM.DTL.DVZ:HL - 99999.999 0.0 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Standard Deviation Z: PRM.DTL.DVZ:LL - 99999.999 0.0 5 3   X 
Lower Limit
Standard Deviation H: PRM.DTL.DVH:HL - 99999.999 0.0 5 3   X 
Upper Limit
Standard Deviation H: PRM.DTL.DVH:LL - 99999.999 0.0 5 3   X 
Lower Limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-167

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Plane Detection PRM.DTL.DPP_ENP OFF 0 X X X 
Conditions ON 1
Correction PRM.DTL.HREA OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Reference Height PRM.DTL.REF_H Average 0   X 
Maximum 1
Minimum 2
Z Offset PRM.DTL.ZOFFS 0.0 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 

3-168 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Zero Plane Specification

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Zero Plane Spec. Method PRM.HRP.MTD None 4 X X X 
Region (Best Fit) 0
Region (Ave. 1
Height)
3 Points (Real- 2
Time)
User Specified 3
Multiple Points 5
(Real-Time)
Result Data 6
Reference
Free-form Plane 7
Reference
Enable Zero Plane PRM.HRP.HRPEN Enable 1 X X X 
Specification Disable 0
Selection Size PRM.HRP.PSZ 5 99 1 2 0   X 
Enable Select Point0 PRM.HRP.P_EN[0] Enable 1 1 0 X X X 
Disable 0
...

...

Enable Select Point31 PRM.HRP.P_EN[31]

Select Point Count PRM.HRP.PN 0 3 0 1 0 X X X 
Select Point0 XY PRM.HRP.PXY[0] 5 0   X 
Select Point0 X PRM.HRP.PX[0] 0 16383 0 5 0   X 
Select Point0 Y PRM.HRP.PY[0] 0 16383 0 5 0   X 
...

...

Select Point31 XY PRM.HRP.PXY[31]

Select Point31 X PRM.HRP.PX[31]
Select Point31 Y PRM.HRP.PY[31]
Plane Formula Info. PRM.HRP.PPABC 3 6   X 
XYZ
X Slope PRM.HRP.PPA 0.0 1 -1 1 6   X 
Y Slope PRM.HRP.PPB 0.0 1 -1 1 6   X 
Z Intercept PRM.HRP.PPC 0.0 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Noise Cut PRM.HRP.HEN 0.005 999.999 0.0 3 3   X 
Z Offset PRM.HRP.ZOFFS 0 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Extraction Size PRM.HRP.ESZ 32 256 4 3 0   X 
Extraction Direction PRM.HRP.PRD X 1   X 
Y 2
XY 3
Border PRM.HRP.CFR ON 1   X 
OFF 0

XG-X Comm-US 3-169

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Zero Plane Use Region PRM.HRP.RGN.RGNEN Enable 1 X X X 
Region: Disable 0
Common
Shape Settings PRM.HRP.RGN.SHP None 0 X X X 
Rectangle 1
Rotated 3
Rectangle
Circle 4
Oval 5
Ring 6
Arc 7
Polygon 8
Zero Plane Upper Left XY PRM.HRP.RGN.LUXY 5 0   X 
Region: Upper Left X PRM.HRP.RGN.LUX 160 16383 0 5 0   X 
Rectangle
Upper Left Y PRM.HRP.RGN.LUY 160 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower Right XY PRM.HRP.RGN.RDXY 5 0   X 
Lower Right X PRM.HRP.RGN.RDX 360 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower Right Y PRM.HRP.RGN.RDY 320 16383 0 5 0   X 
Zero Plane Width PRM.HRP.RGN.WI 201 16383 1 5 0   X 
Region: Height PRM.HRP.RGN.HI 161 16383 1 5 0   X 
Rotated
Center XY PRM.HRP.RGN.RCXY 5 0   X 
Rectangle
Center X PRM.HRP.RGN.RCX 260 16382 0 5 0   X 
Center Y PRM.HRP.RGN.RCY 240 16382 0 5 0   X 
Angle PRM.HRP.RGN.T 0.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
Zero Plane Center XY PRM.HRP.RGN.CXY 5 0   X 
Region: Center X PRM.HRP.RGN.CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Circle
Center Y PRM.HRP.RGN.CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius PRM.HRP.RGN.CR 120 9600 0 4 0   X 
Zero Plane Center XY PRM.HRP.RGN.CXY 5 0   X 
Region: Center X PRM.HRP.RGN.CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Oval
Center Y PRM.HRP.RGN.CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HRP.RGN.CR1 120 2580 8 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HRP.RGN.CR2 180 2580 8 4 0   X 
Angle PRM.HRP.RGN.T 0.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
Zero Plane Center XY PRM.HRP.RGN.CXY 5 0   X 
Region: Center X PRM.HRP.RGN.CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Ring
Center Y PRM.HRP.RGN.CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HRP.RGN.CR1 120 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HRP.RGN.CR2 60 9600 0 4 0   X 
Zero Plane Center XY PRM.HRP.RGN.CXY 5 0   X 
Region: Center X PRM.HRP.RGN.CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Arc
Center Y PRM.HRP.RGN.CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HRP.RGN.CR1 120 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HRP.RGN.CR2 30 9600 0 4 0   X 
Starting Angle PRM.HRP.RGN.STA 45.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
End Angle PRM.HRP.RGN.ENA 315.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 

3-170 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Zero Plane Number of Nodes PRM.HRP.RGN.PN 0 12 0 2 0 X X X 
Region: Max Number of PRM.HRP.RGN.MXPN 12 12 12 2 0 X X X X
Polygon Nodes
XY Position PRM.HRP.RGN.PXY[*] 5 0   X 
X Position PRM.HRP.RGN.PX[*] 331 16383 0 5 0   X 
Y Position PRM.HRP.RGN.PY[*] 337 16383 0 5 0   X 
Mask 0 Enabled PRM.HRP.MSK[0]. Enable 1 X X X 
Settings: RGNEN Disable 0
Common
Shape Settings PRM.HRP.MSK[0].SHP None 0 X X X 
Rectangle 1
Rotated 3
Rectangle
Circle 4
Oval 5
Ring 6
Arc 7
Polygon 8
Mask 0 Upper Left XY PRM.HRP.MSK[0].LUXY 5 0   X 
Settings: Upper Left X PRM.HRP.MSK[0].LUX 200 16383 0 5 0   X 
Rectangle
Upper Left Y PRM.HRP.MSK[0].LUY 180 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower Right XY PRM.HRP.MSK[0].RDXY 5 0   X 
Lower Right X PRM.HRP.MSK[0].RDX 320 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower Right Y PRM.HRP.MSK[0].RDY 300 16383 0 5 0   X 
Mask 0 Width PRM.HRP.MSK[0].WI 121 16383 1 5 0   X 
Settings: Height PRM.HRP.MSK[0].HI 121 16383 1 5 0   X 
Rotated
Center XY PRM.HRP.MSK[0].RCXY 5 0   X 
Rectangle
Center X PRM.HRP.MSK[0].RCX 260 16382 0 5 0   X 
Center Y PRM.HRP.MSK[0].RCY 240 16382 0 5 0   X 
Angle PRM.HRP.MSK[0].T 0.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
Mask 0 Center XY PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Settings: Center X PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Circle
Center Y PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CR 60 9600 0 4 0   X 
Mask 0 Center XY PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Settings: Center X PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Oval
Center Y PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CR1 60 2580 8 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CR2 100 2580 8 4 0   X 
Angle PRM.HRP.MSK[0].T 0.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
Mask 0 Center XY PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Settings: Center X PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Ring
Center Y PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CR1 80 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CR2 40 9600 0 4 0   X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-171

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Mask 0 Center XY PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CXY 5 0   X 
Settings: Center X PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CX 260 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Arc
Center Y PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CY 240 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Radius 1 PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CR1 200 9600 0 4 0   X 
Radius 2 PRM.HRP.MSK[0].CR2 100 9600 0 4 0   X 
Starting Angle PRM.HRP.MSK[0].STA 45.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
End Angle PRM.HRP.MSK[0].ENA 315.0 359.9 0.0 3 1   X 
Mask 0 Number of Nodes PRM.HRP.MSK[0].PN 0 12 0 2 0 X X X 
Settings: Max Number of PRM.HRP.MSK[0].MXPN 12 12 12 2 0 X X X X
Polygon Nodes
XY Position PRM.HRP.MSK[0].PXY[*] 5 0   X 
X Position PRM.HRP.MSK[0].PX[*] 331 16383 0 5 0   X 
Y Position PRM.HRP.MSK[0].PY[*] 337 16383 0 5 0   X 
Mask 1 PRM.HRP.MSK[1].***
Settings
Mask 2 PRM.HRP.MSK[2].***
Settings
Mask 3 PRM.HRP.MSK[3].***
Settings

3-172 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Profile Measurement Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Profile line Profile calculation PRM.DTL.PRSEL Average value 0 X X X 
settings method stitching
Maximum 1
value stitching
Minimum 2
value stitching
Profile shape PRM.DTL.SLPROC Rotation + 1   X 
correction projection
Rotation only 2
None 0
Valid pixel border PRM.DTL.VBPC Extend up 1   X 
processing Extend down 2
None 0
Profile line PRM.PCRE.PCRE_LTYPE None 0 X X X 
classification Two point 1
specification
Circle 4
Profile width PRM.RGN.LLNUM 3 1023 1 3 0    
Measurement Smoothing range PRM.DTL.DSMR 15 20 0 2 1 X X X 
target: Defect (common)
detection
Measurement Inflection point PRM.DTL.IRNG 20 10000 1 5 0 X X X 
target: Range
inflection Point No. of Points PRM.DTL.IFW 16 256 1 3 0 X X X 
Judgment Height: Upper limit PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
condition:
Height: Lower limit PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Measurement
00 Level distance: PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Level distance: PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Position: Upper limit PRM.DTL.POS[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Position: Lower limit PRM.DTL.POS[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Center position: PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Center position: PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Width: Upper limit PRM.DTL.WID[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Width: Lower limit PRM.DTL.WID[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Angle from the PRM.DTL.HANG[0]:HL - 180 -90 3 3   X 
horizontal: Upper limit
Angle from horizontal: PRM.DTL.HANG[0]:LL - 180 -90 3 3   X 
Lower limit
Angle formed by two PRM.DTL.LLANG[0]:HL - 180 -90 3 3   X 
lines: Upper limit
Angle formed by two PRM.DTL.LLANG[0]:LL - 180 -90 3 3   X 
lines: Lower limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-173

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Judgment Radius of circle: PRM.DTL.PRAD[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
condition: Upper limit
Measurement Radius of circle: PRM.DTL.PRAD[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
00 Lower limit
(continued)
Cross-Section PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Cross-Section PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
1-line Cross-Section PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
area: Upper limit
1-line Cross-Section PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
area: Lower limit
2-line Cross-Section PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
area: Upper limit
2-line Cross-Section PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
area: Lower limit
Points distance: PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Points distance: PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Point/line distance: PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Point/line distance: PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower limit
Count: Upper limit PRM.DTL.PCNT[0]:HL - 99999 0 5 0   X 
Count: Lower limit PRM.DTL.PCNT[0]:LL - 99999 0 5 0   X 
Defect detection: PRM.DTL.STG[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Upper limit
Defect detection: PRM.DTL.STG[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   X 
Lower limit

3-174 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measurement Measurement: PRM.PMSR[0].PREN Enable 1 X X X 
list: Enable/disable Disable 0
Measurement
Measurement PRM.PMSR[0].PRTYP No 0 X X X 
00
classification measurement
Height 1
Level distance 2
Position 3
Center 4
position
Width 5
Angle from 6
horizontal
Angle formed by 7
two lines
Radius of 8
circle
Cross-Section 15
area
1-line Cross- 9
Section area
2-line Cross- 10
Section area
Points 11
distance
Point/line 12
distance
Count 13
Defect 16
detection
Measurement Angle range PRM.PMSR[0].ANGSPAN 0° to 180° 0 X X X 
list: -90° to 90° 1
Measurement
00: Angle
settings
Measurement Detection target PRM.PMSR[0].DIMDIR Indentation/ 0 X X X 
list: projection
Measurement Projection 1
00: Cross
Indentation 2
sectional area
settings Integration 3

XG-X Comm-US 3-175

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measurement Measurement PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].PMSRTYP No target 0 X X X 
list: target classification Average 1
Measurement
Peak 2
00: Common
settings Bottom 3
Edge 4
Inflection point 5
Two lines 6
intersection
Circle/Line 7
intersection
Circle 8
Line 9
Cross-Section 10
area
Center of 11
circle
Difference to 12
reference line
Region 1: Enable/ PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNEN0[0] Enable 1 X X X 
disable Disable 0
Region 1: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFMTD0[0] User specified 0 X X X 
Reference method Refer to 1
position
Meas.(1pt.)
Refer to 2
position
Meas.(2pt.)
Region 1: Start PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].XS0[0] 0 16383 0 5 0 X X X 
point X
Region 1: End PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].XE0[0] 0 16383 0 5 0 X X X 
point X
Region 1: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFID0_0[0] 0 31 0 2 0 X X X 
Measurement item
No.(Reference 1)
Region 1: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFID0_1[0] 0 31 0 2 0 X X X 
Measurement item
No.(Reference 2)
Region 1: Offset 1 PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNOFS0_0[0] 0 9999 -9999 4 0   X 
Region 1: Offset 2 PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNOFS0_1[0] 0 9999 -9999 4 0   X 
Region 1: Width PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNW0[0] 120 9999 1 4 0   X 
Region 2: Enable/ PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNEN1[0] Enable 1 X X X 
disable Disable 0

3-176 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measurement Region 2: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFMTD1[0] User specified 0 X X X 
list: Reference method Refer to 1
Measurement position
00: Common Meas.(1pt.)
settings
Refer to 2
(continued)
position
Meas.(2pt.)
Region 2: Start PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].XS1[0] 0 16383 0 5 0 X X X 
point X
Region 2: End PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].XE1[0] 0 16383 0 5 0 X X X 
point X
Region 2: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFID1_0[0] 0 31 0 2 0 X X X 
Measurement item
No.(Reference 1)
Region 2: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFID1_1[0] 0 31 0 2 0 X X X 
Measurement item
No.(Reference 2)
Region 2: Offset 1 PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNOFS1_0[0] 0 9999 -9999 4 0   X 
Region 2: Offset 2 PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNOFS1_1[0] 0 9999 -9999 4 0   X 
Region 2: Width PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNW1[0] 120 9999 1 4 0   X 
Measurement Edge direction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].EDGTYP Rise 0 X X X 
list: Fall 1
Measurement
Both 2
00: Edge
directions
settings
Scan direction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DTD → 0 X X X 
← 1
Detection Target PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DTN 0 10 0 2 0   X 
Detection height PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DTHR 0 999.999 -999.999 3 3   X 
Measurement Inflection point PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].IFSHP Peak 0 X X X 
list: shape Trough 1
Measurement
Peak / Trough 2
00:
Inflection point Scan direction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DTD → 0 X X X 
settings ← 1
Detection Target PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DTN 0 10 0 2 0   X 
Sensitivity PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DSEN 50 100 0 3 0   X 
Measurement Correction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REA Enable 1 X X X 
list: Disable 0
Measurement
00: Line settings
Measurement Correction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REA Enable 1 X X X 
list: Disable 0
Measurement
00: Center of
circle settings
Measurement Correction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REA Enable 1 X X X 
list: Disable 0
Measurement
00: Intersection
settings

XG-X Comm-US 3-177

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measurement Reference line PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].BML Free curve line 4 X X X 
list: Line 2
Measurement
Circle 1
00: Difference to
reference line Detection direction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].SDTD +/- 2 X X X 
+ 0
- 1
Detection threshold PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].SDTP 0 999.999 0 3 3   X 
Lowest detected PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].SWDTP 0 999.999 0 3 3   X 
width
Measurement PRM.PMSR[1].***
list:
Measurement
01
...

...

Measurement PRM.PMSR[31].***
list:
Measurement
31
Measured value Correction method PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
correction: correction
Height 2-point 1
(measurement correction
00)
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Coefficient B
Measuredvalue PRM.DTL.HGT[1]:***
correction:
Height
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measuredvalue PRM.DTL.HGT[31]:***
correction:
Height
(measurement
31)

3-178 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured value Correction method PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
correction: correction
Level distance 2-point 1
(measurement correction
00)
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured value PRM.DTL.DIFF[1]:***
correction:
Level distance
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured value PRM.DTL.DIFF[31]:***

correction:
Level distance
(measurement
31)
Measured value Correction method PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
correction: correction
Position 2-point 1
(measurement correction
00)
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient B

XG-X Comm-US 3-179

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measuredvalue PRM.DTL.POS[1]:***
correction:
Position
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measuredvalue PRM.DTL.POS[31]:***
correction:
Position
(measurement
31)
Measuredvalue Correction method PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
correction: correction
Center position 2-point 1
(measurement correction
00)
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.CTR[]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measuredvalue PRM.DTL.CTR[1]:***
correction:
Center position
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measuredvalue PRM.DTL.CTR[31]:***
correction:
Center position
(measurement
31)

3-180 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured value Correction method PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
correction: correction
Width 2-point 1
(measurement correction
00)
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured value PRM.DTL.WID[1]:***
correction:
Width
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured value PRM.DTL.WID[31]:***

correction:
Width
(measurement
31)
Measured value Correction method PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
correction: correction
Radius of circle 2-point 1
(measurement correction
00)
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient B

XG-X Comm-US 3-181

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured value PRM.DTL.CRMD[1]:***
correction:
Radius of circle
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measuredvalue PRM.DTL.CRMD[31]:***
correction:
Radius of circle
(measurement
31)
Measuredvalue Correction method PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
correction: correction
Cross-Section 2-point 1
area correction
(measurement
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
00)
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measuredvalue PRM.DTL.ZAR[1]:***
correction:
Cross-Section
area
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measuredvalue PRM.DTL.ZAR[31]:***
correction:
Cross-Section
area
(measurement
31)

3-182 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured value Correction method PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
correction: correction
1-line Cross- 2-point 1
Section area correction
(measurement
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
00)
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Coefficient B
Measured value PRM.DTL.LAR[1]:***
correction:
1-line Cross-
Section area
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured value PRM.DTL.LAR[31]:***

correction:
1-line Cross-
Section area
(measurement
31)
Measured value Correction method PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
correction: correction
2-line Cross- 2-point 1
Section area correction
(measurement
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
00)
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient B

XG-X Comm-US 3-183

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measuredvalue PRM.DTL.DLAR[1]:***
correction:
2-line Cross-
Section area
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measuredvalue PRM.DTL.DLAR[31]:***
correction:
2-line Cross-
Section area
(measurement
31)
Measured value Correction method PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
correction: correction
Points distance 2-point 1
(measurement correction
00)
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured value PRM.DTL.PPDST[1]:***
correction:
Points distance
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured value PRM.DTL.PPDST[31]:***

correction:
Points distance
(measurement
31)

3-184 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured value Correction method PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
correction: correction
Point/line 2-point 1
distance correction
(measurement
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
00)
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured value PRM.DTL.LPDST[1]:***
correction:
Point/line
distance
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured value PRM.DTL.LPDST[31]:***

correction:
Point/line
distance
(measurement
31)

XG-X Comm-US 3-185

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 X X X 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
Defect correction
detection
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
(measurement
correction
00)
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 X X X 
coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured value PRM.DTL.STG[1]:***
correction:
Defect
detection
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured value PRM.DTL.STG[31]:***

correction:
Defect
detection
(measurement
31)

3-186 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Continuous Profile Measurement Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Scan direction PRM.DTL.SCDIR ↓ 7 x x x 
condition → 5
Clockwise 14
Scan interval PRM.DTL.SCINTV 10 4096 1 3 0   x 
Start angle PRM.DTL.SCSTOF 0 359 0 3 0   x 
Scan range PRM.DTL.SCCIR_MTD 180° 0   x 
360° 1
Profile calculation PRM.DTL.MLPROF_TYP Conbinatorial 0 x x x 
method Ave. Value
Conbinatorial 1
Max. Value
Conbinatorial 2
Min. Value
Profile width PRM.DTL.MLPROF_LNNM 1 1023 1 3 0   x 
Maximum number of PRM.DTL.MXN 100 16384 1 5 0 x x x 
profiles
Valid pixel border PRM.DTL.VBPC Extend 1   x 
processing upward
Extend 2
downward
None 0
Profile shape PRM.DTL.SLPROC Rotation + 1   x 
correction projection
Rotation only 2
None 0
Profile number PRM.DTL.DPROF_UDIDX 0 16383 0 5 0 x x x 
Display condition 1 PRM.DTL.DPROF_STYP1 NG Item 1 x x x 
Count: Desc.
Measured 2
Value: Desc.
Measured 3
Value: Asc.
Equal Division: 4
Desc.
Equal Division: 5
Asc.
None 0
Display condition 1 PRM.DTL.DPROF_ITEMID1 0 31 0 2 0 x x x 
measurement item
No.

XG-X Comm-US 3-187

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Display condition 2 PRM.DTL.DPROF_STYP2 NG Item 1 x x x 
condition Count: Desc.
(continued) Measured 2
Value: Desc.
Measured 3
Value: Asc.
Equal Division: 4
Desc.
Equal Division: 5
Asc.
None 0
Display condition 2 PRM.DTL.DPROF_ITEMID2 0 31 0 2 0 x x x 
measurement item
No.
Display condition 3 PRM.DTL.DPROF_STYP3 NG Item 1 x x x 
Count: Desc.
Measured 2
Value: Desc.
Measured 3
Value: Asc.
Equal Division: 4
Desc.
Equal Division: 5
Asc.
None 0
Display condition 3 PRM.DTL.DPROF_ITEMID3 0 31 0 2 0 x x x 
measurement item
No.
Display condition 4 PRM.DTL.DPROF_STYP4 NG Item 1 x x x 
Count: Desc.
Measured 2
Value: Desc.
Measured 3
Value: Asc.
Equal Division: 4
Desc.
Equal Division: 5
Asc.
None 0
Display condition 4 PRM.DTL.DPROF_ITEMID4 0 31 0 2 0 x x x 
measurement item
No.
Max. Number of PRM.DTL.MXPROFPIX 1024 128 16384 5 0 x x x 
Pixels of Display (XG-X2900LJ:4480)
Best Fit Line 1 PRM.DTL.DLN1_EN Enable 1 x x x 
enable/disable Disable 0
Best Fit Line 1 PRM.DTL.DLN1_ITEMID 0 31 0 2 0   x 
measurement item
No.

3-188 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Best Fit Line 2 PRM.DTL.DLN2_EN Enable 1 x x x 
condition enable/disable Disable 0
(continued)
Best Fit Line 2 PRM.DTL.DLN2_ITEMID 0 31 0 2 0   x 
measurement item
No.
Best Fit Line 3 PRM.DTL.DLN3_EN Enable 1 x x x 
enable/disable Disable 0
Best Fit Line 3 PRM.DTL.DLN3_ITEMID 0 31 0 2 0   x 
measurement item
No.
Best Fit Line 4 PRM.DTL.DLN4_EN Enable 1 x x x 
enable/disable Disable 0
Best Fit Line 4 PRM.DTL.DLN4_ITEMID 0 31 0 2 0   x 
measurement item
No.
Plane Type PRM.DTL.DPP_TYP OFF 0 x x x 
Best Fit plane 5
Tangential 6
plane (Top)
Tangential 7
plane (Bottom)
Plane Type PRM.DTL.DPP_ITEMID 0 31 0 2 0 x x x 
measurement item
No.
Measurement Smoothing range PRM.DTL.SMR 15 20 0 2 1 x x x 
target: Defect (common)
detection
Measurement Inflection point PRM.DTL.IRNG 60 10000 1 5 0 x x x 
target: Range
inflection Point No. of Points PRM.DTL.IFW 16 256 1 3 0 x x x 
Judgment NG profiles: Upper PRM.DTL.NPROFN:HL - 99999 0 5 0   x 
conditions limit
Continuous NG profiles: PRM.DTL.CNPROFN:HL - 99999 0 5 0   x 
Upper limit
Valid profiles:Upper PRM.DTL.VRPOFN:HL - 99999 0 5 0   x 
limit
Valid profiles:Lower PRM.DTL.VRPOFN:LL - 99999 0 5 0   x 
limit
Height: Upper limit PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Height: Lower limit PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Level distance: PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper limit
Level distance: PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower limit
Position: Upper limit PRM.DTL.POS[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Position: Lower limit PRM.DTL.POS[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Center position: PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-189

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Judgment Center position: PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
conditions Lower limit
(continued) Width: Upper limit PRM.DTL.WID[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Width: Lower limit PRM.DTL.WID[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Angle from horizontal: PRM.DTL.HANG[0]:HL - 180 -90 3 3   x 
Upper limit
Angle from horizontal: PRM.DTL.HANG[0]:LL - 180 -90 3 3   x 
Lower limit
Angle formed by two PRM.DTL.LLANG[0]:HL - 180 -90 3 3   x 
lines: Upper limit
Angle formed by two PRM.DTL.LLANG[0]:LL - 180 -90 3 3   x 
lines: Lower limit
Radius of circle: PRM.DTL.PRAD[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper limit
Radius of circle: PRM.DTL.PRAD[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower limit
Cross-Section area: PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper limit
Cross-Section area: PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower limit
1-line Cross-Section PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
area: Upper limit
1-line Cross-Section PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
area: Lower limit
2-line Cross-Section PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
area: Upper limit
2-line Cross-Section PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
area: Lower limit
Points distance: PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper limit
Points distance: PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower limit
Point/line distance: PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper limit
Point/line distance: PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower limit
Count: Upper limit PRM.DTL.PCNT[0]:HL - 99999 0 5 0   x 
Count: Lower limit PRM.DTL.PCNT[0]:LL - 99999 0 5 0   x 
Defect detection: PRM.DTL.STG[0]:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper limit
Defect detection: PRM.DTL.STG[0]:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower limit

3-190 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measurement Measurement: PRM.PMSR[0].PREN Enable 1 x x x 
list: Enable/disable Disable 0
Measurement
Measurement PRM.PMSR[0].PRTYP No 0 x x x 
00
classification measurement
Height 1
Level distance 2
Position 3
Center 4
position
Width 5
Angle from 6
horizontal
Angle formed 7
by two lines
Radius of 8
circle
Cross-Section 15
area
1-line Cross- 10
Section area
2-line Cross- 9
Section area
Points 11
distance
Point/line 12
distance
Count 13
Defect 16
detection
Measurement Angle range PRM.PMSR[0].ANGSPAN 0° to 180° 0 x x x 
list: -90° to 90° 1
Measurement
00: Angle
settings
Measurement Detection target PRM.PMSR[0].DIMDIR Concave/ 0 x x x 
list: Convex
Measurement Convex part 1
00: Cross-
Concave part 2
Section area
settings Integration 3

XG-X Comm-US 3-191

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measurement Measurement PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].PMSRTYP No target 0 x x x 
list: target classification Average 1
Measurement
Peak 2
00: Common
settings Bottom 3
Edge 4
Inflection point 5
Two lines 6
intersection
Circle/Line 7
intersection
Circle 8
Line 9
Cross-Section 10
area
Center of 11
circle
Difference from 12
the model line
Region 1: Enable/ PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNEN0[0] Enable 1 x x x 
disable Disable 0
Region 1: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFMTD0[0] User specified 0 x x x 
Reference method Refer to 1
position
Meas.(1pt.)
Refer to 2
position
Meas.(2pt.)
Region 1: Start PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].XS0[0] 0 16383 0 5 0 x x x 
point X
Region 1: End PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].XE0[0] 0 16383 0 5 0 x x x 
point X
Region 1: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFID0_0[0] 0 31 0 2 0 x x x 
Measurement item
No.(Reference 1)
Region 1: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFID0_1[0] 0 31 0 2 0 x x x 
Measurement item
No.(Reference 2)
Region 1: Offset 1 PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNOFS0_0[0] 0 9999 -9999 4 0   x 
Region 1: Offset 2 PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNOFS0_1[0] 0 9999 -9999 4 0   x 
Region 1: Width PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNW0[0] 120 9999 1 4 0   x 
Region 2: Enable/ PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNEN1[0] Enable 1 x x x 
disable Disable 0

3-192 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measurement Region 2: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFMTD1[0] User specified 0 x x x 
list: Reference method Refer to 1
Measurement position
00: Common Meas.(1pt.)
settings
Refer to 2
(continued)
position
Meas.(2pt.)
Region 2: Start PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].XS1[0] 0 16383 0 5 0 x x x 
point X
Region 2: End PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].XE1[0] 0 16383 0 5 0 x x x 
point X
Region 2: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFID1_0[0] 0 31 0 2 0 x x x 
Measurement item
No.(Reference 1)
Region 2: PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REFID1_1[0] 0 31 0 2 0 x x x 
Measurement item
No.(Reference 2)
Region 2: Offset 1 PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNOFS1_0[0] 0 9999 -9999 4 0   x 
Region 2: Offset 2 PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNOFS1_1[0] 0 9999 -9999 4 0   x 
Region 2: Width PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].RGNW1[0] 120 9999 1 4 0   x 
Measurement Edge direction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].EDGTYP Rise 0 x x x 
list: Fall 1
Measurement
Both 2
00: Edge
directions
settings
Scan direction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DTD → 0 x x x 
← 1
Detection Target PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DTN 0 10 0 2 0   x 
Detection height PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DTHR 0 999.999 -999.999 3 3   x 
Measurement Inflection point PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].IFSHP Peak 0 x x x 
list: shape Trough 1
Measurement
Peak/Trough 2
00:
Inflection point Scan direction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DTD → 0 x x x 
settings ← 1
Detection Target PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DTN 0 10 0 2 0   x 
Sensitivity PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].DSEN 50 100 0 3 0   x 
Measurement Correction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REA Enable 1 x x x 
list: Disable 0
Measurement
00: Line
settings
Measurement Correction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REA Enable 1 x x x 
list: Disable 0
Measurement
00: Center of
circle settings

XG-X Comm-US 3-193

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measurement Correction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].REA Enable 1 x x x 
list: Disable 0
Measurement
00:
Intersection
settings
Measurement Reference line PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].BML Free curve line 4 x x x 
list: Line 2
Measurement
Circle 1
00:
Difference to Detection direction PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].SDTD +/- 2 x x x 
reference line + 0
- 1
Detection threshold PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].SDTP 0 999.999 0 3 3   x 
Lowest detected PRM.PMSR[0].PTGT[0].SWDTP 0 999.999 0 3 3   x 
width
Measurement PRM.PMSR[1].***
list:
Measurement
01
...

...

Measurement PRM.PMSR[31].***
list:
Measurement
31
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
Height correction
(measurement
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
00)
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.HGT[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured PRM.DTL.HGT[1]:***
value
correction:
Height
(measurement
01)
...

...

3-194 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured PRM.DTL.HGT[31]:***
value
correction:
Height
(measurement
31)
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
Level distance correction
(measurement
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
00)
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.DIFF[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient B
Measured PRM.DTL.DIFF[1]:***
value
correction:
Level distance
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured PRM.DTL.DIFF[31]:***
value
correction:
Level distance
(measurement
31)

XG-X Comm-US 3-195

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
Position correction
(measurement
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
00)
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.POS[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient B
Measured PRM.DTL.POS[1]:***
value
correction:
Position
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured PRM.DTL.POS[31]:***
value
correction:
Position
(measurement
31)
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
Center correction
position
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
(measurement
correction
00)
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
dimension
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
dimension
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.CTR[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient B

3-196 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured PRM.DTL.CTR[1]:***
value
correction:
Center
position
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured PRM.DTL.CTR[31]:***
value
correction:
Center
position
(measurement
31)
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
Width correction
(measurement
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
00)
correction
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.WID[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient B
Measured PRM.DTL.WID[1]:***
value
correction:
Width
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured PRM.DTL.WID[31]:***
value
correction:
Width
(measurement
31)

XG-X Comm-US 3-197

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
Radius of correction
circle
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
(measurement
correction
00)
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.CRMD[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient B
Measured PRM.DTL.CRMD[1]:***
value
correction:
Radius of
circle
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured PRM.DTL.CRMD[31]:***
value
correction:
Radius of
circle
(measurement
31)
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
Cross-Section correction
area
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
(measurement
correction
00)
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.ZAR[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
coefficient:
Coefficient B

3-198 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured PRM.DTL.ZAR[1]:***
value
correction:
Cross-Section
area
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured PRM.DTL.ZAR[31]:***
value
correction:
Cross-Section
area
(measurement
31)
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
1-line Cross- correction
Section area
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
(measurement
correction
00)
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.LAR[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient B
Measured PRM.DTL.LAR[1]:***
value
correction:
1-line Cross-
Section area
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured PRM.DTL.LAR[31]:***
value
correction:
1-line Cross-
Section area
(measurement
31)

XG-X Comm-US 3-199

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
2-line Cross- correction
Section area
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
(measurement
correction
00)
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.DLAR[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient B
Measured PRM.DTL.DLAR[1]:***
value
correction:
2-line Cross-
Section area
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured PRM.DTL.DLAR[31]:***
value
correction:
2-line Cross-
Section area
(measurement
31)
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
Points correction
distance
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
(measurement
correction
00)
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.PPDST[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient B

3-200 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured PRM.DTL.PPDST[1]:***
value
correction:
Points
distance
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured PRM.DTL.PPDST[31]:***
value
correction:
Points
distance
(measurement
31)
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
Point/line correction
distance
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
(measurement
correction
00)
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.LPDST[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient B
Measured PRM.DTL.LPDST[1]:***
value
correction:
Point/line
distance
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured PRM.DTL.LPDST[31]:***
value
correction:
Point/line
distance
(measurement
31)

XG-X Comm-US 3-201

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
value

decimal places

Unit properties
integer digits

User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction method PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
value correction
correction: 2-point 1
Defect correction
detection
Correction 1: Before PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
(measurement
correction
00)
Correction 1: After PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: Before PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction 2: After PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
correction
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Offset
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient A
Correction coefficient: PRM.DTL.STG[0]:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient B
Measured PRM.DTL.STG[1]:***
value
correction:
Defect
detection
(measurement
01)
...

...

Measured PRM.DTL.STG[31]:***
value
correction:
Defect
detection
(measurement
31)

3-202 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

3D Geometry Unit

Referencing
Selection

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical

format
integer digits value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Operation Calculation Type PRM.DTL.TGTYP Distance 0 x x x 
setting Angle 1
Point 2
Line 3
Plane 4
Sphere 5
Measurement PRM.DTL.GCMTD Points 0 x x x 
method distance
Point/line 1
distance
Point/Plane 2
distance
Lines distance 3
Line/Plane 4
distance
Planes 5
distance
Angle Between 6
Two Lines
Angle Between 7
Line and Plane
Angle Between 8
Two Planes
Point 9
Intersection of 10
Two Lines
Intersection of 11
Line/Plane
Midpoint of 12
Points
Point between 13
point and line
Point between 14
point and plane
Intersection of 15
Point/Line
Intersection 16
Point/Plane
Line 17

XG-X Comm-US 3-203

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Selection

Numerical

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Operation Calculation method PRM.DTL.GCMTD Line Defined 18 x x x 
setting by two points
(continued) Center line 19
between point
and line
Line Projection 20
onto Plane
Line Between 21
Planes
Plane 22
Center plane 23
between two
points
Center plane 24
between Point
and Plane
Plane 25
Determined by
point and line
Plane 26
Determined by
Two Lines
Sphere 27
Operation Plane 2 calculation PRM.IN2.PPMTD Least-squares 0 x x x 
options condition method
Average 1
Distance Min. 2
Distance Max. 3
Median 4
Line 1 calculation PRM.IN1.LMTD Least-squares 0 x x x 
condition method
Average 1
Distance Min. 2
Distance Max. 3
Median 4
(Lines) PRM.DTL.LLPRL ON 1 x x x 
Parallelize lines OFF 0
(Angle) PRM.DTL.ANGTYP Angle 1 0 x x x 
Angle type Angle 2 1
Angle 3 2
Angle 4 3
(Angle) PRM.DTL.ANGRV ON 1 x x x 
Invert angle display OFF 0
(Angle) PRM.DTL.LLPLN ON 1 x x x 
Leveling lines OFF 0

3-204 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Selection

Numerical

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Operation (Midpoint) PRM.DTL.RPTYP Midpoint 0 x x x 
options Calculation point Point 1 1
(continued)
Point 2 2
(Midpoint) Offset PRM.DTL.RPOF 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
(Center line) Offset PRM.DTL.MLOF 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
(Center plane) PRM.DTL.MSOF 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Offset
Judgment Distance: Upper PRM.DTL.TDST:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
conditions limit
Distance: Lower PRM.DTL.TDST:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
limit
Angle: Upper limit PRM.DTL.TANG:HL - 360 0 3 3   x 
Angle: Lower limit PRM.DTL.TANG:LL - 360 0 3 3   x 
Radius of sphere: PRM.DTL.TRAD:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper limit
Radius of sphere: PRM.DTL.TRAD:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower limit
Input Measurement PRM.IN1.SMTD Specify in 2D 0 x x x 
element 1: setting Image
Common From Result 1
Data
User Specified 2
Input Plane Type PRM.IN1.PPTYP Best Fit plane 0 x x x 
element 1: Tangential 1
Plane plane (Top)
Tangential 2
plane (Bottom)
Correction PRM.IN1.TREA ON 1 x x x 
OFF 0
Input Coordinate Type PRM.IN1.DPMTD[s] Peak 0 x x x 
element 1: Bottom 1
3D
Average value 2
position
coordinates Median 3
Edge (Top) 4
Edge (Bottom) 5
Corner (Top) 6
Corner 7
(Bottom)
Outlier removal PRM.IN1.DPROEN[s] ON 1 x x x 
OFF 0
Outlier upper PRM.IN1.DPROU[s] 10 50 0 3 0   x 
Outlier lower PRM.IN1.DPROL[s] 10 50 0 3 0   x 

XG-X Comm-US 3-205

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Selection

Numerical

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Input Detection position PRM.IN1.DPMGN[s] Large 3 x x x 
element 1: margin Medium 2
3D
Small 1
position
coordinates Auto 0
(continued) None 4
Input Point XYZ PRM.IN1.TPXYZ 5 3    
element Point X PRM.IN1.TPX 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
figure
Point Y PRM.IN1.TPY 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
information
Point Z PRM.IN1.TPZ 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Line start position PRM.IN1.LPXYZ 5 3    
XYZ
Start position X PRM.IN1.LPX 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Start position Y PRM.IN1.LPY 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Start position Z PRM.IN1.LPZ 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Line vector XYZ PRM.IN1.LVXYZ 5 3    
Vector X PRM.IN1.LVX 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Vector Y PRM.IN1.LVY 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Vector Z PRM.IN1.LVZ 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Plane XYZ PRM.IN1.PPABC 0 99.999999 -99.999999 3 6    
X slope PRM.IN1.PPA 0 9.999999 -9.999999 1 6    
Y slope PRM.IN1.PPB 0 9.999999 -9.999999 1 6    
Z height PRM.IN1.PPC 0 999.999 -999.999 3 3    
Plane offset PRM.IN1.PPOF 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Sphere center XYZ PRM.IN1.TCXYZ 5 3    
Center X PRM.IN1.TCX 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Center Y PRM.IN1.TCY 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Center Z PRM.IN1.TCZ 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3    
Radius of sphere PRM.IN1.TRAD 0 99999.999 0 5 3    
Input Measurement PRM.IN2.SMTD Specify in 2D 0 x x x 
element 2: Setting Image
Common From Result 1
Data
User Specified 2
Input Plane Type PRM.IN2.PPTYP Best Fit plane 0 x x x 
element 2: Tangential 1
Plane plane (Top)
Tangential 2
plane (Bottom)
Correction PRM.IN2.TREA ON 1 x x x 
OFF 0

3-206 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Value
Subtraction Set by Direction PRM.TDSUB.MGDIR ON 1 x x x 
Settings
OFF 0
XY Direction PRM.TDSUB.XYMG 1.000 99.999 0.000 2 3 x x x 
Allowable Range
X Direction PRM.TDSUB.XMG 0.200 99.999 0.000 2 3 x x x 
Allowable Range
Y Direction PRM.TDSUB.YMG 0.200 99.999 0.000 2 3 x x x 
Allowable Range
Z Direction PRM.TDSUB.ZMG 0.200 99.999 0.000 2 3 x x x 
Allowable Range
Scan Direction PRM.TDSUB.SCDR Concave/ 0 x x x 
Convex
Concave 1
Convex 2
Make Invalid PRM.TDSUB.CMIIP ON 1 x x x 
Pixels Detection
Targets OFF 0

Background PRM.TDSUB.MDRFC 0.0 999.999 -999.999 3 3 x x x 

Offset (mm)
X Slope PRM.TDSUB.MDRFA 0.000000 1.000000 -1.000000 1 6 x x x 
Y Slope PRM.TDSUB.MDRFB 0.000000 1.000000 -1.000000 1 6 x x x 
X Slope/Y Slope/ PRM.TDSUB.MDRFABC 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 3 6 x x x 
Background
Offset (mm)
Make Invalid PRM.TDSUB.FIPWLL ON 1 x x x 
Pixels Detection
Targets OFF 0

Do Not Measure PRM.TDSUB.SFUL ON 1 x x x 

from
Spec.Hgt.Onwards OFF 0

Offset from PRM.TDSUB.OFFB 10.000 999.999 0.000 3 3 x x x 

Background
Plane (mm)
Emphasize PRM.TDSUB.THEMPH ON 1 x x x 
Projections
OFF 0
Lower Area Filter PRM.TDSUB.EXDS 1 999999.999 0.000 6 3 x x x 
Segment Size PRM.TDSUB.SGSZ 2 16 1 2 0 x x x 
Tilt Correction PRM.TDSUB.ICM Normal 0 x x x 
None 1
High 2
Precision
Tilt Calculation PRM.TDSUB.SHP Same as 0 x x x 
Region insp. region
Specify by a 1
Rectangle
Upper Left XY PRM.TDSUB.LUXY 5 x x x  x
Upper Left X PRM.TDSUB.LUX 160 16383 0 5 x x x  x
Upper Left Y PRM.TDSUB.LUY 160 16383 0 5 x x x  x

XG-X Comm-US 3-209

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Subtraction Lower Right PRM.TDSUB.RDXY 5 x x x  x
Settings XY
(continued)
Lower Right X PRM.TDSUB.RDX 360 16383 0 5 x x x  x
Lower Right Y PRM.TDSUB.RDY 320 16383 0 5 x x x  x
Correction PRM.TDSUB.SRAC Low 0 x x x 
Accuracy
Normal 1
High 2
Expand PRM.TDSUB.ZPAE ON 1 x x x 
Correction Range
OFF 0
Judg. Match Degree: PRM.DTL.TDSUB_MTC:HL - 100 0 3 3   x 
Cond. Upper Limit
Match Degree: PRM.DTL.TDSUB_MTC:LL - 100 0 3 3   x 
Lower Limit
Total Area: Upper PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TA:HL - 999999.999 0 6 3   x 
Limit
Total Area: Lower PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TA:LL - 999999.999 0 6 3   x 
Limit
Total Volume: PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TV:HL - 9999999.999 0 7 3   x 
Upper Limit
Total Volume: PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TV:LL - 9999999.999 0 7 3   x 
Lower Limit
Maximum Area: PRM.DTL.TDSUB_MXA:HL - 999999.999 0 6 3   x 
Upper Limit
Maximum Area: PRM.DTL.TDSUB_MXA:LL - 999999.999 0 6 3   x 
Lower Limit
Maximum PRM.DTL.TDSUB_MXV:HL - 9999999.999 0 7 3   x 
Volume: Upper
Limit
Maximum PRM.DTL.TDSUB_MXV:LL - 9999999.999 0 7 3   x 
Volume: Lower
Limit
Concave Parts PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TCCA:H - 999999.999 0 6 3   x 
Total Area: Upper L
limit
Concave Parts PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TCCA:L - 999999.999 0 6 3   x 
Total Area: Lower L
Limit
Concave Parts PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TCCV:H - 9999999.999 0 7 3   x 
Total Volume: L
Upper Limit
Concave Parts PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TCCV:L - 9999999.999 0 7 3   x 
Total Volume: L
Lower Limit
Convex Parts PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TCVA:H - 999999.999 0 6 3   x 
Total Area: Upper L
Limit
Convex Parts PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TCVA:L - 999999.999 0 6 3   x 
Total Area: Lower L
Limit
Convex Parts PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TCVV:H - 9999999.999 0 7 3   x 
Total Volume: L
Upper Limit
Convex Parts PRM.DTL.TDSUB_TCVV:L - 9999999.999 0 7 3   x 
Total Volume: L
Lower Limit

3-210 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

3D blob Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Measurement of PRM.DTL.GRX_EN Enable 1 x x x 
condition Position X
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.GRY_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Position Y
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.T_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Major Axis Angle
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.AR_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Area
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.FRX_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Feret X
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.FRY_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Feret Y
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.CL_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Perimeter
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.CD_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Roundness
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.RTD_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Rectangularity
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.R2MJ_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Major Axis
Bounding Box Disable 0
(Major Axis)
Measurement of PRM.DTL.R2MN_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Major Axis
Bounding Box Disable 0
(Minor Axis)
Measurement of PRM.DTL.R2AX_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Major Axis
Bounding Box Disable 0
(Axes Ratio)
Measurement of PRM.DTL.MBRL_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Minimum Bounding
Rectangle Disable 0
(Long Side)
Measurement of PRM.DTL.MBRS_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Minimum Bounding
Rectangle Disable 0
(Short Side)
Measurement of PRM.DTL.MBRAX_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Minimum Bounding
Rectangle Disable 0
(Axes Ratio)
Measurement of PRM.DTL.ELPMJ_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Equivalent Oval
(Major Axis) Disable 0

Measurement of PRM.DTL.ELPMN_EN Enable 1 x x x 

Equivalent Oval
(Minor Axis) Disable 0

Measurement of PRM.DTL.ELPAX_EN Enable 1 x x x 

Equivalent Oval
(Aspect Ratio) Disable 0

XG-X Comm-US 3-211

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Measurement of PRM.DTL.MX_EN Enable 1 x x x 
condition Max. Height
(continued) (Position) Disable 0

Measurement of PRM.DTL.MXZ_EN Enable 1 x x x 

Max. Height Z
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.MXH_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Max. Height H
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.MN_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Min. Height
(Position) Disable 0

Measurement of PRM.DTL.MNZ_EN Enable 1 x x x 

Min. Height Z
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.MNH_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Min. Height H
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.AVZ_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Ave. Height Z
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.AVH_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Ave. Height H
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.EPA_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Valid Pix. Count
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.VOL_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Volume
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.CONAR_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Concave/Convex
Area Disable 0

Measurement of PRM.DTL.CONVOL_EN Enable 1 x x x 

Concave/Convex
Volume Disable 0

Measurement of PRM.DTL.DVZ_EN Enable 1 x x x 

Standard Dev. Z
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.DVH_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Standard Dev. H
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.DPP_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Best Fit Plane
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.DPPT_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Plane Angle
Disable 0
Measurement of PRM.DTL.BLZ_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Height
Disable 0
Offset From Zero PRM.DTL.SDTM 0.100 999.999 -999.999 3 3   x 
Plane (mm) (Upper
Part)
Offset From Zero PRM.DTL.SDTM2 0.100 999.999 -999.999 3 3   x 
Plane (mm) (Lower
Part)
Scan Direction PRM.DTL.PRD Upper Part 1 x x x 
Lower Part 0
Limit Range for PRM.DTL.HL_EN ON 1 x x x 
Height Direction
OFF 0
Range (mm) PRM.DTL.HLH 1.000 999.999 0.001 3 3   x 

3-212 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Refer to Detected PRM.DTL.BIMGEN ON 1 x x x 
condition Part of Other Unit
(continued) OFF 0

Filter Area Enabled PRM.DTL.AR_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 

Disable 0
Filter Position X PRM.DTL.X_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Position Y PRM.DTL.Y_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Perimeter PRM.DTL.CL_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Feret X PRM.DTL.FX_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Feret Y PRM.DTL.FY_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Roundness PRM.DTL.CD_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter PRM.DTL.RTD_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Rectangularity
Enabled Disable 0

Filter Major Axis PRM.DTL.T_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 

Angle Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Major Axis PRM.DTL.MAA_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Minor Axis PRM.DTL.MIA_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Axes Ratio PRM.DTL.RTO_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Oval Major PRM.DTL.MAA2_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Axis Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Oval Minor PRM.DTL.MIA2_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Axis Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Asp.Ratio PRM.DTL.RTO2_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Long Side PRM.DTL.MRLS_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Short Side PRM.DTL.MRSS_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Minimum PRM.DTL.MBRAX_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Bounding
Rectangle (Axes Disable 0
Ratio) Enabled
Filter Max. Height X PRM.DTL.MXX_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Max. Height Y PRM.DTL.MXY_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0

XG-X Comm-US 3-213

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Filter Max. Height Z PRM.DTL.MXZ_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
condition Enabled
(continued) Disable 0

Filter Max. Height H PRM.DTL.MXH_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 

Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Min. Height X PRM.DTL.MNX_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Min. Height Y PRM.DTL.MNY_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Min. Height Z PRM.DTL.MNZ_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Min. Height H PRM.DTL.MNH_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Ave. Height Z PRM.DTL.AVHZ_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Ave. Height H PRM.DTL.AVH_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Height PRM.DTL.BLZ_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Standard PRM.DTL.DVZ_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Dev.Z Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Standard PRM.DTL.DVH_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Dev.H Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Volume PRM.DTL.VOL_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Convex PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL_F_E Enable 1 x x x 
Volume Enabled N
Disable 0
Filter Concave PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL_F_ Enable 1 x x x 
Volume Enabled EN
Disable 0
Filter Convex Area PRM.DTL.CONV_AR_F_E Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled N
Disable 0
Filter Concave Area PRM.DTL.CONC_AR_F_E Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled N
Disable 0
Filter Valid Pix. PRM.DTL.EPA_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Count Enabled
Disable 0
Filter X Slope PRM.DTL.DPPA_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Y Slope PRM.DTL.DPPB_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Z Intercept PRM.DTL.DPPC_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Plane Angle PRM.DTL.DPPT_F_EN Enable 1 x x x 
Enabled
Disable 0
Filter Area: Upper PRM.DTL.AR_THRES:HL 99999.9999 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Limit

3-214 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Filter Area: Lower PRM.DTL.AR_THRES:LL 0.0100 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
condition Limit
(continued)
Filter Position X: PRM.DTL.X_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Position X: PRM.DTL.X_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Position Y: PRM.DTL.Y_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Position Y: PRM.DTL.Y_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Perimeter: PRM.DTL.CL_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Perimeter: PRM.DTL.CL_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Feret X: PRM.DTL.FX_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Feret X: PRM.DTL.FX_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Feret Y: PRM.DTL.FY_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Feret Y: PRM.DTL.FY_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Roundness: PRM.DTL.CD_THRES:HL 1.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Roundness: PRM.DTL.CD_THRES:LL 0.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter PRM.DTL.RTD_THRES:HL 1.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   x 
Rectangularity:
Upper Limit
Filter PRM.DTL.RTD_THRES:LL 0.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   x 
Rectangularity:
Lower Limit
Filter Major Axis PRM.DTL.T_THRES:HL 180.000 180.000 -179.999 3 3   x 
Angle: Upper Limit
Filter Major Axis PRM.DTL.T_THRES:LL -179.999 180.000 -179.999 3 3   x 
Angle: Lower Limit
Filter Major Axis: PRM.DTL.MAA_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Major Axis: PRM.DTL.MAA_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Minor Axis: PRM.DTL.MIA_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Minor Axis: PRM.DTL.MIA_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Axes Ratio: PRM.DTL.RTO_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Axes Ratio: PRM.DTL.RTO_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Oval Major PRM.DTL.MAA2_THRES:H 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Axis: Upper Limit L
Filter Oval Major PRM.DTL.MAA2_THRES:L 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Axis: Lower Limit L
Filter Oval Minor PRM.DTL.MIA2_THRES:H 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Axis: Upper Limit L

XG-X Comm-US 3-215

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Filter Oval Minor PRM.DTL.MIA2_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
condition Axis: Lower Limit
(continued)
Filter Asp.Ratio: PRM.DTL.RTO2_THRES:H 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit L
Filter Asp.Ratio: PRM.DTL.RTO2_THRES:L 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit L
Filter Long Side: PRM.DTL.MRLS_THRES:H 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit L
Filter Long Side: PRM.DTL.MRLS_THRES:L 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit L
Filter Short Side: PRM.DTL.MRSS_THRES:H 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit L
Filter Short Side: PRM.DTL.MRSS_THRES:L 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit L
Filter Minimum PRM.DTL.MBRAX_THRES: 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Bounding HL
Rectangle (Axes
Ratio): Upper Limit
Filter Minimum PRM.DTL.MBRAX_THRES: 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Bounding LL
Rectangle (Axes
Ratio): Lower Limit
Filter Max. Height PRM.DTL.MXX_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
X: Upper Limit
Filter Max. Height PRM.DTL.MXX_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
X: Lower Limit
Filter Max. Height Y: PRM.DTL.MXY_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Max. Height Y: PRM.DTL.MXY_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Max. Height PRM.DTL.MXZ_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Z: Upper Limit
Filter Max. Height PRM.DTL.MXZ_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Z: Lower Limit
Filter Max. Height PRM.DTL.MXH_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
H: Upper Limit
Filter Max. Height PRM.DTL.MXH_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
H: Lower Limit
Filter Min. Height X: PRM.DTL.MNX_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Min. Height X: PRM.DTL.MNX_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Min. Height Y: PRM.DTL.MNY_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Min. Height Y: PRM.DTL.MNY_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Min. Height Z: PRM.DTL.MNZ_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Min. Height Z: PRM.DTL.MNZ_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Min. Height H: PRM.DTL.MNH_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Filter Min. Height H: PRM.DTL.MNH_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Filter Ave. Height Z: PRM.DTL.AVHZ_THRES:H 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit L

3-216 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Filter Ave. Height Z: PRM.DTL.AVHZ_THRES:L -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
condition Lower Limit L
(continued)
Filter Ave. Height PRM.DTL.AVH_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
H: Upper Limit
Filter Ave. Height PRM.DTL.AVH_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
H: Lower Limit
Filter Height: Upper PRM.DTL.BLZ_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Limit
Filter Height: Lower PRM.DTL.BLZ_THRES:LL -99999.999 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Limit
Filter Standard PRM.DTL.DVZ_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Dev.Z: Upper Limit
Filter Standard PRM.DTL.DVZ_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Dev.Z: Lower Limit
Filter Standard PRM.DTL.DVH_THRES:HL 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Dev.H: Upper Limit
Filter Standard PRM.DTL.DVH_THRES:LL 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Dev.H: Lower Limit
Filter Volume: PRM.DTL.VOL_THRES:HL 9999999.999 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Upper Limit 99 99
Filter Volume: PRM.DTL.VOL_THRES:LL 0.00000 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Lower Limit 99
Filter Convex PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL_TH 9999999.999 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Volume: Upper RES:HL 99 99
Limit
Filter Convex PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL_TH 0.00000 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Volume: Lowerr RES:LL 99
Limit
Filter Concave PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL_TH 9999999.999 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Volume: Upper RES:HL 99 99
Limit
Filter Concave PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL_TH 0.00000 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Volume: Lower RES:LL 99
Limit
Filter Convex Area: PRM.DTL.CONV_AR_THR 99999.9999 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Upper Limit ES:HL
Filter Convex Area: PRM.DTL.CONV_AR_THR 0.0000 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Lower Limit ES:LL
Filter Concave PRM.DTL.CONC_AR_THR 99999.9999 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Area: Upper Limit ES:HL
Filter Concave PRM.DTL.CONC_AR_THR 0.0000 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Area: Lower Limit ES:LL
Filter Valid Pix. PRM.DTL.EPA_THRES:HL 9999999 9999999 0 7 0   x 
Count: Upper Limit
Filter Valid Pix. PRM.DTL.EPA_THRES:LL 0 9999999 0 7 0   x 
Count: Lower Limit
Filter X Slope: PRM.DTL.DPPA_THRES:H 99.999999 99.999999 -99.999999 2 6   x 
Upper Limit L
Filter X Slope: PRM.DTL.DPPA_THRES:L -99.999999 99.999999 -99.999999 2 6   x 
Lower Limit L
Filter Y Slope: PRM.DTL.DPPB_THRES:H 99.999999 99.999999 -99.999999 2 6   x 
Upper Limit L
Filter Y Slope: PRM.DTL.DPPB_THRES:L -99.999999 99.999999 -99.999999 2 6   x 
Lower Limit L
Filter Z Intercept: PRM.DTL.DPPC_THRES:H 999.999 999.999 -999.999 3 3   x 
Upper Limit L

XG-X Comm-US 3-217

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Filter Z Intercept: PRM.DTL.DPPC_THRES:L -999.999 999.999 -999.999 3 3   x 
condition Lower Limit L
(continued)
Filter Plane Angle: PRM.DTL.DPPT_THRES:H 90.000 90.000 -90 2 3   x 
Upper Limit L
Filter Plane Angle: PRM.DTL.DPPT_THRES:L -90.000 90.000 -90 2 3   x 
Lower Limit L
Detection Count PRM.DTL.MXN 3 9999 1 4 0 x x x 
Detection Order PRM.DTL.LSF From Upper 1001 x x x 
Left
(Rightward)
From Upper 1002
Left
(Downward)
From Upper 1003
Right
(Leftward)
From Upper 1004
Right
(Downward)
From Lower 1005
Left
(Rightward)
From Lower 1006
Left
(Upward)
From Lower 1007
Right
(Leftward)
From Lower 1008
Right
(Upward)
Clockwise 1009

Countercloc 1010
kwise
Height 59

Volume 48

Area 0

Feret X 5

Feret Y 6

Long Side 15

Short Side 16

Rectangle 64
Axes Ratio
Major Axis 9

Minor Axis 10

Axes Ratio 11

Oval Maj. 12
Axis
Oval Min. 13
Axis
Asp. Ratio 14

Perimeter 4

3-218 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Detection Order PRM.DTL.LSF Roundness 7 x x x 
condition (continued)
(continued) Rectangularity 65
Center of 2
Gravity X
Center of 3
Gravity Y
Major Axis 8
Angle
X Slope 55

Y Slope 56

Z Intercept 57

Valid Pix. 54
Count
Max. Height 36
X
Max. Height 37
Y
Max. Height 38
Z
Max. Height 39
H
Ave. Height 44
Z
Ave. Height 45
H
Min. Height 40
X
Min. Height 41
Y
Min. Height 42
Z
Min. Height 43
H
Standard 46
Dev. Z
Standard 47
Dev. H
Plane Angle 53

Concave 50
Volume
Convex 49
Volume
Concave 52
Area
Convex Area 51

Detection Order PRM.DTL.LSD Ascending 0   x 

Sort Order
Descending 1
Grouping Method PRM.DTL.LGTYP Specified 2 x x x 
Value
Feret (Long) 0
Feret (XY) 1
Grouping Range PRM.DTL.LGLEN 300 9999 1 4 0   x 

XG-X Comm-US 3-219

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Detection Fill Holes PRM.DTL.FILL ON 1   x 
condition
(continued) OFF 0
Active Border PRM.DTL.CAN ON 1   x 
OFF 0
Base Angle PRM.DTL.STA 0 359.999 0.000 3 3   x 
Major Axis Angle PRM.DTL.EXT_AX 180° 0   x 
Range
360° 1
Primary Target PRM.DTL.LB Specified 1 x x x 
Specification
All 0
Primary Target PRM.DTL.LLB 0 9998 0 4 0 x x x 
Plane Angle PRM.DTL.DPPT_DR Maximum 1 x x x 
Direction Slope
Major Axis 2
Direction
Specified 3
Value
Plane Angle PRM.DTL.DPPT_T 0 180.000 -180.000 3 3   x 
Direction: Angle
2D Image PRM.DTL.DC Black 0   x 
Reference:
Detection Color White 255

2D Image PRM.DTL.BIMG NULL 9999999 0 x x x 

Reference: Result
Image
Zero Plane Detection PRM.DTL.HRP_TYPE Zero Plane 0 x x x 
Specification Reference Specification
Subtraction 1
Settings
Subtraction Background Offset PRM.TDSUB.MDRFC -4.096 999.999 -999.999 3 3 x x x 
Settings (mm) (XT-024)/
-8.192
(XT-060)
Set by Direction PRM.TDSUB.MGDIR ON 1 x x x 
OFF 0
XY Direction PRM.TDSUB.XYMG 1.000 99.999 0.000 2 3 x x x 
Tolerance Range
X Direction PRM.TDSUB.XMG 0.200 99.999 0.000 2 3 x x x 
Tolerance Range
Y Direction PRM.TDSUB.YMG 0.200 99.999 0.000 2 3 x x x 
Tolerance Range
Z Direction PRM.TDSUB.ZMG 0.200 99.999 0.000 2 3 x x x 
Tolerance Range
Scan Direction PRM.TDSUB.SCDR Concave/ 0 x x x 
Convex
Concave 1
Convex 2
X Slope PRM.TDSUB.MDRFA 0.000000 1.000000 -1.000000 1 6 x x x 
Y Slope PRM.TDSUB.MDRFB 0.000000 1.000000 -1.000000 1 6 x x x 
X Slope/Y Slope/ PRM.TDSUB.MDRFABC 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 3 6 x x x 
Background Offset
(mm)

3-220 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Subtraction Make Invalid Pixels PRM.TDSUB.FIPWLL ON 1 x x x 
Settings Detection Targets
(continued) OFF 0
Make Only Pixels PRM.TDSUB.USIPC ON 1 x x x 
Valid During
Capture Detection OFF 0
Targets
Do Not Measure PRM.TDSUB.SFUL ON 1 x x x 
From Spec. Hgt.
Onwards OFF 0

Offset From PRM.TDSUB.OFFB 10.000 999.999 0.000 3 3 x x x 

Background Plane
(mm)
Emphasize PRM.TDSUB.THEMPH ON 1 x x x 
Projections
OFF 0
Segment Size PRM.TDSUB.SGSZ 2 16 1 2 0 x x x 
Tilt Correction PRM.TDSUB.ICM Normal 0 x x x 
None 1
High 2
Precision
Tilt Calculation PRM.TDSUB.SHP Same as 0 x x x 
Region Insp. Region
Specified 1
With a
Rectangle
Upper Left XY PRM.TDSUB.LUXY 5 0 x x x 
Upper Left X PRM.TDSUB.LUX 160 16383 0 5 0 x x x 
Upper Left Y PRM.TDSUB.LUY 160 16383 0 5 0 x x x 
Lower Right PRM.TDSUB.RDXY 5 0 x x x 
XY
Lower Right X PRM.TDSUB.RDX 360 16383 0 5 0 x x x 
Lower Right Y PRM.TDSUB.RDY 320 16383 0 5 0 x x x 
Correction PRM.TDSUB.SRAC Low 0 - - x x x 
Accuracy
Normal 1
High 2
Expand Correction PRM.TDSUB.ZPAE ON 1 x x x 
Range
OFF 0
Min. Match% PRM.TDSUB.DLV 50.000 0.000 99.999 2 3 x x x 
Detailed Origin XY PRM.DTL.OGXY 4 3 x x x 
Settings
Origin X PRM.DTL.OGX 0 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3 x x x 
Origin Y PRM.DTL.OGY 0 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3 x x x 
Height Direction PRM.DTL.HOU mm 0 x x x 
Unit
μm 1
Judgment Number of Labels: PRM.DTL.N:HL - 9999 0 4 0   x 
Conditions Upper Limit
Number of Labels: PRM.DTL.N:LL - 9999 0 4 0   x 
Lower Limit
Total Area: Upper PRM.DTL.TAR:HL - 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Limit
Total Area: Lower PRM.DTL.TAR:LL - 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-221

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Judgment Total Volume: PRM.DTL.TVOL:HL - 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Conditions Upper Limit 99
(continued)
Total Volume: PRM.DTL.TVOL:LL - 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Lower Limit 99
Area: Upper Limit PRM.DTL.AR:HL - 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Area: Lower Limit PRM.DTL.AR:LL - 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Position X: Upper PRM.DTL.X:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Limit
Position X:: Lower PRM.DTL.X:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Limit
Position Y: Upper PRM.DTL.Y:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Limit
Position Y: Lower PRM.DTL.Y:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Limit
Perimeter: Upper PRM.DTL.CL:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Perimeter: Lower PRM.DTL.CL:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Feret X: Upper PRM.DTL.FX:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Feret X: Lower Limit PRM.DTL.FX:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Feret Y: Upper Limit PRM.DTL.FY:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Feret Y: Lower Limit PRM.DTL.FY:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Roundness: Upper PRM.DTL.CD:HL - 1.000 0.000 1 3   x 
Limit
Roundness: Lower PRM.DTL.CD:LL - 1.000 0.000 1 3   x 
Limit
Rectangularity: PRM.DTL.RTD:HL - 1.000 0.000 1 3   x 
Upper Limit
Rectangularity: PRM.DTL.RTD:LL - 1.000 0.000 1 3   x 
Lower Limit
Major Axis Angle: PRM.DTL.T:HL - 180.000 -179.999 3 3   x 
Upper Limit
Major Axis Angle: PRM.DTL.T:LL - 180.000 -179.999 3 3   x 
Lower Limit
Major Axis: Upper PRM.DTL.MAA:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Major Axis: Lower PRM.DTL.MAA:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Minor Axis: Upper PRM.DTL.MIA:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Minor Axis: Lower PRM.DTL.MIA:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Axes Ratio: Upper PRM.DTL.RTO:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Axes Ratio: Lower PRM.DTL.RTO:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Oval Maj. Axis: PRM.DTL.MAA2:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Oval Maj. Axis: PRM.DTL.MAA2:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Oval Min. Axis: PRM.DTL.MIA2:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit

3-222 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Judgment Oval Min. Axis: PRM.DTL.MIA2:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Conditions Lower Limit
(continued)
Asp. Ratio: Upper PRM.DTL.RTO2:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Asp. Ratio: Lower PRM.DTL.RTO2:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Long Side: Upper PRM.DTL.MRLS:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Long Side: Lower PRM.DTL.MRLS:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Short Side: Upper PRM.DTL.MRSS:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Short Side: Lower PRM.DTL.MRSS:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Limit
Rectangle Axes PRM.DTL.MBRAX:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Ratio: Upper Limit
Rectangle Axes PRM.DTL.MBRAX:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Ratio: Lower Limit
Max. Height X: PRM.DTL.MXX:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Max. Height X: PRM.DTL.MXX:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Max. Height Y: PRM.DTL.MXY:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Max. Height Y: PRM.DTL.MXY:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Max. Height Z: PRM.DTL.MXZ:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Max. Height Z: PRM.DTL.MXZ:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Max. Height H: PRM.DTL.MXH:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Max. Height H: PRM.DTL.MXH:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Min. Height X: PRM.DTL.MNX:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Min. Height X: PRM.DTL.MNX:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Min. Height Y: PRM.DTL.MNY:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Min. Height Y: PRM.DTL.MNY:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Min. Height Z: PRM.DTL.MNZ:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Min. Height Z: PRM.DTL.MNZ:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Min. Height H: PRM.DTL.MNH:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Min. Height H: PRM.DTL.MNH:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Ave. Height Z: PRM.DTL.AVHZ:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Ave. Height Z: PRM.DTL.AVHZ:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Ave. Height H: PRM.DTL.AVH:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Upper Limit

XG-X Comm-US 3-223

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Judgment Ave. Height H: PRM.DTL.AVH:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Conditions Lower Limit
(continued)
Height: Upper Limit PRM.DTL.BLZ:HL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Height: Lower Limit PRM.DTL.BLZ:LL - 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3   x 
Standard Dev. Z: PRM.DTL.DVZ:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Standard Dev. Z: PRM.DTL.DVZ:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Standard Dev. H: PRM.DTL.DVH:HL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Upper Limit
Standard Dev. H: PRM.DTL.DVH:LL - 99999.999 0.000 5 3   x 
Lower Limit
Volume: Upper PRM.DTL.VOL:HL - 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Limit 99
Volume: Lower PRM.DTL.VOL:LL - 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Limit 99
Convex Volume: PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:HL - 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Upper Limit 99
Convex Volume: PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:LL - 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Lower Limit 99
Concave Volume: PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:HL - 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Upper Limit 99
Concave Volume: PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:LL - 9999999.999 0.00000 7 5   x 
Lower Limit 99
Convex Area: PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:HL - 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Upper Limit
Convex Area: PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:LL - 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Lower Limit
Concave Area: PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:HL - 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Upper Limit
Concave Area: PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:LL - 99999.9999 0.0000 5 4   x 
Lower Limit
Valid Pix. Count: PRM.DTL.EPA:HL - 9999999 0 7 0   x 
Upper Limit
Valid Pix. Count: PRM.DTL.EPA:LL - 9999999 0 7 0   x 
Lower Limit
X Slope: Upper PRM.DTL.DPPA:HL - 99.999999 -99.999999 2 6   x 
Limit
X Slope: Lower PRM.DTL.DPPA:LL - 99.999999 -99.999999 2 6   x 
Limit
Y Slope: Upper PRM.DTL.DPPB:HL - 99.999999 -99.999999 2 6   x 
Limit
Y Slope: Lower PRM.DTL.DPPB:LL - 99.999999 -99.999999 2 6   x 
Limit
Z Intercept: Upper PRM.DTL.DPPC:HL - 999.999 -999.999 3 3   x 
Limit
Z Intercept: Lower PRM.DTL.DPPC:LL - 999.999 -999.999 3 3   x 
Limit
Plane Angle: Upper PRM.DTL.DPPT:HL - 90.000 -90.000 2 3   x 
Limit
Plane Angle: Lower PRM.DTL.DPPT:LL - 90.000 -90.000 2 3   x 
Limit

3-224 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.BLZ:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Height 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.BLZ:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.BLZ:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.BLZ:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.BLZ:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.BLZ:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.BLZ:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.BLZ:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.VOL:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Volume 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.VOL:CRPR1 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.VOL:CRPO1 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.VOL:CRPR2 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.VOL:CRPO2 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.VOL:CRCO 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.VOL:CRCA 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.VOL:CRCB 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.AR:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Area 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.AR:CRPR1 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.AR:CRPO1 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.AR:CRPR2 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.AR:CRPO2 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.AR:CRCO 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset

XG-X Comm-US 3-225

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction PRM.DTL.AR:CRCA 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Value Coefficient:
Correction: Coefficient A
Area
(continued) Correction PRM.DTL.AR:CRCB 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.FX:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Feret X 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.FX:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.FX:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.FX:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.FX:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.FX:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.FX:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.FX:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.FY:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Feret Y 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.FY:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.FY:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.FY:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.FY:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.FY:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.FY:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.FY:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MRLS:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Long Side 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MRLS:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MRLS:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MRLS:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction

3-226 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MRLS:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Long Side Correction PRM.DTL.MRLS:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
(continued) Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MRLS:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MRLS:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MRSS:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Short Side 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MRSS:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MRSS:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MRSS:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MRSS:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MRSS:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MRSS:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MRSS:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MAA:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Major Axis 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MAA:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MAA:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MAA:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MAA:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MAA:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MAA:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MAA:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MIA:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Minor Axis 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MIA:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction

XG-X Comm-US 3-227

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MIA:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Minor Axis Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MIA:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
(continued) Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MIA:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MIA:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MIA:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MIA:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MAA2:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Equivalent 2-point 1
Oval Correction
(Major Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MAA2:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Axis) Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MAA2:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MAA2:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MAA2:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MAA2:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MAA2:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MAA2:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MIA2:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Equivalent 2-point 1
Oval Correction
(Minor Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MIA2:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Axis) Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MIA2:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MIA2:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MIA2:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MIA2:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MIA2:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MIA2:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B

3-228 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.CL:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Perimeter 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.CL:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.CL:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.CL:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.CL:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.CL:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.CL:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.CL:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.X:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Position X 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.X:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.X:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.X:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.X:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.X:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.X:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.X:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.Y:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Position Y 2-point 1
Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.Y:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.Y:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.Y:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.Y:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.Y:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset

XG-X Comm-US 3-229

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction PRM.DTL.Y:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Value Coefficient:
Correction: Coefficient A
Position Y
(continued) Correction PRM.DTL.Y:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MXX:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Max. 2-point 1
Height X Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MXX:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MXX:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MXX:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MXX:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MXX:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MXX:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MXX:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MXY:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Max. 2-point 1
Height Y Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MXY:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MXY:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MXY:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MXY:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MXY:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MXY:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MXY:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MXZ:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Max. 2-point 1
Height Z Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MXZ:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MXZ:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MXZ:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction

3-230 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MXZ:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Max. Correction PRM.DTL.MXZ:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Height Z Coefficient: Offset
(continued) Correction PRM.DTL.MXZ:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MXZ:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MXH:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Max. 2-point 1
Height H Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MXH:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MXH:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MXH:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MXH:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MXH:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MXH:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MXH:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.AVHZ:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Ave. 2-point 1
Height Z Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.AVHZ:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.AVHZ:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.AVHZ:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.AVHZ:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.AVHZ:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.AVHZ:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.AVHZ:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.AVH:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Ave. 2-point 1
Height H Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.AVH:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction

XG-X Comm-US 3-231

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.AVH:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Ave. Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.AVH:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Height H Correction
(continued) Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.AVH:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.AVH:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.AVH:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.AVH:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MNX:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Min. 2-point 1
Height X Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MNX:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MNX:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MNX:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MNX:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MNX:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MNX:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MNX:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MNY:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Min. 2-point 1
Height Y Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MNY:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MNY:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MNY:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MNY:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MNY:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MNY:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MNY:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B

3-232 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MNZ:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Min. 2-point 1
Height Z Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MNZ:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MNZ:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MNZ:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MNZ:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MNZ:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MNZ:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MNZ:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.MNH:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Min. 2-point 1
Height H Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.MNH:CRPR1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.MNH:CRPO1 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.MNH:CRPR2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.MNH:CRPO2 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.MNH:CRCO 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.MNH:CRCA 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.MNH:CRCB 0 99999.999 -99999.999 5 3 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Concave 2-point 1
Volume Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:CRPR1 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:CRPO1 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:CRPR2 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:CRPO2 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:CRCO 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset

XG-X Comm-US 3-233

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:CRCA 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Value Coefficient:
Correction: Coefficient A
Concave
Volume Correction PRM.DTL.CONC_VOL:CRCB 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
(continued) Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Convex 2-point 1
Volume Correction

Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:CRPR1 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 

Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:CRPO1 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:CRPR2 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:CRPO2 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:CRCO 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:CRCA 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.CONV_VOL:CRCB 0 9999999.99999 -9999999.99999 7 5 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Concave 2-point 1
Area Correction
Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:CRPR1 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:CRPO1 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:CRPR2 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:CRPO2 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Correction
Correction PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:CRCO 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Coefficient: Offset
Correction PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:CRCA 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.CONC_AR:CRCB 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B
Measured Correction Method PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:CRMD 1-point 0 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Convex 2-point 1
Area Correction

Correction 1 Before PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:CRPR1 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 

Correction
Correction 1 After PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:CRPO1 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Correction
Correction 2 Before PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:CRPR2 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Correction

3-234 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Measured Correction 2 After PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:CRPO2 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Value Correction
Correction:
Convex Correction PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:CRCO 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Area Coefficient: Offset
(continued) Correction PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:CRCA 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient A
Correction PRM.DTL.CONV_AR:CRCB 0 99999.9999 -99999.9999 5 4 x x x 
Coefficient:
Coefficient B

XG-X Comm-US 3-235

List of setting parameters

Branch Unit

Referencing
Selection

Numerical

format
integer digits value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Branch Reference value PRM.DTL.EVAL 0.0 999999999.999 -999999999.999 9 3    
setting
Forced branch PRM.DTL.FSO ON (Loop) 3 X X X 
execution
ON (Fixed) 2
ON (Fixed 1
During Re-
test Only)
OFF 0
Forced branch PRM.DTL.FSN 1 64 1 2 0   X 
Number of PRM.DTL.BN 2 64 2 2 0 X X X 
branches
Condition PRM.DTL.CASE[0] 100000000.000 999999999.999 -999999999.999 9 3    

Join Unit
There are no setting parameters specific to the Join unit.

Loop Unit

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value

Condition Number of loops PRM.DTL.TMS 1 9999999 0 7 0   X 

setting to process

Loop End Unit

There are no setting parameters specific to the Loop End unit.

Break Unit
There are no setting parameters specific to the Break unit.

Start Unit
The are no setting parameters specific to the Start unit.

3-236 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

End Unit
There are no setting parameters specific to the End unit.

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Calculation Unit

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value

Calculation Calculation script PRM.DTL.MTX Character string up to 5000 bytes    

setting
Calculation PRM.DTL.ANS:HL - 9999999.999 -9999999.999 7 3   X 
result: Upper limit
Calculation PRM.DTL.ANS:LL - 9999999.999 -9999999.999 7 3   X 
result: Lower limit
Timeout period PRM.DTL.MTO 1.0 600.0 1.0 3 1 X X X 

Group Judgment Unit (Start)

There are no setting parameters specific to the Group Judgment Unit (Start).

Group Judgment Unit (End)

There are no setting parameters specific to the Group Judgment Unit (END).

XG-X Comm-US 3-237

List of setting parameters

Image Operation Unit

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Image selection PRM.IMGS1.URIMG Registered 1 X X X 
image 1: image
Image
setting Current 0
image
Use image array PRM.IMGS1.UAIMG Enable 1 X X X 
Disable 0
No. of images PRM.IMGS1.IMGN 2 32 2 2 0 X X X 
Camera No. PRM.IMGS1.CNO 1 1 X X X 
2 2
3 3
4 4
Registered image No. PRM.IMGS1.RIMG 0 999 0 3 0 X X X 
Assign variable for PRM.IMGS1.UVR Enable 1 X X X 
registered image No.
Disable 0
Numerical variable PRM.IMGS1.RIREF   X 
Process variable only PRM.IMGS1.UPEN Enable 1 X X X 
when changing
programs Disable 0

Registered image type PRM.IMGS1.RIMG_TYP Gray 0 X X X 

Color 1
MultiSpectrum 2
Height 3
Use an image captured PRM.IMGS1.MSEXT_EN Enable 1 X X X 
in MultiSpectrum mode Disable 0
MultiSpectrum image PRM.IMGS1.MSEXT_IMG
setting
Operation Image combination PRM.DTL.USIMG Source 1 X X X 
setting image 1,
Source
image 2
Source 0
Image 1
Operation type PRM.DTL.OPTYP None 0 X X X 
Add 55
Subtract 56
Absolute 57
Difference
Average 60
Multiply 67
(with
normalization)
Multiply 53
(without
normalization)
Maximum 58
Minimum 59
AND 61
OR 63
XOR 65
NAND 62
NOR 64
XNOR 66

3-238 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Operation Image array operation PRM.DTL.CPSM None 0 X X X 
setting
(continued) Add 55
Average 60
Multiply 67
(Normalized)
Multiply 53
Maximum 58
Minimum 59
AND 61
OR 63
XOR 65
NAND 62
NOR 64
XNOR 66
Gain PRM.DTL.AOGN 1.000 64.000 0.000 2 3   X 
Shift PRM.DTL.AOSH 0 510 -510 3 0   X 
Result Output image PRM.DTL.PAIF No position 0 X X X 
image coordinates axis adjustment
setting
Position 1
adjusted
(Source
image 1)
Position 2
adjusted
(Source
image 2)
Outside image region PRM.DTL.BPTYP Fill 0   X 
Extend 1
image
Fill intensity PRM.DTL.OVAL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Source Image selection PRM.IMGS2.URIMG Registered 1 X X X 
image 2: image
Image
setting Current 0
image
Use image array PRM.IMGS2.UAIMG Enable 1 X X X 
Disable 0
No. of images PRM.IMGS2.IMGN 2 32 2 2 0 X X X 
Camera No. PRM.IMGS2.CNO 1 1 X X X 
2 2
3 3
4 4
Registered image No. PRM.IMGS2.RIMG 0 999 0 3 0 X X X 
Assign variable for PRM.IMGS2.UVR Enable 1 X X X 
registered image No.
Disable 0
Numerical variable PRM.IMGS2.RIREF   X 
Process variable only PRM.IMGS2.UPEN Enable 1 X X X 
when changing
programs Disable 0

Registered image type PRM.IMGS2.RIMG_TYP Gray 0 X X X 

Color 1
MultiSpectrum 2
Height 3
Use an image captured PRM.IMGS2.MSEXT_EN Enable 1 X X X 
in MultiSpectrum mode Disable 0
MultiSpectrum image PRM.IMGS2.MSEXT_IMG
setting

XG-X Comm-US 3-239

List of setting parameters

Image Conversion Setting (Image Operation Unit: Source Image 1)

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Position Adjustment PRM.TRNS1.PUID - 999 0 4 0 X X X 
image 1: ID
Common to
all
conversion
types
Source Conversion type PRM.TRNS1[0].TTYP None 0 X X X 
image 1:
Conversion 0 Add 32
Subtract 33
Absolute 34
Difference
Multiply 28
Rotate / 43
Translate
Zoom 52
Trapezoid 17
correction
Pixel value 49
conversion
Blob 50
NOT 35
AND 36
OR 38
XOR 40
NAND 37
NOR 39
XNOR 41
Right bit shift 30
Left bit shift 31
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Add
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Subtract
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Absolute
Difference
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMD 1.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Multiply
Source Rotation center XY PRM.TRNS1[0].AFCXY 5 0  X X 
image 1:
Conversion Rotation center X PRM.TRNS1[0].AFCX 0 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
0: Rotation center Y PRM.TRNS1[0].AFCY 0 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Rotate /
Translate Rotation angle PRM.TRNS1[0].AFT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Translation shift XY PRM.TRNS1[0].AFSXY 4 3  X X 
Translation shift X PRM.TRNS1[0].AFSX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3   X 
Translation shift Y PRM.TRNS1[0].AFSY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3   X 
Use interpolation PRM.TRNS1[0].AFIP Enable 1 X X X 
Disable 0
Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 

3-240 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Zoom ratio X PRM.TRNS1[0].ZMMGX 100 2500 16 4 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Zoom ratio Y PRM.TRNS1[0].ZMMGY 100 2500 16 4 0   X 
0: Zoom Zoom center XY PRM.TRNS1[0].ZMCXY 4 0  X X 
Zoom center X PRM.TRNS1[0].ZMCX 0 9600 -9600 4 0   X 
Zoom center Y PRM.TRNS1[0].ZMCY 0 7200 -7200 4 0   X 
Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Source Shape before PRM.TRNS1[0].SRCSHP X X X 
image 1: adjustment
Conversion
0: Trapezoid Enable region PRM.TRNS1[0].SRGNEN X X X 
correction When the shape before adjustment is "User set"
Point XY PRM.TRNS1[0].SRCPXY[*] 5 0  X X 
Point X PRM.TRNS1[0].SRCPX[*] 331 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Point Y PRM.TRNS1[0].SRCPY[*] 337 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Shape after PRM.TRNS1[0].DSTSHP X X X 
adjustment
Enable region PRM.TRNS1[0].DRGNEN X X X 
When the shape after adjustment is "Rectangle"
Upper left XY PRM.TRNS1[0].DSTLUXY 5 0  X X 
Upper left X PRM.TRNS1[0].DSTLUX 160 16383 0 5 0   X 
Upper left Y PRM.TRNS1[0].DSTLUY 160 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower right XY PRM.TRNS1[0].DSTRDXY 5 0  X X 
Lower right X PRM.TRNS1[0].DSTRDX 360 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower right Y PRM.TRNS1[0].DSTRDY 320 16383 0 5 0   X 
When the shape after adjustment is "User set"
Point XY PRM.TRNS1[0].DSTPXY[*] 5 0  X X 
Point X PRM.TRNS1[0].DSTPX[*] 331 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Point Y PRM.TRNS1[0].DSTPY[*] 337 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Use interpolation PRM.TRNS1[0].ENITP Enable 1 X X X 
Disable 0
Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Source Target pixel PRM.TRNS1[0].SPV:HL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 1: maximum value
Conversion
0: Target pixel PRM.TRNS1[0].SPV:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Pixel Value minimum value
Conversion Conversion range PRM.TRNS1[0].INVT Within the 0 X X X 
limits
Beyond the 1
limits
Pixel value after PRM.TRNS1[0].DPV 0 255 0 3 0   X 
conversion
Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-241

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Detect PRM.TRNS1[0].DC White 255   X 
image 1:
Conversion Black 0
0: Blob Count PRM.TRNS1[0].DBN 30 9999 1 4 0   X 
Fill holes PRM.TRNS1[0].FILL OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Active border PRM.TRNS1[0].CAN OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Primary target PRM.TRNS1[0].LBS All 0 X X X 
specification
Specified 1
Primary target PRM.TRNS1[0].LLBS 0 9998 0 4 0   X 
Detection order PRM.TRNS1[0].LOD Y>X: Ascend 5   X 
X>Y: Ascend 6
X:Ascend 1
X:Descend 2
Y:Ascend 3
Y:Descend 4
Area:Ascend 14
Area:Descend 13
Roundness: 16
Ascend
Roundness: 15
Descend
Clockwise 9
Counterclockwise 10
Starting angle PRM.TRNS1[0].STA 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Pixel value after PRM.TRNS1[0].CODC 255 255 0 3 0   X 
conversion:
Detected color
Pixel value after PRM.TRNS1[0].COBC 0 255 0 3 0   X 
conversion:
Background color
Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Area filter PRM.TRNS1[0].ARI_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Roundness filter PRM.TRNS1[0].CIR_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Major axis filter PRM.TRNS1[0].MAA_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Axes ratio filter PRM.TRNS1[0].RTO_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Distributed oval filter PRM.TRNS1[0].MAA2_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Aspect ratio filter PRM.TRNS1[0].RTO2_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Area filter: Maximum PRM.TRNS1[0].ARI_THRE 99999999 99999999 0 8 0   X 
S:HL
Area filter: Minimum PRM.TRNS1[0].ARI_THRE 100 99999999 0 8 0   X 
S:LL
Roundness filter: PRM.TRNS1[0].CIR_THRE 1.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Maximum S:HL
Roundness filter: PRM.TRNS1[0].CIR_THRE 0.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Minimum S:LL
Major axis filter: PRM.TRNS1[0].MAA_THR 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum ES:HL
Major axis filter: PRM.TRNS1[0].MAA_THR 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum ES:LL
Axes ratio filter: PRM.TRNS1[0].RTO_THR 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum ES:HL

3-242 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Axes ratio filter: PRM.TRNS1[0].RTO_THR 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
image 1: Minimum ES:LL
Conversion
0: Blob Distributed oval PRM.TRNS1[0].MAA2_ 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
(continued) filter: THRES:HL
Maximum
Distributed oval PRM.TRNS1[0].MAA2_ 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter: THRES:LL
Minimum
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.TRNS1[0].RTO2_ 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum THRES:HL
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.TRNS1[0].RTO2_ 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum THRES:LL
Source Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion
0: NOT
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMI 255 255 0 3 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: AND
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: OR
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: XOR
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMI 255 255 0 3 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: NAND
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: NOR
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMI 255 255 0 3 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: XNOR
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMI 0 8 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Right bit
shift
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS1[0].TPRMI 0 8 0 1 0   X 
image 1:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS1[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Left bit
shift
Source PRM.TRNS1[1].***
image 1:
Conversion 1
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

Source PRM.TRNS1[12].***
image 1:
Conversion
12

XG-X Comm-US 3-243

List of setting parameters

Image Conversion Setting (Image Operation Unit: Source Image 2)

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Position Adjustment PRM.TRNS2.PUID - 999 0 4 0 X X X 
image 2: ID
Common to
all
conversion
types
Source Conversion type PRM.TRNS2[0].TTYP None 0 X X X 
image 2:
Conversion 0 Add 32
Subtract 33
Absolute 34
Difference
Multiply 28
Rotate / 43
Translate
Zoom 52
Trapezoid 17
correction
Pixel value 49
conversion
Blob 50
NOT 35
AND 36
OR 38
XOR 40
NAND 37
NOR 39
XNOR 41
Right bit shift 30
Left bit shift 31
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Add
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Subtract
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Absolute
Difference
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMD 1.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Multiply
Source Rotation center XY PRM.TRNS2[0].AFCXY 5 0  X X 
image 2:
Conversion Rotation center X PRM.TRNS2[0].AFCX 0 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
0: Rotation center Y PRM.TRNS2[0].AFCY 0 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Rotate /
Translate Rotation angle PRM.TRNS2[0].AFT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Translation shift XY PRM.TRNS2[0].AFSXY 4 3  X X 
Translation shift X PRM.TRNS2[0].AFSX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3   X 
Translation shift Y PRM.TRNS2[0].AFSY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3   X 
Use interpolation PRM.TRNS2[0].AFIP Enable 1 X X X 
Disable 0
Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 

3-244 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Zoom ratio X PRM.TRNS2[0].ZMMGX 100 2500 16 4 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Zoom ratio Y PRM.TRNS2[0].ZMMGY 100 2500 16 4 0   X 
0: Zoom Zoom center XY PRM.TRNS2[0].ZMCXY 4 0  X X 
Zoom center X PRM.TRNS2[0].ZMCX 0 9600 -9600 4 0   X 
Zoom center Y PRM.TRNS2[0].ZMCY 0 7200 -7200 4 0   X 
Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Source Shape before PRM.TRNS2[0].SRCSHP X X X 
image 2: adjustment
Conversion
0: Trapezoid Enable region PRM.TRNS2[0].SRGNEN X X X 
correction When the shape before adjustment is "User set"
Point XY PRM.TRNS2[0].SRCPXY[*] 5 0  X X 
Point X PRM.TRNS2[0].SRCPX[*] 331 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Point Y PRM.TRNS2[0].SRCPY[*] 337 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Shape after PRM.TRNS2[0].DSTSHP X X X 
adjustment
Enable region PRM.TRNS2[0].DRGNEN X X X 
When the shape after adjustment is "Rectangle"
Upper left XY PRM.TRNS2[0].DSTLUXY 5 0  X X 
Upper left X PRM.TRNS2[0].DSTLUX 160 16383 0 5 0   X 
Upper left Y PRM.TRNS2[0].DSTLUY 160 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower right XY PRM.TRNS2[0].DSTRDXY 5 0  X X 
Lower right X PRM.TRNS2[0].DSTRDX 360 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower right Y PRM.TRNS2[0].DSTRDY 320 16383 0 5 0   X 
When the shape after adjustment is "User set"
Point XY PRM.TRNS2[0].DSTPXY[*] 5 0  X X 
Point X PRM.TRNS2[0].DSTPX[*] 331 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Point Y PRM.TRNS2[0].DSTPY[*] 337 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Use interpolation PRM.TRNS2[0].ENITP Enable 1 X X X 
Disable 0
Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Source Target pixel PRM.TRNS2[0].SPV:HL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 2: maximum value
Conversion
0: Target pixel PRM.TRNS2[0].SPV:LL 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Pixel value minimum value
conversion Conversion range PRM.TRNS2[0].INVT Within the 0 X X X 
limits
Beyond the 1
limits
Pixel value after PRM.TRNS2[0].DPV 0 255 0 3 0   X 
conversion
Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-245

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Detect PRM.TRNS2[0].DC White 255   X 
image 2:
Conversion Black 0
0: Blob Count PRM.TRNS2[0].DBN 30 9999 1 4 0   X 
Fill holes PRM.TRNS2[0].FILL OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Active Border PRM.TRNS2[0].CAN OFF 0   X 
ON 1
Primary target PRM.TRNS2[0].LBS All 0 X X X 
specification
Specified 1
Primary target PRM.TRNS2[0].LLBS 0 9998 0 4 0   X 
Detection order PRM.TRNS2[0].LOD Y>X: Ascend 5   X 
X>Y: Ascend 6
X:Ascend 1
X:Descend 2
Y:Ascend 3
Y:Descend 4
Area:Ascend 14
Area:Descend 13
Roundness: 16
Ascend
Roundness: 15
Descend
Clockwise 9
Counterclockwise 10
Starting angle PRM.TRNS2[0].STA 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Pixel value after PRM.TRNS2[0].CODC 255 255 0 3 0   X 
conversion:
Detected color
Pixel value after PRM.TRNS2[0].COBC 0 255 0 3 0   X 
conversion:
Background color
Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
Area filter PRM.TRNS2[0].ARI_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Roundness filter PRM.TRNS2[0].CIR_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Major axis filter PRM.TRNS2[0].MAA_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Axes ratio filter PRM.TRNS2[0].RTO_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Distributed oval filter PRM.TRNS2[0].MAA2_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Aspect ratio filter PRM.TRNS2[0].RTO2_EN Disable 0   X 
Enable 1
Area filter: Maximum PRM.TRNS2[0].ARI_THRE 99999999 99999999 0 8 0   X 
S:HL
Area filter: Minimum PRM.TRNS2[0].ARI_THRE 100 99999999 0 8 0   X 
S:LL
Roundness filter: PRM.TRNS2[0].CIR_THRE 1.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Maximum S:HL
Roundness filter: PRM.TRNS2[0].CIR_THRE 0.000 1.000 0.000 1 3   X 
Minimum S:LL
Major axis filter: PRM.TRNS2[0].MAA_THR 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum ES:HL

3-246 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Source Major axis filter: PRM.TRNS2[0].MAA_THR 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
image 2: Minimum ES:LL
Conversion
0: Blob Axes ratio filter: PRM.TRNS2[0].RTO_THR 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
(continued) Maximum ES:HL
Axis ratio filter: PRM.TRNS2[0].RTO_THR 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum ES:LL
Distributed oval PRM.TRNS2[0].MAA2_ 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter: Maximum THRES:HL
Distributed oval PRM.TRNS2[0].MAA2_ 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
filter: Minimum THRES:LL
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.TRNS2[0].RTO2_ 99999.999 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Maximum THRES:HL
Aspect ratio filter: PRM.TRNS2[0].RTO2_ 0.000 99999.999 0.000 5 3   X 
Minimum THRES:LL
Source Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion
0: NOT
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMI 255 255 0 3 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: AND
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: OR
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: XOR
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMI 255 255 0 3 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: NAND
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMI 0 255 0 3 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: NOR
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMI 255 255 0 3 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: XNOR
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMI 0 8 0 1 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Right bit
shift
Source Parameter PRM.TRNS2[0].TPRMI 0 8 0 1 0   X 
image 2:
Conversion Count PRM.TRNS2[0].TTMS 1 1 0 1 0   X 
0: Left bit
shift
Source PRM.TRNS2[1].***
image 2:
Conversion 1
…

Source PRM.TRNS2[12].***
image 2:
Conversion
12

XG-X Comm-US 3-247

List of setting parameters

Robot Coordinate Conversion Unit

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
General Refer to Common
settings Parameter
Image Refer to Image settings
Settings Parameter
Select Calibration Data PRM.DTL.RBC_SEL Choose from List 0 1 0 X X X 
Calibration Specification Method Use Variable 1
Data
Calibration Data Scope PRM.DTL.RBC_GLB 1 0 X X X 
Calibration Data No. PRM.DTL.RBC_RNO -1 -1 3 0 X X X 
Calibration Data Name PRM.DTL.RBC_NM 0 X X X X
Calibration Data Array PRM.DTL.RBC_VAR 66 0  X X 
Variable
Tool Center Offset PRM.DTL.RBC_TCVEN 1 0 X X X 
Tool Center Offset Array PRM.DTL.RBC_TCVAR 66 0  X X 
Variable
Diff. Height Correction PRM.DTL.RBC_HEN 1 0 X X X 
Height Difference PRM.DTL.RBC_H 0.0 999.9 -999.9 3 1   X 
Enable Calibration Data PRM.DTL.RBC_CAEN 1 0 X X X X
Differing Height PRM.DTL.RBC_RHEN 1 0 X X X X
Correction
Calibration Plane Z PRM.DTL.RBC_RH 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3 X X X X
Coordinate
Offset X PRM.DTL.RBREF_OFX 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Offset Y PRM.DTL.RBREF_OFY 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Offset Rz PRM.DTL.RBREF_OFT 0.0 180.0 -180.0 3 3   X 
Tool Center Rotation PRM.DTL.RBC_CCCEN 1 0 X X X 
Correction
Detected Detected Pos. X PRM.DTL.RBD_UIDX 0.0 9999999.999 -9999999.999 7 3  X  
Position Detected Pos. Y PRM.DTL.RBD_UIDY 0.0 9999999.999 -9999999.999 7 3  X  
Settings
Angle Calculation PRM.DTL.RBH_EN 1 0 X X X 
Detected Pos. Rz PRM.DTL.RBD_UIDT 0.0 9999999.999 -9999999.999 7 3  X  
Multiple Detection PRM.DTL.RBD_MDP 1 0 X X X 
Count PRM.DTL.MXN 1 9999 1 4 0 X X X 
Direction PRM.DTL.RBDIR Master Pos. to 0 1 0 X X X 
Detected Pt.
Detected Pt. to 1
Master Pos.

3-248 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Register Master Position PRM.DTL.RBRP_X 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Robot Coordinate X
Coordinates Master Position PRM.DTL.RBRP_Y 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Coordinate Y
Master Position PRM.DTL.RBRP_Z 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Coordinate Z
Master Position PRM.DTL.RBRP_RX 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Coordinate Rx
Master Position PRM.DTL.RBRP_RY 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Coordinate Ry
Master Position PRM.DTL.RBRP_RZ 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Coordinate Rz
Variable Reference PRM.DTL.RBRP_AREF 0 0 0   X 
Robot Position PRM.DTL.RBRP_WRES 1 0 X X X X
Coordinates Registration
Status
Add Shift Amount to PRM.DTL.RBPL_EN 1 0 X X X 
Place Position
Coordinates
Correct RxRy Axes at PRM.DTL.RBPL_CLRXRY 1 0 X X X 
Place Position
Place Position Coordinate X PRM.DTL.RBPL_X 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Place Position Coordinate Y PRM.DTL.RBPL_Y 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Place Position Coordinate Z PRM.DTL.RBPL_Z 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Place Position Coordinate Rx PRM.DTL.RBPL_RX 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Place Position Coordinate Ry PRM.DTL.RBPL_RY 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Place Position Coordinate Rz PRM.DTL.RBPL_RZ 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Place Position PRM.DTL.RBPL_AREF 0 0 0   X 
Coordinates Variable
Reference
Place Position PRM.DTL.RBPL_WCNUM 0 0 1 0 X X X 
Coordinates Work 1 1
Coordinate System No.
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9

XG-X Comm-US 3-249

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Register Place Position PRM.DTL.RBPL_TCNUM 0 0 1 0 X X X 
Robot Coordinates Tool 1 1
Coordinates Coordinate System No.
2 2
(continued)
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
Place Position PRM.DTL.RBPL_PRES 1 0 X X X X
Coordinates Registration
Status
Add Offset from Capture PRM.DTL.RBOH_OFEN 1 0 X X X 
Position
X Offset from Capture PRM.DTL.RBOH_OFX 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Position
Y Offset from Capture PRM.DTL.RBOH_OFY 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Position
Z Offset from Capture PRM.DTL.RBOH_OFZ 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Position
Rx Offset from Capture PRM.DTL.RBOH_OFRX 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Position
Ry Offset from Capture PRM.DTL.RBOH_OFRY 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Position
Rz Offset from Capture PRM.DTL.RBOH_OFRZ 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Position
Offset from Capture PRM.DTL.RBOH_OFAR 0 0 0   X 
Position Variable
Reference
Target Position PRM.DTL.RBOH_TGX 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Coordinate X
Target Position PRM.DTL.RBOH_TGY 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Coordinate Y
Target Position PRM.DTL.RBOH_TGZ 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Coordinate Z
Target Position PRM.DTL.RBOH_TGRX 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Coordinate Rx
Target Position PRM.DTL.RBOH_TGRY 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Coordinate Ry
Target Position PRM.DTL.RBOH_TGRZ 0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Coordinate Rz
Target Position PRM.DTL.RBOH_TGAR 0 0 0   X 
Coordinates Variable
Reference
Registration Status of PRM.DTL.RBOH_OFPRES 1 0 X X X X
Offset from Capture
Position

3-250 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Register Master Position Image PRM.DTL.RBREF_IRES 1 0 X X X X
Master Registration Status
Position
Image
Register Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_TYP Result 0 1 0 X X X 
Reference Position Specification Specify Arbitrarily 1
Detection Method
Position Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_AT 1 0 X X X 
Position Automatic Setting
Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_UIDX 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 7 3  X  
Position X
Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_UIDY 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 7 3  X  
Position Y
Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_UIDT 0.0 180.0 -180.0 3 1  X  
Position Rz
Arbitrarily Specified PRM.DTL.RBR_SPX 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Reference Detection
Position X
Arbitrarily Specified PRM.DTL.RBR_SPY 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Reference Detection
Position Y
Arbitrarily Specified PRM.DTL.RBR_SPT 0.0 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Reference Detection
Position Rz
Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_CRX 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3 X X X 
Position X (Current Value)
Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_CRY 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3 X X X 
Position Y (Current Value)
Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_CRT 0.0 180.0 -180.0 3 1 X X X 
Position Rz (Current
Value)
Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_RGX 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3 X X X 
Position X (Registered
Value)
Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_RGY 0.0 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3 X X X 
Position Y (Registered
Value)
Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_RGT 0.0 180.0 -180.0 3 1 X X X 
Position Rz (Registered
Value)
Reference Detection PRM.DTL.RBR_PRES 1 0 X X X X
Position Registration
Status

XG-X Comm-US 3-251

List of setting parameters

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Limits X Shift from Master: PRM.DTL.RB_X:HL 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Upper Limit
X Shift from Master: Lower PRM.DTL.RB_X:LL 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Limit
Y Shift from Master: PRM.DTL.RB_Y:HL 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Upper Limit
Y Shift from Master: Lower PRM.DTL.RB_Y:LL 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Limit
Angle Shift from Master: PRM.DTL.RB_T:HL 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Upper Limit
Angle Shift from Master: PRM.DTL.RB_T:LL 180.0 -180.0 3 1   X 
Lower Limit

3-252 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Robot Coordinate Operation Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Calibration Unit

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value

Image Calibrate PRM.DTL.OIMGEN Enable 1 X X X 

setting selected image
Disable 0
Calibrated image PRM.DTL.OIMG X X X 
variable
Image Distortion PRM.DTL.CTYP Lens 0 X X X 
calibration correction distortion
setting only
Lens + 1
angled
camera
distortion
Calibration region PRM.RGN.SHP Full image 0 X X X 
Rectangle 1
Enable region PRM.RGN.RGNEN Enable 1 X X X 
Disable 0
When the shape is "Rectangle"
Upper left XY PRM.RGN.LUXY 5 0  X X 
Upper left X PRM.RGN.LUX 160 16383 0 5 0   X 
Upper left Y PRM.RGN.LUY 160 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower right XY PRM.RGN.RDXY 5 0  X X 
Lower right X PRM.RGN.RDX 360 16383 0 5 0   X 
Lower right Y PRM.RGN.RDY 320 16383 0 5 0   X 
Use interpolation PRM.DTL.ENITP ON 1 X X X 
OFF 0
Rotation PRM.DTL.ENROT Enable 1   X 
correction
Disable 0
Adjustment angle PRM.DTL.ROT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Size setting PRM.DTL.STYP Scaling 0 X X X 
method
Pixel 1
Magnitude PRM.DTL.MGN 1.000 5.000 0.200 1 3   X 
Pixels per PRM.DTL.PIX 50.000 1000.000 5.000 4 3   X 
division

3-256 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Image Translation shift X PRM.DTL.AFSX 0.000 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
calibration
setting Translation shift Y PRM.DTL.AFSY 0.000 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Grayscale PRM.DTL.WAY Gray 3 X X X 
conversion
RGB 5
Gray
Coordinate Spacing value PRM.DTL.PSPN 10.000 999.999 0.001 3 3   X 
conversion (real)
Origin row PRM.DTL.OGR 0 255 0 3 0   X 
Origin column PRM.DTL.OGC 0 255 0 3 0   X 
X direction PRM.DTL.XRD Right (0) to 0   X 
Left (+ve)
Bottom (0) to 1
Top (+ve)
Left (0) to 2
Right (+ve)
Top (0) to 3
Bottom (+ve)
Relative Y PRM.DTL.YRD Righthand 4   X 
direction
Lefthand 5
XY coordinate PRM.DTL.OGCXY 4 3  X X 
X coordinate PRM.DTL.OGCX 0.000 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Y coordinate PRM.DTL.OGCY 0.000 9999.999 -9999.999 4 3   X 
Angle PRM.DTL.OGCT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3   X 
Adapt to axis PRM.DTL.EAI Not linked 0 X X X 
setting
Linked 1
Teaching Pattern type PRM.CLB.PTYP Chess board 0   X 
setting:
Common Dot pattern 1
No. images PRM.CLB.PSNM 1 16 1 2 0 X X X 
Lens distortion PRM.CLB.LTYP OFF 0   X 
correction type
Low order 1
High order 2
Asymmetry 3
Auto 4
Axis shift PRM.CLB.AXC Enable 1   X 
correction
Disable 0
Allow gaps PRM.CLB.MPTN Enable 1   X 
Disable 0
Calibration model PRM.CLB.CREF  X X 
Lens distortion PRM.CLB.MLTYP OFF 0 X X X X
correction type
(Model data) Low order 1
High order 2
Asymmetry 3
Status PRM.CLB.CSTS Unexecuted 0 X X X X
(Model data)
Success 1
Fail 2
Rows PRM.CLB.ROW 0 256 0 3 0 X X X X
(Model data)
Columns PRM.CLB.COL 0 256 0 3 0 X X X X
(Model data)
Detected points PRM.CLB.VNUM 0 64000 0 5 0 X X X X
(Model data)
Average error PRM.CLB.EAVE 0.000 9999.999 0.000 4 3 X X X X
(Model data)
Maximum error PRM.CLB.EMAX 0.000 9999.999 0.000 4 3 X X X X
(Model data)

XG-X Comm-US 3-257

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Teaching Registered image PRM.CLB[0].RIMG 0 999 0 X X X 
image No.
1 Assign variable PRM.CLB[0].UVR Enable 1 X X X 
for registered
image No. Disable 0

Numerical PRM.CLB[0].RIREF   X 
variable
Process variable PRM.CLB[0].UPEN Enable 1 X X X 
only when
changing Disable 0
programs
Enable region PRM.CLB[0].RGNEN Enable 1 X X X 
Disable 0
Region PRM.CLB[0].SHP Full image 0 X X X 
User set 17
When the shape is "User set"
Point XY PRM.CLB[0].PXY[*] 5 0  X X 
Point X PRM.CLB[0].PX[*] 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Point Y PRM.CLB[0].PY[*] 16383 -16383 5 0   X 
Detection PRM.CLB[0].DRTO 10 100 1 3 0   X 
threshold
Detection Count PRM.CLB[0].DNUM 1000 4000 100 4 0   X 
Teaching PRM.CLB[1].***
image No.
2
…
…

Teaching PRM.CLB[15].***
image No.
16

3-258 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Contour Region Generator Unit

Numerica

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Selection l value Referencing
format

No. of decimal places

No. of integer digits
Category Setting item Name Initial value Upper limit Lower limit

System Variable

Unit properties
User variable

Result data
Label

Value
Images/ Multi-Profile Defect Unit PRM.DTL.CONT_UID - 999 0 4 0 × × × 
Reference ID
Unit Resultant Image PRM.DTL.OIMG - - - - - × × × 
Optimize Detection PRM.DTL.SETCC 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Conditions (Dedicated for
Profile Images)
Contour Fit to Contour of PRM.DTL.CONT_FIT 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Region Captured Image
Refer to Model Line PRM.DTL.REFM 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Edge Edge Sensitivity (%) PRM.DTL.SEN 30 100 0 3 0   × 
Detection Edge Detection Width PRM.DTL.FLW 5 100 0 3 0   × 
Edge Intensity lower limit PRM.DTL.EI:LL 5.000 255.000 0.000 3 3   × 
Segment Size (Pixels) PRM.DTL.SGSA 5 9999 1 4 0 × × × 
Segment Shift (Pixels) PRM.DTL.MVSA 3.00 9999.99 0.01 4 2 × × × 
Selection for model line PRM.DTL.THM Auto 0   × 
detection Manual 1
Selection Settings for PRM.DTL.THRM 50.00 99.99 0.00 2 2   × 
model line detection
(manual)
Contour Type of Expand/Shrink PRM.DTL.MORM Shrink 1 1 0 × × × 
Grouping Expand 2
No. of times of Expand/ PRM.DTL.MORN 0 99 0 2 0   × 
Shrink
Contour Grouping 0: PRM.DTL.ICLR[0] White 255 3 0 × × × 
Contour Grouping Black 0
Specified Color
Contour Grouping 0: PRM.DTL.RGNN[0] 0 128 0 3 0 × × × 
Contour Grouping
Region Count
Contour Grouping 0: PRM.DTL.IMGR[0].CTN[0] -1 999 0 3 0 × × × 
Contour Information
Region No.
Contour Grouping 0: PRM.DTL.IMGR[0].CTD[0] 0 1 0 1 0 × × × 
Contour Information
Endpoint direction
Contour Grouping 1 PRM.DTL.***[1]
···

···

Contour Grouping 127 PRM.DTL.***[127]

XG-X Comm-US 3-259

List of setting parameters

Defect Extraction Operation Unit

Numerica
Selection l value Referencing
format

No. of decimal places

No. of integer digits
Category Setting item Name Initial value Upper limit Lower limit

System Variable

Unit properties
User variable

Result data
Label

Value
Source 1: Captured image variable PRM.IMGS1.IIMG × × × 
Image Registered image No.* PRM.IMGS1.RIMG 0 999 0 3 0 × × × 
Settings
Source 2: Captured image variable PRM.IMGS2.IIMG × × × 
Image Registered image No.* PRM.IMGS2.RIMG 0 999 0 3 0 × × × 
Settings
Source 3: Captured image variable PRM.IMGS3.IIMG × × × 
Image Registered image No.* PRM.IMGS3.RIMG 0 999 0 3 0 × × × 
Settings
Extract (Image settings) Resultant PRM.DTL.OIMG × × × 
Defects image
Settings Source 1: Threshold PRM.DTL.THLL1 255 255 0 3 0  × × 
upper limit
Threshold PRM.DTL.THHL1 0 255 0 3 0  × × 
upper limit
Source 2: Threshold PRM.DTL.THLL2 255 255 0 3 0  × × 
upper limit
Threshold PRM.DTL.THHL2 0 255 0 3 0  × × 
upper limit
Source 3: Threshold PRM.DTL.THLL3 255 255 0 3 0  × × 
upper limit
Threshold PRM.DTL.THHL3 0 255 0 3 0  × × 
upper limit
Gradation Width PRM.DTL.BDRG 50 999 0 3 0 × × × 
Shading Setting PRM.DTL.DMT Binary 0 × × × 
Gray 1
Sensitivity* PRM.DTL.DESEN 5 10 0 2 0 × × × 
Region Size* PRM.DTL.DEW 5 32 1 2 0 × × × 
* Changing the value during run mode will not affect the setting.

3-260 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Image Stitching Unit

Referencing

setting

3-262 XG-X Comm-US

Category Category

setting
setting

Condition
Condition

Timer
Timer

Length
Setting item Setting item

Timer End Unit

Timer Start Unit

Name Name

PRM.DTL.TMRID
PRM.DTL.TMRID

PRM.DTL.TMREXP
Label Label

Selection Selection

%UserTimer7
%UserTimer6
%UserTimer5
%UserTimer4
%UserTimer3
%UserTimer2
%UserTimer1
%UserTimer0
%UserTimer7
%UserTimer6
%UserTimer5
%UserTimer4
%UserTimer3
%UserTimer2
%UserTimer1
%UserTimer0

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Value Value

0
Initial value Initial value

Upper limit Upper limit

3600000
0
Lower limit Lower limit

No. of No. of

7
Numerical Numerical
integer digits value integer digits value
No. of format No. of format

0
decimal places decimal places

X
X

User variable User variable


System System

X
X

Referencing Referencing


variable variable

XG-X Comm-US
X
X
X

Result data Result data

X
Unit properties Unit properties

3-263


List of setting parameters

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

List of setting parameters

Terminal I/O Delay Unit

Referencing
Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Condition Reference value PRM.DTL.TGV[0] X  X 
setting
Condition Bit PRM.DTL.TGB[0] 0 31 0 2 0 X X X 
0
Signal type PRM.DTL.VTP[0] Rising /falling 0 X X X 
edge
Level 1
Signal change PRM.DTL.VDR[0] Both 2 X X X 
direction
ON->OFF 1
OFF->ON 0
ON 3
OFF 4
Condition PRM.DTL.***[1]
1
⋅⋅⋅

⋅⋅⋅

Condition PRM.DTL.***[19]
19
Condition Multiple BIT, PRM.DTL.UJC OR 1 X X X 
setting single result logic
(common) AND 0
Timeout PRM.DTL.ENTO ON 1 X X X 
OFF 0
Timeout period PRM.DTL.TO 1.0 600.0 0.1 3 1 X X X 
Update view PRM.DTL.UVW ON 1 X X X 
OFF 0

3-264 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Variable Delay Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Condition Condition PRM.DTL.VWC[0] None 0 X X X 
setting
Condition Variable = Condition value 3
0 1
Variable <> Condition value 4
1
Variable > Condition value 5
1
Variable < Condition value 6
1
Variable >= Condition value 7
1
Variable <= Condition value 8
1
Cond.1 < Variable < 9
Cond.2
Cond.1 <= Variable < 10
Cond.2
Cond.1 < Variable <= 11
Cond.2
Cond.1 <= Variable <= 1
Cond.2
Variable < Condition value 2
1 OR
Cond.2 < Variable
Variable <= Condition value 12
1 OR
Cond.2 < Variable
Variable < Condition value 13
1 OR
Cond.2 <= Variable
Variable <= Condition value 14
1 OR
Cond.2 <= Variable
Reference PRM.DTL.TGV[0] 0.000 99999999.999 -99999999.999 8 3   X 
value
Condition PRM.DTL.REF1[0] 0.000 99999999.999 -99999999.999 8 3   X 
value 1
Condition PRM.DTL.REF2[0] 0.000 99999999.999 -99999999.999 8 3   X 
value 2
Condition PRM.DTL.***[1]
1
…
…

Condition PRM.DTL.***[7]
7
Condition Multiple PRM.DTL.UJC OR 1 X X X 
(common) variable
logic AND 0

Timeout PRM.DTL.ENTO ON 1 X X X 
OFF 0
Timeout PRM.DTL.TO 1.0 600.0 0.1 3 1 X X X 
period
Update PRM.DTL.UVW ON 1 X X X 
view
OFF 0

XG-X Comm-US 3-265

Graphics setting Category
Category

setting
Condition

3-266
Setting item

Timeout
Menu ID

Graphics type
Setting item

XG-X Comm-US
Timeout period
List of setting parameters

User Menu Unit

Name

PRM.DTL.TO
PRM.DTL.DID
Name

PRM.DTL.ENTO

PRM.GRPH[0].GTYP
On-screen Graphics Unit
Label

Arc

Text
Ring
Oval

Point
None

Value
Circle

origin)
Label

Rectangle
ON

Active Text
OFF
Selection

Decimal to ASCII
Selection

Rotated rectangle

Line (Co-ordinate)
1

9
Line (Rotation about 8
6
5
3
4
2
0

0
1

7
-1
Value Value

12
11
10
0

60.0

Initial value Initial value

999

600.0

Upper limit
Upper limit
0

0.1

Lower limit Lower limit

No. of No. of
3

integer digits Numerical Numerical

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Quantity PRM.GRPH[0].CNT 1 10000 0 5 0    
Point 1 XY PRM.GRPH[0].DLUXY 5 3  X  
Point 1 X PRM.GRPH[0].DLUX 160.000 16383.000 0.000 5 3    
Point 1 Y PRM.GRPH[0].DLUY 160.000 16383.000 0.000 5 3    
Point 2 XY PRM.GRPH[0].DRDXY 5 3  X  
Point 2 X PRM.GRPH[0].DRDX 360.000 16383.000 0.000 5 3    
Point 2 Y PRM.GRPH[0].DRDY 320.000 16383.000 0.000 5 3    
Fill PRM.GRPH[0].PNT ON 1    
Graphics setting: Rectangle

OFF 0
Color and style PRM.GRPH[0].JGSP Default 0    
Alternative 1
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFXY 4 3  X  
offset XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3    
offset X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3    
offset Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCXY 5 3  X  
rotation center XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCX 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCY 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
rotation angle
Quantity PRM.GRPH[0].CNT 1 10000 0 5 0    
Width PRM.GRPH[0].WIDTH 201.000 16383.000 1.000 5 3    
Height PRM.GRPH[0].HIGHT 161.000 16383.000 1.000 5 3    
Center XY PRM.GRPH[0].DCXY 5 3  X  
Center X PRM.GRPH[0].DCX 260.000 16382.000 0.000 5 3    
Center Y PRM.GRPH[0].DCY 240.000 16382.000 0.000 5 3    
Rotation angle PRM.GRPH[0].T 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
Graphics setting: Rotated rectangle

Fill PRM.GRPH[0].PNT ON 1    
OFF 0
Color and style PRM.GRPH[0].JGSP Default 0    
Alternative 1
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFXY 4 3  X  
offset XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3    
offset X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3    
offset Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCXY 5 3  X  
rotation center XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCX 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCY 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
rotation angle

XG-X Comm-US 3-267

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Quantity PRM.GRPH[0].CNT 1 10000 0 5 0    
Center XY PRM.GRPH[0].DCXY 5 3  X  
Center X PRM.GRPH[0].DCX 260.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Center Y PRM.GRPH[0].DCY 240.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Radius PRM.GRPH[0].DCR 120.000 16000.000 0.000 5 3    
Fill PRM.GRPH[0].PNT ON 1    
OFF 0
Color and style PRM.GRPH[0].JGSP Default 0    
Graphics setting: Circle

Alternative 1
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFXY 4 3  X  
offset XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3    
offset X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3    
offset Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCXY 5 3  X  
rotation center XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCX 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCY 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
rotation angle
Quantity PRM.GRPH[0].CNT 1 10000 0 5 0    
Center XY PRM.GRPH[0].DCXY 5 3  X  
Center X PRM.GRPH[0].DCX 260.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Center Y PRM.GRPH[0].DCY 240.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Radius 1 PRM.GRPH[0].DCR1 120.000 2580.000 8.000 4 3    
Radius 2 PRM.GRPH[0].DCR2 180.000 2580.000 8.000 4 3    
Rotation angle PRM.GRPH[0].T 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
Fill PRM.GRPH[0].PNT ON 1    
OFF 0
Graphics setting: Oval

Color and style PRM.GRPH[0].JGSP Default 0    

Center Y PRM.GRPH[0].DCY 240.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    

Radius 1 PRM.GRPH[0].DCR1 120.000 9600.000 0.000 4 3    
Radius 2 PRM.GRPH[0].DCR2 60.000 9600.000 0.000 4 3    
Fill PRM.GRPH[0].PNT ON 1    
OFF 0
Color and style PRM.GRPH[0].JGSP Default 0    
Alternative 1

3-268 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFXY 4 3  X  
offset XY
Graphics setting: Ring (continued)

Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3    

offset X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3    
offset Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCXY 5 3  X  
rotation center XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCX 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCY 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
rotation angle
Quantity PRM.GRPH[0].CNT 1 10000 0 5 0    
Center XY PRM.GRPH[0].DCXY 5 3  X  
Center X PRM.GRPH[0].DCX 260.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Center Y PRM.GRPH[0].DCY 240.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Radius 1 PRM.GRPH[0].DCR1 120.000 9600.000 0.000 4 3    
Radius 2 PRM.GRPH[0].DCR2 30.000 9600.000 0.000 4 3    
Starting angle PRM.GRPH[0].STA 45.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
End angle PRM.GRPH[0].ENA 315.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
Fill PRM.GRPH[0].PNT ON 1    
Graphics setting: Arc

OFF 0
Color and style PRM.GRPH[0].JGSP Default 0    
Alternative 1
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFXY 4 3  X  
offset XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3    
offset X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3    
offset Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCXY 5 3  X  
rotation center XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCX 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCY 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
rotation angle
Quantity PRM.GRPH[0].CNT 1 10000 0 5 0    
Center XY PRM.GRPH[0].DCXY 5 3  X  
Center X PRM.GRPH[0].DCX 260.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Graphics setting: Point

Center Y PRM.GRPH[0].DCY 240.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    

Width 1 PRM.GRPH[0].W1 16.000 9600.000 0.000 4 3    
Width 2 PRM.GRPH[0].W2 0.000 9600.000 0.000 4 3    
Rotation angle PRM.GRPH[0].T 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
Zoom PRM.GRPH[0].ZM ON 1 X X X 
OFF 0
Color and style PRM.GRPH[0].JGSP Default 0    
Alternative 1

XG-X Comm-US 3-269

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFXY 4 3  X  
offset XY
Graphics setting: Point (continued)

Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3    

offset X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3    
offset Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCXY 5 3  X  
rotation center XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCX 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCY 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
rotation angle
Quantity PRM.GRPH[0].CNT 1 10000 0 5 0    
Start position XY PRM.GRPH[0].DSPXY 5 3  X  
Start position X PRM.GRPH[0].DSPX 260.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Start position Y PRM.GRPH[0].DSPY 200.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
End position XY PRM.GRPH[0].DEPXY 5 3  X  
End position X PRM.GRPH[0].DEPX 300.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
End position Y PRM.GRPH[0].DEPY 240.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Line type PRM.GRPH[0].LNTYP 2 points 1 X X X 
Continuous 0
Arrowhead: Start PRM.GRPH[0].SPARW ON 1 X X X 
OFF 0
Arrowhead: End PRM.GRPH[0].EPARW ON 1 X X X 
Graphics setting: Line

OFF 0
Color and style PRM.GRPH[0].JGSP Default 0    
Alternative 1
Line PRM.GRPH[0].LNRTH 5 3  X  
Line ρ PRM.GRPH[0].LNR 240.000 16889.000 -16889.000 5 3    
Line θ PRM.GRPH[0].LNTH 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFXY 4 3  X  
offset XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3    
offset X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3    
offset Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCXY 5 3  X  
rotation center XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCX 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCY 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
rotation angle

3-270 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Quantity PRM.GRPH[0].CNT 1 10000 0 5 0    
Text PRM.GRPH[0].STR Character string up to 100 bytes - - X X X 
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].XY 5 3  X  
XY
Display position X PRM.GRPH[0].X 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Display position Y PRM.GRPH[0].Y 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Color and style PRM.GRPH[0].JGSP Default 0    
Graphics setting: Text

Alternative 1
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFXY 4 3  X  
offset XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3    
offset X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3    
offset Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCXY 5 3  X  
rotation center XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCX 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCY 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
rotation angle
Quantity PRM.GRPH[0].CNT 1 10000 0 5 0    
Value PRM.GRPH[0].NMR 0.000000 9999999999 -9999999999 10 6    
.999999 .999999
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].XY 5 3  X  
XY
Display position X PRM.GRPH[0].X 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Display position Y PRM.GRPH[0].Y 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Number of digits PRM.GRPH[0].INTDG 7 10 1 2 0 X X X 
Decimal places PRM.GRPH[0].DCMDG 3 6 0 1 0 X X X 
+/- prefix PRM.GRPH[0].SIGN ON 1 X X X 
OFF 0
Graphics setting: Value

Zero suppression PRM.GRPH[0].SZ ON 1 X X X 

XG-X Comm-US 3-271

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Quantity PRM.GRPH[0].CNT 1 10000 0 5 0    
Table No./name PRM.GRPH[0].TBL 0 63 0 2 0 X X X 
Value PRM.GRPH[0].NMR 0.000000 9999999999 -9999999999 10 6    
.999999 .999999
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].XY 5 3  X  
XY
Display position X PRM.GRPH[0].X 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Display position Y PRM.GRPH[0].Y 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Graphics setting: Active text

Color and style PRM.GRPH[0].JGSP Default 0    

Alternative 1
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFXY 4 3  X  
offset XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFX 0.000 9600.000 -9600.000 4 3    
offset X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].OFY 0.000 7200.000 -7200.000 4 3    
offset Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCXY 5 3  X  
rotation center XY
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCX 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center X
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCY 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
rotation center Y
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].RCT 0.000 359.999 0.000 3 3    
rotation angle
Quantity PRM.GRPH[0].CNT 1 10000 0 5 0    
Value PRM.GRPH[0].NMR 0.000000 9999999999 -9999999999 10 6    
.999999 .999999
No. of characters PRM.GRPH[0].STRN 10 100 0 3 0    
Display position PRM.GRPH[0].XY 5 3  X  
XY
Display position X PRM.GRPH[0].X 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Display position Y PRM.GRPH[0].Y 0.000 16383.000 -16383.000 5 3    
Graphics setting: Decimal to ASCII

ASCII mode PRM.GRPH[0].OCRDIS ON 1 X X X 

PRM.GRPH[1].***
⋅⋅⋅

PRM.GRPH[31].***

3-272 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Parallel Terminal Output Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Numerical
Selection

format
integer digits value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Output Output frequency PRM.DTL.OTMS 1 8 1 1 0 X X X 
data
setting Full output buffer PRM.DTL.PRIO Skip output item 0 X X X 
Wait for free space 1
Skip unexecuted PRM.DTL.OSKP ON 1 X X X 
items
OFF 0

Data Output Unit

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value

Output Device PRM.DTL.DEV SD Card 1 X X X 

data
setting RS-232C 2
Ethernet 3
PLC-Link 4
CC-Link 6
PC Program 9
EtherNet/IP 10
PROFINET 13
EtherCAT 17
FTP 12
USB HDD 16
VisionDataStorage (USB) 18
EtherNet/IP Module 19
PROFINET Module 20
Data Delimiter PRM.DTL.SEPA Comma "," X X X 
Tab "\t"
Space " "
]

None ""
Full output buffer PRM.DTL.PRIO Skip output item 0 X X X 
Wait for free space 1
Skip unexecuted PRM.DTL.OSKP ON 1 X X X 
items
OFF 0
Use number of PRM.DTL.USEDTN OFF 0 X X X 
detected items to
control outputting ON 1
array data
Output number of PRM.DTM.ADN[0] 1 10000 5 0 * X * X
array data for
output item 0 * Variables and result data are available only when output data are user-defined array variables.

XG-X Comm-US 3-273

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Output Output item 1 PRM.DTM.ADN[1]
data
⋅⋅⋅

setting
Output item 255 PRM.DTM.ADN[255]
Detailed Output folder PRM.DTL.BFN "SD2:\xg\result\" Character string up to 
setting 255 bytes
(SD card)
File naming PRM.DTL.FNR Auto 1 X X X 
Fixed name 0
Fixed name PRM.DTL.FHS "ResultOutput" Character string up to 
64 bytes
Detailed Output address PRM.DTL.P_OAO 0 54255 0 5 0 X X X 
setting offset
(PLC-Link)
Result memory PRM.DTL.P_OCAO 0 54255 0 5 0 X X X 
address offset
Handshake PRM.DTL.P_HSH ON 1 X X X 
OFF 0
Detailed Offset of RWr PRM.DTL.C_RWOO 0 126 0 3 0 X X X 
setting
(CC-Link) Handshake PRM.DTL.C_HSH ON 1 X X X 
OFF 0
Detailed InputAssembly PRM.DTL.C_RWOO 0 1436 0 4 0 X X X 
setting Output offset
(Ether
Net/IP) Handshake PRM.DTL.E_HSH ON 1 X X X 
OFF 0
Detailed InputAssembly PRM.DTL.PF_IAOO 0 4084 0 4 0 X X X 
setting output offset
(PROFINET)
Handshake PRM.DTL.PF_HSH ON 1 X X X 
OFF 0
Detailed Bit output offset PRM.DTL.ECAT_ 0 31 0 2 0 X X X 
setting IAOOB
(EtherCAT)
InputAssembly PRM.DTL.ECAT_ 0 4084 0 4 0 X X X 
output offset IAOO
Handshake PRM.DTL.ECAT_ ON 1 X X X 
HSH OFF 0
Detailed Output folder PRM.DTL.BFN "SD2:\xg\result\" Character string up to 
setting 255 bytes
(PC
program) File naming PRM.DTL.FNR Auto 1 X X X 
Fixed name 0
Fixed name PRM.DTL.FHS "ResultOutput" Character string up to 
64 bytes
Detailed Output folder PRM.DTL.BFN "\xg\result\" Character string up to 
setting 255 bytes
(FTP/
VisionData File naming PRM.DTL.FNR Auto 1 X X X 
Storage(Eth
er)) Fixed name 0
Fixed Name PRM.DTL.FHS "ResultOutput" Character string up to 
64 bytes
Detailed Output folder PRM.DTL.BFN "\xg\result\" Character string up to 
setting 255 bytes
(VisionData
Storage File naming PRM.DTL.FNR Auto 1 X X X 
(USB))
Fixed name 0
Fixed Name PRM.DTL.FHS "ResultOutput" Character string up to 
64 bytes
Detailed Output folder PRM.DTL.BFN "\xg\result\" Character string up to 
setting 255 bytes
(USB HDD)
File naming PRM.DTL.FNR Auto 1 X X X 
Fixed name 0
Fixed Name PRM.DTL.FHS "ResultOutput" Character string up to 
64 bytes

3-274 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Image Output Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Output Device PRM.DTL.DEV SD Card 1 X X X 
data PC Program 9
setting
FTP 12
USB HDD 16
VisionDataStorage (USB) 18
File format PRM.DTL.FLFMT BMP 0 X X X 
BMP (1/2 resolution) 1
BMP (1/4 resolution) 2
BMP (1/8 resolution) 3
JPEG 4
PNG 5
Full output buffer PRM.DTL.PRIO Skip output item 0 X X X 
Wait for free space 1
Output Extension PRM.DTL.OI_ALL All 0 1 0 X X X 
Image Individual 1
Selection
Specify Individually PRM.DTL.OEI[0] 1 0 X X X 
File Output folder PRM.DTL.BFN "SD2:\xg\image\" Character string up to 
settings 255 bytes
(SD card) New folder rule PRM.DTL.SFNR None 0 X X X 
No. of images 1
Date 2
No. of images per PRM.DTL.SFFC 1000 10000 1 5 0 X X X 
folder
File naming PRM.DTL.FNR Auto 1 X X X 
Sequential 2
Specified 3
Custom 4
Sequence limit PRM.DTL.MXSQN 1000 1000000 1 7 0 X X X 
Fixed name PRM.DTL.FHS Character string up to 64 bytes 
File Output folder PRM.DTL.BFN "SD2:\xg\image\" Character string up to 
settings 255 bytes
(PC New folder rule PRM.DTL.SFNR None 0 X X X 
program)
No. of images 1
Date 2
No. of images per PRM.DTL.SFFC 1000 10000 1 5 0 X X X 
folder
File naming PRM.DTL.FNR Auto 1 X X X 
Sequential 2
Specified 3
Custom 4
Sequence limit PRM.DTL.MXSQN 1000 1000000 1 7 0 X X X 
Fixed name PRM.DTL.FHS Character string up to 64 bytes 

XG-X Comm-US 3-275

List of setting parameters

Referencing
integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value
decimal places

Unit properties
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
File Output folder PRM.DTL.BFN "xg\image\" Character string up to 
settings 255 bytes
(FTP) New folder rule PRM.DTL.SFNR None 0 X X X 
No. of images 1
Date 2
No. of images per PRM.DTL.SFFC 1000 10000 1 5 0 X X X 
folder
File naming PRM.DTL.FNR Auto 1 X X X 
Sequential 2
Specified 3
Custom 4
Sequence limit PRM.DTL.MXSQN 1000 1000000 1 7 0 X X X 
Fixed name PRM.DTL.FHS Character string up to 64 bytes 
File Output folder PRM.DTL.BFN "xg\image\" Character string up to 
settings 255 bytes
(VisionData New folder rule
PRM.DTL.SFNR None 0 X X X 
Storage
(USB)) No. of images 1
Date 2
No. of images per PRM.DTL.SFFC 1000 10000 1 5 0 X X X 
folder
File naming PRM.DTL.FNR Auto 1 X X X 
Sequential 2
Specified 3
Custom 4
Sequence limit PRM.DTL.MXSQN 1000 1000000 1 7 0 X X X 
Fixed name PRM.DTL.FHS Character string up to 64 bytes 
File Output folder PRM.DTL.BFN "USB\xg\image\" Character string up to 
settings 255 bytes
(USB New folder rule PRM.DTL.SFNR None 0 X X X 
HDD)
No. of images 1
Date 2
No. of images per PRM.DTL.SFFC 1000 10000 1 5 0 X X X 
folder
File naming PRM.DTL.FNR Auto 1 X X X 
Sequential 2
Specified 3
Custom 4
Sequence limit PRM.DTL.MXSQN 1000 1000000 1 7 0 X X X 
Fixed name PRM.DTL.FHS Character string up to 64 bytes 

3-276 XG-X Comm-US

List of setting parameters

Command Execution Unit

Referencing

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

integer digits Numerical
Selection

format
value

Unit properties
decimal places
User variable
Setting item

Initial value

Result data
Lower limit
Upper limit
Category

variable
System
No. of

No. of
Name

Label

Value
Instruction Instruction PRM.DTL.CMD Character string up to 256 bytes X X X 
Wait for response PRM.DTL.WOP On 1 X X X 
Off 0
Judgment value PRM.DTL.JOP OK 0 X X X 
Command 1
response

XG-X Comm-US 3-277

List of result data

Common to All Units:

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Unit judgment value RSLT.UJG Unsigned 1 0 -
Unit judgment value RSLT.UJGP Unsigned 1 0 -
Unit judgment value RSLT.UJGN Unsigned 1 0 -
Unit judgment value RSLT.UJGP Unsigned 1 0 -
Unit judgment value RSLT.UJGN Unsigned 1 0 -
Unit judgment value RSLT.UJGOK Unsigned 1 0 -
Unit judgment value RSLT.UJGNG Unsigned 1 0 -
Unit error RSLT.UERR Unsigned 1 0 -
Unit error ID RSLT.UEID Unsigned 7 0 -
Unit execution time RSLT.EXTM Unsigned 7 3 -
Execution count RSLT.EXCT Unsigned 7 0 -
NG count RSLT.NGCT Unsigned 7 0 -
Scale factor X RSLT.SCLX Available 4 6 -
Scale factor Y RSLT.SCLY Available 4 6 -
Scale factor L RSLT.SCLL Unsigned 4 6 -
Unit Execution RSLT.EXE Unsigned 1 0 -
Unit Non-Execution RSLT.EXEN Unsigned 1 0 -

Reference Scale factors X, Y, and L are used for vision units only.

Relationship between the unit judgment value and judgment result

When judged as OK When judged as NG When unit is not executed

Unit judgment value: RSLT.UJG 0 1 0
Unit judgment value: RSLT.UJGP 0 1 1
Unit judgment value: RSLT.UJGN 1 0 1
Unit judgment value: RSLT.UJGOK 1 0 0
Unit judgment value: RSLT.UJGNG 0 1 0

3-278 XG-X Comm-US

List of result data

Result data of height extraction plane

Plane equation info. XYZ of height extraction plane RSLT.XPPABC Available 3 6 -

Plane equation info. XYZ of height extraction plane: Measured value RSLT.XPPABC:MS Available 3 6 -

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Plane equation info. XYZ of height extraction plane: Absolute measured value RSLT.XPPABC:AB Available 3 6 -
X slope of height extraction plane RSLT.XPPA Available 1 6 -
X slope of height extraction plane: Measured value RSLT.XPPA:MS Available 1 6 -
X slope of height extraction plane: Absolute measured value RSLT.XPPA:AB Available 1 6 -
Y slope of height extraction plane RSLT.XPPB Available 1 6 -
Y slope of height extraction plane: Measured value RSLT.XPPB:MS Available 1 6 -
Y slope of height extraction plane: Absolute measured value RSLT.XPPB:AB Available 1 6 -
Z intercept of height extraction plane RSLT.XPPC Available 3 3 -
Z intercept of height extraction plane: Measured value RSLT.XPPC:MS Available 3 3 -
Z intercept of height extraction plane: Absolute measured value RSLT.XPPC:AB Available 3 3 -

XG-X Comm-US 3-279

Capture Unit
Numerical value format

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Result item Name Sign No. of No. of Applicable
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Status RSLT.STAT Unsigned 1 0 -
LumiTrax Result 1 Moving Object Tracking 1
Pattern XY Position & Angle Result RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.XYT Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position & Angle Result : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.XYT:MS Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position & Angle Result : Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.XYT:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position Result RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.XY Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position Result : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.XY:MS Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position Result : Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.XY:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern X Position Result RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.X Available 5 3 -
Pattern X Position Result : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.X:MS Available 5 3 -
Pattern X Position Result : Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.X:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern Y Position Result RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.Y Available 5 3 -
Pattern Y Position Result : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.Y:MS Available 5 3 -
Pattern Y Position Result : Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.Y:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern Angle Result RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.T Available 3 3 -
Pattern Angle Resul : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.T:MS Available 3 3 -
Pattern Angle Result : Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.T:AB Available 3 3 -
Pattern % Match Result RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.C Unsigned 2 3 -
Pattern % Match Result : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.C:MS Unsigned 2 3 -
Number RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.N Unsigned 2 0 -
Number : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.N:MS Unsigned 2 0 -
Movement Amount XY/Angle RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DXYT Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount XY/Angle : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DXYT:MS Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount XY/Angle : Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DXYT:AB Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount XY RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DXY Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount XY : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DXY:MS Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount XY : Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DXY:AB Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount X RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DX Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount X : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DX:MS Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount X : Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DX:AB Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount Y RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DY Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount Y : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DY:MS Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount Y : Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DY:AB Available 5 3 -
Movement Amount Angle RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DT Available 3 3 -
Movement Amount Angle : Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DT:MS Available 3 3 -
Movement Amount Angle : Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.TRK1.DT:AB Available 3 3 -
LumiTrax Result 1 Moving Object Tracking 2 RSLT.LTRX1.TRK2
LumiTrax Result 1 Partial Lighting (Upper) RSLT.LTRX1.LTUP
LumiTrax Result 1 Partial Lighting (Upper Right) RSLT.LTRX1.LTRU
LumiTrax Result 1 Partial Lighting (Right) RSLT.LTRX1.LTRT
LumiTrax Result 1 Partial Lighting (Lower Right) RSLT.LTRX1.LTRL
LumiTrax Result 1 Partial Lighting (Lower) RSLT.LTRX1.LTLO
LumiTrax Result 1 Partial Lighting (Lower Left) RSLT.LTRX1.LTLL
LumiTrax Result 1 Partial Lighting (Left) RSLT.LTRX1.LTLT
LumiTrax Result 1 Partial Lighting (Upper Left) RSLT.LTRX1.LTLU
LumiTrax Result 1 Amb. Light RSLT.LTRX1.AMB
LumiTrax Result 2 RSLT.LTRX2.***
……
LumiTrax Result 4 RSLT.LTRX4.***
MultiSpectrum, Result 1, Track Moving Object 1
Position XY / Angle RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.XYT Available 5 3 -
Position XY / Angle: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.XYT:MS Available 5 3 -
Position XY / Angle: Absolute measured RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.XYT:AB Available 5 3 -
value
Position XY RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.XY Available 5 3 -

XG-X Comm-US 3-291

List of result data

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Position XY: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.XY:MS Available 5 3 -
Position XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.XY:AB Available 5 3 -
Position X RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.X Available 5 3 -
Position X: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.X:MS Available 5 3 -
Position X: Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.X:AB Available 5 3 -
Position Y RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.Y Available 5 3 -
Position Y: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.Y:MS Available 5 3 -
Position Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.Y:AB Available 5 3 -
Angle RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.T Available 3 3 -
Angle: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.T:MS Available 3 3 -
Angle: Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.T:AB Available 3 3 -
Match % RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.C Unsigned 2 3 -
Match %: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.C:MS Unsigned 2 3 -
Count RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.N Unsigned 2 0 -
Count: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.N:MS Unsigned 2 0 -
Shift XY / Angle RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DXYT Available 5 3 -
Shift XY / Angle: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DXYT:MS Available 5 3 -
Shift XY / Angle: Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DXYT:AB Available 5 3 -
Shift XY RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DXY Available 5 3 -
Position XY: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DXY:MS Available 5 3 -
Shift XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DXY:AB Available 5 3 -
Shift X RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DX Available 5 3 -
Shift X: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DX:MS Available 5 3 -
Shift X: Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DX:AB Available 5 3 -
Shift Y RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DY Available 5 3 -
Shift Y: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DY:MS Available 5 3 -
Shift Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DY:AB Available 5 3 -
Shift / Angle RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DT Available 3 3 -
Shift / Angle: Measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DT:MS Available 3 3 -
Shift / Angle: Absolute measured value RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK1.DT:AB Available 3 3 -
MultiSpectrum, Result 1, Track Moving Object 2 RSLT.LTRX1.MSTRK2.***
MultiSpectrum, Result 1 (UV) RSLT.LTRX1.MS_UV.***
MultiSpectrum, Result 1 (B) RSLT.LTRX1.MS_B.***
MultiSpectrum, Result 1 (G) RSLT.LTRX1.MS_G.***
MultiSpectrum, Result 1 (AM) RSLT.LTRX1.MS_AM.***
MultiSpectrum, Result 1 (R) RSLT.LTRX1.MS_R.***
MultiSpectrum, Result 1 (FR) RSLT.LTRX1.MS_FR.***
MultiSpectrum, Result 1 (IR) RSLT.LTRX1.MS_IR.***
MultiSpectrum, Result 1 (W) RSLT.LTRX1.MS_W.***
MultiSpectrum, Result 1 (Ambient light image) RSLT.LTRX1.MSAMB
MultiSpectrum, Result 2 RSLT.LTRX2.***

MultiSpectrum, Result 4 RSLT.LTRX4.***

3-292 XG-X Comm-US

List of result data

Area Unit

Numerical value format

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Area RSLT.AR Unsigned 8 0 -
Area: Measured value RSLT.AR:MS Unsigned 8 0 -
Area: Judgment value RSLT.AR:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

Pattern Search Unit

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Pattern base X RSLT.PTSTX Available 5 3 -
Pattern base Y RSLT.PTSTY Available 5 3 -
Pattern base XY RSLT.PTSTXY Available 5 3 -
No. of patterns RSLT.N Unsigned 2 0 -
No. of patterns: Measured value RSLT.N:MS Unsigned 2 0 -
No. of patterns: Judgment value RSLT.N:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Position X RSLT.X[*] Available 5 3 X
Position X: Measured value RSLT.X[*]:MS Available 5 3 X
Position X: Absolute measured value RSLT.X[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position X: Encoder measured value RSLT.X[*]:EC Available 5 3 X
Position X: Judgment value RSLT.X:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Position Y RSLT.Y[*] Available 5 3 Y
Position Y: Measured value RSLT.Y[*]:MS Available 5 3 Y
Position Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.Y[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.Y[*]:EC Available 5 3 Y
Position Y: Judgment value RSLT.Y:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Position XY RSLT.XY[*] Available 5 3 -
Position XY: Measured value RSLT.XY[*]:MS Available 5 3 -
Position XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.XY[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.XY[*]:EC Available 5 3 -
Angle RSLT.T[*] Available 3 3 -
Angle: Measured value RSLT.T[*]:MS Available 3 3 -
Angle: Absolute measured value RSLT.T[*]:AB Available 3 3 -
Angle: Judgment value RSLT.T:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Position XY/Angle RSLT.XYT[*] Available 5 3 -
Position XY/Angle: Measured value RSLT.XYT[*]:MS Available 5 3 -
Position XY/Angle: Absolute measured RSLT.XYT[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
value
Position XY/Angle: Encoder measured value RSLT.XYT[*]:EC Available 5 3 -
Reference position XY for position RSLT.ADJXY Available 5 3 -
adjustment
Reference position X for position adjustment RSLT.ADJX Available 5 3 -
Reference position Y for position adjustment RSLT.ADJY Available 5 3 -
Reference angle for position adjustment RSLT.ADJT Available 3 3 -
Match % RSLT.C[*] Unsigned 2 3 -
Match %: Measured value RSLT.C[*]:MS Unsigned 2 3 -
Match %: Judgment value RSLT.C:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

XG-X Comm-US 3-293

List of result data

ShapeTrax3A Unit

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Detected Pattern Center X RSLT.PTSTX Available 5 3 -
Detected Pattern Center Y RSLT.PTSTY Available 5 3 -
Detected Pattern Center XY RSLT.PTSTXY Available 5 3 -
Number of Detected Patterns Result RSLT.N Unsigned 4 0 -
Number of Detected Patterns Result: Measured Value RSLT.N:MS Unsigned 4 0 -
Number of Detected Patterns Result: Judgment Value RSLT.N:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Pattern X Position Result RSLT.X[*] Available 5 3 X
Pattern X Position Result: Measured Value RSLT.X[*]:MS Available 5 3 X
Pattern X Position Result: Absolute Value RSLT.X[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern X Position Result: Encoder Value RSLT.X[*]:EC Available 5 3 X
Pattern X Position Result: Judgment Value RSLT.X:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Pattern Y Position Result RSLT.Y[*] Available 5 3 Y
Pattern Y Position Result: Measured Value RSLT.Y[*]:MS Available 5 3 Y
Pattern Y Position Result: Absolute Value RSLT.Y[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern Y Position Result: Encoder Value RSLT.Y[*]:EC Available 5 3 Y
Pattern Y Position Result: Judgment Value RSLT.Y:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Pattern XY Position Result RSLT.XY[*] Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position Result: Measured Value RSLT.XY[*]:MS Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position Result: Absolute Value RSLT.XY[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position Result: Encoder Value RSLT.XY[*]:EC Available 5 3 -
Pattern Angle Result RSLT.T[*] Available 3 3 -
Pattern Angle Result: Measured Value RSLT.T[*]:MS Available 3 3 -
Pattern Angle Result: Absolute Value RSLT.T[*]:AB Available 3 3 -
Pattern Angle Result: Judgment Value RSLT.T:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Pattern XY Position & Angle Result RSLT.XYT[*] Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position & Angle Result: Measured Value RSLT.XYT[*]:MS Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position & Angle Result: Absolute Value RSLT.XYT[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position & Angle Result: Encoder Value RSLT.XYT[*]:EC Available 5 3 -
XY Position for Position Adjustment Reference RSLT.ADJXY Available 5 3 -
X Position for Position Adjustment Reference RSLT.ADJX Available 5 3 -
Y Position for Position Adjustment Reference RSLT.ADJY Available 5 3 -
Angle for Position Adjustment Reference RSLT.ADJT Available 3 3 -
Pattern % Match Result RSLT.C[*] Unsigned 2 3 -
Pattern % Match Result: Measured Value RSLT.C[*]:MS Unsigned 2 3 -
Pattern % Match Result: Judgment Value RSLT.C:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Pattern Scale Result RSLT.S[*] Unsigned 1 3 -
Pattern Scale Result: Measured Value RSLT.S[*]:MS Unsigned 1 3 -
Pattern Scale Result: Judgment Value RSLT.S:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Number of Unselected RSLT.NSN Unsigned 4 0 -
Number of Unselected: Measured Value RSLT.NSN:MS Unsigned 4 0 -
Feature Pixel Count 1 RSLT.QZ1[*] Unsigned 6 0 -
Feature Pixel Count 1: Measured Value RSLT.QZ1[*]:MS Unsigned 6 0 -
Feature Pixel Count 1: Judgment Value RSLT.QZ1:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Feature Pixel Count 2 RSLT.QZ2[*] Unsigned 6 0 -
Feature Pixel Count 2: Measured Value RSLT.QZ2[*]:MS Unsigned 6 0 -
Feature Pixel Count 2: Judgment Value RSLT.QZ2:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

3-294 XG-X Comm-US

List of result data

PatternTrax Unit

Numerical value format

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Number of Detected Patterns Result RSLT.N Unsigned 4 0 -
Number of Detected Patterns Result: Measured Value RSLT.N:MS Unsigned 4 0 -
Number of Detected Patterns Result: Judgment Value RSLT.N:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Pattern XY Position & Angle Result RSLT.XYT[*] Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position & Angle Result: Measured Value RSLT.XYT[*]:MS Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position & Angle Result: Absolute Value RSLT.XYT[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position & Angle Result: Encoder Value RSLT.XYT[*]:EC Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position Result RSLT.XY[*] Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position Result: Measured Value RSLT.XY[*]:MS Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position Result: Absolute Value RSLT.XY[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern XY Position Result: Encoder Value RSLT.XY[*]:EC Available 5 3 -
Pattern X Position Result RSLT.X[*] Available 5 3 X
Pattern X Position Result: Measured Value RSLT.X[*]:MS Available 5 3 X
Pattern X Position Result: Absolute Value RSLT.X[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern X Position Result: Encoder Value RSLT.X[*]:EC Available 5 3 X
Pattern X Position Result: Judgment Value RSLT.X:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Pattern Y Position Result RSLT.Y[*] Available 5 3 Y
Pattern Y Position Result: Measured Value RSLT.Y[*]:MS Available 5 3 Y
Pattern Y Position Result: Absolute Value RSLT.Y[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Pattern Y Position Result: Encoder Value RSLT.Y[*]:EC Available 5 3 Y
Pattern Y Position Result: Judgment Value RSLT.Y:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Pattern Angle Result RSLT.T[*] Available 3 3 -
Pattern Angle Result: Measured Value RSLT.T[*]:MS Available 3 3 -
Pattern Angle Result: Absolute Value RSLT.T[*]:AB Available 3 3 -
Pattern Angle Result: Judgment Value RSLT.T:JG Available 3 3 -
Pattern % Match Result RSLT.C[*] Unsigned 2 3 -
Pattern % Match Result: Measured Value RSLT.C[*]:MS Unsigned 2 3 -
Pattern % Match Result: Judgment Value RSLT.C:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Detected Pattern Center XY RSLT.PTSTXY Available 5 3 -
Detected Pattern Center X RSLT.PTSTX Available 5 3 -
Detected Pattern Center Y RSLT.PTSTY Available 5 3 -
XY Position for Position Adjustment Reference RSLT.ADJXY Available 5 3 -
X Position for Position Adjustment Reference RSLT.ADJX Available 5 3 -
Y Position for Position Adjustment Reference RSLT.ADJY Available 5 3 -
Angle for Position Adjustment Reference RSLT.ADJT Available 3 3 -

XG-X Comm-US 3-295

List of result data

Edge Position Unit

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
No. of edges RSLT.N Unsigned 4 0 -
No. of edges: Measured value RSLT.N:MS Unsigned 4 0 -
No. of edges: Judgment value RSLT.N:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Position X RSLT.X[*] Available 5 3 X
Position X: Measured value RSLT.X[*]:MS Available 5 3 X
Position X: Absolute measured value RSLT.X[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position X: Encoder measured value RSLT.X[*]:EC Available 5 3 X
Position X: Judgment value RSLT.X:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Position Y RSLT.Y[*] Available 5 3 Y
Position Y: Measured value RSLT.Y[*]:MS Available 5 3 Y
Position Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.Y[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.Y[*]:EC Available 5 3 Y
Position Y: Judgment value RSLT.Y:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Position XY RSLT.XY[*] Available 5 3 -
Position XY: Measured value RSLT.XY[*]:MS Available 5 3 -
Position XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.XY[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.XY[*]:EC Available 5 3 -
Reference position XY for position RSLT.ADJXY Available 5 3 -
adjustment
Reference position X for position adjustment RSLT.ADJX Available 5 3 -
Reference position Y for position adjustment RSLT.ADJY Available 5 3 -
Reference angle for position adjustment RSLT.ADJT Available 3 3 -
Angle RSLT.T[*] Available 3 3 -
Angle: Measured value RSLT.T[*]:MS Available 3 3 -
Angle: Absolute measured value RSLT.T[*]:AB Available 3 3 -
Angle: Judgment value RSLT.T:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Distance RSLT.P[*] Unsigned 5 3 L*
Distance: Measured value RSLT.P[*]:MS Unsigned 5 3 L*
Distance: Absolute measured value RSLT.P[*]:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Intensity RSLT.I[*] Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity: Measured value RSLT.I[*]:MS Unsigned 3 3 -

* Scaling is available when the region shape is not a ring or an arc.

3-296 XG-X Comm-US

List of result data

Edge Width Unit

Numerical value format

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
No. of pairs RSLT.N Unsigned 1 0 -
No. of pairs: Measured value RSLT.N:MS Unsigned 1 0 -
Edge width RSLT.W Unsigned 5 3 L*
Edge width: Measured value RSLT.W:MS Unsigned 5 3 L*
Edge width: Absolute measured value RSLT.W:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Edge width: Judgment value RSLT.W:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Position 1 X RSLT.X1 Available 5 3 X
Position 1 X: Measured value RSLT.X1:MS Available 5 3 X
Position 1 X: Absolute measured value RSLT.X1:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 1 X: Encoder measured value RSLT.X1:EC Available 5 3 X
Position 1 Y RSLT.Y1 Available 5 3 Y
Position 1 Y: Measured value RSLT.Y1:MS Available 5 3 Y
Position 1 Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.Y1:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 1 Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.Y1:EC Available 5 3 Y
Position 1 XY RSLT.XY1 Available 5 3 -
Position 1 XY: Measured value RSLT.XY1:MS Available 5 3 -
Position 1 XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.XY1:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 1 XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.XY1:EC Available 5 3 -
Angle 1 RSLT.T1 Available 3 3 -
Angle 1: Measured value RSLT.T1:MS Available 3 3 -
Angle 1: Absolute measured value RSLT.T1:AB Available 3 3 -
Distance 1 RSLT.P1 Unsigned 5 3 L*
Distance 1: Measured value RSLT.P1:MS Unsigned 5 3 L*
Distance 1: Absolute measured value RSLT.P1:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Intensity 1 RSLT.I1 Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity 1: Measured value RSLT.I1:MS Unsigned 3 3 -
Position 2 X RSLT.X2 Available 5 3 X
Position 2 X: Measured value RSLT.X2:MS Available 5 3 X
Position 2 X: Absolute measured value RSLT.X2:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 2 X: Encoder measured value RSLT.X2:EC Available 5 3 X
Position 2 Y RSLT.Y2 Available 5 3 Y
Position 2 Y: Measured value RSLT.Y2:MS Available 5 3 Y
Position 2 Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.Y2:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 2 Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.Y2:EC Available 5 3 Y
Position 2 XY RSLT.XY2 Available 5 3 -
Position 2 XY: Measured value RSLT.XY2:MS Available 5 3 -
Position 2 XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.XY2:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 2 XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.XY2:EC Available 5 3 -
Angle 2 RSLT.T2 Available 3 3 -
Angle 2: Measured value RSLT.T2:MS Available 3 3 -
Angle 2: Absolute measured value RSLT.T2:AB Available 3 3 -
Distance 2 RSLT.P2 Unsigned 5 3 L*
Distance 2: Measured value RSLT.P2:MS Unsigned 5 3 L*
Distance 2: Absolute measured value RSLT.P2:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Intensity 2 RSLT.I2 Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity 2: Measured value RSLT.I2:MS Unsigned 3 3 -

* Scaling is available when the region shape is not a ring or an arc.

XG-X Comm-US 3-297

List of result data

Edge Pitch Unit

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Angle RSLT.T Available 3 3 -
Angle: Measured value RSLT.T:MS Available 3 3 -
Angle: Absolute measured value RSLT.T:AB Available 3 3 -
Angle: Judgment value RSLT.T:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Center X RSLT.X Available 5 3 X
Center X: Measured value RSLT.X:MS Available 5 3 X
Center X: Absolute measured value RSLT.X:AB Available 5 3 -
Center X: Encoder measured value RSLT.X:EC Available 5 3 X
Center Y RSLT.Y Available 5 3 Y
Center Y: Measured value RSLT.Y:MS Available 5 3 Y
Center Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.Y:AB Available 5 3 -
Center Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.Y:EC Available 5 3 Y
Center XY RSLT.XY Available 5 3 -
Center XY: Measured value RSLT.XY:MS Available 5 3 -
Center XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.XY:AB Available 5 3 -
Center XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.XY:EC Available 5 3 -
Position 1 X RSLT.X1 Available 5 3 X
Position 1 X: Measured value RSLT.X1:MS Available 5 3 X
Position 1 X: Absolute measured value RSLT.X1:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 1 X: Encoder measured value RSLT.X1:EC Available 5 3 X
Position 1 Y RSLT.Y1 Available 5 3 Y
Position 1 Y: Measured value RSLT.Y1:MS Available 5 3 Y
Position 1 Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.Y1:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 1 Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.Y1:EC Available 5 3 Y
Position 1 XY RSLT.XY1 Available 5 3 -
Position 1 XY: Measured value RSLT.XY1:MS Available 5 3 -
Position 1 XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.XY1:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 1 XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.XY1:EC Available 5 3 -
Distance 1 RSLT.P1 Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance 1: Measured value RSLT.P1:MS Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance 1: Absolute measured value RSLT.P1:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Intensity 1 RSLT.I1 Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity 1: Measured value RSLT.I1:MS Unsigned 3 3 -
Position 2 X RSLT.X2 Available 5 3 X
Position 2 X: Measured value RSLT.X2:MS Available 5 3 X
Position 2 X: Absolute measured value RSLT.X2:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 2 X: Encoder measured value RSLT.X2:EC Available 5 3 X
Position 2 Y RSLT.Y2 Available 5 3 Y
Position 2 Y: Measured value RSLT.Y2:MS Available 5 3 Y
Position 2 Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.Y2:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 2 Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.Y2:EC Available 5 3 Y
Position 2 XY RSLT.XY2 Available 5 3 -
Position 2 XY: Measured value RSLT.XY2:MS Available 5 3 -
Position 2 XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.XY2:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 2 XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.XY2:EC Available 5 3 -
Distance 2 RSLT.P2 Unsigned 5 3 L

3-300 XG-X Comm-US

List of result data

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Distance 2: Measured value RSLT.P2:MS Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance 2: Absolute measured value RSLT.P2:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Intensity 2 RSLT.I2 Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity 2: Measured value RSLT.I2:MS Unsigned 3 3 -
Reference position XY for position RSLT.ADJXY Available 5 3 -
adjustment
Reference position X for position adjustment RSLT.ADJX Available 5 3 -
Reference position Y for position adjustment RSLT.ADJY Available 5 3 -
Reference angle for position adjustment RSLT.ADJT Available 3 3 -

XG-X Comm-US 3-301

List of result data

Edge Pairs Unit

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
No. of pairs RSLT.N Unsigned 4 0 -
No. of pairs: Measured value RSLT.N:MS Unsigned 4 0 -
No. of pairs: Judgment value RSLT.N:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Pair width (Max) RSLT.WH Unsigned 5 3 L*
Pair width (Max): Measured value RSLT.WH:MS Unsigned 5 3 L*
Pair width (Max): Absolute measured value RSLT.WH:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Pair width (Max): Judgment value RSLT.WH:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Pair width (Min) RSLT.WL Unsigned 5 3 L*
Pair width (Min): Measured value RSLT.WL:MS Unsigned 5 3 L*
Pair width (Min): Absolute measured value RSLT.WL:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Pair width (Min): Judgment value RSLT.WL:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Pair width (Ave) RSLT.WA Unsigned 5 3 L*
Pair width (Ave): Measured value RSLT.WA:MS Unsigned 5 3 L*
Pair width (Ave): Absolute measured value RSLT.WA:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Pair width RSLT.W[*] Unsigned 5 3 L*
Pair width: Measured value RSLT.W[*]:MS Unsigned 5 3 L*
Pair width: Absolute measured value RSLT.W[*]:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Pair width: Judgment value RSLT.W:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Position 1 X RSLT.X1[*] Available 5 3 X
Position 1 X: Measured value RSLT.X1[*]:MS Available 5 3 X
Position 1 X: Absolute measured value RSLT.X1[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 1 X: Encoder measured value RSLT.X1[*]:EC Available 5 3 X
Position 1 Y RSLT.Y1[*] Available 5 3 Y
Position 1 Y: Measured value RSLT.Y1[*]:MS Available 5 3 Y
Position 1 Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.Y1[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 1 Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.Y1[*]:EC Available 5 3 Y
Position 1 XY RSLT.XY1[*] Available 5 3 -
Position 1 XY: Measured value RSLT.XY1[*]:MS Available 5 3 -
Position 1 XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.XY1[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 1 XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.XY1[*]:EC Available 5 3 -
Angle 1 RSLT.T1[*] Available 3 3 -
Angle 1: Measured value RSLT.T1[*]:MS Available 3 3 -
Angle 1: Absolute measured value RSLT.T1[*]:AB Available 3 3 -
Distance 1 RSLT.P1[*] Unsigned 5 3 L*
Distance 1: Measured value RSLT.P1[*]:MS Unsigned 5 3 L*
Distance 1: Absolute measured value RSLT.P1[*]:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Intensity 1 RSLT.I1[*] Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity 1: Measured value RSLT.I1[*]:MS Unsigned 3 3 -
Position 2 X RSLT.X2[*] Available 5 3 X
Position 2 X: Measured value RSLT.X2[*]:MS Available 5 3 X
Position 2 X: Absolute measured value RSLT.X2[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 2 X: Encoder measured value RSLT.X2[*]:EC Available 5 3 X
Position 2 Y RSLT.Y2[*] Available 5 3 Y
Position 2 Y: Measured value RSLT.Y2[*]:MS Available 5 3 Y
Position 2 Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.Y2[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position 2 Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.Y2[*]:EC Available 5 3 Y

3-302 XG-X Comm-US

List of result data

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

XG-X Comm-US 3-303

RSLT.CLS[19].***

XG-X Comm-US 3-309

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Position Y (Ave): Measured value RSLT.YA:MS Available 5 3 Y
Position Y (Ave): Absolute measured value RSLT.YA:AB Available 5 3 -
Position Y (Ave): Encoder measured value RSLT.YA:EC Available 5 3 Y
Position XY RSLT.XY[*] Available 5 3 -
Position XY: Measured value RSLT.XY[*]:MS Available 5 3 -
Position XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.XY[*]:AB Available 5 3 -
Position XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.XY[*]:EC Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Max) RSLT.XYHI Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Max): Measured value RSLT.XYHI:MS Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Max): Absolute measured value RSLT.XYHI:AB Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Max): Encoder measured value RSLT.XYHI:EC Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Min) RSLT.XYLO Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Min): Measured value RSLT.XYLO:MS Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Min): Absolute measured value RSLT.XYLO:AB Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Min): Encoder measured value RSLT.XYLO:EC Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Ave) RSLT.XYA Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Ave): Measured value RSLT.XYA:MS Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Ave): Absolute measured value RSLT.XYA:AB Available 5 3 -
Position XY (Ave): Encoder measured value RSLT.XYA:EC Available 5 3 -
Angle RSLT.T[*] Available 3 3 -
Angle: Measured value RSLT.T[*]:MS Available 3 3 -
Angle: Absolute measured value RSLT.T[*]:AB Available 3 3 -
Angle (Max) RSLT.THI Available 3 3 -
Angle (Max): Measured value RSLT.THI:MS Available 3 3 -
Angle (Max): Absolute measured value RSLT.THI:AB Available 3 3 -
Angle (Min) RSLT.TLO Available 3 3 -
Angle (Min): Measured value RSLT.TLO:MS Available 3 3 -
Angle (Min): Absolute measured value RSLT.TLO:AB Available 3 3 -
Distance RSLT.P[*] Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance: Measured value RSLT.P[*]:MS Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance: Absolute measured value RSLT.P[*]:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Distance: Judgment value RSLT.P:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Distance (Max) RSLT.PHI Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance (Max): Measured value RSLT.PHI:MS Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance (Max): Absolute measured value RSLT.PHI:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Distance (Max): Judgment value RSLT.PHI:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Distance (Min) RSLT.PLO Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance (Min): Measured value RSLT.PLO:MS Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance (Min): Absolute measured value RSLT.PLO:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Distance (Min): Judgment value RSLT.PLO:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Distance (Ave) RSLT.PA Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance (Ave): Measured value RSLT.PA:MS Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance (Ave): Absolute measured value RSLT.PA:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Radius RSLT.RW[*] Unsigned 5 3 L
Radius: Measured value RSLT.RW[*]:MS Unsigned 5 3 L
Radius: Absolute measured value RSLT.RW[*]:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Radius: Judgment value RSLT.RW:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Radius (Max) RSLT.RWHI Unsigned 5 3 L
Radius (Max): Measured value RSLT.RWHI:MS Unsigned 5 3 L

XG-X Comm-US 3-331

List of result data

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Radius (Max): Absolute measured value RSLT.RWHI:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Radius (Max): Judgment value RSLT.RWHI:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Radius (Min) RSLT.RWLO Unsigned 5 3 L
Radius (Min): Measured value RSLT.RWLO:MS Unsigned 5 3 L
Radius (Min): Absolute measured value RSLT.RWLO:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Radius (Min): Judgment value RSLT.RWLO:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Radius (Ave) RSLT.RWA Unsigned 5 3 L
Radius (Ave): Measured value RSLT.RWA:MS Unsigned 5 3 L
Radius (Ave): Absolute measured value RSLT.RWA:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Intensity RSLT.I[*] Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity: Measured value RSLT.I[*]:MS Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity (Max) RSLT.IHI Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity (Max): Measured value RSLT.IHI:MS Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity (Min) RSLT.ILO Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity (Min): Measured value RSLT.ILO:MS Unsigned 3 3 -
Circle center X RSLT.DCX Available 6 3 X
Circle center X: Measured value RSLT.DCX:MS Available 6 3 X
Circle center X: Absolute measured value RSLT.DCX:AB Available 6 3 -
Circle center X: Encoder measured value RSLT.DCX:EC Available 6 3 X
Circle center Y RSLT.DCY Available 6 3 Y
Circle center Y: Measured value RSLT.DCY:MS Available 6 3 Y
Circle center Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.DCY:AB Available 6 3 -
Circle center Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.DCY:EC Available 6 3 Y
Circle center XY RSLT.DCXY Available 6 3 -
Circle center XY: Measured value RSLT.DCXY:MS Available 6 3 -
Circle center XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.DCXY:AB Available 6 3 -
Circle center XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.DCXY:EC Available 6 3 -
Circle radius RSLT.DCR Unsigned 6 3 L
Circle radius: Measured value RSLT.DCR:MS Unsigned 6 3 L
Circle radius: Absolute measured value RSLT.DCR:AB Unsigned 6 3 -
Circle center XY radius RSLT.DCXYR Unsigned 6 3 L
Circle center XY radius: Measured value RSLT.DCXYR:MS Unsigned 6 3 L
Circle center XY radius: Absolute measured RSLT.DCXYR:AB Unsigned 6 3 -
value
Circle center XY radius: Encoder measured RSLT.DCXYR:EC Unsigned 6 3 -
value
Line angle RSLT.DLT Available 3 3 -
Line angle: Measured value RSLT.DLT:MS Available 3 3 -
Line angle: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLT:AB Available 3 3 -
Line center X RSLT.DLX Available 5 3 X
Line center X: Measured value RSLT.DLX:MS Available 5 3 X
Line center X: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLX:AB Available 5 3 -
Line center X: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLX:EC Available 5 3 X
Line center Y RSLT.DLY Available 5 3 Y
Line center Y: Measured value RSLT.DLY:MS Available 5 3 Y
Line center Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLY:AB Available 5 3 -
Line center Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLY:EC Available 5 3 Y
Line center XY RSLT.DLXY Available 5 3 -
Line center XY: Measured value RSLT.DLXY:MS Available 5 3 -
Line center XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLXY:AB Available 5 3 -

3-332 XG-X Comm-US

List of result data

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Line center Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLY:EC Available 5 3 -
Line X1 RSLT.DLX1 Available 5 3 X
Line X1: Measured value RSLT.DLX1:MS Available 5 3 X
Line X1: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLX1:AB Available 5 3 -
Line X1: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLX1:EC Available 5 3 X
Line Y1 RSLT.DLY1 Available 5 3 Y
Line Y1: Measured value RSLT.DLY1:MS Available 5 3 Y
Line Y1: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLY1:AB Available 5 3 -
Line Y1: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLY1:EC Available 5 3 Y
Line XY1 RSLT.DLXY1 Available 5 3 -
Line XY1: Measured value RSLT.DLXY1:MS Available 5 3 -
Line XY1: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLXY1:AB Available 5 3 -
Line XY1: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLXY1:EC Available 5 3 -
Line X2 RSLT.DLX2 Available 5 3 X
Line X2: Measured value RSLT.DLX2:MS Available 5 3 X
Line X2: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLX2:AB Available 5 3 -
Line X2: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLX2:EC Available 5 3 X
Line Y2 RSLT.DLY2 Available 5 3 Y
Line Y2: Measured value RSLT.DLY2:MS Available 5 3 Y
Line Y2: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLY2:AB Available 5 3 -
Line Y2: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLY2:EC Available 5 3 Y
Line XY2 RSLT.DLXY2 Available 5 3 -
Line XY2: Measured value RSLT.DLXY2:MS Available 5 3 -
Line XY2: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLXY2:AB Available 5 3 -
Line XY2: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLXY2:EC Available 5 3 -
Line ρ RSLT.DLR Available 5 3 -
Line ρ: Measured value RSLT.DLR:MS Available 5 3 -
Line ρ: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLR:AB Available 5 3 -
Line ρ: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLR:EC Available 5 3 -
Line θ RSLT.DLTH Available 5 3 -
Line θ: Measured value RSLT.DLTH:MS Available 5 3 -
Line θ: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLTH:AB Available 5 3 -
Line θ: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLTH:EC Available 5 3 -
Line ρ θ RSLT.DLRTH Available 5 3 -
Line ρ θ: Measured value RSLT.DLRTH:MS Available 5 3 -
Line ρ θ: Absolute measured value RSLT.DLRTH:AB Available 5 3 -
Line ρ θ: Encoder measured value RSLT.DLRTH:EC Available 5 3 -
Maximum segment No. RSLT.MXSGI Unsigned 4 0 -
Maximum segment No.: Measured value RSLT.MXSGI:MS Unsigned 4 0 -
Minimum segment No. RSLT.MNSGI Unsigned 4 0 -
Minimum segment No.: Measured value RSLT.MNSGI:MS Unsigned 4 0 -
Reference position XY for position RSLT.ADJXY Available 5 3 -
adjustment
Reference position X for position adjustment RSLT.ADJX Available 5 3 -
Reference position Y for position adjustment RSLT.ADJY Available 5 3 -
Reference angle for position adjustment RSLT.ADJT Available 3 3 -

XG-X Comm-US 3-333

List of result data

Distance 2 (Min): Measured value RSLT.P2LO:MS Unsigned 5 3 L
Distance 2 (Min): Absolute measured value RSLT.P2LO:AB Unsigned 5 3 -
Intensity 2 RSLT.I2[*] Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity 2: Measured value RSLT.I2[*]:MS Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity 2 (Max) RSLT.I2HI Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity 2 (Max): Measured value RSLT.I2HI:MS Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity 2 (Min) RSLT.I2LO Unsigned 3 3 -
Intensity 2 (Min): Measured value RSLT.I2LO:MS Unsigned 3 3 -
Maximum segment No. RSLT.MXSGI Unsigned 4 0 -
Maximum segment No.: Measured value RSLT.MXSGI:MS Unsigned 4 0 -
Minimum segment No. RSLT.MNSGI Unsigned 4 0 -
Minimum segment No.: Measured value RSLT.MNSGI:MS Unsigned 4 0 -

XG-X Comm-US 3-337

List of result data

Profile Defect Unit

Numerical value format

Defect width RSLT.STW[*] Unsigned 4 0 -

Defect width: Measured value RSLT.STW[*]:MS Unsigned 4 0 -

Defect width (Max) RSLT.STWHI Unsigned 4 0 -

Defect width (Max): Measured value RSLT.STWHI:MS Unsigned 4 0 -

Defect width (Min) RSLT.STWLO Unsigned 4 0 -

Defect width (Min): Measured value RSLT.STWLO:MS Unsigned 4 0 -

Defect position X RSLT.STX[*] Available 5 3 X

Defect position X: Measured value RSLT.STX[*]:MS Available 5 3 X

Defect position X: Absolute measured value RSLT.STX[*]:AB Available 5 3 -

Defect position X: Encoder measured value RSLT.STX[*]:EC Available 5 3 X

Defect position X: Judgment value RSLT.STX:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

Line 2 string RSLT.STR2 - - - -

Line 2 string: Measured value RSLT.STR2:MS - - - -

Line 2 string: Judgment value RSLT.STR2:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

L2 Trimmed String RSLT.STR2Q - - - -

L2 Trimmed String: Measured value RSLT.STR2Q:MS - - - -

Detected character RSLT.RCG_CHR[s] Unsigned 3 0 -

Detected character: Measured value RSLT.RCG_CHR[s]:MS Unsigned 3 0 -

Detected character: Judgment value RSLT.RCG_CHR[s]:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

Line 1 registered string RSLT.JG_STR1 - - - -

Line 1 registered string: Measured value RSLT.JG_STR1:MS - - - -

L1 Trimmed Regist String RSLT.JG_STR1Q - - - -

L1 Trimmed Regist String: Measured value RSLT.JG_STR1Q:MS - - - -

Line 2 registered string RSLT.JG_STR2 - - - -

Line 2 registered string: Measured value RSLT.JG_STR2:MS - - - -

L2 Trimmed Regist String RSLT.JG_STR2Q - - - -

L2 Trimmed Regist String: Measured value RSLT.JG_STR2Q:MS - - - -

Registered character RSLT.JG_CHR[s] - - - -

Registered character: Measured value RSLT.JG_CHR[s]:MS - - - -

1st candidate character RSLT.CHR1[s] Unsigned 3 0 -

1st candidate character: Measured value RSLT.CHR1[s]:MS Unsigned 3 0 -

2nd candidate character RSLT.CHR2[s] Unsigned 3 0 -

2nd candidate character: Measured value RSLT.CHR2[s]:MS Unsigned 3 0 -

Char1 Library Character Variation No. RSLT.CPL1[s] Unsigned 3 0 -

Char1 Library Character Variation No.: RSLT.CPL1[s]:MS Unsigned 3 0 -

Measured value
Char2 Library Character Variation No. RSLT.CPL2[s] Unsigned 3 0 -

Char2 Library Character Variation No.: RSLT.CPL2[s]:MS Unsigned 3 0 -

Measured value
1st candidate correlation value RSLT.CRR1[s] Unsigned 2 0 -

1st candidate correlation value: Measured RSLT.CRR1[s]:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

value
2nd candidate correlation value RSLT.CRR2[s] Unsigned 2 0 -

2nd candidate correlation value: Measured RSLT.CRR2[s]:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

value
Stability RSLT.STBL[s] Unsigned 2 0 -

Stability: Measured value RSLT.STBL[s]:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

Character contrast RSLT.GDEV[s] Unsigned 2 0 -

Character contrast: Measured value RSLT.GDEV[s]:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

No. of lines RSLT.CLN Unsigned 2 0 -

3-362 XG-X Comm-US

List of result data

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

No. of lines: Measured value RSLT.CLN:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

No. of characters in line 1 RSLT.CCN1 Unsigned 2 0 -

No. of characters in line 1: Measured value RSLT.CCN1:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

No. of characters in line 1: Judgment value RSLT.CCN1:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

No. of characters in line 2 RSLT.CCN2 Unsigned 2 0 -

No. of characters in line 2: Measured value RSLT.CCN2:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

No. of characters in line 2: Judgment value RSLT.CCN2:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

Line 1 correlation value (Max) RSLT.L1CRR1_H Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 1 correlation value (Max): Measured RSLT.L1CRR1_H:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

value
Line 1 correlation value (Max): Judgment RSLT.L1CRR1_H:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
value
Line 1 correlation value (Min) RSLT.L1CRR1_L Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 1 correlation value (Min): Measured RSLT.L1CRR1_L:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

value
Line 1 correlation value (Min): Judgment RSLT.L1CRR1_L:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
value
Line 2 correlation value (Max) RSLT.L2CRR1_H Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 2 correlation value (Max): Measured RSLT.L2CRR1_H:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

value
Line 2 correlation value (Max): Judgment RSLT.L2CRR1_H:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
value
Line 2 correlation value (Min) RSLT.L2CRR1_L Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 2 correlation value (Min): Measured RSLT.L2CRR1_L:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

value
Line 2 correlation value (Min): Judgment RSLT.L2CRR1_L:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
value
Line 1 stability (Max) RSLT.L1STBL_H Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 1 stability (Max): Measured value RSLT.L1STBL_H:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 1 stability (Max): Judgment value RSLT.L1STBL_H:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

Line 1 stability (Min) RSLT.L1STBL_L Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 1 stability (Min): Measured value RSLT.L1STBL_L:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 1 stability (Min): Judgment value RSLT.L1STBL_L:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

Line 2 stability (Max) RSLT.L2STBL_H Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 2 stability (Max): Measured value RSLT.L2STBL_H:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 2 stability (Max): Judgment value RSLT.L2STBL_H:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

Line 2 stability (Min) RSLT.L2STBL_L Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 2 stability (Min): Measured value RSLT.L2STBL_L:MS Unsigned 2 0 -

Line 2 stability (Min): Judgment value RSLT.L2STBL_L:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

Block: Point 1 XY RSLT.CCORXY1[s] Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 1 XY: Measured value RSLT.CCORXY1[s]:MS Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 1 XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.CCORXY1[s]:AB Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 1 XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.CCORXY1[s]:EC Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 1 X RSLT.CCORX1[s] Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 1 X: Measured value RSLT.CCORX1[s]:MS Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 1 X: Absolute measured value RSLT.CCORX1[s]:AB Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 1 X: Encoder measured value RSLT.CCORX1[s]:EC Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 1 Y RSLT.CCORY1[s] Available 5 0 Y

Block: Point 1 Y: Measured value RSLT.CCORY1[s]:MS Available 5 0 Y

Block: Point 1 Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.CCORY1[s]:AB Available 5 0 -

XG-X Comm-US 3-363

List of result data

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Block: Point 1 Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.CCORY1[s]:EC Available 5 0 Y

Block: Point 2 XY RSLT.CCORXY2[s] Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 2 XY: Measured value RSLT.CCORXY2[s]:MS Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 2 XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.CCORXY2[s]:AB Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 2 XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.CCORXY2[s]:EC Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 2 X RSLT.CCORX2[s] Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 2 X: Measured value RSLT.CCORX2[s]:MS Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 2 X: Absolute measured value RSLT.CCORX2[s]:AB Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 2 X: Encoder measured value RSLT.CCORX2[s]:EC Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 2 Y RSLT.CCORY2[s] Available 5 0 Y

Block: Point 2 Y: Measured value RSLT.CCORY2[s]:MS Available 5 0 Y

Block: Point 2 Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.CCORY2[s]:AB Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 2 Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.CCORY2[s]:EC Available 5 0 Y

Block: Point 3 XY RSLT.CCORXY3[s] Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 3 XY: Measured value RSLT.CCORXY3[s]:MS Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 3 XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.CCORXY3[s]:AB Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 3 XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.CCORXY3[s]:EC Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 3 X RSLT.CCORX3[s] Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 3 X: Measured value RSLT.CCORX3[s]:MS Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 3 X: Absolute measured value RSLT.CCORX3[s]:AB Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 3 X: Encoder measured value RSLT.CCORX3[s]:EC Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 3 Y RSLT.CCORY3[s] Available 5 0 Y

Block: Point 3 Y: Measured value RSLT.CCORY3[s]:MS Available 5 0 Y

Block: Point 3 Y: Absolute measured value RSLT.CCORY3[s]:AB Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 3 Y: Encoder measured value RSLT.CCORY3[s]:EC Available 5 0 Y

Block: Point 4 XY RSLT.CCORXY4[s] Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 4 XY: Measured value RSLT.CCORXY4[s]:MS Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 4 XY: Absolute measured value RSLT.CCORXY4[s]:AB Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 4 XY: Encoder measured value RSLT.CCORXY4[s]:EC Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 4 X RSLT.CCORX4[s] Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 4 X: Measured value RSLT.CCORX4[s]:MS Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 4 X: Absolute measured value RSLT.CCORX4[s]:AB Available 5 0 -

Block: Point 4 X: Encoder measured value RSLT.CCORX4[s]:EC Available 5 0 X

Block: Point 4 Y RSLT.CCORY4[s] Available 5 0 Y

Block: Point 4 Y: Measured value RSLT.CCORY4[s]:MS Available 5 0 Y

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Profile RSLT.PMSR[1].***
measurement
result for
measurement 01
···

···
Profile RSLT.PMSR[31].***
measurement
result for
measurement 31

XG-X Comm-US 3-409

XG-X Comm-US 3-415

List of result data

Numerical value format

List of result data

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Judgment Result by Target RSLT.LJG[*] Unsigned 1 0 -
XY Position for Position Adjustment RSLT.ADJXY Signed 5 3 -
Reference
X Position for Position Adjustment Reference RSLT.ADJX Signed 5 3 -
Y Position for Position Adjustment Reference RSLT.ADJY Signed 5 3 -
Angle for Position Adjustment Reference RSLT.ADJT Signed 3 3 -

Branch Unit

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Reference value RSLT.EVAL Available 9 3 -
Processed branch RSLT.BRNO Unsigned 2 0 -

Join Unit
There are no result data specific to the Join unit.

Loop Function Unit

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Number of loops processed RSLT.TMS Unsigned 7 0 -

Loop End Unit

There are no result data specific to the Loop End unit.

Break Unit
There are no result data specific to the Break unit.

Start Unit
There are no result data specific to the Start unit.

End Unit
There are no result data specific to the End unit.

3-430 XG-X Comm-US

List of result data

Calculation Unit

Numerical value format

Numerical value format Scaling

target
Result item Name Sign No. of No. of
integer decimal
digits places
Inspection Region 0 (free curve-related RSLT.FLEX[0].BFY[s]:MS Available 5 3 Y
result): Free Curve Model Individual Y:
Measured value
Inspection Region 0 (free curve-related RSLT.FLEX[0].BFY[s]:AB Available 5 3 -
result): Free Curve Model Individual Y:
Absolute measured value
Inspection Region 0 (free curve-related RSLT.FLEX[0].BFY[s]:EC Available 5 3 Y
result): Free Curve Model Individual Y:
Encoder pulse count
Inspection Region 1 RSLT.FLEX[1].***
···

···

Inspection Region 127 RSLT.FLEX[127].***

Defect Extraction Operation Unit

No specific result data is provided for the defect extraction operation unit.

Image Stitching Unit

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Maximum Count RSLT.MXN Unsigned 4 0 -
Count RSLT.N Unsigned 4 0 -
Count: Measured Value RSLT.N:MS Unsigned 4 0 -
X Shift from Master RSLT.RB_X[s] Available 4 3 -
X Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_X[s]:MS Available 4 3 -
X Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_X:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Y Shift from Master RSLT.RB_Y[s] Available 4 3 -
Y Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_Y[s]:MS Available 4 3 -
Y Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_Y:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Angle Shift from Master RSLT.RB_T[s] Available 3 1 -
Angle Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_T[s]:MS Available 3 1 -
Angle Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_T:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
XY Shift from Master RSLT.RB_XY[s] Available 4 3 -
XY Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XY[s]:MS Available 4 3 -
XY/Angle Shift from Master RSLT.RB_XYT[s] Available 4 3 -
XY/Angle Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XYT[s]:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate X RSLT.RB_XAB[s] Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate X: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XAB[s]:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Y RSLT.RB_YAB[s] Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Y: Measured Value RSLT.RB_YAB[s]:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Z RSLT.RB_ZAB[s] Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Z: Measured Value RSLT.RB_ZAB[s]:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Rx RSLT.RB_RXAB[s] Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Rx: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RXAB[s]:MS Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Ry RSLT.RB_RYAB[s] Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Ry: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RYAB[s]:MS Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Rz RSLT.RB_RZAB[s] Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Rz: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RZAB[s]:MS Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinates XYZRz RSLT.RB_XYZRZAB[s] Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinates XYZRz: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XYZRZAB[s]:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinates XYZRxRyRz RSLT.RB_XYZRXRYRZAB[s] Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinates XYZRxRyRz: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XYZRXRYRZAB[s]:MS Available 4 3 -
Max. X Shift from Master RSLT.RB_XMX Available 4 3 -
Max. X Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XMX:MS Available 4 3 -
Max. X Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_XMX:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Min. X Shift from Master RSLT.RB_XMN Available 4 3 -
Min. X Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XMN:MS Available 4 3 -
Min. X Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_XMN:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Max. Y Shift from Master RSLT.RB_YMX Available 4 3 -
Max. Y Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_YMX:MS Available 4 3 -
Max. Y Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_YMX:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Min. Y Shift from Master RSLT.RB_YMN Available 4 3 -
Min. Y Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_YMN:MS Available 4 3 -
Min. Y Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_YMN:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Max. Angle Shift from Master RSLT.RB_TMX Available 3 1 -
Max. Angle Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_TMX:MS Available 3 1 -
Max. Angle Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_TMX:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Min. Angle Shift from Master RSLT.RB_TMN Available 3 1 -

3-438 XG-X Comm-US

List of result data

Numerical value format

Result item Name Sign No. of No. of Applicable
integer decimal scaling
digits places

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Min. Angle Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_TMN:MS Available 3 1 -
Min. Angle Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_TMN:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Max. Robot Coordinate X RSLT.RB_XABMX Available 4 3 -
Max. Robot Coordinate X: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XABMX:MS Available 4 3 -
Min. Robot Coordinate X RSLT.RB_XABMN Available 4 3 -
Min. Robot Coordinate X: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XABMN:MS Available 4 3 -
Max. Robot Coordinate Y RSLT.RB_YABMX Available 4 3 -
Max. Robot Coordinate Y: Measured Value RSLT.RB_YABMX:MS Available 4 3 -
Min. Robot Coordinate Y RSLT.RB_YABMN Available 4 3 -
Min. Robot Coordinate Y: Measured Value RSLT.RB_YABMN:MS Available 4 3 -
Max. Robot Coordinate Z RSLT.RB_ZABMX Available 4 3 -
Max. Robot Coordinate Z: Measured Value RSLT.RB_ZABMX:MS Available 4 3 -
Min. Robot Coordinate Z RSLT.RB_ZABMN Available 4 3 -
Min. Robot Coordinate Z: Measured Value RSLT.RB_ZABMN:MS Available 4 3 -
Max. Robot Coordinate Rx RSLT.RB_RXABMX Available 3 1 -
Max. Robot Coordinate Rx: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RXABMX:MS Available 3 1 -
Min. Robot Coordinate Rx RSLT.RB_RXABMN Available 3 1 -
Min. Robot Coordinate Rx: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RXABMN:MS Available 3 1 -
Max. Robot Coordinate Ry RSLT.RB_RYABMX Available 3 1 -
Max. Robot Coordinate Ry: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RYABMX:MS Available 3 1 -
Min. Robot Coordinate Ry RSLT.RB_RYABMN Available 3 1 -
Min. Robot Coordinate Ry: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RYABMN:MS Available 3 1 -
Max. Robot Coordinate Rz RSLT.RB_RZABMX Available 3 1 -
Max. Robot Coordinate Rz: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RZABMX:MS Available 3 1 -
Min. Robot Coordinate Rz RSLT.RB_RZABMN Available 3 1 -
Min. Robot Coordinate Rz: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RZABMN:MS Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate X (Registered Value) RSLT.RBRP_X Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate X (Registered Value): Measured Value RSLT.RBRP_X:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Y (Registered Value) RSLT.RBRP_Y Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Y (Registered Value): Measured Value RSLT.RBRP_Y:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Z (Registered Value) RSLT.RBRP_Z Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Z (Registered Value): Measured Value RSLT.RBRP_Z:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Rx (Registered Value) RSLT.RBRP_RX Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Rx (Registered Value): Measured Value RSLT.RBRP_RX:MS Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Ry (Registered Value) RSLT.RBRP_RY Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Ry (Registered Value): Measured Value RSLT.RBRP_RY:MS Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Rz (Registered Value) RSLT.RBRP_RZ Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Rz (Registered Value): Measured Value RSLT.RBRP_RZ:MS Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate XYZRz (Registered Value) RSLT.RBRP_XYZRZ Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate XYZRz (Registered Value): Measured Value RSLT.RBRP_XYZRZ:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate XYZRxRyRz( (Registered Value) RSLT.RBRP_XYZRXRYRZ Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate XYZRxRyRz( (Registered Value): Measured Value RSLT.RBRP_XYZRXRYRZ:MS Available 4 3 -
Reference Detection Position X RSLT.RBR_RGX Available 4 3 -
Reference Detection Position X : Measured Value RSLT.RBR_RGX:MS Available 4 3 -
Reference Detection Position Y RSLT.RBR_RGY Available 4 3 -
Reference Detection Position Y : Measured Value RSLT.RBR_RGY:MS Available 4 3 -
Reference Detection Position Rz RSLT.RBR_RGT Available 3 1 -
Reference Detection Position Rz : Measured Value RSLT.RBR_RGT:MS Available 3 1 -
Calibration Information RSLT.CALIB[s] Available 10 6 -
Calibration Information : Measured Val. RSLT.CALIB[s]:MS Available 10 6 -

XG-X Comm-US 3-439

List of result data

Robot Coordinate Operation Unit

Numerical value format

Applica
Result item Name Sign No. of No. of ble
integer decimal scaling
digits places
X Shift from Master RSLT.RB_X Available 4 3 -
X Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_X:MS Available 4 3 -
X Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_X:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
Y Shift from Master RSLT.RB_Y Available 4 3 -
Y Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_Y:MS Available 4 3 -
Y Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_Y:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
XY Shift from Master RSLT.RB_XY Available 4 3 -
XY Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XY:MS Available 4 3 -
Angle Shift from Master RSLT.RB_T Available 3 1 -
Angle Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_T:MS Available 3 1 -
Angle Shift from Master: Judgment Value RSLT.RB_T:JG Unsigned 1 0 -
XY/Angle Shift from Master RSLT.RB_XYT Available 4 3 -
XY/Angle Shift from Master: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XYT:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate X RSLT.RB_XAB Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate X: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XAB:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Y RSLT.RB_YAB Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Y: Measured Value RSLT.RB_YAB:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Z RSLT.RB_ZAB Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Z: Measured Value RSLT.RB_ZAB:MS Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinate Rx RSLT.RB_RXAB Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Rx: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RXAB:MS Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Ry RSLT.RB_RYAB Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Ry: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RYAB:MS Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Rz RSLT.RB_RZAB Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinate Rz: Measured Value RSLT.RB_RZAB:MS Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinates XYZRz RSLT.RB_XYZRZAB Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinates XYZRz: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XYZRZAB:MS Available 3 1 -
Robot Coordinates XYZRxRyRz RSLT.RB_XYZRXRYRZAB Available 4 3 -
Robot Coordinates XYZRxRyRz: Measured Value RSLT.RB_XYZRXRYRZAB:MS Available 3 1 -

3-440 XG-X Comm-US

List of result data

Position Adjustment Unit

Numerical value format

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

Result item Name Sign No. of No. of Applicable
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Offset X RSLT.OFX Available 5 3 -
Offset Y RSLT.OFY Available 5 3 -
Rotation center X RSLT.RCX Available 5 3 -
Rotation center Y RSLT.RCY Available 5 3 -
Rotation angle RSLT.RCT Available 3 3 -
Base position 1 X RSLT.RX1 Available 5 3 -
Base position 1 Y RSLT.RY1 Available 5 3 -
Base position 1 angle RSLT.RT1 Available 3 3 -
Base position 2 X RSLT.RX2 Available 5 3 -
Base position 2 Y RSLT.RY2 Available 5 3 -

Pause Unit
There are no result data specific to the Pause unit.

Timer Start Unit

There are no result data specific to the Timer unit.

Timer End Unit

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Status RSLT.STAT Unsigned 1 0 -

Terminal I/O Delay Unit

Data Output Unit

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name scaling
integer decimal
digits places
Remaining output buffer RSLT.MBS Unsigned 3 0 -
Output buffer overflow RSLT.BFFL Unsigned 1 0 -
Data transferred RSLT.HPOD Unsigned 1 0 -

Image Output Unit

Numerical value format

Command Execution Unit

Numerical value format

Sign No. of No. of Applicable
Result item Name
integer decimal scaling
digits places
Command response RSLT.CMD:JG Unsigned 1 0 -

3-442 XG-X Comm-US

Error Code

UEID value Message (shown in execution log and unit listing)

Unit Error Codes (UEIDs) 34016 Failed to generate a pattern region.
34018 An error is found in the scale factor reference setting.
This section shows the list of error codes (UEIDs) which

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

34020 A range error occurred in the scale factor.
are output as result data for a unit which has encountered
34022 A reference error was found. Use the check function
an execution error.
or see the referenced status for more details.
In addition to these error codes, calculation units output
35002 A range error occurred in the unit setting.
calculation error codes (ERRCs) for more detailed causes
36001 Calculation failed because the current image is too
of errors. Refer to "Calculation Error Codes (ERRCs)" (Page complex.
3-444) for more details. 36002 The inspection region extends off the image region.
36003 Calculation failed because the current image is too
UEID value Message (shown in execution log and unit listing)
complex.
0 (Blank due to successful processing of the unit)
36004 Circle/line detection failed.
12010 An index specification error occurred in the image
36005 (Indicates a calculation unit execution error. A
setting.
message corresponding to each calculation error
13002 A range error occurred in the region setting.
code (ERRC) will be displayed.)
13010 An index specification error occurred in the region
36006 A timeout error occurred.
setting.
36007 Failed to obtain a position adjustment value.
13025 The inspection region has exceeded the measurable
36011 An index specification error occurred.
range.
36013 An error occurred during unit execution.
14002 A range error occurred in the search region setting.
36014 No library data is registered.
14010 An index specification error occurred in the search
36015 Valid segment not found.
region setting.
36016 Blob filter application failed because the current
15002 A range error occurred in the pattern region setting.
image for source image 1 is too complex.
16002 A setting range error occurred in the color extraction
setting. 36017 Blob filter application failed because the current
image for source image 2 is too complex.
17002 A range error occurred in the image enhancement
36018 Failed to detect a base model line.
setting.
18010 An index specification error occurred in the image 36019 Reference file for the PlugIn unit does not exist.
setting of source image 1. 36023 Teaching has not been executed or is invalid.
19002 A range error occurred in the color extraction setting 36024 Conversion failed because the trapezoid correction
of source image 1. shape for source image 1 is invalid.
20002 A range error occurred in the image enhancement of 36025 Conversion failed because the trapezoid correction
source image 1. shape for source image 2 is invalid.
21002 A range error occurred in the conversion setting of 36026 Image enhancement using the blob filter faild
source image 1. because the current image is too complex.
22008 Could not open a menu specified in the condition 36030 Calculation failed because the inspection region is
setting. too large.
23010 An index specification error occurred in the image 36031 An index specification error occurred in Resultant
setting of source image 2. Image of the Image settings.
24002 A range error occurred in the color extraction setting 36032 Run time memory can not be allocated.
of source image 2. 36033 Index of image variables of source 3 is beyond the range.
25002 A range error occurred in the image enhancement of 36034 Index of image variables of source 4 is beyond the range.
source image 2. 36035 Height extraction/height binarization failed.
26002 A range error occurred in the conversion setting of 36036 There is 1 or more regions that cannot be measured
source image 2. in Height Measurement.
27010 An index specification error occurred in the image 36037 Failed to calculate the Zero Plane.
capture setting. 36038 Failed to track the moving object.
31010 An index specification error occurred in the result 36039 The setting of the moving object tracking region is
image setting. invalid.
34001 An invalid setting is found. 36040 Best fit plane detection failed.
34002 A range error occurred. 36042 The result for detected position could not be
34004 Insufficient processing memory obtained.
34012 Failed to replay archive. 36043 Calculation failed.
34014 Failed to generate a region. 36050 Detection failed.

XG-X Comm-US 3-443

Error Code

UEID value Message (shown in execution log and unit listing)

36051 Calculation failed.
Calculation Error Codes (ERRCs)
36052 The result of the reference could not be obtained.
This section shows a list of calculation error codes
36053 The scale factor is invalid.
(ERRCs) output as detailed error information for a
36054 A plane perpendicular to the Z plane can not be
calculation unit when the execution of the calculation unit
depicted.
fails and "36005 (Invalid calculation was executed.)" is
36055 Input 1 and input 2 are too close.
stored in UEID.
36056 Input 1 and input 2 are parallel.
36057 Input 1 and input 2 are perpendicular.
When an execution error for a calculation unit occurs, the
36058 Best fit line/plane detection failed. location and type of error can be determined by checking
36059 Generation of Profile failed. the calculation error code and referencing the error line
36060 Reference line detection failed. output (ERRL) which indicates the line containing the error.
36061 None of the set measurement items could be
ERRC value Description
measured.
1000 The divisor is zero (0).
36062 Some parameters in defect extraction settings are
beyond the range. 1002 A value exceeding 64-bit floating-point decimal
36063 Not a single intersection was found. number was detected during calculation.

36064 Image region generation failed. 2000 Failed to obtain a value of a scalar type local
variable.
36065 The setting of the moving object tracking region for
MultiSpectrum Mode is invalid. 2001 Failed to obtain a value of a position type local
variable.
36066 Could not find a primary candidate.
2002 Failed to obtain a value of a line type local variable.
36067 Failed to track the moving object for MultiSpectrum
Mode. 2003 Failed to obtain a value of a circle type local
36068 Tilt correction failed. variable.
36069 Texture Cut failed because the image is complex. 2004 Failed to obtain a value of a 3D position type local
variable.
36070 The convex hull operation in the preprocessing failed
because the current image is too complex. 2005 Failed to obtain a value of a plane type local
variable.
36071 Fill hole suppression failed because the image is too
complex. 2010 Failed to obtain a value of a scalar type global
variable.
36072 With the current X-direction pixels, Segment Size=1
cannot be used in the Image Extraction (3D) filter. 2011 Failed to obtain a value of a position type global
variable.
36073 With the current image size, Level=16 or more
2012 Failed to obtain a value of a line type global
cannot be used in the Invalid Pixel Suppression filter.
variable.
36074 With the current image size, the Outline Interpolation
2013 Failed to obtain a value of a circle type global
Suppression cannot be turned ON in the Invalid Pixel
variable.
Suppression filter.
2014 Failed to obtain a value of a 3D position type global
36075 With the current image size, Segment Size=1 cannot
variable.
be used in the Image Extraction (3D) filter.
2015 Failed to obtain a value of a plane type global
38002 Some parameters in image enhancement settings in
variable.
source 3 are beyond the range.
2020 Failed to obtain a value of a system variable.

2030 Failed to obtain a value of a scalar type setting

parameter/result data.
2031 Failed to obtain a value of a position type setting
parameter/result data.
2032 Failed to obtain a value of a line type setting
parameter/result data.
2033 Failed to obtain a value of a circle type setting
parameter/result data.
2034 Failed to obtain a value of a 3D position type
setting parameter/result data.
2035 Failed to obtain a value of a plane type setting
parameter/result data.
2100 Failed to obtain a value of a scalar type local array
variable.

3-444 XG-X Comm-US

Error Code

ERRC value Description ERRC value Description

2101 Failed to obtain a value of a position type local 3110 Failed to set a value of a scalar type global array
array variable. variable.
2102 Failed to obtain a value of a line type local array 3111 Failed to set a value of a position type global array

List of Setting Parameters / Result Data / Error Codes

variable. variable.
2103 Failed to obtain a value of a circle type local array 3112 Failed to set a value of a line type global array
variable. variable.
2104 Failed to obtain a value of a 3D position type local 3113 Failed to set a value of a circle type global array
array variable. variable.
2105 Failed to obtain a value of a plane type local array 3114 Failed to set a value of a 3D position type global
variable. array variable.
2110 Failed to obtain a value of a scalar type global array 3115 Failed to set a value of a plane type global array
variable. variable.
2111 Failed to obtain a value of a position type global 4000 Unexpected termination during execution of the
array variable. Max function
2112 Failed to obtain a value of a line type global array 4001 Unexpected termination during execution of the
variable. Min function
2113 Failed to obtain a value of a circle type global array 4002 Unexpected termination during execution of the
variable. Ave function
2114 Failed to obtain a value of a 3D position type global 4003 Unexpected termination during execution of the
array variable. Abs function
2115 Failed to obtain a value of a plane type global array 4004 Unexpected termination during execution of the
variable. Sqr function
2120 Failed to obtain a value of a scalar type system 4005 Unexpected termination during execution of the
array variable. Sqrt function
3000 Failed to set a value of a scalar type local variable. 4006 Unexpected termination during execution of the
AveR function
3001 Failed to set a value of a position type local
4007 Unexpected termination during execution of the Int
variable.
function
3002 Failed to set a value of a line type local variable.
4008 Unexpected termination during execution of the
3003 Failed to set a value of a circle type local variable. Floor function
4009 Unexpected termination during execution of the
3004 Failed to set a value of a 3D position type local
variable. Round function
4010 Unexpected termination during execution of the
3005 Failed to set a value of a plane type local variable.
Ceil function
3010 Failed to set a value of a scalar type global 4011 Unexpected termination during execution of the
variable. MaxN function
3011 Failed to set a value of a position type global 4012 Unexpected termination during execution of the
variable. MinN function
3012 Failed to set a value of a line type global variable. 4013 Unexpected termination during execution of the
3013 Failed to set a value of a circle type global variable. Max2 function
4014 Unexpected termination during execution of the
3014 Failed to set a value of a 3D position type global
Min2 function
variable.
4015 Unexpected termination during execution of the
3015 Failed to set a value of a plane type global variable. Ave2 function
3100 Failed to set a value of a scalar type local array 4016 Unexpected termination during execution of the
variable. AveR2 function
3101 Failed to set a value of a position type local array 4017 Unexpected termination during execution of the
variable. MaxN2 function
3102 Failed to set a value of a line type local array 4018 Unexpected termination during execution of the
variable. MinN2 function
3103 Failed to set a value of a circle type local array 4019 Unexpected termination during execution of the
variable. Log function
3104 Failed to set a value of a 3D position type local 4020 Unexpected termination during execution of the
array variable. Sum function
3105 Failed to set a value of a plane type local array 4021 Unexpected termination during execution of the
variable. Sort function

XG-X Comm-US 3-445

Error Code

ERRC value Description ERRC value Description

4022 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4050 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Exp function ConvCrd function
4023 Unexpected termination during execution of the Ln 4051 Unexpected termination during execution of the
function MidXY function
4024 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4052 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Cos function VMidLine function
4025 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4053 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Acos function Circle3 function
4026 Unexpected termination during execution of the Sin 4054 Unexpected termination during execution of the
function CircleLs function
4027 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4055 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Asin function I2Circle function
4028 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4056 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Tan function CircleTangent function
4029 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4057 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Atan function ILineCircle function
4030 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4058 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Atan2 function LineLs function
4031 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4059 Unexpected termination during execution of the
AngC function MidLine function
4032 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4060 Unexpected termination during execution of the
AngW function ConvCrd2 function
4033 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4061 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Rad function Rotate function
4034 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4062 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Deg function Atoi function
4035 Unexpected termination during execution of the Pi 4063 Unexpected termination during execution of the
function ShiftYear function
4036 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4064 Unexpected termination during execution of the
B_And function ShiftMonth function
4037 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4065 Unexpected termination during execution of the
B_Or function ShiftDay function
4038 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4066 Unexpected termination during execution of the
B_Xor function AsPoint function
4039 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4067 Unexpected termination during execution of the
B_Not function AsLine function
4040 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4068 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Bind function AsCircle function
4041 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4069 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Dist function ConvPixToWld function
4042 Unexpected termination during execution of the 4070 Unexpected termination during execution of the
Line function

Iec Work
No ratings yet
Iec Work
1 page
ZP11 MCE3 SA Circuit Diagram-20180108
No ratings yet
ZP11 MCE3 SA Circuit Diagram-20180108
138 pages
Israel-Palestine Peace Talks Analysis
No ratings yet
Israel-Palestine Peace Talks Analysis
8 pages
bq40z80EVM Li-Ion Battery Pack Manager Evaluation: User's Guide
No ratings yet
bq40z80EVM Li-Ion Battery Pack Manager Evaluation: User's Guide
33 pages
TBS TANGO 2 FCC Manual
No ratings yet
TBS TANGO 2 FCC Manual
47 pages
Indian Institute of Technology Kharagpur
No ratings yet
Indian Institute of Technology Kharagpur
14 pages
CERAN AD PLUS Safety Data Sheet
No ratings yet
CERAN AD PLUS Safety Data Sheet
13 pages
Online Safety Tips for Cyber Crimes
No ratings yet
Online Safety Tips for Cyber Crimes
47 pages
EM 500 Owners Manual
No ratings yet
EM 500 Owners Manual
64 pages
Gpsmap 78 Om en
No ratings yet
Gpsmap 78 Om en
55 pages
It - Unit 15 - Assignment 2 - Template
No ratings yet
It - Unit 15 - Assignment 2 - Template
9 pages
09.11.21 Test 1 Starter Module
No ratings yet
09.11.21 Test 1 Starter Module
5 pages
Fuji Differential
No ratings yet
Fuji Differential
40 pages
Numeros de Parte Frecuentes
No ratings yet
Numeros de Parte Frecuentes
5 pages
Radiographer Medical Abbreviations
No ratings yet
Radiographer Medical Abbreviations
24 pages
Solis Manual S5-GR3P (15-20) K DW EUR V1.1 (20221024)
No ratings yet
Solis Manual S5-GR3P (15-20) K DW EUR V1.1 (20221024)
28 pages
GPR Equipments
No ratings yet
GPR Equipments
11 pages
SM-T819Y Manual Service
No ratings yet
SM-T819Y Manual Service
33 pages
Apple Watch S7 Options
No ratings yet
Apple Watch S7 Options
2 pages
Interchange Intro Units 1-8
No ratings yet
Interchange Intro Units 1-8
56 pages
Manual LK 32
No ratings yet
Manual LK 32
11 pages
Tinnitus Habituation Guide
100% (1)
Tinnitus Habituation Guide
1 page
Sony wmgx51
No ratings yet
Sony wmgx51
36 pages
Yamaha Motif6 Motif7 Motif8
No ratings yet
Yamaha Motif6 Motif7 Motif8
147 pages
Y913 33 B22R 0.... 10 Bar
No ratings yet
Y913 33 B22R 0.... 10 Bar
4 pages
5th Year Project Voice Detection
No ratings yet
5th Year Project Voice Detection
52 pages
Instalación 3 Fases
No ratings yet
Instalación 3 Fases
30 pages
Simulating Pareidolia of Faces For Architectural I
No ratings yet
Simulating Pareidolia of Faces For Architectural I
18 pages
Bangladesh Garment Worker Safety
No ratings yet
Bangladesh Garment Worker Safety
13 pages
BMS Mini 3 for Electric Vehicles
No ratings yet
BMS Mini 3 for Electric Vehicles
6 pages
News Writing Fundamentals
100% (1)
News Writing Fundamentals
3 pages
Nakamichi Dragon CT Service Manual
No ratings yet
Nakamichi Dragon CT Service Manual
34 pages
MP-II Unit No-03 CNC Technology (NOTES)
No ratings yet
MP-II Unit No-03 CNC Technology (NOTES)
92 pages
Steinco Catalog2
No ratings yet
Steinco Catalog2
113 pages
Bombas Vacío Tempest SL004
100% (1)
Bombas Vacío Tempest SL004
1 page
DV-10 Service Manual V.1-8-30-05
No ratings yet
DV-10 Service Manual V.1-8-30-05
90 pages
OIF Micro ITLA 01.1
No ratings yet
OIF Micro ITLA 01.1
19 pages
Bedienungsanleitung Strong SRT 7505
No ratings yet
Bedienungsanleitung Strong SRT 7505
37 pages
FPM-300 MK II Transceiver Manual
No ratings yet
FPM-300 MK II Transceiver Manual
62 pages
K 720 *MX Spare Parts List
No ratings yet
K 720 *MX Spare Parts List
50 pages
MODBUS Protocol User Manual: 30121-83 Rev. 1.0 September, 2015
No ratings yet
MODBUS Protocol User Manual: 30121-83 Rev. 1.0 September, 2015
24 pages
Oral Medicine & Radiology
No ratings yet
Oral Medicine & Radiology
28 pages
ABS URM - Cleaning & Sterilization - M1116870 - 0309
No ratings yet
ABS URM - Cleaning & Sterilization - M1116870 - 0309
66 pages
Cambridge IGCSE: Physics 0625/22
No ratings yet
Cambridge IGCSE: Physics 0625/22
20 pages
Worksafe Bulletin: Carbon Monoxide Exposure During Film Shoots
No ratings yet
Worksafe Bulletin: Carbon Monoxide Exposure During Film Shoots
3 pages
Table Text Service Array
No ratings yet
Table Text Service Array
616 pages
JLR Production Purchasing GT&Cs 01.02.2013
No ratings yet
JLR Production Purchasing GT&Cs 01.02.2013
35 pages
HW-SM9C4DUL-XRotor Pro X9 MANUAL
No ratings yet
HW-SM9C4DUL-XRotor Pro X9 MANUAL
1 page
1 s2.0 S0584854721001749 Main PDF
No ratings yet
1 s2.0 S0584854721001749 Main PDF
6 pages
Food Act, B.E. 2522 (1979) - Thailand Food Act - TFDA - Tha64932
No ratings yet
Food Act, B.E. 2522 (1979) - Thailand Food Act - TFDA - Tha64932
22 pages
Similola
No ratings yet
Similola
32 pages
Apekah
0% (1)
Apekah
3 pages
C6 Kornorge Electric Bike User Manual
No ratings yet
C6 Kornorge Electric Bike User Manual
14 pages
CPAA Cable Installation Manual-DJ MAZDA 2 + DK CX-3
No ratings yet
CPAA Cable Installation Manual-DJ MAZDA 2 + DK CX-3
14 pages
Cgma Programs
No ratings yet
Cgma Programs
22 pages
Smaragdinus Hoge, 1966 in The Western Brazilian Amazon
No ratings yet
Smaragdinus Hoge, 1966 in The Western Brazilian Amazon
14 pages
Payment Methods Evolution Guide
No ratings yet
Payment Methods Evolution Guide
22 pages
XG-X Series: Communications Control Manual
No ratings yet
XG-X Series: Communications Control Manual
928 pages
AS 119341 XG-X 3DVision SG A22GB WW GB 2033 2
No ratings yet
AS 119341 XG-X 3DVision SG A22GB WW GB 2033 2
110 pages
AS 119345 XG-X 3DVision SG A23GB WW GB 2033 2
No ratings yet
AS 119345 XG-X 3DVision SG A23GB WW GB 2033 2
104 pages
Precision Robotics for Industry
No ratings yet
Precision Robotics for Industry
2 pages
81346-2 Tables
100% (1)
81346-2 Tables
43 pages
SR-20iA: Max. Load Capacity at Wrist: 20 KG Max. Reach: 1100 MM
No ratings yet
SR-20iA: Max. Load Capacity at Wrist: 20 KG Max. Reach: 1100 MM
1 page
LC 3843 National Park Quarter Checklist
No ratings yet
LC 3843 National Park Quarter Checklist
1 page
P3U Order Form
No ratings yet
P3U Order Form
3 pages
Studio
No ratings yet
Studio
65 pages
Let's Call Quiet Quitting What It Often Is Calibrated Contributing
No ratings yet
Let's Call Quiet Quitting What It Often Is Calibrated Contributing
5 pages
Core Java Test Paper
No ratings yet
Core Java Test Paper
2 pages
Research Book
No ratings yet
Research Book
28 pages
Management Consulting List
No ratings yet
Management Consulting List
24 pages
Getting Started For non-US Investors - Bogleheads
No ratings yet
Getting Started For non-US Investors - Bogleheads
2 pages
The Lean Lego Game: Francisco Trindade Danilo Sato
100% (1)
The Lean Lego Game: Francisco Trindade Danilo Sato
53 pages
MD Practicals
No ratings yet
MD Practicals
36 pages
AIA - LA Welcomes Rob Hollman As CALA Campaign Director
No ratings yet
AIA - LA Welcomes Rob Hollman As CALA Campaign Director
2 pages
Anaesthetic and Respiratory Equipment - Laryngoscopes For Tracheal Intubation
No ratings yet
Anaesthetic and Respiratory Equipment - Laryngoscopes For Tracheal Intubation
2 pages
Consti Consolidated List of Cases
No ratings yet
Consti Consolidated List of Cases
9 pages
Relieving of Officers
No ratings yet
Relieving of Officers
1 page
Grade 11 Oral Communication Lesson Plan
No ratings yet
Grade 11 Oral Communication Lesson Plan
4 pages
G. PRA Whistleblowing Policy
No ratings yet
G. PRA Whistleblowing Policy
7 pages
BI Apps 11.1.1.7.1 Migrating
No ratings yet
BI Apps 11.1.1.7.1 Migrating
24 pages
Release Waiver Quitclaim Undertaking Blank
No ratings yet
Release Waiver Quitclaim Undertaking Blank
1 page
Replace Coolant Filter
No ratings yet
Replace Coolant Filter
2 pages
Rana Kashif CV
No ratings yet
Rana Kashif CV
3 pages
Reduce DC Motor Energy Losses
No ratings yet
Reduce DC Motor Energy Losses
50 pages
Thesis Statement For Wearing Seat Belts
100% (3)
Thesis Statement For Wearing Seat Belts
5 pages
Unit - 4 Human Resource Management
No ratings yet
Unit - 4 Human Resource Management
40 pages
Discounted Cash Flow Valuation
100% (1)
Discounted Cash Flow Valuation
26 pages
Legal and Ethical Issues
No ratings yet
Legal and Ethical Issues
10 pages
4 - ITU Standards and Network Deployment Guidelines
100% (5)
4 - ITU Standards and Network Deployment Guidelines
87 pages
Bukidnon State University: EA210/214. Curriculum Development and Assessment
No ratings yet
Bukidnon State University: EA210/214. Curriculum Development and Assessment
8 pages
E-Sabong Regulation Guide
No ratings yet
E-Sabong Regulation Guide
15 pages
General Studies Test 4717 - Vision IAS
No ratings yet
General Studies Test 4717 - Vision IAS
19 pages
Accounting Standards AS-10, AS-26
No ratings yet
Accounting Standards AS-10, AS-26
25 pages